Magellan Ccs Navigator

User's Guide
Magellan CCS Navigator

The Complete Documentation Set
Version 5.4
July 2015
Magellan CCS Navigator The Complete Documentation Set User's Guide
Publication Information
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp.
Proprietary and Confidential.
Imagine Communications considers this document and its contents to be proprietary and confidential.
Except for making a reasonable number of copies for your own internal use, you may not reproduce this
publication, or any part thereof, in any form, by any method, for any purpose, or in any language other
than English without the written consent of Imagine Communications. All others uses are illegal.
This publication is designed to assist in the use of the product as it exists on the date of publication of
this manual, and may not reflect the product at the current time or an unknown time in the future. This
publication does not in any way warrant description accuracy or guarantee the use for the product to
which it refers. Imagine Communications reserves the right, without notice to make such changes in
equipment, design, specifications, components, or documentation as progress may warrant to improve
the performance of the product.
Trademarks
Product names and other appropriate trademarks, e.g. D-Series™, Invenio®, PowerSmart®, Versio™ are
trademarks or trade names of Imagine Communications or its subsidiaries.
Microsoft® and Windows® are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other trademarks and
trade names are the property of their respective companies.
Contact Information
Imagine Communications has office locations around the world. For domestic and international location
and contact information, visit our Contact page
(http://www.imaginecommunications.com/company/contact-us.aspx).
Support Contact Information

For domestic and international support contact information see:
• Support Contacts (http://www.imaginecommunications.com/services/customer-care.aspx)
• eCustomer Portal (http://support.imaginecommunications.com)
• Academy Training (http://www.imaginecommunicationsacademy.com)
© 2015 Imagine Communications Corp. Proprietary and Confidential. Version 5.4 | Page 2
User's Guide Contents
Contents
Volume 1: Device Control .................................................................................... 14
Preface .................................................................................................................................................... 15
Manual Information ........................................................................................................................... 15
Writing Conventions........................................................................................................................... 15
Obtaining User Manuals ..................................................................................................................... 16
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control ....................................................................... 17
Navigator Licenses.............................................................................................................................. 18
Software Installation .............................................................................................................................. 24
Required Hardware ............................................................................................................................ 24
Required Operating System and Software ......................................................................................... 25
Installing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software ................................................................................ 29
Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software .............................................................................. 34
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses ...................................................................................... 36
Backup and Restore Utility ................................................................................................................. 38
Logging In and Account Administration ................................................................................................. 41
User Account Overview ...................................................................................................................... 41
Logging On .......................................................................................................................................... 41
Logging Off or Exiting ......................................................................................................................... 43
Managing User Groups ....................................................................................................................... 44
Managing User Accounts.................................................................................................................... 51
Administering User Logs..................................................................................................................... 54
Interface Overview ................................................................................................................................. 57
Setting the Operational Mode ........................................................................................................... 57
Setting the Operational Language ...................................................................................................... 59
Tools ................................................................................................................................................... 61
Using Interface Dialog Boxes .............................................................................................................. 74
Using Menus ....................................................................................................................................... 81
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration ................................................................................ 83
Setting Communication Options ........................................................................................................ 83
Setting Serial Connection Preferences ............................................................................................... 85
Setting SNMP Options ........................................................................................................................ 86
CCS Device Discovery.............................................................................................................................. 99
Summary of Discovery Tasks ............................................................................................................ 100
Setting Discovery Options ................................................................................................................ 101

Running a Discovery ......................................................................................................................... 108
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration ........................................................................................... 112
Rediscovery ...................................................................................................................................... 116
Copying Discovery Results ................................................................................................................ 116
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu................................................................................................. 116
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View ................................................................................. 117
Network View Construction ................................................................................................................. 118
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC .................................................................................. 118
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane ....................................................................................... 124
Setting Navigation Properties .......................................................................................................... 128
Sample Resource Tree Views ........................................................................................................... 139
Using Navigation Shortcut Menus .................................................................................................... 144
Setting Navigation Options .............................................................................................................. 147
Using Navigation Shortcuts .............................................................................................................. 151
CCS Device Configuration ..................................................................................................................... 153
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device ............................................................................... 153
Upgrading Software.......................................................................................................................... 161
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab ................................................................... 169
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC................................................................................................ 174
Setting Device Options ..................................................................................................................... 174
Setting SNMP Options ...................................................................................................................... 175
Getting Version Information ............................................................................................................ 178
Logging Configuration Activity ......................................................................................................... 181
Setting Configuration Options .......................................................................................................... 182
Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu .......................................................................................... 182
Using the Configuration Folder ........................................................................................................ 184
NUCLEUS Configuration........................................................................................................................ 187
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS Navigator.......................................................................... 187
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface .................................................................... 188
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys .................................................................................................... 188
Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using Magellan CCS Navigator ............................................ 188
Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration.................................................................... 197
Auto Validation................................................................................................................................. 205
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration................................................................. 206
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration .................................................................................................. 212
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard ........................................................................... 219
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS ............................................................................................ 228
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files ....................................................................................... 231
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control ............................................................................. 237

Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File .................................................................................. 237
Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway ............................................................................................ 241
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface................................................................................................ 241
Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring ................................................................ 242
Using the DPS-575 Updater .............................................................................................................. 244
NEO Frame Configuration..................................................................................................................... 247
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame ................................................................................ 247
Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame ........................................................................... 248
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame................................................................................ 250
LCP and RCP Configuration ................................................................................................................... 252
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP........................................................................... 252
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP ..................................................................... 256
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP............................................................................................... 260
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs ...................................................................... 261
Network Event Diagnostics................................................................................................................... 263
Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 263
Using Alarm Tables ........................................................................................................................... 264
Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists ............................................................................................... 267
Interpreting Alarm Colors................................................................................................................. 267
Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus ............................................................................................ 269
Setting Diagnostics Options.............................................................................................................. 273
CCS Device Control ............................................................................................................................... 282
Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes ...................................................................................... 282
Configuring Custom Control Views .................................................................................................. 283
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes............................................................................. 284
Checking a Device’s Control Status .................................................................................................. 291
Using the Control Shortcut Menu .................................................................................................... 292
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device ................................................................................... 294
Setting Control Options .................................................................................................................... 294
Using Presets .................................................................................................................................... 296
Streaming in Control Windows............................................................................................................. 302
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in QSEE6800+ ............................................................ 302
Multicasting ...................................................................................................................................... 303
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box.................................................................................................... 303
Video Output Monitoring ..................................................................................................................... 312
Using the Signal Monitor Tool .......................................................................................................... 312
Monitoring Video Signals ................................................................................................................. 313
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu......................................................................................... 313
Setting Signal Monitor Options ........................................................................................................ 315

Device Control through HTTP ............................................................................................................... 317
Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser ............................................................ 317
Controlling an HTTP Device .............................................................................................................. 318
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................... 319
Installation Problems........................................................................................................................ 319
Problems at Startup.......................................................................................................................... 323
Configuration Problems ................................................................................................................... 330
Alarm Problems ................................................................................................................................ 335
Control Problems.............................................................................................................................. 339
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator ..................................................................................... 344
Getting Help from Customer Service ............................................................................................... 345
Frequently Asked Questions................................................................................................................. 347
What are the Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing Options? .............................................................. 347
Can I use CCS Software to Configure my Devices? ........................................................................... 347
What is Graphical Navigation? ......................................................................................................... 347
Can Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the Overall Status of Network Devices? .............................. 348
Can Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router Operations? ............................................................. 349
Can I Keep the Application Always on Top? ..................................................................................... 350
Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? .................................................................................... 350
Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty Information .............................................................................. 351
Copyrights......................................................................................................................................... 351
Trademarks....................................................................................................................................... 351
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ............................................................................ 352
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 358
Volume 2: Graphical Navigation......................................................................... 368

Preface .................................................................................................................................................. 369
Manual Information ......................................................................................................................... 369
Writing Conventions......................................................................................................................... 369
Obtaining User Manuals ................................................................................................................... 370
Introduction to Graphical Navigation ................................................................................................... 371
Graphical Navigation Page Creation ..................................................................................................... 372
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page ...................................................................................... 372
Defining Global Properties ............................................................................................................... 378
Setting Graphical Navigation Options .............................................................................................. 380
Setting the Properties of a Page ....................................................................................................... 384
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page ............................................................................... 387
Adding Buttons ................................................................................................................................. 387
Adding a Hot Button ......................................................................................................................... 393
Adding a Text Object ........................................................................................................................ 394

Adding an Image ............................................................................................................................... 395
Adding a Hotspot .............................................................................................................................. 396
Adding a Signal Monitor ................................................................................................................... 397
Adding a Navigator Frame ................................................................................................................ 398
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page ....................................................................................... 398
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol ....................................................................................................... 406
Adding Controls ................................................................................................................................ 412
Editing a Page ................................................................................................................................... 424
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus .............................................................................. 427
Defining Rules ....................................................................................................................................... 429
Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process................................................................................... 430
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page ........................................................... 430
Setting an Event ............................................................................................................................... 434
Defining Conditions .......................................................................................................................... 435
Setting an Action .............................................................................................................................. 440
Setting the Action Properties ........................................................................................................... 441
Working with Macros ....................................................................................................................... 456
Router Rule Creation ............................................................................................................................ 459
Setting Router-Specific Events ......................................................................................................... 459
Setting Router-Specific Actions ........................................................................................................ 468
SNMP Plug-in ........................................................................................................................................ 483
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events ................................................... 483
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events ................................................................................ 484
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action ........................................................... 486
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action ............................................................ 486
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action ............................................................................ 487
SuiteView Plug-in .................................................................................................................................. 489
Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions .................................................................................... 489
Setting Communication Options ...................................................................................................... 491
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page ....................................................................................... 493
Using Graphical Navigation Pages ........................................................................................................ 498
Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page .......................................................................................... 498
Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode ......................................................................................... 498
Custom Properties Window ............................................................................................................. 501
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting ................................................................................................. 503
Build Mode Problems ....................................................................................................................... 503
Control Mode Problems ................................................................................................................... 505
Volume 3: IconMaster Software Control Panel .................................................. 508

Preface .................................................................................................................................................. 509

Obtaining the User Manuals ............................................................................................................ 510
Introduction to ISCP ............................................................................................................................. 511
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) ....................................................................................... 512
ISCP-LITE ........................................................................................................................................... 513
Installation and Logging On .................................................................................................................. 514
Required Hardware, Operating System and Software ..................................................................... 514
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel.................................................................................. 515
Removing ISCP Software .................................................................................................................. 515
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode ............................................................................... 515
Activating a License .......................................................................................................................... 517
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration ......................................................................................................... 519
Configuring ISCP ............................................................................................................................... 519
Configuring ISCP-LITE ....................................................................................................................... 526
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels ........................................................................................................... 529
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel ................................................................................ 529
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP Only) .......................................................................... 534
Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only) ................................................................................................ 539
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only) ................................................................................. 539
Audio Monitoring ............................................................................................................................. 550
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ................................................................................ 558
License .............................................................................................................................................. 558
Limited Software Warranty .............................................................................................................. 558
Volume 4: NexioNAV ......................................................................................... 560

Preface .................................................................................................................................................. 561
Introduction to NexioNAV .................................................................................................................... 563
Features ............................................................................................................................................ 564
Installation ............................................................................................................................................ 565
Hardware Requirements .................................................................................................................. 566
Installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software .................................................................................... 566
Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software................................................................................... 567
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode ............................................................................... 568
NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX License Key ................................................................... 569
Discovering NEXIO Servers ............................................................................................................... 569

Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard ...................................................................................... 572
Customizing Your Server Pages ........................................................................................................ 583
NEXIO Control and Monitoring ............................................................................................................. 584
Opening NEXIO Pages ....................................................................................................................... 584
Using Control Dialog Boxes for Devices ........................................................................................... 590
Monitoring Network Status .............................................................................................................. 604
Volume 5: NAVIGATOR-INT ................................................................................ 610

Preface .................................................................................................................................................. 611
Introduction to InterfaceNAV ............................................................................................................... 613
Installation and Logging On .................................................................................................................. 616
Installing InterfaceNAV..................................................................................................................... 617
Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License ............................................................................................... 617
Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software................................................................................... 618
Configuration Using NAVIGATOR-INT................................................................................................... 619
Selecting Devices .............................................................................................................................. 619
Configuring Favorites ....................................................................................................................... 623
Creating Customized Pages .............................................................................................................. 633
Custom Control Views ...................................................................................................................... 641
Using Customized Pages ....................................................................................................................... 643
Displaying Customized Pages ........................................................................................................... 643
Parameter Controls .......................................................................................................................... 645
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ................................................................................ 647
License .............................................................................................................................................. 647
Limited Software Warranty .............................................................................................................. 647
NET SNMP License ............................................................................................................................ 648
Volume 6: Routing Components ........................................................................ 653

Preface .................................................................................................................................................. 654
Obtaining User Manuals ................................................................................................................... 654
Contacting Us ................................................................................................................................... 655
Introduction to Routing Components .................................................................................................. 656
Router Node Functionality ............................................................................................................... 657
Routing Operations Tools ................................................................................................................. 658

Discovering Routing Devices ................................................................................................................ 660
Setting Router Discovery Options .................................................................................................... 660
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery ............................................................................ 660
Setting Discovery Save Options ........................................................................................................ 663
Running a Discovery for a Router ..................................................................................................... 663
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems ......................................................................................... 664
Creating a Routing System ............................................................................................................... 665
Routing System Maintenance .......................................................................................................... 680
Router Page and Panel Construction.................................................................................................... 695
Choosing a Router Panel .................................................................................................................. 695
Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page ................................................................ 704
Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels................................................................... 709
Router Components on a Navigator Page ........................................................................................ 719
Running Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 721
Viewing the Activity of a Router....................................................................................................... 722
Manually Creating a Router Control Page ........................................................................................ 723
Logical Database Setup......................................................................................................................... 729
Using the Logical Database Editor Tool ............................................................................................ 730
Configuring Sources.......................................................................................................................... 758
Configuring Destinations .................................................................................................................. 771
Configuring Levels ............................................................................................................................ 781
Configuring Categories and Indexes ................................................................................................. 788
Configuring Grouping ....................................................................................................................... 796
Managing Enhanced Tielines ............................................................................................................ 800
Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Products ............................................................... 820
Using Database Editor Wizards ........................................................................................................ 832
Physical Device Setup ........................................................................................................................... 847
Configuring Platinum Frames ............................................................................................................... 848
Selecting the Frame Size .................................................................................................................. 848
Setting Up a Matrix........................................................................................................................... 849
Partitioning the Matrix ..................................................................................................................... 863
Selecting Matrix Monitoring ............................................................................................................ 872
Selecting Controls ............................................................................................................................. 875
Setting up SNMP (Optional) ............................................................................................................. 879
Updating License Keys and Logical Settings ..................................................................................... 883
Changing Protocol Settings .............................................................................................................. 885
Editing the Router Matrix ................................................................................................................. 895
Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations ............................................................................ 913
Configuring Panacea Frames ................................................................................................................ 917

Selecting a Frame ............................................................................................................................. 917
Configuring the Routing Matrix ........................................................................................................ 918
Configuring the Control Card ........................................................................................................... 925
Editing a Frame’s Configuration ....................................................................................................... 936
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings ........................................................................................ 949
Panacea Web Panels Tab ................................................................................................................. 959
Panacea Web Users Tab ................................................................................................................... 960
Configuring Integrator Frames ............................................................................................................. 961
Selecting a Frame ............................................................................................................................. 961
Configuring the Routing Matrix ........................................................................................................ 962
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring .......................................................................................... 974
Adding Combiner Systems................................................................................................................ 979
Editing a Frame’s Configuration ....................................................................................................... 983
Editing the Router Matrix ................................................................................................................. 984
Configuring Legacy Frames ................................................................................................................... 990
Adding Other (Legacy) Imagine Communications Frames ............................................................... 990
Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways ................................................................................................... 992
Adding Edge Configurations ............................................................................................................. 992
Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options .................................................................... 993
Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values ....................................................................................... 1000
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab .................................................................................................... 1002
Setting Network Information for Edge ........................................................................................... 1002
Edge Web Router Application ........................................................................................................ 1010
Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) Panels.......................................................................... 1011
RCP-ABA 1RU Models ..................................................................................................................... 1011
RCP-ABA 2RU Models ..................................................................................................................... 1012
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog ...................................................................................................... 1012
Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key ...................................................... 1020
Clearing Selection Key Assignments ............................................................................................... 1023
Editing Details of a Panel Definition ............................................................................................... 1024
Changing a Panel Definition ........................................................................................................... 1037
Configuring RCPp Panels.................................................................................................................... 1044
Models ............................................................................................................................................ 1044
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog ...................................................................................................... 1044
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys........................................................................................................ 1046
Defining the Destinations ............................................................................................................... 1047
Defining the Sources ...................................................................................................................... 1050
Configuring the Levels Affected ..................................................................................................... 1054
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style ................................................................................................. 1055

Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only) ........................................ 1067
Editing LCD Button Displays (RCP-IDe Panels Only) ....................................................................... 1078
Finishing.......................................................................................................................................... 1084
Controlling Backlight Intensity ....................................................................................................... 1084
Configuring the Web Router Application ........................................................................................... 1087
Adding Web Router Application Devices ....................................................................................... 1087
Setting Up Web Users .................................................................................................................... 1095
Configuring IP3 ................................................................................................................................... 1099
IP3 Controller Initial Configuration ................................................................................................ 1099
DBEditor IP3 Configuration ............................................................................................................ 1103
IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration...................................................................................... 1106
Adding an IP3 to a Legacy Router System ...................................................................................... 1109
Reconfiguring a Hybrid Router System With an IP3....................................................................... 1114
Configuring Tielines ........................................................................................................................ 1115
Configuring PVX .................................................................................................................................. 1115
Basic Routing System Control ............................................................................................................. 1117
Connecting to Routers in Control Mode ........................................................................................ 1117
Advanced Controls ......................................................................................................................... 1118
Basic Controls ................................................................................................................................. 1118
Accessing the Router Control ......................................................................................................... 1119
Taking a Source to a Destination .................................................................................................... 1119
Locking and Protecting Router Destinations .................................................................................. 1120
Platinum Control ............................................................................................................................ 1122
Grid and Bus Panel Operation ............................................................................................................ 1123
Monitoring Signal Presence............................................................................................................ 1123
Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel ................................................................................... 1124
Crosspoint Restrictions................................................................................................................... 1129
Using Presets .................................................................................................................................. 1130
Using Salvos .................................................................................................................................... 1131
Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos ............................................................................ 1131
Matrix Panel Operation ...................................................................................................................... 1134
Monitoring Signal Presence............................................................................................................ 1135
Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel ........................................................................................... 1135
Locking and Protecting Destinations .............................................................................................. 1136
Using Salvos .................................................................................................................................... 1139
Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation ............................................................................ 1142
Performing Takes............................................................................................................................ 1142
Locking and Protecting Destinations .............................................................................................. 1143
Using a Source Preview Panel ........................................................................................................ 1144

Matrix Partitioning ............................................................................................................................. 1145
No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) ..................................................................................... 1145
RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) .............................................................................................. 1147
Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) ........................................................................ 1148
Wild Partitioning............................................................................................................................. 1149
Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings)........................................................................................ 1149
Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings).................................................................................. 1151
Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings)................................................................................. 1152
Configuring Control Panel Buttons ..................................................................................................... 1153
Control Panel Button Configuration Overview............................................................................... 1153
Creating a Source Select Key .......................................................................................................... 1155
Creating a Destination Select Key .................................................................................................. 1156
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key .................................................................................................... 1157
Creating a Category/Index Key (ABA Series Panels Only) .............................................................. 1158
Creating a Salvo Select Key............................................................................................................. 1159
Creating a Command Select Key .................................................................................................... 1162
Creating a Function Key.................................................................................................................. 1164
Creating a Panel Status Key ............................................................................................................ 1165
Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only) ............................................................................... 1166
Creating a Lock Key ........................................................................................................................ 1166
Creating a Protect Key .................................................................................................................... 1167
Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key .................................................................................................. 1168
Creating an Alarm Key (RCP Panels, RCP-IDe, RCP-32x8CQp, 16x2CS, and 32x2CS Panels Only) .. 1169
Creating a Source Alarm Select Key ............................................................................................... 1174
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key ........................................................................................ 1175
Creating a Parametric Key .............................................................................................................. 1176
Creating a Chop Key (RCP-ABA and RCPp-LCD only) ...................................................................... 1181
Creating an On-Air Swap Key (RCP-12×2BAp only) ........................................................................ 1182
Troubleshooting and FAQ ................................................................................................................... 1183
Troubleshooting Router Panel Problems ....................................................................................... 1183
Frequently Asked Questions .......................................................................................................... 1184
Function Mapping: Routermapper to Navigator ................................................................................ 1187
Function Mapping Overview .......................................................................................................... 1187
Index ................................................................................................................ 1188
User's Guide Volume 1: Device Control
Volume 1: Device Control

In this section:
Preface ..................................................................................................... 15
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device Control......................... 17
Software Installation ................................................................................ 24
Logging In and Account Administration ................................................... 41
Interface Overview................................................................................... 57
Communication Options and SNMP Configuration ................................. 83
CCS Device Discovery ............................................................................... 99
Network View Construction ................................................................... 118
CCS Device Configuration....................................................................... 153
NUCLEUS Configuration ......................................................................... 187
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control ............................... 237
NEO Frame Configuration ...................................................................... 247
LCP and RCP Configuration .................................................................... 252
Network Event Diagnostics .................................................................... 263
CCS Device Control................................................................................. 282
Streaming in Control Windows .............................................................. 302
Video Output Monitoring ...................................................................... 312
Device Control through HTTP ................................................................ 317
Troubleshooting ..................................................................................... 319
Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................. 347
Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty Information ................................ 351
Glossary .................................................................................................. 358
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
This manual details the features, installation procedures, operational procedures, and specifications of
the Navigator software.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the installation, setup,
and/or operation of the Navigator software.
Revision History
Table 1: Software Revision History
Edition Software Version Release Date Changes
A CCS Navigator 1.0 March 2003
Z CCS Navigator 4.6.1 June 2010 LRC and PredatorII support
AA CCS Navigator 4.6.3 November 2010 Magellan support
AB CCS Navigator 4.7 January 2011 Discontinuation of BOS device support
AC CCS Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011 Addition of custom properties window
AD CCS Navigator 4.8 March 2012 Enhanced salvos
AE CCS Navigator 4.9 July 2012 Support for HView SX Pro devices
AF CCS Navigator 5.0 January 2013 IP3 support
AG CCS Navigator 5.2 January 2014 Increased support for Nexio and Windows 8.1
AH CCS Navigator 5.3 August 2014 TCP discovery and connection
5.4 CCS Navigator 5.4 August 2015 64-bit Navigator
Writing Conventions
This documentation adheres to the following writing conventions:
Conventions
Term or Convention Description
Bold Indicates dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check box, list box, combo
box, menu, submenu, window, list, and selection names

Italics Indicates email addresses, names of books and publications, and first instances of
new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or something

you type into a field
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and dialog
boxes
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location in the document or elsewhere
Internet address Indicates a jump to a website or URL

Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot problems
[VersionNo.] Placeholder for a software version number

CCS Software A generic term for any CCS software applications, including CCS Navigator,
Application CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot
Obtaining User Manuals

The documentation for your product is available as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file downloadable from our
website. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an electronic document integrated into the software. While
working in the application, you can open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
The most up-to-date documentation and software is always available on our website.
Magellan CCS Navigator Chapter 1
Chapter 1
Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device

Control
Magellan CCS Navigator is a scalable Windows-based software tool for configuring and controlling
various devices that use industry-standard protocols, such as UDP, TCP/IP, SNMP, FTP, and HTTP.
Figure 1: Magellan CCS Navigator Screen
Magellan CCS Navigator supports the following devices:

• CCS control panels
• CCS EDGE-DPS575 gateway

• NEO, 6800+, and Selenio frames, modules and resource modules
• DPS-575, X75, and X85 synchronizers
• SNMP-compliant devices
• HTTP-controlled devices
• IconMaster systems
• Router systems
• Imagine Communications Digital Legalizers
• Amino STB
• Imagine Communications Broadcast Multiviewers, including PlatinumTM SX Hybrid and PlatinumTM SX
Pro
• Suiteview and Predator multiviewers
• NEXIO servers
• NetVX devices
• SQM devices
Starting with Navigator 4.7, the following devices and device families are no longer supported:
• Genesis
• Digibus
• DFS
• CCS Gateway
• CCS Router Gateway
The Magellan CCS Navigator interface can be configured to display text in English, Japanese, or Chinese.
See Setting the Operational Language (on page 59) for more information.
Navigator Licenses
Depending on the licensing options you choose, your Magellan CCS Navigator software may be able to
fulfill various functions. License options are described in the following sections:
• NAVIGATOR-DEV License (on page 19)
• NAVIGATOR-SRV License (on page 19)
• NAVIGATOR-SNMP License (on page 21)
• NAVIGATOR-INT License (on page 21)
• NAVIGATOR-RTR License (on page 22)
• ICONM-SCP License (on page 22)
• ICONM-SCP-LITE License (on page 22)
• NAVIGATOR-NX License (on page 22)
• Basic Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses) (on page 22)
To obtain a Magellan CCS Navigator license, or to add an option to an existing license, please contact
your sales representative.
NAVIGATOR-DEV License
This license supports the remote discovery, configuration, monitoring, control, and diagnostics of
supported devices.
The NAVIGATOR-DEV option will help you accomplish the following tasks from a PC:
• Centrally navigate, control, and monitor CCS devices over a local- or wide-area network.
• Set alarms to signal visual, auditory, or e-mail alerts when CCS-enabled devices go off-line or
malfunction.
• Transfer software upgrades to CCS-enabled devices.
• Quickly diagnose and correct problems with the CCS-enabled network or devices.
• Monitor the integrity of video signals throughout a facility.
• Control CCS routing systems.
• Secure the network with user-login and access-level verification.
• Control and monitor routers for video monitoring.
• Control and monitor multiviewer systems, including HView SX Hybrid and HView SX Pro.
In most cases, the remote controls that the NAVIGATOR-DEV license offers are more intuitive and user-
friendly than the local controls on the devices. From a Magellan CCS Navigator PC, you can quickly
survey the network from an array of PC monitors, avoiding the need to track changes of hundreds of
LEDs on racks of devices.
For example, using Magellan CCS Navigator’s control interfaces, operators can track the status of
multiple X75 Converters and Synchronizers, each with more than 1000 individual controls, with a
simplified and more-intuitive interface.
NAVIGATOR-SRV License
This license includes all the functionality of the NAVIGATOR-DEV license. Magellan CCS Navigator with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV license can operate in Build and Control modes.
The NAVIGATOR-SRV license allows administrators to use Graphical Navigation tools to create easy-to-
use graphical pages that visually represent a network’s many devices, systems, and environments. Pages
can associate actions, such as loading a page or creating a configuration, with graphical objects, such as
buttons, symbols, and images, that represent items in a network environment.
On these graphical pages, called Magellan CCS Navigator pages, an administrator user can consolidate
network wide status monitoring and troubleshooting tasks.
A NAVIGATOR-SRV license includes a collection of buttons, symbols, and images for use in creating the
custom pages, each representing an interface to one network environment. If the supplied library of
images fails to satisfy a network’s needs, you can import other image files, such as your corporate logo,
to supplement that gallery.
Figure 2: Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
A PC with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license will normally be operated by an Administrator user. This PC can
discover devices within the network, set up pages and link devices to pages. The administrator user can
add pages and discover new pages while clients are also using the system.
Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license stores the following resources:
• Graphical Navigation pages
• Device, preset and page user and user group access rights
• Presets
• Navigation pane data
• Layouts
Administrator users can grant or deny other PCs on the network which have NAVIGATOR-CLI licenses
access to pages, presets, and devices. The resources stored on a Magellan CCS Navigator system with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV license can be retrieved by users at NAVIGATOR-CLI systems as needed, or as those
resources are updated.
The tools available with a NAVIGATOR-SRV license are described in Introduction to Graphical Navigation
(on page 371).
NAVIGATOR-SNMP License
The NAVIGATOR-SNMP license allows complete monitoring and control customization of any SNMP-
enabled device. When used in combination with an NAVIGATOR-INT license, you can build Graphical
Navigation pages with parameters and alarms generated by SNMP traps.
NAVIGATOR-INT License
The NAVIGATOR-INT license lets you drag and drop parameters and alarms onto Graphical Navigation
pages. By mixing and matching multiple devices,you can build virtual device control and monitoring
surfaces, such as Alarm Network Walls. This license requires either the NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-
SNMP license key on the same PC.
For more information about the NAVIGATOR-INT license key, see Introduction to InterfaceNAV (on page
613).
NAVIGATOR-CLI License
This license includes the Control mode functionality of NAVIGATOR-DEV and the graphical navigation
capabilities of NAVIGATOR-SRV. A PC running NAVIGATOR-CLI is installed on a network that also has at
least one instance of NAVIGATOR-SRV. Users on a NAVIGATOR-CLI PC can retrieve graphical navigation
pages and presets, and access devices for control and monitoring purposes, from the NAVIGATOR-SRV
PC. Users can control devices and operate pages to which they have been granted permissions, and they
can load and create presets.
NAVIGATOR-CLI installations operate only in Control mode. A user with a NAVIGATOR-CLI license does
not configure the Navigation pane, create router configurations, run discoveries or create Graphical
Navigation pages.
Though some data is stored on the NAVIGATOR-SRV PC, a PC with a NAVIGATOR-CLI license
communicates directly with equipment. The NAVIGATOR-CLI PC receives alarms directly from all devices
the user is assigned to monitor. Assignments are done by an Administrator user on a NAVIGATOR-SRV
PC.
Information that is stored on a NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed system includes:

• Alarm logs
• Product sheets and user manuals
• Control options settings
• Diagnostic options settings
• Standalone tools
• Dialog box placements
These settings and items will not travel with your User ID if you log into a different NAVIGATOR-CLI PC.
NAVIGATOR-RTR License
The NAVIGATOR-RTR license does not work in cooperation with any other license keys. Using this license
in Build mode, you can configure any device and create control panels for routers using the Wizard. In
Control mode, you have CCS-P control of all Imagine Communications routers, including Platinum,
Integrator, and Panacea. You can control devices using default software control panels and custom
software control panels created in Build mode.
For more information on configuring and controlling routers, see Introduction to Routing Components
(on page 656).
ICONM-SCP License
The ICONM-SCP (ISCP) license does not work in cooperation with any other license keys, and is intended
for use with a touch-screen monitor. Using this license, you can create a feature-complete control panel
for an IconMaster switcher. The control panel also has tools for setting some IconMaster configuration
options.
The control panel provides audio information for a selected channel and provides sub-panels to adjust
various settings on the channel. For more information, see IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) (on
page 512).
ICONM-SCP-LITE License
The ICONM-SCP-LITE (ISCP-LITE) license is intended for use with a touch-screen monitor and must be
physically and logically paired with an IconMaster Hardware Remote Control Panel. It does not work in
cooperation with any other license keys. The control panel has tools for setting some IconMaster
configuration options, provides audio information for the hardware control panel, and provides sub-
panels to adjust various settings on that panel. For more information, see ISCP-LITE (on page 513).
NAVIGATOR-NX License
When you have a NAVIGATOR-NX license, after discovering NEXIO devices, you can open control
windows for those devices.
The NAVIGATOR-NX license also enables a wizard for creating graphical pages for NEXIO™ systems.
These pages allows you to monitor the health and operational parameters of your NEXIO system.
Working in conjunction with agents on the NEXIO server platform, NAVIGATOR-NX enables you to
monitor system notifications, to make setting adjustments, and to control basic server configuration
from a remote PC.
For more information, see Introduction to NexioNAV (on page 563).
Basic Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses)

If you do not purchase any license keys, after the initial 30-day trial period Magellan CCS Navigator will
open in Build mode only, with no option to switch to Control mode.
With no licenses, you have tools to discover and set up CCS-enabled devices on a broadcast network.
You can establish IP settings (IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask) for CCS-enabled devices
and set up menu hierarchies for CCS-compliant control panels. You can configure and monitor physical
and logical routing devices. You can determine the current version of software and/or firmware on each
CCS device and to upload new software or firmware to the devices.
Chapter 2
Software Installation
If you are installing Magellan CCS Navigator for the first time on your PC, it will automatically install with
a free 30-day license. For the trial period, all license keys will be activated, so you can evaluate which
licenses you need.
If you have a previous version of CCS software (Pilot, CoPilot, Magellan CCS Navigator, or
IconMasterNav), you can choose to install either a Client or Server version of Magellan CCS Navigator.
When your 30-day trial license expires, you must purchase a NAVIGATOR-CLI or NAVIGATOR-SRV license
to preserve the previous data.
This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires NEO 3901RES-E, ICE6800+, LCP-3901-1U,
and RCP-CCS-1U to be upgraded to version 3.0 or higher software. The recommended system upgrade
procedure consists of first upgrading all NEO 3901-RES-E and ICE6800+ modules, then the LCP-3901-1U
or RCP-CCS-1U, and finally to install or upgrade the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
You may need to install other required programs or components as well. Most of these are handled as
part of the Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
See the following topics to install the CCS Navigator software application and
other required software and hardware components:
Required Hardware .................................................................................. 24
Required Operating System and Software .............................................. 25
Installing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software ..................................... 29
Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software .................................... 34
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses ........................................... 36
Backup and Restore Utility....................................................................... 38
Required Hardware
A Magellan CCS Navigator Client system normally connects to a Magellan CCS Navigator Server for
administrative purposes and to retrieve pages and panels, profiles, presets, and layouts. Each Magellan
CCS Navigator client PC normally has a NAVIGATOR-CLI license.
Magellan CCS Navigator Servers are where administrator users will normally configure a network and
create pages and panels. These PCs will store pages and profiles, presets, and layouts, and will normally
have a NAVIGATOR-SRV and/or a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license. They may additionally have NAVIGATOR-
NX and NAVIGATOR-INT licenses.
Standalone Magellan CCS Navigator systems will normally connect to specific equipment, or a network
without a Magellan CCS Navigator Server system as an intermediary. They may have a NAVIGATOR-NX,
ICONM-SCP, ICONM-SCP-LITE, or NAVIGATOR-DEV license.
Install the CCS Navigator software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware requirements:
PC Requirements for Magellan CCS Navigator Clients and Servers
Client Server
Minimum Supported
Minimum Supported Requirements
Requirements
3 GHz Pentium IV Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
Processor processor (Core 2 Duo -
2.39 GHz recommended)
8 GB DRAM 16 GB DRAM
System Memory
(16 GB recommended)
100-BaseT 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet
Network Connection
Connection
HDD Drive 20 GB 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 1 GB 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive DVD-ROM Drive
Super VGA supporting • Video graphic module with
1152 × 864 (19-inch 256MB DDR3 SDRAM
recommended) supporting up to a minimum
Display
1920x1080 resolutions
• LCD Monitor supporting up to
1920x1080 resolution
It is not recommended to run Magellan CCS Navigator Server on a PC that is running or hosting other
applications or servers. If Magellan CCS Navigator is installed remotely, the clients should connect to the
server through VPN, which offers a layer of protection.
For a routing system that contains Platinum TDM or is of size larger than 256x256 it is recommend that
you use a system that meets or exceeds the recommend system requirements.
Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display

For CCS software to show clearly and appropriately on a PC monitor, set the Display Properties for the
monitor to 1152 × 864 resolution with small fonts. Go to the Start menu and select Settings > Control
Panel > Display > Display Properties and. Also, set the color palette to display either "High" (16-bit) or
"True" (24-bit) color.
For best results, set the display to 96 DPI. This setting is found in Settings > Properties > Settings >
Advanced, on the General tab.
Required Operating System and Software

For best results, use Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit.
You can install Magellan CCS Navigator on a PC running one of the following operating systems:
• Microsoft Windows 8.1 Professional, 64 bit
• Windows Vista
• Windows Server 2003 R2 Service Pack 2 (Standard or Enterprise Editions)
• Microsoft Windows 7 Professional 32 or 64 bit
• Windows 8, Windows Server 2008, and Windows 8.1
• Windows XP Service Pack 3
The CCS Navigator software does not support Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, or Windows
2000.
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP Service Pack 3, contact
Customer Service. If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 2, you must update to SP3 before
installing Magellan CCS Navigator.
Before you install CCS Navigator, you should install the recommended third-party software programs or
components on the PC. Most of these programs are included in the Third-Party folder of your
PRODUCTNAME zip file, but you can download the others from the Internet.
If a PC does not have installations of the prerequisite third-party software for its operating system, the
setup program will abort.
See the following topics for more information:

• Installing Other Required Software (on page 26)
• Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool (on page 29)
Installing Other Required Software

Most of the required software is available in the Third party folder on the installation zip file. During
your Magellan CCS Navigator install, if the following software is not found, an installer for the missing
program may start. This will not disrupt your installation of Magellan CCS Navigator, which will continue
once all the other required software is found or installed.
Required Third-Party Software
Software Description File Name and Location
Adobe® Acrobat® Reader 4.0 Opens and prints user manuals Third Party\Adobe\
minimum; 8.0 preferred and product brochures included AdbeRdr812_en_US.exe
with CCS software applications
and Online Help.
For best results, install Acrobat 8.0
for Windows, available for free
from Adobe Systems Inc.
If you choose to install the latest
version of Acrobat Reader, you
should first uninstall the previous
version.
Microsoft Windows Installer 3.1 Ensures that you are able to install Third party\
Microsoft XML Parser. Microsoft\Installer\
instMsiW.exe

Microsoft XML parser 3.0 Helps read XML configuration files Third party\
and runs the New Page Wizard. Microsoft\XML\
msxml3usa.msi
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0 Enables you to read the Online Third
Help and other support party\Microsoft\Ie7\ie7
documents. It also provides access setup.exe
to our website.
The Windows XP operating system
works best with IE 7.0.
Note: For best results, do not use
Internet Explorer 10.
Windows XP Service Pack 3 Provides a higher level of security Microsoft does not permit the
and all of the latest updates to redistribution of this Service Pack
Windows XP. software. However, you can
download it from the Microsoft
website. If your PC is directly
connected to the Internet, visit
http://windowsupdate.microsoft.c
om/. Otherwise, select Download
and Deploy Service Pack 3 on
http://www.microsoft.com/downl
oads/details.aspx?familyid=673A1
019-8E3E-4BE0-AC31-
70DD21B5AFA7&displaylang=en,
and follow the download
instructions.
Windows Server 2003 Service Pack Provides a higher level of security Microsoft does not permit the
2 and all of the latest updates to redistribution of this Service Pack
Windows Server. software. However, you can
download it from the Microsoft
website. If your PC is directly
connected to the Internet, visit
http://windowsupdate.microsoft.c
om/. Otherwise, select Download
and Deploy Service Pack 2 to
Multiple Computers on
http://www.microsoft.com/techn
et/prodtechnol/winxppro/maintai
n/winxpsp2.mspx, and follow the
download instructions.
Microsoft .Net 2.0 Needed to support some of the Third Party\Microsoft\Net
components within the Magellan 2.0\dotnetfx.exe
CCS Navigator application

SQL Server Express 2005 (SP3) A relational database Third Party\Microsoft\SQL Server
(Magellan CCS Navigator Server management system. SQLEXPR.EXE
installations only) If the PC has SQL 2005, 2008, or
2012 then Magellan CCS
Navigator’s install will proceed. If
none of these is found, SQL 2008
R2 is installed as part of the
installation procedure.
Microsoft Messaging Queue Needed for notifications between Part of your Windows XP,
Magellan CCS Navigator Server Windows Vista, or Windows 7
and Client. install; if this option was not
installed with the rest of the
operating system, an attended
install will start. In rare cases you
may need to insert the Windows
Installation DVD in your DVD drive
to complete the install.
To use the Signal Monitor tool, you must install additional hardware and software. See Requirements for
Using the Signal Monitor Tool (on page 29).
Before you upgrade or install Magellan CCS Navigator software, you may need to upgrade other
compatible equipment on your network. See Order of Installation for Software and Firmware (on page
28).
Order of Installation for Software and Firmware

If you are upgrading from a version of CCS software prior to 3.0, you must upgrade your entire network
at the same time. This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires NEO 3901RES-E,
ICE6800+, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to be upgraded to version 3.0 or later software. The
recommended system upgrade order is:
1. First, upgrade all NEO 3901-RES-E and ICE6800+ modules.
2. Next, upgrade the LCP-3901-1U or RCP-CCS-1U local and remote control units.
3. Finally, install or upgrade the current installation of the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming

To use Magellan CCS Navigator with QSEE6800+ (with QSEE6800+HS option) and X75 (with X75OPT-STR
module), you need to install.QuickTime 7.1 release. You can download QuickTime directly from Apple's
Website at http://www.apple.com/quicktime/win.html.
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool

The Magellan CCS Navigator software uses any video card compatible with Microsoft DirectX 8.1 or later
for confidence monitoring of video signals on the CCS network. The Windows XP operating system
includes DirectX 8.1, so you do not need to install this separately.
Ensure that your computer meets the minimum hardware requirements specified for the video card you
are installing, and install it according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
Preparing the PC for Installation

Prior to installing Magellan CCS Navigator Client, you must turn off Windows Firewall (found at Start >
Control Panel > Windows Firewall. Once installation is complete, you can reactivate Windows Firewall
and Magellan CCS Navigator Client will operate correctly.
Procedure-- Windows XP
CAUTION
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC

running Windows XP Service Pack 3, contact Customer Service.
Procedure-- Windows 2003
If your PC is running the Windows 2003 operating system with Service Pack 2, before you install
Magellan CCS Navigator, you must remove MSXML6 sp2. To remove this file, use the Add/Remove
Programs tool.
To use Add/Remove Programs to prepare your PC for Magellan CCS Navigator installation, follow these
steps:
1. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2. From the list that appears, choose MSXML6 SP2, and then click Remove.
3. When the process is finished, close the window.
You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.
Installing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software

Magellan CCS Navigator can not be installed in a compressed drive. If the installation fails, check
whether the drive is compressed or not.
To install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these steps:

1. Download the PRODUCTNAME installation package and unzip it.
Select either the 32-bit or the 64-bit version depending on the capabilities of your PC.
2. Close all other applications running on the PC and click the Navigator_xx.exe file in the unzipped
folder.
3. If you are installing 64-bit Navigator over a previous version of Navigator, see Upgrading from
Navigator 5.3 to Navigator 5.4 64-Bit (on page 33) for additional information.
4. When the unpacking process finishes, click Next.
A Welcome box appears.
5. Exit all Windows programs, read the instructions in the Welcome box, and then click Next>.
The Software License Agreement box appears.
6. Read the license agreement, and then click Yes to accept its terms.
The Magellan CCS Navigator install will continue in Chinese or Japanese if the PC is known (to
Magellan CCS Navigator) to be operating in either of those languages. Otherwise, the installation will
continue in English. To switch the language of the Magellan CCS Navigator display after installation,
see Setting the Operational Language (on page 59).
7. A readme about licenses appears. Read the license information and then click Next> to proceed.
8. The Client/Server box appears. Click the type of install you want.
 If Setup detects a CoPilot or Pilot install, or a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator Client,
you should install Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
Note: if you are doing a client install, disable Windows Firewall during installation. After
installation is complete, you can re-enable Windows Firewall and Magellan CCS Navigator Client
will operate correctly.
 If Setup detects a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator Server, you should choose to
install the newer version of Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
9. Click Next.
If the chosen type of install is not possible, you will see an error message. Go back and choose your
install type again.
If you are installing Magellan CCS Navigator Client, the Setup will try to connect to the Server. Even if
it fails, you can proceed with the install (or make the necessary changes). Note however that the
Magellan CCS Navigator Client will not start without a valid Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
10. (Client installs only) If you choose a Client install, the Choose a Server box appears.
Choose the location of the Magellan CCS Navigator Server (either the IP address or computer name).
Enter the SQL instance. By default, this is SQLEXPRESS.
11. Click Next.
12. Now the Select Components box appears. Select the check box of each component you want to
install.
Options in Select Components Box
Box Function Response
Program Files Enables installation of the CCS program files Leave the option enabled.
Documentation Enables installation of the electronic version of Leave the option enabled
user manuals for Magellan CCS Navigator and all unless the PC is almost out
supported devices of hard drive space.
The Mandatory Components box appears, listing third-party software that you must install on the
PC before you can install the CCS Navigator software.
13. Click OK.
The setup program will now search the PC for both the required and recommended software,
including SQL Server, MSMQ (Microsoft Messaging Queue), and Microsoft .Net v2.0, and determine
what version of the software is on the PC.
This search has three possible outcomes:
a. Minimum Versions of the Required Software Not Installed—If the setup program discovers
that minimum versions of the required software programs are missing, it will list the missing
software and then start an installer to load each missing program.
b. Recommended Versions of Required Software Not Installed—If the setup program discovers
that the recommended versions of one or more pieces of software are missing, a warning box
lists the newer version or versions and recommends that you quit the setup program to install
the newer version. However, the setup will continue if you choose not to quit.
• To continue the setup, click Yes.
• To quit the setup, click No. Then, when the Exit Setup box appears, click Exit Setup. Install
the required or recommended software, and then restart the setup program.
See Required Operating System and Software (on page 25) and Installing Other Required
Software (on page 26).
c. Appropriate Installations of all Required and Recommended Software Found—The setup
program discovers that appropriate versions of all required and recommended software
programs are installed.
The setup program then searches the PC for previous CCS software installations. The two possible
outcomes to this search are as follows:
• No Previous CCS Control Software Installations —
A Choose Destination Location box appears. See If Setup Detects No Previous Installations (on page
31).
• Previous CCS Control Software Installations Exist —
A Previous Installation Detected box appears. See If Setup Detects a Previous Installation (on page
32).
If Setup Detects No Previous Installations

This section continues the procedure for installing Magellan CCS Navigator software for a PC that has all
the required third-party software installed but no previous installations of CCS control software.
When the Choose Destination Location box appears, complete these steps:
1. Either leave the default destination location as is or use the Browse dialog box to select another
destination for the installation, and then click Next>.
When the Select Program Folder box appears, a default program folder title appears in the Program
Folders box.
The default program folder is Harris Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.]. (VersionNo. refers to
the software version number.)
2. Click Next> to accept the default folder.
The Start Copying Files box appears, listing the destination folder for the installation.
3. Click Next.
The setup program will copy and register the components, and then the Setup Complete box
appears.
4. Click Finish.
Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.
If Setup Detects a Previous Installation

An Administrator user must install, reinstall, or upgrade CCS software. The default Administrator
password for upgrades from Pilot 1.0 is Leitch. Pilot 1.1 and higher, all CoPilot versions, and
Navigator 1.0 have no default passwords—therefore, the Password box remains blank or empty. All
passwords are case-sensitive, so type UPPER and lower case carefully.
This section continues the procedure for installing Magellan CCS Navigator on a PC that has all the
required third-party software installed and a current or previous version of a CCS control software
application.
When the Previous Installation Detected box appears, complete these steps:
1. Click Yes on the Previous Installation Detected box.
A query box asks if you want to continue installation.
2. Click Yes.
An Administrator Logon box appears.
3. Type in the appropriate password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)
4. Click Log On.
The Database Upgrade box appears, showing three options:
 Upgrade existing databases
 Upgrade existing databases and alarm logs
 Start over with new databases (Overwrites the existing databases)
5. Select an option, and then click Next>.
The SNMP Trap Conversion Rules Upgrade dialog box appears, showing two options:
 Replace overwrites the previous installed SNMPRuleBase.xml with a new version with new
"Traps to Alarms" conversion rules for new SNMP devices.
 Keep does not replace the SNMPRuleBase.xml database and retains local "Traps to Alarms"
conversion rules for your own SNMP devices that were created using the SNMP Trap
Configuration tool.
6. Select an option, and then click Next>.
The Previous Installation Folder Detected box appears.
7. Click Yes to accept this folder as the destination for the new setup.
The Start Copying Files box appears.
8. Click Next> to continue.
An information box advises that the setup application will save the existing users directory to a
specified backup directory.
Regardless of the option selected earlier in the Database Upgrade box, the setup application will
create a backup folder containing the old user database files.
9. Click OK to close the information box.
If you are upgrading the user database files, the setup application logs the conversion activity and
shows the log on the screen in the Database Upgrade box.
10. Read the log to check whether all files successfully converted, and then click OK to close the log.
11. When the setup program finishes, click Finish.
If you are upgrading your Magellan CCS Navigator installation from a previous version, and you have a
configured CCS Router, and you have some pages with rules or objects referring to the router, you may
need to modify the router configuration. For more information, please refer to Introduction to Routing
Components (on page 656).
If you are upgrading from Navigator 5.3 or earlier and would like to upgrade to Navigator 5.4 64-bit, see
Upgrading from Navigator 5.3 to Navigator 5.4 64-Bit (on page 33).
Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.

After upgrading from a previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator, the positions of docked windows
may change. You will need to drag and drop the Navigation panel (on the right) to the left side of your
screen in Magellan CCS Navigator.
Upgrading from Navigator 5.3 to Navigator 5.4 64-Bit

If you have PRODUCTNAME 5.3 and want to install PRODUCTNAME 5.4 64-bit, and you need to keep the
router database, follow these steps:
1. Upgrade PRODUCTNAME 5.3 to PRODUCTNAME 5.4 32-bits version.
2. Backup the router database.
3. Uninstall PRODUCTNAME 5.4 32-bits version.
4. Reboot windows to clean up Pilot-Home.
5. Install PRODUCTNAME 5.4 64-bits version.
6. Restore the router database.
If you do not need to keep the router database, follow these steps:
1. Uninstall PRODUCTNAME 5.3.
2. Reboot windows to clean up Pilot-Home.
3. Install PRODUCTNAME 5.4 64-bits version.
Note: When using the backup/restore utility, pages created in a 64-Bit version of Navigator will not
open in 32-bit versions of Navigator, and pages created in the 32-bit version will not open in 64-bit
versions.
Configuring SNMP Control

If you are using Windows Server 2008 as your operating system, and SNMP Control fails to self-register
when installing Navigator, follow these steps:
1. Install ‘Microsoft Visual C++ 2008 Service Pack 1 Redistributable Package MFC Security Update’.
You can download this file from the internet.
2. Enable the Desktop Experience feature (Start > Administrative Tools > Server Manager > Features >
Add Features).
Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software

Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software.
For best results, remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software by using the automatic Add/Remove
Programs application or the Uninstall program.
Only if both the automatic removal methods fail to delete all Magellan CCS Navigator software
components should you use the manual method for removing the software.

• Using the Add or Remove Programs Application (on page 34)
• Using the Uninstall Program (on page 35)
• Manually Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software (on page 35)
Using the Add or Remove Programs Application

CAUTION
If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has

connected Clients, those Clients will stop working.
To remove the CCS Navigator software with the Windows Add/Remove Programs application, an
Administrator user must complete these steps:
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and click Control Panel.
This will show the Control Panel application icons, including the Add/Remove Programs icon.
2. Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.
The Install/Remove tab of the Add/Remove Programs Properties box will appear.
3. Scroll down the list of installed programs, and select this program:
Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.]
VersionNo. represents a version number of the software targeted for removal.
4. Click Add/Remove.
A Confirm File Deletion box appears.
5. Click Yes.
6. (Magellan CCS Navigator Server only) Another warning appears letting you know that removing the
software will cause all connected Magellan CCS Navigator Clients to stop operating.
7. Click Yes.
(Magellan CCS Navigator Servers only) Another warning may appear, informing you that Router
Service is operating.
8. Click Yes to disable the Routing Service.
9. Click Yes to continue the removal process.
10. When the program has finished removing the application from the computer, click OK on each of
the two open boxes to close them.
Using the Uninstall Program

To remove the CCS Navigator software using the Uninstall program, an Administrator user must
complete these steps:
1. Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), select Magellan CCS Navigator
[VersionNo.], and then click Uninstall.
VersionNo. represents the CCS Navigator software version number.
2. When a Confirm File Deletion box appears, click Yes.
3. When asked if you want to continue, click Yes.
4. When the program finishes removing the application, click OK to close the Remove Programs from
Your Computer box.
5. Click OK to close the Add/Remove Programs box.
Manually Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software

CAUTION
If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has

connected Magellan CCS Navigator Clients, those Clients will
stop working.
Use this method for removing the CCS Navigator software only if both the automatic methods for
removing the software fail to remove all its components.
To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these general steps:
1. Delete the Magellan CCS Navigator folder and its contents. See Deleting the Magellan CCS Navigator
Folder (on page 35).
2. Remove the Magellan CCS Navigator software components from the Windows Registry. See
Removing Components from the Windows Registry (on page 36).
Deleting the Magellan CCS Navigator Folder

To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator folder from the PC, an Administrator user must
1. Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
2. On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed, browse to the
location where the database files are stored.
The typical path is: c:\Program files\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator. If you have
upgraded to CCS Navigator from an existing CoPilot or Pilot installation, first locate the Pilot folder
at c:\Program files\Leitch\Pilot, then right-click the Pilot folder and select Delete from
the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator folder icon and then select Delete from the resulting
shortcut menu.
4. When an alert box asks you to confirm deletion of the folder and its contents, click OK.
Deleting the Databases (Magellan CCS Navigator Server Only)

To manually remove the Magellan CCS Navigator databases from the PC, an Administrator user must
1. Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
2. On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed, browse to the
location where the database files are stored.
The typical path is: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS
3. Right-click the CCS folder icon and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut menu.
Removing Components from the Windows Registry

To remove the CCS Navigator software components from the Windows Registry, complete these steps:
1. Click Start and point to Run... to show the Run box.
2. Type regedit in the Run box, and then click OK to start the Registry Editor.
3. Locate the Navigator folder icon in these parts of the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator
4. Right-click the Navigator folder icon, and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut menu.
5. A box will ask you to confirm deletion.
Click Yes.
6. Locate the Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.] folder icon in this part of the registry:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\
CurrentVersion\Uninstall\Magellan CCS Navigator [Version No.]
VersionNo. represents the software version number.
7. Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.] folder icon, and then select Delete from the
resulting shortcut menu.
8. When an alert box asks you to confirm the deletion, click Yes.
9. Click Close in the top right corner of the Registry Editor dialog box.
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses

When you install Magellan CCS Navigator, it will automatically start with a 30-day free license with all
keys enabled. When this license expires, unless you purchase a license, your Magellan CCS Navigator
installation will revert to Build mode only. No Control mode functionality will be available.
If your license is temporary, you will see a notification on the bottom of the splash screen during logon.
This notification will indicate the number of days remaining before your license expires. To acquire a
license key, see Changing a License Key (on page 37).
License keys are described in these sections:

• NAVIGATOR-DEV License (on page 19)
• NAVIGATOR-SRV License (on page 19)
• NAVIGATOR-INT License (on page 21)
• NAVIGATOR-CLI License (on page 21)
• NAVIGATOR-RTR License (on page 22)
• ICONM-SCP License (on page 22)
• NAVIGATOR-NX License (on page 22)
Viewing Your License Key

To view your license information in Build or Control mode, choose Help > License from the main menu.
Items for which there is a key display Enabled in the Status field. Items for which no key is available
display Disabled. If your PC has a temporary license, the duration of that license is displayed.
The number of days remaining in a temporary license are displayed on the splash screen during
Magellan CCS Navigator startup.
Changing a License Key

To alter the license key on your PC, you must be logged on to Windows as an administrator.
To add a new license, follow these steps:

1. In Build mode, choose Help > License from the main menu.
A dialog box appears:
2. Provide the serial number from the License Dialog dialog box to your sales representative.
There are two ways to provide the serial number and receive your license key:
 By phone. Contact your sales representative.
 By faxing or mailing a form to Imagine Communications. This form is available by clicking License
Form. The form includes information on where it should be sent. Acrobat Reader is required.
3. Enter the provided key in the License Key field, and then click Apply.
4. Shut down and restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
The Magellan CCS Navigator license should be recognized. A restart of the PC is not required.
Backup and Restore Utility

You may sometimes need to return Magellan CCS Navigator to a previous configuration. For this,
Magellan CCS Navigator has a utility to create backups and install them. A backup includes configured
data in your Magellan CCS Navigator system.
Note: When using the backup/restore utility, pages created in a 64-Bit version of Navigator will not open
in 32-bit versions of Navigator, and pages created in the 32-bit version will not open in 64-bit versions.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be closed in order to use the Backup and Restore utility.
To launch the Backup and Restore utility, choose Start > Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator x.x Server
> Navigator Backup Restore Utility.
This window opens:
To create a backup:
1. (Optional) Enter Source information for the Magellan CCS Navigator server on your network that
you want to back up.
2. (Optional) Click Browse to choose a location to save your backup files.
3. Click Backup (backs up data locally) or Backup and Restore to Destination Server (transfers data to
an alternate server).
The Backup in Progress dialog box opens. The Log Details field documents the files that are backed
up.
When the backup is complete, message appears.
4. (Optional) Enter a name for the backup in the Backup Label field.
This field is not available until the backup has been successfully created.
If you do not enter a name for the backup, the default name includes the day and time.
5. Click Exit to close the Backup in Progress dialog box.
To view the contents of a backup, first select an item in the Recent Backups list, and then click View Log.
The Viewing Log File dialog box contains the same information as the Backup in Progress dialog box. You
can rename the backup here by entering a new name in the Backup Label field.
To restore a backup:
1. Enter Destination information for the Magellan CCS Navigator server on your network that you want
to restore files to.
2. Do one of the following:
 Select an item in the Recent Backups list.
 Click Restore External Backup to open a dialog box where you can choose a backup to restore,
possibly from a memory card or another PC.
3. Click Restore Selected Backup.
When the process is complete, a Progress is Complete message appears.

4. Click OK, and then click Exit to close the Restore in Progress dialog box.
Chapter 3
Logging In and Account Administration

All users are assigned to user groups, which can have varying levels of access to specific devices on the
CCS network.
Administrator users have access to all devices and all user accounts. However, access is limited based on
whether you are at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (NAVIGATOR-SRV license) or a Magellan CCS
Navigator Client (NAVIGATOR-CLI) workstation. An Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Client will be able to see User tabs in the Navigation pane for all users, but will still not be able to use
Build mode on the Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
Administrators set up user accounts and user groups, which define the level of access the other users
have to devices on the network. Each user account is assigned to a user group and inherits default
access level assignments. Access privileges can, however, be altered on a per-user account basis. All
users can view their own user account information and change their password.
Access privileges are divided into three groups: Presets, Devices, and Pages. These are described in
Assigning Access Rights (on page 46).
User Account Overview

All users are assigned to user groups, which can have varying levels of access to specific devices on the
CCS network.
Administrator users have access to all devices and all user accounts. However, access is limited based on
whether you are at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (NAVIGATOR-SRV license) or a Magellan CCS
Navigator Client (NAVIGATOR-CLI) workstation. An Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Client will be able to see User tabs in the Navigation pane for all users, but will still not be able to use
Build mode on the Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
Administrators set up user accounts and user groups, which define the level of access the other users
have to devices on the network. Each user account is assigned to a user group and inherits default
access level assignments. Access privileges can, however, be altered on a per-user account basis. All
users can view their own user account information and change their password.
Access privileges are divided into three groups: Presets, Devices, and Pages. These are described in
Assigning Access Rights (on page 46).
Logging On
For the first login after an installation or reinstallation of Magellan CCS Navigator, the User Name box
shows the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the User Name box shows the name
of the person who last logged on.
If the previous user had Auto Login privileges, then the Logon box does not appear as Magellan CCS
Navigator starts. You can select File > Logout to log in as a different user. See the following topics for
more information:
• Logging Off or Exiting (on page 43)
• Adding a User Account (on page 51)
By default, a new Magellan CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are upgrading
from Magellan CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
To start Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:

1. Find the Magellan CCS Navigator application icon in Windows Explorer and double-click the icon.
Or click Start, point to Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.], and then click Magellan
CCS Navigator [VersionNo.]. VersionNo. represents the Magellan CCS Navigator software
version number.
2. When the Logon box appears, perform one of these actions:
 If you are logging on as a user, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to re-enter
your user name if it already appears.)
 If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type
Administrator
Or your user name.
 If you are logging on as a Support user, type
Support
3. Tab to the Password box, and then type in the password. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)
4. (Optional, available on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs only) Click the Options button.
The Magellan CCS Navigator Server and Client must be using the same software revision in order to
for Client logon to be successful. Magellan CCS Navigator Client will not start without a valid Server.
The Login dialog box expands to show a Server menu.
When using Windows Vista or Windows 7, only a user with Administrative privileges can change the
designated Server.
5. From the Server menu, select the PC to which your Magellan CCS Navigator Client connects to store
and retrieve shared data, such as Navigator pages, panels, discoveries, etc.
6. (Optional) To modify the list of servers, select (Server Management).
The Server Management dialog box opens.
On this screen, you have the following options:

 Add—Opens a dialog box where you can add a new server.
 Modify—Opens a dialog box where you can modify the selected server (highlighted in blue on
the Server Management dialog box).
 Delete—Removes the highlighted server from the list. You are asked to confirm the deletion.
Click Close to return to the Login screen.
7. (Windows Vista or Windows 7 only) A Permissions dialog appears. Click Allow to complete the
change. Only a user with Windows Administrator privileges can make this change.
8. Click Log On.
Logging Off or Exiting

Logging off the application enables you to log on as a different user without closing the application,
while exiting closes the application.
To log off, select Log Off from the File menu.
To exit, choose one of the following methods:

• Click Close at the right end of the Title Bar.
• Select Exit from the File menu.
• Click Exit on the Log On box.
Managing User Groups

Only administrators can create or modify user groups. They can add, remove, and modify the device,
preset, and page access rights assigned to user groups.
A member of the Administrator user group can selectively enable another user or user group's access to
individual devices and to individual parameters on a device, to Graphical Navigation pages, and to
Presets. By default, all device, page, and preset access is disabled for all users and user groups other
than the Administrator user group.
After creating user groups and selecting the access rights for each user group, the administrators create
individual users and assign each user to a user group. Each user starts with the access rights of the users
group they are assigned to. An administrator can then adjust the access rights for each individual user. If
the user group’s access rights are altered after a user account is created, the user account will not
inherit the changes from the user group.
Only members of the Administrator user group can modify group permissions. However, all users can
view information about their own user account and user group.
Examples of user groups include the following.

• Administrators—a group of users who can assign and change permissions for other users on the
system
• Demo—a group of users who demonstrate the software
• Engineers—a group of users who design and implement the CCS network, have responsibility for
maintaining it, and troubleshoot problems
• Operators—a group of users who operate and monitor specific devices on the CCS network
See the following topics for help with user groups:

• Adding a User Group (on page 44)
• Removing a User Group (on page 50)
• Modifying Group Properties (on page 51)
Adding a User Group

Only Administrator users can create user groups.
To add a user group, complete these steps:

1. From the main menu, choose Options > User Groups, or if the Login Options dialog box is already
open, click the User Groups tab.
The Login Options dialog box appears.
2. Click Add Group.
The Add Group box appears.
3. Type a group name in the Group Name box, or click the down arrow and select a Windows user
group name from the list.
The Group ID field is automatically populated with a unique ID number. You can change the number.
If the number you enter has been used by another group, when you try to save the group, you will
see an error message and will not be able to close the dialog box until you either cancel or change
the Group ID to an unused number.
You can also type a brief description of the group in the Description field.
4. Under the Access rights section of the screen, select the access privileges members of this group will
have. See Assigning Access Rights (on page 46) for more information.
5. Click OK to close the Add Group box.
6. Add additional user groups by repeating steps 2-6, or click OK to close the Login Options box.
After you create a group, you can add users to it. See Adding a User Account (on page 51) for more
information.
Assigning Access Rights

User accounts inherit access rights from the user group to which they are assigned. See Managing User
Groups (on page 44) and Managing User Accounts (on page 51) for more information.
Access rights are assigned in three areas:

• Assigning Device Access Rights (on page 47)
• Assigning Preset Access Rights (on page 49)
• Assigning Page Access Rights (on page 50)
Assigning Device Access Rights

If you are an Administrator user, all the discovered and created devices appear on the Devices tab of the
User Account and User Group tab of the Login Options dialog box. If you are a General user, you will
only see the devices to which you have access rights.
Device access privileges are defined per device, and all discovered or created devices appear in the list.
The devices list on the Access Rights dialog box includes routers, salvos, frames, and modules as discrete
items.
When Monitor is checked, Control and Configuration become available, if a device has Control and
Configuration options. Some devices may not have all three options. For example, you cannot place a
check beside Control for a NUCLEUS control panel, because it doesn’t have control options.
• Monitoring - Users with this access level can view device settings and receive alarms, but not alter
settings on the device. Users must be assigned Monitoring access in order to have either Control or
Configuration access. Device monitoring is described in Network Event Diagnostics (on page 263).
• Configuration - Users with this access level can alter the IP address and upload firmware for the
device. Device configuration id described in CCS Device Configuration (on page 153).
• Control - Users with this access level can alter control and alarm settings on the device, as described
in CCS Device Control (on page 282)
When you click Control for a particular device, if that device has parametric control, the Parameters
button becomes available.
If you click Parameters, the Parameter Access Rights dialog box appears:
By default, access to all parameters is enabled when Control for a device is enabled.
Check the Enabled box to enable any advanced access rights, or clear the Enabled box to disable any
advanced access rights.
You can also click Enable All or Disable All to make universal changes to this list.
If an access right is disabled for a control parameter, the user or user group can view the value of
the parameter but not change it.
If you select the row and press the spacebar on your keyboard, all three columns are selected. See Can I
Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? (on page 350) for ways to make selecting and unselecting items in
a table.
If a user does not have access (control, monitoring or configuration) for a frame, they will not have
access to the devices in that frame either.
Assigning Preset Access Rights

Presets are stored on the Magellan CCS Navigator Server. All users can create presets for the devices to
which they have access.
By default, all presets are disabled for non-Administrator users. To change the status of a preset, click in
the Access Right Level column of the preset to be adjusted. The level for that item becomes a drop-
down menu. Click again to review the options.
• Read/Write - This user or user group will be able to load (apply) the preset and modify (save) it.
• Read Only - This user or user group can load (apply) this preset, but cannot modify (save) it.
• Disabled - The preset will not show under the Preset folder for this user or user group.
See Using Presets (on page 296) for more information.
Assigning Page Access Rights

If you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, users of NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed
workstations can be assigned privileges to access pages. If a user does not have access privileges to a
page, that page will not appear within their interface at all.
By default, all pages are disabled for non-Administrator users. To change the status of a page, place a
check in the Access Right Level field.
If a user does not have access to a page that is connected to another page that they do have access to,
they will receive an informative message.
Page access rights can also be assigned when an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server
creates a page. See Saving Graphical Navigation Pages (on page 375) for more information.
Removing a User Group

Only an Administrator user can remove user accounts and user groups. Before removing a user group,
you must first remove all user accounts associated with that group.
To remove a user account or user group, complete these steps:

1. (User accounts only) Remove all members listed in the group to be removed.
For information on how to do this, see Changing User Account Information (on page 53).
2. Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Groups.
This shows the User Groups tab of the Login Options box.
3. Select the name of the group you want to remove, and then click Remove Group.
You cannot remove the Administrators user group, because it is required for operation of the
software. If you select the Administrators user group, the Remove button is unavailable.
If you have not first deleted all members of the group, an alert box will advise you that you must
delete all group members before you can delete the group.
If you have already deleted all members of the group, an alert box asks you to confirm removal of
the group.
4. Click Yes to confirm removal of the group, or click No to cancel the action.
5. Click OK to close the User Groups box.
Modifying Group Properties

Group properties include the group name, description, and access rights to specific devices, presets, and
pages. Administrators can view and modify group properties. General users can view only their group
properties and have no editing rights for those properties.
To change the properties of a user group, complete these steps:

1. From the main menu, choose Options > User Groups, or if the Login Options dialog box is already
open, click the User Groups tab.
The User Groups tab of the Login Options box will appear.
2. Select the group whose properties you want to modify, and then click Modify Group.
In the User Group dialog box that appears, you can change the Group ID, Description, and access
rights for presets, pages, and devices. You cannot change the Group Name.
See Assigning Access Rights (on page 46) for more information.
3. Click OK to save your changes and close each open box.
Managing User Accounts

The Administrators are responsible for creating a user account and temporary password for each
person. However, users can change their passwords later.
Administrators also assign access permissions for pages, devices, and presets. Initially, permissions are
based on those assigned for the user group that a user is assigned to, but they can be modified on an
individual basis. See Managing User Groups (on page 44) for more information.
Any user can view their own user account information and change their own password. Only
Administrators can perform other tasks related to user accounts.
See these topics for further information on user accounts:

• Adding a User Account (on page 51)
• Changing User Account Information (on page 53)
• Changing User Account Information (on page 53)
• Changing a Password (on page 54)
Adding a User Account

To add, remove or modify a user account, an Administrator user must make changes in the User
Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
To add a user account, an Administrator user must complete these steps:

1. Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Accounts to show the User Accounts tab.
2. Click Add User to show the User Account box.
3. Type the new user's name in the User Name box, or click the down arrow and select a Windows
user name from the drop-down list.
4. Select a user group for the new user from the Group list.
5. Type the user password twice, once in the New box and again in the Confirm box.
Passwords are case-sensitive, so type UPPER and lower case characters carefully.
6. Click OK to close the User Accounts dialog box, and then OK on the Login Options dialog box to save
your changes.
Removing a User Account

Only an administrator user can remove other user accounts.
To remove a user account, complete these steps:

1. Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click User Accounts.
This shows the User Accounts tab of the Login Options box.
2. Select the user name you want to remove, and then click Remove User to show the Remove User
Account box.
The Remove User button will activate when you select the name of a user account that can be
removed. You cannot remove an Administrator user.
3. Click Yes to confirm the account removal in the Remove User Account box.
Select the Make a Backup Directory on Removal box to create a backup of the account information,
or clear the box if you do not want a backup of the information.
4. Click OK to close the Login Options box.
Changing User Account Information

Administrators can change the user ID, group assignment, access privileges, and password of any user
account other than their own. To change user account information, an Administrator user must
1. From the main menu, choose Options > User Accounts.
2. Select the name of the user whose information you want to change.
3. Click Modify User to open the User Account box for the selected user.
You can change all the information on the screen except the user name.
Viewing User Account Information

General users cannot change their own access privileges for devices, pages, or presets. However, they
can view the list of devices, pages, and presets they have been assigned access to. If you are a general
user and need to see this information, follow these steps:
1. Click User Accounts on the Options menu.
2. Click Modify User on the User Accounts tab.
In the Access Rights section of the screen, click on the Devices, Presets and Pages tabs to see the items
that are listed.
Changing a Password
Administrators can change other account and group information. General users can only change their
password.
An Administrator user will initially assign passwords, but general users can change the assigned
password. If a general user forgets their password, an Administrator user can assign a new password.
See Changing User Account Information (on page 53).
To change a password, complete these steps:

1. Click User Accounts on the Options menu.
2. Click Modify User on the User Accounts tab.
3. In the Password section of the User Account box, type the new password into the New box.
4. Type the password again, exactly as before, into the Confirm box.
Passwords are case-sensitive, so use the same combination of upper and lower case characters each
time you type your password.
5. Click OK to close the User Account box and then click OK to close the Login Options box.
Administering User Logs

If you are an Administrator user, you can document usage of the software application for
troubleshooting and security purposes. You can log information about user names, passwords, log ons,
log outs, and failed log on attempts in a logon database.
See these topics for further information on specific tasks:

• Creating a User Log (on page 55)
• Viewing the User Log (on page 55)
Creating a User Log

An Administrator user can configure the software to save user logon activity to a file. To create a User
Log file, complete these steps:
1. Click Log On... on the Options menu.
This shows the Log On tab of the Login Options box.
2. Select the check boxes of the Event Logging Options you want to appear in your log; clear the check
boxes of any options you do not want to appear in your log. The options are to log user logons, log
user logouts, and log failed user logons.
3. Set the maximum size of your log file by typing in the desired number of megabytes.
When the log file reaches its maximum size, the application will rename the file and begin a new log
file with the current date stamp.
4. Click Clear Log to clear the current contents of the log file, if any.
5. Click OK to save your changes to the log file set up and close the Login Options box.
Viewing the User Log

General users cannot view the user log, but Administrators can view the log if they have enabled the log
feature.
To view the user activity log, complete these steps:

1. Point to Options on the menu bar, and then click Log On.
2. When the Login Options box appears, select the Log tab.
Events are logged in the Log On Events section of the Log tab.
3. Click Load Events to refresh the list of log on events.
4. Select All logged events to show all the logged events at once, or enter a maximum number of
events to show at once in the Maximum number box.
Chapter 4
Interface Overview
The Magellan CCS Navigator interface enables you to discover, configure, upgrade, monitor, and control
CCS-enabled devices from a central PC, even if the devices are in different locations around the world.
Setting the Operational Mode

There are two operational modes, each representing a different way of using the software applications
and their built-in tools. The operational modes are as follows:
• Build mode has tools to build graphical representations of the devices on the CCS network and
configure those devices.
• Control mode has tools for controlling and diagnosing problems with devices on the CCS network.
On a PC running a NAVIGATOR-CLI license, only Control mode is available. PCs running other Magellan
CCS Navigator licenses can switch between Build and Control modes.
If you have activated the status bar, the name of the active operational mode shows in a cell at the right
end of the status bar.
The operational mode cell shows a colored background that changes with the operational mode: yellow
for Build mode, and green for Control mode.
Table 2: Tools Available in Each Operational Mode

Tool Build Control
Navigation Yes Yes
Diagnostics No Yes
Control No Yes
Graphical Navigation Yes Yes
Signal Monitor Yes Yes
Discovery Yes No
Parameters (with NAVIGATOR-INT license only) Yes No
Configuration Yes View only
Software Upgrade Yes No
Rules and Macros Yes Yes
Custom Properties No Yes
Standalone Yes Yes
SNMP Yes Yes
The tools you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See Managing Magellan
CCS Navigator Licenses (on page 36) for more information.
Magellan CCS Navigator provides two ways of setting the operational mode:
• To change operational mode from the Status Bar, right-click the Operational Mode cell at the right
end of the Status Bar, and select the name of the mode you want from the resulting shortcut menu.
The active mode has a highlighted colored square to the left of its name.
• To change operational mode from the File menu, point to File > Operational Mode, and then click the
name of the operational mode you want.
A colored rectangle appears to the left of each of the operational modes. The Control rectangle is
green, and the Build rectangle is yellow. The rectangle of the current operational mode is selected
to indicate that it is active.
If your license key expires, Magellan CCS Navigator will start in Build mode. You will be unable to switch
to Control mode. You cannot log into Magellan CCS Navigator if a NAVIGATOR-CLI license has expired.
For information on purchasing licensing keys, see Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses (on page
36).
Setting the Operational Language

During Magellan CCS Navigator installation, the Setup language is configured to either English, Japanese,
or Chinese. When Magellan CCS Navigator is subsequently started, it uses the Setup language as its
operational language.
Static areas of Magellan CCS Navigator appear in the operational language when it is different from
English. The following areas of the interface appear in the Operational language:
• Menus, tabs, column headers, dialog boxes, Wizards, and status bars
• Main folders of the Navigation pane, except the contents of the Catalog folder and its sub-folders
• User messages, including alerts, warnings, informational notices, and questions
Magellan CCS Navigator displays data that is received from a device or module in English, regardless of
the selected operational language. Information that will always appear in English includes the following:
• Magellan CCS Navigator user manuals and on-line help, and product sheets and user manuals in the
Catalog folder
• Some portions of some Configuration dialog boxes, including the Version tab and special
Configuration interfaces for NUCLEUS, NEO LCP/RCP, and NEO Frames (field names in Japanese or
Chinese only)
• Device-specific information such as parameters and alarms on Control dialog boxes and in Access
Rights interfaces, and alarm information
Entering data to a router database while in Japanese or Chinese language mode could cause data
corruption. Before entering router data, switch your keyboard settings to English.
While text can be entered in Magellan CCS Navigator in any language, some areas of the interface will
only support data entry in English, even when an alternate operational language is selected. When you
enter text in some fields that can only accept data entry in English, Magellan CCS Navigator
automatically changes the keyboard layout from the selected operational language back to English.
Fields where this will happen include:
• X75 machine name
• QSEE6800+ channel name
• Alias (name) for any parameter in Favorites
• NUCLEUS name, category name, and Configuration submenu
• NEO SuiteView command string
If you change the keyboard to a different operational language to force alternate data entry in one of
these fields, data corruption could occur.
When Magellan CCS Navigator is the recipient of forwarded alarms or traps containing Unicode text
description, you need to configure Windows Regional and Languages Options (in the Control Panel
settings) for the alarm listening PC, in order to display Unicode text properly. Select the corresponding
language in the Language for non-Unicode programs setting.
Magellan CCS Navigator Trap Agent does not support Japanese or Chinese.
Installing Files for East Asian Languages

If you will be switching the operational language to Japanese or Chinese, files for East Asian languages
must be installed. These are not part of the standard Windows install. To add files for East Asian
languages, follow these steps:
1. Open the Windows Control Panel.
In Windows XP in Classic mode, you can open the Control Panel from the task bar by choosing Start
> Settings > Control Panel.
2. Click Regional and Language Options, and then click the Languages tab.
3. Click Install Files for East Asian languages.
You may be prompted to insert a Windows CD/DVD, or to browse for the location of files.
4. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
You may have to reboot the computer for changes to take effect.
Changing the Operational Language

To change Magellan CCS Navigator’s operational language, do one of the following:
• Select Tools > English to set the operational language to English, and then reboot Magellan CCS
Navigator for the change to take effect.
• Select Tools > (Simplified Chinese) to set the operational language to Chinese,
and then reboot Magellan CCS Navigator for the change to take effect.
• Select Tools > to set the operational language to Japanese, and then reboot Magellan CCS
Navigator for the change to take effect.
Tools
Magellan CCS Navigator has a number of built-in tools, but you can configure the application to use
standalone (non-Magellan CCS Navigator) tools as well.
For more information on various types of tools, see the following:

• Toolbars (on page 61)
• Built-In Tools (on page 63)
• Navigation Pane (on page 64)
• Status Bar (on page 70)
• Plug-ins (on page 71)
Toolbars
Magellan CCS Navigator’s Standard toolbar has many familiar Windows-style tools.
Table 3: Tools on the Standard Toolbar

Alternate Keyboard
Tool Icon Function
Menu Item Shortcut
New In Build mode, opens the New Page Wizard; not File > New
available in Control mode (Not available with
NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
Alternate Keyboard
Tool Icon Function
Menu Item Shortcut
Open Opens a Browse dialog. Select a graphical File > Open
navigation page and then click Open (Not
available with NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
Delete Opens a Delete dialog box, where you can File > Delete
select Navigator pages for deletion
Save Saves the content in the currently active dialog File > Save
box
Save All Saves all unsaved content on all open dialog File > Save All
boxes
Print Prints the current Magellan CCS Navigator page File > Print
or file; only available when a Graphical
Navigation page or panel is open
Print Preview Shows what the current Magellan CCS Navigator File > Print
page will look like when printed; only available Preview
when a Graphical Navigation page or panel is
open
Refresh Updates the status of the selected Amino or
SNMP device
Reloads the data from a Magellan CCS View > Reload
Reload Navigator Server
Undo Undoes the last action in the active Navigation, Edit > Undo CTRL + Z
Graphical Navigation, dialog box (you can
enable up to 10 levels of Undo actions)
Redo Redoes the last action in the active Navigation, Edit > Redo CTRL + Y
Graphical Navigation, dialog box
You can enable up to 10 levels of Redo actions
Cut Cuts a selected object or objects from the Edit > Cut CTRL + X
current location to the Clipboard for use in a
subsequent Paste operation
Copy Copies the selected object or objects to the Edit > Copy CTRL + C
Clipboard for possible use in multiple Paste
operations
Paste Pastes an object currently on the Clipboard Edit > Paste CTRL + V
as the result of a previous Cut or Copy
operation
Delete Deletes the object or objects selected (Note: Edit > Delete CTRL + Z or
deleted objects cannot be pasted) DELETE
Alternate Keyboard
Tool Icon Function
Menu Item Shortcut
Help Contents Displays the Contents tab for Online Help
Context- Displays the associated help file for a right-

Sensitive Help clicked object
To show a toolbar, point to View > Toolbars on the menu bar and click the name of the toolbar you
want to display.
A check mark appears to the left of that toolbar’s name on the View > Toolbars submenu when the
toolbar is selected.
To hide a toolbar, click the View menu, point to Toolbars, and then click the name of the toolbar you
want to hide.
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, NAVIGATOR-RTR, ICONM-SCP-LITE, or ICONM-SCP

license, Magellan CCS Navigator also has a Cr eate Objects toolbar and a Graphical Navigation toolbar,
which appear across the top of the Graphical Navigation page or panel. See Using the Graphical
Navigation Toolbar (on page 500).
Built-In Tools
Built-in tools, accessible from the Tools menu, enable you to perform tasks by executing actions in their
tool dialog boxes.
Table 4: Built-in Tools

Tool Purpose Reference
Navigation Navigate the CCS devices on the network and Network View Construction (on
build hierarchical views of the network page 118)
Diagnostics View events and alarms for devices on your CCS Network Event Diagnostics (on
network page 263)
Control Adjust parameters for configured devices CCS Device Control (on page 282)
Graphical Creates an interactive graphical interface with Introduction to Graphical

Navigation your network that you can configure to perform Navigation (on page 371)
tasks
Signal Monitor View output video from devices on the CCS Video Output Monitoring (on
network page 312)
Discovery Discover the devices on the CCS network CCS Device Discovery (on page
99)
Tool Purpose Reference

Parameters View the favorite parameter and alarm lists for a
Introduction to InterfaceNAV (on
device (available with the NAVIGATOR-INT
page 613)
license only)
Configuration Set the IP address of a CCS device, configure it, CCS Device Configuration (on
transfer files to it, and see version information page 153)
Software Upgrade Send new software to devices on the network Upgrading Software (on page
161)
Rules and Provides tools to use events to trigger actions Defining Rules (on page 429)
Macros...
Custom Properties Displays variables for a specific object Custom Properties Viewer (on
page 67)
Standalone Start standalone (non-CCS) programs from the
Standalone Tools (on page 73)
Tools menu
SNMP If you have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, two Setting SNMP Options (on page
sub-options will be available 86)
• Traps provides tools to create parameters and
alarms from trap data sent to Magellan CCS
Navigator
• Agent provides tools to configure Magellan
CCS Navigator to forward trap information to
other SNMP devices
Navigation Pane
The Navigation pane contains the resource tree, a hierarchical representation of the content and
organization of the CCS devices. Administrator users on a PC with a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-DEV,
or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can build custom views of the resources on a network in this pane.
The Navigation tool provides resource icons to use as building blocks, customizable text colors, and
specialized informational columns. You can rename the icons and use them to represent other objects.
Figure 3: Sample Navigation Pane
Figure 4: Navigation Pane with Open Network Folder
The Navigation pane has tabs, or pages, showing different views of the CCS network.
• Administrators have a System tab and a User tab for each general user that has been defined. The
System tab shows all the devices that are available on the network, and each User tab shows only the
devices that specific user can configure, control, or monitor.
• General users have a User tab only, which is customized to show only the devices the user can
configure, control, or monitor.
Extensive information about the Navigation pane can be found in Network View Construction (on page
118).
Discovery Pane
The Discovery pane tracks the progress of the Discovery tool in finding CCS devices connected to the
network. You will use this pane and its options to control the discovery process and narrow its scope of
operation, thereby quickening the process.
For information on using the Discovery pane, see CCS Device Discovery (on page 99).
Parameters Panel
The Parameters panel appears if you have the NAVIGATOR-INT license only.
When you click on a device in the Navigation panel while in Build mode, the Parameters panel updates
to display the favorite parameters and alarms for that device. If favorites are not defined for a device,
the panel displays all parameters and alarms for that device.
For information on using the Parameters panel, see Introduction to InterfaceNAV (on page 613).
Custom Properties Viewer

The Custom Properties viewer appears in Control mode only. It is closed by default, but you can open it
by choosing Tools > Custom Properties from the main menu.
Table 5: Custom Properties Panel

Column Function
Name Each specific variable has a name that is either generated by the wizard that created
the page, or is created by the user that created the rule.
Runtime Value The current value of the property; click Refresh to see the most up-to-date value
Initial Value The value that the property had when it was defined in Build mode
Scope The page(s) where the value is used; Global Properties apply systemically to all
pages
Description A user-defined or wizard-defined explanation of the property
For information on using custom properties, see Introduction to Graphical Navigation (on page 371).
Configuration Dialog Boxes

A Configuration dialog box is where administrators can adjust the network settings of a device, transfer
files, see version information for the device hardware and software, and perform other configuration
tasks specific to the device. Topic tabs, appearing at the top of the dialog box, divide the information
into pages by subject.
For information on using Configuration dialog boxes, see CCS Device Configuration (on page 153).
Software Upgrade Tool

The Software Upgrade tool allows you to select one or more devices of the same type to be upgraded in
parallel using the transferred software package. It automates the backup and upgrade process so it can
be run in the background, and includes event and error logging.
For more information on upgrading software, see Upgrading Software (on page 161) and Transferring
Files With the File Transfer Tab (on page 170).
The types of devices you can control depends on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on your PC. See
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses (on page 36) for more information.
You will be able to open Control dialog boxes for all the items to which you have control or monitoring
access on your CCS network.
Graphical Navigation Dialog Boxes

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create Graphical Navigation pages in
Build mode, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to monitor and
control pages and panels in Control mode.
If you want to create router pages only, you can also use a NAVIGATOR-RTR license. (Router
functionality is also included in the NAVIGATOR-SRV license.)
In Build mode, you can create Graphical Navigation dialog boxes, and you can configure and update the
content of Graphical Navigation pages.
General users, and administrator users when the software is in Control mode, can activate and operate
Graphical Navigation pages.
Graphical Navigation pages can provide control and monitoring access to devices, can have rules made
up of events and actions, You can configure a page to provide visual feedback to let you know that
Magellan CCS Navigator has successfully completed a task or action.
Figure 5: Graphical Navigation Pane showing an FR-3903 Frame and its Component Modules
In Control mode, you can set an active Graphical Navigation pane to Full Screen mode from the main
menu by selecting View > Full Screen. In Full Screen mode, toolbars and scroll-bars are hidden. To return
to a smaller, resizable page, either click the Close Full Screen button on the Full Screen toolbar, or press
ESC on your keyboard.
See Introduction to Graphical Navigation (on page 371) for information on creating and operating
Graphical Navigation dialog boxes.
Status Bar
The Status Bar shows two cells, one on each end of the bar, located at the bottom of the main
application window.
The cell on the left end shows a message describing the operational status. The operational status cell
will also show a one-line Help message as you roll the mouse over menu options.
The operational mode cell on the right end of the Status Bar shows a colored background that changes
as the currently active operational mode changes: yellow for build, and green for control.
If you right click in the Status Bar, you open the Options shortcut menu.
The Status Bar does not show unless the Status Bar option in the View menu is selected, indicated by a
check mark to the left of the title.
See Setting the Operational Mode (on page 57) for more information.
Plug-ins
Use the Plug-in Options dialog box to view the plug-in options that are installed on your PC. Some plug-
ins have configuration options that are accessible from the Plug-in dialog box.
To see the plug-ins that are installed, complete these steps:

1. Click Plug-ins on the Options menu. The Plug-ins dialog box appears.
2. Review the Configure Plug-ins list.

3. Click OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
Advanced Router Control

Using the Advanced router control plug-in, you can monitor and control a wide range of Imagine
Communications routers. Magellan CCS Navigator may be used as the only controlling device, or it may
be used in conjunction with traditional hardware control panels. Note that you can access multiple
routing views on the same workstation simultaneously.
To build pages, you must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license or NAVIGATOR-RTR license.
You can create a basic router control panel using tools that are available in the Advanced Router Control
plug-in, or using the wizard if you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-RTR license. You can use the
Wizard to create nine different types of router control panels. All panels contain tools to detect and
indicate signal presence via the router engine for devices that support these features. Panels also trigger
alarms for power supplies, fans, I/O boards and logic cards and monitor connection status of all devices.
For more information, see Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656) .
AminoSTB Control
With the Amino STB plugin, you can remotely monitor an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top box.
For more information, see Setting the Amino STB Tab (on page 136).
Interface control
The Interface Control plug-in allows you to to control and monitor processing devices. This plug-in is
available with NAVIGATOR-DEV, NAVIGATOR-SRV, and NAIVAGATOR-CLI licenses. See Introduction to
InterfaceNAV (on page 613).
Master Control
This plug-in is available on PCs that have an ICONM-SCP or ICONM-SCP-LITE license. A panel created
with this license can fully control IconMaster switchers, and allows faster access to many of the
switcher’s operational feature submenus and audio meters. This license is designed to work optimally
with a 19" touchscreen monitor (1280 × 1024 recommended).
For more information on configuring IconMaster Software Control Panel, see Introduction to ISCP (on
page 511).
SNMP Control
If you have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you will be able to build Magellan CCS Navigator pages to
communicate with SNMP enabled devices (SNMP is a communication protocol like TCP/IP, FTP and
HTTP), and configure Magellan CCS Navigator to forward received traps and information to other SNMP
devices. When combined with an NAVIGATOR-INT license, you can create parameters and alarms from
SNMP traps, and add individual controls to Graphical Navigation pages and panels.
For more information on using SNMP with Magellan CCS Navigator, see SNMP Plug-in (on page 483) and
Setting SNMP Options (on page 86).
SuiteView Control
In order to work with the SuiteView multisource display processor, within Magellan CCS Navigator, you
will build a Graphical Navigation page. On that page, you can set rules for conditional events and actions
for communicating with SuiteView.
For more information on controlling SuiteView, see SuiteView Plug-in (on page 489).
Standalone Tools
Standalone tools are applications that normally run outside of the Magellan CCS Navigator software,
such as Imagine Communications Layout Designer, ZUpgrade, and ZConfigurator (for PredatorII devices).
You can configure Magellan CCS Navigator to start these independent applications from the Tools menu.
• Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu (on page 73)
• Starting a Standalone Program (on page 74)
• Removing a Standalone Program (on page 74)
Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu

To add a standalone program to the Tools menu, complete these steps:
1. Click the Tools menu, point to Standalone, and then click Customize....
2. On the Customize box, click Add.
This shows the words [new tool] in both the Menu Contents box and the Menu Text box.
3. Select [new tool] in the Menu Text box, and then type in the name of the standalone program you
want to add.
For instance, if you want to start Microsoft® Excel from within Magellan CCS Navigator, type:
Microsoft Excel
4. Click Browse to the right of the Command box.
5. Browse in the Select Program box for the path to the command line for the standalone program.
6. Click the name of the program, and then click Open.
This closes the Select Program box, returns you to the Customize box, and shows the path to the
standalone program in the Command box.
7. Click OK to close the Customize box and save the choices.
The name of the application that you entered in the Menu Text box shows as an option on the Tools
> Standalone submenu.
Starting a Standalone Program

Before you can start a standalone program from the Tools menu, you must first configure the path and
name of the standalone application. See Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools Menu (on page 73).
To start a standalone program from the Tools menu, click the Tools menu, point to Standalone, and
then click the name of the standalone program.
Removing a Standalone Program

You can remove previously configured options that start standalone (non-Magellan CCS Navigator)
applications from within Magellan CCS Navigator. To remove a standalone program from the Tools
menu, complete these steps:
1. Point to Tools > Standalone on the menu bar and click Customize....
When the Customize box shows, the names of all standalone programs configured to start from
within Magellan CCS Navigator show in the Menu Contents box.
2. Select the name of the program you want to delete in the Menu Contents box, and then click
Remove.
Now the name of the program no longer appears as an option on the Tools > Standalone >
Customize... submenu.
Repeat step 2 for the names of any other programs you want to delete from the Menu Contents
box.
3. Click OK.
This closes the Customize box and saves the changes.
Using Interface Dialog Boxes

In Magellan CCS Navigator, you are able to have multiple dialog boxes open simultaneously.
To maximize a dialog box, double-click the dialog box title or click the square Maximize button in the
top-right corner of the dialog box.
In the maximized state, a dialog box has a Restore button in the top-right corner. Click Restore to return
the dialog box to its previous size.
If a dialog box is not maximized, you can drag any border (top, bottom, left, and right). To resize the
dialog box, click and hold down the left mouse button while dragging the handle that appears on the
corner of the dialog box.
To move a dialog box, click within the dialog box title and keep the button depressed while dragging the
dialog box. To complete the move, release the mouse button.
To close a dialog box, click the Close button.
Docking or Floating a Tool Dialog Box

You can dock each of these tool dialog boxes to a border of the main or float the tool dialog box to
another location within the main screen. A floating tool dialog box has a black title bar that bears
the name of the dialog box in reverse (white) type.
Figure 6: Docked Discovery Pane (Left) and Floating Discovery Pane (Right)
Showing and Closing a Tool Dialog Box

To show a tool dialog box, click the tool name on the Tools menu.
If the tool is open and active, the tool icon on the Tools menu is selected, and the dialog box is open.
Figure 7: Selected Navigation Icon
If the tool is closed and inactive, the tool icon is not selected, and the dialog box is closed.
Figure 8: Unselected Navigation Icon
To close a tool dialog box, click the Close box in the upper right corner of the dialog box, or point to
Tools and click the tool name to deselect the name.
In managing the CCS network, you will be monitoring many devices at once, each with its own multipage
sets of control parameters. You have several ways of keeping up with all of the open Control,
Configuration and Signal Monitor dialog boxes:
• Stack all the open dialog boxes on top of each other, with only the top dialog box in view. Then, to
move between dialog boxes in the stack, press CTRL + TAB.
• Cascade the dialog boxes diagonally across the application dialog box, using the Window menu’s
Cascade option. Then, to activate a specific dialog box and move it to the top of the cascading pile,
click the dialog box’s title bar.
Figure 9: Cascading Dialog Boxes
• Tile the dialog boxes horizontally or vertically, using one of the Tile options in the Window menu.
Then, to activate a dialog box, click its title bar.
Figure 10: Tiled Control Dialog Boxes
• Show all of the open Control, Signal Monitor, Navigator, Configuration, and Software Upgrade dialog
boxes as tabbed pages in a workbook, using workbook mode. Workbook mode shows each dialog box
as an individual multipage tab in a workbook of open device dialog boxes. Workbook tabs, which
appear at the bottom of the workbook dialog box, show a tool icon to the left of the name of the
device the dialog box represents.
The workbook below shows the top dialog box in a workbook containing two open configuration
dialog boxes, each with a tab at the bottom of the workbook dialog box. Each configuration dialog
box is divided into multiple topic tabs (pages). Topic tabs appear at the top of the workbook dialog
box.
To enable Workbook mode, point to View in the menu bar and click Workbook Mode. A check mark
appears to the left of Workbook Mode when the mode is active.
To stack, cascade, or tile multiple dialog boxes, you must disable workbook mode and then select
the dialog box style you want from the Window menu. To disable workbook mode, point to View on
he menu bar and click Workbook mode to clear the check mark to the left of Workbook Mode.
Using the Window Menu

To show the Window menu, click Window on the menu bar.
Use the Window menu to change the way that multiple dialog boxes cascade, stack, or tile inside the
main screen of the application.
The Window menu contains the following options:

Window Menu
Command Function
Always On Top Ensures that Magellan CCS Navigator is the topmost program for controlling and
monitoring on your PC monitor
Command Function
Cascade Stacks open Control, Configuration, Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes with each higher dialog box in the stack offset slightly to the bottom right
Tile Horizontally Horizontally tiles open Control, Configuration, Graphical Navigation, and Signal
Monitor dialog boxes
Tile Vertically Vertically tiles open Control, Configuration, Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor
dialog boxes
Layout... Opens a dialog box where you can save and retrieve different screen configurations
See Using Interface Dialog Boxes (on page 74).
Close Closes the selected Control, Configuration, Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor
dialog boxes
Close All Closes all open Control, Configuration, Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes
Resource Name Titles of open Control, Configuration, Graphical Navigation, and Signal Monitor dialog
boxes list in the menu as options. If no such dialog boxes are open, no titles list.
Working with Layouts

Only an Administrator with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create and modify
layouts. General users with NAVIGATOR-CLI licenses can load layouts.
Within Magellan CCS Navigator, there are many dialog boxes that can be moved and repositioned. A
layout is a snapshot of the current screen configuration, including the operational mode and the
position of all dialog boxes, toolbars, menus, docking panels, Navigator pages, and Control and
Configuration dialog boxes.
You can use a layout over and over on different events throughout Magellan CCS Navigator. You can
create a rule to recall a layout. See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action (on page 445) for more
information.
Access the tools for working with layouts by choosing Window > Layouts... from the main menu.
The Layout dialog box appears, listing the existing layouts.
Layouts can only be created in control mode. You can either rearrange all your dialog boxes before
opening the Layout dialog box or with the Layout dialog box open.
To create a layout, click the Add Layout button. The Add Layout dialog box appears. Type a name for the
layout and click OK. Magellan CCS Navigator records the current screen configuration.
General users on NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs can load layouts, but not create or modify them.
You can load any layout at any time by selecting it in the Layouts list, and then clicking Load Layout. The
Magellan CCS Navigator screen is rearranged according to the current layout.
To change a layout, select it in the Layouts menu at the left of the screen and then click Modify Layout.
• If you do not change the name of the layout, the changes you make will replace the current layout. If
you change the name, a new layout will be created.
• If you select Update layout entries, Magellan CCS Navigator replaces the modified layout with the
current positioning of all dialog boxes.
To delete a layout from the menu, select the layout from the list and click Remove Layout. A layout can
only be deleted if any rules that use it are deleted.
Property Sheets
A property sheet is a dialog box that shows the properties of an object in the interface. The Navigation
Properties box, the Diagnostics Properties box, and the Object Properties box are all property sheets.
ProcedureChanging Pages in a Multipage Property Sheet
If the property sheet has multiple pages, each page will have a tab with text for the title of the tab.
Tabs represent different pages in a multipage property sheet.
To change to another page in the property sheet, select the tab for that page with a click of the mouse.
Procedure‘Pinning’ a Property Sheet Open and Closed
To keep a property sheet open while you complete other tasks, click the Push-Pin icon in the top left
corner of the property sheet.
Figure 11: Unselected Push-Pin Icon
To close a property sheet that you have "pinned" open, first click the selected Push-Pin icon and then
click the Close button.
Figure 12: Selected Push-Pin Icon
Using Menus
The menus you have available will depend on the licensing options purchased. See Managing Magellan
The menu bar may contain up to eight menu titles. Each menu contains a list of commands.
Table 6: Menus on the Menu Bar

Title Function
File Manages the operational mode, saving, logging off, and exiting
Edit Manages editing tools: Undo, Redo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete..., Clear, Replace IP, and Find
View Manages how and what the toolbars, status bar, and dialog boxes show
Tools Manages the operation of built-in tools and standalone (non-Magellan CCS Navigator) tools
that you add to the Tools menu
Options Manages the setting of Magellan CCS Navigator software options
Window Manages how dialog boxes appear in the main Magellan CCS Navigator window
Help Manages information on Magellan CCS Navigator use, accessing our website, copyrights, and
software version information
Shortcut Menus
A context or shortcut menu appears when you right-click an object. These menus contain a list
of options relevant to the selected object, the current dialog box, and the current operational mode.
Some options may be unavailable in the context imposed by the active operational mode, or the
selected item. For example, you cannot conduct a discovery in Control mode, so that option is
unavailable on the main shortcut menu for Control mode.
Likewise, you cannot perform diagnostics in Build mode, so that option is unavailable on the shortcut
menu for Build mode in the main Magellan CCS Navigator interface.
There are shortcut menus for each dialog box, and for some tables, bars, and cells. See the following
topics on shortcut menus:
• Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu (on page 116)
• Using Navigation Shortcut Menus (on page 144)
• Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu (on page 182)
• Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus (on page 269)
• Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu (on page 313)
• Using the Control Shortcut Menu (on page 292)
• Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus (on page 427)
Chapter 5
Communication Options and SNMP

Configuration
Depending on how your network is configured, you may need to set SNMP options or Serial options.
To set Communication options, your Magellan CCS Navigator PC must have one of the following licenses:
• NAVIGATOR-DEV
• NAVIGATOR-SRV
• NAVIGATOR-RTR
To set SNMP and SNMP Trap options, your Magellan CCS Navigator PC must have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license key.
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed systems and non-administrator users can view, but not set, Communication
options.
See the following topics for more information.

Setting Communication Options .............................................................. 83
Setting Serial Connection Preferences..................................................... 85
Setting SNMP Options.............................................................................. 86
Setting Communication Options

With a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-DEV license key, you can set the periodicity of the PC
communicating with devices on the network. This affects the speed at which the software recognizes a
device power failure or a loss of network connectivity.
To set the communication options, complete these steps:

1. Click Communication on the Options menu.
2. On the Keep Alive tab, select the Use keep alive check box to enable the automatic testing of all
device connections. Clear the check box to disable this feature.
3. Type in an appropriate time value and unit of measurement for Connection Idle Time for keep
alives.
The default time value is 10000, and the default unit of measurement is milliseconds.
The System Settings Change box appears, advising you to restart the computer to implement the
changes.
4. Click Yes to restart the PC.
The PC will shut down and then restart with the new settings.
See Setting Serial Connection Preferences (on page 85).
Setting Serial Connection Preferences

To configure serial communication port settings and connection preferences, you will use the Serial
Settings tab of the Communications Options dialog box.
Creating a New Device in the Serial Settings Tab

To create a new device, follow these steps:
1. Open the Communication Options box from the Options menu, and then click the Serial Settings
tab.
2. Click Add, type a device name in the Name field, and then click OK to create a new device name.
3. Change the following connection information as required:
 Port (default: COM 1)
 Bits per second (default: 57 600)
 Data bits (default: 8)
 Parity (default: None)
 Stop bits (default: 1)
 Flow control (default: None)
4. Click OK.
Editing a Previously Created Device in the Serial Settings Tab

To edit a device’s settings, follow these steps:
1. Open the Communication Options box from the Options menu, and then click the Serial Settings
tab.
2. Select an existing device by select a name from the Device Name field.
3. Change the following connection information as required:
 Port (default: COM 1)
 Bits per second (default: 57 600)
 Data bits (default: 8)
 Parity (default: None)
 Stop bits (default: 1)
 Flow control (default: None)
4. Click OK.
Setting SNMP Options

Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can configure and control SNMP devices.
These functions are described in SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan CCS Navigator (on page
86).
Magellan CCS Navigator can also act as an element manager for control and monitoring, forwarding
events such as CCS alarms and SNMP traps, as SNMP traps, to a centralized network operations center
(NOC). See SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS Navigator (on page 94).
SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan CCS Navigator

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to configure SNMP devices to work with Magellan CCS
Navigator, NUCLEUS, etc. For information on getting a license, see Managing Magellan CCS Navigator
Licenses (on page 36).
To view the list of loaded SNMP files, click Options > SNMP on the main menu.
A dialog box appears:
By default, the MIB Files to Load box on the SNMP Options box contains a list of MIB files used by
compatible equipment. Using this dialog box, you can perform the following functions:
• Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device (on page 87)
• Removing MIB files (on page 88)
• Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting (on page 88)
• Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps (on page 88)
• Setting the SNMP Trap Color (on page 88)
Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device

To add an MIB file for a SNMP device, follow these steps:
1. Copy the corresponding MIB files to the MIB subdirectory:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS\Files\mib
2. Click SNMP on the Options menu to open the SNMP Options dialog box.
3. Click Add and then select the MIB files you want to open.
The new MIB files will show under the MIB Files to Load list with a check mark. To temporarily
disable the loading of a MIB file, clear the check mark beside its name.
4. If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to acknowledge the
box, then click View Log to read the description of the load errors. Either remove the MIB files that
caused the error or add any missing MIB files. See SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear (on page 338) for
more information.
5. Click OK to accept the changes and close the SNMP Options box.
If there are a lot of files in the list, or if some files are very large, it can take several minutes for the
SNMP Options dialog box to close.
Removing MIB files

To remove MIB files from the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Select one or more MIB files under the MIB Files to Load list, and then click Remove; or to remove
all MIB files, click Remove All.
2. When a query box asks you to confirm the removal, click Yes.
Setting the SNMP Trap Color

When you change the color that traps appear, the trap color is changed for all traps in the following
places:
• The Alarm column of the Navigation pane
• The symbols border color and trap control color on Graphical Navigation pages
• Trap color in the Diagnostic window
To change the trap color, make the following setting:

1. On the SNMP Options dialog box, click Trap Color.
You can choose one of the 20 default colors,or click Other to select from a much wider palette.
This change applies to all traps.
Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting

To restore the default MIB files setting in the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these steps:
1. Click Set Default.
2. When a query box asks you to confirm the action, click Yes.
Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps

SNMP traps are shown on the Diagnostics dialog box. Since SNMP does not generically support the
concept of a cleared alarm, you should limit the number of SNMP traps to show on the Monitor tab of
the Diagnostics dialog box.
To limit the number of SNMP traps that list on the Monitor tab of the Diagnostics dialog box, complete
these steps:
1. Click SNMP on the Options menu.
2. In the SNMP Options box, set the Maximum number of SNMP traps shown...for each Device to
some value.
The default value is 1000. Once this number is reached, previous alarms for SNMP traps are
overwritten in the Monitor tab.
When this occurs, double-click the ID column of the Monitor tab to see new SNMP traps reordered
by their ID number.
If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to acknowledge the
caused the error or add any missing MIB files.
See Setting Communication Options (on page 83).
SNMP Trap Configuration

SNMP traps are notification events issued by a managed device to the network management station (i.e.
Navigator) when a significant event (not necessarily an outage, a fault, or a security violation) occurs. A
SNMP trap contains information about the event, which might be complex in nature, combining many
different bits of data into a single message.
A NAVIGATOR-SNMP license provides tools to interpret SNMP traps, so they can be treated, for
example, like alarm triggers and alarm clears. Within Navigator, you can group traps into a single trap
group. Multiple trap groups can be used to represent a single device, or you can have one group per
device.
1. From the main menu, choose Tools > SNMP > Traps.
The SNMP Trap Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the New button to add a row to the Groups table.

New rows are added at the bottom of the list.
To delete a row, click the Delete button. The selected row will be deleted, and all associated data in
the Trap Definitions field will be removed as well.
3. Under Group Name, enter a descriptive name for the specific device for which you are defining
traps.
The Group Type is automatically filled in as "Enterprise."
4. Under Trap Definitions, click Add.
The Trap Definition dialog box opens.
5. Beside Trap Name, do either of the following:

 Type a name for the customized trap.
 Click MIB.
In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to a trap. Click OK and the name of this trap
(alarm) will fill in the Trap Name field. (If you choose an invalid object, an error message will
appear.)
One or more rows will appear in the Trap Object IDs table.
6. If another trap should be associated with this trap, click Associate with existing trap and then
choose that trap from the drop-down menu.
This option could be used, for example, to associate athe trap that creates an alarm and the trap
that clears the alarm. In the Parameters pane, one trap with two states would appear.
If you click Ignore Trap it will be ignored completely, except if there are rules that use that trap.
7. Click Add to add new rows to the Trap Object IDs table, or Delete to remove rows.
With a row selected, click MIB to open an SNMP MIB Browser, and then browse to a condition that
generates a trap. Click OK, and then click the variable or parameter, and its Object ID (OID) will fill
the selected row.
8. To define rules to go with your traps, see Creating New Trap Rules (on page 91). If rules already exist
in the table, you can modify them using the following tools:
 Copy a rule by selecting it and then clicking Copy. An exact duplicate of the rule appears in the
List of Trap Rules table.
 If a rule already exists, modify it by selecting it and then clicking Modify. The dialog box that
opens is described in Creating New Trap Rules (on page 91).
 Delete a rule by selecting it and then clicking Delete.
9. Click OK to close the Trap Definition dialog box, and then OK to close the SNMP Trap Configuration
dialog box.
Creating New Trap Rules

1. Under Trap Rules on the Trap Definition dialog box, click Add.
The Trap Rule Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Enter a name for the rule. This name identifies the rule in subsequent dialog boxes.
3. If another rule should be associated with this rule, click Associate with existing rule and then
choose that rule from the drop-down box.
This option could be used, for example, to associate an alarm and the alarm that clears it. It would
mean that in the Parameters pane, only one instance of the trap would appear, and it would have
two states.
4. Under Rule Conditions, click New to add a new row.
To delete a row from this table, click Delete.
5. In the Variable field, select an object ID.
The drop-down box lists all the object IDs that are part of the trap definition.
6. (Optional) Enter a value in the Instance ID field.
7. To complete the Value field, do either of the following:
 Enter a value.
 Click Value Expression, and then complete the Bitrate Expression Builder screen that appears.
See Creating a Value Expression (on page 92).
 Click MIB, and then choose a value from the MIB Browser that appears.
8. Under Rule Actions, click New, and then select an Action Name from the drop-down box that
appears in the new row.
9. To complete the Description field, do either of the following:
 Enter substrings and/or SNMP variable values.
 Click Description Expression, and then complete the Alarm Description Builder dialog box that
appears. See Building an Alarm Description (on page 93).
If the description is entered in Japanese or Chinese, Navigator Agent will not be able to forward this
alarm properly, because these character sets are not supported by the agent.
10. On the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box, enter a Trigger time (measured in milliseconds).
This delay is used mostly for clearing traps.
11. Click OK to close the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box.
Creating a Value Expression

Value expressions help specify a specific condition, where your SNMP device may combine many bits of
data into a single trap.
1. From the Bit box, choose a Bit that pertains to the rule you are defining.
2. Beside Value, enter the value that must be met, and then click Add.
The Expression field (read-only) updates.
3. Repeat as many times as required to define the value specific to the alarm or parameter from the
string.
You can remove the selected row by clicking Remove.

4. Click OK.
Building an Alarm Description

An alarm description provides information to help operators correct the alarm condition. Before using
the Alarm Description Builder, you need to know what data that the alarm sends to Navigator when it is
triggered. You can retrieve this data by triggering the alarm.
The trap normally consists of a description, including a header and variables. The expression builder
operates in a linear fashion, starting at the beginning of the description and making changes in sequence
as it progresses towards the end of the description. So, the order in which you present your expression
is very important.
If, for example, you use a rule to remove the third word of the description, you cannot subsequently
remove the first word. If there is a later instance of the same word, you will remove that instead.
Otherwise, your instruction will be ignored.
1. Choose an option from the Conversion Rule field.
Options include:
Table 7: Conversion Rules for SNMP Alarm Expressions

Conversion Rule Function
Keep text up to a specific Keeps the text, starting from the previous action, up to and including the
string specified attribute
Add specific string Adds text at the spot where the previous action took place
Add remaining text Keeps all text until the next specified rule, or until the end of the alarm
expression if no other rule follows this rule
Remove text up to a specific Deletes the text between the previous action and the specified attribute
string (but not including the specified attribute)
Remove specific string Searches forward and removes the next instance of the specified attribute
2. Enter text or a variable in the Attributes field.

If no variable value or string token is specified, the entire string is displayed.
3. Under Description Entries, click Add.
The addition to your alarm description appears in the Expression String field.
4. Repeat steps 1–3 to add to your expression, keeping in mind that the change will always take place
at a point later in the description than the change you just made.
5. Click OK.
SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS Navigator

The settings on this screen configure Navigator as an SNMP agent. An SNMP license is not required to
forward CCS-P device alarms as traps to another device. These settings apply to Navigator only. To
configure other SNMP devices, see Setting SNMP Options (on page 175).
Navigator Trap Agent does not support Japanese or Chinese.
Navigator can translate alarms into SNMPv2c notifications, whether they be alarms from CCS-enabled
devices, or generic SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c traps, and then forward them to other devices.
Due to a limitation in NET SNMP, the Agent Address (Agent IP) field in a SNMPv1 trap is always filled
with the IP of the system on the default or primary network adapter, instead of the adapter the trap was
broadcast on.You can get around this by changing the primary network card, or by listening to the other
IP address.
Recipient devices can include other Navigator clients and servers. Navigator must be configured to send
data to all clients, etc. that want to receive traps. You cannot just configure a Navigator client on its own
to listen to the agent server.
Windows SNMP agent and the Navigator SNMP agent cannot be running at the same time.
SNMP trap forwarding along a chain of SNMP agents is permitted as long as the forwarding does not
create a loop in the chain. An Agent can forward traps to another agent, as long as the traps are not
forwarded to an Agent already existing in the chain. This includes configuring the trap destination of an
agent to be the IP address of the agent itself. Doing so will cause unpredictable results.
Devices that intend to monitor a Navigator agent need the Navigator.mib file loaded in their MIB
directory. When a device receives an alarm from a Navigator agent, that alarm will include Navigator’s IP
address, and the IP address of the triggered device.
1. From the main menu, select Tools > SNMP > Agent.
2. Select the SNMP tab.
3. In the SNMP Agent section of the screen, make the following selections:
Table 8: SNMP Agent Configuration

Field Function
Port Number (Can be from 0 to 65535) The network port used by the SNMP agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get" operation has to match
this setting in the MIB browser in order to read information from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a "Set" operation has to
match this setting in a MIB browser in order to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or write community
Traps doesn’t match between the SNMP agent and MIB browser, for example when
an unauthorized system tries to read the device.
Enable SNMP Agent When checked, SNMP support is available; if not checked, SNMP support is
disabled
Enable Trap Sequence When checked, this option adds sequence ID data to every trap that the agent
ID forwards. If the trap is forwarded to another Navigator system, that data will
appear in the description column of the Diagnostic window. This helps track the
order in which traps are received.
In the System section of the screen, make the following selections:
Table 9: System Fields of SNMP Tab - MIB-2 System Information

Field Explanation
Description The default is "Harris SNMP Agent"
Location The physical location of the device
Contact The contact person for this device
Name Name of the device
4. Click on the Destination tab, and then, for each place you would like Navigator to forward alarms,
enter the following information:
Table 10: Destination Configuration For SNMP Agents

Field Function
IP Address The specific place where data will be forwarded to
Description For informational purposes?
Port Number The port that destination communicates on. The default is 162.
Version Click in this field to choose V1 or V2c. These are the only SNMP versions
Navigator supports.
5. Click on the Trap Selection tab, and then choose one of the following :
Table 11: Trap Selection For SNMP Agents
Option Function
None No alarms, traps, or notifications will be forwarded.

All Alarms, Notifications, All alarms, notifications, and traps for the monitored devices will be forwarded.
and Traps
Select By Type Select the specific types to be forwarded.
• Critical alarms
• Warning alarms
• Information Alarms
• Clear alarms
• Acknowledged
• SNMP device traps
Individual Device Alarms Click the browse button to select those devices you want to provide alarms.
You can edit the Alias for any alarm that is checked. An alarm carries the same
alias in the Forward Alarms, Favorites, and SNMP Trap Selection dialog boxes.
You can also edit the Comments field (at the far right of the alarms table) to
provide more information when the alarm is triggered.
For more information, see Selecting Device Alarms for Transmission (on page
97).
6. Click OK to close the SNMP Agent Configuration screen and save all changes.
Selecting Device Alarms for Transmission

By default, when configured as an SNMP agent, Navigator will transmit alarms for all devices. To choose
specific devices to transmit alarms, ignoring all others, follow these steps:
1. From the main menu, select Tools > SNMP > Agent, and then click on the Trap Selection tab.
2. Select By Type, click Individual Device Alarms, and then click on the browse button.
The Individual Device Alarms window opens.
3. To select specific alarms or traps for a device, click the device in the Device Selection field.
The Trap Selection field updates to display all alarms or traps for that device.
4. Place checks beside alarms or traps to receive/transmit, and remove checks from beside traps or
alarms to ignore.
By default, all alarms are selected.
5. Click OK.
Configuring Navigator to Forward Traps and Notifications

1. Right-click a device in the Navigation pane and select Forward Alarms.
The following window opens:
2. Place checks beside alarms or traps to receive/transmit, and remove checks from beside traps or
alarms to ignore.
You can edit the Alias for any alarm that is checked. An alarm carries the same alias in the Forward
Alarms, Favorites, and SNMP Trap Selection dialog boxes.
You can also edit the Comments field (at the far right of the alarms table) to provide more
information when the alarm is triggered.
3. Click OK.
There are also two right-click options:

• Copy Forward Alarms - Copies the list of selected traps and alarms for the selected device.
• Paste Forward Alarms - Pastes the list of copied traps and alarms to a selected device. It the Device
type does not match, a warning asks if you want to continue, before allowing the paste.
Alarms for devices in the Temporary folder are not forwarded.
Chapter 6
CCS Device Discovery

Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP addresses of CCS
devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. You will initially use the Discovery tool
to find the CCS devices on your network. Later, you may want to run a full or partial discovery when you
make changes to your CCS network.
Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover X75 units with firmware version 1.4 or higher.
Magellan CCS Navigator will only discover 6800+ modules through an ICE6800+ module upgraded to
firmware version 2.0-16 or 2.0-8, or through a 6800+ETH resource module.
By default, the Discovery tool will try to discover all CCS-compatible devices on the same subnet as the
PC. However, you can narrow the scope of a discovery by setting discovery options. See Setting
Discovery Options (on page 101).
You can discover devices using two methods:

• Searching by IP address.
This method involves entering IP addresses, or ranges of IP addresses. It is not the optimal method
when multiple devices have the same IP address, as when many similar devices are first connected
to a network.
• Searching by MAC address.
Graphical tools allow you to discover all the devices and frames on the physical Ethernet/IP network.
This includes brand new equipment, right out of the box still with factory default settings; devices
that are pre-configured at the factory; and devices that have already been modified in the field. You
can perform IP address configuration as part of a MAC address discovery. See IP Settings and Device
ID Configuration (on page 112).
When an Administrator user runs a discovery from a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, results appear
on the System tab of the Navigation pane. Discovery is a Build mode tool. General users on
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PC cannot run discoveries.
After a discovery runs, the Discovery folder will contain a collection of icons that represent the devices
discovered on a CCS network. For example, you will see a server icon for each IP address and a default
hierarchy or "tree" of the devices located at each IP address.
You can use the Rediscover feature to run a discovery for an already-discovered device. See Rediscovery
(on page 116).
Some devices cannot be added to the Navigation pane using the Discovery process. See the following
topics for information on adding items using other methods:
• Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon (on page 125)
• Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon (on page 125)
Summary of Discovery Tasks

If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main menu. When
docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan CCS Navigator screen.
Magellan CCS Navigator cannot discover DPS-575 modules on a CCS network without the assistance of
the CCS DPS-Gateway, which discovers the synchronizers and reports to Magellan CCS Navigator their
presence on the subnet of the gateway. To add additional DPS-575 synchronizers to the subnet,
rediscover the CCS DPS-Gateway. See Modifying a Previously Used Discovery (on page 105).
Below is a summary of the discovery procedure.

1. Optional—Open the Discovery column of the Navigation pane, which shows information
in the Navigation pane about the status of device discovery. See Using the Discovery Column in the
Tree View (on page 117) and Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
2. In Build mode, point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Discovery to open the Discovery tool.
See Setting the Operational Mode (on page 57).
3. Set the Discovery Options. See Setting Discovery Options (on page 101).
4. Start a discovery and save the results. See Running a Full Discovery (on page 108) and Running a
Partial Discovery (on page 110).
5. Copy the discovery results from your Discovery folder to the Network or Temporary folder. See
Copying Discovery Results (on page 116).
6. Customize your hierarchical view of the CCS network. See Network View Construction (on page 118).
Only an administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
Entering Network Address Information

Each device that you intend to control or monitor must have a valid IP address, gateway, and subnet
mask. Addresses are divided into numeric chunks, with each chunk separated by a dot (period).
To be controlled or monitored, a device’s IP address and gateway must meet the following criteria:
• The first number can range from 1 to 224.
• The second number can range from 0 to 255.
• The third number can range from 0 to 255.
• The fourth number can range from 1 to 254.
The highest possible IP address for a device controlled by Magellan CCS Navigator would be
224.255.255.254.
The subnet mask must meet the following criteria:

• The first number can range from 1 to 255.
• The second number can range from 0 to 255.
• The third number can range from 0 to 255.
• The fourth number can range from 0 to 254.
Network configuration provided by a network administrator will normally follow these rules.
Setting Discovery Options

If you do not add any host IP addresses, the Discovery tool will attempt to discover all CCS-compliant
devices on the same subnet as the PC.
To set the discovery options, complete these steps:

1. Click Discovery on the Options menu, or click Options... in the Discovery pane.
2. Select and complete the Hosts tab. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery (on page 101).
3. Select and complete the Save tab. See Modifying a Previously Used Discovery (on page 105).
4. Click OK to save the discovery options.
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery

For additional information about discovering Routers, see Discovering Routing Devices (on page 660).
To set host IP addresses for a discovery, complete these steps:

The Discovery Options box appears, with the Hosts tab on top.
2. Select your Start options.
These options determine what Magellan CCS Navigator will do when you click Start on the Discovery
pane.
 Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses—when selected, when you click Start, Magellan CCS
Navigator performs a low-level device discovery to discover new devices with IP addresses that
are not on the IP address list for discovery on the subnet, with their current IP settings.
Due to security features, when scanning MAC Addresses on a PC running Windows Vista or
Windows 7, you should temporariliy disable all network interfaces except the one you intend to
scan.
Only when Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses is selected, you can also select Configure IP
settings and/or Device IDs. If you select this option, upon completion of a discovery, a window
will open where you can assign IP addresses for devices. See Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu
(on page 116).
These options are often used for initial configuration of devices with a (possibly identical)
default IP address.
 Enable scanning of IP addresses—When selected, the Discovery tool will scan the network for
CCS-compliant devices and then discover the device IDs of all devices that respond to the scan.
This will speed the discovery process.
3. To add the default IP addresses, click Add Default and ensure that the check box to the left of IP
address 192.168.100.250 and/or 192.168.100.251 is enabled.
The PC and the CCS devices you are discovering must be on the same subnet. To set the PC to the
same subnet as a CCS device, see Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device (on
page 156).
You will typically use the default device IP addresses—192.168.100.251 for control panels and
192.168.100.250 for all other devices—to configure a newly purchased device connected to the PC
on the same Ethernet hub or through an Ethernet crossover cable.
The Add Host process can be repeated more than once, so you can add multiple ranges of IP
addresses.
4. To add other IP addresses, click Add.
The Add Host box appears.
5. In the Add Host box, you have these options:
 Add a host IP
 Add a range of host IPs
If no hosts are added, the Discovery tool will attempt to discover all compatible devices
on the network.
CCS Navigator cannot discover 6800+ modules on a CCS network without the assistance of an
ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module in a host frame. The ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH reports the presence of
all networked FR6800+ frames and module configurations via the Ethernet connection. To update
the frame/module configuration, rediscover the host ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH.
6. Select the protocols (device types) you want to discover in the Select Products for Discovery section
of the Add Host box. The following check boxes are available (By default, all are selected except
HTTP and SNMP):
Table 12: Device Type Options for Discovery

Product Options
X50, X75*, X85, HView SX Pro, NEO, Communication Type
6800+, Multiviewer, NUCLEUS, Platinum, • Broadcast (default) communicates with devices that are on
EDGE-DPS575, Legalizer, RCP-CCS-1U, the same subnet as the CCS application
Magellan RCP, Selenio** • Point-to-Point communicates with devices that are on a
*Magellan CCS Navigator will only different subnet and cannot be discovered using the
discover X75 units with firmware version Broadcast option
1.4 or higher. Authentication (not currently implemented)
**Choose this option when discovering
Selenio MCP1 and MCP3 devices with
controller firmware 6.1 or higher. Note
that you must configure one parameter in
the HTTP interface; see your Selenio MCP
documentation for details.
Selenio*, IP3, Selenio X100, LCP-CCS-1U Communication Type
(NEO Local Control Panel) • Point-to-Point (default) communicates with devices over
*Choose this option when discovering UDP
Selenio MCP1 and MCP3 devices with • TCP Point-to-Point When the device is switched to Control
firmware 6.0 and earlier. mode, it will use TCP communication, which is more reliable,
but can be slower
• Authentication (not currently implemented)
Routing Devices (Panacea, Hardware Router Discovery Type
Control Panel, Leitch router) • Full Discovery—Attempts to discover all Imagine
Communications and Leitch routing products
• Express (ignores legacy) —Only attempts to discover
Imagine Communications devices, and ignores older panels
that a full discovery might see
SNMP (products with SNMP server • Read Community—Enter the name here if it differs from the
enabled) default of Public
• Port—Magellan CCS Navigator discovers devices that use the
default 161 port only (you can change this after discovery in
the Properties pane of the Navigation window)
• Timeout (sec.)—The period when the discovery will give up
on finding the SNMP device can range from 1 to 1000
seconds
• Retries—The number of retries if the discovery fails can
range from 1 to 1000
HTTP (products with embedded HTTP HTTP Port(s)—Enter the Port number(s)
web server)
7. Click OK to close the Add Host dialog box, and then click OK to close the Discovery Options dialog
box. You are now ready to run a discovery.
• Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery (on page 104)

• Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery (on page 104)
• Modifying Host IP Addresses (on page 105)
• Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options (on page 106)
• Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses (on page 106)
Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery

The default device IP address is 192.168.100.251 for control panels and 192.168.100.250 for all other
devices.
The PC and the CCS devices you are discovering must be on the same subnet. To set the PC to the same
subnet as a CCS device, see Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device (on page 156).
To add the default IP address for a discovery, complete these steps:

1. On the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box, click Add Default.
This adds the two default IP addresses to the list in the Hosts box.
2. Select the check boxes to the left of these two default IP addresses, if they are cleared.
3. Click OK to close the Discovery Options box.
4. Click start on the Discovery pane to start the discovery.
Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery

To add one host IP address for a discovery, complete these steps:
1. Point to Options on the menu bar and click Discovery, or click Options on the Discovery pane’s
button bar. The Discovery Options dialog box appears.
2. Click Add....
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
3. Select Add a host IP to add a single host IP or Add a range of host IPs to add more than one.
4. Highlight the first group of numbers in the default address, and then type new values in place of the
default numbers.
The cursor will automatically move to the second group of numbers in the address after you type in
three digits. When you enter less than three digits, press SPACE BAR to move to the next field.
Fill in all four fields for the IP address in this manner. If you type 0 (zero) in the space for the fourth
group of numbers in the address, the Discovery tool will add all hosts with the range from 1 to 254.
5. If you are adding a range of host IPs (see step 1 above), press TAB to move to the To box. Type in
only the fourth group of numbers from the highest IP address in the range of host IP addresses.
6. Do either of the following:
 Click OK to close the Add Host box and return to the Host tab of the Discovery Options box.
 Click Apply if you want to add more host IPs.
The new IP hosts now appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts page.
7. Place a check beside each IP address you would like to discover.
8. Click OK to use the existing Discovery Save Options; or set the Discovery Save Options.
9. Click OK to close the Discovery Options box.
See the following topics for more details:

• Setting Discovery Save Options (on page 106)
Modifying a Previously Used Discovery

Sometimes it will be more efficient to use a previously configured Discovery setup than to create a new
one from scratch. See the following topics:
• Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options (on page 106)
• Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses (on page 106)
Modifying Host IP Addresses

To modify IP hosts for Discovery Options, complete these steps:
1. Point to Options on the menu bar and click Discovery, or click Options on the Discovery pane’s
button bar.
This shows the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box. Any previously added IP hosts appear in the
Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts tab.
2. Select an IP address that you want to modify.
This activates the Modify and Remove buttons.
3. Click Modify, or double-click on the IP address.
This shows the Modify Host box. (See Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery (on page 104).)
4. Highlight the section or sections of the number you want to change, and type in the new number.
 Click OK to save the changes. This action closes the Modify Host box.
 Click Cancel if you decide not to modify the address. This action closes the Modify Host box.
 Click Apply and then repeat the steps 2-5 above to change other Host IP addresses.
6. Click OK to close the Discovery Options box, or click the Save Options for a Discovery tab to set the
discovery save options and close the box.
Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options

When removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery Options, you can remove either one or more
Host IP addresses or all Host IP addresses.
To remove one or more Host IP addresses from Discovery Options, complete these steps:
The IP addresses for a new discovery list in the Hosts box on the left of the Hosts tab.
2. Select an IP address you want to remove, and then click Remove.
Repeat to remove other Host IP addresses.
You can also select multiple list entries by pressing and holding the SHIFT or CTRL key when selecting
entries, or select a single entry and drag the mouse to include more entries in the selection.
Or you can remove all entries on the list by clicking Remove All, whether or not an entry is selected.
This action is followed by a box asking if you are sure. Click Yes to remove all items on the list.
3. When you finish removing IP addresses, click OK to close the Discovery Options box;
or select the Save Options for a Discovery tab to set the Discovery Save Options.
Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses

To temporarily remove IP hosts for Discovery Options, complete these steps:
Any previously added IP hosts appear in the Hosts box on the left side of the Hosts tab.
2. To temporarily remove an IP address, clear the check box beside the IP address.
This IP address will not be used in the next discovery operation.
3. Repeat the step above to temporarily remove other Host IP addresses.
4. Click OK again to close the Discovery Options box, or select the Save Options for a Discovery tab to
set the save options and close the box.
Setting Discovery Save Options

To set the discovery save options, complete these steps:
1. Open the Discovery Options box by clicking Discovery on the Options menu, or clicking Options...
in the Discovery pane.
2. Select the Save tab.
3. In the Confirmation section of the Save tab, select the Show confirmation window before saving
discovery results check box.
To disable the feature, clear the check box.
4. In the Saving mode section of the Save tab, select one of these two options:
Table 13: Saving Mode Options

Option Function
Replace the contents of the User View’s Discovery Substitutes new discovery results for previous
folder with the results of the discovery results
Refresh the full User View with the results of the Adds newly discovered devices to previous contents
discovery
5. In the Save discovered device names as section of the same tab, select one of the four options. Each
option corresponds to a name template for newly discovered CCS devices saved to the Discovery
folder of the Navigation pane.
Here are examples of the four name options as applied to a DEC-6002:
Table 14: Device Naming Options

Name Template Sample Device Name
Slot <n>-<Device Name> (<Description>) Slot 10-DEC-6002 (Digital Comb Filter Decoder)
Slot <n>-<Description> (<Device Name>) Slot 10-Digital Comb Filter Decoder (DEC-6002)
Name Template Sample Device Name

<Device Name> (<Description>) DEC-6002 (Digital Comb Filter Decoder)
<Description> (<Device Name>) Digital Comb Filter Decoder (DEC-6002)
6. Click OK to close the Discovery Options box and save the results.
Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device

To check a network connection to one of the CCS devices, you can "ping" the resource’s IP address.
To ping an IP address, complete these steps:

1. Open a command prompt dialog box and type:
ping X
Where "X" is IP address of the device you are checking.
2. Press ENTER.
A ping command has two possible responses:

• A Reply... message verifies that the device is connected to the CCS network.
• A Request timed out message signals that the ping command failed. The device is either not
connected or not reachable on the CCS network.
Running a Discovery
Under Windows Vista or Windows 7, the following settings are required to enable scanning of IP
addresses during a discovery:
• Add a firewall rule allowing ICMP type 0 packets.
• User Account Control (UAC) must be disabled.
For more information, contact your network administrator.
Once you have set your discovery options, you can begin the actual discovery process. You have two
choices of the type of discovery you would like to run.
A full discovery scans the entire network for controllable devices. See Running a Full Discovery (on page
108).
If you would rather scan specific sections of your network for specific types of devices, you should run a
partial discovery. See Running a Partial Discovery (on page 110).
Running a Full Discovery

Full discovery is not supported for HTTP protocol. When you specify an HTTP server IP address, the
operation is automatically changed to a partial discovery. See Running a Partial Discovery (on page 110).
A full discovery is more simple to set up than a partial discovery, because it does not limit the places on
the network that are scanned. However, it may take longer than a partial discovery.
docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan CCS Navigator screen. The
Discovery pane does not appear when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode.
To run a full discovery, complete these steps:

1. In Build mode, click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery Options
dialog box.
2. Select the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box and ensure that there is a check beside Enable
scanning of IP addresses and Enable scanning of MAC addresses.
The Hosts list can be empty in order to run a full discovery. If there are items in the Hosts list, they
should not have a check mark in the left-most column.
3. Select the Save tab of the Discovery Options box, and then select one of the discovered device
names formats.
For more information on Discovery Save options, see Setting Discovery Save Options (on page 106).
4. Click OK to apply the changes and close the Discovery Options box.
5. Click Start on the Discovery pane button bar.
The Discovery tool pings all IP addresses on the network, and then logs the IP addresses and device
IDs for all responding CCS-compliant devices in the Discovery pane’s Status dialog box.
If you do not click Stop, the discovery stops automatically when it finishes searching the CCS
Network.
6. When the discovery is complete, click Save on the Discovery pane button bar to transfer the
discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
The Status box of the Discovery pane logs these actions.
Running a Partial Discovery

To save time, you may want to discover only a subset of the IP addresses on your network instead of
scanning the entire network. To run a partial discovery, complete these steps:
1. Point to Tools on the menu bar, and then click Discovery to open the Discovery pane.
2. Click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery Options box.
3. On the Hosts tab, select the Enable scanning of IP addresses check box, if it is not already selected.
4. Add IP addresses for the devices you want to discover. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery
(on page 101) for more information.
5. Set your Discovery Save options. See Setting Discovery Save Options (on page 106) for more
information.
IDs for all responding devices in the Discovery pane’s Status box.
8. The button bar in the Discovery pane includes a Stop button. To halt the discovery, click Stop.
If you do not click Stop, the discovery will stop automatically when it finishes searching the CCS
Network.
The Status box of the Discovery pane logs these actions.
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration

When equipment is first connected to a CCS network or is returned to its factory default settings, many
devices may have a common default IP address. You can perform IP address configuration as part of a
MAC address discovery.
If you have run a discovery using the Enable Scanning of MAC Addresses Start option, and you have also
selected Configure IP Settings and/or Device IDs, upon completion of the discovery process, before
being offered to save the results of your discovery, the following window will open:
Table 15: IP Settings and Device ID Configuration Options
Item Function
Query Device Connection
When checked, the dialog box contains an additional column (at the far
Status
right of the dialog box) for Connection Status.
Per Discovered Device

Configure
(check) Magellan CCS Navigator will attempt to assign new IP address
settings and/or IDs to devices that are checked.
MAC Address
Displays the device’s unique ENET identifier.
(Read-only)
Device Type
Displays the family the device belongs to.
(Read-only)
Device Name The custom name of the device that is returned by the low-level discovery.
This name appears in the Navigation pane, and is not sent to the device.
This column is not available for some devices.
Current Settings ID The New Settings options can be updated only if

(read-only) IP Address Configure is checked at the start of the row.
New Settings
Subnet Mask
(editable)
Gateway
Item Function
Server
Displays the current server IP address. This field is editable so that you can
configure it for router devices.
Status Indicates the state of a re-assignment operation:
[x] indicates failure
[check] indicates success
If the field is empty, no change has been applied.

Connection Status This column only appears when the Query Device Connection Status option
in the top left corner of the dialog box is checked.
This column updates every 30 seconds. Disconnected devices display red.
When you have completed the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration screen, click Apply. A progress
bar indicates which device is currently being updated.
When the update for a device is complete, the Status column indicates whether the update was
successful.
If you cancel out of this window without applying changes or clicking OK (to accept the window the way
it is), your discovery is considered to be cancelled. You will not be offered the opportunity to save the
results of the discovery, and the Navigation pane will not be updated with the results of the discovery.
Finding a Device
If you discover more than one of the same device using MAC addresses, you may need to find out which
specific hardware device is which. Follow these steps:
1. Right click one of the identical devices in the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box.
2. Select Identify Device from the menu that appears.
The device responds by blinking a light on its control panel.
Not all devices are capable of responding to an Identify request. Se the documentation for your
product for more information.
3. To cancel the response, right click the row again and choose Cancel Identify Device.
Configuring Multiple Devices

Follow these steps to assign a range of IP address/Device IDs to a group of selected devices.
1. On the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box, select a range of devices by clicking the
start of the range, holding down the Shift key, and clicking the end of the range.
2. Click Setting Options.
A window similar to the following appears:
3. Place a check beside each setting you want to apply to the devices, and then complete the row for
that item.
This table describes the various options and their functionality:
Table 16: IP Settings and Device ID Options for Low-Level Discovery

Item Function
Select All Selects all checkboxes on the dialog box.
Clear All Unselects all selected checkboxes on the dialog box.
IP Address Range Enter the first IP address in the IP Address Range field, and the last three digits of the
last IP address in the To field. The IP addresses are assigned sequentially to the
selected devices.
Subnet Mask Define the number range that can connect to the frame over Ethernet.
Default Gateway Define the server the connection happens over.

Server IP Address This sets all the selected devices to share the same server.
Device ID Range Device IDs apply to Platinum frames and some other routers.
Any item that is left unchecked uses the default setting
4. Click OK.
5. In the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box, click Apply.
A progress bar indicates which device is currently being updated.
When the update for a device is complete, the Status column indicates whether the update was
successful.
6. Click OK to close the IP Settings and Device ID Configuration dialog box and discover the devices at
their new IP locations.
Rediscovery
When a device appears in the Navigation pane, you can rediscover it. This is especially useful with
routers, and with frames that may have their contents change. To rediscover a device:
1. In Build mode, right-click on a device in the Network, Discovery, or Temporary folder, and then
select Rediscover.
A discovery starts, looking only for the device at that IP address. When the discovery is complete, the
device information is updated in the Navigation pane.
Copying Discovery Results

After a discovery runs, the set of resource icons contained in your Discovery folder is an outline of your
CCS network.
You can copy the resource icons in the Discovery folder into either the Network folder or the
Temporary folder. There you can customize the graphical representation of the network
in the application to make it more understandable and reflective of the actual organization
of your network.
1. Select a top-level device in the Discovery folder, point to File on the menu bar, and then click Copy.
 Select the resource icon of the target folder, either the Network folder or the Temporary folder,
then point to File on the menu bar, and then click Paste.
 Select a top-level device icon and drag-and-drop it on top of the Network or Temporary folder
icon, and then click Yes to confirm.
Either action transfers the top-level device and its children into the Network or Temporary folder.
3. Repeat this copy-and-paste or drag-and-drop action for each of the top-level devices in the
Discovery folder, until all have been copied into the Network or Temporary folder.
4. Click the Save icon on the toolbar to save the new layout.
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu

Right-click inside the Discovery pane to open a shortcut menu.
Table 17: Discovery Shortcut Menu

Command Function
Allow Docking Toggles the docking feature on and off. If docking is off, the pane floats. To float the pane,
drag and drop its title bar. To dock it again, drag and drop it to the border where you want
to dock it.
Command Function
Move Enables you to move an undocked Discovery pane around.
Hide Hides the Discovery pane. Reopen it by opening the Discovery tool from the Tools menu.
You can dock the Discovery pane to the left or right border of the main panel or "float" it anywhere on
the computer screen.
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View

The Navigation pane contains an optional Discovery column, which can provide valuable information
about devices found during a discovery.
The Discovery column shows only in Build mode. The Navigation pane shows other columns when you
change to Control mode. Here is a list of the possible comments in the Discovery column and what they
mean:
Table 18: Discovery Column Comments

Comment Means
New The Discovery tool found a previously undiscovered network resource. This
information will be updated in the Discovery folder.
Not Found The Discovery tool did not find a previously discovered network resource in the
Navigation pane on the real network. The resource could be off-line or disconnected
from the network.
Found The Discovery tool has discovered this network resource during a previous discovery.
Not Searched The Discovery tool did not find a previously discovered network resource in the
Navigation pane on the real network. This happens when you have changed the
Discovery options and removed that resource from the list of IP hosts for a discovery.
ProcedureEnabling the Discovery Column
To show a Discovery column in the Navigation pane, you must enable this feature in the Navigation
Options box. The Discovery column appears only in Build mode.
See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
Chapter 7
Network View Construction

The Navigation pane contains a hierarchical representation of the content and organization of the CCS
devices in your network. The hierarchy is made up of resource icons can be nested into groups for
different users in different ways, and modified with customized text and optional columns.
The Navigation pane can only be altered by an administrator in Build mode on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server install.
Figure 13: Hierarchy in the Navigation Pane
For Administrator users, the Navigation pane has a System tab and a User tab for each defined user.
The System view is a view of all the devices discovered or created on the network, and each User view is
a customized subset of the network.
For each Operator user, the Navigation pane has one tab, showing just the devices that the user has
access to for monitoring, configuration, or control. This access is determined when creating or modifying
user accounts. For information on creating, deleting, and modifying user accounts, see Managing User
Accounts (on page 51).
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can alter the Navigation pane. When
resources on the Navigation pane are changed on a NAVIGATOR-SRV-licensed PC, on all connected
NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed PCs the Reload button will be enabled to indicate that a network resource has
been updated. Click Reload from the toolbar, or right click in the Navigation pane and click Reload, or
select View > Reload from the main menu to update the Navigation pane.
Resource Folders
The Navigation pane contains folders that represent the physical hierarchy and organization of the CCS
devices.
Figure 14: Navigation Pane with all Folders Closed
The table below describes the folders in the resource tree.
Table 19: Folders in the Resource Tree

Folder Description
Network Contains the currently operational network organization and CCS devices
Routers Contains routing system configurations

Discovery Contains resource icons representing the CCS devices found during a discovery
Temporary Stores currently unused network information; alarms for devices in the Temporary
folder are not forwarded like other alarm when alarm forwarding is configured
Configuration Contains configuration information for various CCS control panels and NEO frames
This folder appears in the Navigation pane for administrators on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server only; Client users will not see this folder.
Catalog Contains lists of all CCS equipment that Magellan CCS Navigator supports, organized
into subfolders for each compatible product line
Preset Contains preset files storing values for common control settings for CCS devices
Folder Description
Virtual Device Contains all virtual devices defined in the system; see Creating Virtual Devices and
Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices (on page 192) for more information
This folder appears in the Navigation pane for administrators on a Magellan CCS
Navigator Server only; Client users will not see this folder.
Sorting Items in the Resource Tree

If a folder contains a number of sub-folders, for ease of finding things within that folder, you can put the
items therein in alphanumeric order.
1. Right click on an item in the resource tree.
2. Select Sort Subnodes by Name.
If this option is not available, then the selected item does not have any sub-folders.
Resource Icons
Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can use resource icons to create custom views
of the devices on the CCS network, rename the icons and use them to represent other objects. Magellan
CCS Navigator Server must be in Build mode to effect changes in the Navigation Pane.
The table below shows the resource icons that might appear in a tree view.
Resource Icons
Icon Node What the Icon Represents
Configuration Configuration information for a NEO frame or CCS control panel and
their assigned devices or modules
Control Panel A hardware device that provides control to parameters of one or more
devices
Folder A container for groups of devices
Frame A chassis containing one or more CCS products or functional blocks
Functional Block A CCS module controlled as a single unit
Signal Monitor An input signal for monitoring
Gateway A CCS device that translates between two languages, enables devices
to access and control CCS devices. Supported gateways include the
following:
• CCS Protocol
• CCS DPS-Gateway
Routing System A system to represent control and configuration of linked routing
devices
Tie-line Configures tie lines and starts the Dynamic Routing Framework
Manager (DRFM)
Control View Configures logical routing information
Multiviewer System Appears in your Navigation pane when you discover an Imagine
Communications Multiviewer; this icon is a parent icon that will
contain Layout Designer, PIP, and output module icons.
Layout Designer Appears in your Navigation pane when you discover an Imagine
Communications Multiviewer; double click to start Layout Designer, a
configuration tool for the multiviewer’s output module. This instance
of Layout Designer will contain IP address information for the
multiviewer it started under.
PIP A Picture-in-Picture associated with a multiviewer
Timer Control An up or down counter that is normally associated with a PredatorII

multiviewer
HTTP Server An HTTP Web server
Product One or more CCS functional blocks controlled as one unit
Icon Node What the Icon Represents

Rack An equipment rack containing one or more frames
Salvo Preconfigured group of routing actions that can be executed

simultaneously
Server A group of CCS products and functional blocks discovered under the
same IP address
Signal Path The pathway of signals within a broadcast facility
Studio A building, area, or room containing one or more racks of CCS devices
Amino STB Amino device copied from the Catalog folder, which can be configured
to monitor an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top box
NEXIO System Appears in your Navigation pane when you create a NEXIO system
using the NEXIO wizard; this icon is a parent icon that will contain
group, servers, data storage, and drivers icons.
After configuring an EDGE-DPS575 gateway, do not change the names of its associated DPS-475/575
synchronizers. Do not remove the IP address that is part of a DPS-475/575 synchronizer’s name.
To rename a resource icon, perform one of these actions while in build mode:
• Right-click the resource icon you want to rename, select Rename from the resulting shortcut menu,
and then type the new name in place of the selected icon name.
• Right-click the resource icon you want to rename, select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu,
and then change its Name, Short Name, or Alternate on the General tab of the resulting Navigation
Properties box. See Setting Navigation Properties (on page 128) for more information.
• Single-click the name of the resource icon twice in succession, with a slight pause between clicks.
Then type the new name in the place of the selected icon name.
• Select the resource icon, press F2, and then type the new name in the place of the selected icon
name.
Navigating the Resource Tree

The resource icons in the Navigation pane can potentially contain or hold one or more other CCS devices
in much the same way that a file folder could contain one or more items.
The presence of a plus symbol (+) to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that the folder or
resource icon contains other objects, but the resource tree is currently hiding its contents.
To show the contents of a closed folder or container resource, click the plus (+) symbol to the left of that
folder or resource icon.
The presence of a minus (-) symbol to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that the folder or
resource icon is showing its contents.
To hide the contents of a container resource, click the minus symbol

(-) to the left of the folder or resource icon.
The absence of either a plus (+) or minus (-) symbol to the left of a folder or resource icon indicates that
the folder or CCS device has no contents.
Finding Items in the Navigation Pane

Use the Find tool to search the Navigation pane for text that meets your search criteria -- for example,
searching for a resource by product name or type. Complete these steps:
1. Click Find... on the Edit menu.
2. In the Find what box on the Find box, type the text you seek, or click the down arrow and select an
object from the list.
3. Check the Match whole word only box if you want to only search for whole words containing the
search text, or clear the Match whole word only box if you want to search for mentions of the text
that are part of other text.
4. Check the Match case box if you want to search only for text with matching case, or clear the box if
you want to search for the text in any case.
5. Select Up or Down for the direction of the search.
6. Click Find Next to start the search.
The application highlights the first instance of matching text in the Navigation pane.
7. Click Find Next repeatedly to find additional instances of the search text.
8. When you finish searching, click Cancel or Close.
Starting Software From the Navigation Pane

You can start various non-Magellan CCS Navigator software tools from within Magellan CCS Navigator,
including:
• Layout Designer—Double-click a Layout Designer icon under a Multiviewer system in the Discovery,
Catalog, or Network folder.
• DRFM—Double-click a Tie Line node in the Navigation pane’s Routers folder.
• Amino STB—Double-click an Amino STB device in the Catalog > Third Party, Discovery, or Network
folder.
If the software does not start, and you receive an error message saying that the application directory
was not found, ensure that the software is installed correctly. To redirect Magellan CCS Navigator to find
the software at the correct location, see Setting the Command Tab (on page 132).
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can customize the contents of the
Navigation pane. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in build mode.
All modifications are done on the System tab, which shows all the devices discovered or created on the
network. Each User tab is a customized subset of the network that is based on the devices that user has
access to. For information on defining access privileges for users, see Managing User Accounts (on page
51).
If there are no devices populating the Navigation pane, you will start by adding devices. You should
update the System view of the CCS network whenever new CCS devices are added to the network. You
can either manually add resource icons representing the new devices and then configure their IP
addresses, or you can have the Discovery tool add the relevant icons by running a full or partial
discovery.
The following topics describe the methods of adding items to the Navigation pane:
• CCS Device Discovery (on page 99)
• Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon (on page 125)
• Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon (on page 125)
You can use some of the resource icons—such as folders, signals, racks, and studios—to group your
devices into physical or logical hierarchies or divisions. You can also add, delete, move, or rename
resource icons.
Server icons, with the exception of HTTP and SNMP server icons, do not represent actual devices but
serve as place holders for the IP address for a child device or set of devices. The plus sign (+) to the left
of a server icon indicates that this server icon has undisclosed child resources.
The usual hierarchy for resources in the Navigation pane is as follows:

• Network icons contain studio, signal path, and folder icons.
• Studio and folder icons contain rack icons.
• Rack icons contain server icons.
• Server icons contain frame, control panel, and gateway icons.
• Frame icons contain product icons and/or functional block icons.
• Signal path icons contain product icons and/or functional block icons.
Two examples of how resources can be organized are provided in the following examples:
• Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User (on page 139)
• Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User (on page 139)
Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon

You might create items such as server devices using the Create tool. To create a new resource icon,
1. Right-click the resource icon that you want to parent or contain the new resource icon.
2. Select Create from the resulting shortcut menu.
3. Select the type of resource icon you would like to create from the Create submenu.
4. Rename this new icon.
5. Set its IP address and navigation properties.
See the following topics:

• Setting Navigation Properties (on page 128)
• Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device (on page 154)
• Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device (on page 155)
Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon

You might copy and paste a resource icon that cannot be discovered, but which exists in the Catalog,
such as an Amino STB device.
To create a new resource icon by the copy-and-paste method, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon you want to copy, and select Copy from the resulting shortcut menu.
The source icon can be in any folder on your network, including the Catalog folder.
2. Right-click the proposed container icon, then select Paste from the resulting shortcut menu.
3. Rename the resource to distinguish it from the source icon.
You can use a copied device to configure control panels, create rules, etc., while a device is
unavailable, and when the device is available, paste that device’s data before completing
configuration of the device.
4. Configure the IP address of the new resource location by setting the Navigation properties.
You can add Device ID information manually, or you can copy and paste it from a like device.

• Setting the Device Tab (on page 130)
• Editing an IP Address (on page 126)
Editing an IP Address
If you know the current IP address setting of a device in the Navigation pane, and would like to change it
(for example, if you have created an off-line device and have configured favorites for it, and would now
like to update with the actual IP address), follow these steps:
1. From the main menu, choose Edit > IP Address.
The Replace IP dialog box opens:
2. In the Find IP Address field, enter the IP address the device is currently known at in the Navigation
pane.
For best results, when creating a device, you should change the IP address from the default of
255.255.255.255. Editing an IP address replaces the address information for all devices that have the
same IP address.
3. In the Replace With field, enter the actual IP address of the device.
4. Click Replace.
Magellan CCS Navigator searches the Device tab of all devices in the Network and Discovery folders of
the Navigation pane. All devices with the IP address it searches for will be replaced with the new IP
address.
Deleting a Resource Icon

Choose either of these methods to delete a resource icon:
• Right-click the resource icon you want to delete, and then select Delete from the resulting shortcut
menu.
• Select the resource icon you want to delete, and then press the Delete key on your keyboard.
This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, linked graphical objects, and
Navigator pages that have been created in Navigator 1.7 or later.
Magellan CCS Navigator tracks the links of nodes that are dragged from the resource tree and the
resulting graphical objects in Magellan CCS Navigator pages (see Graphical Navigation Page Creation (on
page 372)).
When you delete a node from the resource tree, if it is linked to any graphical objects, a Confirm Delete
box appears. This box lists all of the linked pages and their paths, and gives you the option to either
continue with the deletion or to cancel your request. If you delete the node, any linked graphical objects
will lose the double-click actions of their parent, but will still retain any rules that you have defined for
them.
Dragging and Dropping a Resource Icon

Drag-and-drop results depend on whether the resource icons involved in the operation (one or more
dragged icons and the target icon onto which the dragged icons are dropped) have the same parent icon
or different ones. If the icons have the same parent, they will remain siblings after the move, but the
dragged icons will be inserted after the target icon. If the icons have different parents, they will become
children of the target icon after the move.
To move a resource icon from one parent icon to another parent or to reorder a group of sibling icons,
1. Select the resource icon you want to move.
2. Hold down the mouse button and drag the icon on top of the new parent or sibling icon.
3. Release the mouse button to drop the icon.
4. If a query box asks you to confirm the drag-and-drop action, click OK.
Cutting and Pasting a Resource Icon

To move a resource icon by the cut-and-paste method, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon you want to move.
2. Select Cut from the resulting shortcut menu.
3. Right-click the proposed parent icon.
4. Select Paste from the resulting shortcut menu.
Copying an Identical Resource Icon

To add resource icons to a network view by copying icons from another location in the resource tree
(such as the Catalog folder), complete these steps:
1. Copy the icon of an identical resource from an existing location in the resource tree.
The Catalog folder, located at the bottom of the tree in the Navigation pane, is the easiest place to
find an identical resource icon, since it contains an up-to-date list of all supported CCS devices.
However, you can instead copy a resource icon from elsewhere in your resource tree if you have
already installed an identical device elsewhere in the network.
2. Select the target container resource for the copied resource icons and paste the copied icons into
the new container or parent resource.
3. To set the new resource's properties, including its IP address, so that the software application can
communicate with the new resource, right-click the resource icon and select Properties from the
See Setting Navigation Properties (on page 128) for information on all the Navigation Properties
options.
4. Click Close.
Setting the Color of Text on a Resource Icon

You can only change the color of resource icons in the Navigation pane one at a time.
To set the text color in the Navigation pane, complete these steps:
1. Change to Build mode, if you are in another mode (see Setting the Operational Mode (on page 57)).
2. In the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon whose text color you want to change, and then
click Text Color from the resulting shortcut menu.
3. In the Text Color box, clear the Use Default Text Color check box.
4. Select a color from the New Text Color box.
In the new Text Color box, select Other to select another color or specify a custom color.
5. In the Text Color box, click OK to accept the color selection.
See Setting Navigation Properties (on page 128) for more information.
Setting Navigation Properties

You must be in Build mode to modify the Navigation Properties sheet.
Administrator users at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can alter the navigation properties for a device.
General users of Magellan CCS Navigator Clients can view but not modify device properties.
To show the Properties sheet of a CCS device, In the Navigation pane, right-click the icon of the network
resource whose properties you want to check, and then click Properties from the resulting shortcut
menu.
The Navigation Properties dialog box for the selected network resource appears. It contains one or
more of the following tabs, depending on the resource:
Table 20: Navigation Property Sheet Tabs

Tab Contains Reference
General Resource names, type, and description Setting General Navigation Properties
for a Device (on page 130)
Command Information about control and configuration Setting the Command Tab (on page 132)
commands to start standalone applications for
items in the Network, Discovery, or Temporary
folder
HTTP The URL of the Web page of a device with a Setting HTTP Properties (on page 133)
Web server
Monitor Point Information about the router source connected Setting the Monitor Point Properties (on
to a device for signal monitoring page 133)
Device Information about the Device Class, Device ID, Setting the Device Tab (on page 130)
Alarm Filtering, and Control Access Rights
of a network resource icon
Preset Information about the Device ID of a Preset Viewing the Preset Tab (on page 134)
icon
Shortcut For informational purposes only -- data cannot Using Navigation Shortcuts (on page
be entered in the fields on this screen 151)
The target folder type (Network, Discovery,
Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, Virtual
Device or Preset) and target (path to the
resource through the Resource tree)
of a shortcut icon
SNMP Properties that allow SNMP communication Setting SNMP Navigation Properties (on
with otherwise incompatible devices page 135)
Communication When present, indicates whether you are Viewing the Communication Settings
Settings connected to a device using point-to-point or Tab (on page 134)
broadcast communication
Amino STB When present, provides configuration options Setting the Amino STB Tab (on page
for an AmiNET120 or AmiNET500 set-top box. 136)
Setting General Navigation Properties for a Device

On the General tab, you can set the device’s Short Name, Name, Alternate name, and the resource’s
Description.
To choose which name to view in the Navigation pane, see Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
To change a name or description, select the current text and then type in new text. The information in
this dialog box is used as follows:
Table 21: Navigation General Properties

Option Function
Short Name An abbreviated form of the name, restricted to 20 characters for use on control
panels; also used when the device is in a Configuration folder
Name The current product name, or one which you assign to the device
Alternate This product’s former name (if a former name doesn’t exist, this may match the
product’s Name)
Description The product’s full title, as displayed in its product literature
Type Description based on where within the Navigation pane the device is found
Subnodes Count Indicates the number of items in the next level below this node in the Navigation
pane; does not provide a count of all the items in all the levels below
Setting the Device Tab

In some nodes, you cannot change the Device ID. In such a case, this field will be read-only.
On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, you can set the Device class (type of resource),
Device ID, and alarm filtering.
To set the Device tab for a resource in the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon, select
Properties from the resulting shortcut menu, and select the Device tab.
Table 22: Navigation Properties Device Tab Options

Option Function
Device Class Defines the graphic that represents the resource in the Navigation pane (The icons are
shown and described in Resource Icons (on page 120))
Device ID Defines the device so that Magellan CCS Navigator can communicate with it, divided
into four fields:
• EP/IP - Communication protocol the device uses
• IP address - Address where the item is found on your network
• Device Hierarchy - System node, frame node, slot location (if applicable), and sub-
device number (if applicable) of the device
• Family ID / Product ID - Product group and device catalog ID
When the IP address, Device Hierarchy, and Family or Product ID are identical to other
devices, the changes made on this window will be updated to those other devices when
this window closes or switches to another device.
Set Default Sets the IP address field to the factory default. Other fields remain unchanged
Copy Copies the Device ID information

Paste Pastes previously copied Device ID information
Alarm Filtering Indicates whether the software application is filtering the alarms for this resource
(Enabled when checked)
When alarms are filtered, they are stored in the alarms log database. They will not show
on any other tabs of the diagnostic database.
Option Function
Control Window Determines whether a custom or default Control dialog box will open when the device is
clicked on in Control mode; if there is not a custom Control dialog box, and you have a
Graphical Navigation license, click the Browse button to select a Graphical Navigation
page to launch.
Control Access Indicates whether access to the resource is enabled. This box is read only (See Assigning
Rights Access Rights (on page 46) for information on how Administrators can change control
access rights)
Setting the Command Tab

By default, when you click a resource icon in the Navigation pane in Build mode, a Configuration dialog
box opens. When you click the same resource icon in Control mode, a Control dialog box opens. You can
reconfigure a resource icon to launch a non-Magellan CCS Navigator application instead.
Some resource icons are pre-configured to launch a specific application. For example, the Imagine
Communications Layout Designer icon in a Multiviewer folder launches the Layout Designer software.
When various actions have been configured for a resource icon, the one that is highest priority always
launches.
• In Build mode, the highest priority is a HTTP page, if one is configured, followed by any item
configured on the Command tab, with the lowest priority being the default Configuration window.
• In Control mode, the highest priority is the Custom page for a resource icon, if one is configured. In
the absence of a custom page, if there is a HTTP page, that will launch. If there is no HTTP page, any
item that is configured in the Command tab launches, and if there is not one of those, then the
default Control window launches when you double-click the icon.
Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the Navigation Pane

You can also use application nodes, such as SuiteView, to start non-Magellan CCS Navigator applications
and to monitor SNMP traps.
To configure a resource icon, to start a non-Magellan CCS Navigator software application from the
Navigation pane, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon in the Navigation pane, and then select Properties from the resulting
shortcut menu.
The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
2. Select the Command tab.
3. Beside Operation select one of the following:

 Configuration—to determine the resource icon’s behavior in Build mode.
 Control—to determine the resource icon’s behavior in Control mode.
4. Beside Command, click the Browse button and then browse to the location of the executable you
want to launch.
5. Select the executable and click OK.
6. (Optional) Type the path to the default dialog box of the application in the Arguments box.
7. (Optional) Beside Initial Directory, clickhe Browse button and then browse to the location of the
initial data directory.
8. Select the folder and click OK, and then click Close to close the Properties dialog box.
You can create different commandsfor Build and Control modes for the same resource icon, or you can
create the same command for both modes.
You can also start non-Magellan CCS Navigator applications from objects in the Graphical Navigation
pane by creating Launch Application actions. See Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action (on
page 444) for more information.
Setting the Monitor Point Properties

The Monitor Point Properties tab appears when an item can be monitored. You must set the router
source before you can use the Signal Monitor tool to view the signal.
To set the Monitor Point properties, follow this procedure.

1. In the Navigation pane, right click on a routing view. The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Monitor Point tab.
3. From the Router Source menu, choose a router source input.
4. Click the X in the top right corner of the dialog box to save your changes and close.
Setting HTTP Properties

If the selected resource has a Web server, you can set the URL of the Web page by following this
procedure:
1. In the Navigation pane, right click on a device.

The Navigation Properties dialog box appears.
2. Select the HTTP tab.
3. Type in the URL of the Web page.
Viewing the Preset Tab

Items in the Navigation pane’s Preset folder have a Preset tab. The Preset tab has one read-only field.
To view the Preset tab, right click on an item in the Navigation pane and select Properties from the
menu that appears. The Navigation Properties dialog box appears. Click on the Preset tab.
Presets are only available for the full version of Magellan CCS Navigator.
See Using Presets (on page 296) for information on using presets.
Viewing the Shortcut Tab

A resource has a Shortcut tab if you have created a shortcut to the resource icon, or if the resource has
a pre-configured shortcut. For example, a virtual device in the Configuration folder will have a shortcut
to the Virtual Devices folder.
The Shortcut tab contains information about target folder type (Network, Discovery Configuration,
Temporary, Catalog, or Preset) and target (path to the resource through the Resource tree) for the
Shortcut icon.
To view the Shortcut tab for a device, right click on its icon in the Navigation pane, select Properties,
and then click on the Shortcut tab.
For information about shortcuts, see Using Navigation Shortcuts (on page 151).
Viewing the Communication Settings Tab

Some devices have an extra tab in the Navigation Properties dialog box to show the communication
type. This tab is read-only and for informational purposes only. To view the communication settings of
such a device, right-click on its icon in the Navigation pane, and select Properties, and then click on the
Communication Settings tab.
Non-router devices have the following information:
Table 23: Communication Types

Communication Type Meaning
Broadcast (Default) Used when the client PC and the device are on the same network subnet
Point-to-point Used when the controlling PC and the device are on different subnets
This setting is fixed per device and is determined when the device is discovered and saved.
For Routing Systems, the Communication tab is configurable for Connection type (Serial or TCP/IP) COM
Port and Baud rate. For more information, see Creating a Routing System (on page 665).
Setting SNMP Navigation Properties

To set the SNMP properties for server and application class nodes, follow these steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, right click on the server or application class node. The Navigation Properties
dialog box appears.
All server and application class nodes that you have given a device ID have an SNMP tab in the
Navigation Properties dialog box.
2. If there is not an SNMP tab, choose the Device tab, and in the field labeled Device class, choose
either Server or Application. Now, enter a Device ID. The SNMP tab appears. Click on it.
3. Place a check beside SNMP enabled. This confirms that the server is in fact an SNMP device, and can
be status monitored.
4. Select the SNMP version, either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
5. If you want to monitor the status of the device, check Status Polling.
Even when Status Polling is disabled, the device is still queried for status when starting Magellan
CCS Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and with every Refresh or RefreshAll command.
6. Enter the name of the Read Community, if different from the default of public.
7. Enter the name of the Write Community, if different from the default of private.
8. Enter the SNMP Port for the device.
The default port is 161. The port can number can range from 0 to 65535.
9. Enter the Timeout period, in seconds.
The allowable timeout period can range from 1 to 1000 seconds.
10. Enter the Number of Retries to be allowed.
The default number of retries is 1. The number of retries can range from 1 to 1000.
11. Enter the Polling Interval, in seconds.
The default polling interval is 30 seconds. The interval can range from 1 to 65535 seconds.
Magellan CCS Navigator will periodically poll all OIDs of the specified SNMP device.
Setting Navigation Properties for an SNMP Server

Because SNMP does not support the concept of alarm clearing, follow the steps at Limiting the Number
of Listed SNMP Traps (on page 88) to avoid excessive numbers of alarms being triggered.
You can monitor SNMP servers on your network for SNMP traps. Magellan CCS Navigator shows the
content of the SNMP traps as alarm records in the Diagnostics dialog box.
To configure a device to send SNMP traps to a PC’s IP address, look for instructions in that device’s user
manual.
To set the navigation properties for an SNMP server that you want to monitor, complete these steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, right click in the Network or Discovery folder and select Create > Server
from the shortcut menu, or select an existing server icon.
2. Right-click the server icon and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This will show the Navigation Properties box.
3. Select the Device tab, and in the first field to the right of Device ID, select IP from the list box.
In the second field to the right of Device ID, type in the device IP address.
4. Click Close.
If the device has been configured to send SNMP traps to the PC that houses Magellan CCS Navigator,
when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode, it will receive those traps as alarms.
Setting the Amino STB Tab

The Amino STB tab of the Navigation Properties dialog box only appears for Amino STB devices created
in the Navigation pane.
When an Amino device is created and configured for Status monitoring and Magellan CCS Navigator is in
Control mode, if the Amino is not functioning correctly, it will have an alarm indicator (red) in the Alarms
column of the Navigation pane. The Status column will indicate if the device is inactive. Malfunctioning
Amino devices on Graphical Navigation panels will display a red flashing border. An alarm and
description will appear in the Diagnostics pane.
To create an Amino STB module in the Navigation pane, follow these steps:
1. With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, copy Amino STB from the Catalog > Third Party
Devices folder of the Navigation pane.
2. Right click on the Network folder and click Paste.

An Amino STB icon appears in the Network folder of the Navigation pane.
3. Right click on the Amino STB icon in the Network folder, and then select Properties from the menu
that appears.
4. Click on the Device tab.
5. Enter the IP address of the Amino STB device.
6. If you change the location of the STB Utility program from its default, click the Control tab and enter
the path in the Command field.
7. Click on the Amino STB tab.
By default, Status Polling is checked. In this state, Magellan CCS Navigator will monitor the Amino
device’s status while in Control mode.
8. Click the Browse button beside Amino Keyfile Name, browse to the location of the STBrc-
KEY.private file, and then click Open.
The keyfile is provided by Amino.
9. Enter the Keyfile Access Key for the Amino device.
The access key is provided by Amino.
Other options that are available on this tab include the following:
Table 24: Amino STB Navigation Properties options

Option Function
Time to Live (TTL) Determines how many network switches can exist between your device (in this
case the Amino STB) and the Magellan CCS Navigator PC. Normally you should
leave this setting at its default.
Polling Interval (s) The number of seconds between polls of the Amino device
Timeout Interval (s) The minimum duration an error condition must be present in order to trigger the
error
10. Close the Navigation Properties dialog box.
You can now monitor the Amino STB device in Control mode, add it to Graphical Navigation pages, etc.
Magellan CCS Navigator has no controls or alarm configuration tools for Amino devices. To configure an
Amino device, use the Amino STB Remote Configure Client.
When the Amino STB tab is correctly configured, you can double click on the Amino icon in the
Navigation pane or Graphical Navigation page, in Build or Control mode, and open the Amino STB
Remote Configure Client, if the Amino application has been installed.
Amino devices can generate four alarms, as described in the following table:
Table 25: Amino Alarms

Alarm Name Description
STBConfigLib Keyfile not found The data in the Amino Keyfile Name field of the Amino STB tab is not
correct. Correct the location to clear the alarm. If this does not clear
the alarm, please contact Amino customer support.
STBConfigLib key not decoded The Keyfile Access Key information on the Amino STB tab is not
correct. Re-enter the key to clear the alarm. If this is unsuccessful,
please contact Amino customer support.
Loss of connection or power This alarm will clear when power resumes or connection to the module
failure is revived. After the Amino device is reconnected or reactivated, it may
take 30 seconds for the alarm to clear.
Device is not responding This alarm occurs when the device loses connection and requires a
properly. Please reboot the reboot in order to restore status monitoring. Reboot the Amino device,
device and refresh device node and within 30 seconds, Magellan CCS Navigator will status monitor the
to continue device monitoring amino device.

• Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree (on page 408)
• Network Event Diagnostics (on page 263)
Sample Resource Tree Views

General users will each use a custom tree view in the Navigation pane, illustrating the devices they have
permissions to access on the CCS network. These resource trees are created by an administrator on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server. Here are two examples:
• Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User (on page 139)
• Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User (on page 139)
Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User

The sample resource tree for an Engineer user identifies the modules occupying each slot in the frames
by slot number. In addition, a studio icon has been renamed "Leitch Signal Processing and Acquisition
Wall" and a rack icon has been renamed "Central Rack."
Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User

In the sample resource tree for an Operator user, the operator wants to monitor which signal lines flow
to which equipment. The administrator has renamed several studio icons to represent the "Signal
Processing and Acquisition" process and three signal lines that stream through the CCS devices he or she
monitors.
The operator has no need to know which modules inhabit specific slots in a frame, but does need to
know how the signal flows from one device to the next.
Example: FR6802+ Frames

Within the Navigation view, frames will contain modules.
When you connect a FR6802+ frame to your CCS network, that frame must contain an ICE6800+ or
6800+ETH module, or it must be connected to a frame that contains an ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module.
Up to eight secondary frames can be connected to the FR6802+ frame that contains an ICE6800+ and up
to three secondary frames can be connected to a FR6802+QXF frame that contains a 6800+ETH module.
A QSEE6800+ module can have up to eight inputs. The inputs to the module would appear as
"contained" items beneath the QSEE6800+ module.
QSEE6800+ Module With Inputs
Example: Multiviewer System

You must discover an Imagine Communications Multiviewer through the IP address of the Ethernet
connector on the output module in order to control the multiviewer, create NUCLEUS configurations,
etc.
In order to configure a CENTRIO panel for use with a NUCLEUS control panel, you must also discover the
Platinum frame in which the modules reside. See Configuring Platinum Frames (on page 848) for more
information.
Each Multiviewer system contains a Layout Designer node. Double click this node to start Layout
Designer. You must use Layout Designer to upload firmware to your Imagine Communications
Multiviewer modules, create and edit layouts, configure SNMP, etc. For more information, see Starting
Software From the Navigation Pane (on page 123), and your Layout Designer manual or online help.
In Control mode, you can change the active layout for the Multiviewer system. When you do this, the list
of PIPs displayed in the Navigation pane will update to display only the PIPs included in that layout. All
PIPs are always listed in Build mode.
Output Module
Each Multiviewer system can be made up of several modules inside a Platinum frame. They are listed in
the Modules folder. Each module will display module-specific alarms, and has Control and Configuration
dialog boxes.
Multiviewer PIPs
When you discover a multiviewer, PIPs will display their default System names. Each PIP is treated as a
device, and you can open Configuration and Control dialog boxes for individual PIPs.
All PIPs are always listed in Build mode. In Control mode, only the PIPs included in the active layout are
listed in the Navigation pane. By default, each PIP displays its Live name (which will update when the
name designated on the hardware updates) and system name, but you can change this using the
Navigation Options settings.
See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147). The second table in Setting Navigation Options (on page
147) lists all the naming options.
Using Navigation Shortcut Menus

When you right-click an object in the Navigation pane, a shortcut menu will appear. It contains a list of
commands related to navigation for the selected object.
The following table describes the available options found on navigation shortcut menus. Some options
are unavailable in some operational modes
Navigation Shortcut Menu Commands
Command Client/Server Function Help Reference
Control Both Shows the Control dialog box for a selected Status Bar (on page 70)
resource
Control Both Shows the Control dialog boxes of the Status Bar (on page 70)
Contents container resource and all of its children
Configuration Both Shows the Configuration dialog box for a Opening and Closing a
selected resource (editable by Administrators Configuration Dialog Box
of Servers in Build mode only) (on page 153)
Refresh All Both
Updates the status of all devices (usually unnessary under normal
operating circumstances)
Refresh Both
Updates the status of the selected Amino or SNMP device
Reload Both
Updates the contents of the Navigation pane from the Magellan CCS
Navigator Server
Cut Server only
Cuts to the Windows Clipboard
Copy Server only
Copies the selected object to the Windows Clipboard
Paste Server only
Pastes the object currently residing on the Windows Clipboard
Delete Server only
Deletes the selected object
Create > Server only Opens a dialog box for creating resource icons Using the Create Tool to
to represent devices and shortcuts; and Add a Resource Icon (on
routers, edge, HW/SW panel, salvo, and tie- page 125) and Creating a
lines Shortcut
Rename Server only Lets you rename the selected object
Text Color... Server only Opens a dialog box where you can choose a Setting the Color of Text
new text color on a Resource Icon (on
page 128)
Preset > Both Opens a dialog box for loading, saving or Using Presets (on page
deleting of a preset for a device or devices 296)
Command Client/Server Function Help Reference

Alarm Both Turns on/off alarm monitoring on a CCS Using Alarm Filtering (on
Filtering control panel (individual alarm filtering) page 261)
Alarm Both Contains two options, which set the system to Using Alarm Filtering
Filtering ignore or view alarms for all child resources Contents (on page 261)
Contents on a CCS control panel
Standalone Both Provides options for adding or removing Navigation Pane (on
Tools > standalone tools page 64)
Options... Both Opens the Navigation Options box Setting Navigation
Options (on page 147)
Favorites... Server only Opens a dialog box where you can create a Configuring Favorites for
limited set of parameters for a CCS control a Device (on page 254)
panel, or for configuring favorites in the
Parameters pane (with the NAVIGATOR-INT
license only)
Copy Server only Copies the favorites from the selected devices
Favorites
Paste Server only Pastes copied favorites to a like CCS device
Favorites
Product Info Both Opens a product brochure for the selected
device in Adobe Acrobat Reader, if both
Acrobat Reader and the Magellan CCS
Navigator documentation are installed on the
PC
Help Both Shows the Online Help
Properties Both Shows the properties of a resource Setting Navigation
Properties (on page 128)
Poll Server only
See Router Shortcut Menus (on page 658)
Download Server only
Rediscover Server only Rediscovers an already-discovered device Rediscovery (on page
116)
Backup Server only
See Router Shortcut Menus (on page 658)
Restore Server only
Execute Both
Checking the Control Access Rights for a Device

To check the control access rights for a network resource, complete these steps:
1. In the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon whose access properties you want to check,
and then select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This shows the General tab of the Navigation Properties box.
2. Click the Device tab.

Depending on the settings in the Control Access Rights box, the following situations may occur:
Table 26: Possible Settings in the Control Access Rights Box

Setting Outcome
Enabled The application enables access to the resource.
Disabled The Application prevents access to the resource.
Limited The application prevents access to some parameters of the
resource.
Administrators control access to a resource in setting up the access rights of the different user
groups. You acquire access to a resource through your membership in a specific user group.
3. Click Close.
Showing Product Information for a CCS Device

To show a product brochure for a CCS resource, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon in the Navigation pane, and then select Product Info from the resulting
shortcut menu.
This starts Adobe Acrobat Reader and opens the CCS product brochure for the selected resource.
2. Browse through this information, and print it if required.

3. Click Close when you have finished using the brochure.
Setting Navigation Options

The Navigation Options box has the following tabs: General, Name Properties, and Tree View. Controls
on the General tab govern the behavior of objects in the Navigation pane, controls on the Name
Properties tab determine how device names are displayed in the Navigation pane, and controls on the
Tree View tab govern what appears in the Navigation pane.
To open the Navigation Options box, do one of the following:

• Click Navigation on the Options menu.
OR
• Right-click in the Navigation pane and click Options....
OR
• Right-click the status bar and select Navigation.
Select the check boxes of options you want to enable, and clear those of options you want to disable.
The General tab has the following options:
Table 27: General Tab of Navigation Options

Check Box Option Function
Allow drag-and-drop operations in Build Enables you to move or copy items by dragging them
mode from one place to another with the mouse, including in and
out of Graphical Navigation dialog boxes if you have a
navigator-srv license
Show confirmation window for drag-and- Shows a Confirmation dialog box after each drag-and-drop
drop operations operation
Perform full validation for drag-and-drop Validates drop targets in the Configuration folder during the
operations in the Configuration folder dragging process and will not drop a resource icon on an
during dragging process invalid target
Allow renaming of items using mouse click Enables you to rename a resource with a mouse click.
To rename a resource, right-click the resource icon, and then
select Rename from the resulting shortcut menu
Allow undo/redo of Load Preset in Control By default, the Navigation tool’s ability to undo and redo
mode the loading of presets is disabled, so the Navigation tool can
load presets more quickly. However, the Control tool’s
ability to undo and redo the loading of presets is always
enabled from the Control dialog box
Show progress dialog when loading presets When checked, a progress bar displays during loading of
presets. This is especially helpful during loading of large
presets.
The Tree View tab has the following options:
Table 28: Tree View Navigation Pane Options

Show alarm level Shows a column of color-coded alarm boxes to the right of the
resource icon's name in the Network and Discovery folders.
Show device status Shows the status of the resource on the network in a column that
shows in both the Network and the Discovery folders.
Show monitor points Shows a column of monitor icons to the right of the resource icon
names, for CCS devices that have a monitor point defined.
Show alarm filtering Shows a check box in a column for each resource that has alarm
filtering.
Show discovery result Shows the result of a discovery operation to the right of the resource
icon’s name in a column that shows in both the Network and the
Discovery folders in Build mode.
Default background color Opens a palette from which you can choose a different color for the
Navigation pane
Default text color Opens a palette from which you can choose a different color for the
text in the Navigation pane (to change the color of the text on
individual resource icons, see Setting the Color of Text on a Resource
Icon (on page 128))
The Name Properties tab has the following options:
Table 29: Name Properties Navigation Pane Options

Option Function
Choose the type of name to There are three options:
display • Name - The current product name or one you assign to the device
• Alternate Name - The former product name, if one exists
• Short Name - An abbreviated form of the name that reflects
what shows on a control panel’s local display
To define these names for a resource icon, see Setting General
Navigation Properties for a Device (on page 130).
Display live name when feature When this option is checked, when a device has an assigned live name,
is available the live name will be used in Control mode. In order to prevent
confusion should two or more devices share a Live name, the device’s
system (discovered) name appears in brackets after the live name.
Option Function
Type of live name to display: If you choose Display live name when feature is available, in Control
mode you can have one of these four options appear:
• Static: This name can be configured in Layout Designer and can
change after the device is discovered
• Source Name: Designated by the router database
• Dynamic: Configured using the UMD
• Display Name: Indicates the display on which a PIP is currently
displayed
Using the Optional Columns in the Navigation Pane

Optional columns will not appear for Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server when they
view User tabs.
Depending on which operational mode Magellan CCS Navigator is in and what Navigation Options are
on, the Navigation pane also may show one or more of the optional columns.
To show these optional columns, you must activate or open these columns in the Navigation Options
box. See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
The optional columns are described in the following topics:

• Using the Alarm Column (on page 149)
• Using the Status Column (on page 150)
• Using the Monitor Column (on page 151)
• Using the Filter Column (on page 151)
• Using the Discovery Column (on page 151)
Using the Alarm Column

The Alarm column is available in Control mode only. It contains an Alarm-level box beside each resource
icon in the Navigation pane. The colors of the Alarm-level boxes indicate the following:
• Red— critical
• Yellow—warning
• Green—information
• Orange—acknowledged
• If there is no colored alarm box in the Alarm column for a resource, this indicates that there is no
alarm for that particular resource.
When you close a container resource, the Alarm-level box shows the color of the highest alarm for that
container and its children. When you open a container resource, the Alarm-level box disappears if that
container has no alarms.
Using the Status Column

The Status column is available in Control mode only. It contains comments that indicate the operational
status of each CCS device. The comments and their meanings are as follows:
Table 30: Navigation Status Column Comments for CCS Devices

Comment Meaning
Network Active The CCS device is operational. The PC and software can communicate with the device
and remotely control it.
Error The software has a problem communicating with a device. A module may have been
removed from a frame or replaced with a different type of module.
Not Ready The PC is querying the device. When the query ends, one of the other comments will
appear.
Local Active The CCS device is operational, but it can only be controlled from its module edge.
Inactive The CCS device has been removed from its frame, or the software has lost its TCP/IP
connection to the CCS device. The device may be disconnected from the network,
powered off, or restarting. The PC may also be disconnected from the network.
Disabled Indicates that the device is not currently controllable

Invalid The PC is trying to access module of a given product type, which has been swapped in
the frame with a card of a different type.
For SNMP devices, if Status Polling is activated, the Navigation Status column will indicate whether the
device is active or inactive. this status is updated when starting Magellan CCS Navigator, when switching
to Control mode, and after a Refresh or RefreshAll action is performed.
Platinum routers display the status comments of CCS devices.
If there are routers involved in your system, the status column may contain router communication port
status messages:
Table 31: Router Communication Port Status

Comment Meaning
Inactive Communications port is not connected
Initializing Initializing communications port
Connecting Connecting to device(s)
Active Communications port is connected and active
Reconnecting Communication was interrupted, trying to reconnect to device(s)
Not Ready Failed to connect to device(s)
Disconnecting Terminating connection
Status indicators can also refer to a router device itself. Router status is listed in the following table:
Table 32: Router Device Status

Comment Meaning
Inactive The device is not active
Initializing The device is initializing
Downloading The device is downloading
Active The device is active and ready for commands
Busy The device is busy processing commands
Terminating The device is shutting down
Not Ready The device is not ready or inaccessible
Needs Download The device requires a configuration update to function properly
New The device is newly discovered
Using the Monitor Column

The Monitor column shows the monitor icon for CCS devices that have their Monitor Point properties
set. It is available in both Build and Control modes. When you select a resource in the Navigation pane
that has a monitor point defined, the monitored video signal of that resource will show in the Signal
Monitor dialog box.
See Video Output Monitoring (on page 312).
Using the Filter Column

The Filter column in the Navigation pane shows a check box for each CCS device that has filtered alarms,
in both Build and Control modes. Set the filtering of alarms for a CCS device on the Diagnostics Filter tab
or through the navigation shortcut menu.
When alarms are filtered, they are stored in the alarms log database. They will not show on any other
tabs of the diagnostic database. (See Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs (on page 280) to
view the database.)
See Setting Alarm Filtering Options (on page 275) for information on defining and using alarm filtering
options.
Using the Discovery Column

After you run a discovery and save its results in Build mode, the Discovery column shows a short
comment for each resource inside the Network, Discovery, and Temporary folders.
See the following related topics:

• Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu (on page 116)
• Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View (on page 117)
Using Navigation Shortcuts

A shortcut provides one-click access to a resource icon in the resource tree.
A Shortcut icon has a small boxed arrow in its bottom left corner. The name of the shortcut, which
shows to the right of the icon, is "Shortcut to {name of the resource}."
Resources that have shortcuts will have a Shortcut tab in their Properties dialog box. For more
information see Viewing the Shortcut Tab (on page 134).
To find and select an object:

To find and select an object in the Navigation pane from its shortcut icon, double-click the shortcut
icon.
The Navigation tool finds and highlights the icon of the target object in the resource tree. If the
object is in a closed folder, the folder will open to show the target object.
To create a shortcut:
To create a shortcut to an object in the Navigation pane, right-click the resource icon for the object
to which you want to create a shortcut, click Create and select Shortcut. The Navigation tool creates
an icon for the object and places it at the bottom of the resource tree.
To delete a shortcut:
Shortcuts can only be created or deleted by Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator Servers
in Build mode.
To delete a shortcut to a network resource, right-click the shortcut icon, and then select Delete from
the resulting context menu.
This removes the shortcut icon from your Navigation pane.
Chapter 8
CCS Device Configuration

Refer to Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656) for Router-related configuration
information.
If you have configuration access to a network of CCS-enabled devices, you can use the Configuration
tool to remotely configure those devices. You can also use it to access component version information
about CCS hardware and software modules, if your CCS-enabled devices store such information. (Some
older products do not store version information.)
Each device has a Configuration dialog box with a series of tabs, on which you can accomplish
the following tasks:
• Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for a CCS device.
• List the contents of the file directory of a CCS device.
• Delete or retrieve a file on the file system of a CCS device.
• Transfer updated software to the remote CCS device.
• Remotely restart the CCS device.
• View product, hardware, and software version information.
• Log all configuration activities and save them to a file.
Each CCS device has only one Configuration dialog box, but you can have multiple dialog boxes open at
the same time.
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device

Once you have discovered a device, you can adjust its network settings. This can be useful when you are
uploading software to that device, or so the network can recognize the device.
Some CCS devices require special configuration. See these topics for specialized configuration
information:
• NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 187)
• NEO Frame Configuration (on page 247)
• LCP and RCP Configuration (on page 252)
• Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656)
Opening and Closing a Configuration Dialog Box

General users on Magellan CCS Navigator Clients must be assigned Configuration access to a device to
change its configuration settings. Only an Administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can assign
Configuration access. See Managing User Accounts (on page 51) for more information.
To open or show the Configuration dialog box for a CCS device, choose one of these three methods:
• Right-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane, and then select Configuration
from the resulting context menu.
• Select the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane, and then click Configuration on the
Tools menu.
• In Build mode, double-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane.
• In a Graphical Navigation page, set an action (the effect component of a rule) to open a
Configuration dialog box. See Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action (on page 442) for more
information. You will need a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create this action.
To close a CCS device Configuration dialog box, choose one of these three methods:
• Click Close in the upper right corner of the dialog box
• Select the Configuration dialog box and then click Close on the Window menu
• Right click in the Configuration dialog box and select Close from the menu that appears
See Navigation Pane (on page 64) for more information.
Using the Configuration Status Bar

The Status Bar stretches across the lower edge of the Configuration dialog box.
Table 33: Configuration Status Bar Columns

Column Function
Status Reports the status of configuration operations
Device ID Matches device information to the specific device on the network
Access status Indicates whether the user group has access to configure the CCS device
• Access Enabled means that the user group does have configuration access to the
device.
• Access Disabled means that the user group lacks configuration access.
Only an Administrator user can change the configuration access to a device for a user
group.
Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device

When you change the IP address of a Platinum resource card, Magellan CCS Navigator will immediately
lose control of the Platinum frame. When Magellan CCS Navigator reconnects to the new resource
card’s IP address (which may require rediscovery of the frame), it will again be able to control the
Platinum frame. Rebooting the resource module is recommended, but not required.
To communicate with a CCS device, the Navigation tool must know the IP address of the device.
If a CCS device is already on the network and has a valid network IP address, then Magellan CCS
Navigator can dynamically discover the device. Then you can change the IP address on the Network tab
of the device’s Configuration dialog box.
However, if a CCS device is new and still has its factory-default network settings, you must use the
Magellan CCS Navigator PC to reset the network settings.

• Summary of Discovery Tasks (on page 100)
• Changing the Network Settings of a Device (on page 155)
Changing the Network Settings of a Device

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can run a discovery.
To change the network settings of a CCS device, complete these steps:

1. Use the Discovery tool to discover the CCS device at its default IP address—192.168.100.250 for
most CCS devices or 192.168.100.251 for a NEO control panel.
2. Open the Configuration dialog box for the discovered CCS device.
3. Select the Network tab, and then type in the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for
the device.
4. Click Write to transfer the new network settings to the device.
5. Restart the device to have the device implement the new settings.
Now you can connect the CCS device to the network and control it from any PC on the same network.
See these topics:

• Running a Full Discovery (on page 108)
• Running a Partial Discovery (on page 110)
• Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery (on page 101)
• Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device (on page 108)
Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device

If a CCS device still has its factory-default network settings, you must connect it to a PC to change the
default settings to valid network settings.
Table 34: Factory-Default Settings for CCS Devices
Device IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway
NEO control panels 192.168.100.251 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.251

All other CCS devices 192.168.100.250 255.255.255.0 192.168.100.250
There are two methods for changing the factory default network settings of a device to valid network
settings. These topics describe those two methods:
• Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device (on page 156)
• Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table (on page 158)
Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device

For a PC to communicate with a CCS device, you can temporarily set the IP address of the PC to reside
on the same subnet as the CCS device and have the same subnet mask.
To change the IP address of a PC, complete these steps:

1. Attach the new CCS device to the PC, using either an Ethernet hub or an Ethernet crossover cable.
2. Write down the current IP address of the PC.
3. Change the IP address of the PC so that it is on the same subnet as the new CCS device.
Since the new CCS device has a default IP address of 192.168.100.250 (for most CCS devices) or
192.168.100.251 (for NEO control panels), set the PC to reside on the same subnet—for example,
192.168.100.2.
4. Set the subnet mask of the PC to 255.255.255.0, the same subnet mask as the CCS device.
5. In Build mode, discover the new CCS device.
6. Open the device’s Configuration dialog box, and then click Read on the Network tab to show the
address.
7. To change the network settings for the device, select the text you want to change on the Network
tab and type in new text.
8. Click Write to transfer the new network address to the device.
9. Change the IP address of the PC back to its original value.

• Summary of Discovery Tasks (on page 100)
• Obtaining the IP Address of a PC (on page 156)
• Setting the IP Address of a PC (on page 156)
Obtaining the IP Address of a PC

To determine the current IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1. Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs), and click MS-DOS Command Prompt to open an
MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box on the PC.
2. Type the following command at the MS-DOS Command Prompt, and then press ENTER:
ipconfig
The PC shows its IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.
3. Click Close to close the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
See these topics:

Setting the IP Address of a PC

To set the IP address of a PC, complete these steps:
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and click Network Connections.

2. Double-click the Network icon in the Network Connections dialog box.
3. Click Properties to open the LAN Properties dialog box.
After changing the PC’s IP address, you must restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
4. Double-click Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) in the This connection uses the following items: list.
The Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties dialog appears.
5. Select Use the following IP Address, and type new information in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and
Default Gateway boxes.
6. Click OK to close the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties box, and then click OK to each of the
dialog boxes that were opened during the process.
Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table

On a TCP/IP network, each computer has a routing table, composed of entries called routes. Each route
tells the computer where to forward TCP/IP packets on the network. You may need to create a
temporary route for the CCS device on the PC.
To add or delete a route to the PC routing table, you must have Administrator privileges.
To add a temporary route for the new CCS device to the PC routing table, complete these steps:
1. Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs), and click MS-DOS Command Prompt to open an
MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box on the PC.
2. Type the following command at the prompt and then press ENTER:
route add 192.168.100.0 mask 255.255.255.0 172.24.6.50
The generic command for adding a route is as follows:
route add {temporary route address} mask {device subnet mask} {PC
IP address}
The number after the word add is the new CCS device network address. The number after the word
mask is the default subnet mask of the device. The new CCS device network address always ends in
a 0 (zero).
The last IP address, 172.24.6.50 in this example, is the IP address of the PC.
This command adds a route to the routing table of the PC. The PC can now access the CCS device,
even though it is on a different subnet.
3. To verify that the new route has been added to the routing table, ping the CCS device from the PC.
Referring to the table below, type the appropriate command at a MS-DOS command prompt, and
then press ENTER. A reply means the CCS device is now accessible from the PC.
Table 35: Ping Commands for CCS Devices and NEO Control Panels
Device Type Ping Command
For NEO control panels ping 192.168.100.251
For all other CCS Devices ping 192.168.100.250
4. Change the network settings of the CCS device to valid network settings.
You should now be able to discover the new CCS device.
5. Now you must remove the temporary route for the CCS device from the PC routing table.
Open an MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
6. At the prompt, type the following command, and then press ENTER:
route delete 192.168.100.0
In generic form, this command is:
route delete {temporary route address}
7. Click Close to close the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
See Changing the Network Settings of a Device (on page 155).
Changing the PC Network Settings

The network settings of the PC may need be changed so that they match those of a device to correct a
failed upgrade procedure. If you need to change the settings for such a procedure, you will need to
change it back again later.
You will probably require administrator privileges on your PC to change the IP address.
To change the IP address of the PC:

1. Click Start > Settings and then click Control Panel.
The Control Panel dialog box appears.
2. Double-click Network Connections, and then double-click Local Area Connection to show the Local
Area Connection dialog box.
3. Select the General tab, and then select Properties.
The Local Area Connection dialog box appears.
4. On the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and then click Properties..., ensuring you are
working on the correct Ethernet adapter for the CCS network.
The IP Address of the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties box appears.
The figure below shows the portion of the Internet Protocol TCP/IP Properties box where you enter
the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway of the resource module.
5. If you are returning the Network settings to their original condition, and Obtain an IP address
automatically was selected, reselect it. Otherwise, select Use the following IP address, and in the IP
address box, type the original IP address, subnet mask and gateway address.
OR
If you are changing the network settings to match a device on which the upgrade failed, complete
the following steps.
a. Note whether Obtain an IP address automatically is selected.
You may need to re-select this option later when you revert back to the original PC IP address.
b. Select Use the following IP address, and in the IP address box, type a new computer IP address
to match the first three octets of the IP address of the resource module, and then add a
different fourth octet.
(For example, if the device’s IP address is 192.168.100.70, you could type 192.168.100.181).
c. In the Subnet Mask field, type: 255.255.255.0
d. Enter the same default gateway as the one on the device, or leave it blank.
6. Click OK to close the TCP/IP Properties box, and then close the two Local Area Connection boxes.
7. On older versions of Windows, you may need to restart the computer.
Reading the Network Configuration from a Device

To read the network configuration of a CCS device when you have set the IP address manually or
determined the address from a discovery, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon for the device, and then select Configuration from the resulting
shortcut menu.
The Network tab shows by default.
2. Click Read.
The Configuration tool will retrieve the network information from the device.
If you have not previously configured the Configuration tool to remember Telnet login information,
a Telnet Login box will ask for the Telnet user name and password for the CCS device.
3. The Telnet login box has a Remember Telnet login check box. Select the check box to enable the
remember feature, or clear the box to disable it.
The Configuration tool responds by filling in any additional address information that it reads from
the CCS device.
Only one person at a time can connect to a CCS device through Telnet. The default Telnet user name
is leitch and the password is LeitchAdmin. The password is case-sensitive, so type carefully.
4. The Configuration tool reports its "read" activity to the Log tab. You can save the log to a *.txt file.
5. When you are finished with the Configuration dialog box, click Close.
See Logging Configuration Activity (on page 181).
Writing Network Information to a CCS Device

To write the network configuration of a CCS device, when you have set its IP address manually or
determined the address through a discovery, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the resulting
shortcut menu.
The Network tab shows by default.
2. Click Read to show the current network settings.
3. If you want to change these settings, select the text in the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway boxes and type in new numbers.
4. The Ethernet (MAC) Address of the server is a read-only field. Skip this box.
5. Select the Reboot device and update the Navigation tree after writing Network settings check box.
For best results, restart a CCS device after changing its network settings.
6. Click Write.
If you have not previously configured the Configuration tool to remember Telnet login information,
a Telnet Login box will ask you to type in the Telnet user name and password for the CCS device.
Only one person can connect to a CCS device through Telnet at a time.
The default Telnet user name is leitch and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The password is
case-sensitive, so type carefully.
7. Type in the user name and password for the device, select the check box to enable the
Configuration tool to "remember" the Telnet login information of the device for future logins, and
then select OK.
8. When a Network Configuration query box asks you to confirm that you want to write the new
network settings to the CCS device, click Yes.
9. If the Configuration tool succeeds in writing the new settings to the CCS device, a Network
Configuration Information box will appear, confirming the transfer.
Click OK to close the Network Configuration Information box.
10. The write operation will require from 10 to 20 seconds. The Configuration tool will then show a box
confirming the write activity and then report this activity to the Log tab.
You can save the information on the Log tab to a *.txt file.
11. When you are finished with the Configuration dialog box, click Close.
See Logging Configuration Activity (on page 181).
Upgrading Software
The Software Upgrade tool allows you to select one or more devices of the same type (X75, X75-RCP,
NEO, NEO LCP/RCP, NUCLEUS, 6800+, etc.) to be upgraded in parallel using the transferred software
package. It automates the backup and upgrade process to run in the background, and includes event
and error logging.
Devices you cannot upgrade using this procedure include the following:
• Older CCS devices, such as DPS-575,must be upgraded using the File Transfer tab. See Using the
Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab (on page 169).
• Imagine Communications Multiviewer systems must be upgraded using Layout Designer. See Starting
Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the Navigation Pane (on page 132).
You can upgrade one device or multiple devices of the same type receiving the same upgrade package
(ZIP file).
1. From the Tools menu, select Software Upgrade.
The Software Upgrade dialog box appears, or if it is already open, it is brought to the foreground.
2. On the New Transfer tab, click Add.

The Device Selection dialog appears.
3. Click on a device to upgrade, and then click Apply.
You can select other devices of the same type to receive the same upgrade package, clicking Apply
after each device.
The system will not prevent you from adding items that are not of the same device type in this
phase of the upgrade procedure. However, when you submit the file transfer task (in step 12), if the
upgrade package does not apply to all selected items, an error message will be displayed and the
transfer will not continue.
4. Click OK to close the Add Device dialog box.
The selected devices appear in the table on the New Transfer tab of the Software Upgrade dialog
box. A single row appears for each IP address to receive the upgrade.
If you have multiple 6800+ modules that are at the same IP address (in the same 6800+ frame), all
modules at that IP address will appear on the same line.
Normally, 6800+ modules can only upgrade one device per IP address during a single transfer task
(i.e., one module per frame). Some packages may state they can upgrade multiple devices per IP
address during a single transfer task. This feature is known as "parallel upgrade". To fully support
parallel upgrade, your 6800+ETH module must be version 4.5 or higher. ICE6800+ modules do not
support parallel upgrade.
For each device in this table, you can highlight its position in the Tree View by clicking Find Device. If
multiple devices are selected for a single IP address, then this finds the first-selected device.
You can check the software revision numbers, etc., by clicking Version Info.
5. For each device you intend to upgrade, click Device Options.
If they are not already entered, add Telnet user name and password and FTP user name and
password.
6. Place a check beside Automatic Backup.
This creates a backup of the current software installed on the CCS device. The backup is saved to the
file name and location stated unless you click Browse to change.
Automatic Backup is not available for 6800+ devices other than the ICE6800+.
7. Click OK to close the Software Upgrade Device Options dialog box.
8. Click Options.
The software options apply to all transfers, not just the specific device type currently being
upgraded. these options are described below.
Table 36: Software Upgrade Options

Option Description
Warn if the upgrade package Many firmware upgrades will fail if there is no XML file in the ZIP
does not have an XML script package. Unselect this option to disable warnings.
Option Description
When this option is not checked, you can’t downgrade your
Transfer files even if file version
module.
is same or older than the version
on the server
Number of devices to Choose a number between 1 and 10 (the default is 5). This
simultaneously upgrade determines the number of IP addresses that are upgraded per
batch. If the network load is too high, choose a lower number.
1. On the New Transfer tab, click Browse.
A standard Windows File Selection dialog appears.
2. Choose the upgrade ZIP file on a local or network drive.
The selected file’s path name is displayed in the edit box to the left of the Browse button.
3. Click Package Info. This opens a dialog box containing version information and a list of the
components contained within the ZIP file.
The extraction process on the ZIP file is handled as part of the upgrade process. You do not need to
extract the files yourself.
4. Click Submit Transfer...
A dialog box appears, requesting confirmation that you want to proceed with the request. If you
have multiple devices selected, multiple transfer tasks are submitted—one per device.
The transfer now progresses. You may close the Software Upgrade dialog box, or continue with
other tasks.
Closing the Software Upgrade dialog box does not effect any of the transfer processes that may be
running in the background.
Or you can switch to the Progress tab to view the status of the transfers. See Using the Software
Upgrade Progress Tab (on page 166) for more information.
If you try to log off or exit Magellan CCS Navigator while a transfer is underway, a notification dialog
box will alert you that processes are still active and will ask if you want to terminate these
processes.
5. Click on the Log tab and look at the Progress column to ensure that all files have correctly updated.
See Using the Log Tab (on page 167) for more information.
The CCS device is automatically rebooted following an upgrade procedure.
In rare circumstances, the upgrade may be unsuccessful. For information about correcting an
unsuccessful upgrade procedure, see Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure (on page 168).
Stopping a Transfer Task

The Resume button is not available in this release. Its functionality will be implemented in a future
release.
To stop a transfer task, select the task from the grid, and then click Stop. If the selected task is currently
executing, it is placed into a an Aborted state. If the task has not yet started, it is placed into a "Waiting
to Resume" state. A confirmation dialog box appears to confirm that you want to stop as aborting the
task will put the module into an inconsistent state the next time it is rebooted.
Upgrading a NEO SuiteView Using the Wizard

If you are upgrading your firmware from version 1.x to version 2.x or later, during the upgrade you will
need to set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode. Instructions about how and when to do this
are provided in your NEO SuiteView documentation.
Using the Software Upgrade tool, you can upgrade the entire NEO SuiteView frame including all
modules. Because of the extensive nature of this upgrade, it can take considerably longer than other
upgrades—minutes rather than seconds. Ensure that you have sufficient time to complete the upgrade.
You will need to be able to physically access your NEO SuiteView frame to complete the upgrade
process.
Preparing your NEO SuiteView System for a Firmware Upgrade

To upgrade a NEO SuiteView, follow this procedure:
1. Backup all your layouts stored on the NSV-OUT.
If you do not backup customized layouts they will be lost forever, because the upgrade utility
performs a factory recall on the system. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and Operation Manual
for more information.
2. If you have an audio module installed in the slot directly below the NSV Output Module on the NEO
SuiteView frame that you are presently attempting to upgrade, remove the audio module from the
frame before proceeding.
Failure to remove this audio module will cause the upgrade to fail.
3. In Magellan CCS Navigator, choose Tools > Software Upgrade from the main menu.
The Software Upgrade tool appears.
4. Click Add and select the NSV-OUT module.
5. Click Browse... and select the software upgrade package (ZIP file).
If the upgrade package shows that you are upgrading from firmware version 1.x to version 2.x or later,
you will need to set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode. For more information, see Setting
the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Mode (on page 165).
If the upgrade package shows that you are upgrading from a firmware version later than 2.x, proceed to
Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard (on page 166).
Setting the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Mode

If you are upgrading from firmware version 1.x to version 2.x or later, you will need to set your NSV-OUT
module to fail-safe loader mode.
To set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe loader mode, follow these steps:
1. Remove the NSV-OUT module from the NEO frame.
2. Press the NAV switch down while simultaneously pressing both the Escape and Enter buttons.
3. While still pressing the buttons and the Nav switch, reinsert the module into the frame and hold for
approximately three seconds until the display on the module reads Offline-H (or Offline-L) Upload
Required.
4. Now, proceed follow the instructions contained in Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard (on
page 166).
Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard

After you have either set your NSV-OUT module to fail-safe mode, or determined that you do not need
to (because your current firmware version is 2.x or later) you can run the Upgrade Wizard.
1. To run the Upgrade Wizard, click Submit Transfer.
The NEO SuiteView Upgrade wizard appears. The wizard will take you through the steps of
upgrading your NEO SuiteView and all the modules in it.
Modules will only be updated as required, and in the following order:
 NSV-OUT module
 NSV-IN module
 NSV-AUD module(s)
3. To check the state of your upgrade during the process, you can switch between the wizard and the
Progress tab of the Software Upgrade tool to view your progress.
In the event that an upgrade does not complete correctly (perhaps because of a power failure), modules
can be upgraded individually. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and Operation Manual for
information on correcting a failed software upgrade.
Individual audio modules can have their firmware upgraded using the Software Upgrade tool. See
Upgrading Software (on page 161) for more information.
If you backed up your layouts to a computer, you can now use Layout Manager to transfer them back
onto the NSV-OUT module. See your NEO SuiteView Installation and Operation Manual for more
information.
Using the Software Upgrade Progress Tab

The Resume button is always unavailable in this release. Its functionality will be implemented in a future
release.
Use the Progress tab to monitor the status of all the transfer requests in the queue. The grid displays the
status of each transfer task, with each row in the grid representing a single device-package combination
(transfer task).
The table below describes the buttons on the Progress tab.
Table 37: Progress Tab Buttons

Button Description
Stop Aborts a selected transfer task
Clear Removes a selected transfer task from the grid; the task must be in a Waiting to Resume,
Aborted, Failed, or Completed state in order for this button to be enabled
Stop All Aborts all tasks in the queue; you will be asked to confirm
Clear All Removes all stopped tasks from the queue; these tasks must be either Waiting to
Resume, Aborted, Failed, or Completed
Resume Restarts a task that is in the "Waiting to Resume" state
Using the Log Tab

The Log tab displays a running log of all the transfer operations completed since application startup. It
contains information such as the package filename, versions being transferred, start times, errors during
transfer, and so on. The log text is selectable, allowing you to copy and paste log information to another
application.
Software Upgrade Options

Right click in the Software Upgrade dialog box to open an Options dialog box.
Table 38: Software Upgrade Options

Option Result
Warn if upgrade package does File transfer is not supported without an XML script, so this will warn
not have an XML script you before aborting.
Transfer files even if file version When this is checked, you can potentially upgrade the software to an
is same or older than the version older revision. However, this may be useful for returning to your backed
on the server up version.
Number of devices to Limits the number of files that can be added to the table on the New
simultaneously upgrade Transfer tab to the number in the dialog box, which you can change.
Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server install can perform this procedure.
A firmware upgrade may fail in the event of a network interruption or power failure. If one of these
events occurs, you will be able to ping the device, but Magellan CCS Navigator will not be able to
discover it.
See the documentation for the specific CCS device whose upgrade has failed for information on fail-safe
mode, and if there are instructions for putting the device into fail-safe mode, follow them.
After a failed upgrade, some CCS devices will automatically go into a fail-safe mode where new software
can be loaded but other functions are not enabled. If an upgrade fails, remove and then reapply power
to the CCS device. You can then try the upgrade procedure again.
When you are performing the fail-safe upgrading procedure, check the readme file to confirm which
files are needed. Use care to ensure that you transfer the correct files to the intended device.
1. Ensure that the CCS device is in fail-safe mode.
2. Change the network addresses on your Magellan CCS Navigator PC to match the default network
addresses.
3. In Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build mode, drag or copy and paste the device’s icon from the Catalog
folder to the Network or Discovery folder.
4. Right click on the device icon and then select Properties.
Do not make changes in the third field (located above and to the right of the Set Default button).
5. On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, click Set Default, and then click Yes.
6. Follow the software upgrade procedure for the device as laid out in Upgrading Software (on page
161).
7. Return the upgraded device to its normal operating mode, including returning the fail-safe and
Default IP switches to their up position. For information on doing this, please refer to the device’s
installation and operation manual.
8. Return the PC network settings to their original states. See Changing the PC Network Settings (on
page 159).
Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File Transfer Tab

Some older devices, such as DPS-575, may not be able to use the Software Upgrade tool. To upgrade
the software on these devices, use the File Transfer tab of the Configuration dialog box.
When using the File Transfer tab, take care to ensure that files are properly downloaded.
The File Transfer tab also appears on 6800+, NEO, NEO LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U, X75, and X75-RCP
devices. On these devices, you should do routine file updates using the Software Upgrade tool. See
Upgrading Software (on page 161).
Before youtransfer files using the File Transfer tab of a device’s Configuration dialog box, you should
download and unzip the most recent appropriate files from our website. Save the unzipped files in the
computer that has Magellan CCS Navigator installed.
For a successful file transfer to take place, the Subnet Mask and Default Gateway on the CCS device and
PC should match. See the following topics for information on setting these numbers:
You should always back up the files to be replaced. This is included in the updating procedure.
Always restart a CCS device after transferring files.
Backing Up Files From a CCS Device

Backing up files can not be done on 6800+ devices except for the ICE6800+.
Before replacing a file on a CCS device, copy the old file back to the PC—if possible—before deleting the
old file from the CCS device. Transfer the new file to the device, and then refresh the device.
Always restart a CCS device after replacing files on it.

1. Right-click the CCS device icon, and then select Configuration from the resulting shortcut menu.
2. Select the File Transfer tab.
3. Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and select the directory of the
file you want to replace. The list of directories differs from device to device.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box is blank, indicating that this is the root directory of the
remote device.
4. Click List Files.
The Configuration tool lists the files residing in the remote directory in the List of files in this
directory box.
After replacing files, you may need to re-discover some CCS devices so that they appear in your
Discovery folder.
To see if this applies to your CCS device, please refer to the device's user manual, or the instructions
in the ZIP package for transfer. Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can
run a discovery.
An FTP Login box may ask you to enter the FTP user name and password for the CCS device.
5. Select a file to update from the List of files in this directory box, and then click Get File.
This feature retrieves the file from the remote directory and saves it to the PC. You can select and
retrieve only one file at a time.
Some products do not support the "Get File" feature.
6. On the PC, rename the transferred file, so that the device name and out-of-date status are clear.
To get another file, repeat steps 4-6. You can get only one file at a time.
Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab

6800+, NEO, NEO LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U, X75, and X75-RCP devices should be upgraded using the
Software Upgrade tool. See Upgrading Software (on page 161).
Using the File Transfer tab of the Configuration dialog box, you can transfer individual files to a CCS
device.
Before you transfer firmware or software on a CCS device, you should back up the old files. See Backing
Up Files From a CCS Device (on page 169).
1. If you are in the Configuration dialog box of either a master NEO 3901RES-E Resource Module
installed in a 3RU frame or a FR-3903 3RU frame itself, you can choose to update both master and
slave redundant resource modules simultaneously.
 Select the "Transfer" or "Reboot" applies to master and slave check box at the bottom of the
File Transfer tab if you want changes made to the master resource module to be transferred
automatically to the redundant slave module.
 If you later reboot the master resource module, the slave module will also reboot automatically.
 Clear the check box if you want to transfer information to the slave resource module at a
different time, or if you do not want to transfer files or reboot the slave at the same time as the
master module.
This check box is only available for master 3901RES-E resource modules installed in a NEO FR-
3903 or FR3923 3RU frame. For more information about NEO 3901RES-E resource module
redundancy, see "Appendix E" in your NEO FR-3901 and FR-3903 Mounting Frames Installation
and Operation Manual.
2. Click Add....
3. In the Add files for transfer to device box, click Browse... or type in the path to the file to file for
transfer.
4. Select the file, and then click OK.
5. Select the Reboot device after transferring files check box to enable the software to restart the CCS
device so that the device loads the new file(s).
6. Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select a directory from
the list options.
Components of this list are device-specific, so refer to the instructions for the CCS device to
determine which directory to choose for this transfer.
7. Click Perform Transfer.
Once the file transfer begins, the Configuration status bar shows the index and name of the
transferring file, and a progress bar indicates the percentage completion of the file transfer.
If the Configuration tool cannot connect to the CCS device, an error box appears, the transfer task
aborts and the Configuration tool reports errors to the Log tab. You can save the contents of the Log
tab to a *.txt file.
8. After the file transfer finishes, wait 30 seconds for the CCS device to reboot.
9. Click Close on the Configuration dialog box.
The transfer process is complete.

• Logging Configuration Activity (on page 181)
• ‘Remembering’ FTP Information (on page 183)
Correcting a Failed Upgrading Procedure

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server install can perform this procedure.
Firmware upgrades may fail in the event of network interruptions, power failures, or if too much data is
uploaded to the CCS device. Often, uploads of too much data can occur for one of the following reasons:
• Too many files were sent to the resource module.
• The wrong files were sent to the resource module.
• The upgrade .zip file was mistakenly sent to the module.
If one of these events occurs, you will be able to ping the device, but Magellan CCS Navigator will not be
able to discover it.
If your device has a fail-safe mode (for example, if it is a NEO frame), you can rectify the problem by re-
installing the firmware while in this mode. You will need an Ethernet crossover cable (not an Ethernet
straight-through cable) for the fail-safe procedure. This crossover cable must be connected directly to
the affected resource module you are working on.
When you are performing the fail-safe upgrading procedure, check the readme file to confirm which
files are needed. Use care to ensure that you transfer the correct files to the intended device.
1. Refer to your CCS device’s documentation for instructions on how to place the device in fail safe
mode. Follow those instructions.
2. Change the network addresses on your Magellan CCS Navigator PC to match the default network
addresses.
See Changing the PC Network Settings (on page 159).
3. rag or copy and paste the device’s icon from the Catalog folder to the Network or Discovery folder.
4. Right click on the device icon and then select Properties.
Do not make changes in the third field (located above and to the right of the Set Default button).
5. On the Device tab of the Navigation Properties box, click Set Default, and then click Yes.
6. If the Device ID field starts with IP, in the last field, enter the slot number of the module and then
close the dialog box. If the Device ID field starts with EP, set the last number of the third field to the
slot number of the module and then close the dialog box.
7. Double click the device icon that you want to upgrade.
The Configuration... dialog box appears. On the Select the device directory to transfer to: field of
the File Transfer tab, select the directory of the file you want to update. The list of directories differs
from device to device.
 For NEO modules, the /Resource/boot directory appears.
 For 6800+ modules, you will see a /frameX/slotY directory, where X refers to the number of the
frame with respect to the frame containing an ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module, and Y refers to
the slot number in that frame.
8. Click Add, and in the Add files for transfer to device box, browse and select the boot folder from
the location where you saved the unzipped file.
9. Select the file and then click OK.
10. Select Reboot devices after transferring files.
11. Click Perform Transfer and then click Yes.
This may take several minutes.
12. Wait for the message Reboot command was issued in the status bar.
13. Wait 30 seconds, and then close the Configuration... box.
The CCS device has now been upgraded.
14. Return the device to its normal operating mode. For information on doing this, please refer to the
CCS device’s installation and operation manual.
15. Return the PC network settings to their original states. See Changing the PC Network Settings (on
page 159).
Listing the Files Installed on a CCS Device

To list the files installed on a CCS device on your Magellan CCS Navigator screen, complete these steps:
1. Right-click resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the resulting
shortcut menu.
3. Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select one of the
directory options. The list of directory names differs from device to device.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box may be blank. Leaving a box blank means that this is
the root directory of the remote device.

The Configuration tool shows the list of files currently in the specified remote directory in the List of
files in this directory box.
If you have not previously instructed the Configuration tool to "remember" FTP login information,
an FTP Login box may ask you to enter the FTP user name and password for the CCS device.
5. If you want to look at the list of files in another directory, click Clear List to clear the current list of
files and then repeat Step 3, choosing another directory.
6. Click Close.
See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information (on page 183).
Copying a File from a CCS Device

This feature is not available for 6800+ devices.
To copy files from a CCS device to Magellan CCS Navigator, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon of the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the resulting
context menu.
To safely update a file on a CCS device, first create a backup of the old file by copying it back to
Magellan CCS Navigator —if possible—before deleting the out-dated file from the CCS device. (Some
NEO resource modules and processing modules do not support this "Get File" feature.) Then
transfer the replacement file to the device and refresh the device.
3. Click the arrow in the Select the device directory to transfer to box, and then select one of the
directory options in the list box.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box may be blank, indicating that it is the root directory
of the remote device.
The Configuration tool lists files currently in the specified remote directory in the List of files in this
directory box.
An FTP Login box may show, asking you to enter the FTP user name and password for the CCS
device.
5. Select one file in the List of files in this directory box, and then click Get File to retrieve the file from
the remote directory and save it to the local directory.
You can select and retrieve only one file at a time.
6. Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to back up files from other directories.
7. When you are finished, click Close.
See ‘Remembering’ FTP Information (on page 183).
Deleting a File from a CCS Device

This feature is not available for 6800+ devices.
To delete a file from a CCS device, complete these steps:
1. Right-click the resource icon for the CCS device, and then select Configuration from the resulting
context menu.
To safely update a file on a CCS device, first create a backup of the old file by copying it back to
Magellan CCS Navigator —if possible—before deleting the out-dated file from the CCS device. (Some
NEO resource modules and processing modules do not support the "Get File" feature.) Then transfer
the replacement file to the device and refresh the device. See Copying a File from a CCS Device (on
page 173).
3. In the Select the device directory to transfer to box, click the down arrow to select one of the
directory options in the list box.
If a CCS device has no subdirectories, this box is blank. This is the root directory of the remote
device.
The Configuration tool lists the files in the remote directory in the List of files in this directory box.
An FTP Login box may advise you to enter the FTP user name and password for the CCS device. (See
‘Remembering’ FTP Information (on page 183).)
5. Select a file in the List of files in this directory box, and then click Delete File.
You can only delete one file at a time.
6. Repeat Steps 3 - 5 to delete additional files.
7. When you are finished deleting files, click Close.
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC

To restart a CCS device from the PC, complete these steps:
1. Open the CCS device’s Configuration dialog box.
The Network tab of the Configuration dialog box shows by default. (See Changing the Network
Settings of a Device (on page 155).)
2. Click Reboot Device.
3. If the Telnet Login box shows, type in the Telnet user name and password, select the Remember
Telnet check box, and then click OK. (See ‘Remembering’ Telnet Information (on page 183).)
Selecting the Remember Telnet check box enables the "remember" feature for future logins to this
device.
4. The device will take from 10 to 20 seconds to restart. Then the Configuration tool will show a box
confirming the restart.
The Configuration tool reports the restart on the Log tab. You can save the information on the Log
tab to a text file. See Logging Configuration Activity (on page 181).
5. Click Close.
Setting Device Options

Some devices may have a Device tab in their Configuration dialog box. The options in the Device tab are
outlined in the table below.
Table 39: Configuration Dialog Box’s Device Tab Options

Option Function
Mute Keep Alive When unselected (the default setting), configures the device to send Keep
Alive messages; these messages are used to detect if a device gets
disconnected from the network
Custom Name If you enter a name here, when an Administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server subsequently runs the discovery tool, the device will be discovered with
this name
Mute Device When set to No (the default setting), configures the device to send notification
of parameter value changes and alarms
Report Alarms with Determines alarm filtering (whether alarms are displayed when triggered) for
Priority Greater Than or the device, so as to not report alarms unless their priority meets or exceeds a
Equal To pre-defined level
License Key Stores a license key on the device, which enables optional device features
• Click Read to read any license key stored on the device
• Click Validate to ensure that a license key is entered correctly before writing
it to the device
• Click Write and Reboot to send a new license key on the device and reboot
it; the writing process includes a validation step to prevent you from writing
an invalid license key
Please contact sales to purchase optional licensed features on a product. License keys are generated by
Imagine Communications at the time an order is placed.
Please contact customer service to resolve any problems with license keys.
Setting SNMP Options

Devices that support SNMP will have an SNMP tab in the Configuration dialog box.
To configure Magellan CCS Navigator as an SNMP agent, see SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan
CCS Navigator (on page 94).
To configure a device that supports SNMP, follow these instructions.

1. In the Configuration dialog box, click the SNMP tab.
2. Click the Read button.
The CCS network polls the SNMP device and retrieves its current settings. It fills in all the fields on
the SNMP tab of the Configuration dialog box with the settings that are on the device.
In the top left portion of the dialog box are SNMP Agent settings.
Table 40: SNMP Agent Fields of SNMP Tab

Field Function
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get" operation has to match this
setting in the MIB browser in order to read information from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a "Set" operation has to
match this setting in a MIB browser in order to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or write community
Traps doesn’t match between the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Enable SNMP Agent When checked, SNMP support is available; if not checked, SNMP support is
disabled
Below the SNMP Agent settings are System settings. The information in these fields describes the
device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. This is user-defined information that, once
provided by an administrator, is available on the device when it is retrieved by a MIB browser.
Table 41: System Fields of SNMP Tab - MIB-2 System Information

Field Explanation
Description The default is "Harris SNMP Agent"
Location The physical location of the device
Contact The contact person for this device
Name Name of the device
The Trap Destination IP Addresses field contains a list of IP addresses that will receive SNMP traps.
It is in the format IP Address:Port Address:SNMP version.
3. To add new Trap Destination IP Addresses, see Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps (on page
177). To modify them, see Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination (on page 178).
The device must be rebooted before changes will take effect.
4. (Optional) If you want the device to reboot automatically when you send the new configuration to
it, place a check beside Reboot device after performing transfer.
5. Click Write to send the new configuration to the device.
6. If you did not place a check beside Reboot device after performing transfer in step 6, click Reboot
now and your changes to the configuration will take effect.
Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps

To add a new SNMP trap destination, follow this procedure:
1. Click Add beneath the Trap Destination IP Addresses field. The Add Trap Destination dialog box
appears.
2. Choose the SNMP version that you would like to use for traps.
3. Choose the IP address of that trap destination.
4. Choose the port number. The default is 162, but an administrator can set this to any number
between 0 and 65535.
5. Click Apply. A new line is added in the Trap Destination IP Addresses field.
6. Repeat steps 2 through 5 to add more rows to the dialog box.
7. Click OK to return to the SNMP tab of the Configuration dialog box.
Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination

To modify a trap destination, follow this procedure:
1. In the Trap Destinations IP Addresses list, click on the item you would like to modify.
2. Click the Modify button. The Modify Trap Destination dialog box appears.
Figure 15: Modify Trap Destination Dialog Box
3. Choose the SNMP version of the traps using the radio buttons at the top of the dialog box.
4. Enter the IP address of that trap destination in the IP Address field.
5. Enter the port number in the Port Number field.
The default value is 162.
6. Click Apply. The selected entry in the Trap Destination IP Addresses field is updated.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 to further update the row.
8. Click OK to close the Modify Trap Destination dialog box.
Getting Version Information

You can retrieve version information from CCS devices that maintain version information (Some older
devices do not) and have valid IP addresses. This information, which displays on the Version tab of the
device’s Configuration dialog box, can help you determine whether a device needs a hardware or
software upgrade.
On some devices you can use a Refresh button to manually force a device to resend its version
information, if for example the device was powered off when the dialog box was opened. This feature is
not needed on most devices.
The Version tab contains a tree control with two columns—Item Name and Value. This tree is very
similar to the tree and folder structure of the Navigation pane. The Item Name column contains three
top-level folders—Product, Hardware, and Software—representing the three components of the CCS
device.
The top-level Product folder typically contains the following subfolders: Name, Description, Product
Family, and Interface Version.
The top-level Hardware folder contains sub-folders for hardware information on a specific product. For
example, a frame controller module may show sub-folders for Hardware Version, Serial Number, and
Mac Address.
The top-level Software folder contains subfolders for information on software components of a product.
For example, a frame controller module may show sub-folders for the vxWorks.lzs file version number,
Version string, and Build Date.
The Value column contains a short description for each final or leaf icon in the first column.
Logging Configuration Activity

The Configuration tool logs all configuration activity for a CCS device on Log tab of the device’s
Configuration dialog box.
Figure 16: Excerpt from a Configuration Log
To view the configuration log for a device, complete these steps:

1. Open the CCS device’s Configuration dialog box by right clicking on the device in the tree view and
selecting Configuration.
2. Select the Log tab.
To save a configuration log to a text file, complete these steps:

1. Right-click inside the Log tab of the Configuration dialog box, and then select Save Log As...
2. In the Save As box that appears, accept the default directory or select another directory for the log
file.
3. Type a name into the File Name box or accept the default name.
4. Click Save.
To clear a CCS device configuration log, right-click inside the Log tab of the its Configuration dialog box
and select Clear Log from the resulting shortcut menu.
Setting Configuration Options

To set Configuration options, complete these steps:
1. Click Configuration on the Options menu, or right-click in a Configuration dialog box and then
click Options....
2. In the Configuration Options box, set the Timeouts settings for the Telnet and FTP sections to no
fewer than 5,000 milliseconds; however, you can increase this time setting.
Timeouts are time limits for the software’s attempts to connect to a CCS device via Telnet or FTP. If the
Configuration tool cannot connect within the time limit, it will report that information.
Click OK to close the Configuration Options box.
Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu

The configuration shortcut menu enables you to manage a number of configuration tasks.
Configuration Shortcut Menu Commands
Command Function Reference
Find Device Finds the resource icon associated with a CCS Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS
device’s Configuration dialog box in the Device (on page 183)
Navigation pane and highlights it
Default Size Returns the Configuration dialog box to its default Returning a Configuration Dialog Box
size to its Default Size (on page 183)
Remember Toggle control that instructs the Configuration ‘Remembering’ Telnet Information (on
Telnet tool to remember the Telnet login information for page 183)
a device

Remember Toggle control that instructs the Configuration ‘Remembering’ FTP Information (on
FTP tool to remember the FTP login information for a page 183)
device
Save Log As... Saves the text on the Log tab as a *.txt file Saving a Configuration Log to a File
Clear Log Clears the text on the Log tab Clearing a Configuration Log
Options... Opens the Configuration Options box Setting Configuration Options (on
page 182)
Help Shows the Online Help contents page Getting Help With Magellan CCS
Navigator (on page 344)
User Manual Shows the user manual for the selected CCS device Showing the User Manual for a CCS
Device (on page 184)
Close Closes the Configuration dialog box Opening and Closing a Configuration
Dialog Box (on page 153)
Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS Device

To find the resource icon of a CCS device in the resource tree, right-click inside the CCS device’s
Configuration dialog box, and then select Find Device from the resulting shortcut menu. The Navigation
tool will highlight the icon in the resource tree.
Returning a Configuration Dialog Box to its Default Size

To return a CCS device’s Configuration dialog box to its default size, right-click inside the Configuration
dialog box, and then select Default Size from the resulting shortcut menu.
‘Remembering’ Telnet Information

Only one person can be connected to a CCS device through Telnet at once.
To set the Configuration tool to remember the Telnet information (user name and password) for a
device, right-click inside the Configuration dialog box, and then select Remember Telnet
from the resulting shortcut menu. The Configuration tool remembers the user name and password
for the specified CCS device, not for all CCS devices.
The default Telnet user name is leitch, and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The password is case-
sensitive.
‘Remembering’ FTP Information

Only four people can use FTP simultaneously to connect to the same CCS device.
To set the Configuration tool so that it remembers the FTP information (user name and password) for a
device, right-click inside the Configuration dialog box, and then select Remember FTP from the resulting
shortcut menu. The Configuration tool remembers the user name and password for the specified CCS
device, but not for all CCS devices.
The default FTP user name is leitch, and the default password is LeitchAdmin. The password is case-
sensitive.
Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device

To show the user manual for a supported CCS device, right-click inside the CCS device’s Configuration
dialog box, and then select User Manual from the resulting shortcut menu.
Adobe Acrobat Reader opens and shows the user manual for a device in Acrobat Reader. You can search
the manual for relevant information and print it out.
Using the Configuration Folder

For proper configuration of NEO frames and CCS control panels, you must create a configuration file in
the Configuration folder and then transfer the file to the device—in addition to setting values in the
device’s Configuration dialog box.
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the Configuration
folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its display, to a maximum of 20
characters per device name.
If a default short name does not adequately identify a resource, you can change the name in the
Navigation Properties box—taking out spaces, abbreviating words, or including the last four digits
of an IP address.
All three names appear in the Navigation Properties box.
See also these topics:

• Creating Configuration Hierarchies (on page 185)
• Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy (on page 185)
• Renaming Configurations (on page 185)
Getting Help with Configuration Hierarchies

To help you create valid device hierarchies in the Configuration folder, select the third Build mode
option on the General tab of the Navigation Options box. Enabling this option will ensure that the
application fully tests the validity of all drag-and-drop operations in the Configuration folder.
Figure 17: Build Mode Option on General Tab of Navigation Options Box
See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
Creating Configuration Hierarchies

The configuration of a NEO frame or CCS control panel requires the creation of a configuration file in the
Configuration folder and the transfer of that file to the remote device— in addition to setting values
in the device’s Configuration dialog box.
If you right-click an object in the Configuration folder, a context menu appears, with Create as one of its
menu options. The enabled Create submenu options are valid for both the device and the folder it
resides in.
For example, if you right-click a NEO frame in the Configuration folder, you can use the resulting
shortcut menu to create a Configuration for the NEO frame; but if you right-click a non-NEO frame in
the Configuration folder, the resulting shortcut menu does not have options to create a configuration
for that frame, since that frame does not support configuration.
Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy

The resource icons representing CCS devices and configurations follow this hierarchy in the
Configuration folder:
Table 42: Icon Hierarchy in the Configuration Folder

Level Icon Purpose Represents
Top Level—Parent Configuration Parents Control panel icon
CCS devices Gateway Icon
NEO Frame Icon
Middle Level Configuration Node Configuration Node Icon
Bottom Level Configuration Children CCS devices contained or controlled by

the parent CCS device
Renaming Configurations
If you try to edit the label of a CCS device or configuration in the Configuration folder, the Navigation
tool first will determine whether the proposed name already exists under the same parent CCS device.
If the proposed name exists, an error message appears, the renaming operation aborts, and the name
remains unchanged.
The Navigation tool automatically renames a CCS device icon when the same name exists at the same
level of the resource tree. The name assigned by the Navigation tool is either "Copy of [Device Short
Name]" or "Copy (x) of [Device Short Name]." You can rename the configuration, provided the proposed
new name also does not exist.
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the Configuration
folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its display, a maximum of 20
characters per device name.
If a default short name does not adequately identify a resource, change the short name in the
Navigation Properties box—take out spaces, abbreviate words, or include the last four digits
of an IP address. All three names appear in the Navigation Properties box.

• Deleting a Resource Icon (on page 126)
Chapter 9
NUCLEUS Configuration
A NUCLEUS configuration defines:
• The devices the NUCLEUS control panel monitors and controls
• The functions of the 16 LCD buttons, four adjustment knobs, and four adjustment buttons on the
NUCLEUS control panel when it is controlling those devices, including the positions of the navigation
layers and the layout of devices and/or parameters on the display
• The destinations and sources accessible when controlling a routing system
• The PIPs and sources when controlling a CENTRIO system
• The organization of layers of menus when navigating buttons
All NUCLEUS control panels are sold with one or more options enabled. Some devices are configured
using Magellan CCS Navigator, and other devices are configured on the control panel itself.
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS Navigator

following devices need to be configured using Magellan CCS Navigator:
Table 43: NUCLEUS Configurations Defined in Magellan CCS Navigator
Controlled Devices Applicable License Configuration Details
Parameters and alarms on CCS devices, NUCLEUS-PROC Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to
including 6800+ modules in Ethernet- a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page
connected frames, CENTRIO modules and 191).
PiPs, NEO modules, X50, X75, and X85
Sources, Destinations, and crosspoints on a NUCLEUS-RTR Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS
routing system based on a Routing panel Configuration (on page 197).
Parameters and alarms on SNMP devices NUCLEUS-SNMP Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS
Configuration (on page 197).
Makes the NUCLEUS-PROC and NUCLEUS- NUCLEUS-TRAX Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS
RTR licenses work together to switch the (on page 228).
controlled processing device when a router
switch happens.
PIPs and Layouts on a CENTRIO multiviewer NUCLEUS-MV Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS
(similar to router control) Configuration (on page 189).
After creating a configuration for NUCLEUS using Magellan CCS Navigator, you can transfer the
configuration to the control panel and then control the connected devices. The NUCLEUS control panel
communicates in real time with compatible devices to set parameters and crosspoints.
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface

The following devices do not require configuration using Magellan CCS Navigator before they can be
controlled using NUCLEUS control panel:
• IconLogo (NUCLEUS-LOGO license)
• IconStation (NUCLEUS-IS license)
• PredatorII and QVM6800+ (NUCLEUS-MV license)
These system-generated configurations are created automatically when the license is enabled on the
NUCLEUS control panel itself. See the Configuration and Operation Manual for the license for
information on setting NUCLEUS up to connect to and control these devices.
When you use Magellan CCS Navigator to view the list of configurations on a NUCLEUS control panel,
these configurations will not appear on the list.
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys

A NUCLEUS license key allows you to access different types of device control. Before you can activate
your NUCLEUS license key, you must discover NUCLEUS and save the results of your discovery in the
Navigation pane.
To activate your NUCLEUS license key, follow this procedure:

1. Right-click the resource icon for the device in the Navigation dialog box, and then select
Configuration from the resulting context menu.
2. Select the Device tab.
3. In the License Key field, type your number string. A NUCLEUS license key contains 16 characters.
4. Click Write and Reboot to send a new license key on the device and reboot it.
The writing process includes a validation step to prevent you from writing an invalid license key to the
NUCLEUS control panel.
See Setting Device Options (on page 174) for more information.
To activate the license key at the NUCLEUS panel itself, see your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel
Installation and Operation Manual.
Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using Magellan CCS

Navigator
The general steps for configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel using Magellan CCS Navigator include the
following:
1. Discover the NUCLEUS control panel.
See CCS Device Discovery (on page 99).
2. Add the NUCLEUS control panel to the Configuration folder.
See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder (on page 189).
3. Add items for control to the Configuration folder.

The folder you will add devices to will depend on the device to be controlled. See the following
topics:
 Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 189)
 Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 190)
 Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 197)
4. Create panels for devices that need them.
Devices that need panels include the following:
 Routing panels
See Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard (on page 197).
 CENTRIO panels
See Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard (on page 206).
5. Run the Configuration Wizard, and assign devices, menus, and parameters to the control panel’s
buttons and knobs.
6. Transfer the configuration to the panel or save it to a USB device or network location for backup.
See Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files (on page 231) and Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file
to XML (on page 234).
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder

NUCLEUS control panels can only be configured by an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator
Server.
To create a NUCLEUS configuration folder, follow these steps:

1. Discover the NUCLEUS control panel and save the results of the discovery. See CCS Device Discovery
(on page 99).
2. In the Discovery folder of Magellan CCS Navigator’s Navigation view, select the NUCLEUS control
panel you want to configure and drag it to the Configuration folder.
3. Click on the + to open the child resources of the control panel.
Below the NUCLEUS control panel are three folders:

Router/Centrio Views, Devices, and Configurations. When your configuration is complete, there will be
one or more devices in the Devices folder, and at least one configuration in the Configuration folder.
There may also be routing panel configurations in the Router/Centrio Views folder, if you have the
NUCLEUS-TRAX and/or routers option.
You are now ready to add devices to your configuration.
Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration

With a NUCLEUS-MV license, you can add a CENTRIO System for control following the steps here.
Otherwise, with a NUCLEUS-PROC license you can add CENTRIO PIPs and modules for processing control.
See Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 191).
To add a CENTRIO system to a NUCLEUS Configuration folder, follow these steps:
1. Add the Routing view that is associated with your CENTRIO system to the Configuration > NUCLEUS
> Router/Centrio Views folder.
You can get the routing view associated with your CENTRIO system by discovering the Platinum
router (use the IP address of the PT-RES module) that the CENTRIO system is housed in.
2. Copy a CENTRIO system node from the Discovery or Network folder to the Configuration >
NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder.
If you have not discovered a CENTRIO system, see Running a Discovery (on page 108) for details.
There is no limitation on the number of CENTRIO systems you can add, as long as they all share the
same router database.
3. Select, and then right-click the CENTRIO system icon, and select Create > CENTRIO Panel.
The CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard opens.
For information on using this wizard, see Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration (on
page 206).
Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS Configuration

You can only have one routing view in the NUCLEUS Router/Centrio Views folder of the Navigation
pane. To switch to another routing view, first delete or copy and paste a pre-existing routing view to a
different location.
Do not make changes to the Routing View associated with a NUCLEUS panel while the Configuration
dialog box is open. This could make routing panels become invalid.
To associate a Routing Control View with a NUCLEUS control panel, do one of the following:
• Drag and drop the Routing View onto a NUCLEUS control panel under the Configuration > NUCLEUS
folder. The Routing View icon appears under the Router/Centrio Views sub-folder.
• Copy the Routing View, right click on the NUCLEUS control panel in the Configuration folder and
select Paste from the shortcut menu.
When your configuration is complete, there will be one or more Routing panels in the Router/Centrio
Views folder, and at least one configuration in the Configuration folder. There may also be devices in
the Devices folder, if you have the NUCLEUS-TRAX option.
For NUCLEUS configuration and control, router system s are divided into router sub-views called routing
panels. Each routing panel can be custom configured and then added to the NUCLEUS configuration.
Routing panels are similar to devices and virtual devices, with the exception that they have no
parameters to assign to panel controls.
Routing panels are created using the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. See Starting the Routing Panel
Configuration Wizard (on page 197).
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration

To add devices to your NUCLEUS configuration for processing control (for use with a NUCLEUS-PROC or
NUCLEUS-SNMP license), drag and drop devices into the Devices folder of the NUCLEUS icon in the
When you drag and drop a CENTRIO system into the Devices folder, the PIP sub-devices are not dragged
with it. To add PIPs, you must drag them specifically to the Devices folder.
A NUCLEUS control panel can control Virtual devices (see Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning
Favorites to Virtual Devices (on page 192)), 6800+, NEO, CENTRIO, and X75 devices from Magellan CCS
Navigator’s Network folder.
Any NUCLEUS configurations that include DPS-475/575 synchronizers must be updated every time you
re-configure their associated EDGE-DPS575.
You can also add offline devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration for Processing Control. See Adding Off-Line
Devices (on page 192).
You must have the NUCLEUS-SNMP license key to assign SNMP traps to NUCLEUS LCD buttons and
control knobs.
Adding Off-Line Devices

You can add devices to the Virtual Device or Configuration folder while they are off-line by copying and
pasting them from the Catalog folder. This can be useful when devices are unavailable due to being
retasked for other purposes, if they are in a different network (such as a mobile truck) at the time, etc.
If you add devices that are off-line, the specific devices must be defined before you can control them
using a NUCLEUS control panel. To add the Device ID information to a device in a configuration that was
off-line during creation of the configuration, follow these steps:
1. Discover the device that you actually wish to monitor/control (if it has not been discovered already),
and save the results of your discovery.
2. Right click on the device and choose Properties from the shortcut menu.
3. On the Device tab of the Properties dialog box, click Copy.
4. Right click on the identical device that has been copied from the Catalog folder, and choose
Properties from the shortcut menu.
5. On the Device tab, click Paste.
Parameters on an off-line device may not perfectly match those on the actual device. The device catalog
information stored in Magellan CCS Navigator may be older or newer than that stored on the actual
device. If the parameter lists do not match, some assigned parameters may not be available in the
configuration.
For best results, you should check your configuration with the actual device before uploading it to your
NUCLEUS control panel.
Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices

The NUCLEUS control panel uses virtual devices to group parameters from up to ten X75, NEO and
6800+ devices into a single addressable entity. You can then access the controls for those devices by
clicking a single button on the control panel. Devices do not have to be from the same product line, nor
do they need to share the same IP address. You can use the same virtual device on multiple NUCLEUS
control panels.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and modify virtual devices.
To create a virtual device, ensure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode, and then follow these
steps:
 Right-click on the Virtual Devices folder in the Navigation pane and select Create > Virtual
Device from the shortcut menu.
 Drag the first stand-alone device you would like to include in your virtual device from the
Network, Discovery, or Catalog folder to the Virtual Device folder. A new virtual device
containing that stand-alone device appears in the Virtual Device folder.
2. Right-click on the new virtual device and choose Rename from the shortcut menu, and then type a
name for the virtual device.
3. Drag up to ten NEO, 6800+ and X75 devices from the Network, Discovery, or Catalog folder and
drop them onto the newly created virtual device.
4. Right-click on a device in the virtual device and select Favorites….
The Favorites dialog box opens. The parameters that you select here are the parameters that will be
available to the control panel configuration.
This dialog box displays the parameters of the selected device.
If you have a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you can also configure favorites in the Parameter pane.
Changes made to device favorites in either place will be updated in both places. See Configuring
Favorites (on page 623) for more information.
5. Place a check mark beside each parameter you would like to appear in the virtual device’s
parameters list. By default, no parameters are selected.
The Alias field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your
keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this field. If you switch the
keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
You can change the name by which a selected parameter appears by clicking in its field in the Alias
column. Use the Delete key to remove the default or old alias and type your new parameter name.
By default, the control panel will display the alias. However, if you switch to "Leitch Name Mode" in
the NUCLEUS control panel’s parameter settings, the control panel will display the default names of
favorite parameters.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for other standalone devices included in the virtual device.
Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device

For SNMP devices only, the Favorites dialog box has a Configure button. This button allows you to add
multiple Object ID (OID) root nodes to the favorites for this device. The Parameters pane will display all
Object IDs (OIDs) listed under these root SNMP nodes (in case the SNMP-managed device provides
access to other OIDs implemented in different branches of the SNMP MIB).
1. In the Favorites dialog box, click Configure.
2. Click MIB.
If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB that
contains this definition before proceeding. Click the Load MIB button, as shown in step 3.
3. In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to the specific Object (parameter) or Trap (alarm).
SNMP devices from third-party manufacturers appear according to their own hierarchy. See the
documentation for that SNMP-enabled device for more information.
4. Click OK.
The ID is added to the table in the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box.
5. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box contains all the OIDs that you
would select as favorites for that SNMP device.
6. Click OK to close the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box, and then OK to close the Favorites
dialog box.
New variables appear in the Parameters tab of the Parameters pane, and new traps appear in the
Alarms tab of the Parameters pane.
Copying Favorites Between Virtual Devices

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create or edit Favorites for a device.
You can copy all the favorites for all the devices in a virtual device when both virtual devices contain the
same modules (device types), and these modules are arranged in the same order.
You can also copy the favorites list from one member of a virtual device to another identical unit (for
example, from one X75 to another).
To copy and paste control panel display favorites for a device or virtual device, follow these steps:
1. In Build mode, right click a device or virtual device in the Virtual Device folder and select Copy
Favorites.
2. Right click on the second identical device or virtual device in the Virtual Device folder and select
Paste Favorites.
The parameter/alarm selection created previously will be replicated in the second standalone or virtual
device.
If the device you have chosen to paste favorites to is unsuitable -- for example, it is a virtual device in
which the various component devices are not identical -- the Paste Favorites option will not be
available. However, you can copy and paste favorites between individual component devices of different
virtual devices.
Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration

To control a router with NUCLEUS, you need the NUCLEUS-RTR option. This option allows NUCLEUS to
control routers, including Platinum, Panacea and Integrator series routers. For more information about
purchasing routing features, contact your sales representative. If your license key has not yet been
added to the control panel, see Activating NUCLEUS License Keys (on page 188).
Magellan CCS Navigator uses Router Control Views to describe entire routing systems. These files are
created when routing systems are configured. (See Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656)
for more information.) Router Control Views provide essential information about available sources and
destinations that are associated with the router system.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a NUCLEUS Router panel or
NUCLEUS configuration.
After you have created your Router Control View, you must import it into Magellan CCS Navigator. See
Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656) for more information.
When a router system is added to NUCLEUS, the source and destination names, categories and indexes
become available on the control panel. If salvos have been created for the router system, they are also
available on NUCLEUS. Only one Router System View can be assigned to a NUCLEUS control panel at a
time; however, many routing panels that are derived simultaneously from this router system can be
added to NUCLEUS.
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard

The routing portion of a NUCLEUS configuration is created from a routing view using the Routing Panel
Configuration wizard. To start the wizard, follow these steps:
1. Right click on an existing Router View node under the Router/ Centrio Views folder of the NUCLEUS
device.
2. Select Create > Routing Panel from the menu that appears.
The Routing Panel Configuration wizard opens.
3. Enter a descriptive name for your Routing panel. The name can be up to 10 characters long.
4. Choose the type of Routing panel you want to make.
Table 44: Routing Panel Types

Device Type Description
Single Bus Device Assign a source to a single pre-determined destination
X/Y Device Select a single destination and then assign a source
Multi Bus Device Select any number of destinations and then assign a source; this panel type includes
destination statuses
See your NUCLEUS Router Control Option Configuration and Operation Manual for information on
operating in these modes.
5. Choose a destination and source selection type from the following options.
Table 45: Destination/Source Selection Types

Option Description
Discrete Port Select this option if you want to identify the routing panel destinations and sources by
Selection their logical names
Category/Index With category indexing, both a category (i.e., VTR, CAM, MIC, etc.) and an index (i.e.,
Selection) 21, 2, 36, etc.) are required to identify a device. The first click of a button selects the
category; subsequent clicks select the index.
This selection method allows many destinations and sources to be accessed using few
buttons.
There are four extra screens in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard when you
choose this option.
6. Click Next to proceed to the Source screen.
See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 199).
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Sources page appears after you have selected the type of Routing panel you will be making in the
Routing Panel Configuration Wizard. (See Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard (on page
197).)
The choices you make on the Sources page determine the number and order of router sources when
using this Routing Panel Configuration on your NUCLEUS control panel. If you place the most frequently
used sources early in the list, they will be most easily accessible.
Items can either appear in the Available field or in the Selected field, but not in both. The order of items
in the Selected list is the order they will appear on the NUCLEUS control panel. By default, all items
appear in the Selected column in logical database order.
To move an item between the Selected and Available fields, first click on it to highlight it. If you click a
single item, and then click another item, the first item you clicked on is un-highlighted. To highlight
multiple items at the same time, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key on your keyboard.
With items highlighted, you can perform the following functions:

• Click > to add highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New sources always
appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
• Click >> to move all visible sources from the Available field to the Selected field. If you have applied
filtering to the Available field, only those items that are visible will be moved.
• Click < to remove highlighted items from the Selected field.
• Click << to remove all items from the Selected field.
• Click Up to move highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.
• Click Down to move highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.
• Click the A-Z button to place all items in alphanumeric order.
• Click the Z-A button to place all items in reverse alphanumeric order.
• Click Top to place highlighted items at the top of the list.
• Click Bottom to place highlighted items at the bottom of the list.
To leave this screen, you have four options:

• Click Next >> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item must appear in
the Selected field for this option to be available.
• Click << Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.
• Click Close to exit the wizard without creating a panel.
• Click Finish to select the defaults on all the following pages, close the wizard and create a panel. At
least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be available.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Destinations for your
NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 200).
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Destinations page appears after you have defined the sources in the Routing Panel Configuration
wizard. (See Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 199).)
The choices you make on the Destinations screen determine the number and order of router
destinations when using this Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel. If you place the most
frequently used destinations early in the list, they will be most easily accessible.
The tools for filling out the Destinations screen are the same as those on the Sources screen. See
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 199) for more information.
If you are creating a Single Bus Routing panel, you will have a modified version of the Destinations
screen. Because in a Single Bus Routing panel you only have one pre-defined destination, you can only
select one destination on this screen. When you click the > button to add a highlighted item from the
Available field to the Selected field, the new destination will replace any destination already in the
Selected list.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. You must have at least
one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Depending on the type of Routing panel you are making, this may be the last screen of your
Configuration wizard. Or, you may proceed to one of the following:
• Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus Only) (on page 201)
• Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 202)
• Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 204)
Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus Only)
The Destination Statuses page does not appear when you are creating an X/Y or Single Bus routing
panel.
The available destination statuses are the same as the destinations selected in the previous screen. (See
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 200).) When you select a destination
for statusing, this means that the source(s) connected to that destination will be listed on the NUCLEUS
screen and LCD buttons.
The controls for this page are described in Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page
199).
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. See Selecting
Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 202) or Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS
Routing Panel (on page 204).
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Levels page appears after you have defined the Destinations (or Destination Statuses) in the
Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on
page 200).) The choices you make on the Levels screen determine the number and order of router levels
when using this Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel.
Defining less than the total number of levels for your panel can be a good way to avoid doing the same
breakaway take over and over, or to limit access for certain users of the panel. Because NUCLEUS can
hold up to 16 configurations containing any number of Routing panels, you could, for example, create
another panel that includes only the excluded levels from this panel, or that includes all levels.
The tools for filling out the Levels screen are the same as those on the Sources screen. See Selecting
Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 199) for more information.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to the next screen. You must have at least
one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Depending on the type of Routing panel you are making, this may be the last screen of the wizard.
Before you can use the Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel, you must add it to a configuration
using the Configuration tool, and then transfer that configuration to the control panel. See Creating a
NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212).
If you are creating a Catalog/Index style of panel, the next screen will be Selecting Destination
Categories (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 202).
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only)

If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing Panel Configuration file, the Destination Categories
page will follow one of these sections:
• Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (on page 200)
• Selecting Destination Statuses for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus Only) (on page 201)
Categories are a navigational tool that help you find specific ports on a large router. When using
categories, devices are normally divided by type. You select the type of port you want to use, and then
you select the alphanumeric identifier, or index, for a specific port from that subset.
The available categories and indexes are provided by the Router Control View. The default router
contains one destination category. You can relabel destinations and create multiple categories. See
Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656) for more information.
199).
At least one category must appear in the Selected field of this screen (it will not affect the output if you
are creating a Single Bus Routing panel) before you can proceed. When you have completed this page,
click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 202).
Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode only)

If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing panel, the Destination Indexes page follows the
Destination Categories page. See Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 202)
Indexes are the characters assigned to a category. For example, you may have a category called CAM,
and within that you have four cameras with index labels 1, 2, 3, and 4. You can have multiple levels of
indexes, where your four cameras could be labeled 1A, 1B, 2A, and 2B. In that case, in order to select
the destination or source on the NUCLEUS panel, you would click first CAM, and the NUCLEUS LCDs
would refresh to offer you 1 and 2. You would make your selection, and be presented with A and B, from
which you would choose the device you want.
For information on assigning indexes to destination devices, see Introduction to Routing Components
(on page 656).
By default, there are 16 indexes, numbered hexidecimally 0 - F.
To add an index, enter the index label in the Add New Index field and click Add. The index appears at
the bottom of the List of Added Indexes field.
Click Delete to remove the selected index from the List of Added Indexes.
The order of indexes in the List of Added Indexes field is the order that the indexes will appear on the
buttons on your NUCLEUS control panel. To rearrange their order, use the following buttons:
To leave this screen, you have four options:

• Click Next>> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item must appear in
• Click Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.
• Click Close to exit the wizard without creating a panel.
If you are creating a Single-Bus Routing panel, something must be in the Selected field of this screen.
However, it will not affect the final panel.
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index
mode only) (on page 204).
Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index mode only)

If you chose a Cat/Index mode for your Routing panel, this screen will follow Selecting Destination
Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 202).
Categories are a navigational tool that help you group sources on a large router. When using categories,
sources are normally divided by type. You select the type of source you want to use, and then you select
the alphanumeric identifier, or index, for a specific source from that subset.
The default router contains one source category. You can relabel source and create multiple categories.
See Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656) for more information.
199).
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index
mode only) (on page 204).
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only)

If you have chosen categories and indexes as your organizational model, during NUCLEUS operation you
will choose a source type from a series of buttons, one for each category. Once you choose a category,
you will select from the members of that category. The members are called Indexes.
Source indexes are set using exactly the same methods as destination indexes. For information on
completing the Source Indexes page, see Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 204).
When you have completed this page, click Next>> to proceed to Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS
Routing Panel (on page 204).
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Levels page is the second-last page in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Source
Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 204).)
Use this screen to determine the router levels that will be available on this particular routing panel
configuration. Levels are the different components that make up the complete signal to be routed -- for
example, video and audio.
For instructions on filling out the Levels screen, see Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
(on page 199).
Selecting Salvos for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel

The Salvos page is the last page in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard. (See Selecting Source
Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) (on page 204).)
Use this screen to determine the router Salvos that will be available on this particular routing panel
configuration. Only salvos for which access rights have been provided are included in the Available
Salvos list. By default, no salvos are selected.
For instructions on filling out the Salvos screen, see Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Panel
(on page 199).
When you have completed this page, click Finish. Your Routing panel will appear in the Configuration >
NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views folder in the Navigation pane.
Before you can use the Routing panel on your NUCLEUS control panel, you must add it to a configuration
using the Configuration tool, and then transfer that configuration to the control panel. See Creating a
NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212) for more information.
Editing a Routing Panel

To edit a Routing panel, open it in the Routing Panel Configuration wizard (Right click on it in the
Navigation pane and select Configuration).
The Routing Panel Configuration wizard opens with all the settings of the Routing panel you created. You
can change the settings on any page and click Finish to save. The changes will overwrite the Routing
panel, unless you change its name on the first page.
A red circle with a slash through it on a routing panel indicates that the Routing System Control View the
panel is associated with has been changed since the panel was created.
If you attempt to open a configuration that includes this routing panel, or transfer that configuration to
or from a NUCLEUS panel, you will be prompted to run the Routing Configuration wizard to update the
panel.
Auto Validation
Routing and CENTRIO panels can become invalid in the following circumstances:
• When a Routing View node is modified (i.e. the name of a source or destination has changed).
• When a new Routing View node is associated with a deleted Routing View system.
Once a Routing View node is modified, any routing or CENTRIO panels corresponding to that Routing
View node are automatically validated with the "Automatically Validating Panels" progress bar. The
wizard is automatically launched in the background to re-validate the panel.
There may be discrepancies between the Routing Views. An algorithm is applied to validate as much of
the Routing View as possible, so your NUCLEUS control panel will continue to operate correctly. Some
connections may be lost.
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Configuration

This section requires a NUCLEUS-MV license. To acquire NUCLEUS licenses, contact your Sales
representative.
Use the CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard to create CENTRIO panels for NUCLEUS. You can select the
available sources and PIPs of a CENTRIO system (as defined by its Logical Database file) to create
customized sub-views (individual CENTRIO panels). Each CENTRIO panel can be assigned a unique name
and can be configured to function as a X/Y device or multi bus device.
When you add a CENTRIO panel to a NUCLEUS configuration, it is automatically assigned an LCD button.
After the CENTRIO panel is activated on NUCLEUS, the CENTRIO sources and PIPs are assigned LCD
buttons for quick activation/selection.
The steps involved in creating a CENTRIO panel are described in the following sections:
• Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 189)
• Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard (on page 206)
• Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212)
You can also add CENTRIO PIPs and devices if you have a NUCLEUS-PROC license. See Adding Processing
or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 191) for more information.
Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard

Before you can create a CENTRIO panel for use in a NUCLEUS configuration, you must add a CENTRIO
System and Routing View to your NUCLEUS Configuration folder. See Adding CENTRIO Systems to a
NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 189) for more information.
To open the CENTRIO Panel Configuration wizard, right-click the CENTRIO system icon under
Configurations > NUCLEUS > Router/Centrio Views, and select Create > CENTRIO Panel.
A dialog box similar to the following appears.
To complete this page, follow these steps:

1. Enter a name for the CENTRIO panel.
2. Select a CENTRIO panel type.
There are two options:
 X/Y Device—Assigns a source to one CENTRIO PIP at a time. You can select this PIP from a
configured list of available PIPs.
 Multi Bus—Assigns a source to multiple PIPs simultaneously. You can select these PIPs from a
configured list of available PIPs.
3. Select the source and PIP selection type that you want to use for your CENTRIO panel.
 Discrete port selection—Identifies the CENTRIO panel sources and PIPs by their logical names.
 Category/Index selection—Identifies the CENTRIO panel sources by category and indexes.
In the case of CENTRIO, the term "category" refers to a Display, and the term "index" refers to a
specific PiP on a Display. With this type of CENTRIO Panel, you can select a Display to narrow
down the list of available PIPS to choose from, because PIPs can be moved from one display to
another.
4. Click Next to proceed to the PIP Attributes screen, and Selecting PIP Attributes (on page 208).
Selecting PIP Attributes

In this step of the wizard, you can select the attributes that the PIPs will display. All of the attributes are
listed. From this list, select an option, and then click the > button.
The selection you make determines how PIPs will be selected on the panel.
Table 46: Selecting PIP Attributes

PIP Selection Attribute Description
PIP Name System level name that a PIP has when it is discovered by Magellan CCS
Navigator
PIP Static name Name that is designated in Layout Designer
PIP Source Name Name that is designated in the router database
PIP Dynamic name UMD text from the TSL external protocol
When you have chosen an option, click Next to proceed to the next page of the wizard.
Selecting the Sources and PIPs for Your CENTRIO Panel

In the next two steps of the wizard, you can select the sources and PIPs that you want the CENTRIO
panel to control.
All of the sources that are established by the Router System Control View are listed under Available
sources. From this list, select the sources you want to add to the CENTRIO panel, and then click the >
button. You can filter the Available sources list by entering a keyword in the Filter box.
Selected sources now lists the sources that you can control with the CENTRIO panel.
You can determine the order in which the sources appear on NUCLEUS by using the following buttons:
• Up—Moves the selected items up one position in the list
• Down—Moves the selected items down one position in the list
• Top—Moves the selected items to the top of the list
• Bottom—Moves the selected items to the bottom of the list
• A–Z—Organizes all items in the list by alphanumeric order
• Z–A—Organizes all items in the list by reverse alphanumeric order
When have completed organizing your Selected sources list, click Next to go to the Selected PIPs screen.
All of the discovered PIPs are listed under Available PIPs. From this list, select the PIPs you want to add
to the CENTRIO panel, and then click the > button. You can filter the Available PIPs list by entering a
keyword in the Filter box.
Selected PIPs now lists the PIPs that you can control with the CENTRIO panel.
To determine the order in which the PIPs appear on NUCLEUS, use the same buttons as described for
Selected Sources.
When have completed organizing your Selected PIPs list, depending on the CENTRIO panel type you are
configuring, either click Next or Finish.
Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel

If the R outer System Control View you are using to create the CENTRIO panel has categories and
indexes to identify sources and PIPs, you can select the displays that you want the CENTRIO panel to
control.
If no display names are entered, all displays are included. You will have to know the names of the
displays available in order to add them to the list.
To add a display to the list, enter text or a display name in the Enter New Display Name box and click
Add. To delete an display, select it from the list, and then click Delete.
When have completed organizing your Added Displays list, depending on the CENTRIO panel type you
are configuring, click Next or Finish.
Selecting Source Categories for Your CENTRIO Panel

indexes to identify sources, you can select the categories that you want the CENTRIO panel to control.
Source categories are selected in the same way as sources. All of the source categories that are
established by the Router System Control View are listed under Available Source Categories.
When have completed organizing your Selected Source Categories list, depending on the CENTRIO panel
type you are configuring, click Next (if you are creating a Source Category panel; see Selecting Source
Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel (on page 211)) or Finish.
Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Panel

indexes to identify sources, you can select the indexes that you want the CENTRIO panel to control.
Source Indexes are based on a predefined list, and have no correlation with real router indexes. Similarly
to the Display name entry for PIP category is a free list for you to enter any text that is part of your
indexing scheme.
You can choose to add or delete indexes from the list. All of the indexes that are established by the
Router System Control View are listed under List of Added Indexes.
Figure 18: Adding and Deleting Indexes
To add indexes to the index list, enter text or a display name in the Enter New Index box and click Add.
To delete an index, select it from the list, and then click Delete.
After you complete your new CENTRIO panel, you can add it to a NUCLEUS configuration. For more
information, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212).
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and edit NUCLEUS
configurations.
1. In the Configuration folder in the Navigation pane, right click on the icon that represents the
NUCLEUS control panel you want to configure and select Configuration.
For information on the other tabs of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, see CCS Device
2. Click on the Control Panel tab.
Do not make changes to the Routing View associated with a NUCLEUS panel while the Configuration
dialog box is open. This could make routing panels become invalid.
3. Select (new configuration) from the Configuration menu in the top right corner of the dialog.
The New Configuration dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for your configuration.

5. Select a configuration type.
The four options here affect how your devices and parameters will appear in your NUCLEUS
configuration (If you have a NUCLEUS-PROC and/or NUCLEUS-SNMP license). If you are creating a
configuration that will control router or CENTRIO panels, you must choose LCD Assignment, Split
navigation, or Device category.
 LCD assignment - Uses a wizard to organize device navigation by device names, with each device
accessible through the first level of the control panel’s LCD button assignment.
On NUCLEUS, the first level of an LCD Assignment configuration contains virtual and stand-alone
devices assigned to the LCD buttons. You can navigate down through the control panel’s
assignment level hierarchy using indexes and LCD buttons, and back up using the control panel’s
Exit button.
 Split navigation - Uses a wizard to place devices on the first row of LCD buttons, with menus for
a selected device on the second row of LCD buttons.
 Device category - Uses a wizard to organize devices and virtual devices, including Routing panels
and CENTRIO panels, into categories, which are accessible through the first level of the control
panel’s LCD button assignment hierarchy.
The first screen of a configuration created with this wizard has categories assigned to the
control panel’s LCD buttons. Each category is also assigned an index value that can be entered
into the control panel to access the category.
The second assignment level contains virtual devices, devices, CENTRIO panels and Routing
panels that are part of a category. LCD buttons at each assignment level navigate forward
through the control panel’s assignment level hierarchy, where you can access device
parameters. Use the control panel’s exit button to navigate back through the hierarchy.
To add routing and CENTRIO panels to your configuration, you must use the wizard.
 Blank configuration - Does not use a wizard, and creates a blank configuration. This can only be
used with a NUCLEUS-PROC and/or NUCLEUS-SNMP license, and cannot be used to add
CENTRIO or Router panels to a configuration.
6. In the Address field, give the configuration an unique address between 0 and 127. This address is
used to control access to locked, protected, or restricted crosspoints. Each panel’s address should
be unique, so as not to interfere with another’s operations.
7. Click OK.
If you chose a wizard to help create a configuration, the appropriate wizard will start. Otherwise, a
blank configuration loads. See Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard (on page 219) for
more information.
If you are creating a Split Mode or LCD Assignment wizard, proceed to step 12.
If you are creating a Device Category configuration, you must now create categories.
Categories in a configuration file are menus that are used to group device assignments.
8. Use the Add button to create categories.

The Category field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational language,
your keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this field. If you are using
Windows Vista or Windows 7, you will have to switch our keyboard to English manually from the
Language taskbar. If you switch the keyboard back to data entry in an alternate language, data
corruption could occur.
To change a category’s name, select the entire name and press the DELETE key on your keyboard,
and then type a new name.
The order of categories determines the order they will be placed on the LCD buttons in your final
configuration. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected category with respect to the
other categories. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order (on page 227) for more information.
9. Click Next> to advance to Page 2 of 4.
On the second screen of the Device Category wizard, you must add at least one virtual or stand-
alone device, CENTRIO panel, or Routing panel to each category.
To add other devices, see Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page
191).
10. To add devices to the categories, first select a Category from the field on the left, then select a
device from the Available Devices field, and finally click the > button.
< removes the selected device from the Devices in this Category list.
<< removes all devices.
>> adds all devices from the Available Devices list to the Devices in the Category list.
The device is added to the Devices added in the category list.
The order of categories determines the order they will be placed on the LCD buttons in your final
configuration. Use the Up and Down buttons to move the selected category with respect to the
other categories. See Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order (on page 227) for more information.
The Next button will not be available until each category contains at least one device in the Devices
in the Category field.
11. Click Next.
The left side of the next screen lists all the devices that are available to the configuration.
12. Delete any devices you do not want to appear in this configuration, and then if your configuration
contains Routing and CENTRIO panels, but no processing devices, click Next on this screen.
If your configuration contains processing devices, see Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS
Configuration Wizard (on page 217).
The last page of the Configuration wizard contains options you can add to any Configuration file.
If you want to change the default settings, see the following topics for more information:
 Adding Home and Unity Buttons (on page 224)
 Defining Access Options (on page 225)
 Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order (on page 227)
13. Click Finish to close the Configuration wizard.
The Panel Configuration pane of the Configure Control Panel tab displays the menu structure for the
control panel. The Properties pane displays the button assignments for the currently selected level in
the configuration. The Panel Layout pane shows the button and knob assignments as they will appear
on your control panel when the configuration file is loaded.
Your configuration is now ready to transfer to the NUCLEUS control panel. See Transferring NUCLEUS
Configuration files (on page 231).
Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard

You need the NUCLEUS-PROC or NUCLEUS-SNMP option to add favorite parameters and menus
("processing") from individual or virtual devices. To add devices to a configuration, see Adding
Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 191). To start the NUCLEUS
Configuration wizard, see Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212).
All devices, including Routing and CENTRIO panels, that are present in the Configuration > NUCLEUS
folders, will appear in the left panel of this dialog box. Delete any devices you do not want to include in
the configuration.
The NUCLEUS Configuration wizard contains a What do you want to do now? page. If the navigation
pane in the left side of this screen contains solely Router and CENTRIO panels, click Next to proceed to
the final page of the wizard. Router and CENTRIO controls and menus are added to the configuration in
the CENTRIO and Routing Panel Configuration wizards. See Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS
Configuration (on page 206) and Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 197) for
more information.
To complete this page of the wizard, select a device or menu from the left side of the screen.
The Assign Parameters to Panel Controls and Create Device Menu(s) buttons become active.
Figure 19: Adding Parameters and Device Menus
See the following topics to complete the screens.

• Adding Menus (on page 218)
• Adding Parameters (on page 219)
Adding Menus
To add menus below a device or menu on your configuration, do one of the following:
• Click on the device or menu, click Create Device Menu(s)..., and then click Add.
or
• Right click on the device or menu and then select Create Device Menu.
When adding menus, the order they appear in the list determines the order they will be assigned to LCD
buttons. Move them on the New Device Menu(s) screen with the Up and Down buttons, or on the
Navigation pane by right clicking and selecting Move up or Move down.
You can add a total of 5500 device menus to a configuration. This total includes the number of
categories and sub-menus added to the configuration.
If you are creating a Split Navigation type of configuration, you can add a maximum of eight device
menus/sub-menus to each device in your configuration (less if you add Unity and Home buttons to your
configuration).
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your keyboard
will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If you switch the keyboard back
for data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
Adding Parameters
To assign parameters within the device or menu, click Assign Parameters to Panel Controls....
The Parameter Assignment dialog box opens.
Drag parameters from the menu on the left to the following areas on the Panel Layout:
• The four programmable knobs
• The four toggle buttons
• 16 LCD buttons
To delete an assignment, right click on the assignable button or know and select Delete from the
shortcut menu.
When assigning an SNMP value parameter to a control, the following dialog box will appear:
Enter the instance ID of the device that you intend to control with this parameter.
SNMP table parameters do not require you to enter the instance ID to identify the device to be
controlled. Table parameters instead provide an LCD for each possible device for that parameter. When
you select a device, the display shows the individual control(s).
If you leave a category or menu with nothing assigned to it, an error message will appear when you
leave this screen. You can continue, but your configuration will have a Menu button that leads to an
empty destination screen.
When you are done adding menus and parameters, click Next> to continue on to the next page of the
wizard, described in Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder (on page 189).
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard

If you would prefer not to use a wizard, you can create a blank configuration, and then customize it on
the Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab. To create a new blank configuration, see Creating a
NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212).
When you click OK to close the New Configuration dialog box, the selected configuration (in the
Configuration menu) is the one that you just created. Nothing is assigned to any button, there are no
menus or categories, and no devices are assigned.
To fill in your configuration, see the following topics:

• Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Panel Tab (on page 220)
• Adding Devices to a Configuration on the Control Panel Tab (on page 221)
• Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Panel Tab (on page 222)
• Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab (on page 222)
• Assigning Configuration Options on the Control Panel Tab (on page 224)
You cannot add Routing panels or CENTRIO panels to a NUCLEUS configuration via a blank configuration.
To add these panels to a configuration, add them to a LCD assignment, Split Navigation, or Device
category panel via a wizard. See Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 212) for more information.
Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Panel Tab

Category menus in a configuration file are used to group devices. To create a category menu, right click
on the root node or a category menu in the Panel Configuration pane and choose Create Category
Menu. The new category menu appears as a child of the selected resource in the pane.
categories and sub-menus added to the configuration. You can create categories five levels deep from
the root of the configuration file.
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your keyboard
will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If you switch the keyboard back
to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
To rename your category menu, right click on it and choose Rename. Type a new name for your
category menu. This is the name that will appear on an LCD in your completed configuration.
To change the selected item’s position in the hierarchy with respect to the other items on its level and in
its directory, click Move Up or Move Down. The order of items in this menu determines their position
on the LCD buttons (in co-operation with the auto-assignment selection. See Defining the LCD Auto-
Assignment Order (on page 227)).
Adding Devices to a Configuration on the Control Panel Tab

Parameters in a NUCLEUS configuration are always added below devices. Devices can be placed either
below the category menus, if you have created those, or below the root of the configuration. You
cannot add a device below another device. You can add a Routing or CENTRIO panel below the root of
the configuration, or below a category menu. You cannot add a device or device menu below a Routing
or CENTRIO panel.
To add a device to the configuration:

• Drag a device from the Devices/Parameters pane and drop it on top of the root node or a category
node in the Panel Configuration pane.
OR
• Drop a device on an LCD in the Panel Layout while the correct Category menu is selected in the Panel
Configuration pane.
If you have more than 16 items to assign to a page, right click on the page and choose Create Page. The
LED assignments page clears, and the Page Up button lights to indicate that there are multiple pages in
this assignment. If you click the Page Up button, you will see the previous assignments. From the
previous page, if you click Page Dn, you can return to the new page.
To delete a page, right click on it and choose Delete Page. If you have assignments on a page, Delete
Page will be greyed out. If you remove all assignments from that page, the option will become available.
categories and sub-menus added to the configuration.
Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Panel Tab

You cannot add a menu below a routing device on a NUCLEUS panel.
Menus represent the lowest level in the NUCLEUS configuration assignment hierarchy. You can add a
total of 5500 menus to a configuration. This total includes the number of categories and sub-menus
added to the configuration. However, to ensure that important parameters can be accessed quickly, try
to keep device menus to one level deep.
• To add a menu, in the Panel Configuration pane, right click on the device (or menu below a device)
where you would like to add a menu, and then select Create Device Menu.
The new menu is added below the selected device or menu.
• To remove a menu, click Remove.
Menu names can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your
keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry for menu names. If you switch the
• To change the name of a menu, double click on it, delete the current name and type a new one. Menu
names are limited to ten characters.
• To change the position of a menu in the list of objects at a level, right click on it and select Move Up
or Move Down from the shortcut menu. Menus are automatically assigned to LCDs in the final
configuration based on their order on this screen and your chosen auto-assignment setting. See
Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order (on page 227).
Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab

To add parameters to a configuration, first select the device or menu level at which you want to add
parameters on the Panel Configuration pane. You can only add parameters to a device or a device
menu.
When you’re operating a NUCLEUS control panel, you will first select a device, and then either select
menus below that device or directly adjust parameters for that device. Therefore, you can only assign
parameters below menus that have a device assigned to them already.
If you want to add parameters for multiple devices in one menu, you should first group those devices
into a virtual device. See Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites to Virtual Devices (on page
192).
There are two ways to add parameters to a configuration:

• Drag parameters from the list under the correct device in the Devices/Parameters pane and drop
them onto the empty programmable knobs, LCD buttons, and toggle buttons on the Display tab.
OR
• Drag parameters from the selected device’s list of parameters in the Devices/Parameters pane and
drop them onto the desired control on the Properties pane.
Whichever method you choose, both the Panel Layout and Properties pane update as you make
changes.
When assigning an SNMP value parameter to a control, the following dialog box will appear:
Enter the instance ID of the device that you intend to control with this parameter.
SNMP table parameters do not require you to enter the instance ID to identify the device to be
controlled. Table parameters instead provide an LCD for each possible device for that parameter. When
you select a device, the display shows the individual control(s).
Whichever method you choose, both the Panel Layout and Properties pane update as you make
changes.
If you drag and drop a parameter that is from the wrong device, the action will not be allowed.
To delete a mis-assigned parameter from a button or knob, right click on that control and choose
Delete.
You cannot add parameters below a routing device on a NUCLEUS panel.
Modifying an Index Item in a Properties Pane

Items placed at the Devices level have an Index row in the Properties tab. When you are operating the
panel, you can press the number associated with a device to go to its page, bypassing the normal
navigation aids.
Numbers are automatically assigned sequentially starting from 1 within a configuration. To change the
number, click in the Properties pane Index row and type a new number on your keyboard.
Assigning Configuration Options on the Control Panel Tab

The same configuration options that are available to a configuration created by a wizard are also
available when you create a configuration without the wizard.
To access the Auto-assignment, Access and Auto Boot options, right click in the Panel Layout pane of
the Control Panel Configuration dialog box.
• For information on the Access options, see Defining Access Options (on page 225).
• For information on the Auto Assignment options, see Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order (on
page 227).
• For information on defining Other configuration options, see Defining Other Configuration Options
(on page 226).
In the Properties dialog box, you can click in the row for any LCD button, and then on the browse button
that appears in the assignment field to access Home and Unity button options for that LCD. See Adding
Home and Unity Buttons (on page 224).
Adding Home and Unity Buttons

If you add Home and Unity buttons to your Processing configuration, they appear on every page of the
configuration.
Device Unity and Menu Unity buttons will not appear on pages associated with a Routing or CENTRIO
panel.
On the last page of the NUCLEUS Configuration wizard, you can add Home, Menu Unity and Device
Unity buttons to your configuration.
To add these buttons to a configuration from the Control Panel tab, click an LCD row in the Properties
pane, and then click o n the browse button that appears in the assignment field.
This dialog box opens:
The options are as follows:

• If you set Home Location, pressing this button on the control panel will take the panel’s buttons to a
pre-selected home page. This location can only be determined from the panel itself. See your
NUCLEUS installation and Operation Manual for more information.
• If you assign Menu Unity, pressing this button on the control panel will reset the selected device
menu’s parameters to unity values.
• If you assign Device Unity, pressing this button will reset the selected device or virtual device’s
parameters to unity values.
From the drop-down menu beside each item, choose the LCD button to assign it to. Unity and Home
buttons will appear in these locations on every layout of the configuration, including pages accessible
with the Pg Up and Pg Dn buttons.
From this dialog box, adding a Home or Unity button removes any parameters assigned to the chosen
button on any other pages in the configuration file. If a page has an auto-assigned item (a device menu
below the current level, or a real or virtual device), the auto-assigned item is bumped to the next
available LCD position.
If all LCD positions are already filled, the auto-assigned item may be placed on a new page within the
device menu.
If the configuration is a Split Navigation configuration, then you can only assign Home and Unity buttons
to LCD 9 - LCD 16 (the bottom row).
Defining Access Options

There are two ways to access the Access Options dialog box:
• Click the Access Options button which appears on the last page of all NUCLEUS control panel
configuration wizards.
• Right click in the Panel Layout dialog box and select Options from the shortcut menu.
The Options dialog box opens.
Click Access Options.
This dialog box opens:
The permissions options are outlined below:
Table 47: Permissions Options

Permission Effect When Selected
Copy data to/from from You can copy the current configuration between the NUCLEUS control panel
panels and a USB storage device. See the File Manager feature description in your
NUCLEUS Network Control Panel Installation and Operation Manual for more
information.
Enable destination You can lock a routing destination (allowing no one to change the destination’s
lock/protect source) or protect a routing destination (allowing only this NUCLEUS
configuration to change the destination’s source).
Overwrite/delete existing You can access the NUCLEUS USB File Manager to delete or overwrite
data configurations on the panel. For more information about deleting
configuration files from NUCLEUS, see your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel
Installation and Operation Manual.
Defining Other Configuration Options

When you click Other Options, either on the last page of the NUCLEUS Configuration Wizard, or on the
Options dialog box, the following dialog box appears:
Figure 20: NUCLEUS Other Configuration Options Dialog Box
The General options are:

• Nucleus panel will automatically boot to this configuration during startup—When checked, this
this configuration will start automatically when the NUCLEUS control panel is turned on.
When a configuration with this setting is transferred to the NUCLEUS Control Panel, this option will
override any previous Auto Boot to Configuration settings previously applied to the control panel
either from a configuration file or at the control panel.
• Number of pages to jump—Indicates the number of LCD pages to jump over when pressing Shift Pg
Up (previous pages) or Shift Pg Dn (next pages). The default is 5 pages.
The Router options only have an effect when a router configuration is in use on the NUCLEUS
Control Panel.
• Do not reset last selected destination when switching between source and destination selection
views—When this option is selected, the NUCLEUS control panel will store the last selected
destination when it returns to a router page (rather than resetting to destination 1).
• TAKE button not required when performing a crosspoint (Discrete Port Selection)—When this
option is selected and you make a source selection and a destination selection, the switch happens
automatically (you do not need to push the TAKE button). This does not work for Category/Index
panels.
The Router Protocol option determines the default communication protocol to use.
• If the selected router protocol fails, please try with the other protocol—The options are XY and
LRC.
Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order

Categories, devices, and menus are automatically positioned on the LCD buttons in a configuration. All
pages within a configuration use the same method.
Assignment options are not supported with Split Navigation configurations.
There are two ways to access the LCD Auto-Assignment dialog box:
• Click the Assignment Options button on the last page of a NUCLEUS control panel configuration
wizard.
OR
• Right click in the Panel Layout dialog box and select Options > Assignment Options.
The Auto-assignment selection options appear on this dialog box:
Menus and devices are assigned on the LCDs using the options described below:
Table 48: Auto-assignment Options

Option Effect
Over, then down From left to right across the entire top row, and then the second row
Down, then over From left to right across half the top row and then half the bottom row, then the
second half of the top row and the second half of the bottom row
Down, over, From left to right, places one item on the top row and the next item directly beneath it,
down, then over then the next item beside the first on the top row, etc.
Option Effect
Custom Leaves buttons where they are; you can drag and drop items and move them using
tools such as Cut and Paste, Page up and Page down
When items are auto-assigned, the assignment keeps its pattern while skipping over positions where
items have already been assigned. If there are more items for a device menu than will fit on a single
page, then a new page is created and items are automatically assigned in the same pattern as the first
page.
Editing a Panel Configuration

You can update your configuration either manually on the Control Panel tab, or by using a wizard.
• If the configuration is stored in Magellan CCS Navigator, reopen it using one of the following methods:
 In the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab, select the configuration you want
to modify from the Configuration menu.
OR
 In the Navigation pane, navigate to the Configuration folder, select the NUCLEUS the
configuration is saved under, open the Configurations folder, and double-click on the
configuration you want to modify.
The Configuration dialog box opens with the configuration you have selected.
• If the configuration is on your NUCLEUS control panel, you can retrieve it for modification. See Getting
a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS (on page 234).
• If the configuration is archived as an XML file, you can reopen it in Magellan CCS Navigator. See
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML (on page 234).
Once you have opened your configuration, you can modify it using the wizard, if you created it using the
wizard. Click the Wizard button to open the wizard, and then make the alterations on the pages as you
desire. When you are finished modifying the configuration, click Finish on any page. Your changes are
saved.
You can also modify it directly on the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab. See
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Wizard (on page 219) for a description of the tools you will
use.
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS

NUCLEUS-TRAX, sometimes referred to as Router Follow, is an add-on option for your NUCLEUS control
panel. To use NUCLEUS-TRAX, you must also have both Router (NUCLEUS-RTR) and Processing
(NUCLEUS-PROC) or SNMP (NUCLEUS-SNMP) options. For more information about purchasing TRAX
features, contact your Imagine Communications sales representative. See Activating NUCLEUS License
Keys (on page 188) for information on activating license keys.
When TRAX is enabled on a NUCLEUS panel, and you connect a source to a destination, if devices have
been assigned, controls for those devices appear on your NUCLEUS control panel. TRAX settings are
assigned for an entire configuration.
TRAX works in two different modes:

• Single Destination mode is designed to have the selected destination as a QC station. Devices
connected to the sources are displayed in NUCLEUS.
• Multiple Destination mode shows the input (upstream) and output (downstream) devices in a ‘vertical
split mode’ scenario. This allows easier adjustment of parameters on either side of the router which
will allow operators to quickly adjust video without having to specifically key in a given device.
See the manual accompanying your control panel for information about enabling and turning on
NUCLEUS-TRAX.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create configurations for NUCLEUS.
To configure NUCLEUS-TRAX, follow these steps:

1. In the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box’s Control Panel tab, under Panel Configuration, select a
configuration from the list.
2. click the Trax button.
The Trax Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Select a Destination Follow mode.
Table 49: Destination Follow Mode Options

Option Function
Single Destination mode The Logical to Device Mapping table contains one tab: Sources.
• Click Select to choose the destination.
• Click Options to determine how crosspoint following on that destination
will be managed. See Setting Destination Mode Options (on page 230) for
more information.
Multiple Destination mode The Logical to Device Mapping table contains two tabs: Sources and
Destinations.
4. Select a row in the Map Logical Source to Device table.

To remove a link to a device, click a row in the Logical Source to Device table on the TRAX tab, and
then click Clear. This deletes the link from the Menu Entry column of the selected row. You can
make multiple selections to remove several assignments at one time.
5. Click Modify…
The Device Selection dialog box opens. The contents of this box are the same as the Panel
Configuration pane, and show the menu structure of the current NUCLEUS configuration.
6. Select the device that you would like to open when the source is connected to the destination, and
then click OK.
You can only select a non-routing device or virtual device.
The menu’s name appears in the Menu Entry field of the Map Logical Source to Device table.
7. Repeat steps 2 - 4 for each row in the configuration.
In Multiple Destination mode, complete both the Source and Destination tabs.
When you load this configuration file to your NUCLEUS control panel and switch an input to a
destination, the control panel will load the assigned menu or menus.
Setting Destination Mode Options

Destination Mode options allow you to set the conditions that determine whether or not a TRAX jump
occurs based on the available levels. These settings apply to both single and multiple destination modes.
To open the NUCLEUS TRAX Options dialog box, from the Trax Configuration dialog box, click Trax
Options....
The selection you make on this screen determines which level or levels must be switched to the target
destination in order to trigger TRAX to update the menu that appears on your NUCLEUS control panel.
Table 50: TRAX Options

Option Result
Source Change must match all TRAX is triggered when all of a router destination's levels are
Destination levels configured included in a crosspoint take. If any destination level is in a
breakaway state, the TRAX jump does not execute.
Source Change must match on the levels TRAX is triggered only when the specified level(s) is included in
specified (e.g., 0,1,2) the crosspoint take. When you enter a level in the Level box,
the TRAX jump executes on this level.
Source Change must match on the TRAX is triggered only when the lowest level is included in the
lowest Destination level configured crosspoint take.
Source Change must match on the TRAX is triggered only when the highest level is included in the
highest Destination level configured crosspoint take.
Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can transfer configurations to and from
a NUCLEUS control panel. Before you can use a NUCLEUS configuration, you must transfer it to the
control panel. You can transfer a total of 16 configurations to the NUCLEUS control panel (depending on
their size).
Depending on the size of the flash memory in your NUCLEUS control panel, it may not be able to hold 16
configurations. If the flash memory holds too many configurations, then firmware upgrades to the
NUCLEUS control panel may fail.
You can store un-needed configurations for later transfer on your Magellan CCS Navigator system, or
archive them as XML files (see Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML (on page 234)).
If a panel configuration file contains presets, those presets will be written to all control panels during the
transfer process. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as the added preset, that preset
will be overwritten.
To transfer a configuration to the NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:

1. In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Perform Transfer.
The Perform Transfer dialog box opens.

 From the Local Configurations list, select the configuration(s) you would like to transfer, and
then click Send to Panel to send the currently selected configuration to the Panel, or Send All to
Panel to send all configurations in the Local Configurations list.
Hold down the shift key to select a range of configurations, or the control key to select multiple
individual configurations.
 Drag a configuration from the Local Configuration list and drop it onto the Control Panel
Configurations list.
3. Click OK to send the file to NUCLEUS.
4. Reboot the NUCLEUS panel.
If you are transferring a configuration that contains a Routing panel, the Gateway Settings file is
transferred with the NUCLEUS configuration.
If your configuration contains the setting NUCLEUS panel will auto-boot into this configuration during
startup, the newly transferred configuration will load.
If your configuration file includes devices intended to be controlled using SNMP, you also need to
transfer MIBs for those devices. See Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS (on page 235).
Magellan CCS Navigator’s List Configurations option does not show system-generated configurations,
such as those for Multiviewers (QVM6800+ and PredatorII) and IconLogo devices.
Transferring Configurations to Multiple Control Panels

You can transfer the same configuration file to multiple NUCLEUS control panels. Follow these steps:
2. From the Local Configurations list, select the configuration(s) you would like to transfer.
Hold down the shift key to select a range of configurations, or the control key to select multiple
individual configurations.
3. Click Send to Other Panels.
4. For each panel you want to send the configuration to, click New and then enter the IP address of the
panel.
The Multiple Transfer utility does not check that the control panels have less than 16 configurations
already installed. When preparing to transfer a configuration to multiple panels, ensure that each
panel has adequate storage space for the additional configuration.
The Send to Other Panels list cannot include the local panel IP (the panel for which the
configuration window is open). Use Send to Panel to transfer a configuration to the local NUCLEUS
control panel.
5. Click Start Transfer.
If a selected panel is unavailable or offline, a message will appear indicating that Magellan CCS Navigator
failed to ping the specified device. When you click OK, Magellan CCS Navigator attempts to transfer the
configuration to the next device on the list.
If a panel configuration file contains presets, those presets will be written to all control panels during the
transfer process. If a panel already has a preset with the same name as the added preset, that preset
will be overwritten.
Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML

You may want to save a NUCLEUS configuration in order to modify it or for archival purposes. To store a
configuration file, follow these steps:
2. Select the configuration you want to export from the Local Configuration list, and click Export To.
3. Browse to the designated local or network drive and click Save.
You can use Export To to export configurations to a USB key for transfer to a NUCLEUS control panel.
See your NUCLEUS Network Control Panel Installation and Operation Manual for information on
formatting a USB key.
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from XML

To retrieve a NUCLEUS configuration from an XML archive, follow these steps:
1. In the Control Panel tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, click Import from....
The Load From dialog box opens.
2. Use the standard Windows browsing tools to find and select the configuration you want to import,
and then click Open.
Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS

To get a configuration from a NUCLEUS control panel in order to modify it or for archival purposes,
follow these steps:
 Select the configuration you want to export from the Control Panel Configurations list, and click
Get from Panel to get the currently selected configuration, of Get all from Panel to get all the
configurations that are on the panel.
 Drag a configuration from the Control Panel Configuration list and drop it onto the Local
Configuration list.
3. Browse to the designated local or network drive and click Save.
When you get a configuration file from a NUCLEUS control panel, if that configuration contains presets,
those presets will be copied to the Magellan CCS Navigator PC. If you then transfer that configuration
file to another NUCLEUS control panel, those presets will be sent to the control panel. If a panel already
has a preset with the same name as the added preset, that preset will be overwritten.
Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS

The NUCLEUS control panel must have all the MIBs for all the devices it is being used to control. See the
documentation for individual devices to find out the MIBs required for each device. MIBs are normally
provided by a device’s manufacturer.
Transfer MIBs to the NUCLEUS control panel using the File Transfer tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration
dialog box.
To transfer MIBs to NUCLEUS, follow these steps:

1. In the File Transfer tab of the NUCLEUS Configuration dialog box, under Select the device directory
to tranfer to, choose snmp/mibs.
2. Remove pre-existing files that are in the Add upgrade files to transfer to device list, if there are any,
by selecting each file and then clicking Remove.
3. Click Add.
A Browse dialog box opens, automatically with the CCS/files/MIBs folder selected.
4. Choose the MIBs you need to transfer.
Hold down the SHIFT key to select a range of files, or the CTRL key to select multiple individual files.
5. Click OK.
The files appear in the Add upgrade files to transfer to device list.
6. Click Perform Transfer.
Deleting a Configuration File from a NUCLEUS

To delete a configuration from a NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
2. Select the configuration you want to delete from the Control Panel Configurations list, and click
Delete.
Listing the Configuration Files on a NUCLEUS

To list the configuration on a NUCLEUS control panel, follow these steps:
2. Click List.
The configurations currently stored on the NUCLEUS control panel appear in the Control Panel
Configurations list.
Configurations that are generated on the NUCLEUS control panel itself do not appear in the Control
Panel Configurations list. See Devices Configured Using the Control Panel Interface (on page 188) for a
list of panel-generated configurations.
Chapter 10
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and

Control
The EDGE-DPS575 acts as a protocol translator between CCS and up to 20 DPS-475/575 digital
processing synchronizers on the gateway’s subnet. The EDGE-DPS575 gateway has no parameters of its
own, but provides access to DPS-475/575 synchronizers for CCS software and control panels. This
provides operational safeguards over local control, including locking out inappropriate combinations
of control settings.
Before you can control DPS-475/575 synchronizers via the EDGE-DPS575, you must discover the EDGE-
DPS575 and create a configuration file, which defines the synchronizers the gateway controls. Once you
transfer the configuration to the gateway and rediscover the gateway, you are ready to control and
monitor the DPS-475/575 synchronizers. See Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File (on page 237).
You can use the DPS HTML Interface dialog box to access DPS-575 control parameters that the CCS
control interface does not directly support. See Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring
(on page 242).
See your DPS-575 Digital Processing Synchronizer Installation and Operation Manual for a complete list
of parameters. (The DPS-575 manual can also be used with DPS-475 synchronizers.)
Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File

An EDGE-DPS575 configuration file contains the IP addresses of up to 20 DPS-475/575 units that the
gateway will control and monitor.
Using the DPS-575 control dialog box’s HTML Interface, you can access and change control parameters
that the CCS software itself does not support. The link to the synchronizer’s Web controls is discovered
separately. See Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring (on page 242).
Only an Administrator on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure an EDGE-DPS575 gateway. To
create an EDGE-DPS575 configuration file, complete these steps:
1. In Build mode, discover your EDGE-DPS575 gateway, and then save the results of the discovery. See
Running a Discovery (on page 108) for more information.
A virtual Gateway server icon appears in the Discovery folder as a placeholder for the EDGE-
DPS575’s IP address. An EDGE-DPS575 icon appears as the child of this virtual Gateway server icon.
Icons of any DPS-575 synchronizers on the gateway’s subnet appear as the gateway’s children. If the
EDGE-DPS575 gateway has no configuration file, it will find every DPS-475/575 synchronizer on the
network, up to 255 synchronizers.
Whether the synchronizer is a DPS-475 or a DPS-575, it will appear as a DPS-575 in the Navigation
pane.
2. Drag-and-drop the EDGE-DPS575 Gateway icon from the Discovery folder into the Configuration
folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the EDGE-DPS575 icon.
DPS-575 icons appear as children of the New Configuration icon.
To change the name of the New Configuration icon (which will change how the configuration is
named in subsequent steps), see Resource Icons (on page 120).
3. This folder can contain a maximum of 20 synchronizers. Customize which DPS-475/575 synchronizer
you want to control through the EDGE-DPS575 gateway. This can be done by deleting unwanted
DPS-575 synchronizer icons from the New Configuration folder. To delete a synchronizer icon, right
click on it and select Delete from the shortcut menu.
Each DPS-475/575 synchronizer can only be controlled by one EDGE-DPS575 gateway.
4. Double-click the resource icon for the EDGE-DPS575 from the Discovery folder of the Navigation
pane.
This opens the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box.
5. Select the Gateway tab.
All the available configurations for this EDGE-DPS575, including the one you have just created,
appear in the Choose the device configuration to transfer box of the Gateway tab.
6. Click Perform Transfer on the Gateway tab, and then click Yes to confirm the transfer.
7. If you did not select Refresh device after transferring the configuration, click Refresh Device, and
then click Yes to confirm.
The gateway configuration has the name dpsconfig.xml and appears in the List of all configurations
on the device box on the Gateway tab.
The Configuration tool’s Status bar and Log provide feedback information during configuration
uploading. For more information, see Logging Configuration Activity (on page 181).
8. Rediscover the EDGE-DPS575 and save the results of the discovery. Now, in the Discovery folder, the
EDGE-DPS575 lists only the synchronizers that it controls.
The EDGE-DPS575 will read the configuration information and report the status of the identified DPS-
575 modules on its subnet. See Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration (on page 239).
Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration

You may wish to edit a configuration file, for example to remove devices from one configuration and
add them to another, optimizing your system resources. To edit a configuration file, follow these steps:
1. Open the configuration file, using one of the following methods:

 In the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box’s Gateway tab, select dpsconfig.xml in the List of
all configurations on the device box, and then click Get Configuration.
This copies the configuration from the EDGE-DPS575 gateway so it can be modified. The
configuration also remains on the EDGE-DPS575 gateway.
 Copy a configured EDGE-DPS575 gateway from the Network or Discovery folder to the
Configuration folder of the Navigation pane.
2. Edit the configuration file, using the following tools:
Each DPS475/575 can only be controlled by one EDGE-DPS575.
 Drag DPS-475/575 synchronizers from other configuration files, or from the Discovery folder,
and drop them onto the Configuration folder you are editing.
 Right click on any DPS-475/575 synchronizers you want to remove from the Configuration
folder, and choose Delete from the menu that appears.
3. Transfer it to the EDGE-DPS575 gateway, following steps 4 - 8 in Creating an EDGE-DPS575
Configuration File (on page 237), or reserve it for future use. Your configuration file is automatically
when you close Magellan CCS Navigator or switch between modes, if you click Yes on the System
view was modified. Save Changes? dialog box.
Deleting a Configuration from an EDGE-DPS575

When an EDGE-DPS575 has no configurations on it, you can discover it to find all DPS-475/575
synchronizers (up to 255 in total) on your network. To delete configuration information on an EDGE-
DPS575, complete these steps:
1. Open the EDGE-DPS575 Configuration dialog box, and then select the Gateway tab.
2. Click List Configurations to view the configuration information stored on the DPS-Gateway.
The EDGE-DPS575 configuration information is named dpsconfig.xml when stored on the gateway.
3. Select the configuration in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then click Delete
Configuration.
4. When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file dpsconfig.xml, click Yes.
The List of all configurations on the device box immediately shows that no dpsconfig.xml file
remains on the gateway.
5. Click Refresh Device on the Gateway tab.
Adding DPS-575 Parameters to NUCLEUS Configurations

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create and edit NUCLEUS
configurations.
When creating a NUCLEUS configuration, you can add a DPS-475/575 or an EDGE-DPS575. If you add the
EDGE-DPS575 device, you will be able to add any parameter for all devices that the gateway controls.
Any parameter that can be accessed on the DPS-475/575 via CCS Pilot or Magellan CCS Navigator can
also be added to a NUCLEUS configuration file.
Any NUCLEUS configurations that include DPS-475/575 synchronizers must be updated every time you
re-configure their associated EDGE-DPS575.
See Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 191) for more
information.
Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway

The EDGE-DPS575 has no controllable parameters.
It has one alarm, Gateway not configured properly. This alarm triggers to indicate that the EDGE-
DPS575 is not configured, or is configured with more than 20 DPS/475/575 synchronizers.
SeeNetwork Event Diagnostics (on page 263) for information on retrieving and diagnosing alarms.
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface

You can open a Control dialog box for each DPS-575 that is part of a configuration file on an EDGE-
DPS575.
Each DPS-575 Control dialog box shows a condensed version of more than 200 local controls organized
by function.
To open a Control dialog box for a DPS-475 or DPS-575, with Magellan CCS Navigator in Control mode,
double click on the synchronizer in a Network or Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
The Control dialog box has a Parameters tab and an Alarms tab.
For information on parameters that can be adjusted in the Control dialog box, see your DPS-475 or DPS-
575 Installation and Operation Manual.
Three DPS-575 alarms are supported:
Table 51: DPS-575 Alarms That Appear in Magellan CCS Navigator

Fully Supported by Supported in Magellan
DPS-575 Parameter or LED Name
Magellan CCS Navigator CCS Navigator via HTTP
Loss of Video (Alarm Critical) Yes No (LED)
Loss of Genlock (Alarm Critical) Yes No (LED)
Video Freeze (Alarm Warning) Yes No (LED)
Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and Monitoring

Using the DPS-575 control dialog box’s HTML Interface, you can access and change control parameters
that the CCS software itself does not support. The link to the synchronizer’s Web controls is discovered
separately.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this procedure.
Some DPS-575 controls cannot be accessed through the CCS interface. To access those controls
remotely, you must use the HTML interface. The HTML interface can be accessed through CCS software
in Control mode.
To create an Index item for accessing these controls, follow these steps:
1. With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, click Options in the Discovery pane.
The Discovery Options dialog box opens.
2. Click Add.
The Add Host dialog box opens.
3. Under Add a Host IP, enter the IP address of the DPS-575 device you want to control.
4. Under Select Products for Discovery, place a check beside HTTP, and then click Apply.
5. Click OK to close the Add Host dialog box.
6. Under Start Options, ensure that Enable Scanning of IP addresses is selected, and then click OK to
close the Discovery Options dialog box.
7. In the Discovery pane, click Start to commence a discovery.
8. When the discovery has run successfully and has found your HTTP host, click Save.
In your Navigation pane, an Index is added to the Discovery folder.
9. Switch Magellan CCS Navigator to Control mode.

If the DPS HTML Interface dialog box shows an error message when you switch screens, the network
has lost its connection to the synchronizer.
10. Double click the new Index item in the Discovery folder to open the HTML web server controls for
the DPS-575.
See your DPS-475 or DPS-575 manual for information on using this interface.
Using the DPS-575 Updater

The EDGE-DPS575 cannot send software updates or images to DPS-575 digital processing synchronizers.
To do these tasks, you must use the DPS Uploader Utility.
If you have installed the DPS-575 Uploader Utility on the same PC as your CCS software, you can start it
from within Magellan CCS Navigator. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode to open the
Uploader utility.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can start the Uploader Utility from inside
Magellan CCS Navigator.
To open the DPS-575 Uploader Utility program, follow these steps:

1. Right click a DPS-575 resource icon and select Configuration.
2. Click on the File Transfer tab.
3. Click Launch "Uploader.exe" to configure DPS.

If the DPS-575 Uploader Utility has been run on this PC before, it will start.
If the DPS-575 Uploader Utility has not been run on this PC before, or if it has been moved since the
last time it was started, a Browse dialog box will open.
4. Browse to the location of the DPS-575 Uploader Utility, select it and click OK, and a dialog box
similar to this will appear:
You are now ready to upload files to the selected DPS-575 device.
Connecting the DPS Uploader Utility to a Specific DPS-575

When the DPS-575 Uploader Utility opens, it is configured to upload files to the DPS-575 unit that you
clicked on. You do not need to restart it to connect to a different DPS-575 device.
To connect the DPS-575 Uploader Utility to a specific DPS-575 synchronizer, complete the following
steps:
1. Select Ethernet in the Connection Type section of the Upload File tab.
2. Type the synchronizer’s IP address in the field to the right of the Ethernet button.
3. Type in the Web Password for the DPS-575 synchronizer.
4. Click Save Settings.
Chapter 11
NEO Frame Configuration

See your NEO FR-3901, FR-3903 and FR-3923 Mounting Frames Installation and Operation Manual for
specific information relating to NEO devices, including NEO 3901RES-E resource modules.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a NEO Frame configuration.
A NEO frame configuration describes which type of module, if any, should appear in each frame slot.
NEO frames can report alarms for the following events:
• When someone removes a module from a slot that is configured to contain a certain module
• When someone inserts a module in a slot that formerly contained a module of a different type
If you insert a module into a NEO frame slot that a frame configuration describes as "empty," the frame
will not generate any alarms if the module is removed or a module of another type replaces it. However,
if someone inserts a different type of module in a slot than the type that a frame configuration
describes, Magellan CCS Navigator will issue an "invalid" message for the slot. And if a module is
removed from a slot for which a frame configuration describes a module’s presence, Magellan CCS
Navigator will issue a "missing" message for the slot. These statuses will not appear in Magellan CCS
Navigator device tree, only in the Frame Specific Control dialog box. To see the current status, open the
NEO Frame’s Specific Control dialog box. See Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes (on page
284) for more information.
By default, Magellan CCS Navigator does not report these types of module changes for frames, and if
monitoring these events is not important for your installation, then you do not need to configure your
NEO frames. However, if you would like Magellan CCS Navigator to notify you of these types of module
changes, then you must use Magellan CCS Navigator to configure the frame.
The steps in creating a configuration file and saving it to a NEO frame are described in the following
topics:
• Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame (on page 247)
• Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame (on page 248)
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame

While a NEO frame only stores one frame configuration at once, you can save as many frame
configurations as you want in the Configuration folder. And then you can download alternate frame
configurations to the NEO frame as needed.
In build mode, configure those devices for which the user group has configuration rights. To configure a
NEO frame or CCS control panel for remote software control, you must create a configuration file in the
Navigation pane’s Configuration folder and transfer it to the remote device—in addition to settings
values in the device configuration dialog box.
To configure a NEO frame’s module assignments, complete these steps:

1. Discover the NEO frame and save the discovery results. (For information on running a discovery, see
Running a Partial Discovery (on page 110))
The saved discovery results appear in the Discovery folder. The Discovery tool creates a virtual NEO
server icon as a place holder for the frame’s IP address. This NEO server icon does not represent any
actual physical device—just the IP address information
The NEO frame appears as the child of the virtual server icon. Any modules the NEO frame contains
appear as children of the frame icon.
2. Drag-and-drop the NEO frame icon—not the NEO server icon—from the Discovery folder into the
Configuration folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the new NEO frame
and the virtual parent of any modules found during the discovery.
3. Ensure that all the modules you want to configure in the NEO frame now appear under the New
Configuration folder.
4. Open the Configuration dialog box for the NEO frame, and then select the Frame tab.
The default "New Configuration" appears in the Choose the device configuration to transfer box of
the Frame tab.
5. In the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane, rename the New Configuration icon.
This name could include the creation date and intended use of the configuration or an abbreviated form
of its IP address.
The NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box immediately shows the new name in the Frame tab’s Choose
the device configuration to transfer box.
The configuration now exists in the Navigation pane. The next step is to transfer the configuration to the
NEO frame for the frame to use in managing its modules and slots.
Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO Frame

If you select Both NEO Resource Modules from the Configuration For: box, then you are able to transfer
configurations to both master and slave resource modules, but you are not able to list configurations for
them.
If you are in a Configuration dialog box for a NEO FR-3903 3RU frame with redundant master and slave
3901RES-E resource modules installed in it, then this box is enabled. If your NEO FR-3903 3RU frame
only contains one 3901RES-E resource module, or if you are in a Configuration dialog box for a NEO FR-
3901 1RU frame, then this box is disabled.
To transfer a frame configuration to a NEO frame, complete these steps:

1. Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box and then select the Frame tab.
2. On the Frame tab, locate the Configuration For: box in the top right corner, and then click the arrow
to choose a NEO 3901RES-E redundant resource module to transfer configurations to or list
configurations for (choose between master, slave, or both).
3. On the Frame tab, select the configuration you want to transfer in the Choose the device
configuration to transfer list.
4. Click Perform Transfer on the Frame tab.
5. When a query box asks you to confirm the configuration transfer, click Yes.
6. After the transfer finishes, click Refresh Device on the Frame tab.
7. When a query box asks you to confirm the refresh, click Yes.
The configuration file has the name neo_device_policy.cfg and appears in the List of all configurations
on the device box on the Frame tab.
When the frame restarts or refreshes, the frame software reads the new configuration file and, based
on its content, reports the status of the frame and its modules to Magellan CCS Navigator.

• Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File (on page 249)
• Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log (on page 249)
• Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration (on page 250)
Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame Configuration File

To cancel the transfer of a frame configuration file to a NEO frame, click Cancel on the Frame tab of the
NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
If the file has already finished transferring to the frame, the Cancel option will no longer be available.
However, you can use commands in the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box to delete the
configuration file from the NEO frame.
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log

The Configuration tool reports the progress of frame configuration activity to the status bar and logs the
activity to the Log tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
To view the configuration log, select the Log tab.
To save or clear the configuration log, right-click inside the Log tab and use the resulting shortcut menu.
Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration

To instruct the NEO frame to load a newly transferred frame configuration file, complete these steps:
1. Open the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Frame tab.
2. Click Refresh Device.
The configuration file has the name neo_device_policy.cfg and appears in the List of all configurations
on the device box on the Frame tab.
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame

Once you have transferred a configuration file to a NEO frame, you can perform the following actions on
it.
Listing the Configuration File Stored on a NEO Frame:
The configuration file stored on a NEO frame has the name neo_device_policy.cfg.
The Configuration tool can retrieve and show the file name in the List of all configurations on the
device box of the Frame tab of the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box.
To list the configuration file stored on a NEO frame in the NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box,
2. Click List Configurations to list the one configuration file stored on the frame.
The NEO frame stores only one configuration at once, but you can store multiple NEO configurations in
the Configuration folder and then download them to the frame as needed.
If no file lists, then the frame has no stored configuration information.
Getting the Configuration File from a NEO Frame
To get a configuration file from a NEO frame for use in the Navigation pane, complete these steps:
2. Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the frame.
3. Select the configuration file, neo_device_policy.cfg, and then click Get Configuration.
A Save As box appears with the list of any NEO frame configurations in the List of configurations
box.
4. Select an existing configuration in the Save As box’s List of Configurations box; or type a new name
in the Name box, and then click OK.
The retrieved file will now list both in the Choose the device configuration to transfer box of the Frame
tab and in the Configuration folder.
Deleting a Configuration File from a NEO Frame
To use the Configuration tool to delete a configuration file stored on a NEO frame, complete these
steps:
2. Click List Configurations to view the configuration file stored on the frame.
NEO frame configurations are named neo_device_policy.cfg when stored on the frame.
3. Select the configuration file in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then click Delete
Configuration.
4. When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file neo_device_policy.cfg, click Yes.
The List of all configurations on the device box immediately shows that no files remain on the
frame.
5. Click Refresh Device on the Frame tab.
Once refreshed, the frame will now behave as an unconfigured frame. That is, it will not report alarms if
a module is removed or a replaced with a module of a different type.
Clearing the Configurations List from the Frame
To clear the frame configuration list on the Frame tab of a NEO frame’s Configuration dialog box, click
Clear. This deletes the text in the tab’s List of all configurations on the device list.
Chapter 12
LCP and RCP Configuration

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create an LCP or RCP Control Panel
configuration.
The Imagine Communications RCP-CCS-1U remote control panel and the LCP-3901-1U local control
panel provide control, monitoring, and secure access to a number of CCS devices on a network.
A configuration defines the devices a control panel can control, and the menus on that control panel
when it is controlling those devices. You can create multiple control panel configurations. As the needs
of the network change, you can transfer a new configuration to the panel, restart or refresh it, and view
the status of its assigned devices based on the content of the configuration.
An LCP or RCP configuration can contain two additional features: Favorites and CCS Trax. When you
configure Favorites for a device, you create a limited selection of parameters to display on the control
panel. When you configure CCS Trax, you set the panel to display a specific device when a router
switches to a specific destination.

Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP ................................ 252
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP ........................... 256
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP .................................................... 260
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs ........................... 261
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create an LCP or RCP Control Panel
configuration.
ou can configure those devices for which your user group has configuration rights. For NEO frames and
CCS control panels, you must create configurations in the Navigation pane’s Configuration folder, in
addition to settings values in the device’s Configuration dialog box.
Configuration for a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 187).
To configure a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:

1. Discover the CCS LCP or RCP control panel and save the discovery results. For information on
running a discovery, see Running a Discovery (on page 108).
The saved discovery results appear in the Discovery folder. The Discovery tool creates a virtual NEO
server icon as a placeholder for the control panel’s IP address. The CCS control panel appears as the
child of this virtual server icon.
2. Drag-and-drop the CCS control panel icon—not the NEO server icon—from the Discovery folder into
the Configuration folder.
A New Configuration icon appears in the Configuration folder as the child of the new CCS control
panel icon.
3. Open the Configuration dialog box for the CCS control panel, and then select the Control Panel tab.
The default "New Configuration" appears in the Choose the device configuration to transfer box of
the Control Panel tab.
4. In the Configuration folder of the Navigation pane, rename the New Configuration icon.
The CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box immediately shows the new name in the Control
Panel tab’s Choose the device configuration to transfer box.
5. Drag-and-drop the set of devices that you want the control panel to manage from the Network
folder to the control panel’s Configuration icon in the Configuration folder.
Resource icons that belong to a control panel configuration show their short name in the
Configuration folder. The short name matches what a control panel can show on its display, a
maximum of 20 characters per device name. If a default short name does not adequately identify a
resource, you can change it in the resource’s Navigation Properties box—taking out spaces,
abbreviating words, or including the last four digits of an IP address.
6. Configure the alarm monitoring for CCS control panels by right-clicking a resource icon, and then
selecting Alarm Filtering or Alarm Filtering Contents from the resulting shortcut menu.
7. If you want, you can now configure Favorites for your device.
8. The next step is to transfer the configuration to the CCS control panel for the control panel’s use
in managing its devices.
See these related topics:

• Configuring Favorites for a Device (on page 254)
• Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP (on page 256)
Configuring Favorites for a Device

Your CCS software can only configure parameter information for devices that are available in the CCS
database. The devices must be on line and discovered.
Favorites are your most commonly used parameters for a device. When you configure favorites for a
device you can send the configuration to a local or remote control panel. Then when you select that
device on the control panel, you can look at just those parameters on the control panel, rather than
having to scroll through the entire operator’s list.
Note: the Favorites feature is not supported by older LCP and RCP panels. Only an Administrator user of
a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure favorites.
Configuring Favorites for a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 187).
Setting Parameter Favorites

The Favorites menu option is disabled if the selected item is not a CCS device, for example a folder.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can set Parameter Favorites.
To set parameter favorites for a device, follow these steps:

1. While in Build mode, right-click the device in the Configuration folder in the Navigation pane.
The shortcut menu appears, with Favorites as one of its menu options.
2. Click on Favorites to open the Favorites dialog box, which displays the parameters of the selected
device in the form of a table.
3. Place a check mark beside each parameter you would like to appear in the device’s favorite
parameters list. You can also select multiple rows simultaneously in order to toggle the Favorite
checkbox on or off. Toggle the checkbox on or off using the spacebar.
keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this field. If you switch the keyboard
back to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
If you check the Use Default Favorites checkbox, the device will use the entire operator parameter list.
Checking Use Default Favorites overrides any selections you may make in the parameter list.
Click in the Alias column of a selected Favorite to change the name by which that parameter appears on
the control panel.
Before you see the change on the control panel device, you must transfer the configuration to that
control panel.
For more information, see Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP (on page 256).
Copying Parameter Favorites

The device you copy favorites to must be an identical device to the one you copied favorites from.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can copy Parameter Favorites.
You can also copy parameter favorites from one device to another. There are three methods of copying
and pasting control panel display favorites for a device:
• In Build mode, right click a source device in the control panel configuration to access the shortcut
menu. Select the Copy Favorites menu item to copy the favorites of the selected device. Then select a
target device in a control panel configuration that you want to copy the favorites to. Right-click to
access the shortcut menu again and then select the Paste Favorites menu item in order to paste
favorites from the source device to the target device.
• In Build mode, use the Copy/Paste functionality of the Navigation pane to copy and paste device
icons within the Configuration folder. The favorites of a selected device are included as part of the
Copy/Paste operation.
• Drag-and-drop a device icon. The favorites of a selected device are included as part of the drag-and-
drop operation.
When copying parameter favorites to a device, they must still be loaded to a control panel before the
change can take effect.
Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or RCP

The procedure for transferring a configuration file to a NUCLEUS control panel is described in NUCLEUS
To transfer a control panel configuration to a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
1. Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box and select the Control Panel tab.
2. On the Control Panel tab, select the configuration you want to transfer in the Choose the device
configuration to transfer list.
Figure 21: Left Half of the Control Panel Tab
If you do not click Refresh device after transferring the configuration, you will need to manually
refresh the control panel by clicking Refresh Device after the transfer, or the new settings will not
take effect.
3. (Optional) Click Refresh device after transferring the configuration. This will cause the panel to
automatically refresh after the transfer.
4. Click Perform Transfer on the Control Panel tab.
5. When a query box asks you to confirm the configuration transfer, click Yes.
6. After the transfer finishes, if you did not select the Refresh device after transferring the
configuration check box, you must refresh the control panel, so that the control panel loads the new
configuration.
Click Refresh Device on the Control Panel tab.
The configuration file has the name control_panel.xml and appears in the List of all configurations on
the device box on the Control Panel tab.
Figure 22: Upper Right Portion of Control Panel Tab
Canceling the Transfer of an LCP or RCP Control Panel Configuration File

To cancel the transfer of a control panel configuration to a CCS control panel, click Cancel on the Control
Panel tab of the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box.
If the file has already finished transferring to the control panel, the Cancel option will no longer be
available. However, you can use commands in the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box to delete
the configuration file from the CCS control panel.
Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log

The Configuration tool reports the progress of LCP or RCP control panel configuration activity to the
status bar and logs the activity to the Log tab of the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box.
To view the control panel configuration log, select the Log tab of the control panel’s Configuration
dialog box.
To save the control panel configuration log, right-click inside the text box, and then select Save Log As...
on the resulting shortcut menu.
To clear the control panel configuration log, right-click inside the text box, and then select Clear Log on
the resulting shortcut menu.
Refreshing a CCS Control Panel Configuration

To instruct the CCS LCP or RCP control panel to load a newly transferred control panel configuration,
1. Open the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box, and then select the Control Panel tab.
2. Click Refresh Device.
The configuration file has the name control_panel.xml and appears in the List of all configurations on
the device box on the Control Panel tab.
Using the Configuration List on a CCS Control Panel

The configuration list on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel can help you perform various functions. See the
following topics:
• Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS Control Panel (on page 259)
• Clearing the Configurations List from the Control Panel Tab (on page 260)
• Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS Control Panel (on page 260)
• Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Panel (on page 260)
Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS Control Panel

The configuration file stored on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel has the name control_panel.xml. You can
retrieve and list the filename in the List of all configurations on the device box of the Control Panel tab
of the CCS control panel’s Configuration dialog box.
Figure 23: Right Half of Control Panel Tab
To list configuration file information stored on a CCS control panel in the CCS control panel’s
Configuration dialog box, complete these steps:
2. Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the control panel.
If no file appears, then the control panel has no stored configuration information.
Clearing the Configurations List from the Control Panel Tab

To clear the list of configurations on the Control Panel tab of a CCS LCP or RCP control panel’s
Configuration dialog box, click Clear List.
This deletes the text in the List of all configurations on the device on the Control Panel tab.
Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS Control Panel

CCS Trax configuration data is part of a control panel configuration. When you import a control panel
configuration, Both CCS Trax and router configuration data will be automatically imported as well, if it
exists.
To retrieve a configuration file from a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
2. Click List Configurations to view the list of configurations stored on the control panel.
3. Select the configuration file, control_panel.xml, and then click Get Configuration.
A Save As box appears, listing any CCS control panel configurations in the List of configurations box.
4. Select an existing configuration in the Save As box’s List of Configurations; or type a new name in
the Name box, and then click OK.
The retrieved file will now appear in the configuration list both in the Choose the device configuration
to transfer box of the Control Panel tab and in the Configuration folder.
Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Panel

To delete a configuration file on a CCS LCP or RCP control panel, complete these steps:
2. Click List Configurations to view the configuration file stored on the control panel.
The CCS control panel configuration is named control_panel.xml.
3. Select control_panel.xml in the List of all configurations on the device box, and then click Delete
Configuration.
4. When a query box asks you to confirm the deletion of the file control_panel.xml, click Yes.
5. Click Refresh Device on the Control Panel tab.
Once refreshed, the control panel will behave as an unconfigured control panel.
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP

Alarm filtering enables you to turn off the listing of alarms for CCS devices. Set the filtering of alarms for
a CCS device on the Diagnostics Filter tab or through the navigation shortcut menu. The Filter column in
the Navigation pane shows a check box for each CCS device that has filtered alarms.
You can use the alarm filtering function to configure a control panel so that it can filter (ignore) alarms
from certain devices, but still control or navigate to all devices in your system. Normally, a control panel
has a limited number of frames and associated traffic that it can manage; if you exceed this limit, you
may receive an error message when you attempt to perform a transfer. To get around the limit, you can
filter frame and device alarms to reduce the alarm traffic to the control panel.
You can either filter alarms from a single device (Alarm Filtering option) or filter alarms from a parent
resource and all of its contents (Alarm Filtering Contents option).
See these topics:

• Using Alarm Filtering (on page 261)
• Using Alarm Filtering Contents (on page 261)
Using Alarm Filtering

To filter a resource’s alarms, right-click the resource icon, and then select Alarm Filtering from the
resulting shortcut menu—if the option is not already selected.
Figure 24: A ‘Selected’ Alarm Filtering Option
If a check mark appears to the left of Alarm Filtering in the context menu, then the feature is enabled.
This means that alarms from this selected device will be ignored. When alarms are filtered, they will only
appear in the alarms log database. They will not show on any other tabs of the diagnostic database.
If no check mark appears, then Alarm Filtering is disabled. This means that alarms from this selected
device can be received.
Using Alarm Filtering Contents

To set up the alarm filtering for a resource and all of its contents, right-click a parent resource icon, and
then select Alarm Filtering Contents from the resulting shortcut menu.
A submenu appears with these two selections: Ignore Alarms and Enable Alarms.
• Choose Ignore Alarms to turn on alarm filtering for the parent device and all the child resource icons
below it.
• Choose Enable Alarms to turn off alarm filtering (receive alarm messages) for the parent device and
all the child resource icons below it.
Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and RCPs

For information on using the password protection feature, see the manual that accompanied your
control panel.
If you forget your password for accessing the Setup menu on your control panel, you can delete it using
Magellan CCS Navigator. Follow these steps:
1. Using your Magellan CCS Navigator software, manually delete the pw.txt file from the Software
Upgrade /f10 folder.
2. Reboot the panel.
The Setup menu can now be accessed without a password. Follow the password setup procedure set
out in your LCP or RCP Installation and Operation manual to configure a new Setup menu password.
Chapter 13
Network Event Diagnostics

The types of devices you can control depend on the Magellan CCS Navigator licenses on your PC. See
In Control mode, the Diagnostics tool monitors the CCS network for unusual events and operating
conditions. Alarms appear in the Diagnostics dialog box when the following events and conditions occur:
• Input conditions, such as video status
• Frame conditions, such as power supply
• Device instance conditions, such as the insertion, removal, or failure of modules
• CCS host communications
• CCS device settings
• SNMP traps and SNMP status monitoring
By default, all alarms for devices you have monitoring access to appear in the Diagnostics dialog box.
However, you can filter or disable specific alarms. And you can configure an e-mail service to notify you
or others of alarms, if the network has an enabled e-mail service.
The Diagnostics tool supports time- and size-based alarm log management and enables the automatic
deletion of old logs. You can filter alarms by time period and configure the alarm notifications
to interrupt the PC’s screen saver. See the following topics for more information:
• Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box (on page 274)
• Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps (on page 88)
Alarm queries are optimized to conserve network resources, so only outstanding alarms report at start-
up.
Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box

To open the Diagnostics dialog box, click Diagnostics on the Tools menu.
The default location for the Diagnostics dialog box is across the bottom of the main application dialog
box. However, you can drag this dialog box to other locations and dock it to the top or bottom border of
the interface.
The Diagnostics dialog box is the interface to the Diagnostics tool. It has multiple pages that show as
tabs inside the Diagnostics dialog box. The four tabs, or pages, in the Diagnostics dialog box are
Monitor, Selected, Logged, and Offline.
As the CCS devices generate alarms, these alarms list in the appropriate place on these pages. You
receive notice of an alarm in these ways:
• In Control mode, as a color-coded icon in the Alarm column of the Navigation pane
• As a record or row in the Diagnostics dialog box’s alarm lists
The Diagnostics dialog box has four tabs. See the following sections for descriptions of each tab:
Tabs in the Diagnostic Dialog Box
Tab Function
Monitor Displays a list of all outstanding (uncleared) alarms from all monitored CCS devices
Selected Displays a list of all outstanding alarms for a device whose resource icon you have selected
in the Navigation pane. If you change the selection of resource icons in the Navigation pane,
the content of this tab updates to reflect the alarms for the newly selected device
Logged Displays a list of all alarms received since you started this session of Magellan CCS Navigator
on this PC
Offline After you load an alarm file, displays the contents of that file; otherwise, empty
For more information on using the tabs in the Diagnostic dialog box, see Using Alarm Tables (on page
264).
Using Alarm Tables

Alarms in an alarm table are organized into rows and columns.
You can reorder, resize and sort columns in the alarm list. Once you are happy with your changes, you
can save them so whenever you return to the list it appears as you set it.
Selecting a Row in an Alarm Table

To select a row in an alarm table, hover the cursor over the cell containing the Alarm icon (a bell) until
the cursor turns into a right arrow. Click the mouse button to select the row.
The selected row will have white text with a black background.
Figure 25: Selecting a Row in a Table
The cursor changes to a right arrow when the mouse hovers over the Alarm icon. Click the mouse to
select the row.
Figure 26: Selected Row
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record

To open a resource’s Control dialog box from an alarm record in the Diagnostics dialog box, double-click
a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm list.) This will open the Control dialog box of
the CCS device that generated the alarm.
Reordering Columns in the Alarm List

To reorder the columns in an alarm list, complete these steps:
1. Click a column header to select the column.
Figure 27: Column Selected for Move
2. Drag the selected column left or right to the new location and release the mouse button to drop the
column into place.
Figure 28: Moved Column in New Location
To save the changes you make to the order of the columns in an alarm list, complete these steps:
1. Click Diagnostics on the Options menu.
This shows the Diagnostics Options box. The General tab tops the page order by default.
2. Select the Save column ordering check box (place a check in it).
3. Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
Resizing Columns
To change the width of a column in the alarm tables in the Diagnostics dialog box, complete these steps:
1. Position the cursor over the right column divider so that the cursor turns into a bar with a double-
headed arrow bisecting it.
In the below example, to resize the ID column, the mouse hovers over the right column divider.
Figure 29: Resizing a Column
2. Click and drag the double-headed arrow to the right or left until the column is the width you want.
If a column is too narrow, enlarge it by the same method described above or double-click the right
column divider.
Sorting Columns
By default, the alarms in the Diagnostics dialog box list by order of occurrence. However, you can sort
the list by any field in the list and in either ascending or descending alphanumeric order.
Sorting Columns
Ascending Descending
To sort an alarm list by a column heading in the alarm list, complete these steps:
1. Move the cursor inside the column heading cell.
The cursor will turn into a down-pointing arrow.
2. Double-click inside the column header cell.
The list automatically regenerates, sorted by that field.
3. To reverse the order of the sort, double-click a second time inside the column header cell.
The list automatically regenerates in the reverse sort order.
Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists

The Diagnostics dialog box shows alarm lists on each of its tabs. Each resource on the network can
generate one or more alarm records. Each row in an alarm list consists of a separate alarm record. Each
column in an alarm list consists of a different category or "field" of information about the alarm.
The different alarm lists in the Diagnostics dialog box can have different fields (columns) of information
and you can configure each of them to display in different ways.
Fields in the Alarm Lists
Information Meaning
ID Number that indicates the alarm’s order of occurrence
Time Issued The time the PC received the alarm
Description Details of the alarm
Error ID Number that uniquely identifies an alarm condition when different alarm conditions
can occur for the same device parameter
Error Level Alarm level (critical, warning, information, or cleared)
Device ID Identifying code of the CCS device that generated the alarm, including the IP address
of the device reporting the error
Device Name The name of the device for which the alarm occurred
Parameter Name The parameter name that triggered the alarm
Parameter Value The parameter value that triggered the alarm
E-mail Sent "Yes" indicates that an e-mail was sent; "No" indicates that no e-mail was sent. See
Setting Diagnostics Options (on page 273)
User Info Additional alarm information
Error Alias This is an alternate name for the alarm that can be searched when you export to a
database. Aliases are configured in the Favorites dialog. See Configuring Favorites (on
Ignored "Yes" indicates that a user has signalled notice of the alarm; "No" indicates the user
has not signalled notice of the alarm. Ignored alarms disappear from the Monitor and
Selected tabs, but remain on the Logged tab. See Ignoring Alarms (on page 270).
Comments Displays comments that were configured in the Forward Alarms and Individual Device
Alarms dialog boxes (found through the SNMP Agent Configuration dialog’s Trap
Selection tab)
Interpreting Alarm Colors

Color codes indicate the severity of alarms that are logged while monitoring the network. Most alarms
are messages about potential problems that may require user intervention.
The color coding occurs in three locations within the Magellan CCS Navigator interface:
• The Diagnostics dialog box lists the alarms against color-coded backgrounds.
Figure 30: Color-Coded Alarm List in the Diagnostics Dialog Box
• The Navigation pane shows colored boxes representing alarm levels, if you activate this column in the
Navigation Options box.
Figure 31: Color-Coded Alarm Column in the Navigation Pane
• The Slot Status section of frame Control dialog boxes show color-coded representations of alarm
status for each occupied slot. See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147) and Setting Diagnostics
Options (on page 273).
Figure 32: Color-Coded Slots in a Frame Control Dialog Box
Color Indicators in Control Dialog Boxes

Color Means
White Cleared or resolved
Red Critical
Yellow Warning
Green Information
Orange Acknowledged
Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus

A shortcut menu, which shows when you right-click an object, contains commands or options that relate
specifically to the right-clicked object as well as to the active operational mode and dialog box.
In the table below are the shortcut menu options available on tabs in the Diagnostics dialog box. Not all
options are available for each tab.
Diagnostics Shortcut Menus
Option Function Help Reference
Find Device Finds and highlights the resource icon for a Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm
CCS device in the Navigation pane Record (on page 269)
Local This option is only available for SNMP devices Locally acknowledging SNMP traps (on
Acknowledge and it locally acknowledges the selected trap, page 270)
changing the color of the alarm to orange
Ignore (F4) Clears selected alarms from the Monitor and Ignoring Alarms (on page 270)
Selected tabs
Ignore All Clears all alarms from the Monitor and Ignoring Alarms (on page 270)
Selected tabs
Refresh Regenerate the lists of alarms shown on each Refreshing the Alarm Lists (on page
page of the Diagnostics dialog box 271)
Clear Clears selected alarms from the Logged and Clearing Alarms (on page 271)
Offline tabs
Clear All Clears all alarms from the Logged and Offline Clearing Alarms (on page 271)
tabs
Save Alarms to... Saves alarms to a specific offline alarm log file Saving Alarms to a File (on page 271)
Save Alarms Saves alarms to the default alarm log Saving Alarms to a File (on page 271)
Load Alarms Loads alarms in an offline alarm file into the Loading an Archived Alarm Log into
Offline tab the Offline Tab (on page 272)
Properties... Enables the editing of properties associated Setting Diagnostics Properties for an
with an alarm Alarm Message (on page 272)
Options... Opens the Diagnostics Options box Setting Diagnostics Options (on page
273)
Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm Record

To find the resource icon for a CCS device from one of its alarm records, complete these steps:
1. In the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm
list.)
2. Select Find Device from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Navigation tool highlights the resource icon in the Navigation pane, opening any closed folders
required to show the resource icon.
Locally acknowledging SNMP traps

To locally acknowledge a trap for a SNMP device, complete these steps:
1. In the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click a cell in the trap record (a record is one row in an alarm
list).
2. Select 'Local Acknowledge' from the resulting shortcut menu.
In the case of acknowledgement, an email is sent to report that the alarm has been acknowledged (if the
system is configured to send emails). The Diagnostic dialog box (log entry) and Navigator page with the
device on it are highlighted in orange (this is the color that indicates "acknowledged"). If there is
another critical notification for the device, the color remains red (highest alarm level).
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Alarm Record

To open a resource’s Control dialog box from an alarm record in the Diagnostics dialog box, double-click
a cell in the alarm record. (A record is one row in an alarm list.) This will open the Control dialog box of
the CCS device that generated the alarm.
Ignoring Alarms
You can ignore alarms individually, or you can ignore all alarms.
Ignoring an Alarm
All alarms are listed on the Diagnostics dialog box's Logged tab. However, when you ignore an alarm,
the alarm disappears from lists on the Monitor and Selected tabs and from the Navigation pane’s Alarm
column, if you have activated the column in the Navigation Options box. However, the alarm still
appears on the Logged tab and the Ignored field for that alarm changes from No to Yes.
To ignore an alarm on one of the Diagnostics dialog box’s tabs, select an alarm record (a row in the
alarm list), and then either press F4 or right-click and then select Ignore from the resulting shortcut
menu.
You could instead right-click in a cell of an alarm record, and then select Ignore from the resulting
shortcut menu.
To select an alarm to be ignored, see Using Alarm Tables (on page 264).
Ignoring All Alarms
To ignore all outstanding alarms, right-click anywhere in the Diagnostics dialog box, and then click
Ignore All from the resulting shortcut menu.
This clears all alarms from the Diagnostics dialog box’s Monitor or Selected tab, as well as from the
Navigation pane’s alarm column if the column has been activated in the Navigation Options box.
Additionally, the Ignore field for all outstanding alarms in the Logged tab changes from "No" to "Yes."
Refreshing the Alarm Lists

Use this procedure only if you have ignored alarms and want to review the outstanding alarms for all
devices on the CCS network. If the network has many CCS devices, the list of all outstanding alarms may
take several minutes to regenerate.
To refresh or regenerate the lists of alarms shown on each page of the Diagnostics dialog box, right-click
anywhere inside the Diagnostics dialog box, and then click Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Clearing Alarms
Because SNMP traps do not generically support "alarm clearing", you can limit the number of traps sent.
See Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps (on page 88) for more information.
You can clear selected alarms on the Logged and Offline tabs and remove them from the tabs. To clear a
record, right-click inside an alarm record, and then select Clear from the resulting shortcut menu.
You can clear all alarms on the Logged and Offline tabs and remove them from these tabs. To clear all
records, right-click inside an alarm record, and then select Clear All from the resulting shortcut menu.
Saving Alarms to a File

You can save the current alarm list to either a specified offline alarm log or the default alarm log.
Saving Alarms to a Specified Offline Alarm Log
You can save a snapshot of the current alarm lists in the Diagnostics dialog box to a Microsoft Access
database file for archival purposes.
To save an alarm list to a specific offline alarm database file, instead of the default file for the tab,
1. Right-click in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.
2. Click Save Alarms to from the resulting shortcut menu.
3. When a Save As box appears, either accept the default filename or select another. Then click Save.
If a file with that name already exists, an alert box appears, asking you to confirm that you want to
replace the contents of the database.
4. Click OK to replace the current content.
Saving Alarms to the Default Alarm Log
To save a snapshot of the current alarm list to the default alarm log file, complete these steps:
1. Right-click an alarm item in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.
2. Click Save Alarms from the resulting shortcut menu.
If you have not yet established the name of the default alarm log file, a Save As box appears.
3. Either accept the default file name or select another. Then click Save.
If there is another file by that name, an alert box appears, asking you to confirm that you want to
replace the current content of the database.
4. Click OK to replace the content.
Loading an Archived Alarm Log into the Offline Tab

You can view current or previous alarm files by loading them into the Diagnostic dialog box’s Offline tab.
By default, these files reside in the subfolders at this location:
c:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\Users
To load a previously saved alarm log file into the Offline tab, complete these steps:
1. Right-click anywhere inside the Diagnostics dialog box’s Offline tab.
This shows the shortcut menu for the Offline tab.
2. Point to Load Alarms on the shortcut menu and click Load....
This shows the Open box, showing the list of alarm logs that you have saved to files. These files are
all in Microsoft Access database (*.mdb) file format.
3. Select the file name of the alarm log you want to open and click Open.
The file shows on the Offline tab.
If you have set the Offline tab of the Diagnostics Options box to show only a partial alarm list, you can
move forward and backward in the list by using the Previous and Next commands in the diagnostics
shortcut menu.
To show the next set of alarms in the entire list on the Offline tab, right-click inside the page to show the
shortcut menu for the Offline tab. Point to Load Alarms on the shortcut menu, and then click Next.
To show the previous set of alarms in the entire list on the Offline tab, right-click inside the page to
show the shortcut menu. Point to Load Alarms on the menu, and click Previous.
Setting Diagnostics Properties for an Alarm Message

You can view and edit the properties associated with an alarm in the Diagnostics Properties box. For
example, you can add additional user information for an alarm stored in the alarm log.
To set or review diagnostic properties of an alarm message, complete these steps:

1. Right-click the alarm in an alarm list in the Diagnostics dialog box.
This shows the diagnostics shortcut menu.

2. Click Properties.
This shows the Diagnostics Properties box. You can only modify the User Info and Ignored fields.
3. To change the User Info box, select the box and then type in the new information.
4. Select the Ignored check box to ignore an alarm.
5. Click Close.
Setting Diagnostics Options

See Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps (on page 88) to determine how many SNMP alarms can
appear in the Diagnostics dialog box.
You can set alarm acknowledgement, logging, filtering, and reporting options in the Diagnostics Options
box.
To set diagnostics options, complete these steps:

1. Click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or right-click in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click
Options....
The Diagnostics Options box has six tabs—General, Filter, E-Mail Forwarding Service, Log, and
Offline—show at the top of the box.
See the following topics to complete these six tabs:
 Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box (on page 274)
 Setting Alarm Filtering Options (on page 275)
 Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms (on page 277)
 Setting Alarm Log Options (on page 278)
 Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs (on page 280)
2. After completing these six tabs, click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog Box

To set options on the General tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
1. If the Diagnostics Options box is closed, then click Diagnostics on the Options menu, or right-click
in the Diagnostics dialog box and then click Options....
2. Select the General tab if other tabs are hiding the options on the General page.
The General tab of the Diagnostics dialog box contains four options, each with a check box. The
options and their functions are as follows:
Table 52: General Tab Options and Their Functions

Option Function
Show Diagnostics dialog box on Makes the Diagnostics dialog box visible when an alarm occurs
top when an alarm occurs
Option Function
Play sound when an alarm Generates an audible signal when an alarm occurs.
is received There are two options:
• Use Default sound—The default sound has no loop and plays for
warning, critical, and informational alarms.
• Use Custom sound—Click Browse to choose a WAV or MP3 audio
file. You can select Loop, and you can assign the type of alarms that
trigger the sound.
The alarm sound can be shut off by disabling, ignoring, or filtering the
alarm. It shuts off by itself if the alarm condition is resolved.
Save column ordering Saves the changes to the order of columns in Diagnostics dialog box
beyond one software session
Turn off screen saver when Enables the software to turn off a screen saver when an alarm occurs,
an alarm is received so that an alarm notification message shows on the screen
3. Select the check box of each option you want to enable, and clear the check box of each option you
want to disable.
4. Select another tab to continue setting Diagnostics Options, or click OK to close the Diagnostics
Options box.
Setting Alarm Filtering Options

To set the options on the Filter tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
2. Select the Filter tab.
The alarm filtering capabilities enable you to turn off the listing of alarms in the Diagnostics dialog
box for less-critical devices. Filtered alarms do not show on any tabs in the Diagnostics dialog box,
but are stored in the Alarms log database. (See Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs (on
page 280) to view the database.)
3. The Show alarms for section lists four error types—Critical, Warning, Information, and
Acknowledged—for which you can either enable or disable alarm filtering.
Select the check box of each error type for which you want to enable alarm filtering, and clear the
check box of each type of error for which you want to disable filtering.
4. In the Ignore alarms during the following time periods section, you can create ranges of time in
which alarms are ignored.
a. To add a new time period for Magellan CCS Navigator to ignore alarms, click Add and then type
a Filtering start time and Filtering end time into the resulting Add Alarm Filtering Time Period
box.
b. To modify a time period, select the time period in the Ignore alarms during the following time
periods box and then click Modify. Then type new times into the Alarm Filtering Time Period
box.
c. To delete a time period from the list, select the time period and then click Delete.
d. To delete all time periods from the list, click Delete All.
5. In the Ignore Alarms from Selected Devices section, select the check box of each network resource
for which you want to enable alarm filtering, and then clear the check box of each resource
for which you want to disable filtering.
Options box.
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms

The network must have an enabled e-mail messaging service for the E-mail Forwarding Service to work.
If the network does not have e-mail support, then no e-mails will reach their destinations.
To set the options on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these
steps:
2. Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
You can enable or disable the e-mail notification, add or remove e-mail recipients, and set the
severity levels for the generation of alarms on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
3. Select the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to enable the CCS application to send e-mail
notifications of resource errors.
4. In the Send an E-mail for section, select the check box beside each error type for which you want
to receive e-mail notification. Clear the check box beside each error type for which you do not want
e-mail notification.
The five error types are Critical, Warning, Information, Acknowledged, and Error Level Change.
5. In the E-mail Send Options section, click the arrow and select the method in which you want to send
the e-mail.
Choose from MAPI (your Outlook mail profile settings) or SMTP (configured server).
Depending on the e-mail sending method chosen in step 5, either the MAPI Mail Properties or
SMTP Properties dialog box opens.
7. To configure the settings in the MAPI Mail Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a. Click the arrow from the Profile Name box, and then select a profile name from the list.
b. If the required name is not in the list, click Add to add a new profile name to the list.
The Add Profile Name box opens.
c. Type a sender profile name in the Add Profile Name box, and then click OK.
8. To configure the settings in the SMTP Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a. Specify the SMTP server name, port number, and reply e-mail addresses in the corresponding
fields.
b. If your SMTP server requires authentication in order to send external e-mail, complete the
Authentication section of this dialog box.
9. In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, click Add... to show the Add Recipient box.
10. Type the e-mail address of a proposed error notification recipient in the box, and then click OK.
This closes the Add Recipient box and lists the new e-mail recipient in the E-mail Addresses of
Recipients box.
11. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the e-mail addresses of other proposed recipients of notification e-
mails.
Options box.
Setting Alarm Log Options

Alarms log to a Microsoft Access database file, created according to setting on the Log tab of the
Diagnostic Options box.
2. Select the Log tab.
On the Log tab, you can set options for saving alarms to an alarm log, set limits for the alarm log’s
size and longevity, and create a policy for deleting old alarm logs.
3. Select the Save alarms to database check box to enable the alarm log. Clear the check box to disable
the log.
4. To determine how often a new alarm database is created, complete the Create a new alarm log
when database section:
a. In the Is Larger Than box, leave the default value, or select the default number and type in
another number, or click the arrows to increase or decrease the number.
The default maximum size of the alarm log file is 1 megabyte.
b. In the Or Is Older Than box, leave the default value or select the number and type in a different
value.
c. In the units of time box, leave the default selection or click the arrow and select from the list:
days, hours, weeks, months, or years.
Magellan CCS Navigator creates a new alarm database at the specified interval, and renames
previous copies for archival purposes.
5. If you want to delete logs that are older than a particular age, in the Log Policy section, complete
these steps:
a. Select the check box to implement a log deletion policy.
b. Type an integer value into the next box.
c. Click the arrow in the third box and select a unit of time: days, hours, weeks, months, or years.
If you do not check in this section, logs will be kept indefinitely, or until they are manually deleted.
6. In the Logged Tab Options section, complete one of these actions:
 To list all alarms on the Logged tab, select the Display all alarms on Logged tab check box.
 To set a maximum number of alarms to list on the Logged tab, clear the Display all alarms on
Logged tab check box. Then either accept the default maximum number of alarms to list, or
select the default and then type in another maximum number. This determines the number of
alarms that will show at once on the Logged tab, up to a maximum of 1,000 alarms. When the
limit you set is reached, the content of the Log tab clears.
Options box.
Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm Logs

To set the options on the Offline tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these steps:
2. Select the Offline tab to determine how an alarm log loads into the Diagnostics dialog box’s Offline
tab for viewing offline.
You can either view all alarms or set a maximum number of alarms to view. If you have set a
Maximum number of alarms to load, you must use the Load > Previous and Load > Next commands
in the dialog box’s shortcut menu to move forward and backward in the alarms list.
3. Complete one of these actions:
 To load all alarms at once, select the All alarms in database check box.
OR
 To set a maximum number of alarms to load at once, clear the All alarms in database check box,
and then type a number in the Maximum number of alarms to load box.
The default maximum number of alarms to load is 100, but you can select the number and type in a
different one.
Options box.
Chapter 14
CCS Device Control

When Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode (the indicator in the bottom right of the screen is
green and says Control) and you double-click an item in the Navigation pane, a Control dialog box opens
for that device.
Only an Administrator user can set control and configuration access rights to specific CCS devices. Group
membership determines an individual user’s control access to individual devices.
The Control dialog box contains either generic or product-specific graphical representations of each
device parameter.
In Control mode, you can control the parameters of devices whose resource icons appear in the
Network and Discovery folders. These are the devices to which you have Control access. For
information on assigning access permissions to devices, see Managing User Accounts (on page 51).
The Control tool also offers simple HTTP control for devices that have a Web server, such as the DPS-575
Multifunction Analog/Digital AV Synchronizer. You can view the device’s Web page in a Web browser
dialog box on the application desktop. See Device Control through HTTP (on page 317).
Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes

There are no controls for an X75-RCP in this release of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To show/open a Control dialog box for a specific CCS device, choose one of these three options:
• Double-click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation pane; or if the
device is a module, double-click the slot of the frame in which the module resides.
• Right-click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation pane and then
select Control from the resulting navigation shortcut menu.
• Click the CCS device’s resource icon in the Navigation or Graphical Navigation pane and then point to
Tools on the menu bar, and then click Control..
• In a Graphical Navigation page, set an action (the effect component of a rule) to open a Control
dialog box. See Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action (on page 443) for more information.
Control dialog boxes are available depending on the licenses available in the system. For example, if you
have ISCP, you will not have the Control dialog box that controls a NEO frame.
All parameter fields on a Control dialog box are unavailable—even LED colors—until the Control tool has
fully established a connection with the device. If the PC loses the connection with the CCS device, the
parameters are unavailable and appear dimmed in the Control dialog box.
When the status bar reads "Access Disabled" or "Ready" (no remote control), all parameters on the
Control dialog box show their current value but you cannot modify them.
Specific parameters in a Control dialog box may also become read-only when the status bar reads
"Limited Access," or when the setting of one parameter causes the disabling of another.
When you click on a Selenio module or frame to in either Build or Control mode, this launches the HTTP
application for the Selenio frame. See your Selenio documentation for more information on the control
panel.
The name of each open Control, Configuration and Signal Monitor dialog box appear on a list at the
bottom of the Window menu.
To show a hidden, but open, Control dialog box, click on the Window menu on the menu bar, and then
click the name of the hidden dialog box. The Window menu lists the CCS device’s name and a Control
icon appears to the left of the name. If you are using Workbook mode, select the tab that includes both
the CCS device’s name and a Control icon. (The same device may have open Configuration or
Signal Monitor dialog boxes listed on the Window menu.)
To close a CCS device’s Control dialog box, choose one of these three methods:
• Click Close in the upper right corner of the dialog box
• Select the Control dialog box and then click Close on the Window menu
• Right click in the Control dialog box and select Close from the menu that appears
Configuring Custom Control Views

When you double-click on a device in the Navigation pane in Control mode, by default Magellan CCS
Navigator opens a Control dialog box. To configure Magellan CCS Navigator to open a Navigator page
instead, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on a device, and then select Properties from the context menu that appears.
3. From the Control dialog box drop-down box, choose Custom.

4. Click Browse.
5. Click a row in the Select Page table, and then click Open.
The Navigation Properties dialog box updates to indicate the name of the page that opens when you
click on this device in Control mode, in the Navigation pane and on icons associated with this device in
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes

Depending on your system configuration, you may not have access to all devices.
The Control tool provides both specific and generic control dialog boxes. The design of a specific Control
dialog box reflects the control parameters found on the individual CCS device it controls; however, a
generic Control dialog box can control any type of CCS device.
The Control tool offers both a specific and a generic Control dialog box for most CCS devices, but some
devices have only generic Control dialog boxes. The generic interface obtains information from the CCS
device on the fly, and then organizes and presents the device’s control parameters into a number
of groups. See the following topics for more information:
• Navigating the Generic Control Tab (on page 285)
• Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes (on page 289)
A specific Control dialog box shows automatically if it exists. If it doesn’t, the generic Control dialog box
appears.
If a device has both types of Control dialog boxes, you may want to switch back and forth between
them, since they can offer different ways of organizing and viewing a device’s control parameters.
Checking the Active Window Type

To find out what types of Control dialog boxes a device has and which type is active, right-click inside the
device’s Control dialog box to show a control shortcut menu.
Two options near the top of the menu are Specific Control and Generic Control. A check mark appears
to the left of the active window type.
If Specific Control is unavailable on the control shortcut menu, then the device does not have a specific
Control dialog box. You must control the device with a generic Control dialog box.
To activate a CCS device’s specific Control dialog box, right-click inside the device’s generic Control
dialog box and then select Specific Control from the resulting control shortcut menu.
To activate a CCS device’s generic Control dialog box, right-click inside the device’s specific Control
dialog box and then select Generic Control from the resulting control shortcut menu.
Showing a Container Device’s Control Dialog Boxes

To open the Control dialog boxes for a container resource and of all its children, right-click the resource
icon, and then select Control Contents from the resulting shortcut menu. Control dialog boxes have
Control and Alarm tabs or pages.
The Control tabs allows you to browse and set parameters for the CCS device. In the top right corner of
some devices you can view a streaming thumbnail which displays the current output for the CCS device.
See Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box (on page 286) for more information.
The Alarms tabs allow you to set alarm preferences for the alarms on the CCS device. For more
information, see Setting Alarms (on page 288).
The X75 Control dialog box also includes a third tab. The Video Streaming tab contains a streaming
thumbnail and the URL for the streaming output. For more information, see Streaming in a Control
Dialog Box (on page 303).
Navigating the Generic Control Tab

When you select the Control tab, it will always open to the top level of the parameter list. As you
browse the parameter pages, information at the top of the screen updates to allow you to see the path
you have travelled and the current page of parameters.
Figure 33: X75 Control tools
To view a list of parameters you have recently navigated to, right click in Control mode and choose
Parameter Info from the shortcut menu. To sort the list, click on any of the column headers.
See your CCS device’s installation and operation manual for a complete explanation of its parameters. A
parameter list is available from our website.
The generic Control tab contains two methods to search for any parameter that is available on the unit.
• Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box (on page 286)
• Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View (on page 287)
Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Control Dialog Box

By default, the Controls tab organizes parameters into folders.
Figure 34: X75 Control Tab
If a particular folder level contains more items than can be viewed in the width of the Control panel, a
down arrow appears at the right edge of the screen. To see the rest of the menu items, you have two
options: Make the panel wider, or click the down arrow to open a menu that shows the hidden items.
When you click on a folder, the row of folders refreshes to display the sub-folders in that folder, at the
same time that the path to the current parameter page updates, and the parameters at that level in the
folder structure appear. If there are more parameters than can fit in the page, a scroll bar will appear at
the right edge of the panel. Use that to view the other parameters.
Ascending Levels in the Controls Tab

The buttons in the top left corner of the Controls tab allow you to navigate through the parameter list.
You can also use the Home and Up one level buttons to navigate upward in the Controls tab’s tree view.
Click Home to go back to the top level, or right click in the toolbar and select Navigate Home.
Click Up one level to go one step higher in the parameter hierarchy, or right click in the toolbar and
select Navigate Up.
Click in the path to go to that level in the parameter list.
Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View

The tree view offers another way to navigate through the devices’s parameters in the Control tab.
To open a tree view on the Control tab, right click in the navigation area near the top and select Tree
View from the shortcut menu.
A nested list of all the controls appears on the left side of the screen. The parameters available at the
currently selected level of the list appear to the right of this list, and across the top the currently
selected level, and the path to that level, continue to be displayed.
A plus symbol (+) to the left of an item in this list indicates that there is another layer of parameters
below this one, but the contents are currently hidden. To show the contents of a closed level, click the
plus (+) symbol to the left of that level.
A minus (-) symbol to the left of an item in this list indicates that the level has contents, or children, and
is showing its contents. To hide the contents of that level, click the minus symbol (-) to the left of it.
The absence of either a plus (+) or minus (-) symbol to the left of a level indicates that the level has no
contents. If you click on a level with no plus or minus symbol in the tree view, you should always see
parameters or controls in the right section of the Control dialog box.
When an upper level of the Tree View is expanded, there may be more open contents in the Tree View
than can be displayed in the dialog box. In this case, the tree view also has scroll bars at the right bottom
of the dialog box that allow you to navigate up and down the list of parameters.
Setting Alarms
The alarm feature operates only in Control mode, when the Control tool is communicating with the
CCS device.
To adjust the settings of the available alarms for a CCS device, complete these steps:
1. Double-click the resource icon for the CCS device in the Navigation pane to open the device’s
Control dialog box.
2. Select the Alarm tab to show the list of alarms.
Each alarm represents a different alarm condition.

To display a list of alarms you have recently navigated to, when in Control mode, right click and
choose Alarm Info from the shortcut menu. To sort the list, you can click on any of the column
headers.
3. If you know the page of the alarm you are looking for, click the page number below the Alarm tab’s
banner at the top of the dialog box to go to that page. Or, use the four buttons to the left of these
numbers to navigate to the first page, the previous page, the next page or the last page.
To the right of each alarm name is a Status column. The colors in this column indicate the alarm’s
current status:
Table 53: Alarm Status Colors

Alarm Color Meaning
Red Major alarm
Yellow Minor alarm
Black Not active
The alarm status is read-only.
Not all Alarm Options are available on all devices.
4. To adjust the settings for an alarm, click the field you want to adjust.
Table 54: Alarm Settings

Alarm Option Effect
Enable/Disable Determines whether the alarm will trigger or not; if the label shows the word
"Enabled," an alarm condition will generate an alarm; but if the label shows
"Disabled," an alarm condition will not generate an alarm
Alarm priority Determines the alarm priority that will be reported when this alarm condition is
triggered
Trigger (s) Determines how quickly the alarm will trigger (in seconds); if the alarm level is
reached for less time than the Trigger duration, then the alarm will not trigger
Clear (s) Determines how long the alarm condition has to be off (in seconds) in order for the
alarm to clear
Ack When checked, allows other users on the network to see that you have
acknowledged the alarm
You will use the Navigation and Diagnostics tools in using alarms. For information on using alarm tools,
please see Network Event Diagnostics (on page 263) and Network View Construction (on page 118).
Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes

Older CCS devices use a slightly different Control dialog box. It still has a Control page and an Alarms
page.
The Control tab lists all the controllable parameters for a device. This tab has two parts:
• a parameter-classification pane on the left
• a parameter-control pane on the right
When you select an item in the parameter-classification pane, the second pane shows the parameters
grouped under the selected item.
The Alarms tab shows all the parameters for which the device supports alarm monitoring.
Creating Hierarchical Domains

The shortcut menu for the parameter-classification pane enables you to create hierarchical domains
from the existing device domains. Right-click to show the shortcut menu, which has options to add,
modify, and delete user-defined domains.
With this feature, you can create up to four levels of hierarchical domains.
You can modify the user-defined domains and delete them from the parameter-classification pane as
needed.
Checking a Device’s Control Status

Magellan CCS Navigator can show individual Control dialog boxes for each device assigned to you for
monitoring. You can determine the control status of each device and its network connection by reading
the message in the Control dialog box's status bar. The status bar, which appears in the bottom left
corner of the Control dialog box, changes color when an alarm condition occurs.
Table 55: Status Messages in the Control Dialog Box Status Bar
Message Meaning
Loading control The Control tool is trying to establish a connection with the selected CCS device.
Control unavailable No control is available for the CCS device.
Not ready, reading The Control tool has connected to a CCS device and is reading its control
settings. However, the device is not yet ready for remote control.
Ready The CCS device is ready to receive control commands.
Connected A connection to the CCS device has been established.
Not ready, retrying The connection to the device has been lost. This occurs when the physical
connection to the network is broken, or when a device loses power. The Control
tool automatically attempts to reconnect with the CCS device.
Operation failed A control operation of a CCS device has failed.
Message Meaning
Ready (No remote The CCS device is ready, but can only be controlled locally from the module edge.
control) However, the Control tool shows the current parameter values of the CCS
device.
Using the Control Shortcut Menu

If you right-click a Control dialog box, a control shortcut menu appears. Some shortcut menu options are
only available in Control mode. Below is a table describing the control shortcut menu options, with
references to related topics:
Not all commands will always be available. Depending on the current selection, some commands might
be disabled. Specifically, the Specific Control, Generic Control, Load Preset, Copy Preset, Save Preset
and Delete Preset commands may not be available.
Control Shortcut Menu
Find Device Finds a device’s resource icon in the Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a
Navigation pane Resource Icon (on page 293)
Specific Control Activates a specific CCS device Control Opening and Closing Control Dialog
dialog box Boxes (on page 282)
Generic Control Activates a generic CCS device Control Using Older Generic Control Dialog
dialog box Boxes (on page 289)
Load Preset... Loads a preset to a CCS device Loading Presets in the Navigation
Pane (on page 299)
Copy Preset... Copies a preset to a designated preset Copying Presets in the Navigation
folder Pane (on page 300)
Save Preset... Saves a preset for a CCS device Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane
(on page 298)
Delete Preset... Deletes a preset from the Preset folder Deleting Presets in the Navigation
Pane (on page 301)
Undo Undoes the last action
Redo Redoes the last action
Refresh Refreshes the connection status for a CCS Refreshing the Connection Status of a
device CCS Device (on page 293)
Default Size Returns a Control dialog box to its default
size
Tree View Available on some devices when Generic
Control is available. Selecting Tree View will
show or hide the Tree View on the left side
of the Generic Control dialog box.
Options... Shows the Control Options box Setting Control Options (on page 294)

Help Shows Help for the Control tool Getting Help with the Control Tool
(on page 293)
User Manual Shows the user manual for a CCS device Showing the User Manual for a CCS-
Enabled Device (on page 294)
Close Closes the Control dialog box Closing a Control Dialog Box
Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a Resource Icon

If you discover an alarm for a CCS device in one of the Control dialog boxes or in an alarm list in the
Diagnostics dialog box, you must find the physical location of the malfunctioning CCS device
in the Navigation pane so that someone can troubleshoot the problem. The location of the CCS device
icon in the Navigation pane indicates where the CCS device resides on the network.
To use a device Control dialog box to find the device’s resource icon in the Navigation pane, complete
these steps:
1. Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box to show the device control shortcut menu.
2. Click Find Device.
The Navigation tool will highlight the resource icon for the device in the Navigation pane. If necessary,
the Navigation pane scrolls up or down to show the location of the device icon in the Navigation tree.
Refreshing the Connection Status of a CCS Device

To update the connection status of a CCS device, follow this procedure:
1. Right-click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box.
2. Select Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Under normal conditions, this procedure is unnecessary. However, if you reboot a device connected to
several PCs running Magellan CCS Navigator, the alarm traffic hitting the network may cause an alarm
query request to time out and fail. While the query does not automatically retry, an "Alarm query failed"
message posts to the Diagnostics dialog box.
Clearing an ‘Alarm Query Failed’ Message

To clear an "Alarm query failed" message, right-click inside the Diagnostics dialog box, and then select
Refresh from the resulting shortcut menu.
Getting Help with the Control Tool

To get help for the Control tool, right-click inside a Control dialog box and select Help from the resulting
shortcut menu; or click inside the Control dialog box, and then press F1 on the keyboard.
Showing the User Manual for a CCS-Enabled Device

To show an Acrobat PDF file of the user manual for a CCS-enabled device, do one of the following:
• Right-click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box, and then select User Manual from the resulting
shortcut menu
OR
• Click inside the CCS device’s Control dialog box, and then press F1 on the PC keyboard
Adobe Acrobat Reader will open and show the user manual for the selected CCS device on the
computer screen. You can search the user manual and print information from it. To close the PDF
file, click the Close button in the upper right corner of the file.
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device

Magellan CCS Navigator shows individual Control dialog boxes for each CCS device you are monitoring.
By default, all user groups can control the parameters of a CCS device. However, the Administrator user
may restrict access rights to certain devices or to some parameters of a device. If you cannot control a
parameter, it be unavailable for changes on the Control dialog box.
You can determine the access rights of each CCS device by reading the access message in the far right
cell of the Control dialog box’s status bar. The status bar shows in the bottom left corner of the
Control dialog box.
Below is a list of access messages that appear in the Control dialog box status bar and what they mean:
Table 56: Control Access Rights

Access Right Meaning
Access Enabled You can control all parameters of the CCS device.
Access Disabled You cannot control any parameter of the CCS device, but you can still view the value
of the parameter.
Limited Access You can control only some parameters of the CCS device, but you can still view the
current value of other parameters that have their access disabled.
When showing Access Disabled and Limited Access, the background color of the far
right cell is yellow. Otherwise, it is grey.
Setting Control Options

Control options apply universally to all devices, not to individual devices.
To access Control dialog box options, point to Options on the menu bar and click Control; or right-click
inside an open Control dialog box, and then click Options... on the resulting shortcut menu.
This shows the Control Options box.
Table 57: Control Dialog Box Options

Section Option Function
Tracking Dialog box contents change as you When you select a resource icon, if the device’s
Options select devices in the Navigation Control dialog box is open, it will move
(choose one) tool to the front of the dialog box tab order.
Note: The X75 streaming dialog box Otherwise, the content of the active Control
is not displayed when this option is dialog box shows control information
selected. for the selected device.
Dialog box contents do not change Selections in the Navigation pane will not affect
as you select NROs in the the contents of any device’s Control dialog box.
Navigation tool
Slider Options Device parameter changes as slider Provides real-time changes in the control value as
(choose one) is moved you move the slider
Device parameter changes as slider Sets the new control value after you release the
is released slider control
Section Option Function

Alarm Allow enabling or disabling of When a device such as a NEO module is in local
Enable/Disable alarms for devices in Local Active active state, Magellan CCS Navigator cannot
Options state remotely control the module. It can show the
module’s parameter values and receive alarms,
but controls in the control dialog box are dimmed
(and therefore unavailable for use).
This option enables you to indicate that you want
the controls allowing you to enable or disable
alarms to still be available.
Preset Options Allow undo/redo of Load Preset Applies to all Control dialog boxes that support
operation presets (including X75).
Window Maximum number of open Control By default, the maximum number of dialog boxes
Options dialog boxes to be open is 21; more may slow down your
system
HTTP Options Auto-refresh enabled When checked, any device Control dialog boxes
that show a Web page will automatically refresh.
The default auto-refresh rate is every five
seconds, but you can change the rate. Select the
default 5 in the Auto-refresh rate (seconds): box
and type in another number
Using Presets
Presets are not available for all devices. For example, you cannot create a preset for a CENTRIO System.
Some devices, such as QSEE6800+ modules, cannot be combined with other devices in a preset.
A preset is a set of predefined control settings. Presets can save common control settings for the devices
under your control, so that you can quickly reactivate these control settings as needed.
Since presets are a control element, you can only save, copy, load, or delete presets in Control mode.
You can create, load, and save a preset using shortcut menu commands associated with the Navigation
c or a target device’s Control dialog box.
• When you right click in a Control dialog box, you can load, save, or delete a preset for a single CCS
device.
• When you right click in the Navigation pane, you can create, load, save, copy, delete, or modify the
presets for any number of devices.
There are options for making presets load faster in the Navigation and Control Options dialog boxes.
See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147) and Setting Control Options (on page 294).
Careful naming of presets will help you avoid making errors in identifying the correct preset for the
correct device set. Give the preset a name that provides as much detail as possible to help you
distinguish it from other presets in the preset folder.
Presets are organized into folders. An entire folder (series of presets for individual devices) can be
loaded or saved at the same time.
Presets can be created by any user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client or Magellan CCS Navigator
Server. Presets are stored on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server only. If a preset is changed by a user on a
Magellan CCS Navigator Server or Client, all other users will receive notification that a network resource
has been updated. When they Reload (by clicking Reload from the toolbar, or by right clicking in the
Navigation pane and clicking Reload, or by selecting View > Reload from the main menu), the preset is
updated.
Working With Presets in a Control Dialog Box

When you right-click in a Control dialog box for a device, there are three preset options as described
below:
Saving a Preset
You cannot alter preset access settings when saving a preset. Access settings are set per user or user
group. See Logging In and Account Administration (on page 41) for more information.
To create a preset, you must save the device’s settings. To use a device’s Control shortcut menu to save
a preset, complete these steps:
1. Set the device’s control parameters in its Control dialog box.
2. Right-click inside the Control dialog box, and then click Save Preset... from the resulting shortcut
menu.
This shows the Save Preset box.
3. Type a name for the preset in the Name box, or select an existing name from the List of Presets box
to modify an existing preset.
4. Click OK.
The preset appears in the Preset sub-folder you selected or created.
Loading a Preset
You cannot undo or redo the loading of presets in the device Control dialog box unless you have
activated this feature in the Control Options box. By default, this feature is disabled so you can load
presets more quickly. See Setting Control Options (on page 294).
To use a device’s control shortcut menu to load a preset, complete these steps:
1. Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box, and then select Load Preset... from the shortcut
menu that appears
This shows the Load Preset box.
If there are no presets in the Load Preset box, that is because there are no presets for that specific
device.
2. Select the preset from the Load Preset box, and then click OK.
The preset will load to its target device or devices.
Deleting a Preset
To use a device’s Control shortcut menu to delete a preset, complete these steps:
1. Right-click inside the device’s Control dialog box and select Delete Preset... from the shortcut menu
that appears.
A Delete Preset box appears, listing the names of any existing presets for that device.
2. Select the preset you want to delete from the list of existing presets, and then click OK.
Working With Presets in the Navigation Pane

In the Navigation pane, you can work with groups of presets, which are stored in sub-folders. See the
following topics:
• Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane (on page 298)
• Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane (on page 299)
• Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane (on page 300)
• Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane (on page 301)
Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane

You cannot alter preset access settings when saving a preset. Access settings are set per user or user
group. See Logging In and Account Administration (on page 41) for more information.
When you create a preset in the Navigation pane, you can select multiple devices. Each individual device
will create a separate file in the preset’s parent folder. You can then simultaneously apply, or load, all
the presets in that folder, or you can apply an individual preset to a single device.
To save a preset using the Navigation shortcut menu, complete these steps:
1. In Control mode, set the control parameters for the device or devices you want to include in the
preset in their Control dialog boxes.
2. In the Navigation pane’s Network or Discovery folder, select the resource icons of the devices you
want to include in the preset.
To select more than one device, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting other devices.
3. Right-click inside the Navigation pane and select Presets.
In the resulting shortcut menu, one or both of the following options may be available:
 Save - If the device you have selected has parameters, or if you have selected one or more
devices
This option will save the parameters for the selected device(s) only.
 Save Contents - If the device(s) you have selected contain child devices that have parameters
This option will save the parameters for the parent device(s), if there any, and the parameters
for each child device.
4. Choose either Save or Save Contents.
The Save Presets dialog box opens.
5. Enter the name of a preset in the Preset Name field, or choose a preset from the List of Presets.
 If you select a preset name from the list of presets, then new items will appear in that preset’s
sub-folder.
If the folder contains a preset for a device already, you will be asked if you want to save over it.
This is how you modify a preset.
 If you type a new name, a new preset sub-folder now appears in the Preset folder. That folder
will contain an item for each selected device.
6. Click OK to save the preset.
Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane

When you load a preset, this applies the control settings contained in that preset to the device(s).
On most platforms, when you load a preset, this can potentially change the values of all parameters,
including parameters your user group does not have permission to write to.
To use a navigation shortcut menu to load one or more presets, complete these steps:
1. Select the presets that you want to load from the Navigation pane’s Preset folder.
To select more than one preset, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting presets, and/or
select a sub-folder that contains more than one preset.
2. Right-click inside the Navigation pane, and then select Presets > Load from the resulting shortcut
menu.
The selected presets load to their target devices.
The Navigation tool will not undo or redo the loading of presets unless you have activated this feature in
the Navigation Options box. By default, this feature is disabled so the Navigation tool can load presets
more quickly. See Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load (on page 341).
Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane

Presets can be copied to like devices using the Navigation shortcut menu. To copy a preset, complete
these steps:
1. Right-click a preset (this option is not available for preset sub-folders) and select Copy to....
the Copy Preset dialog box opens.
Only devices that are similar to the device for which the preset was made will be listed.
2. In the Copy column, place a check beside the device.
3. Determine the sub-folder the preset will be added to.
 If you leave the Destination Preset Folder name at its default, the copied preset will be saved in
the same sub-folder as the preset it is a copy of.
 If you type the name of another preset sub-folder, the preset will be added to that sub-folder.
 If you type the name of a new sub-folder, this sub-folder will be created.
4. Click OK.
The new preset will appear in the designated preset sub-folder.

Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane

From the Navigation pane, you can delete one or more presets or preset sub-folders. To delete presets
or preset sub-folders, complete these steps:
1. Select the presets or preset sub-folders to delete from the Preset folder.
To select more than one object, hold down the SHIFT or CTRL key while selecting items.
2. Right-click inside the Navigation pane and select Presets > Delete from the shortcut menu that
appears.
3. Click Yes to confirm the preset deletion.
Chapter 15
Streaming in Control Windows

Magellan CCS Navigator control windows can display two types of video streaming: thumbnails and
MPEG-4.
Thumbnails are small images that refresh at a low rate (maximum of two frames a second) and at a low
resolution. The following hardware options can provide Magellan CCS Navigator with streaming video
thumbnails:
• A QSEE6800+ module shows a page of thumbnails on its Control dialog box, with one thumbnail for
each input on the module (to a maximum of eight per module). Each input to the QSEE6800+ module
has its own Control dialog box with a thumbnail (for that input) on it. These thumbnails display alarms
(if present), a VU meter, and buttons to display a waveform or vectorscope. See QSEE6800+ Control
Dialog Boxes (on page 303) for more information.
• A FR6802+QXF frame equipped with a 6800+ETH resource module shows a thumbnail page in its
Control dialog box. A thumbnail is displayed for each thumbnail-capable module installed in that
frame. In addition, those modules display a thumbnail on a Video Streaming tab on their own Control
dialog box. See Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames (on page 307) for more information.
Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Some modules may require a firmware
update in order to display thumbnails.
• An X75 equipped with an X75OPT-STR option shows a thumbnail on its Control dialog box. For more
information, see Viewing an X75 Streaming Source (on page 310).
• Modules in a SELENIO frame
MPEG-4 streaming is higher in quality, and uses more system resources. MPEG-4 streaming is available
on an X75 equipped with an X75OPT-STR module, and on QSEE6800+ modules with the QSEE6800+HS
option. Magellan CCS Navigator can display one MPEG-4 stream per X75 or QSEE6800+HS module, to a
maximum of four MPEG-4 streams. An X75 or QSEE6800+HS module can show MPEG-4 video on its
Control dialog box, in a standalone dialog box on your desktop, or as part of a Graphical Navigation
panel (if you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license). See Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page (on page
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in QSEE6800+

For assistance with a license key, or to purchase a license key, please contact your sales representative.
To enter a license key to activate MPEG-4 streaming, your CCS Software must be in Control mode.
Follow these steps:
1. Select the QSEE6800+ module in the Navigation pane, right click and select Control to open the
module’s Control dialog box.
2. If it is not already selected, click on the Streaming tab.
3. Type your license key in the Key field.
If your license key is valid, then the Options field will display High-End Streaming.
Multicasting
QSEE6800+ modules use multicasting to stream thumbnails and/or MPEG4 video simultaneously to
multiple devices. Using multicasting means that a QSEE6800+ module uses the same amount of
bandwidth regardless of the number of clients it transmits data to, rather than using bandwidth
proportionally to a module’s number of clients, as in point-to-point communication.
If you have multiple QSEE6800+ modules, you must ensure that each module has a unique Multicast IP
address. This is done using the Multicast IP parameter on the module’s Control dialog box.
Any IP address from 224.0.1.0 to 239.255.255.255 is treated as a valid multicast address input.
The Multicast TTL (Time-to-live) parameter determines how many network switches can exist between
your device (in this case a QSEE6800+ module) and your client. Normally you should leave this setting at
its default.
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box

You can stream both thumbnails and MPEG-4 video in an X75 (with the X75OPT-STR option) or
QSEE6800+ Control or Input Control dialog box.
For more information, see the following topics:

• QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes (on page 303)
• Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames (on page 307)
• Viewing an X75 Streaming Source (on page 310)
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes

If your QSEE6800+ module has firmware 2.0 or higher, you can discover it using point-to-point streaming
(i.e., when it is on a different subnet) and still stream video from the module. The module can have up
to six point-to-point connections.
When you discover a QSEE6800+ module, it will appear as a child resource of the frame in which it is
installed. The QSEE6800+ module will also have child resources, one for each input to the QSEE6800+
module.
Figure 35: QSEE6800+ Module In Navigation Pane
When you are in Control mode, you can open a Control dialog box for a QSEE6800+ module to view the
thumbnails for all inputs to that module and adjust parameters that will affect the output of the card as
a whole. See Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box (on page 304) for more information
You can also open a Control dialog box for each input to the module (by clicking on the input in the
Navigation pane). This dialog box shows a thumbnail for the input only, parameters for this input, and a
wide array of alarm options for this input. See Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box (on page
306) for more information, and see your QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation Manual for more
information on QSEE6800+ alarms and inputs.
For general information on Control dialog boxes, see Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes
(on page 284).
Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box

When you reboot the module, the input stream on this dialog box will always revert to Input 1.
The QSEE6800+ module has a Specific Control dialog box, which provides access to parameters via its
Network and Stream tabs (where you can also view MPEG-4 video, if enabled).
The QSEE6800+ specific Control dialog box also contains a Display tab. This tab displays thumbnails for
all the inputs into the module.
If an input is not connected, the thumbnail or MPEG-4 stream dialog box will indicate this status.
Each thumbnail has a variety of controls:
If you click Vector Display or Waveform Display, the button turns white to indicate that it is currently
selected. Click the same button again to display the thumbnail again. Vector and waveform displays are
only available on thumbnail images, not on an MPEG-4 image.
To determine the line that is analyzed by the waveform or vectorscope, set the Line Number parameter
in the subdevice’s Control dialog box.
Audio Monitoring
When opening QSEE6800+ Control dialog boxes while listening to audio, the sound may drop out
momentarily.
When monitoring MPEG-4 streaming video, you can turn on the audio monitoring by clicking the
speaker icon to the lower right of the MPEG-4 stream.
When audio is active, you can turn it off by clicking the same button.
Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box

To open a Control dialog box for an input to a QSEE6800+ module, double click on an input in the
Navigation pane.
The controls on this screen affect the individual input only. They do not affect the rest of the
functionality for the module that is providing the input. See the QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation
Manual for a complete description of the parameters and alarms.
Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames

Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Check our website to determine if your
module can be thumbnails-enabled.
If a FR6802+QXF frame contains a 6800+ETH module, then that frame can stream thumbnails for every
other module in the frame. Thumbnails can appear in the following places:
• On the 6800+ETH module’s Control dialog box (see 6800+ETH Control Dialog Box Streaming Tab (on
page 307))
• On an individual module’s Video Streaming tab (see Using the Video Streaming Tab on a Control
Dialog Box (on page 309))
• On a Graphical Navigation panel (see Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Pane (on page 310))
6800+ETH Control Dialog Box Streaming Tab

If a FR6802+QXF frame contains a 6800+ETH module, then that frame can stream thumbnails for other
modules in the frame. Not all 6800+ modules are capable of displaying thumbnails. Some modules may
require a firmware update in order to display thumbnails. Check our Website at
www.imaginecommunications.com to determine if your module is thumbnail-enabled.
The 6800+ETH’s Control dialog box contains a Video Streaming tab. This tab contains thumbnails for all
slots in the frame, for a maximum of 20 thumbnails.
If the module in a particular slot does not support streaming, that slot’s thumbnail will contain a "Not
Supported" message.
If the module in a slot provides streaming, an active thumbnail will be displayed. Thumbnails update at a
rate set through the Rate parameter on the 6800+ETH module.
If a module uses two slots, then the thumbnail would appear to belong to the first slot only, and the
second thumbnail will display a box that contains the text Empty Slot.
If a module is present, supports streaming but is not sending a signal, then the thumbnail for that slot
will contain the text No Data Available.
If a module is present but does not support streaming, the space for that module will contain the text
Not supported.
If a slot is empty, the thumbnail for that position in the frame will contain the text Empty Slot.
If no connection is established between the 6800+ETH module and the application (for example, if it is
temporarily disconnected from the network), then all thumbnails will be gray.
Using the Video Streaming Tab on a Control Dialog Box

Each 6800+ module that supports streaming, when installed in a FR6802+QXF frame that contains a
6800+ETH module, will have an additional Video Streaming tab on its Control dialog box. This tab will
not appear when the module is installed in a frame that does not support streaming. Nor will it appear if
the card does not support streaming. Some modules may require a firmware update in order to display
thumbnails. Check our Website at www.imaginecommunications.com to determine if your module is
thumbnail-enabled.
The name that appears on the thumbnail is provided by the 6800+ETH card.
Viewing an X75 Streaming Source

If your X75 has an optional X75OPT-STR module, its Control dialog box will have an extra Video
Streaming tab. In addition to showing a thumbnail, it displays the source URL for the web stream, and
the frame rate, as shown in the image below.
The HTTP URL field is for information purposes only. You can take the information here and type it into a
web browser to view the streaming data from a remote location.
The Refresh Interval indicates the rate at which all this X75’s thumbnail images are updated, measured
in seconds. Type a number in the field to change the refresh rate.
See Adding a Streaming Icon (on page 404) for more information on streaming.
Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Pane

To stream MPEG-4 video out of your QSEE6800+ module, you must have the QSEE6800+HS option.
When monitoring an MPEG-4 stream from QSEE6800+H by starting a QuickTime player, you can hear
monitoring audio in addition to viewing the video stream.
Magellan CCS Navigator is compatible with QuickTime version 7.1.
To add a device icon to start streaming video from the Navigation pane, follow these steps:
1. With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, under the Network, Discovery, or Temporary folder of
the Navigation pane, right-click and select Create > Server.
This will create a Server icon in the Navigation pane.
2. Right-click on the server icon and select Properties... from the menu that appears.
The Navigation Properties dialog box opens.
3. Select the Command tab, and fill it in with the following information:
Operation: Control
Command: c:\program files'uicktime'uicktimeplayer.exe
(Or the complete path to your QuickTime Player installation, if it differs from the above)
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/streaming
(Replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the QSEE6800+ module)
You can leave the Initial Directory field blank.
4. Close the Navigation Properties dialog box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
When you enter Control mode, double-click on the server icon. This will open a QuickTime Player and
play MPEG-4 streaming video from the specified source.
Chapter 16
Video Output Monitoring

The Signal Monitor tool can perform confidence monitoring of the video signals from CCS devices within
the broadcast facility. Before using the Signal Monitor tool, you must have all of the following:
• A video card compatible with Microsoft DirectX 8.1 or later installed in the PC, or an external monitor
• One or more CCS devices with video (or audio) to monitor connected to input ports of an Imagine
Communications router
• One output port of an Imagine Communications router connected to a Microsoft DirectX 8.1 (or later)
compatible video card or to the external monitor of the PC
Using the Signal Monitor Tool

To use the Signal Monitor tool, complete these steps:
1. Use the Discovery tool to discover a routing system. See Introduction to Routing Components (on
page 656). Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can complete this step.
2. Set the Signal Monitor Options. See Setting Signal Monitor Options (on page 315).
3. Define monitor points for the CCS devices you want to monitor.
Defining monitor points associates the sources of the routing system with the CCS devices you want
to monitor.
After you have defined the monitor points, little monitor icons will show in the Monitor column of
the Navigation pane. See Setting Navigation Properties (on page 128) and Setting Navigation
4. In Control mode, open the Signal Monitor dialog box. See Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box
(on page 312).
5. Also in Control mode, start monitoring the video signal of CCS devices. See Monitoring Video Signals
(on page 313).
Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box

To show the Signal Monitor dialog box, point to Tools on the menu bar and click Signal Monitor.
When you open the Signal Monitor dialog box, it will show the monitored video of the CCS device that is
currently selected in the Navigation pane. If that device has no monitored video and you have
previously defined a Color Black Signal in the Signal Monitor Options box, you will see the Color Black
Signal.
If you resize the Signal Monitor dialog box, its content will also resize. Its default aspect ratio is 4:3.
Monitoring Video Signals

You can only monitor video signal in Control mode.
According to the settings you choose in the Signal Monitor Options box, the Signal Monitor tool can
send the video output from monitored devices to either the Signal Monitor dialog box in the application
dialog box or to an external monitor. See Setting Signal Monitor Options (on page 315) for more
information.
To determine the current setting for the video output, point to Options on the menu bar and click Signal
Monitor. Go to the Video Output Selection section, which has three radio buttons. The buttons and
their functions, when selected, are as follows:
Table 58: Options for Video Output Selection

Option Function
Signal Monitor Window Sends the video output to the Signal Monitor dialog box
External Monitor Sends the video output to an external monitor
Disabled Sends no signal
You can set the Signal Monitor’s tracking options so that the signal output to the Signal Monitor dialog
box or external monitor changes as you select different devices in the Navigation pane. The signal
output will be that of the currently selected device. See Setting Signal Monitor Options (on page 315).
To monitor a video signal, select a resource in the Navigation pane that has a monitor icon showing in
the Monitor column. You should see the video signal change in your output device, whether it is
the Signal Monitor dialog box or an external monitor.
If the resource you selected has no monitored video and you have previously defined a Color Black
Signal in the Signal Monitor Options box, you will see the Color Black Signal on the video output device.
The title of the Signal Monitor dialog box changes as the selected CCS device changes. Note also that
the second cell of the Signal Monitor dialog box’s Status Bar shows the Device ID of the CCS device
selected in the Navigation pane.
The first cell of the Status Bar will show a "Ready" message if the video signal successfully changes as
you select resource icons in the Navigation pane. If an error occurs, the Status Bar instead shows an
"Error" message against a red background.
If you are using an external monitor, an Error box appears. Error messages may occur if you lose a
connection with the routing system.
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu

If you right-click inside the Signal Monitor dialog box, a shortcut menu appears.
The menu options and their functions are as follows:
Table 59: Commands on the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu

Command Function
4×3 Resizes the dialog box to its default 4:3 aspect ratio
16 × 9 Resizes the dialog box to a 16:9 aspect ratio
Full Screen Makes the monitored video signal occupy the full screen
To return the Signal Monitor dialog box to normal screen size from full-screen
mode, right-click the mouse.
Configure Video... Configures the video settings for the Signal Monitor
See Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor (on page 314) for more
information
Find Device Finds the resource icon for CCS device you are monitoring (highlights the
device’s resource icon in the Navigation pane)
Options... Opens the Signal Monitor Options box for revision
See Setting Signal Monitor Options (on page 315) for more information
Help Shows help topics for the Signal Monitor tool
Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor

To set the Signal Monitor’s video properties, complete these steps:
1. Right-click inside the Signal Monitor dialog box, and then select Configure Video from the resulting
shortcut menu.
2. In the TV Tuner Card section of the screen, select a TV tuner card for signal monitoring.
3. In the Video Connector section of the Configure Video box, select the type of video input used.
The usual choice is Composite. If you select Camera, check the S-Video box for "camera with S-
video," and clear the box for "camera without S-video."
4. In the Signal Standard section, select the standard of the video signal connected to the PC.
5. In the Color section, move the slider controls left or right to set the brightness, contrast, saturation,
and hue of the video signal shown in the Signal Monitor dialog box, or click Default at the bottom of
the box to use the default settings.
6. Click OK to confirm the changes and close the box.
Setting Signal Monitor Options

To set the Signal Monitor options:
1. Click Signal Monitor on the Options menu, or right-click in an open Signal Monitor dialog box and
click Options....
2. In the Video Output Selection section of the Signal Monitor Options box, select one of these radio
buttons:
Table 60: Video Output Options

Option Function
Disabled Disables signal monitoring
Option Function
External Monitor Enables the signal monitor output to show on an external monitor.
Signal Monitor Window Enables the signal monitor output to show in the Signal Monitor dialog box
3. When you are using signal monitoring, you will set the User Router Settings.
To set the User Router Settings, click browse (...), select the router’s device ID from the resulting
Router Selection box, and then click OK.
If an alert box advises you that no routers are currently configured, click OK. Discover and configure
a router in build mode, and then return to this procedure.
4. Select a router output from the Router Destination list that corresponds to the PC or an external
monitor.
5. If you have a Color Black Signal connected to the router, select the corresponding Defined check
box, and then select a router source from the Router Source list.
6. If you have an Audio Mute Signal connected to the router, select the corresponding Defined check
box and select a router source from the Router Source list.
7. Under Tracking Options, select one of these options:
Table 61: Tracking Options

Option Function
Signal changes as you select devices in the The Video Output Selection tracks changes in the selection of
Navigation tool resource icons in the Navigation pane.
Signal does not change as you select The Video Output Selection will not track changes
devices in the Navigation tool in the selection of resource icons in the Navigation pane.
Chapter 17
Device Control through HTTP
Figure 36: Web-Based Controls for DPS-575
Magellan CCS Navigator can use HTTP to control any device that has a Web server for control (e.g.,a
DPS-575 digital processing synchronizer, Selenio frames, Magellan control panels, and various video
servers). Many of these products automatically open a default browser when you click on their icon in
the Navigation pane. Other, older devices may require you to open a Web browser from within
Magellan CCS Navigator to view the device’s Web page.
Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser

Only an Administrator user can complete this procedure. It cannot be done on a PC with a NAVIGATOR-
CLI license.
To manually configure Magellan CCS Navigator to open a Web browser for an HTTP device (a device with
a Web server for control), follow these steps:
1. In Build mode, create a new HTTP server icon in the Navigation pane.
2. Rename the server icon with the name of the device. See Deleting a Resource Icon (on page 126).
3. Open the Navigation Properties dialog box for that server icon. See Setting Navigation Properties
(on page 128).
4. Select the HTTP tab.
5. Type the URL for the device in the URL box.
6. Click Close.
See Controlling an HTTP Device (on page 318) for control information.
Alternatively, you can use HTTP discovery to automatically identify all the HTTP servers in the network
and their associated HTTP URL addresses. (See CCS Device Discovery (on page 99) for more information.)
After discovering an HTTP device, its URL addresses will display in the HTTP tab of the Navigation
Properties box. Change this address at any time.
Controlling an HTTP Device

To open a Web browser Control window for an HTTP device, place Magellan CCS Navigator in Control
mode, and then double-click the HTTP server icon for the device that has a Web server. Alternatively,
you can right-click the icon and select Control from the resulting shortcut menu.
See Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a Web Browser (on page 317) for HTTP server node
configuration information.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix A
Appendix A
Troubleshooting
Please follow these steps in troubleshooting problems:
1. Depending on your specific problem, there may be a solution. Check Common Problems and choose
the area your problem falls under for options.
2. Search the CCS product manuals for troubleshooting suggestions. See Showing the User Manual for
a CCS Device (on page 184).
3. Contact Imagine Communications Customer Service. See Getting Help from Customer Service (on
page 345).
Problems are grouped by function. See the referenced heading and page for problems wit
Installation Problems............................................................................. 319
Problems at Startup............................................................................... 323
Configuration Problems......................................................................... 330
Alarm Problems ..................................................................................... 335
Control Problems................................................................................... 339
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator .......................................... 344
Getting Help from Customer Service..................................................... 345
Installation Problems
If you are having problems with installation, please refer to the following topics:
• InstallShield Errors (on page 319)
• Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade (on page 320)
• Installation Exits without Finishing (on page 320)
• Installation Cannot Update Users Database (on page 321)
• Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded (on page 321)
• SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication (on page 322)
• Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD (on page 322)
• Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003 (on page 323)
InstallShield Errors
During installation, you may see one of the following messages:
• Setup has detected that uninstallshield is in use. Please close
uninstallshield and restart setup. Error 432
This error has two possible causes:
 The InstallShield un-installation file (IsUninst.exe) is either in use or corrupted.

 The currently active user account does not have administrative privileges on the PC.
Because InstallShield copies its uninstaller to the Winnt\System32 system directory, the account
used to install the software must have write access to this directory.
If you see this error message, ensure that no other InstallShield applications are running, and that
you have administrative privileges to the system. Then restart your installation process.
• There is no disk in the drive. Please insert a disk into drive D:.
This error is caused by InstallShield leaving temporary files on your system drive during a previous
install or uninstall.
If you see this error message, click Continue.
Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Router Database Upgrade

During Magellan CCS Navigator installation, Sometimes the existence of a database lock file prevents the
upgrading of the router database from succeeding. To correct this situation, follow these steps:
1. Search for RouterSys.ldb using Windows Explorer.
2. Delete any instances of this file that you find.
3. Restart the Magellan CCS Navigator installation.
You will have to restart the Magellan CCS Navigator installation from the beginning.
Installation Exits without Finishing

Consider these questions:
• Are you attempting to install Magellan CCS Navigator in a compressed drive?
Magellan CCS Navigator cannot be installed in a compressed drive. Choose an uncompressed drive,
and then attempt your installation again.
• Have you installed all the required third-party programs?
You must install all the required third-party programs before you can install Magellan CCS Navigator.
• What error message shows when the installation program aborts?
After you remove the InstallShield Installation Information folder, programs that stored data in this
folder may not work correctly. Therefore, only remove the InstallShield Installation Information folder if
you have no other option to resolve the issue.
If the message says file _INS5576._MP is unavailable, you may need to remove the InstallShield
Installation Information folder. Follow these instructions:
a. Click Start > Run.
b. In the Run dialog box, type:
c:\program files
c. Click OK.
d. In the Program Files dialog box, right-click InstallShield Installation Information, and then click
Cut.
e. Close all dialog boxes, right-click anywhere on your desktop, and then click Paste.
See Required Operating System and Software (on page 25) and Installing Other Required Software (on
page 26).
Installation Cannot Update Users Database

The installation program will usually upgrade database files in the Users folder during a software
upgrade unless you have compressed the Users folder and its files. To enable the installation program
to upgrade this folder and its files, you must first decompress the folder and repeat the installation
program.
To decompress files in the Users folder, complete these steps:

1. Right-click Start and select Explore from the resulting shortcut menu.
This opens the Windows Explorer.
2. Find the Users folder in the All Folders list. The usual path to this folder is as follows:
c:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\Users
3. Right-click the Users folder icon and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
4. This shows the Users Properties box.
5. Find the Attributes section of the General tab and clear the Compress check box.
6. Click OK to close the Users Properties box and then close Windows Explorer.
Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded

This version of the Magellan CCS Navigator software requires that you first upgrade your NEO 3901 RES-
E, LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U and ICE6800+ products to version 3.0 or later before installing Magellan
CCS Navigator.
Upgrading NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, and RCP-CCS-1U to Version 3.0 or Later
To upgrade NEO 3901RES-E, LCP -3901-1U, or RCP-CCS-1U to firmware version 3.0 or later, follow these
steps:
1. Begin a normal discovery procedure, following steps 1 - 3 of Running a Discovery (on page 108).
2. On the Add screen of the Discovery Options dialog box, instead of selecting X75, NEO, 6800+, CCS
Control Panel, select Selenio, LCP-CCS-1U.
3. Complete your discovery and save the results.
4. For each of the discovered NEO 3901RES-E, LCP-3901-1U, RCP-CCS-1U products, follow the software
upgrade procedure. See Upgrading Software (on page 161) for more information.
Upgrading an ICE6800+ to Version 3.0 or Later
To upgrade your ICE6800+ module to firmware version 3.0 or later, follow these steps:
1. Download the latest version greater or equal to 3.0 of the ICE6800+ software from our website.
2. Unpack the contents of the zip file in your C:\tmp directory.

3. From your Windows Start menu, select Run, and enter cmd to open a Command dialog box.
4. Type C: (to make sure you are accessing files on your C: drive), and then type "CD \tmp" followed by
the command:
upall
and specify the IP address of your ICE6800+ module.
For example:
C:CD/tmp upall 172.24.128.50
(This will upgrade your ICE6800+ module at IP address 172.24.128.50.)
SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication

If installing the Server to a computer with a pre installed SQL Sever 2005 instance already there, user
needs to enable TCP/IP connections and SQL Server Authentication. To enable TCP/IP remote
connections, follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, select All Programs > Microsoft SQL Server 2005 > Configuration Tools > SQL
Server Configuration Manager.
The SQL Server Configuration Manager opens.
2. In the left pane, expand SQL Server 2005 Network Configuration by clicking on the + beside it.
3. Click on Protocols for SQLEXPRESS.
4. In the right pane, right click on TCP/IP and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The TCP/IP Properties dialog box opens.
5. In the Protocol tab, select Yes to the right of Enabled.
6. In the IP Addresses tab, select Yes to the right of each Enabled option (there will be one for each
available IP).
7. Click OK to close the IP Addresses tab, and then close the SQL Server Configuration Manager.
Windows Message Queuing Requests Installation CD

During installation, if the Windows Message Queuing component is required, it will usually install
automatically. There are few cases where the installation of this component will require the user to
insert the Windows OS CD to install this component.
If you do not have a Windows OS CD available, cancel this installation and follow these steps:
1. From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
2. Select Add or Remove Programs.
3. Click on Add/Remove Windows Components (this is in the button bar on the left of the screen).
4. Click on Message Queuing in the list of components, and then click Details.
5. Place a check beside Common in the Message Queuing Subcomponents, and then click OK to close
each open dialog box in the Control Panel.
You can now restart the Magellan CCS Navigator install.
Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on Windows XP or Windows 2003

Windows XP
Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC running Windows XP Service Pack 3, contact
Customer Service.
Windows 2003
If your PC is running the Windows 2003 operating system with Service Pack 2, before you install
Magellan CCS Navigator, you must remove MSXML6 sp2. To remove this file, use the Add/Remove
Programs tool.
To use Add/Remove Programs to prepare your PC for Magellan CCS Navigator installation, follow these
steps:
1. From the Start menu, choose Control Panel > Add or Remove Programs.
2. From the list that appears, choose MSXML6 SP2, and then click Remove.
3. When the process is finished, close the window.
You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.
Problems at Startup
If you are having problems with starting Magellan CCS Navigator, please refer to the following topics:
• Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup (on page 323)
• Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure (on page 324)
• Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure (on page 324)
• PC Running Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly (on page 324)
• Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten (on page 326)
• Password Does Not Work (on page 326)
• File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator (on page 326)
• File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients (on page 327)
• Managing Permissions (on page 327)
• PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’ (on page 328)
• Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’ (on page 328)
• "Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears (on page 328)
• PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default (on page 329)
• Serial Connection Error at Startup (on page 329)
• Menus or Tools Not Available (on page 330)
• Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator (on page 330)
Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Setup

If Magellan CCS Navigator fails to start after setup, take these actions:
1. Install all the third-party software that Magellan CCS Navigator requires for installation on the PC
operating platform.
2. Close all open programs and restart the operating system to fully register the software. See
Installing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software (on page 29).
Launch application actions are configured differently in the Navigation pane than in the Graphical
Navigation page. See Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action (on page 444).
Magellan CCS Navigator Starts up with Build Mode Only

If your Magellan CCS Navigator install starts up with Build mode only, and you can run discoveries but
not switch to Control mode or open Control dialog boxes, this is because your license has expired.
After the initial 30-day trial period, your Magellan CCS Navigator install reverts to a Build mode only
state, and you must purchase a Magellan CCS Navigator license in order to continue to control devices
using Magellan CCS Navigator. For more information on various Magellan CCS Navigator license options,
see Navigator Licenses (on page 18). To add a license, see Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses
(on page 36).
Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after Power Failure

After a power failure, frames require sufficient time to recover and restore communication with the PC.
To restore communications between the PC and the frames, ensure that the frames have three or more
minutes to recover from the power failure before you exit the application and log back on.
PC Running Magellan CCS Navigator Operates Sluggishly

Two Windows services can cause sluggish operation of CCS applications: E-mail services and ODBC
tracing services.
E-mail services can create slow memory leaks, leading to unusually large memory usage for programs
using e-mail services. If you notice that Magellan CCS Navigator is operating sluggishly, use the Task
Manager to check memory usage of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process.
If you suspect that E-mail services may be creating the sluggish system operation, see Viewing the Size
of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe Process (on page 324).
However, if you suspect that ODBC tracing services are on and causing the sluggish system operation,
see Turning Off ODBC Tracing (on page 325).
Viewing the Size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe Process

To use the Task Manager to view the size of the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process, complete these
steps:
1. Press CTRL + ALT + DELETE.
This shows the Windows Security dialog box.
2. Click Task Manager....
3. Select the Processes tab.

4. Use the scroll bars to locate the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe image name on the list
of open applications.
5. Look at the value for the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe file in the Mem Usage column to see how
much memory the process is using.
6. Click Close.
Reducing the Size of the Magellan CCS Navigator Process

If the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe process has grown to more than 200 MB, take one or more of these
actions to reduce the size of the process and speed up the software:
1. Restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
2. Turn off CCS e-mail notification of alarms.
a. Point to Options on the menu bar and click Diagnostics....
b. Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab in the Diagnostics Options box.
c. Clear the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to disable the sending of e-mail notifications of
alarms.
d. Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
3. Shorten the e-mail alarm notification list.
a. Point to Options on the menu bar and click Diagnostics....
b. Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab in the Diagnostics Options box.
c. In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, select the e-mail address of a recipient you want
to delete, and click Remove.
d. Repeat the last step to delete other e-mail recipients.
e. Click OK to close the Diagnostics Options box.
Turning Off ODBC Tracing

To turn off ODBC tracing, complete these steps:
1. Click Windows Start > Settings > Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel dialog box, double-click Administrative Tools.
3. In the Administrative Tools dialog box, double-click Data Source (ODBC).
4. In the ODBC Data Source Administrator box, select the Tracing tab.
5. In the When to trace section, if the label on the left button reads "Stop Tracing Now," click the label
so that it toggles to read "Start Tracing Now."
You have now stopped ODBC tracing.
6. Click OK to close the ODBC Data Source Administrator box.
Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten

If you lose or forget the password, an Administrator user must reset it, using the following procedure.
Then you can change the password that the Administrator assigns to you. See Changing a Password (on
page 54).
To change a lost or forgotten user password, complete these steps:

1. Click Options on the menu bar and select User Accounts.
2. Select the name of the user whose information you want to change.
3. Click Modify User.
This opens the User Account box for the selected user.
4. Type a new password into both the New and Confirm boxes of the Password section of the User
Account box.
Use the same combination of upper- and lower-case characters in both instances of the password,
since passwords are case-sensitive.
5. Click OK to close the User Account box and save the changes.
Password Does Not Work

Unlike user names, passwords are case-sensitive. If you have both upper- and lower-case letters in the
password, ensure that you use the appropriate case for each character that you type into the Password
box on the Logon box.
File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Navigator

When Magellan CCS Navigator is installed on a PC, the network or PC administrator must set file
permissions so that users have full access to the Magellan CCS Navigator program files.
To set file permissions on the Magellan CCS Navigator folder:

1. Log on to the PC as the administrator.
2. Use the Windows Explorer to find the Program Files\Harris\Magellan CCS Navigator folder.
3. Right-click the Magellan CCS Navigator folder, and then select Properties from the resulting
shortcut menu.
4. Select the Security tab of the Properties box.
The Security tab has top and bottom panes. The top pane shows the list of available user groups;
and the bottom pane shows the list of Allow and Deny permissions.
5. Select the name of the group you want to change from the top list.
6. Select all check boxes in the Allow column in the bottom pane to enable the selected users group to
have full rights to the files.
7. Click the Advanced button. The Advanced Security Settings dialog box appears. Select the Inherit
from parent the permission entries that apply to child objects box. Click OK to close the Advanced
Security Settings dialog box.
8. Click OK to close the Properties box.

9. Log out of Windows, and then log back in as a user.
10. Start Magellan CCS Navigator.
File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Navigator Clients

Files need to be transferred, or shared, between Magellan CCS Navigator Server and Magellan CCS
Navigator Client. Magellan CCS Navigator Client installs must have access to the Magellan CCS Navigator
Server through File Sharing in order to retrieve Navigator Pages, resource tree information, etc.
1. To determine if a Magellan CCS Navigator Client PC can contact the server, follow these steps:
a. From the Start menu choose Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
a. Type
PING <IP address of the Magellan CCS Navigator Server>
If the connection fails, you have a network problem. Contact your systems administrator.
2. To determine if you have file sharing access to a specific Magellan CCS Navigator Server, from the
Start menu, select Run and enter \\<SERVERNAME>\HarrisCCSShare
If you are denied access, you do not have access to the server.
3. Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can turn on file sharing. To turn
Simple File Sharing on, follow these steps:
a. Double-click My Computer on your PC desktop.
b. On the main menu, select View > Folder Options.
c. Click the View tab, and then select Use Simple File Sharing (Recommended).
4. (Windows Vista and Windows 7 only) From the Control Panel select the Network and Sharing
Center.
The following settings should be selected:
 Discovery ON
 File sharing ON
 Password protected sharing OFF
5. (Windows XP Only) To turn on File Sharing for the Magellan CCS Navigator Server’s database folder,
follow these steps:
a. Double click on My Computer on your PC desktop.
b. On the system drive where your Magellan CCS Navigator Server software is installed, browse to
the location where the database files are stored.
c. The typical path is: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS\Files
d. Right-click the Files folder icon and then select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
e. Ensure that Share this Folder is selected.
Managing Permissions
In order to access devices, pages, and presets, each user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client must have
been assigned permissions to do so. For information on assigning permissions, see Assigning Access
Rights (on page 46). Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can change access
permissions.
PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’

Turning off the PC running Magellan CCS Navigator during a broadcast will cause no changes to the CCS
devices on the network or their settings. When you restart the software application, it will query the
devices and update their status, including outstanding alarms.
Online Help Hangs After User Selects ‘Properties’

On some occasions, Online Help may hang or freeze after a user right-clicks on a Help topic and selects
Properties from the resulting shortcut menu. To unfreeze the Online Help, right-click the Welcome
to Magellan CCS Navigator Help icon on the Windows task bar at bottom of the screen.
"Windows Security Alert" Dialog Appears

If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 3, you may encounter a dialog similar to the following when
you start Magellan CCS Navigator, or when you switch modes:
Select the "Unblock" button. Selecting any other button may prevent Magellan CCS Navigator from
working properly.
You may also receive similar messages for the programs "btserver" and "Imagine Communications
Router Engine Service Module". In each case, select the "Unblock" button.
Unblocking Magellan CCS Navigator

If the Windows Firewall is blocking Magellan CCS Navigator or any of the applications it depends on
(btserver and Router Engine Service), then some features may not work properly. To unblock these
applications:
1. Open the Control Panel (go to Start > Settings > Control Panel).
2. Double-click on Windows Firewall. Another dialog box appears.
3. On the General tab, ensure that the Don't allow exceptions checkbox is clear.
4. On the Exceptions tab, locate the application in the Programs and Services list.
5. Ensure the checkbox beside the application name is checked. If the program does not appear in the
list, click Add Program..., select the program from the list and click OK.
6. Click OK to dismiss all dialogs, then close the Control Panel.
For more information, consult your Windows XP documentation.
PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to Default

To return the work space settings for a CCS application to the original desktop settings, complete these
steps:
1. Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), and click the MS-DOS Command
Prompt icon from the Programs menu.
This shows the MS-DOS Command Prompt dialog box.
2. Change to the directory in which the Magellan CCS Navigator.exe file is installed. Use the Microsoft
Windows Find application to find the file.
Typically, you will type in the following command and then press ENTER:
cd Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\bin
3. Type in the following command and press ENTER:
Magellan CCS Navigator /w default
The Magellan CCS Navigator login box appears. When you log on, the default work space settings will be
in effect.
Serial Connection Error at Startup

If your default router configuration uses a serial connection, during startup you may see an error
message informing you of this fact.
The error is for informational purposes only. When your default router configuration uses a serial
connection, COM 1 will not be available for other purposes.
Menus or Tools Not Available

There are two reasons why menu items or tools may not be present or available in your Magellan CCS
Navigator install.
• You do not have a license for the desired tool or option. See Managing Magellan CCS Navigator
Licenses (on page 36) for information on purchasing and installing licenses.
Magellan CCS Navigator Client does not have a Build mode. Any feature that is described as working
in Build mode only will not work on a Magellan CCS Navigator Client.
• Magellan CCS Navigator is not in the correct state for accessing a specific menu item or tool. Some
tools, such as the Discovery pane, are only available in Build mode. Other tools, such as the
Diagnostics dialog box, are only available in Control mode. For descriptions of the different modes of
operation, see Setting the Operational Mode (on page 57)
• The feature you are looking for is a Server option, and you are using Magellan CCS Navigator Client, or
it is a Client option, and you are using Magellan CCS Navigator Server.
Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes Magellan CCS Navigator

When Internet Explorer 10’s cache is cleared and Navigator is open, regardless whether it is in Build or
Control Modes, Navigator closes. The cache needs to be cleared in various circumstances, including
upgrading IP3 Controller and upgrading Platinum SX Pro modules. The RouterService must be manually
stopped and restarted in order to fully restartMagellan CCS Navigator.
To resolve the Internet Explorer bug that causes this problem, try the following:
1. Install any pending windows updates (Control panel -> Windows Updates).
2. Install a registry cleaner to clean your registry.
3. 1If that does not work, then re-install Windows entirely.
For best results, use Internet Explorer 9 or earlier, or close Magellan CCS Navigator prior to clearing the
Internet Explorer 10 cache.
Configuration Problems
User manuals for CCS devices include information on device configuration and are available as part
of the optional installation components for Magellan CCS Navigator.
See these sections or topics:

• CCS Device Configuration (on page 153)
• Getting Version Information (on page 178)
• Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device (on page 184)
• NEO Frame Configuration (on page 247)
• LCP and RCP Configuration (on page 252)
For general troubleshooting tips during device configuration, see the following topics:
• Telnet Fails During Device Configuration (on page 331)
• Discovery Fails to Find a Device (on page 331)
• Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices (on page 332)
• Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame (on page 332)
• Discovery Takes Too Long (on page 332)
• FTP Fails During Device Configuration (on page 333)
• Broadcast Communication Fails (on page 333)
• Broadcast Communication Fails (on page 333)
• Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information (on page 333)
• IP Address Disappears from Icon Name (on page 334)
• Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long (on page 334)
• Difficulty Configuring an NSM card (on page 334)
• Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations (on page 334)
• Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations (on page 334)
• Serial Port Conflict (on page 335)
• Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8 (on page 335)
Telnet Fails During Device Configuration

Magellan CCS Navigator uses Telnet to send commands to a device during configuration of the device.
Only one user at a time can connect to a device using Telnet. Wait a few minutes and try again.
Discovery Fails to Find a Device

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can discover devices.

• Have you correctly configured the IP addresses of the devices on the network?
Check the configurations for the IP addresses.
• Are both the PC and the devices connected to the same network?
Try pinging the IP address of the device to determine if it is connected to the network. See Pinging
the IP Address of a CCS Device (on page 108).
• Is the PC on the same subnet as the device that you are attempting to discover?
If not, the network administrator must assign a default gateway to the IP settings for the CCS
devices and the PC running the discovery. Generally, devices should have IP addresses that are all
within a similar range; e.g. 192.168.100.250 and 192.168.100.245.
This is more likely to be a problem when a device is set to its default IP address, for example when it
is first installed. See Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of a CCS Device (on page 156)
• Is the PC directly connected to a CCS device, such as the NEO frame?
If so, you will need an Ethernet crossover cable, hub, or switch between the PC and the CCS device.
• Is the device an X75 or X75-RCP?
If you can ping the device IP address but can't discover it, try setting the discovery option of this
device to use point-to-point. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery (on page 101).
Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Discovering 6800+ Devices

Occasionally when logging in, Magellan CCS Navigator will hang while discovering 6800+ devices. This is
caused by the previous instance of btsvr2.exe not being shutdown the last time Magellan CCS Navigator
exited.
To shut down the previous instance of btsvr2.exe, follow this procedure:

1. Start Task Manager by pressing CTRL-ALT-DEL on your keyboard.
2. Click on the Processes tab. If there are two instances of btsvr2.exe running, click on the instance
that displays a 0% CPU time in the CPU column and click End Process. Magellan CCS Navigator will
resume.
Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Discovering a 6800+ Frame

Occasionally after saving the results of a discovery of a 6800+ frame, the Navigation pane will contain a
single 6800+ server node with no frames and no modules, or some modules in the frame will be missing
from the discovery.
There are two possible causes:

• A back module is defective
• A back module is not well-inserted and attached with screws to the frame
To determine which back module is causing the problem:

1. Check all back modules
 Make sure no pins are damaged.
 Ensure each back module is well inserted and attached with screws.
 Ensure that all modules are properly inserted.
A series of networked FR6802+ and FR6802+QXF frames can contain an ICE6800+ module, or a
6800+ETH module, but not both.
2. If that does not fix the problem, remove all modules and back modules. Only leave the ICE6800+
module and its back module (or 6800+ETH) in the frame. (The ICE6800+ back module also needs to
be properly attached).
3. Discover the ICE6800+ or 6800+ETH module. In the case of an ICE6800+, ensure that it is discovered
in its proper slot. If it is not, try moving it to another slot (in case the frame slot is damaged).
4. Reinsert the front and back modules into the frame one by one, doing a discovery after each module
is inserted, to find which front module, slot, or back module may be damaged.
Discovery Takes Too Long

This problem occurs when the TCP/IP DNS Service Search Order list in the PC’s Network settings
includes invalid IP addresses.
To remove invalid IP addresses from the PC’s DNS Service Search Order list, complete these steps:
1. Click Start, point to Settings, and then click Control Panel.
2. Click the Network icon in the Control Panel dialog box.
This opens the Network box, containing the network settings.

3. Select the Protocols tab in the Network box.
4. Select TCP/IP Protocol from the Network Protocols list, and then click Properties....
This opens the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
5. Select the DNS tab of the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
6. Select invalid IP addresses in the DNS Service Search Order list, and then click Remove.
7. Click OK to close the Microsoft TCP/IP Protocol box.
FTP Fails During Device Configuration

Magellan CCS Navigator software uses FTP to transfer software and device configurations. Only four
users can connect simultaneously to a device using FTP.
In addition, FTP failure could occur if another PC running the application has a Telnet session open for
the same device. In this case, the Log tab reports: "System is engaged."
In either case, wait a few minutes and try to start the FTP session again.
NUCLEUS Device Firmware Upgrade Fails

Magellan CCS Navigator 4.6.1 and NUCLEUS 2.1 software and firmware support hardware with 16 MB or
more of flash memory. If you attempt a firmware upgrade to NUCLEUS and the upgrade fails, this could
be due to a lack of flash memory space on NUCLEUS.
To determine the size of the flash memory, on the Options menu on the NUCLEUS control panel, choose
Version info. If the flash size is 8MB then the following can be done to do a successful firmware
upgrade:
• Reduce the number of configurations on Nucleus. (Take a backup to a USB Flash of the configurations
and MIB files and remove the configurations and MIB files from Nucleus and then try the firmware
upgrade).
• Replace your NUCLEUS control panel with a NUCLEUS control panel with a larger Flash memory
(recommended).
Broadcast Communication Fails

If broadcast communication fails, make sure the device and the PC have the same subnet mask if the
devices are on the same subnet.
Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version Information

If you change the IP address on the computer, but do not restart Magellan CCS Navigator, you may see
the following problems:
• In the Version tab of the Configuration dialog box of a discovered device, all folders are empty
• In Control mode, a discovered device keeps toggling between Network Available and Inactive status
Solution:
After changing your PC’s IP address, restart Magellan CCS Navigator.
IP Address Disappears from Icon Name

The name or alternate name of a resource icon may include the resource’s IP address or other
information. However, all resource icons belonging to a control panel configuration show their short
name when they are in the Configuration folder. The short name matches what the control panel can
show on its display, a maximum of 20 characters.
However, you can change a resource’s default short name in the resource’s Navigation Properties box
so that the short name better identifies the resource—taking out spaces, abbreviating words, or
including only the last four digits of an IP address. See Deleting a Resource Icon (on page 126) and
Setting Navigation Properties (on page 128).
Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes Too Long

When a device becomes disconnected from the network, Magellan CCS Navigator may take up to 45
seconds to detect the disconnection, even though the Connection Idle Time for Keep Alive is set to
10,000 ms in the Communication Options settings.
The length of the delay reflects the type of network connection. CCS devices are connected to the
network through Ethernet devices, such as hubs, switches and routers.
While Magellan CCS Navigator only needs 15 seconds to detect a CCS device connection or
disconnection through a hub, it needs more time to detect a connection or disconnection through a
switch or router. This is a limitation of a normal LAN configuration.
However, you can configure a switcher or router for Fast Reacquire to improve on this 45-second delay.
See also Setting Communication Options (on page 83).
Difficulty Configuring an NSM card

Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can configure routing devices in
Magellan CCS Navigator.
To configure an NSM card, you should configure it as another routing device. After configuring the NSM
card, you should import this into Magellan CCS Navigator. See Introduction to Routing Components (on
Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect Destinations

A Router Control dialog box may fail to unlock or unprotect destinations that were locked or protected
by a router control panels (Multi-Bus, Single-Bus, and Matrix Panels).
When performing locking/protecting operations on destinations, Router Control dialog boxes use the ID
of the user currently logged onto the system, whereas the Router Control Panels use the Panel Address
defined when creating these panels. This ID is used to identify the owner of the operation, which can
only be undone by this same owner. By default, the Panel Wizard uses the ID 127 (the Address field of
the Panel Identifier group found in the first screen of the wizard).
To resolve the issue, select the address of the panel that matches your user ID. Your user ID is shown in
the Login Options box, in the User Accounts tab (Menu Options -> User Accounts...).
Serial Port Conflict

The default routing configuration that is shipped within Magellan CCS Navigator is set to use the COM1
port.
By running a Discovery on Magellan CCS Navigator, you may have this configuration added into the
Navigation pane. If you do not plan to use this configuration, you have two options:
• Delete it from the Navigation pane.
OR
• Unselect Discover Routing System in the Discovery pane before running a discovery.
The port is opened immediately after switching to control (activate) and it is not closed or released until
you remove it from the Navigation pane (deactivate). So, if you have this configuration in the Navigation
pane and when you try to use a SuiteView or Serial port action in Magellan CCS Navigator, you will get a
message stating that the port is busy (unless you are using COM 2 for these actions).
If you have another routing system that is configured to use the same COM port, you will get status as
well as be able to control this routing configuration. Only one routing configuration that uses a specific
COM port can be activated at a time.
Validating Routing/CENTRIO Panels After Upgrading

If you create a database with invalid routing/CENTRIO panels in an older version of Magellan CCS
Navigator, and then upgrade to a newer version, the panels remain invalid after the upgrade. To
automatically validate the panels after the upgrade, follow these steps:
1. Double-click on a Routing View node .
2. Close the router configuration window without making any changes.
An "Automatically Validating Panels" progress bar appears. When it is complete, the panels are
automatically validated.
Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network Drives in Windows 8

In Windows 8, network drives do not display in folder browser dialogs. When restoring content such as
router databases, first copy them to a drive local to the computer running Magellan CCS Navigator.
Alarm Problems
If you are having problems with alarms, please refer to the following topics:
• Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator (on page 336)
• Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box (on page 336)
• Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots (on page 336)
• Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box (on page 336)
• Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms (on page 337)
• Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps (on page 337)
• SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear (on page 338)
Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in Magellan CCS Navigator

The local alarm enable/disable feature on NEO modules has no relationship to the remote alarm
enable/disable feature in Magellan CCS Navigator. The NEO enable/disable alarms feature affects only
the local reporting of alarms on the NEO card edge, while this enable/disable alarms feature affects only
the remote reporting of alarms to Magellan CCS Navigator.
Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics Dialog Box

When an alarm is disabled in a Control dialog box, the device will stop sending information for that
particular alarm to all installations of Magellan CCS Navigator on the CCS network.
However, disabling an alarm in a Control dialog box does not remove the alarm from the alarm lists on
the Monitor and Selected tabs of the Diagnostics dialog box. To remove the alarm from the Monitor
and Selected tabs, you must acknowledge the alarm, using the shortcut menu for the Diagnostics dialog
box. See Ignoring Alarms (on page 270).
Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots

When you reboot a device connected to several PCs running Magellan CCS Navigator, the alarm traffic
hitting the network may cause an alarm query request to time out and fail. While the query does not
automatically retry, it will post an "Alarm query failed" message to the Diagnostics dialog box.
To clear an "Alarm query failed" message, right-click inside the Diagnostics dialog box and select Refresh
Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control Dialog Box

To open the Generic Control dialog box and determine the nature of an alarm entry:
1. Double-click the alarm entry in the Diagnostic dialog box.
This action highlights the device alarm in the Navigation pane and opens the Control dialog box.
2. Right-click in the Control dialog box, and then select Generic Control from the shortcut menu.
The Generic Control dialog box opens.
3. Return to the alarm entry in the Diagnostic dialog box, scroll through the entry, and locate the
parameter name in the corresponding column.
4. Return to the Generic Control dialog box, and then click All Categories from the Parameter
Classification section of the dialog box.
5. In the parameter-control section on the right side of the dialog box, look for the parameter name
identified previously in the Diagnostic dialog box (step 3).
This is the specific parameter generating an alarm.
Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms

Card alarms for a module slot do not appear in a Frame Control dialog box unless you build the hierarchy
in the Navigation pane with the modules as children of the frame in which they reside.
Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for SNMP Traps

When the Diagnostics dialog box fails to list alarms for SNMP traps, check the following:
1. Ensure that a server icon for the SNMP device appears in either the Network or Discovery folder.
2. Create a server icon for the SNMP device if there is no server icon, and name it for the SNMP device.
See Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon (on page 125) and Deleting a Resource Icon (on
page 126).
3. Set or check the navigation properties of the SNMP server icon. See Setting Navigation Properties
for an SNMP Server (on page 136).
4. Select the Device tab and ensure that the first field of the Device ID is set to IP and the second field
is set to the device’s IP Address. Other fields of the Device ID should be blank.
5. Verify that the monitored SNMP device has been properly configured to send SNMP traps to the
IP address of the PC running the application.
6. Verify that the Windows SNMP and SNMP Trap services are not running on your PC, then run net
stop snmptrap and net stop snmp in a Command Prompt dialog box and restart Magellan
CCS Navigator.
SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear

For the procedure for loading SNMP files into Magellan CCS Navigator, see Setting Communication
Options (on page 83). Errors may occur as MIB files attempt to load. To view MIB file load errors, click
View Log. This will load the last SNMP log file in Notepad, which will show any errors. Read the log file
carefully.
When you review your SNMP MIB log file, you may get an error message. The table below describes
potential error messages and the causes.
Table 62: SNMP Error Messages

Error Message Cause
The mib description doesn’t seem to be consistent. • Some nodes not properly defined in the MIB file
Some nodes couldn’t be linked under the "iso" tree. • One or more referenced MIB files are missing
• MIB file not saved with line breaks
Line xx: Unknown label - label: videoMode bla Syntax error in the specified line of the MIB file
(xx represents the line number of the MIB file)
Defining Nodes Correctly in an SNMP MIB File
Make sure that the nodes specified in the error message as not being able to be linked under the iso
tree are properly defined in the MIB. Do this by checking that each node, and its parent, have the
following clauses:
• OBJECT-TYPE
• SYNTAX
• ACCESS
• STATUS
• DESCRIPTION
Correct any errors that you find in these descriptions of the MIB, and then try loading the file again.
Checking for Missing MIB Files
If files are missing, look at the IMPORT section of the MIB files you are trying to load, if there is one.
Make sure that you are also loading the MIB files that are being referred to in that section.
Adding Line Breaks to MIB Files
If your file was saved without line breaks, follow these steps:
1. Open your ASCII file in Microsoft Word.
2. From the File menu select Save As, and then select the Text Only with Line Breaks option.
This converts the file into a Windows text file.
3. Copy the .txt file(s) to the directory
C:\Program Files\Leitch\Magellan CCS Navigator\mib.
4. Start Magellan CCS Navigator, and then select SNMP from the Options menu.
5. In the SNMP Options dialog box, click the Add button.

6. Select your .txt filename from the list, and then click Open.
7. In the SNMP Options dialog box, click OK.
The file should now load properly.
Correcting SNMP MIB File Syntax Errors
To find and correct any syntax errors in the SNMP MIB file that you loaded, follow these steps:
1. Find the line that was specified as having an error.
2. Look for syntax errors on that line, and correct any errors that you find.
3. Try loading the file again.
Network is Overloaded With Duplicate SNMP Traps

When devices in an network are configured to send and receive traps, and a device receives the traps it
originated, it will send them on. This can create an excess of network traffic.
Do not configure your SNMP agent settings such that the traps for a device wind up being returned to
that device, whether directly or through a chain of forwarding devices.
SNMP Traps Do Not Appear to be Received

Due to a limitation in NET SNMP, the Agent Address (Agent IP) field in a SNMPv1 trap is always filled
with the IP of the system on the default or primary network adapter instead of the adapter the trap was
broadcast on. If the SNMP agent has more than one network IP adapter, receiving devices may not
recognize the traps that are sent.
To resolve this issue, there are two options:

• Change the primary network card on the SNMP agent
• Configure the device listening for SNMP traps to receive them from the primary IP address of the
sending device
Alarms Not Appearing Correctly in Japanese or Chinese Language Interface

When Magellan CCS Navigator is the recipient of forwarded alarms or traps containing Unicode text
description, you need to configure Windows Regional and Languages Options (in the Control Panel
settings) for the alarm listening PC, in order to display Unicode text properly. Select the corresponding
language in the Language for non-Unicode programs setting.
Control Problems
If you are having problems with controlling an item in your Magellan CCS Navigator system, please refer
to the following topics:
• Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane (on page 340)
• No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75 Device (on page 340)
• Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices (on page 340)
• Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load (on page 341)
• Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules (on page 341)
• Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’ (on page 341)
• Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot (on page 342)
• ‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears (on page 342)
• No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box (on page 342)
• Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog Box (on page 343)
Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Module in the Navigation Pane

• Did you physically configure the module for local control?
If so, then you must instead configure the device for remote control.
• Is the module properly seated in the frame?
Check the positioning of the module in its slot in the frame.
• Does the status bar on the resource control window indicate that the device is ready?
The device may be powered off or disconnected from the network.
• Do you have access rights to control the module and its parameters?
Contact the network administrator or an Administrator user to obtain permission to control the
module. See Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device (on page 294).
No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Values Reported for an X75 Device

The Mute Device option must be set to No for an X75 device to report any alarm, status, or parameter
value changes. To set an X75’s Mute Device option, follow this procedure:
1. Make sure you are in control mode.
2. Right click on the X75 device in the Navigation pane, and then choose Configuration.
The X75 Configuration dialog box appears.
3. On the Device tab, make sure that Mute Device is set to No.
When Mute Device is set to No, the device asynchronously reports any changes in terms of alarms,
status, or parameter value changes.
Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-RCP Devices

The Keep Alive setting must be checked in order for an X75 or X75-RCP device to report device status.
To set the Keep Alive check box, follow this procedure:
1. Make sure you are in Control mode.
2. Right click on the X75 device in the Navigation pane, and then choose Configuration.
The X75 Configuration dialog box appears.

3. On the Device tab, make sure that Keep Alive is checked.
When Keep Alive is checked, the application will be able to report device status such as Active or
Inactive.
Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Load

By default, the Navigation tool’s ability to undo or redo the loading of presets is disabled. This allows
the Navigation tool to load presets more quickly. However, you can re-activate this feature in the
Navigation Options box.
To enable the Navigation tool to undo or redo the loading of presets, complete these steps:
1. Point to Options on the menu bar and select Navigation from the menu.
The Navigation Options box appears.
2. In the Preset Options section of the General tab, select the Allow undo/redo of Load Preset in
Control mode check box.
You can only load presets in Control mode.
Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules

Due to the number of parameters and alarms on QSEE6800+ modules, you can only save or load one
QSEE6800+ preset at a time. You cannot create presets that contain a QSEE6800+ module in
combination with any other modules.
The time to complete a "Load Preset" operation for QSEE6800+ modules will vary according to the
number of modules present in the frame. If you have problems loading or saving a QSEE6800+ preset,
set the QSEE6800+ module’s Audio Average Level Reporting parameter to Disable.
Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not Ready’

If the Device Status column in the Navigation pane fails to report a device’s network status or reports a
"Not Ready" status, ensure the the following conditions are met:
• Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Control mode. If it is not, change to Control mode. Magellan CCS
Navigator can only detect the status of device connections in Control mode.
• All resource modules must be properly seated in their frames. Check the position and seating of the
resource modules in the frame.
• The frame must be connected to the network. Check the device’s network connection by "pinging"
the assigned IP address. See Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device (on page 108).
If the Device Status column still reports no status or "Not Ready" for the device, try restarting Magellan
CCS Navigator. See also Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
Checking the Connection Status of a Device

Magellan CCS Navigator reports each device’s connection status in two ways:
• The bottom of a device’s Control dialog box shows operational status messages.
• In Control mode, the Navigation pane has an optional column that shows status messages for each
CCS device.
To show the column, set the Navigation options to show device status. See Setting Navigation Options
(on page 147).
Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or Warning for Slot

The Control dialog box for a frame shows its slots and what resource modules each contains. Each slot
shows the color of its most critical outstanding alarm.
To check an alarm for a slot, select the part of the frame’s Control dialog box that represents the slot
and then select the Selected tab of the Diagnostics dialog box. The Selected tab lists all outstanding
alarms for that slot.
‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Message Appears

Close one or more of the open Control dialog boxes and then try reopening the new Control dialog box.
Magellan CCS Navigator’s limit on open Control dialog boxes does not affect the number of devices that
Magellan CCS Navigator can discover or monitor.
No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Box

If no video shows in the Signal Monitor dialog box, complete these steps:
1. Ensure that an icon for the routing system shows in either the Network or Discovery folder.
If it doesn’t, discover the routing system. SeeIntroduction to Routing Components (on page 656) .
2. In Build mode, configure the routing system. See Introduction to Routing Components (on page
656).
3. Select the routing view you want to monitor by clicking the Browse button. Compare the Router
Device ID setting that appears in the Signal Monitor Options box with the Device ID of the
discovered router view in the device’s Navigation Properties box.
Figure 37: Matched device Instance IDs
4. Ensure that you have selected a router destination in the Signal Monitor Options box that matches
the video connection between the router device or router module and the PC.
5. In Control mode, open the Control dialog box for the routing view.
6. In the Control dialog box, perform a take from a valid source to the router destination set in the
Signal Monitor Options box. See Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656).
If you get no video, check all video cabling from the device to the PC.
7. Right-click inside the device’s Signal Monitor dialog box, and select Configure Video... from the
Ensure that you have selected the correct composite video connector (usually composite video). See
Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor (on page 314).
8. If all else fails, reinstall the video card/drivers. See Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool
(on page 29).
Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator Page or Device Control Dialog Box
If streaming video is missing in either in a Thumbnail dialog box or in an MPEG4 streaming dialog box,
check the following configuration items:
• Streaming device stream server IP setting
While in Control mode, open the streaming device’s Control dialog box. In the control parameter
list, ensure that the Streaming IP, Subnet Mask, and Gateway parameters are set to the same
subnet as the Magellan CCS Navigator PC.
• Streaming dialog box property setting
If a streaming dialog box is configured in a Navigator page, make sure IP Address of Target Server is
set to the streaming device stream server IP.Internet Explorer Proxy server settings
If the Navigator PC is set to connect through a proxy server, please make sure both Internet Explorer
(SOCKS proxy) and QuickTime player are configured in your PC.
In Internet Explorer’s Internet Options window’s Connections tab (found in the Tools menu under
Internet Options…), press LAN Settings.
In the lower part of the Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box, make sure Use a proxy
server for your LAN is checked. Make sure proxy server IP address and Port are configured properly.
(Check with your local IT department for proper configurations for your network.)
• QuickTime proxy setting
Under QuickTime player window Edit menu, select Preferences > QuickTime Preferences.
The QuickTime Settings dialog box opens.
In the QuickTime Settings window Advanced tab, check on RTSP Proxy Server to view the proxy
server’s IP address and Port name. Check with your local IT department for proper configurations for
your network.
• Proxy server setting
Confirm with your IT department that the proxy server supports RTSP if you are using a proxy server
for RTSP.
If you do not use a proxy server, check your local PC's proxy setting to ensure that both the Internet
Explorer (SOCKS proxy) and QuickTime are not configured.
Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator

There are many ways to access the Help files for Magellan CCS Navigator.
• To get help with most tools, dialog boxes, and menus, you can right-click on the object that is giving
you trouble and then select Help from the resulting context menu.
• Click inside the portion of the Magellan CCS Navigator interface that interests you and then press F1
on the PC keyboard.
• Click on Help in the main menu.
• Some dialog boxes, including the Property dialog box, have a button to access help. Click the Context-
Sensitive Help icon to open the Help file to a relevant topic.
The Help menu offers access to information needed to operate the software efficiently and to learn or
review common tasks. The Help menu commands are as follows:
Help Menu Commands

Command Purpose
Contents To show the contents of a book (or chapter) on the Contents tab, click the
plus (+) sign to the left of the Book icon.
This expands the Contents tree and shows the list of topics contained in the
chapter. If there is a minus (-) sign to the left of the Book icon, the book
is open. If there is no sign by the Book icon, the book is empty.
To show a Help topic in the Help Topic Viewer, found to the right of the
Contents frame, click the Help Topic icon (a page with a question mark on it)
to the left of the topic title.
Index Type a keyword into the Type in keyword to find box at the top of the frame
and click Display, and any topics containing that keyword will show in a
Topics Found box
Search Type a keyword into the Type in keyword to find box at the top of the frame,
and then click List topics; any topics containing that keyword will show in the
Select Topic to display box; to select a topic to show, click its title and then
click Display; the selected topic shows in the Online Help Topic Viewer frame
on the right side of the Help dialog box
Imagine Communications If the PC has an Internet connection, select this option to move quickly to our
on the Web website
About Magellan CCS Select this option to view the Magellan CCS Navigator software version
Navigator number and copyright dates
Getting Help from Customer Service

We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our customers around the world.
Contact our website or the Customer Service team
Table 63: Customer Service

Phone Toll Free: 1-888-LEITCH6 (534-8246)
Fax: 1-416-445-9020
E-mail: BCDService@imaginecommunications.com
Expediting a Software Solution

If you have a software problem, capture a screen image that illustrates the problem, if possible, and
save that image as a 16-color bitmap. Send that image to Customer Service with a summary of what you
were attempting to do when the problem occurred. This may help our customer service staff determine
the exact nature of the difficulty.
To capture a screen image and save it as a bitmap file, complete these steps:
1. Press PRINT SCRN on the keyboard when the application is running and the problem is occurring.
This will capture the entire computer screen.
Or click in the interface, and press ALT+PRINT SCRN. This will capture only the active dialog box.
2. Click Start, point to Programs (or All Programs for Windows XP), select Accessories, and then
click Paint.
This opens the Windows Paint program.
3. Select Paste from the Edit menu in the Paint application. The screen capture opens as a graphic
image.
4. Select Save As from the File menu and save the captured image as a 16-color bitmap (BMP) file.
E-mail or fax the captured image to the Imagine Communications service center with a description of
the hardware and software configuration and a summary of what you were attempting to do
when the problem occurred.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix B
Appendix B
Frequently Asked Questions

What are the Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing Options?
When Magellan CCS Navigator is installed, its 30-day free license has all options enabled. When this
license expires, you can purchase just the options you need. To review the licenses currently installed on
your Magellan CCS Navigator system, see Viewing Your License Key (on page 37).
License options for Magellan CCS Navigator are described in Navigator Licenses (on page 18).
Can I use CCS Software to Configure my Devices?

Yes. See these topics:
 CCS Device Configuration (on page 153)
 Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656)
 NUCLEUS Configuration (on page 187)
 NEO Frame Configuration (on page 247)
 LCP and RCP Configuration (on page 252)
Can I use Magellan CCS Navigator to Build a Graphical Network Model?

Yes. Even without any optional licenses, an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can
build a graphical hierarchical model of all CCS devices on the broadcast network. This model can also
include non-CCS devices to which CCS has communication gateways. See Network View Construction (on
page 118).
What is the Navigation Pane?

The Navigation pane is the interface to the Navigation tool. This pane contains the resource tree.
Administrator users on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server use the Navigation tool to customize the
hierarchical resource tree, a representation of the CCS network, using resource icons presenting the
devices and their environments.
What is Graphical Navigation?

The NAVIGATOR-SRV license contains tools to create custom graphical pages that represent your
network and its various environments around the world. You can associate objects on these pages with
network events, user-defined actions, and other pages. You can consolidate, simplify, and centralize the
status monitoring of the network's many devices and environments on a few easy-to-use and -
understand pages. This can lead to more efficient and economical operation of your network.
Magellan CCS Navigator comes with a collection of buttons, symbols, and images, for creating the
custom graphical pages. However, you can also import a business logo, map, engineering drawings, or
other image files in *.bmp or *.jpg format for use in creating your custom graphical pages.
Magellan CCS Navigator Clients, which require a Magellan CCS Navigator Server on the network, can
control and monitor Graphical Navigation pages and devices to which they have been granted access.
What is the Graphical Navigation Window?

A Graphical Navigation window is the interface to the Graphical Navigation tool. In Build mode, you will
use the Graphical Navigation tool to create custom graphical pages that represent your network and its
various environments in the Graphical Navigation window. In Control mode, these pages enable you
to monitor network events across the various network environments and implement user-defined
actions affecting them.
What is a Magellan CCS Navigator Page?

A Magellan CCS Navigator page is a document containing graphics that represent a network
environment. The page, which can be saved as a file with the extension *.nav, uses the following objects
to represent network devices and their environment: symbols, images, buttons, links, and text. All these
objects can be clicked, have shortcut menus, and can have user-defined actions associated with them.
You can associate two pages together by associating a "load page" action with an object on one of the
pages. The user-defined action identifies the other page as the target page to load.
Can I Create my Own Magellan CCS Navigator Pages?

Creating and using Graphical Navigation pages is described in depth in Magellan CCS Navigator
Introduction to Graphical Navigation (on page 371). Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator
Servers can create pages.
What are Magellan CCS Navigator Actions?

Magellan CCS Navigator actions are activities that occur when defined events and conditions happen.
Administrator users of Magellan CCS Navigator Servers can define these actions, events, and conditions
as rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. See Defining Rules (on page 429).
Can Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the Overall Status of

Network Devices?
Yes. With a NAVIGATOR-CLI, NAVIGATOR-DEV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-SRV license, Magellan
CCS Navigator can report the overall status of the devices on the network.
Can Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor Network Device Environments?

Yes, Magellan CCS Navigator can report on network device environments, whether they are beside the
PC, in the next room, or on the other side of the world. You can create summary pages to which a
number of alarms will bubble up, so you can consolidate the status monitoring of the network on just
one or a few summary pages.
Can Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router Operations?

With NAVIGATOR-CLI, NAVIGATOR-RTR, and Navigator-SRV licenses, Magellan CCS Navigator can
perform many router operations, including the following:
Router-Specific Actions Available
Action Function
Clear Selected Salvo Clears the current salvo selection
Clear Selected Clears the current router selection
Execute Salvo Sets up and immediately takes a router salvo
Execute Selected Salvo Performs a router salvo
Lock Selected Destination Locks the selected router destination
Protect Selected Destination Protects the selected router destination
Query Destination Status Queries the status of the router destination
Query Signal Presence Status Queries the signal presence status
Restrict Crosspoint Sets up and prevents a particular source and destination from being
taken
Restrict Selected Crosspoint Prevents a selected source and destination from being taken
Select Destination Presets the desired destination in preparation for a Take command
Select Salvo Presets the desired salvo in preparation for Execute Selected Salvo
command
Select Source Presets the desired source in preparation for a Take command
Set Crosspoint Match Type Sets the matching algorithm type used by the On Crosspoint Status
event
Swap Destinations Swaps the crosspoints of two specified destinations
Take Crosspoint Sets up and immediately takes a router crosspoint
Take Selected Takes the selected router source and destination
For more information on router events and actions, see Router Rule Creation (on page 459).
Can I Keep the Application Always on Top?

Due to how the Windows operating system handles window positioning, using the Always On Top
feature does not guarantee that this application’s interface will always be on top. Some other Windows
applications with the Always On Top feature selected may take precedence.
By selecting the Always On Top menu entry of the Window menu, the Magellan CCS Navigator
application interface is always on top of other applications. When this option is set, if you start another
application within or outside of the application, the new application will appear below the current
application. To have Magellan CCS Navigator always appear on top, in the Window menu select
Always On Top.
Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once?

Sometimes columned grids have multiple check boxes that you are required to select or clear. You can
use common Windows methods for selecting multiple adjacent or nonadjacent check boxes, and then
select or clear them simultaneously.
1. To select multiple rows, complete one of these steps:

 To select multiple adjacent rows, press and hold SHIFT on your keyboard, and then click the first
and last row within the column you want to select.
 To select multiple nonadjacent rows, press and hold CTRL on your keyboard, and then click each
row within the column you want to select.
2. To select or clear the highlighted check boxes simultaneously, press the SPACEBAR on your
keyboard.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix C
Appendix C
Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty

Information
Copyrights
Copyright 2003-2014, Imagine Communications. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1981-1999, Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1994-1996, QLogic Corporation. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2004-2007 Amino Communications Ltd. All rights reserved.
Portions © 1989, 1991, 1992, 1998 Carnegie Mellon University. All rights reserved.
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Portions © 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of
California. All Rights Reserved
Portions © 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All
rights reserved.
Portions © 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions © 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network. All rights reserved.
Portions © Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003. All rights reserved.
Trademarks
CCS, CCS CoPilot, Magellan CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, Command Control System, CineTone, CinePhase,
CineSound, DigiBus, DigiPeek, Digital Glue, DigiWorks, DTV Glue, EventWORKS, EZ HD, Genesis, HDTV
Glue, Icon, Iconlogo, IconMaster, IconMaster Nav, IconSet, IconStation, Image Q, Inca, Inca Station,
InfoCaster, Inscriber, Inscriber CG—FX, Integrator, LeFont, Leitch, LogoMotion, MediaFile, MIX BOX,
NEO, the NEO design, NEOSCOPE, NewsFlash, Nexio, Opus, Panacea, PanelMAPPER, Platinum, Portal,
PROM-Slide, RouterMAPPER, RouterWORKS, Signal Quality Manager, SpyderWeb, SuiteView,
TitleMotion, UNIFRAME, Velocity, VelocityHD, VideoCarte, Videotek, and X75 are trademarks of Imagine
Communications, which may be registered in the United States, Canada, and/or other countries.
Adobe, Acrobat and Reader are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in
the United States and/or other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 2000, Windows NT, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows,
ODBC, and Visual FoxPro are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Software User License and Warranty Agreement

Carefully read all of the terms and conditions of this license agreement before using Magellan CCS
Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. By using this software, you indicate your complete and
unconditional acceptance of these terms and conditions.
This document constitutes a legal agreement between you and Imagine Communications, concerning
the use of CCS Navigator, CCS Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. This agreement constitutes the complete agreement
between you and Imagine Communications.
License
Imagine Communications grants the licensee a non-exclusive license to use the software in this package
on one server or workstation in a single network installation, which installation shall consist of no more
than 1,000 servers or workstations. A network is defined as any continuously connected group of
computers on one cabling scheme without software or hardware bridges.
You may make up to two copies of the software for backup purposes only. Imagine Communications
retains title to and ownership of this copy and all backup copies and all proprietary rights related to the
software and the accompanying manuals. You may not copy any part of the accompanying manuals,
copy the software except as permitted above, make alterations or modifications to the software, or
attempt to decompile or discover the source code of the software.
The software may not be transferred, sublicensed, rented or leased. Both the license and your right to
use the software terminate automatically if you violate any part of this agreement. In the event
of termination, you must immediately destroy all copies of the software or return them to Imagine
Communications.
Limited Software Warranty

If you discover physical defects in the media on which the software is distributed or in the accompanying
manuals, Imagine Communications will replace the media or manuals for a period of ninety (90) days
after purchase by you. You must return the disk or manuals to Imagine Communications, prepaid,
within the warranty period, accompanied by proof of purchase.
This warranty does not apply to defects due directly or indirectly to misuse, abuse, negligence, accident,
repairs, or alterations made by the customer or another party or if the serial number has been removed
or defaced.
Imagine Communications disclaims all implied warranties, including without limitation warranties of
merchantability, performance, and fitness for a particular purpose. Imagine Communications will not be
liable for any bug, error, omission, defect, deficiency, or nonconformity in any software. As a result, the
software is sold "as is," and the purchaser assumes the entire risk as to its suitability, quality and
performance.
Limitation of Liability
Imagine Communications shall in no event be liable for direct, indirect, special, incidental, contingent, or
consequential damages resulting from any defect in the software or its documentation, including
damages from loss of data, downtime, goodwill, damage to or replacement of equipment or property,
and any costs of recovering, reprogramming, or reproducing any program or data used in conjunction
with Imagine Communications products, even if Imagine Communications has been advised of the
possibility of such damages.
You agree that Imagine Communications liability, arising out of contract, negligence, strict liability in tort
or written or oral information or advice given by Imagine Communications employees, dealers, or agents
will in no way increase the scope of this warranty. Nor may you rely on any such written or oral
communication.
The laws of the Province of Ontario, Canada, shall govern this agreement.
NET SNMP License

Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure that
you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the
name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD
TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
• Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
• Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and
the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
• Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
• The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All
rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.
This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
• Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc
• Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
• Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of
their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
• The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names
may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix D
Appendix D
Glossary
A
Acknowledge: A command that clears a selected alarm from the Diagnostics tool’s Monitor and
Selected tabs. The command also changes the status of the alarm’s Acknowledged field from No to Yes.
Action: Component used to perform specific tasks within the Graphical Navigation tool. CCS actions
perform Magellan CCS Navigator-related tasks, router actions perform router-specific tasks, and
Magellan CCS Navigator actions perform GUI-related tasks.
Administrator: A software user with special access rights to set up a software application at a user site.
An administrator generally works in a company’s computer support department.
Advanced Router Control plug-in: An optional plug-in that adds to Magellan CCS Navigator tools for
controlling and monitoring routers.
Administrators: A user group responsible for installing, configuring, and supporting the CCS software at
a company.
Alarm: A message that CCS software generates to alert users when an extraordinary event occurs
on the CCS network, such as a loss of input, loss of power, loss of connection, or a malfunctioning or
removed card.
API: Application Program Interface. The specification describing how a programmer writing an
application accesses the behavior and state of classes and objects.
AuthenticationFailure: An SNMP trap generated by an agent on an SNMP-managed device that
indicates that an instance of authentication failure has occurred.
B
BO/S: Broadcast Operating System. The operating system created by Leitch Technology to manage its
Command Control System (CCS) products over a CCS network.
Breakaway switch or breakaway take: Occurs when a logical source is partially switched to a logical
destination.
We can define a router system to have two levels, video and audio, because the video and audio signals
typically are electrically distinct and not transmitted on the same wire. Two routers or router modules
must operate in tandem across the two levels to switch the audio and video. (One router frame may
support multiple levels through different modules in the same physical router frame.)
Imagine a router system that has two logical sources, VR1 and VR2, and two logical destinations, SAT1
and SAT2. Each of these logical sources and destinations has two levels of signals (both audio and video),
which comprise the complete "logical" signal.
If you switch, or take, the logical source VR1 to the logical destination SAT1, you actually take two
crosspoints to switch the complete logical source VR1 signals to the logical SAT1 destination. One is the
crosspoint for the video level and the other is the crosspoint for the audio level.
If you want the SAT1 logical designation to carry the video component of the VR1 source and use the
audio component from the VR2 source (for example, during a voice-over of a news story, when the
reporter : narrates over stock footage), you take the crosspoint on the video level of VR1 to SAT1 as
usual, but then take the crosspoint on the audio level of VR2 to SAT1. This partial switch, in which only
part of a logical source appears at a logical destination, or a logical output carries signals from two or
more logical sources, is called a breakaway switch or a breakaway take.
Browse sequence: A group of related Help topics that guide users through a software application’s
process or a set of information. Users navigate browse sequences with Previous and Next buttons.
Build mode: An operational mode in a CCS software application that is used to discover CCS devices,
build hierarchical views of the network, and configure individual devices.
C
Catalog folder: A folder in the Navigation pane that contains icons representing each of the devices that
a CCS software product supports.
CCS: Command Control System. Hardware and software connected together over a BO/S network.
CCS CoPilot™: A CCS configuration tool for installation on Windows-based PCs that offered a quick, easy
way of installing and upgrading CCS devices. CoPilot worked only in Build mode, and had similar
functionality to Magellan CCS Navigator without any license keys. CoPilot was integrated into the high-
end CCS software and also available as a standalone product.
CoPilot can scan your network to find devices residing on the network. Then you can configure their
network settings, transfer software upgrades, look up version information for the device’s hardware and
software, and perform other configuration tasks specific to the device, such as restarting the device
after you make configuration changes.
CCS DPS-Gateway: A device that translates the DPS Communications Network (DCN) language into
Command Control System (CCS) language, the language understood by Magellan CCS Navigator, and CCS
into DCN, the language of Leitch’s popular DPS-575 digital processing synchronizers. This enables
Magellan CCS Navigator, Pilot, and CoPilot software to communicate with Leitch DPS-575 digital
processing synchronizers, which are not CCS devices. Magellan CCS Navigator also offers some degree of
remote monitoring of the synchronizers via the gateway.
Magellan CCS Navigator™: A CCS software application for installation on Windows-based PCs that
enables you to easily create custom browser pages that represent your network and its various
environments around the world. You can associate objects on these pages with network events, user-
defined actions, and other browser pages. These pages consolidate, simplify, and centralize the status
monitoring of the network's many devices and environments on a few easy-to-use and -understand
browser pages. This can lead to more efficient and economical operation of your network.
Magellan CCS Navigator comes with a gallery of buttons, symbols, images, and page templates for
creating the custom browser pages. However, you can also import your business logo and other image
files for use in creating your custom browser pages.
CCS Pilot™: A CCS software application for installation on Windows-based PCs that enabled a user
to discover, navigate, control, monitor, and secure access to CCS-enabled devices on a network.
Features included remote control of all CCS components, centralized or distributed monitoring of all CCS
components, and network and component topology management. This product was replaced with the
NAVIGATOR-DEV license.
CCS Protocol™: Command Control System Protocol. A binary/ASCII protocol used to connect existing
control and automation systems to CCS-compliant devices. It is a simple protocol accessed via a serial
port or TCP/IP sockets.
CCS RouterNAV: A CCS software application based on Magellan CCS Navigator, which only provides
control and configuration functionality for routers.
CCS software applications: Software that implements the Command Control System of device control.
These applications currently include the Magellan CCS Navigator, Pilot, and CoPilot software.
Check box: An element used in forms in which users select choices by clicking a box. When a check box
shows a check mark or X, the feature is selected or on. When the check box is blank or clear, the feature
is not selected or off.
Child resource: A resource contained by the parent resource.
Clipboard: A temporary storage place for retaining information that was selected and copied or cut from
a file.
Coaxial cable: A type of copper cable. It includes one channel that carries the signal, surrounded first by
a layer of insulation and then by another concentric physical channel running along the same axis. The
outer channel serves as a ground.
Coldstart: An SNMP trap generated by an agent on a managed device that indicates that the sending
agent is re-initializing with significant changes to its configuration.
Command Control System™ (CCS): A distributed real-time command and control system used to
configure, provision, and monitor CCS and third-party equipment. CCS provides open and scalable access
via standard communication protocols (TCP/IP, SNMP, HTML, and serial) to all components of a
networked studio.
CCS components include the following:
• Monitoring and control applications
• Discovery and inventory management applications
• Network and device configuration applications
• Local and remote device control panels
• Gateways to interface to third-party and existing CCS networks
• Web browser interfaces
Condition: Part of a rule. Some actions only trigger an event when a condition is met. Conditions are
used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-
SNMP license.
Conditional event: An event that must happen in a specific way for an action to be triggered.
Conditional events are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Configuration folder: A folder in the Navigation tool in which a CCS software user creates configurations
for frames, control panels, and gateways.
Configuration node: A resource icon that appears as a descendant of the top Configuration folder and
represents configuration information for a frame or control panel and its assigned functional blocks
(resource cards).
Configuration dialog box: An interface to the Configuration tool.
Configuration tool: A CCS software tool for configuring CCS devices connected to a CCS network.
Contents: The table of contents for the Help file that shows the structure of the Help file
in an expandable and collapsible hierarchy. Use it to move through the application’s Help system and
find information. Book and Help Topic icons represent topic destinations.
Control mode: An operational mode in CCS software used to control CCS devices.
Control panel: A device that regulates the control parameters of one or more devices.
Control tool: A CCS software tool for controlling CCS devices connected to the CCS network.
Control dialog box: An interface to the Control tool.
Cross-reference: A keyword linked to another keyword in the index. When you select the cross-
reference in the index, your cursor jumps in the file to the related keyword.
Crosspoint: A physical connection between a router input (I) and a router output (O). For each of the
outputs in a router, the number of crosspoints is equal to the number of inputs. Only one crosspoint,
however, may be active at any given time. When a crosspoint is active, the input and output pair (I, O)
associated with the crosspoint are connected, and the signal present at input I is sent to output O of the
router.
Custom property: A variable that holds a temporary value that defines or triggers events. Custom
properties are used by rules when the Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
D
DBMS: Database Management System.
Device Control license: The NAVIGATOR-DEV license supports the remote discovery, configuration,
monitoring, control and diagnostics of supported devices.
Device hierarchy: Logical organization of devices.
Diagnostics tool: A CCS software tool for locating and diagnosing problems with CCS devices connected
to a broadcast network.
Diagnostics dialog box: An interface to the Diagnostics tool.
Dialog box: A Windows-based box containing command buttons and options to carry out a particular
command or task.
Discovery: The process of finding devices on a network.ADD detail.
Discovery folder: A folder containing the results of a discovery, a process in which the CCS software
locates all CCS devices attached to each of a network's IP addresses.
Discovery tool: A CCS software tool used to find devices connected to a CCS network, using the devices’
IP addresses.
Discovery pane: An interface to the Discovery tool.
DLL: Dynamic Link Library.
DNS: Domain Name System.
Drag-and-drop operation: A technique for moving an object from one location to another using the
mouse.
Drop-down menu: An element in forms that enables you to make a selection from a hidden list. You
click an arrow to the right of the list field and then select an item from the resulting list.
E
EgpNeighborLoss: An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates that indicates that the
agent's EGP protocol has lost an EGP peer relationship.
Engineer user: A CCS software user responsible for building, configuring, installing, and repairing the
component devices that together comprise the CCS network.
EnterpriseSpecific: An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed devices generates that indicates the
occurrence of an enterprise-specific event.
Error: A device state which may occur when CCS software encounters a problem communicating with a
device—for example, when someone removes a card from a frame or replaces one card with another
card type.
Ethernet: The most widely installed local area network (LAN) technology. An Ethernet LAN typically uses
coaxial cable or special grades of twisted pair wires.
Event: Part of a Navigator rule. Events trigger actions. Some events are conditional. Events are available
in Magellan CCS Navigator installations that include a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Extensible: Built so that later users or designers can extend its capabilities.
F
Favorites: A tab or page in the Help file on which you can store a list of Help topics that you commonly
reference. A user-defined subset of parameters for a device that can be used to configure a control
panel.
Format: A control domain that groups a device parameters according to signal formats.
Frame: A box or chassis that contains product modules—such as cards, power supplies and fans.
FTP: File Transfer Protocol, a TCP/IP protocol that enables you to transfer files between two different
computers on a TCP/IP network.
Full-text search: An Online Help feature that creates a database of Help information so you can search
for words that occur in the content of Help topics.
Function: A control domain that groups device parameters according to their function.
Functional block: A card controlled as a single unit in a frame.
G
General user: A CCS software user who has no responsibility for installing or supporting the software.
A general user can create unique tree views of the network, but has no control over the creation of user
or group accounts or the assignment of device access rights.
Generic Control dialog box: A generic CCS software tool for controlling CCS devices connected to a CCS
network.
Global property: A page property that is available for all pages, rather then just the page where it was
created (as opposed to a custom property). In a Graphical Navigation page, global properties are used to
create rules and macros.
GUI: Graphical User Interface.
H
Host: In Internet Protocol (IP) specifications, any device that has full two-way access to other devices on
the TCP/IP network.
Hot-swappable: Term used to describe a device that a user can remove from a frame and replace
without interrupting power to the frame or affecting the operation of any other device, other than those
that directly depend on the removed device. The replacement device should configure automatically to
the same working state and settings as its predecessor without special user intervention.
Hotspot: A clickable area in a topic or image that opens other topics, shows text-only pop-ups, plays
sound or video, or jumps to websites, news groups, or other destinations.
HTTP: Hypertext Transfer Protocol. The set of rules for exchanging files on the World Wide Web.
Hyperlink: An area in a Help topic or Web page that changes when a user clicks the spot. It is normally
indicated by underlined and colored text. The mouse cursor turns into a hand when the user hovers the
mouse over the text or graphic. The hand indicates that if the user clicks the area, another topic or a
piece of linked information will appear.
I
ICMP: Internet Control Message Protocol. A message-control and error-reporting protocol that uses IP
packets.
IconMasterNav: Another name for the optional Master Control license for Magellan CCS Navigator that
complements the IconMaster hardware panel and allows faster access to many of the operational
feature submenus and audio meters.
IE: (Microsoft) Internet Explorer.
Interface Control plug-in: An optional plug-in that provides tools for device control and monitoring
when a NAVIGATOR-INT license is available.
IP: Internet Protocol. This protocol within TCP/IP determines the breakup of data messages into packets,
the routing of the packets from the sender to the destination network and station, and the reassembly
of the packets into the original data messages at the destination.
IP address: :A sequence of four numbers, each containing from one to three digits, that together
identify an Internet Protocol address for a host device connected to a TCP/IP network.
IP packet: The unit of data routed between an origin and a destination on the TCP/IP network.
Each of these packets is separately numbered and includes the Internet address of the source and
destination.
L
License: A purchased option that adds tools to your Magellan CCS Navigator installation. Magellan CCS
Navigator normally starts with all options activated on a temporary basis.
Link: A line or arrow in Magellan CCS Navigator’s Browser dialog box that links two symbols.
LinkDown: An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates to indicate a failure in one of
the sending agent’s communication links.
LinkUp: An SNMP trap that an agent on a managed device generates to indicate that the normal running
status of one of the sending agent’s communication links has been restored.
Local Active: A device state that indicates that a device is operating and can only be controlled with a
control panel or card-edge controls.
Locked: The state of a router destination that a user is preventing from receiving signals from any new
router source. Only the user who locked a router destination can unlock it.
M
Macro: A group of actions that can be executed at a specific event. Macros are associated with rules if
you have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license.
Master Control plug-in: Combines tools to create and operate pages to control IconMaster switchers.
MDI: Multiple Document Interface. (CCS software and its tools run primarily as standalone MDI
worksheet applications.)
MIB: Management Information Base. A formal description of a set of network objects that can be
managed using and defined by the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP).
Monitor point: Property of a device that can be set through the Navigation Properties dialog.
This property corresponds to the name of a configured router source that is physically connected to the
signal monitoring output of a device.
N
Navigator page: A page containing objects that represent a network environment as well as any user-
defined actions. The page uses the following objects to represent network devices and their
environment: symbols, images, buttons, links, and text. All these objects are clickable, have shortcut
menus, and can have user-defined actions associated with them.
You can associate two Navigator pages together by creating a "load page" action for an object on one of
the pages. The user-defined action identifies the other page as the target page to load.
Navigation tool: A tool that enables CCS software users to create hierarchical views of the organization
of their CCS devices.
Navigation pane: An interface to the Navigation tool that contains the resource tree. One uses the
Navigation tool to customize the resource tree, using resource icons presenting the devices and their
environment.
Network active: A device state in which a CCS device is operational and can be controlled remotely.
Network folder: A folder containing a hierarchical view of a CCS network. The view contains icons
representing all the studios, racks, servers, frames, products, and functional blocks comprising the
network.
Node: A connection point in a network that serves as either a redistribution point or an end point for
data transmissions.
Not ready: A device state in which the TCP/IP connection with a resource has been lost
when the resource was restarting or was disconnected from the network.
O
ODBC: Open Database Connectivity.
Operation: A control domain that groups a device parameters according to operations on signals.
Operational mode: A method of operating in a software application. CCS software generally has two
operational modes: Build and Control. If your Magellan CCS Navigator install has no license, or if the
license has expired, Magellan CCS Navigator operates only in Build mode.
Operator user: A typical CCS software user who works as an equipment operator and is responsible
for setting and monitoring the control values of different signals as these signals flow through the CCS
network. This person typically has no need to go inside the frame of a particular device, but manipulates
exterior controls of products or functional blocks residing inside the frame.
P
Parameter ID: An integer value that uniquely identifies a controllable parameter on a device.
Parameter name: The name of a controllable parameter on a device.
Parent resource: A resource that acts as a container or parent for one or more other CCS devices.
PDF: Portable Document File, a file that can be read by Adobe's Acrobat Reader software.
Ping: A user command and an underlying protocol based on ICMP that enables users to verify that a
particular IP address exists and can accept requests.
Plug-in: An item which is not available in all versions of Magellan CCS Navigator. Examples of plug-ins
include Advanced Router Control, Master Control and Interface Control.
Preset: A predefined control setting for one or more CCS devices.
Preset folder: A Navigation folder that contains preset files.
Product: Two or more functional blocks controlled as a single unit.
Property sheet: A dialog box that shows the properties for an object in the interface.
Protected: The state of a router destination that is prevented from receiving the signal of any new
router source except when the request is made by the user who protected the destination. Only the
user who protected a router destination can unprotect it.
Protocol: In information technology, a special set of rules that the end points of a telecommunication
connection use to communicate.
Push-Pin icon: A pictorial symbol found on a property sheet that enables you to keep the property sheet
open while you perform other tasks. When selected, the icon changes appearance to show that it is
enabled.
R
Rack: A shelving unit containing broadcast equipment.
Radio button: An element used in forms that enables you to select only one alternative from a group.
Radio buttons are presented in a list, one of which is selected by default. Clicking a new button may at
times clear a previously selected item.
Refresh: A command that causes a device to restart without losing power—that is, a soft reboot.
Resource status bar: A bar that shows information about a CCS device's connection to the network and
indicates if the resource is ready for control through the CCS Control tool.
Router: A device that directs one or more input signals to more than one destination. Routing switchers
can direct analog video or audio, digital video or audio, HDTV, time code, RS-232/422 data, Ethernet,
etc.
Router folder: A folder in the Navigation pane that contains routers and routing views. From this folder,
you can start a router configuration dialog box.
Router input: An individual signal in a source.
Router destination: A combination of output signals.
Router level: A type of signal, such as audio or video.
Router output: An individual signal in a destination.
Router source: A combination of input signals.
Rule: A combination of an event and a condition which trigger an action.
S
Salvo: A predefined list of (router) crosspoint operations that, when executed, occur simultaneously.
Serial: The transmission of individual bits of data one at a time with time separating the individual bits.
Server: A computer or program on a network that responds to commands from a client program or
computer.
Server icon: A pictorial symbol that represents one IP address. Each IP address may serve one or more
frames, products, or functional blocks in CCS software.
Server node: In CCS software, this type of node represents any device that supports the TCP/IP protocol.
Shortcut icon: An icon that gives CCS software users one-click access to resource icons in the Network,
Discovery, Configuration, Temporary, Catalog, or Preset folders in the Navigation pane without moving
down through the hierarchical structure of the Resource tree.
Shortcut menu: A menu that shows when you right-click an object. The menu contains a list
of commands specific to the right-clicked object.
Signal monitoring tool: A CCS software tool that enables you to output a signal from a CCS device to an
external monitor or a dialog box on the application’s desktop.
Signal monitoring dialog box: The user interface to the Signal monitoring tool.
Simple Network Management Protocol: SNMP. A protocol that enables SNMP applications to manage
devices through SNMP agents across a network. CCS supports SNMP as one of several mechanisms
for managing equipment. SNMP, based on UDP, is best suited for monitoring and controlling devices in
an environment that does not have real-time requirements. Other CCS-supported protocols, such as
those based on TCP/IP, are better suited for the real-time monitoring and control of devices.
SNMP: See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SNMP Control plug-in: An optional plug-in that provides tools for building Navigator pages (with a
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license) for communicating with SNMP-enabled devices.
SNMP trap: An SNMP packet generated by devices supporting the SNMP protocol. The seven types of
SNMP traps are as follows: coldstart, warmstart, linkup, linkdown, authenticationfailure,
egpNeighborloss, and enterprisespecific.
Specific Control Dialog Box: A specific CCS software tool for controlling a specific CCS device.
Stream: A control domain that groups a device parameters according to their position in the signal
processing stream.
Studio: A broadcast studio managed as one unit.
Subnet: An identifiable subunit of a network, such as the devices in one geographic location, in one
studio, or on the same local area network.
SuiteView Control plug-in: An optional plug-in that provides conditional events and actions to the
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license specifically for the purpose of communicating with
SuiteView multiviewers.
T
Tab: A page in a dialog box or property sheet with an index-style tab.
Take: The act of making a crosspoint active in terms of a source and a destination. For example, the
statement "Take Input 2 to Output 5" makes the crosspoint that connects Input 2 to Output 5 active—
taking In 2 to Out 5.
Take crosspoint: The act of making a crosspoint active.
TCP: Transmission Control Protocol. A set of rules for exchanging messages with other Internet points at
the information packet level.
TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol, developed by the U.S. Department of Defense
for communications between computers. TCP/IP has become the standard for data transmission over
networks.
Telnet: A user command and an underlying TCP/IP protocol that enables you to access
remote computers.
Temporary folder: A folder like the Network folder that contains a network hierarchy,
but the Temporary folder’s network is a draft or preliminary version. Only the Network folder’s network
view operates. Temporary folders are a place to build rough drafts of tree views of the network. You can
also use these folders to hold information about equipment temporarily offline.
Tree: A hierarchical diagram in the CCS Navigation pane that reflects the organization of the CCS
network.
U
UDP: User Datagram Protocol. A communications protocol that offers a limited amount of service when
messages are exchanged between computers in a network that uses the Internet Protocol (IP).
URL: Uniform Resource Locator. The address of a resource accessible on the TCP/IP network. The type of
resource depends on the Internet application protocol.
User account: An account representing one application user with a unique user name and password.
User group: One or more users who have the same access rights to a set of actions.
User interface: The set of dials, knobs, operating system commands, graphical display formats, and
other devices provided by a computer or a program to enable you to communicate and use the
computer or program.
User profile: A group of settings that define how your e-mail software is set up for a particular user.
These settings control how your e-mail system addresses and delivers your mail and how it stores your
mail and folders. Your e-mail software creates this user profile.
V
Virtual device: A user-defined group of devices that can be controlled by a control panel as if they were
a single device.
Virtual Device folder: A folder in the Navigation pane where users can construct virtual devices while in
Build mode.
W
Warmstart: An SNMP trap generated by an agent on a managed device that indicates that the sending
agent is re-initializing itself with no changes in its configuration. The agent re-initializes its previous
configuration tables.
Wildcard expression: An advanced search technique using asterisks (*) and question marks (?) to
represent any characters (*) or character (?). You can use wildcards in full-text searching to narrow the
target of your search.
Workbook mode: A mode that enables you to flip easily between multiple Control dialog boxs to work
with them simultaneously. Each dialog box is on a separate tab or page in the Control dialog box. The
tabs are located at the bottom of the dialog box. The command to activate workbook mode is on the
View menu.
User's Guide Volume 2: Graphical Navigation
Volume 2: Graphical Navigation

In this section:
Preface ................................................................................................... 369
Introduction to Graphical Navigation .................................................... 371
Graphical Navigation Page Creation ...................................................... 372
Defining Rules ........................................................................................ 429
Router Rule Creation.............................................................................. 459
SNMP Plug-in ......................................................................................... 483
SuiteView Plug-in ................................................................................... 489
Using Graphical Navigation Pages ......................................................... 498
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting .................................................. 503
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
CCS Navigator User Manual Volume 2: Graphical Navigation is a companion to CCS Navigator User
Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
This manual details the features, operational procedures, and specifications of Graphical Navigation
tools. For information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to the CCS
Navigator User Manual Volume 1: Device Control.
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for the setup and/or
operation of the graphical navigation tools of CCS Magellan CCS Navigator software.
Revision History
Edition Software Version Release Date
A Navigator 4.0 September 2007
B Navigator 4.1 November 2007
C Navigator 4.3 August 2008
D Navigator 4.4 November 2008
E Navigator 4.5 April 2009
F Navigator 4.6 November 2009
G Navigator 4.6.1 June 2010
H Navigator 4.7 January 2011
I Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011
J Navigator 4.8 March 2012
Writing Conventions
Conventions

Italics Indicates email addresses, names of books and publications, and first
instances of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT,
DELETE
> Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and
windows

Note: Indicates important information that helps to avoid and troubleshoot
problems
Application CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot

The documentation for your product is included in your your installation package as an Adobe Acrobat
PDF file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an electronic document integrated into the software. While
Chapter 18
Introduction to Graphical Navigation

The following sections outline tools that are available with the NAVIGATOR-SRV and NAVIGATOR-SNMP
licenses. The basic interface is covered in Interface Overview (on page 57).
The NAVIGATOR-SRV and NAVIGATOR-SNMP licenses are used to create Navigation pages. A Navigation
page is a document containing graphics that represent a network environment.
The NAVIGATOR-RTR license and router pages are described in Introduction to Routing Components (on
page 656).
In Build mode, Administrator users with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create
pages that include buttons, symbols, links, images, Navigator frames, ActiveX controls, signal monitors
and text objects. Each of the graphical objects have configurable properties that determine their
appearance and how they respond to specific, defined events, such as mouse clicks and router events.
You can add objects to a page and then reposition, resize, and configure them as required.
If you need other images in addition to the supplied ones, you can import any *.bmp or *.jpg files.
Navigation pages can be created using a panel wizard, or they can be created by hand. CCS Magellan CCS
Navigator has wizards for creating specific pages depending on the plug-ins you have. Those wizards are
described in the plug-in documentation to which they relate.
Panels fall into two categories:

• Navigator pages
A Navigator page—for example, a Source Preview panel or Multi Display panel—has router elements
as part of the panel.
The Navigator page can have rules (actions and events) applied to it, and can be edited after
creation using page building elements, such as those outlined in the following topics:
 Graphical Navigation Page Creation (on page 372)
 Router Rule Creation (on page 459)
• Control GUIs
A control GUI usually represents a single routing view or IconMaster device. A control GUI cannot be
edited to add buttons, rules, etc., but provides easy access to a wide range of routing operations.
Chapter 19
Graphical Navigation Page Creation

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create pages, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV,
NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use use pages to monitor and control devices. Only
Administrator users can create and modify pages.
A Navigation page is a document containing graphics that represent a network environment.
An Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create Navigation pages
using a panel wizard, or by hand. CCS Magellan CCS Navigator has wizards for creating specific pages
depending on the plug-ins you have. Those wizards are described in the plug-in documentation to which
they relate.
The following sections describe the Build mode tools used to create pages. If you are an Administrative
user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, you can add buttons, symbols, links, images,
Navigator frames, ActiveX controls, signal monitors, and text objects to a Navigation page. If you need
images other than those supplied, you can import *.bmp or *.jpg files. Each graphical object has
configurable properties that determine its appearance and how it responds to specific, defined events,
such as mouse clicks and router events. You can reposition, resize, and configure objects after adding
them to a page.
You can associate two pages together by associating a "load page" action with an object on one of the
pages, and then identify the other page as the target page to load.
In Control mode, the finished drawing becomes a Navigation page, *.nav, which you can use
for monitoring and control of your network environment. On a page, you can click buttons, symbols,
links and other objects, open shortcut menus and define actions to associate with objects. See Using
Graphical Navigation Pages (see "Graphical Navigation Page Creation" on page 372).
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page

Do NOT try to copy pages or databases from one folder to another. Do NOT rename *.nav files.
Unpredictable results may occur, including program crashes and loss of data.
When creating a new Graphical Navigation page, Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode. Only
an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create Graphical
Navigation pages. To create a new, blank Navigation page, do one of the following:
• Click the New icon on the toolbar. A blank, unnamed Graphical Navigation page appears.
or
• From the main menu, select Tools > Graphical Navigation. A new, unnamed Graphical Navigation
page appears in the Graphical Navigation area.
or
• Click File > New. The New Page Wizard opens.
Pick the icon for the type of page you want to create. To create a generic page, pick the Blank Page
icon on the General tab.
Various wizards may be available depending on your system’s configuration.
The wizard may have multiple pages, if you have plug-ins installed as part of your Magellan CCS
Navigator system. Follow the instructions for the type of page you are creating.
For plug-in related New Page Wizards, see following the specific plug-in documentation for more
information.
To edit the properties of the page, including its background, custom properties, rules and page
properties, see Setting the Properties of a Page (on page 384).
For information on adding objects and buttons to the page, see Adding Objects to a Graphical
Navigation Page (on page 387), Editing a Page (on page 424), and Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS
Navigator Object or Page (on page 430).
To save the page, see Saving Graphical Navigation Pages (on page 375). To re-open the page, see
Opening an Existing Page (on page 376).
Creating a Frame View Page

Before you can create a Frame View page using the Frame View Wizard, the frame must be discovered.
You must be an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to discover the
frame, or to build a page. See CCS Device Discovery (on page 99).
To create a Frame View page, follow these steps:

1. In the File menu, select New....
The Navigator New Page Wizard opens.
2. Click the General tab.
The box now shows the format options for the new Opus panel and includes a preview of the two
layout options, Blank Page and Frame View.
3. Double click on the Frame View icon.
The Page Wizard opens.
4. Choose the frame for which you want to create a page from the drop-down menu at the top of the
dialog box.
Check the information about the frame that appears below it. This can help you ensure that it is the
right frame, if it has been named obscurely.
5. Choose a background from the Page Background menu.
6. Click Finish.
A progress bar appears while Magellan CCS Navigator builds your frame image.
Figure 38: Finished Frame page
You can create a rule to load a frame page. See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ Action (on
Saving Graphical Navigation Pages

The Save command saves the contents of the currently active page. To save the current Graphical
Navigation page, click Save on the toolbar, or click File on the menu bar and then select Save.
To save all unsaved content in all open pages, click Save All on the toolbar, or click File on the menu bar
and then select Save All. This command can speed the closing of multiple pages in Magellan CCS
Navigator.
If the Graphical Navigation page has been saved before, it will overwrite the previous file.
If the Graphical Navigation page has not been saved before, a Save As dialog box will open.
Filling in the contents of this dialog box is optional. You can enter a descriptive name or leave the Page
Name at its default. You can add a Description. You can place checks beside each user and user group
that will have access to this page.
You can assign or alter access to this page from the User Accounts or User Groups screens at any time.
See Changing User Account Information (on page 53). Pages are stored in the Magellan CCS Navigator
Server , and can be accessed by a Magellan CCS Navigator Client user (with a NAVIGATOR-CLI license)
who has the appropriate privileges.
To create a duplicate of a page, right click on the page and then select Save Page As from the menu that
appears. A page created in this manner can be modified without altering the original.
Opening an Existing Page

To open an existing Graphical Navigation page, click the Open File icon on the toolbar, or click File on
the menu bar and then select Open. When the Open box appears, select a .nav file from the list of files
in the Page folder, and then click Open.
You can have multiple Graphical Navigation pages open for editing or control.
Deleting a Navigator Page

 Click Delete on the toolbar.

 Choose File > Delete from the main menu.
The Delete dialog box opens.
2. Click a row, and then click Delete.
You can only delete one row at a time.
Previewing and Printing a Page

The Print Preview and Print commands are only available when a Graphical Navigation page is open.
To show what a page will look like when it prints, click Print Preview on the toolbar or File menu in the
page is open.
To print a Magellan CCS Navigator page, click Print on the toolbar or File menu when the page is open.
Using Zoom Tools

No other functions are available while you are in Zoom Window mode. To perform other actions, exit
Zoom Window mode.
To use the Zoom menu to view a Graphical Navigation page, right-click in an empty area of the page,
and select Zoom. Then select one of the four options on the Zoom menu. These options are as follows:
Table 64: Commands on the Zoom Menu

Command Function
Fit in Window Sizes the objects to fit in the existing page
Actual Size Shows the objects in their actual size in the existing page
Zoom In Enlarges the objects in the existing page (Keyboard shortcut: Press CTRL++)
Zoom Out Shrinks the objects in the existing page (Keyboard shortcut: Press CTRL+-)
Zoom Window Zooms to a specific region
Zoom Previous Switches back to the previous zoom percentage
Also, on the Graphical Navigation toolbar, there is a Zoom button. See Using the Graphical Navigation
Toolbar (on page 500) for more information.
Panning in a Graphical Navigation Page

No other functions are available while you are in Pan mode. To perform other actions, exit the Pan
mode.
The Pan function aids in moving within the Graphical Navigation page. It turns the cursor into a hand.
Click and drag to move the page about within the Graphical Navigation page. The cursor will change to a
closed hand while you are dragging the page.
To access the Pan function, do one of the following:

• Press CTRL+A.
• Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page and from the resulting shortcut menu, select Pan. The
cursor will change from an arrow to an open hand.
• Click Pan on the Graphical Navigation toolbar (Control mode only). The button remains selected
while the function is activated.
To exit Pan mode, do one of the following:

• Press CTRL+A
• Right-click within the Graphical Navigation page and select Exit from the shortcut menu.
• Click Pan on the Graphical Navigation toolbar to deselect it (Control mode only)
Defining Global Properties

You can also define custom properties, which only apply to a single page.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two types of properties: global properties and custom properties. Global
properties are available for all pages, and you can use them to define rules for all pages, whereas custom
properties are only available on the page where you created them. Global properties are identified by a
preceding (GP) in all Properties lists.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page (on page 385).
To create a global property:

1. From the main menu, choose Tools > Rules and Macros...
A dialog box appears.
2. Click the Global Properties tab.
3. Click New in the top right of the screen. A new row of blank cells will appear under the Name, Initial
Value and Description columns.
4. Click in the cell in the Name column and type in a name for the resource you want to define.
5. Click in the cell in the Initial Value column and type in your definition for the resource in that
instance.
6. Click in the cell in the Description column and type in a description that makes sense to you.
To add another global property, click New and another new empty row of cells will appear below
the existing one. Define this property as you did the previous one.
7. When you have finished defining all global properties, click Close.
For tips on where to use a global property, see the following topics:
• Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action (on page 450)
• Setting an Event (on page 434)
Deleting a Global Property

To delete one or more global properties, complete these steps:
The Rules and Macros dialog box appears.
2. Click the Global Properties tab.
3. Click in the row of the global properties list that you want to delete, and click Delete in the tab
toolbar.
4. Repeat the last step to delete other custom properties from the list.
5. To close the Global Properties box, click Close.
Setting Graphical Navigation Options

You cannot set Graphical Navigation options unless the Graphical Navigation tool is open.
To access the Graphical Navigation options, click the Options menu and select Graphical Navigation.
The Graphical Navigation Options dialog box has three tabs.
General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane

The Graphical Navigation Options dialog box’s General tab looks like this:
The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical Navigation
Options dialog box.
General Graphical Navigation Options
Section Options Result
Graphical Page Width Type the pixel width for your page.
Options Height Type the pixel height for your page.
Section Options Result

Use default page size The default page size is 1000 pixels by 1000 pixels. At this
size, you may need to maximize the page or use
the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to move to hidden
areas of the page.
Home Page Home Page Either type the path to a home page in the box, or click
Options browse [...] and use the resulting page to find the *.nav file
you want to use as the home page.
Use Current Page Sets the default home page to load in the Graphical
Navigation page when the Graphical Navigation tool
opens.
Default Page Select one of two buttons:
• Last Used Page to have your last used *.nav file appear
as the default page.
• Select Set Home Page to set the default page as the
home page.
Alarm Border Size Hotspot border size Adjusts the size of alarm borders on hotspots
Options (pixels)
Graphical Symbol Border Adjusts the size of alarm borders on graphical symbols
Size (pixels):
Set Defaults Returns both hotspot and graphical symbol alarm border
size settings to 3
Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation Pages

Only an Administrator user can change Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build mode options. Magellan CCS
Navigator must be in Build mode to make these changes.
The Build Mode Options section has three check boxes and one menu.
The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical Navigation
Options dialog box.
Build Mode Options
Option Function
Show Grid Shows a drawing grid in Build mode to help you size and position your drawings as
you place graphical objects on the page. The grid is not visible in Control mode
Snap to Grid Makes the graphical objects snap to the grid points, as if they are magnetically
attracted to them
Use Options for this field are:
• Icon
• Front View (when available)
• Hotspot
• LED
• Streaming control (when available)
The icon is the default view for graphical objects you create. When the front view is
not available for the newly created graphical object and this option is selected, an
icon is used instead
Option Function
Hide Theme save Every time there is a change in the button theme, a dialog box asks for confirmation
confirmations of the changes. Select this option and the application will no longer ask for
confirmation every time you make a change to the button theme.
View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages

The View Options tab contains four check boxes.
1. The following table describes the features you can adjust on this tab of the Graphical Navigation
Options dialog box.
View Options
Show Graphical Navigation Toolbar Toolbar appears on the page in Control mode to assist you
(Control Mode) in navigating the pages representing your network.
Show Graphical Navigation Status Bar Status bar appears at the bottom of each graphical page.
Show Navigation window on top when If the Navigation paneis not open, selecting an object in the
a device symbol is selected Graphical Navigation page opens the Navigation pane.

Page Initial View When this is not checked and you open a page, it opens to its
default size and zoom ratio. When this option is selected, the two
items below it become available. You can choose one or the other
but not both.
Fit to Window fits the new page to the size of the Graphical
Navigation area.
Remember zooming ratio applies the same zoom factor to a page
that is being opened that was applied to it the last time it was
visited
Setting the Properties of a Page

The Page Properties box for a Graphical Navigation page has three tabs: Background, Custom
Properties, and Rules. These tabs are only available in Build mode, for an Administrative user on a PC
with a NAVIGATOR-SNMP or NAVIGATOR-SRV license.
• On the Background tab, you can set a color fill to serve as the background for a page. Or you can
import an image—such as a map, drawing, or logo—to serve as the background for the page.
Imported background images must be in Windows bitmap or JPEG format. See Setting a Color Fill as a
Page Background (on page 384) and Setting an Image as a Page Background (on page 385).
• On the Custom Properties tab, you can define the function of the resources you have assigned to a
page. To develop your own custom pages, you may want to add custom properties. For example, you
could use custom properties to track the current selected router destination or source. See the
following topics for more information:
 Defining Custom Properties for a Page (on page 385)
 Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event (on page 438)
• On the Rules tab, you will define events and conditions that will trigger specified actions. For
example, you may create a rule that will cause something to happen when the page loads or unloads.
See Defining Rules (on page 429).
Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background

To set a color fill as the background for a Graphical Navigation page, complete these steps:
1. Right-click in an empty area of the page and select Properties....
2. On the Background tab of the Page Properties box, click the arrow by the Fill box and then select a
color from the resulting color palette, or click Other... to show an extended color palette in the
Color box.
3. In the Color box, select from the Basic Colors section, or click the mouse in the color and black-to-
white spectrums at right to show the color you want in the Color/Solid box.
If the page background is currently set to white, you may need to use the slider beside the vertical color
brightness bar which is located to the right of the color spectrums. This will ensure that your selected
color appears in the Color/Solid box.
1. To add the color in the Color/Solid box to the Custom Colors palette, click Add to Custom Colors.
2. Click OK to close the Color box.

3. Click Close to close the Page Properties box.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page (on page 385) to set the Custom Properties tab of the Page
Properties box.
Setting an Image as a Page Background

When you set an image to be a page background, the page will be automatically resized to match the
image. If the image is too small to "hold" all of the objects on the page, you will need to manually
modify the width and height of the Graphical Navigation page.
To set an image as the background for a Graphical Navigation page, complete these steps:
1. Right-click in an empty area of the page and select Properties....
2. On the Background tab of the Page Properties box, click browse (...) at the right end of the Image
box.
3. When the Select Image File dialog box appears, browser to find a suitable *.bmp or *.jpg image file.
A copy of the selected image is stored in the Magellan CCS Navigator *.nav page. If you modify the
original image, the changes will not be automatically shown in the Graphical Navigation page. See
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified (on page 503).
4. Select the file, and then click Open.
The image will appear in the top left corner of the page.
5. Click Close to close the Page Properties box.
See Defining Custom Properties for a Page (on page 385) to set the Custom Properties tab.
Defining Custom Properties for a Page

You can also define global properties, which apply to all pages. See Creating a New Graphical Navigation
Page (on page 372). Custom properties are identified by a preceding (CP) in the Properties lists.
To develop your own custom pages, you may want to add custom properties and rules for the page.
Custom properties are available for all objects within a page, and you can use them to define rules
for the page. For example, the currently selected router destination or source can be defined as a
custom page property. Then you can create a page rule, defining an action that will occur when that
custom property, such as the router source, changes.
Custom properties work like variables, holding temporary values that define events while Magellan CCS
Navigator operates. If you need to store a certain value, such as the currently selected router
destination, you need to define a property for this—a "Destination" property, for example.
The Custom Properties table serves as a definition of your resources in terms of their function or
conditions of use. In the case of a router-control page, a Custom Properties table might look something
like this:
Table 65: Sample Custom Properties Table

Name Initial Value Description
Source1 Camera1 Source value when the page is loaded
Destination1 VTR1 Destination value when the page is loaded
Destination2 VTR2 Destination value when page is unloaded
Later, when you define rules for each of the objects on the page, you will call on these definitions in
associating specific Magellan CCS Navigator objects, events, conditions, and actions with a specific
Graphical Navigation page. See Defining Rules (on page 429) for more information.
Setting Custom Page Properties

To set the custom Graphical Navigation page properties, complete these steps:
1. Click the Custom Properties tab.
The Custom Properties table has three columns: Name, Initial Value, and Description. The toolbar
for the Custom Properties tab has two tools: New and Delete.
2. Click New on the toolbar.
A new row of blank cells will appear under the Name, Initial Value, and Description columns.
3. Click in the cell in the Name column, and type in a name for the resource you want to define.
4. Click in the cell in the Initial Value column and type in your definition for the resource in that
instance.
5. Click in the cell in the Description column and type in a description that makes sense to you.
To add another custom property, click New and another new empty row of cells will appear below
the existing one. Define this property as you did the previous one.
6. When you have finished defining all custom properties for the page, click Close.
See Defining Rules (on page 429) for how to set rules that define events, conditions, and actions
for specific objects and pages.
Deleting a Custom Property for a Page

You cannot delete custom page properties used to define events and actions.
To delete one or more custom properties for a page, complete these steps:
1. Right-click in an empty part of a Graphical Navigation page and select Properties....
2. Click the Custom Properties tab of the Page Properties box.
3. Click in a row of the custom properties list that you want to delete, and click Delete on the tab
toolbar.
4. Repeat the last step to delete other custom properties from the list.
5. To close the Page Properties box, click Close.
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page

In Build mode, an Administrative user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add
objects to a Graphical Navigation page. You have a variety of graphical object types to use
in customizing pages. There are two methods for adding these objects to the Graphical Navigation page:
• Right-click and use the resulting shortcut menu
• Use the Create Objects toolbar, which is divided into three sections:
 A series of buttons, see below
 The Symbols menu, see Adding a Resource Icon Symbol (on page 406)
 The Controls menu, see Adding Controls (on page 412)
Graphical Tools Used to Build Pages
Tool Button Description Procedure
Arrow Changes the cursor from whatever tool had been
selected back to an arrow
Button Creates a button that looks and acts like a Adding Buttons (on page 387)
Windows button, with four customizable button
states
Text Creates a customizable text object which does Adding a Text Object (on page
not support shadow, glow, or embossing 394)
Image Opens a dialog so you can import a *.bmp or Adding an Image (on page 395)
*.jpg file, like a symbol but with no label
Link Connects two symbols with a line, and tracks Creating Links Between
(follows) the symbols it links. You can customize Symbols (on page 410)
the width, style, color, and endpoints
Hotspot Creates an invisible object that floats over other Adding a Hotspot (on page
objects, which flashes an alarm when it detects 396)
an error or warning for a device or an associated
Graphical Navigation page
Signal monitor Shows video signals, and can work in conjunction Adding a Signal Monitor (on
with hotspots page 397)
Navigator A dialog box for viewing and controlling other Adding a Navigator Frame (on
Frame pages within a page page 398)
Adding Buttons
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add buttons.
Buttons are added in Build mode.
Buttons are clickable objects. You can use a pre-created theme (Magellan CCS Navigator comes with
many of them), you can edit pre-created buttons, or you can develop your own buttons in a bitmap
program such as Paint, Paintshop Pro or Adobe Photoshop.
Buttons can be either selected or unselected. A button is selected when the user clicks on the button
with the mouse cursor. If the button is a Toggle button, the button remains selected when the user
releases the mouse button.
Buttons can be either highlighted or unhighlighted. The exact meaning of highlighted or unhighlighted is
up to you. A button might be highlighted in response to a specific event, and unhighlighted in response
to a different event.
Since whether a button is selected has no bearing on whether it is highlighted, it has four possible
states:
• Selected, highlighted
• Selected, unhighlighted
• Unselected, highlighted
• Unselected, unhighlighted
You can associate a bitmap with each state. The only state that must have a bitmap is the
unselected/unhighlighted state. If the other states do not have bitmaps assigned to them, this bitmap
will be used for all states.
Creating a Button
To create a button, complete these steps:
1. Click the Add Button icon on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click an empty spot in a Graphical
Navigation page, and then click Create > Button.
The cursor turns into the Add Button cursor.
2. Click on the Graphical Navigation page to create a button that is a preset size, or drag the cursor to
create a rectangular outline.
The button appears when you release the mouse button.
See Setting the Properties of a Button (on page 388) for more information.
Setting the Properties of a Button

The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only.
To set the Object Properties for a button, complete these steps:

1. Right-click the button and select Properties....
The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Button tab displayed.
See the table below for instructions on completing the Button tab:
Table 66: Button Tab Options and User Action

Option User Action
Caption Type in the button caption text that you want to appear over the button.
Click Font to the right of the caption to open a dialog box where you can alter the
font, style, size, effects and color of the button’s caption.
Word wrap Check to use word wrap, or clear the check box to disable. When word wrap is
disabled, text appears on a single line. If it is too long to fit on the button, you will
see the beginning of the text. If word wrap is on, text will fill one line and then
move to the next line below.
Color Click the arrow by the Color box, and select a color for the button from the
palette.
If you select an image for the button, you can still use the color palette to select a
color for the button.
Mouse Click: Repeat Click this button to configure behavior of the button (which may differ depending
on whether you are using a regular monitor and mouse, or a touch screen). See
Configuring Mouse Click Repeat (on page 392) for more information.
Toggle button When a button toggles, you can click on it when the associated feature is on to
turn that feature off and click it when that feature is off to turn the feature on.
Select the check box to turn on button toggling; or clear the box to disable
toggling.
Option User Action

Button theme Click in the field to choose a pre-made theme. A button theme is a grouping of
bitmaps to represent the four different button states (whether the button
selected and/or highlighted). When you open the drop-down menu, you can
choose from the provided Magellan CCS Navigator Button Themes (NBT) and
Custom Button Themes (CBT)
Use Add to create a new theme, or the Modify button to edit a theme. Both of
these buttons open the Modify Theme dialog box. See Using the Modify Themes
Dialog Box (on page 391)
Use Remove to delete custom button themes only.
Adjust button size Select the check box to turn on, or clear the check box to disable size matching.
to match image’s When this is enabled, the button grows or shrinks to fit the image without
distorting it.
Preview The Preview section of the screen displays the currently chosen button theme.
Selected / Highlighted Click the buttons to the left of the Selected and Highlighted boxes to preview the
theme in the button’s four states.
See Setting the Properties of a Button (on page 388) to set the button theme.
2. Complete the Rules tab. See Defining Rules (on page 429) for information on completing the Rules
tab. For information on rule topics specific to buttons, see:
 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action (on page 449)
 Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action (on page 449)
3. After you have completed the Rules tab, click Close.
Using a Pre-made Button Theme

To select a button theme, click the down arrow beside the Theme list box, and select a theme from the
list that shows. The Preview dialog box displays a view of how the selected button theme appears for
each button state.
To see the appearance of each of the different button states, use the Selected and Highlighted check
boxes below the Preview dialog box. These check boxes do not change the bitmap used. They only show
you which of the four bitmaps you are currently viewing.
Using the Modify Themes Dialog Box

If you choose to add a new button theme (by clicking the Add button in the Button Object Properties
dialog box) or modify an existing theme (by clicking the Modify button in the Button Object Properties
dialog box), the Modify Theme dialog box will open.
The following table describes the sections of the Add Theme and Modify Theme dialog boxes:
Table 67: Sections of the Add Theme or Modify Theme Dialog Box
Section Description
Theme Name Displays the name of the theme. If you are creating a new theme, type the new
theme name here. You may leave the theme name blank if you are simply
customizing the look and feel of one button, and do not want to save the changes
as a theme in the database.
Transparent Magellan CCS Navigator buttons are rectangular. To make a portion of the button
area appear as background (for example so the button can be round or donut-
shaped), use a pixel-editing program such as Paint, Paintshop Pro or Photoshop to
apply a transparency color to the areas you want to appear as background.
Transparency Color Click the button to open a color palette and choose the color that will be
transparent on your buttons. The default transparency color is magenta with RGB
values of 255, 0, 216.
Custom Images Displays the location of the bitmaps used to show each button state. Each state
can have a corresponding bitmap associated with it. The only state that must have
a bitmap is the unselected/unhighlighted state; all other states are optional.
See Adding Buttons (on page 387) for more information about button states.
Section Description
Save these changes as (Modify Theme dialog box only). Select the check box to create a new theme, and
a new theme type a name in the Theme Name box. Leave the box unselected to modify the
properties only for this button; no changes to the theme will result.
Removing Custom Button Themes

You cannot remove any of the Magellan CCS Navigator button themes provided with Magellan CCS
Navigator, but you can remove any custom button themes that you have created. To remove a custom
button theme, select the theme to be removed from the Theme drop-down list, and click the Remove
button.
Configuring Mouse Click Repeat

On the Button tab of the Object Properties dialog box, click Mouse Click Options to open the Mouse
Click Repeat dialog box.
There are three options:

• Single Click - No matter how long the mouse button is held down, it will be recorded as a single click.
• Mouse Click Repeat - A click will be interpreted as multiple clicks, the duration determined by the
durations you set for Repeat delay (which will be interpreted as click duration) and Repeat wait
(which will be interpreted as the time between virtual clicks).
• Press & Hold - This option should be chosen in instances where a button must be held for a longer-
than-normal duration in order to perform a function, such as panel lock.
To set the area of the button that is sensitive to clicking as less than the entire area of the button, enter
a percentage in the Sensitivity area field. This number cannot be set to greater than the size of the
button.
Creating Buttons to Load Other Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

If you create a non-rectangular shape for a button bitmap—such as a circle, ellipse, or star, then use a
pixel-editing program like PhotoShop or PaintShop Pro to create a pink-colored mask for the shape so
that just the shape itself shows. If you do not create a mask for the shape, the entire rectangle occupied
by the bitmap will appear.
Set the RGB color of the mask to 255, 0, 216. Magellan CCS Navigator is configured to show this color as
transparent, so your custom shape will show through when you insert the bitmap on the Magellan CCS
Navigator page.
To create navigation buttons that load another page, follow these general steps:
1. In Build mode, create a button.
See Adding Buttons (on page 387) for details.
See Setting the Properties of a Button (on page 388) for details.
3. Set an action to load a Magellan CCS Navigator page.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action (on page 445) for details.
4. Set the action properties for loading a page.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action (on page 445) for details.
Adding a Hot Button

A hot button carries traits of buttons and of hot spots. When a rule assigned to a hot button is triggered,
the button automatically changes color as defined in the properties of the button.
To create a button, complete these steps:

1. Click the Add Hot Button icon on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click an empty spot in a
Graphical Navigation page, and then click Create > Hot Button.
The cursor turns into the Add Hot Button cursor.
2. Click on the Graphical Navigation page to create a hot button that is a preset size, or drag the cursor
to create a rectangular outline.
The button appears when you release the mouse button.
To set the Object Properties for a button, complete these steps:

The Object Properties dialog box appears with the Hot Button tab displayed.
2. Enter text that will appear on the hot button in the Caption field.
3. Click Font to change the font, color, size, and effects on the text.
4. Click Word wrap if you want the title to make line breaks to fit on the button; otherwise, leave Word
wrap clear to have the text cropped if it exceeds the size of the button.
5. For each of the alarm states, pick a color.
6. Complete the Rules tab.
See Defining Rules (on page 429) for information on completing the Rules tab.
Adding a Text Object

Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add text objects.
Text objects are added in Build mode.
To create a text object, right-click an empty area on the Graphical Navigation page, and then select
Create > Text, or click Create Text on the Create Objects toolbar. The cursor will turn into the Create
Text cursor. Click the mouse to place the text on the page.
To resize a text object, drag one of its eight sizing handles with the mouse. This does not change the font
size of the text —just the boundaries of the object. To change the size of the font, you must change the
Object Properties of the text.
To set the Object Properties box for a text object, right-click the Text object and select Properties....
The Object Properties box for a Text object has three tabs: Text, Object, and Rules. The options in the
Text tab are described in the table below:
Text Options and Suggested User Action
Option User Action
Text box Type in your text.
Option User Action

Word wrap Select the check box to enable word wrap, or clear it to disable word wrap.
Horizontal Alignment Select Left, Center, or Right.
Vertical Alignment Select Top, Middle, or Bottom.
Font Select a font family, weight, and size.
Text Color Select a color from the Color list.
Text Effects: Select the check box by a text effect to enable that effect. Clear the check box
• Underline to disable the effect.
• Strikeout
The Class and Subclass options on the Object tab are read-only. The class is "Text," and the subclass is
blank.
See Defining Rules (on page 429) for information about how to complete the Rules tab. See Setting
Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’ Action (on page 453) for information on a rule commonly applied
to text.
Adding an Image
Images can only be added to the active Graphical Navigation page. Only an Administrator user with a
NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add images. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build
mode.
Custom graphics, such as maps of a network or custom corporate logos, become images when imported
into Magellan CCS Navigator. Images can be *.bmp or *.jpg files.
To import a *.bmp or *.jpg image file, complete these steps:

1. Click Create Image on the Create Objects toolbar; or right-click an empty area of a Graphical
Navigation page, click Create > and then select Image.
2. Use the Select Image File box to browse for the image file.
3. Select the file you want, and then click Open.
The cursor changes to a special add image cursor.
4. Click on the Graphical Navigation page.
The image appears.
To change the object properties of an image, complete these steps:

1. Right-click the image, and then select Properties....
The Object Properties box for an image contains these tabs: Image, Object, and Rules.
2. If the image is a *.bmp file, you will have the following options:
Table 68: Image Tab Options for *.bmp Files

Option User Action
Transparent Select the check box to enable the fill in a *.bmp file to appear transparent, or clear
the check box to disable the transparency feature.
Transparent Color Click the arrow, and then select a color for the transparency from the color palette.
3. See Defining Rules (on page 429) for information about how to complete the Rules tab.
Adding a Hotspot
You can adjust the size of the alarm borders on all symbols on the Graphical Navigation Options dialog
box. See General Options for the Graphical Navigation Pane (on page 380) for more information.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add hotspots.
Hotspots are added in Build mode.
Hotspots float invisibly over your Graphical Navigation page, ready to be used for any Magellan CCS
Navigator action that you have assigned to them. For example, if a hotspot has a rule for detecting
errors and warnings on a particular device and an error or warning is detected, the hotspot begins to
flash an alarm. When the alarm causes the hotspot to flash in the Graphical Navigation page, alarm
information is provided to the Diagnostics dialog box and Navigation pages and, in some cases, the Slot
Status section of frame Control dialog boxes. The hotspot alarms follow the existing alarm color-coding
system in Magellan CCS Navigator.
To create and link a hotspot, follow these steps when in Build mode:
1. Click Create Hotspot on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the Graphical
Navigation page, and then click Create > Hotspot in the resulting shortcut menu.
A special hotspot cursor appears.
2. Click and drag the cursor to create a rectangular outline.
3. Right-click on the rectangle and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
The Object Properties box contains these tabs: Symbol, Object, Graphics, and Rules.
4. On the Symbol tab, enter a Short Name, Name, Alternate Name, and Description for the hotspot.
The Show as Label box has no effect.
5. To associate a device with this hotspot, select the Object tab, and then type in the IP address for the
device.
6. To associate a rule with this hotspot, select the Rules tab and define the rule accordingly. See
Defining Rules (on page 429) for information on how to complete the Rules tab.
7. Click OK.
Alternatively, you can drag-and-drop a symbol from the resource tree into a Graphical Navigation page,
and then turn it into a hotspot by right-clicking the icon, pointing to View>, and selecting Hotspot. All
object property information is inherited by the newly created hotspot icon from the resource tree,
including the icon description, IP address, and associated rules. See Adding a Symbol from the Resource
Tree (on page 408).
Adding a Signal Monitor

You cannot have a signal monitor object open at the same time as a Signal Monitor due to limitations in
the ActiveX control.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add a signal
monitor to a Navigator page. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
Before creating a signal monitor object, the signal monitor properties must be set, as the properties that
are set for a signal monitor affect the signal monitor object as well.
To learn more about signal monitor settings, see Video Output Monitoring (on page 312).
To create a signal monitor object, follow these steps:

1. Click Create Signal Monitor on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click anywhere in the Graphical
Navigation page, and then click Create > Signal Monitor in the resulting shortcut menu.
A special monitor icon cursor appears.
2. Left-click in the Graphical Navigation page, and a 4:3 aspect ratio Signal Monitor appears.
This object can be moved, scaled and linked just like any other object on the Graphical Navigation
page.
3. Right-click the Signal Monitor object and select Properties from the resulting shortcut menu.
This opens the Object Properties box.
4. Complete the Object Properties box, which is described in the following table.
Table 69: Controllable Signal Monitoring Properties

Property Description
Customized object size The object can be scaled to any desired size within the Graphical Navigation
page. If the aspect ratio is locked, the object will maintain the specified aspect
ratio throughout scaling.
Fit-to-Page object size The object will enlarge to fit the Graphical Navigation page. If the aspect ratio
is locked, the object will scale to fill the page while maintaining its aspect. If the
aspect ratio is not locked, the object will scale to fit the entire Graphical
Navigation page.
Property Description
Lock aspect ratio When checked, the object will be constrained to the selected aspect ratio.
When you check this, choose either 4:3 or 16:9 aspect ratio.
Adding a Navigator Frame

Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add a Navigator
frame. Frames are added in Build mode.
A Magellan CCS Navigator frame displays another Graphical Navigation page inside the current page. To
add a new Magellan CCS Navigator frame to the Graphical Navigation page follow these steps:
1. Click the Add Navigator Frame icon in the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click in the Graphical
Navigation page and select Create > Navigator Frame.
The Add Navigator Frame cursor appears.
2. Drag the cursor to create to create a rectangular outline.
The Class and Subclass options of the Object tab are read-only. To set the Object Properties for a
Navigator Frame, complete these steps:
3. Right-click the frame, and then select Properties....
The Navigator Frame tab, in the Frame View Options section, has three options:
 Automatically fit the page in area - When selected, Graphical Navigation pages being viewed
and controlled in the Magellan CCS Navigator frame are scaled to fit within the frame. If the
check box is unselected, Graphical Navigation pages being viewed and controlled in the
Magellan CCS Navigator frame appear actual size; horizontal and vertical scroll bars appear
when necessary.
 Disable vertical scroll - When selected, no scroll bar will appear at the bottom of the screen.
Any data outside the frame’s visible area will be unavailable.
 Disable horizontal scroll - When selected, no scroll bar will appear at the right side of the
screen. Any data outside the frame’s visible area will be unavailable.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action (on page 451) to complete the Rules
tab.
You can also create a Frame Page using the New Page Wizard. See Creating a Frame View Page (on page
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page

Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add streaming
objects to a page. Pages are built in Build mode.
A streaming component in a Graphical Navigation page can be created either manually or using a
wizard. Your options include the following:
• Create a streaming page using a wizard. See Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page (on page 399).
• Create a streaming window on any page. See Adding a Streaming Icon (on page 404).
Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page

If you need to create a streaming page using X75, QSEE6800+, and/or FR6802+QXF inputs, you can use
the Multi-Monitor wizard. Follow these steps:
1. From the main menu, choose File > New. The New Page wizard opens.
2. Click on the Quality Control tab, and then double click the Multi-Monitor View icon.
The Page Wizard (step 1 of 2) opens.
3. Click Add to open a Device Selection dialog box.
The Device Selection dialog box lists the contents of the Discovery and Network folders of the
Navigation pane.
You can only add one item at a time. To add another item, click Add again.
4. Select one of the following types of item:
 QSEE6800+ module (all inputs to that modules are added by default, but you can change this
later)
 Input below a QSEE6800+ module
 6800+ETH module (all modules that support streaming that are in the frame are selected by
default)
And then click OK to close the Device Selection dialog box.
5. Edit your selections on the Step 1 of 2 page.
You can switch the selected input for a QSEE6800+ module by clicking the Input field. This opens a
drop-down menu that lists All plus each of the individual inputs.
You can add multiple individual inputs from the same QSEE6800+ or 6800+ETH by selecting it
multiple times in the Device Selection dialog box, however, each individual input can only be
selected once. If, for example, you choose a QSEE6800+ module (with All selected in the Input field
of the table), and an input to that module as well, you will receive an error message. You must
remove one of the selections from the Device Selection (Thumbnails) table before proceeding.
6. Click Next>> to proceed to the Step 2 of 2 screen.
The FR6802+QXF frame does not support MPEG-4 streaming. If you only select modules from the
frame, the MPEG-4 option will not be available.
The Name field only accepts data in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your
keyboard will be automatically switched to English for data entry in this field. If you switch the
7. Choose the number of MPEG-4 players you wish to have on the Navigator page. You must have the
QSEE6800+HS option to view video in an MPEG-4 player.
You can only have one MPEG-4 player per QSEE6800+ module, and four per Navigator page.
If you don’t have the QSEE6800+HS option, or do not wish this page to contain an MPEG-4 player,
click None.
8. If you choose One or Two MPEG-4 players, you can choose from four preset layouts. Select an
option to view a preview of it on the Step 2 of 2 screen. These are the options:
Table 70: QSEE6800+ Layouts

Layout Description
Top Thumbnails at the top of the page, and streaming video at the bottom
Bottom Thumbnails at the bottom of the page, and streaming video at the top
Clockwise Thumbnails arranged in a spiral, starting from the top left corner (and moving
clockwise), with streaming video components at the center
Counter Clockwise Thumbnails arranged in a spiral layout, starting from the top left corner (and
moving counter clockwise), with streaming video components at the center
If you did not choose any MPEG-4 players, there will not be any Grid Layout options. Thumbnails will
be laid out from left to right, top to bottom on your Graphical Navigation page.
9. (Optional) To apply a custom background, click Select to browse for an image. For best results, your
background should be the same size as the viewing area that it will be seen on. Otherwise it will be
cropped or will leave blank areas.
The background image can be a .BMP or .JPG graphic file.
10. Click Finish.
There may be a slight delay while your page is built.
Switch to Control mode to view your page, or stay in Build mode to add or edit controls, change
thumbnail sizes, etc.
Adding a Thumbnail or Stream to a Graphical Navigation Page

You can manually add the following resources to a Graphical Navigation panel as a thumbnail:
• Input to a QSEE6800+
• Module that supports streaming in a Selenio frame
• 6800+ module that supports streaming that is installed in an FR6802+QXF frame with a 6800+ETH
resource module
• X75 (with X75STR-OPT option)
If the X75 has the X75STR-OPT option, or if the QSEE6800+ has the QSEE6800+HS option, you can also
use this method to stream MPEG-4 video.
To add a thumbnail to any Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps:

1. In Build mode, drag the thumbnail source from the Navigation pane to a Graphical Navigation page.
For information on special QSEE6800+ features like waveform, vectorscope, and audio meters, see
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes (on page 303).
2. Right click on the Input icon and then choose View > Thumbnail or View > Streaming (if the selected
resource is equipped with a QSEE6800+HS option or X75OPT-STR option only).
3. Reposition the dialog box by clicking on the thumbnail or MPEG-4 streaming dialog box and holding
down the mouse button while dragging it to a new position.
4. To adjust the settings, right click on the thumbnail or streaming icon and select Properties. See
Setting the Streaming Object’s Properties (see "Setting a Streaming Object’s Properties" on page
5. To change the size of a thumbnail, right click on it and choose Size and then select from the menu
that appears.
Sizes are defined in the table below:
Table 71: Thumbnail Sizes for QSEE6800+

Low Quality Medium Quality
High Quality Thumbnail
Thumbnail Thumbnail
Standard definition
128×96 192×144 256×192

High definition
128×72 192×108 256×144
Low Quality Medium Quality

High Quality Thumbnail
Thumbnail Thumbnail
SD/HD CIF MPEG-4
HD = Letterbox
You can also drag the corners of a thumbnail or MPEG-4 stream to resize it.
If you choose two thumbnails, you have additional options of Same Size, Same Width and Same Height.
These options set the size of all selected thumbnails to match the proportion of the last-selected
thumbnail.
To change the MPEG-4 stream, in Control mode, drag and drop a thumbnail onto the Streaming window.
Alarms Monitoring
Alarms are indicated on the borders for thumbnails in Graphical Navigation pages.
Alarm borders are not available for modules in a Selenio frame.
The outside border of a thumbnail indicates its alarm level.

Color Indicators for Alarm Levels
Alarm Level Border Color
No alarm Black
Warning Yellow
Critical Red
Acknowledged Orange
For QSEE6800+ modules, you can set which alarms are active, and you can set their trigger thresholds.
These settings are set on an input-by-input basis, and appear on each input’s Control dialog box. For
more information, see Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box (on page 306). For a complete
description of alarm settings, see your QSEE6800+ Installation and Operation Manual.
Starting a QuickTime Player From a Graphical Navigation Page

When you start a Quicktime player to view streaming video, you can listen to audio output, in addition
to monitoring the video. To add a button to start streaming video, follow these steps:
1. With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, place a button on a Graphical Navigation page. See
Adding Buttons (on page 387) for more information.
2. Right-click on the button and select Properties... from the menu that appears.
The Object Properties dialog box appears.
3. Select the Rules tab, and then click the New Rule button.
A new line appears in the Rules table.
4. In the new rule’s Event list, select OnMouseClick.
The default Condition setting for this event is Always; you can leave that as it is, or you can change it
by clicking the Condition button. See Defining Conditions (on page 435) for more information.
5. From the new rule’s Action list, select Launch Application.
Magellan CCS Navigator is compatible with QuickTime version 7.1.
6. Click Action Properties.
The Action Property dialog box appears. Fill it in with the following information:
Command: c:\program files'uicktime'uicktimeplayer.exe
(Or the complete path to your QuickTime Player installation, if it differs from the above)
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/x75streaming
(Note replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the X75 streaming Ethernet port)
OR
Arguments: rtsp://[IP Address]:554/streaming
(Note replace [IP Address] by the IP address of the QSEE6800+ module)
You can leave the Initial Directory field blank.
7. Click OK to close the Action Properties dialog box. Close the Object Properties dialog box by clicking
the X in the top right corner.
When you enter Control mode, the new button will open a QuickTime Player and play streaming video
from the selected source.
Adding a Streaming Icon

You can add streaming icons to a Graphical Navigation page from the following streaming items:
• X75 with X75OPT-STR option
• Input listed under a QSEE6800+ module
• Q-SEE compliant 6800+ module when installed in a FR6802+QXF frame that also contains a 6800+ETH
resource module (Q-SEE compliant modules can output thumbnails only)
Follow these steps:

The number of streaming icons you can have without slowing down your computer will depend on the
specifications of your computer system.
1. Open both the Navigation pane and Graphical Navigation page in Build mode.
2. Perform one of the following actions:
 Drag a streaming item from the resource tree, and drop it on the Graphical Navigation page.
OR
 Cut item that is capable of streaming from the resource tree, and then paste it on the Graphical
Navigation page.
OR
 Copy item that is capable of streaming from the resource tree, and then paste it on the
Graphical Navigation page.
An icon representing that item will appear on the Graphical Navigation page.
3. Right click on the new icon in the Graphical Navigation page and choose View > Thumbnail or View
> Stream (not available for Q-SEE compliant 6800+ modules in FR6802+QXF frames).
Setting a Streaming Object’s Properties

A streaming object (thumbnail or MPEG-4 video streaming icon) has a properties page.
To adjust the settings, right click on the Thumbnail or Streaming monitor and select Properties. The
Object Properties dialog box appears:
If the Streaming Player tab is not the active tab, click on it to bring it to the foreground. Settings include
the following:
Table 72: Streaming Player Options

Option Function
Name Enter a label that will appear on the Graphical Navigation page only; by
default, the name is a combination of the module name and input UMD ID
(in the case of a QSEE6800+ or Q-SEE compliant 6800+ module) or the X75
unit’s network name
Option Function
Channel Options are Regular, 1, 2, 3, and 4. For most devices, leave the setting at its
default of Regular. When using a device that supports multiple channels,
such as SEL-J2K, the Regular option displays the default/first thumbnail. To
display a different one, choose the number corresponding to the channel.
Use UMD ID from Check here to use the UMD ID from the module/input (if available)
module/input, if available
Hide Player Controls Check here to view just the thumbnail or streaming icon without buttons or
border.
Hide Player Controls Check here to turn off display of the thumbnail’s name, audio meters, alarm
border and Waveform and Vectorscope buttons
Aspect Ratio When checked, the object will be constrained to the selected aspect ratio
when resizing
URL Enter the URL for any streaming source you wish to view (This option will not
work if you create the streaming icon from a QSEE6800+ module/X75 frame.
Rather, to stream from an external URL, right click on your Graphical
Navigation page and select Create > Streaming Player to stream from a URL,
open the Properties dialog and type the URL)
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol

Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add symbols.
Symbols are added in Build mode.
Items in the Symbol menu produce a graphic with a label underneath which can be connected to
another symbol with a Link object. You can set its device ID. Many of the items in the Symbol list can be
discovered and appear in the tree view. If you want to duplicate an item from the Discovery folder of
the Tree view, just click on that item and drag it to the Graphical Navigation page.
Some Symbol menu items first open a dialog box allowing you to choose the type of object in that
particular category. Others do not (these ones have nothing in the Options field of the table below). The
symbol menu contains the following items:
Graphical Objects Available in the Symbol Menu
Object Options
Studio
Rack
Server...
Select from a Generic, Generic Video, Nexio or VR server.
Object Options
Frame... Choose from: • FR-3903-E (3RU Frame) • Prophesy Series
• Generic Frame • FR-3923-E (3RU Frame) • NetVX Video Networking
• 6800+ Frame • HD Series System (SYS-1700, SYS-
• Combiner System • Integrator Series (4RU, 6RU, 200, SYS-300, or SYS-350)
• DL-810 (SD Digital or 8RU Frame) • VIA32 Series
Legalizer) • MIX BOX Series • Digital Processing
• DL-860 (SD/HD Digital • Opus Frame Synchronizer (X50, X75, or
Legalizer) X85)
• PANACEA Series (1RU or
• EDGE DPS575 2RU Frame) • XPlus Series (1RU or 2RU
Frame)
• FR-3901-E (1RU Frame) • Platinum Series (15RU,
28RU, 5RU, or 9RU Frame) • XPress Series
• FR-3901-E-P (1RU Frame
with LCP)
Product
Functional Choose from: • NetVX module (various) • Platinum Module (various,
Block... • Generic Functional Block • FBC-6001 including PM-xxx and PT-
• 3901PS • Integrator Control Card xxx modules)
• 3901RES-E • Integrator Module • Predator PiP or System
• 3902PS • Integrator PS • SQM ModuleVIA32
Module or PS
• 6800+ Module, 6800+ PS, • NEO Module VIA32 Module
or Eth Card
• Centrio Module, PiP, or
System
Control Choose from: • NUCLEUS Control Panel 1RU • RCP-X75 Remote Control
Panel... • Generic Control panel • Opus Master Control Panel
• LCP-3901-1U • RCP-CCS-1U • Router Control Panel
• NUCLEUS Control Panel
Gateway... Select from:
• Generic gateway
• CCS Protocol gateway
• Digibus gateway
• EDGE gateway
Folder
Router Control
HTTP Server
Routing System
Magellan CCS Navigator provides three methods for adding symbols. See the following topics:
• Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu (on page 408)
• Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree (on page 408)
Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects Toolbar or Menu

1. Click on the Graphical Navigation page and then click the Symbol pull-down menu on the Create
Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page and click Create>.
2. Select from the list of symbols which includes: Studio, Rack, Server…, Frame…, Product, Functional
Block…, Control Panel…, Gateway…, Folder, Router Control, Routing System, and HTTP Server.
Many of these 12 symbol types provide a choice of symbols in a new dialog box. For example, selecting
Create > Server prompts a Create Server box to appear.
In the Create Server box, click the arrow on the Type box, select from the list of server options, and then
select either Icon or Front View. Note that not all symbols have a Front View.
Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree

This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, linked graphical objects, and
Graphical Navigation pages that have been created in Magellan CCS Navigator 1.7 or later.
Dragging a resource icon from the resource tree onto the Graphical Navigation page creates a link
between the resource icon and the graphical object. With this link (a child icon), Magellan CCS Navigator
remembers the resource icon’s parent location in the resource tree and the parent’s assigned functions.
A graphical object in the Graphical Navigation page performs the same actions as it could when it was
part of the resource tree. Now, when you double-click on a resource icon, the icon’s assigned action
occurs as if you had double-clicked on the parent node in the resource tree.
Resource icons on which you can perform these actions include all discovered and configured devices in
the Network, Discovery, Temporary, Configuration, Catalog, and Routers folders
Some of the actions that you can assign to an object in the resource tree include the ability to open the
Configuration dialog box, Control dialog box, URL locations for the HTTP control of devices, and to start
an external program in either Build or Control mode.
To add a symbol to a Graphical Navigation page from the resource tree, complete these steps:
1. Open both the Navigation pane and the Graphical Navigation page.
2. Perform one of the following actions to create a symbol from an icon in the resource tree:
 Drag a resource icon from the resource tree, and drop it on the Graphical Navigation page.
OR
 Cut or copy a resource icon from the resource tree, and then paste it on the Graphical
Navigation page.
An icon representing the selected device will appear on the Graphical Navigation page. Some
devices have various views you can choose from. Right-click the newly created icon, point to View>,
and then select from Icon, Front, Hotspot, or LED.
All object property information is inherited by newly created icons dragged/copied/cut from the
resource tree, including the icon description, IP address, and associated rules. When Magellan CCS
Navigator is in Control mode, if a CCS or SNMP device is configured to display alarms, the border of
the icon will display the alarm. When you click on a CCS device in the Navigation pane, you can open
its Control dialog box.
3. To change device information, right-click the new icon, select Properties..., and then make the
required changes within the Object Properties box.
You cannot move a Magellan CCS Navigator object from a Graphical Navigation page to create an icon
on the resource tree—only vice versa.
Setting the Properties of a Symbol

A symbol inherits the device ID of the object from which you created it. For example, if you create a new
graphical object by dragging the resource icon for a discovered device from the Navigation pane
into the Graphical Navigation page, the new graphical object will inherit the IP address of that device
on your network.
However, if you create the object using the Create menu or by dragging and dropping an undiscovered
graphical object from the Catalog folder, then the new object will have the default IP address assigned
to the device during manufacture. This is a placeholder IP address that does not function. You must set
the IP address of the graphical object before Magellan CCS Navigator will recognize that it represents an
actual device on your network.
To set the properties for a symbol, complete these steps:

1. Right-click the symbol and select Properties....
The Object Properties dialog box appears. This dialog box has four tabs: Symbol, Object, Graphics,
and Rules.
2. On the Symbol tab, you can change the names for the device or type in a description of it.
The naming options for a device are the same as those in the Navigation panel. For a complete
description of these names, see Setting General Navigation Properties for a Device (on page 130).
To choose the name by which the symbol will be will be labeled on the Graphical Navigation page,
choose an item from the Show Label as: drop-down box. The options are as follows:
Table 73: Show Label As Options for Navigation Symbols

Option Function
Do not show label No label is shown
Short Name Short name is shown
Same as Navigation Tree Setting Label is displayed as set in Using the Status Column
(on page 150)
3. On the Object tab, you can type a new IP address into the Device ID box.
To enter a new IP address, select the existing numbers in the corresponding box, and then
type in the numbers of the IP address of the actual device on your network that the symbol
represents.
You must change the IP address portion of the ID if you want the symbol to represent a device of the
same product type and family that resides at a different IP address.
Note that the Class and Subclass boxes on the Object tab are read-only.
4. On the Graphics tab, you can view the path to the image file used as the symbol. The box is read-
only.
5. On the Rules tab, you can create rules for a Graphical Navigation object or page. See Defining Rules
(on page 429) for information on completing the Rules tab. See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol
Properties’ Action (on page 452) for information on the Set Symbol Properties action, which is
commonly applied to symbols.
6. Click Close to close the Object Properties box.
Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Symbols

All options may not be available for all symbols.
To set the view for Graphical Navigation symbols, right-click the symbol, select View>, and then select
from one of the four options described below.
Table 74: Commands on the View Menu and Their Functions

Command Function
Icon The symbol is shown as an icon
Front The symbol is shown as a front view, if that view exists. If that view is not available, the
Front option will be disabled
Hotspot The object is shown as a hotspot
Hot button Shows the object as a hot button
LED Shows the object as an LED
Thumbnail Shows a thumbnail video image from the device represented by the object
Stream Shows a streaming video from the device represented by the object
Creating Links Between Symbols

See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action (on page 451) for an action that is commonly
applied to links.
To link two Graphical Navigation symbols, complete these steps:

1. Click Add Link on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click on the Graphical Navigation page outside
of any objects on the page, click Create> from the shortcut menu, and then select Link.
The cursor will change into a plus (+) sign. When you move the cursor onto a symbol, a circle will
appear around the plus sign.
2. Click the mouse once on the start (source) symbol.
3. Move the cursor to an end (destination) symbol and click.
By default, the link will appear as an arrow, with its tail at the start symbol and its head just outside
of the end symbol.
Tips:
 Press the SHIFT key when moving the cursor if you want the link to snap to a straight horizontal
or vertical position on the page.
 Left-click anywhere on the Graphical Navigation page, prior to clicking the end symbol, if you
want to create a corner or non-direct link/route to the destination.
4. Right-click the link and select Properties....
The Object Properties box opens.
Figure 39: Object Properties for a Link
5. On the Link tab, adjust the appearance of the link. The table below describes the various options:
Table 75: Link Tab Options and User Action

Option User Action
Color Click the arrow by the Color box and select a color from the resulting
palette.
Transparent Select the check box to make the line appear transparent, or clear
the box to disable transparency. You cannot make lines with
arrowheads transparent.
Line style Select a line style from the list.
Line width Select a line width from the list.
Arrowheads: Select the check box by the Start or End option to assign it an
• Start arrowhead. Clear the check box by the Start or End option to disable
• End the arrowhead.
To view Link object properties, on the Object Properties dialog box, click the object tab. A link’s class is
"Link" and has no subclass.
For information on creating rules for a link, see Defining Rules (on page 429).
Deleting Nodes from the Resource Tree

This function is only available to Magellan CCS Navigator resource icons, its linked graphical objects, and
Graphical Navigation pages that have been created in Magellan CCS Navigator 1.7 or later.
Magellan CCS Navigator tracks the links of nodes that are dragged from the resource tree and the
resulting graphical objects in Graphical Navigation pages.
When you chose to delete a node from the resource tree, if it is linked to any graphical objects, a
Confirm Delete box appears. This box lists all of the linked pages and their paths, and gives you the
option to either continue with the deletion or to cancel your request. If you delete the node, any linked
graphical objects will lose the double-click actions of their parent, but will retain any rules that have
been defined for them.
Adding Controls
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can add controls.
Controls are added in Build mode.
Objects in the Controls menu are customizable and able to generate or respond to events.
Graphical Objects Available in the Controls Menu
Object Description Procedure
ActiveX Control Potentially adds any ActiveX control Adding an ActiveX Control
that is installed on your computer (on page 413)
Character Display Adds a display for showing string Setting a LTIMultiCharacter
status messages Display (on page 417)
Timer Control Adds a time of day display or Adding a Timer Control (on
stopwatch-style timer page 415)
Spin Control Adds a control to the desktop to Adding a Spin Control (on
increment or decrement values on page 418)
another control
Player Control Adds a MPEG-4 streaming icon, which Adding a Player Control (on
you can use to view an RTSP stream page 420)
Matrix Classic
These options are only available in RouterNAV and the full version of
Matrix Panel Magellan CCS Navigator. See Introduction to Routing Components
Multi-bus Panel (on page 656) for more information.
Multi-Bus Panel with Salvo
Single Bus Panel
Single Bus Panel with Monitor
We cannot guarantee the behavior of any non-LTI ActiveX controls. Ensure that you understand the
various events and actions that are available for the ActiveX controls that you choose.
In Magellan CCS Navigator, you are able to insert any ActiveX control that is available on your computer
into a Graphical Navigation page. You can then call the methods of the control, set the properties of the
control, or respond to events generated by the control. There are three menu options for the Controls
button on the Create Objects toolbar: ActiveX Controls, Character Display, and Timer Control. See
these topics for more information about the controls:
Other controls will be available, depending on your system’s configuration.
• Adding an ActiveX Control (on page 413)
• Adding a Timer Control (on page 415)
• Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display (on page 417)
• Adding a Spin Control (on page 418)
Adding an ActiveX Control

ActiveX controls can only be added to the active Graphical Navigation page.
To insert an ActiveX control into your Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps.
1. In Build mode, click Controls on the Create Objects toolbar and select ActiveX Control, or right-click
in the Navigation page and in the resulting shortcut menu select Create > ActiveX Control....
This opens the Insert ActiveX Control box listing the ActiveX controls that are available on your
computer.
2. Select the control that you require from the list and then click OK.
3. The list box closes and the mouse cursor turns into the ‘Insert Control’ cursor.
4. Drag the cursor over the location where you want the ActiveX control to be placed. A dotted line
graphically shows the area the control will occupy.
5. When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The ActiveX control is created.
Figure 40: New ActiveX Control
Adding a Timer Control

The timer object helps you to define your operations based on a period of time. The timer object can
display the current time of day (derived from your PC’s clock), or one of two stopwatch-style timers. The
timers can be started or stopped independently, and each timer can count either up or down.
The timer object generates these Magellan CCS Navigator events:

• LTITimer Control:OnStartTimer1: Generated when timer 1 starts
• LTITimer Control:OnStartTimer2: Generated when timer 2 starts
• LTITimer Control:OnStopTimer1: Generated when timer 1 is counting down, and when it reaches zero,
but not when the StopTimer action is called
• LTITimer Control:OnStopTimer2: Generated when timer 2 is counting down, and when it reaches zero.
This is not generated when the StopTimer action is called.
To insert an ActiveX Timer, complete the following steps:

1. Select Controls, and then Timer Control, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In the ActiveX
Control dialog box that appears, select LTITimer.
2. Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Timer control to be placed. A dotted line
3. When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The Timer control is created.
Figure 41: ActiveX Timer Control

See Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control (on page 417) for details on setting the
parameter values, such as timerIndex.
• The timer object adds specific actions to the Actions in the rules grid. For all actions which specify a
timerIndex, the timerIndex indicates which timer the action applies to. timerIndex 0 affects the time-
of-day display, timerIndex 1 affects timer 1, timerIndex 2 affects timer 2, and timerIndex -1 affects the
currently-displayed timer (-1 is not supported for the DisplayTimer action). If an invalid timerIndex is
specified, the action is ignored. If timerIndex -1 is specified and the timer control is displaying the time
of day, the action is ignored.
• LTITimer Control Actions (on page 416)
• Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control (on page 417)
Setting TimerIndex Actions

See Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control (on page 417) for details on setting the
parameter values, such as timerIndex.
The timer object adds specific actions to the Actions in the rules grid. For all actions which specify a
timerIndex, the timerIndex indicates which timer the action applies to. timerIndex 0 affects the time-of-
day display, timerIndex 1 affects timer 1, timerIndex 2 affects timer 2, and timerIndex -1 affects the
currently-displayed timer (-1 is not supported for the DisplayTimer action). If an invalid timerIndex is
specified, the action is ignored. If timerIndex -1 is specified and the timer control is displaying the time
of day, the action is ignored.
LTITimer Control Actions

The following table explains the effect of LTITimer control actions.
Table 76: LTITimer Control Actions
Action Effect Properties Used
LTITimer Control: Selects which timer to view timerIndex

Display Timer
LTITimer Control: Opens a dialog where you can enter specific hours, timerIndex
InputTimerValue minutes and seconds for the timer
LTITimer Control: Resets the specified timer to the last time value timerIndex
ResetTimer entered
LTITimer Control: Sets the timer to the specified time timerIndex; Hours;
SetTime This action is ignored if Hours is not between 0 and 23, Minutes; Seconds
or if either Minutes or Seconds are not between 0 and
59.
LTITimer Control: Indicates whether the timer should count up or down timerIndex; CountingUp
SetTimerDirection If CountingUp is 'true', or a number other than zero,
the timer counts up. If CountingUP is 'false' or the
number 0, the timer counts down. When the timer
counts up, it wraps at 24 hours, i.e. the next value
after 23:59:59 is 0:00:00, and continues counting. If
the timer is counting down, when it reaches 0:00:00 it
stops counting and sends an OnStopTimerX event.
The timer displays a green arrow indicating the
direction time timer counts. The green arrow is dim
when the timer is stopped, and bright when the timer
is running.
LTITimer Control: Starts the specified timer timerIndex

StartTimer If the timer is not already running, this action triggers
an OnStartTimerX event.
LTITimer Control: Stops the specified timer timerIndex
StopTimer This action does not trigger an OnStopTimerX event.
LTITimer Control: Starts or stops the specified timer timerIndex

TimerStartStop If the timer is running, the control will behave as if a
StopTimer action was called. If the timer is not
running, the control will behave as if a StartTimer
action was called.
LTITimer Control: Reverses the direction the timer is counting. timerIndex
ToggleCountDirection
LTITimer Control: Switches the time of day between 12-hour format and None
ToggleTimeFormat 24-hour format
Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer Control

Two LTITimer Control ActiveX properties may be set through the Set ActiveX Properties dialog.
Set ActiveX Properties Dialog Box
ActiveX Property Effect
TimeFormat If set to 'true', or a number other than 0, displays the time in 12-hour format. If
set to 'false' or 0, displays the time in 24-hour format. Any other value will cause
unpredictable results.
Enabled Enables or disables the ActiveX control. This property should generally not be
changed, unless you are familiar with ActiveX and COM programming. A complete
discussion of this topic is beyond the scope of this manual.
Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display

The LTIMultiCharacter Display ActiveX object is used to display string status messages.
To insert a Character Display ActiveX control, complete the following steps:

1. Select Controls, and then Character Display, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In the ActiveX
Control dialog box that appears, select LTI MultiCharDisplay.
2. Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Character Display to be placed. A dotted line
graphically shows the area the display will occupy.
3. When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The character display is created.
Figure 42: Example of the ActiveX Character Display Object
The character display object’s features are caption and set display properties.
The character display does not generate any events.
LTIMultiCharDisplay Control: SetCaption: Sets the text displayed by the control.
Properties used: strNewValue: The new text string to display.
Adding a Spin Control

The ActiveX Spin Control object is used to increment or decrement values on a specific control.
To insert a spin control, complete the following steps:

1. Select Controls, and then Spin Control, on the Create Objects toolbar, or right-click in the
Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select ActiveX Control. In the ActiveX Control dialog box
that appears, select LTITimer.
2. Drag the cursor over the location where you want the spin control to be placed. A dotted line
3. When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The spin control is created.
The LTISpinControl: OnUpdate event is generated whenever the spin control's value changes.
Table 77: LTISpinControl Actions

LTISpinControl: Increases or decreases the current value of relativeAdjust
ModifyValue: the spin control by the specified amount.
LTISpinControl: SetRange: Sets the minimum and maximum values for Minimum, Maximum
the spin control.
LTISpinControl Properties
• Horizontal: Indicates if the buttons should be displayed horizontally or vertically.
Figure 43: Horizontal LTISpinControl Buttons
1.
Figure 44: Vertical LTISpinControl Buttons
• MinimumValue: The lowest value the spin control uses. Default is zero.
• MaximumValue: The highest value the spin control uses. Default is 100.
• Wrap: If set to 'true' or a non-zero value, the spin control will wrap around when it reaches its
maximum or minimum. If set to 'false' or to 0, the spin control will clip to the maximum or minimum.
For example, if the CurrentValue is set to the MaximumValue, and Wrap is False, any attempt to
increase the CurrentValue will result in 100. If Wrap is True, then adding 1 to the CurrentValue will
wrap to the beginning of the range, MinimumValue.
• CurrentValue: The current value of the control.
Setting ActiveX Properties

ActiveX control properties are set using the SetActiveXProperty action. See the following for more
information:
• Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action (on page 453)
• Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action (on page 455)
Event, Property and Method Compatibility, and OLE Types
ActiveX events and methods are compatible if all parameters use OLE types that are supported by
Magellan CCS Navigator. The SetActiveXProperty dialog shows only those properties which use OLE
types that are supported by Magellan CCS Navigator. The values that are entered into the combo box, or
are retrieved from the Event Property or Custom Property, are converted into the appropriate type if
possible. If this is not possible, the call does not succeed and nothing happens.
The supported OLE types are:

• Integer — whole numbers
• Number — floating point values (3.1415 for example)
• Currency
• Date
• Text — any text
• Error code — whole numbers
• True/False
True/False is a BOOLEAN type. The allowable values are True, False (which are not case sensitive) or any
integer. 0 means False, all other numbers mean True. The preferred number for True is -1.
The Date is a text string containing a date, time or both. The date format is heavily dependent on the
regional settings of the control panel. For example 3/1/2 is interpreted as January 2, 2003 if the regional
settings are yy/mm/dd, or as March 1, 2003 if the regional settings are in the US-style of mm/dd/yy. The
regional settings of the control panel can be overridden by entering the month as text instead of as an
integer.
For best results, enter the date using text values for the date. (January 3 2003 instead of 1/3/3, for
example.)
If the date is not specified, it will default to December 30, 1899. If the time is not specified, it will default
to midnight.
The AM/PM indicators and month names are not case-sensitive. Time can be entered with or without
minutes and seconds and using either a 24-hour or a 12-hour clock using the AM/PM indicators in the
regional settings.
Examples using the Regional Date Settings of MM/DD/YY

• 2003/12/31 23:59:59
• 10:00 — interpreted as December 30, 1899, 10:00 AM
• 3/1/2 — interpreted as March 1, 2002
• 2002/3/1 — interpreted as March 1, 2002

• Mar 1, 2002
• March 1, 2002 13:55
• Mar 1 2002 1:55 PM
• 2002 mar 1 10am
• 1 mar 2002
Adding a Player Control

You might add a Player control to a Graphical Navigation page when you want to view an RTSP stream
from an external source.
To insert a Player control, complete the following steps:

1. Select Controls, and then Player Control, on the Create Objects toolbar.
OR
Right-click in the Navigation pane and in the shortcut menu select Player Control. In the ActiveX
Control dialog box that appears, select Player Control.
2. Drag the cursor over the location where you want the Player control to be placed. A dotted line
3. When the area is the size that you want, release the mouse button. The Player control is created.
4. Right click on the Player control and choose Properties...

An Object Properties dialog box appears.
5. On the Object Properties dialog box’s Streaming tab, enter the URL of an RTSP stream. (See Setting
the Streaming Object’s Properties (see "Setting a Streaming Object’s Properties" on page 405))
You will be able to view the stream when you switch Magellan CCS Navigator to Control mode.
Adding a Software Clock to a Navigator Page

You can add an ActiveX software clock to a Navigator page. By creating clock styles, you can have the
clocks display different time zones.
• Creating Clock Styles (on page 421)

• Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page (on page 421)
To download the software clock ActiveX control, follow this procedure:

1. Go to our website and find the SWC-5200 to download.
2. Click on the swc5200zx_setup_1_0.exe link.
3. Enter your e-mail address and password. If you do not have a password, click Create one now! and
fill in the screen that follows. When it is complete, a password will be mailed to you and you can
continue.
4. Place a check beside I have read the above section and agree, and then click Begin Download.
5. Follow the installation procedure.
Creating Clock Styles

The default setting for the control is to display a 12-hour analog clock, with the current date displayed
underneath, using the time zone configured in the Windows Control Panel.
If you want to change any of these settings, you need to create new clock styles. For example, if you
want to place three clocks on the page, showing the time in three different time zones, then you would
create three different clock styles.
To create a clock style, follow this procedure:

1. Start the clock as an independent process by browsing to the folder where it was installed and
clicking clock.exe.
The Leitch Clock application starts.
2. Right click on the Leitch Clock dialog box, and from the shortcut menu that appears, choose Clock
Properties.
The Clock Settings dialog box appears.
3. In the Clock Setting Style field, type a name for the new clock style.
4. Click Modify. The rest of the fields on the screen become available. For detailed instructions on the
settings you can apply to a clock style, refer to the Software Clock Help file.
5. Click Save.
The Clock Style file is saved.
6. Repeat steps 3 - 5 to create more clock styles.
7. Click OK to close the dialog box.
Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page

Once you have installed the SWC-5200 software clock, you can add it to a Navigator page.
Clock styles are stored with the login ID of the person logged onto the computer. If the person who
created the styles logs off and a different person logs on, using a different Windows User name, the
clock styles will not be available to that person.
1. In Build mode, right click on a Navigator page and choose Create > ActiveX Control... from the menu.
The Add ActiveX Control dialog box appears.
2. Scroll down and click on Leitch DAC Clock Control, and then click OK.
The Add ActiveX Control dialog box closes and the cursor turns into the "Insert Control" cursor.
3. Drag the cursor over the location where you want to place the control.
A dotted line graphically shows the area that the control will occupy.
4. When the area is the size you want, release the mouse button, and the ActiveX control is created.
5. To apply a clock style, right click and select Properties. Create a rule with the following properties:
Event: OnLoadPage
Action: Leitch DAC Clock Control:SetActiveXProperty
The Action Property dialog box appears.
7. Enable the checkbox beside the namedStyle property. In the Value column, type in the name of the
desired clock style (this will be the same name as displayed in the Select Clock Style list in the
Software Clock's properties dialog).
8. Click OK to close the Action Property dialog box.
The clock properties will load when Magellan CCS Navigator is placed in Control mode.
Adding a Gauge Control to a Navigator Page

LTIGauge Control is an ActiveX control which can be used in Navigator pages to simulate a gauge. The
LTIGauge Control has many properties that can be set to produce different appearances. Follow these
steps:
1. In Build mode, right click on a Navigator page and do either of the following:
 On the Create Objects toolbar, select Control > GaugeControl.
 Click the ActiveX Control > LTIGauge Control.
2. Right click the LTIGauge control and select Properties.
From the popup dialog, you can add rules and set the following properties for the LTIGauge control:
Table 78: LTIGauge Control Properties
LTIGauge Control Property Function or Range
Value Current value of the LTIGauge control

MinValue The minimum value displayed on the LTIGauge control
MaxValue The maximum value displayed on the LTIGauge control
CenterX The horizontal center of the gauge (in the control's client area), as
measured from the top left (0, 0) corner of the control’s client area
CenterY The vertical center of the gauge (in the control's client area), as
measured from the top left (0, 0) corner of the control’s client area
Cap_Idx The number of the caption. A gauge can have up to five captions,
labeled 0 to 4. Each caption can have the following properties:
• CapColor—The color of the caption, as an integer (so Red would be
16711680 decimal)
• CapText—The text of the caption.
• CapPositionX— The horizontal position of the caption.
• CapPositionY— Thevertical position of the caption.
BaseArcColor The color of the base arc
BaseArcRadius The radius of the base arc, measured in distance from the center
BaseArcStart The start angle of the base arc, measured by clockwise rotation from
the center horizontal line to the left-most position of the arc
BaseArcSweep The sweep angle of the base arc
BaseArcWidth The width of the base arc
ScaleLinesInterColor The color of the inter scale lines which are the middle scale lines for an
uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesInterInnerRadius The inner radius of the inter scale lines which are the middle scale
lines for an uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesInterOuterRadius The outer radius of the inter scale lines which are the middle scale
lines for an uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesInterWidth The width of the inter scale lines which are the middle scale lines for
an uneven number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorNumOf The number of minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorColor The color of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorInnerRadius The inner radius of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorOuterRadius The outer radius of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMinorWidth The width of the minor scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorStepValue The step value of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorColor The color of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorInnerRadius The inner radius of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorOuterRadius The outer radius of the major scale lines
ScaleLinesMajorWidth The width of the major scale lines
Range_Idx The number of the range that is being defined. A gauge can have up to
five ranges, labeled 0 to 4. Each range can have the following
properties:
• RangeEnabled—Enables or disables the range selected by
Range_Idx.
• RangeColor—The color of the range.
• RangeStartValue—The start value of the range, must be less than
RangeEndValue.
• RangeEndValue—The end value of the range. Must be greater than
RangeStartValue.
• RangeInnerRadius— The inner radius of the range.
• RangeOuterRadius—The outer radius of the range.
ScaleNumbersRadius The position of the scale numbers as measured from the center of the
gauge
ScaleNumbersColor The color of the scale numbers
ScaleNumbersRotation The angle relative to the tangent of the base arc at a scale line that is
used to rotate numbers, set to 0 for no rotation or e.g. set to 90
NeedleType The type of the needle, options are
• Type 0
• Type 1
NeedleRadius The length of the needle, as measured from the centre of the gauge
NeedleColor1 The first color of the needle:
• 0 Gray
• 1 Red
• 2 Green
• 3 Blue
• 4 Yellow
• 5 Violet
• 6 Magenta
NeedleColor2 The second color of the needle
NeedleWidth The thickness of the needle
BackgroundColor The color of the background
Editing a Page
To move items on a Graphical Navigation page, the Navigation option Allow drag and drop operations
in build mode must be selected. See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can edit pages.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
When you select, more and resize objects on a page, Magellan CCS Navigator behaves like most drawing
tools.
To select a single Graphical Navigation object, click inside its boundaries. The object has eight sizing
handles that appear when the object is selected.
Magellan CCS Navigator provides three methods for selecting multiple Graphical Navigation objects:
• Press the SHIFT key or CTRL key and keep it depressed while you select the multiple objects with
individual mouse clicks.
• Click on an empty area and drag the mouse to form a rectangular area around the objects you want to
select. A rectangle bound by a dashed line will appear on the page. When you release the mouse, all
objects having their boundaries within the area of the rectangle are selected. This is called a marquee
select.
• Right-click in the Graphical Navigation page. In the shortcut menu that appears, click Select All. This
will select all of the objects in the Graphical Navigation page.
To clear the selection, select File > Clear from the main menu. This clears multiple selections in the
Navigation pane or Graphical Navigation page, leaving only one selected item. This deletes nothing from
the Navigation or Graphical Navigation page.
Magellan CCS Navigator has the following options for editing Graphical Navigation pages:
• Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects (on page 425)
• Moving a Graphical Navigation Object (on page 426)
• Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects (on page 426)
• Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects (on page 426)
• Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects (on page 427)
Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects

To resize a Graphical Navigation object and retain its proportional dimensions, press the SHIFT key and
then click and drag one of the four corner sizing handles of the object with the mouse while keeping the
SHIFT key pressed.
To resize a Graphical Navigation object and change its relative height and width, drag any of the eight
sizing handles of the object. This will distort the appearance of the object.
To resize multiple Graphical Navigation objects so that they are the same size, same width, or same
height; follow this procedure:
1. Select one object, hold own the Shift key and select the other objects.
2. Right-click one of the selected objects, select Size, and then select from one of the three options
described below.
Table 79: Commands on the Size Menu

Command Function
Same Size Scales the objects so they are the same size vertically and horizontally
Same Width Scales the objects so they are the same width
Command Function
Same Height Scales the objects so they are the same height
Moving a Graphical Navigation Object

To move items on a Graphical Navigation page, the Navigation option Allow drag and drop operations
in build mode must be selected. See Setting Navigation Options (on page 147).
To move a Graphical Navigation button, symbol, image or text object, click on the object and hold the
mouse button down while dragging the object to a new location. Release the mouse button when the
object is where you want it.
For fine adjustment of an object’s position on the page, select the object and use the arrow keys on your
keyboard to move the object into position. Turning on the Show Grid and Snap to Grid features in the
Graphical Navigation Options can help you line up the objects with respect to each other. See Aligning
and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects (on page 427).
If you select and drag a linked symbol on a Graphical Navigation page, any links to it will track the
moving symbol on the page.
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Navigation Objects

To copy a Graphical Navigation object, select the object and click the Copy tool on the toolbar, or right-
click the object and then select Copy.
Or, to cut a Graphical Navigation object, select the object, and then click the Cut tool on the toolbar; or
right-click the object and select Cut.
Then, to paste the cut or copied object on the page, move the mouse cursor to a new location, then click
the Paste tool on the toolbar; or right-click and select Paste.
To delete a Graphical Navigation object, select the object, and then click the Delete tool on the toolbar;
or right-click the object and select Delete.
Keyboard shortcuts are as follows:

• Cut—Press CTRL+X
• Copy—Press CTRL+C
• Paste—Press CTRL+V
• Delete—Press CTRL+D or DELETE
Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation Objects

To set the display order of Graphical Navigation objects—whether the objects are buttons, links,
symbols, images or text—right-click an object, select Order>, and then select from one of the four
options described below.
Table 80: Commands on the Order Menu and Their Functions

Command Function
Bring to Front Brings the selected object to the top layer in a set of layered objects
Send to Back Sends the selected object to the bottom layer in a set of layered objects
Bring Forward Brings the selected object forward one layer in a set of layered objects
Send Backward Brings the selected object back one layer in a set of layered objects
Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation Objects

To align and space Graphical Navigation objects, right-click one of the selected objects, select Align or
Space>, and then select from one of the eight options described below.
Table 81: Commands on the Align and Space Menu

Command Function
Align Top Aligns the tops of the objects horizontally
Align Middle Aligns the centers of the objects horizontally
Align Bottom Aligns the bottoms of the objects horizontally
Align Left Aligns the left side of the objects vertically
Align Center Aligns the centers of the objects vertically
Align Right Aligns the right side of the objects vertically
Space Across Evenly distributes objects horizontally
Space Down Evenly distributes the objects vertically
Using the Graphical Navigation Context Menus

You cannot perform build operations, such as drag-and-drop, scaling, object creation, or attribute
definition, when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control mode.
When you right-click a Graphical Navigation page or object in any operational mode, a shortcut menu
appears.
The table below lists the commands available from these shortcut menus in build mode. Depending
whether you right-click a page or an object, some commands are not available.
Table 82: Shortcut Menu Commands, Build Mode

Command Function
Control Opens the Control dialog box of the selected symbol if it has a valid device ID
Configuration Opens the Configuration dialog box of the selected symbol if it has a valid device
ID
Cut Cuts the selected object or objects
Command Function
Copy Copies the selected object or objects
Paste Cuts the selected object or objects
Delete Deletes the selected object or objects
Select All Selects all objects on the page
Order > Shows the Order submenu; see Setting the Display Order of Graphical Navigation
Objects (on page 426)
Align or Space > Aligns of spaces selected objects on the page; see Aligning and Spacing Graphical
Navigation Objects (on page 427)
Size > Resizes selected objects on the page; see Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects (on
page 425)
View > Shows the View submenu; see Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Symbols
(on page 410)
Create > Shows the Create submenu; see these topics:
• Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page (on page 387)
• Adding a Resource Icon Symbol (on page 406)
• Adding Controls (on page 412)
Zoom > Shows the Zoom menu; see Using Zoom Tools (on page 377)
Pan Uses the Pan submenu to move about in the Graphical Navigation page; the Pan
submenu contains these options:
• Pan (Keyboard shortcut: press CTRL+A)
• Zoom
Properties... Opens the Object Properties box of the selected object
Component Wizard... Recalls the wizard that created the component; This command will be disabled if
the component was not created by a wizard
Options... Opens the Graphical Navigation Options box
Help... Opens a Help topic on the Graphical Navigation tool
Chapter 20
Defining Rules
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create rules for Magellan CCS
Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator users can create rules.
In Build mode, you can define rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. A rule consists of an
event or condition which causes Magellan CCS Navigator to perform an action.
An event is a trigger for an action to be performed. Some examples of events that always trigger an
action are: On Load Page, On Mouse Click, and On Unload Page. For a list of events available in Magellan
CCS Navigator, see Setting an Event (on page 434).
A conditional event must happen in a specific way for an associated action to be triggered. Some
examples of conditional events are On Custom Property Change and On MGI Lamp Status. See Defining
Conditions (on page 435).
An action occurs in response to an event or a conditional event.
Actions can be divided into two basic types: those related to the Magellan CCS Navigator and those
related to specific plug-in (such as SuiteView or Advanced Router). Magellan CCS Navigator actions are
found in this chapter. Actions related to specific plug-ins are found in the chapters dealing with those
specific plug-ins.
For an extensive list of actions, see Setting an Action (on page 440).
When configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add actions to
this list that will invoke the ActiveX object’s methods, or set the ActiveX object’s properties.
Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page

When an event is conditional, you can type your own description of the event in the Condition box.
However, if the event is unconditional (that is, the Condition box reads "always"), you cannot type
in a Condition box.
The generic procedure for creating a new rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator object or page is as follows:
1. Right-click the object or page.
2. Select Properties... to display the Object Properties box.
3. Click the Rules tab.
Only an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license can create or edit
rules.
4. Click New Rule on the Rules tab toolbar. See Using the Rules Tab Toolbar (on page 433).
A new record will appear as a new row in the Rules list. See Using the Rules Table (on page 433).
After providing a default description (which is based on the condition/action properties), Magellan
CCS Navigator will not change the description if you changed the one provided by Magellan CCS
Navigator. However, if you do not change these descriptions, but rather the properties of either the
event or action, Magellan CCS Navigator will provide a new set of descriptions that match the
properties of the event/action.
5. Click the arrow in the Event column, and then select an event from the list.
See Setting an Event (on page 434).
6. If the event that you have chosen requires that you set a condition, click Condition and complete
the Event Condition tab of the Condition dialog box. See Defining Conditions (on page 435).
If the event does not require you to set conditions, the Condition button is still available. When you
click it, there will be a single tab labelled Custom Property Condition.
Custom property conditions can trigger and execute an action only when an event happens AND the
value of a custom property(ies) is (are) met (for example).
To create a custom property condition, follow this procedure:
a. Type a name for this custom property in the Description field.

b. Click New to create a new line in the Conditions table.
c. Use the buttons near the bottom of the dialog box to create an expression.
These buttons create content for the Condition field.

Just like an algebraic equation, parentheses apply precedence to some events over others. Your
expression can extend across multiple rows in the table.
If you, for example, add an open bracket, you must add a close bracket as well or you cannot
progress to the next dialog box.
In the Logic column, you can click to choose AND or OR.
An event that contains NOT takes precedence over an event that contains AND, and an event that
contains AND takes precedence over an event that contains OR.
When your expression is complete, click OK to return to the Rules dialog box.
7. Click the arrow in the Action column, and select an action from the list. Depending on the object you
are applying rules to, different options may be available. For example, you can only apply ActiveX
actions to an ActiveX object, and you can only apply button actions to a button. See Setting an
Action (on page 440) for more information.
8. Click Action Properties and set the properties in the resulting box.
When you close the Action Properties box, the Description field for this rule is updated. You can
edit the content of this field by typing a description of the new rule that makes sense to you.
9. To add additional rules to the list, click New Rule and repeat steps 5 -8.
Using the Rules Tab Toolbar

The Rules tab has its own toolbar.
Table 83: Toolbar for the Rules Tab

Name Function
New Adds a new row to the list of rules
Delete Deletes a selected row from the list of rules
(Use to delete empty rules -- you cannot close the Object Properties dialog box if
there are incomplete or empty rules)
Copy Copies the contents of the currently selected rule
Paste Pastes the contents of the rule on the clipboard (after a copy operation) into a new
row of the properties dialog; you may use paste to copy rules between properties
dialog boxes
Up Moves the selected rule up one row in the sequential order of rules
(Magellan CCS Navigator executes the rules sequentially in general, but rules with
the same type of event trigger [such as on mouse click] are processed virtually
simultaneously if they list sequentially.)
Down Moves the selected rule down one row in the sequential order of rules
(Magellan CCS Navigator executes the rules sequentially in general, but rules with
the same type of event trigger (such as on mouse click) are processed virtually
simultaneously if they list sequentially.)
Condition Opens a dialog in which you can define conditions for the event to occur
Action Properties Opens a dialog in which you can define properties for the new action
Using the Rules Table

The Rules list is a four-column table.
Columns in the Rules Table

Column Function and Help Reference
Event Lists events for which you can define an action.
Condition States whether the action always or conditionally occurs. If the text is conditional, you
can click Condition and define the conditions in the resulting dialog box.
Action Lists the possible actions for events associated with a Magellan CCS Navigator object.
Description Allows you to type in a description of the rule that suits your needs.
Setting an Event
rules.
An event is the trigger for an action.
Some actions happen only when a certain condition occurs. On Crosspoint Status and On Custom
Property Change are conditional events. You must define the conditions of the events that trigger these
events. To do this, you must complete the Condition dialog box.
The items in the events list depend to some extent on the options available for your system. For
example, router options will only appear if you have the router plug-in available. Events applicable to
specific objects can be found in the chapters dealing with those objects.
When configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add events to this
list that basevd on any Events that the ActiveX object fires.
The event types On Load Page, On Mouse Click, and On Unload Page always trigger an action.
The Events list on the Rules table has these options:

Default Event Options in the Rules Table
Event Description
Multiple Events When any one of a defined list of events occurs
See Setting Conditions for a "Multiple Events" Event (on page 436)
On Alarm When a specific alarm is triggered
See Setting Conditions for "On Alarm" Events (on page 436)
On Device Alarm When the specified alarm's state changes in any way
State change
Event Description
On Custom Property When a defined custom property for a Magellan CCS Navigator object or page
Change changes
See these topics:
• Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page (on page 372)
• Defining Custom Properties for a Page (on page 385)
• Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event (on page 438)
• Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action (on page 450)
On Load Page When a Graphical Navigation page opens

On Mouse Click When you click the mouse
On Unload Page When a page closes
Defining Conditions
rules.
Some events are conditional. This means they occur on some occasions when an action is performed,
but not on others. You can determine the conditions which trigger this type of event.
Events that are conditional are listed in the following table.

Default Conditional Events in Magellan CCS Navigator
Event Reference
On Multiple Events Setting Conditions for a "Multiple Events" Event (on page 436)
On Alarm Setting Conditions for "On Alarm" Events (on page 436)
On Custom Property Change (this event Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event
can also use global properties) (on page 438)
Defining an Event or Action Property for the First Time

When you define an event or action property for the first time, the application creates a default
condition description (Condition box) and a default rule description (Description box). After providing a
default description (based on the condition/action properties), Magellan CCS Navigator will not change
the description if you have changed it. However, if you do not change these descriptions, but rather the
properties of either the event or action, Magellan CCS Navigator will provide a new set of descriptions
that match the properties of the event/action.
Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition

Rather than creating a new condition set, you can also reuse previously set conditions or select a similar
set and edit them.
1. Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar, then click Existing Conditions>> to show a box listing
previously defined conditions.
2. Select from the list to reuse previously set conditions or select a similar set of conditions and edit
them, and then click OK.
Setting Conditions for a "Multiple Events" Event

The Event Condition Dialog - Multiple Events dialog box is very similar to the Object Properties - Rules
dialog box, but with the addition of a Description field at the top of the dialog box and a Logical Event
type column where the Description column is in the Object Properties dialog box.
The effect of creating a Multiple Event event is to list a series of events. When any of these events
occurs, the resulting action occurs. The content of the Logical Event type field is always OR.
To complete the "Multiple Events" event condition box, complete these steps:
1. Enter a name or description for the Multiple Events Condition that you are creating in the
Description field.
2. Click New on the Multiple Events toolbar.
A new record will appear as a new row in the Events list.
3. Click the arrow in the Event column, and then select an event from the list.
See Setting an Event (on page 434).
4. If the Condition column reads "Conditional," click Condition and complete the resulting conditions
dialog box.
See Defining Conditions (on page 435).
5. Repeat steps 2 - 4 if you need to create more conditions.
6. Click OK to return to the Page Properties - Rules dialog box. You are now ready to add an action that
will occur when any of the events you have specified trigger it. See Defining an Event or Action
Property for the First Time (on page 435).
Setting Conditions for "On Alarm" Events

The "On Alarm" event is not available for Q-SEE enabled 6800+ devices. if you select a Q-SEE enabled
device in the Condition dialog for this event, after polling the device, you will receive an error message.
Conditions for the "On Alarm" event determine the specific alarm on the specific device that must
happen to trigger the action that will follow it. For information on alarms, see Network Event
Diagnostics (on page 263).
To complete the "On Alarm" Event Condition box, complete these steps:
1. Click Select... and select a device to monitor.

Magellan CCS Navigator polls the selected device to retrieve the device’s alarm and parameter
information.
2. Choose By Alarm Level, By Alarm Name, or By Parameter, and then make the appropriate
selections as determined by the chart below:
Table 84: Settings Options for On Alarm Events

Condition Settings
By Alarm Level Level - from the left drop-down menu, choose either Equals, Not Equals or Any
Value.
• Equals triggers when any alarm is the specified level.
• Not Equals triggers when the alarm is not the specified level.
• Any Value triggers on any alarm, regardless of level.
If you choose Equals or Not Equals, from the right drop-down menu, choose the
alarm level: Critical, Warning, Information, or Cleared.
Condition Settings
Acknowledged - Click here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm is
acknowledged.
By Alarm Name Name - From the left drop-down menu, choose Equals or Not Equals.
From the right drop-down menu, choose from the list of available alarms for the
selected device.
Cleared - Check here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm is cleared. If this
box is unchecked, this rule will trigger when the selected alarm is activated.
OR
Acknowledged -Click here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm is
acknowledged.
By Parameter Name - From the left drop-down menu, select Equals or Not Equals.
From the right drop-down menu, choose the parameter you want to single out. All
this device’s parameters that provide alarm feedback are listed.
Alarm - from the left drop-down menu, choose Equals, Not Equals or Any Value. If
you choose Equals or Not Equals, from the right drop-down menu, choose an alarm
for that parameter.
Value - From the left drop-down menu, choose Equals, Not Equals or Any Value. If
you choose Equals or Not Equals, use the up/down buttons to select a number in the
range for that parameter.
Cleared -Check here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm is cleared. If this
box is unchecked, this rule will trigger when the selected alarm is activated.
OR
Acknowledged - Click here if you want to trigger the rule when the alarm is
acknowledged
3. Click OK to close the Event Condition box.
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Change’ Event

If the Magellan CCS Navigator page contains a Magellan CCS Navigator Frame, any custom property
changes on the Frame will be "bubbled up" to the containing page, triggering an On Custom Property
Page event on the main page.
A custom property is a variable. If you do not have any custom properties set, see Setting Custom Page
Properties (on page 386).
To complete the "On Custom Property Change" Condition box, complete these steps:
1. Type a name for the custom property in the Property box, or click the arrow and select a name for
the custom property or global property from the Property list.
2. Click the arrow in the box to the right of the Property box, and select a condition: Equals, Not
Equals, or Any Value.
Set property action behavior is normally grayed out.
3. In the Value section, select Custom Value, Router Value, or Event/Custom Properties, depending
on your goal for that custom or global property.
Table 85: Columns in the Rules Table

Table 86: Event Conditions And How To Set Them

Value How To Set
Custom Value Type the custom value in the Value box.
Router Value Select the router by clicking Select... in the Device ID field.
If the router does not appear in the Router Selection dialog box, then you must first
configure the router.
See Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656).
Then click the arrow in the Router Value box and select from the list of sources and
destinations for the specified router. Sources have the prefix "[Src]" and destinations
have the prefix "[Dst]."
Event/Custom Type the value in the Event Value box. This option is only available if there are
Properties properties associated with the event.
Database value Click here if you want the custom property to be retrieved from the database.
Save the changed Click here if you want to save the value of the custom property in the Magellan CCS
value to database Navigator database. When a value is saved in this way, you will be able to retrieve it
even after rebooting Magellan CCS Navigator.


4. Click OK to close the Event Condition box.
For information on reusing an "On Custom Property Change" condition, see Reusing or Editing a
Previously Set Condition (on page 435).
Setting an Action
rules.
Magellan CCS Navigator initiates actions in response to events. Together, an event and its associated
action constitute a rule. The following table lists the available actions, their function, and a Help
reference.
Table 89: Default Actions List

Action Function Reference Topic
Alarm Filtering Toggles alarm filtering on or off Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering
Actions (on page 442)
Configuration Loads a device configuration dialog box Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’
Action (on page 442)
Control Loads a device control dialog box Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action
(on page 443)
Execute Macro Loads a pre-created macro Setting Properties for an ‘Execute
Macro’ Action (on page 444)
Launch Application Starts an application from the Setting Properties for a ‘Launch
Graphical Navigation page Application’ Action (on page 444)
Load Layout Loads a pre-created layout Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’
Load Page Loads another Magellan CCS Navigator Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’
page Action (on page 445)
Load Preset Loads a preset Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
Load Frame Page Loads a Magellan CCS Navigator page in Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame
a Magellan CCS Navigator frame Page’ Action (on page 445)

Product Info Opens a device product brochure or Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’
spec sheet Action (on page 446)
Product User Manual Opens a device user manual Setting Properties for a ‘Product User
Manual’ Action (on page 448)
Set Button Properties Sets the appearance and behavior for Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button
a button Properties’ Action (on page 449)
Set Button Blink Mode Sets the blink mode to on, off, or toggle Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink
Mode’ Action (on page 449)
Set Custom Property Changes the current value of a custom Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom
or global property Property’ Action (on page 450)
Set Frame Custom Sets a custom value or event for the Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame
Property frame Custom Property’ Action (on page 451)
Set Link Properties Changes the appearance of a link Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link
Properties’ Action (on page 451)
Set ActiveX Properties Sets the properties for an ActiveX Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX
control object Properties’ Action (on page 453)
Set Page Refresh Determines whether or not the page Setting Properties for a "Set Page
Option will be updated automatically Refresh Option" Action (on page 454)
Set Screen Mode Sets or disables full screen mode Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen
Mode’ Action (on page 455)
Set Symbol Properties Changes the highlighted symbol’s state Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol
Properties’ Action (on page 452)
Set Text Properties Changes text in response to specified Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text
events Properties’ Action (on page 453)
Invoke ActiveX Method Allows parameters to be set for an Setting Properties for the ActiveX
ActiveX control Method’s Action (on page 455)
In addition, when configuring rules for ActiveX objects, Magellan CCS Navigator will automatically add
actions to this list that will invoke the ActiveX object's methods, or set the ActiveX object's properties.
Setting the Action Properties

rules.
Each of the different actions you can choose in the Action field of the Rules tab of the Object Properties
dialog box has properties to be set.
Click Action Properties to open the specific rules for the action you have selected.
To create a rule, see Defining Rules (on page 429).

Reusing the Event Properties

Many events have additional information associated with them. For example, 'On Custom Property
Change' events indicates which custom property has changed and its new value. These are called Event
Properties.
You can copy Event Properties into many of Action Property dialogs. For example, you could set up a
Text object to change its text to the custom property value contained in the 'On Custom Property
Change’ event.
To select the Event Property, in the appropriate Action Property dialog will have an option labelled
Event Properties or Event/Custom Properties, with a list of properties to choose from. Event Properties
have the prefix [EP], and Custom Properties have the prefix [CP].
Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering Actions

See Setting an Action (on page 440) for instructions on how to set an Action. For more information on
alarm filtering, see Setting Alarm Filtering Options (on page 275).
An Alarm Filtering action turns alarm filtering on or off. To set alarm filtering action properties,
1. Select the correct device ID by clicking Select if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not
inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the device ID and other configuration information if you create a symbol
from a fully configured device in the resource tree. The symbol will inherit the configuration details
of the device as well as its navigation properties.
Also, if you double-click the symbol, you will automatically show the symbol’s Configuration dialog
box in Build mode or its Control dialog box in Control mode.
2. In the Alarm Filtering box, click the arrow and select one of these options:
Table 90: Alarm Filtering Options and Functions

Option Function
On Turns on alarm filtering
Off Turns off alarm filtering
Toggle Enables toggling alarm filtering on and off
(If alarm filtering is on, the action will turn it off; if alarm filtering is
off, the action will turn it on.)
3. Click OK to close the action properties box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action

You do not need to set an action to open a Configuration dialog box when using a symbol object with a
valid device ID—unless you want to open a Configuration dialog box for a device that is not represented
by the symbol. To open a Configuration dialog box for a symbol with a valid device ID, double-click the
symbol when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
See Setting an Action (on page 440) for instructions on how to set an Action. For information on
configuration options and settings, see CCS Device Configuration (on page 153).
A Configuration action opens a specific device’s Configuration dialog box. To set configuration action
properties, complete these steps:
1. Select the correct device ID by clicking Select, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not
inherited the appropriate ID from the object from which it was created.
2. Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the Control dialog box to be
opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You can also
define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing in values on the appropriate fields.
The Width and Height fields are initialized with the default values of the selected device.
3. If you have already set a similar action, you can click Existing Actions>> and select one from the list
in the resulting dialog box. Then edit the action as required for the new circumstances.
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action

You do not need to set an action to open a Control dialog box when using a symbol object with a valid
Device ID—unless you want to open a Configuration dialog box for a device that is not represented
by the symbol. To open a Configuration dialog box for a symbol with a valid device ID, double-click the
symbol when Magellan CCS Navigator is in control mode.
See Setting an Action (on page 440) for instructions on how to set an action. A Control action opens a
device’s Control dialog box. For information on Control dialog boxes, see CCS Device Control (on page
282).
If you have chosen a Control action, complete these steps:

1. Select the correct Device ID, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not inherited the
appropriate ID from the object from which you created it.
You can avoid having to set the Device ID and other configuration information if you create a symbol
Depending on your system’s configuration, you may not have access to various different devices for
control.
2. Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the Control dialog box to be
opened. You can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You can also
define the width and height of the Control dialog box by typing in values in the appropriate fields.
The Width and Height fields are initialized with the default values of the selected device.
Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action

See Setting an Action (on page 440) for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Execute Macro action triggers a pre-defined group of actions. If you haven’t created any macros,
you may not have an appropriate macro to load. See Creating a Macro (on page 456).
To set the Execute Macro action properties, complete these steps:

1. In the Macro Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available macro names.
See Working with Macros (on page 456) and CCS Device Control (on page 282).
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action

You can also start an application from the Navigation pane. SeeSetting the Command Tab (on page 132)
and Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator Applications from the Navigation Pane (on page 132).
A Launch Application action starts an application from the Graphical Navigation page. To set Launch
Application action properties, complete these steps:
1. Do one of the following to have the path to the application’s executable file appear in the Command
box:
 Type the path to the executable file in the Command box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Set Application to Launch box to find the
application on your network.
When you find the *.exe or *.bat file that starts the application, select it, and click Open.
2. Type any special arguments in the Arguments box.
3. Do one of the following to have the path to the initial directory appear in the Initial Directory box:
 Type the path to the initial working directory in the Initial Directory box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Select Initial Directory box to find the initial
working directory.
When you find the initial working directory, select it, and then click OK.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action

A layout is a file that preserves the positions of various pages and panels on the Magellan CCS Navigator
desktop. The Load Layout action returns the pages and panels to these positions. If you have not
created any layouts, you may not have an appropriate layout to load. See Using the Window Menu (on
page 78).
To set the Load Layout action properties, complete these steps:

1. In the Layout Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available layout names.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action

When you define a "Load Page action" for an object, you are creating a link between that object and the
page. That object is now a parent object for that page, and any other pages that are linked to it. Any
alarm that occurs on any object on a linked page will "bubble up" to its parent object, causing the parent
object to flash an alarm.
This action loads a Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator page. For more information on creating pages for
loading, see Graphical Navigation Page Creation (on page 372).
To set Load Page action properties, complete these steps:

1. Do one of the following to have the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page appear in the
Graphical Page box:
 Type the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page in the Graphical Page box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Open box to find the Magellan CCS Navigator page.
The default location for all Magellan CCS Navigator pages is the Pages folder, which displays by
default.
When you find the Magellan CCS Navigator page, select it, and then click Open.
2. Select Open Page in a New Window if you want the new page to open in a separate dialog box.
3. Type the coordinates in the Left and Top fields where you want the dialog box to be opened. You
can start/stop capturing the mouse position by pressing CTRL+ALT+S. You can also define the width
and height of the Control dialog box by typing the values on the appropriate fields.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ Action

The Load Frame Page action loads a Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator frame page. This action can only
be performed on a Navigator Frame object. For information on adding a Navigator Frame to your page,
see Adding a Navigator Frame (on page 398) and Creating a Frame View Page (on page 373).
To set Load Frame Page action properties, complete these steps:

1. Do one of the following to have the path to a Magellan CCS Navigator page appear in the Custom
Value box:
 Type the path to the Magellan CCS Navigator page in the Custom Value box.
OR
 Click Browse [...], and then use the resulting Open box to find the Magellan CCS Navigator page.
The default location for all Magellan CCS Navigator pages in the Pages folder, which displays by
default.
When you find the Magellan CCS Navigator page, select it, and then click Open.
2. To open a customized page in the Magellan CCS Navigator Frame, select

Event/Custom Properties, and then use the down arrow to select from the list.
4. Select Attempt to initialize the loaded page's custom properties to match the actual page if you
want to set all the matching custom properties, by name, on the loaded page, to the actual (parent)
page’s value. For example, if both pages have a custom property called 'Source', when the page in
the frame gets loaded, its Source custom property will be set to the value of the Source property of
the actual (parent) page.
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action

Depending on your system’s configuration, you may not have access to various different devices for
control.
See Setting an Action (on page 440) for instructions on how to set an action.
The Load Preset action applies a set of pre-defined control settings for one or more devices. If you have
not created any presets, you may not be able to complete this action. For information on creating
presets, refer to Setting Control Options (on page 294).
If you choose a Load Preset action, click the Action Products button. The Action Property - Load Preset
dialog box appears.
Complete these steps:

1. Click Select... to select a device.
The Device Selection dialog box opens.
2. Select a device.
Note the listed Device Location to ensure you are selecting the correct device.
3. Click OK.
The selected device ID now appears in the corresponding field within the Action Property dialog
box.
4. In the Preset Name box, click the arrow and select one of the available preset names.
See CCS Device Control (on page 282).
Setting Properties for a ‘Product Info’ Action

A Product Info action can only be applied to Magellan CCS Navigator objects. This action displays a
product brochure or specification sheet when triggered. For more information, see Showing Product
Information for a CCS Device (on page 146).
To set the Product Info action properties, complete these steps:

1. Select the correct device ID by clicking Select, if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not
Setting Properties for a ‘Product User Manual’ Action

A Show Product User Manual action can only be applied to a Magellan CCS Navigator object. This action
opens a PDF of the user guide for the selected item when triggered. For more information on showing a
user manual, see Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device (on page 184).
To set Product User Manual action properties, complete these steps:

1. Select the correct device ID by clicking Select , if the selected Magellan CCS Navigator object has not
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action

The Set Button Properties action can only be set for a Magellan CCS Navigator button. You can set
different button properties to represent different actions. For example, you can have a button’s state
change when it is clicked on, or make it take on a highlighted state when an alarm is triggered. For
information on creating buttons, see Adding Buttons (on page 387).
To set button action properties, complete these steps:

1. Select the Color check box if you want to set a color for the button other than the default gray, or
clear the check box (if not already cleared) if you prefer the default gray.
If you select the Color box, click the arrow in the color palette box to its right and select a color from
the resulting color palette, and select a percentage for Transparency.
2. Click the arrow in the Disable box and select one of these three options:
 If you do not want the button to change, select Don’t Change.
 If you want the button to appear selected, select True.
This will have a visible effect on the button only if the button is a toggle button. If it is not a
toggle button—that is, if the Toggle check box on the button properties page has been
cleared—then the button will be selected but will immediately become unselected.
When True is selected, the No grey text option becomes available. When No grey text is
selected, the button will appear available even when it is not.
 If you do not want the button to appear selected, select False.
3. Click the arrow in the Highlighted box and select one of these three options:
 If you do not want the button to change, select Don’t Change.
 If you want the button to appear highlighted, select True.
 If you do not want the button to appear highlighted, select False.
4. In the Caption box, select one of these two options:
 For unchanging text on the button face, select Custom Value and type the text in the text box.
 For button face text that changes in response to events, select Event/Custom Properties and
choose the text-changing event using the down arrow.
Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’ Action

This action is used to make a button blink or stop blinking, depending on its current state. The Set
Button Blink Mode action can only be set for Magellan CCS Navigator buttons. For information on
creating buttons, see Adding Buttons (on page 387).
To complete the Button Blink Mode action properties box, complete these steps:
1. Select the Blink Mode from the list.
The options are On, Off, or Toggle.
2. Select Color or Bitmap.
If Color is selected, click the arrow in the color palette box to its right and select a color for the blink
from the resulting color palette. In the Transparency box, enter the level of transparency for the button,
while in blink mode. The higher the number, the more transparent the button.
If Bitmap is selected, click Browse to select a graphic file. When the button is blinking in Control mode, it
will display the graphic in its "on" state.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action

For a complete explanation of what custom properties are and how you can use them on a Graphical
Navigation page, see Defining Custom Properties for a Page (on page 385).
To complete the Set Custom Property action properties box, complete these steps:
1. In the Property drop-down menu, select a custom property (CP) or global property (GP).
Instead of completing the following steps, you can instead click Existing Actions>> to show a box
listing previously defined conditions. Select from the list to reuse previously set conditions or select
a similar set of conditions and edit them. Then click OK.
2. Under Set property action behavior, choose an option from the drop-down menu.
Options include Replace, Append to, or Remove from existing property value.
If you choose Append or Remove, the Value Separator menu becomes available. Choose an item
from the list.
Select Mute custom property change event if you want to suppress any events that the action
triggers.
3. In the Value section, select Custom Value, Router Value, Event /Custom Properties, or Database
value depending on whether you want to set a custom value, a router value, or an event property
value for the custom or global property.
 If you select Custom Value, type the custom value in the Value box.
 If you select Router Value, click Select... in the Device ID box and select a router from the list
of configured routers.
Then click the arrow in the Router Value box and select from the list of sources and destinations
for the specified router. Sources have the prefix "[Src]" and destinations have the prefix "[Dst]."
If the router does not appear in the Router Select dialog, then you must first configure the
router. See Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656).
 If you select Event/Custom Properties, select the value from the list.
The values in the event property list are dependent upon the event that the action is associated
with. Not all events enable the Event Property option.
 If you select Database value, the custom property is set to its previously saved value from the
database.
It you want to save the value of the custom property in the Magellan CCS Navigator database, click Save
the changed value to the database. When a value is saved in this way, you will be able to retrieve it
even after rebooting Magellan CCS Navigator.
Click OK to close the Set Custom Property action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom Property’ Action

This action can only be performed on a Navigator Frame object. For information on adding a Navigator
Frame to your page, see Adding a Navigator Frame (on page 398).
To complete the Set Frame Custom Property action properties box, complete these steps:
1. Type a name for the custom property in the Custom Property box, or click the arrow and select a
name for the custom property from the Custom Property list.
Instead of completing the following steps, you can instead click Existing Actions>> to show a box
listing previously defined conditions. Select from the list to reuse previously set conditions or select
a similar set of conditions and edit them. Then click OK.
2. Select Custom Value or Event/Custom Properties depending on whether you want to set
a custom value or event/custom property value for the frame custom property.
 If you select Custom Value, type the custom value in the Value box.
 If you select Event/Custom Properties, type the custom value in the box, or select an event or
custom property from the list.
3. Click OK to close the Set Frame Custom Property action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Action

This action can only be applied to a link. You can use it to change the appearance of a link when the
action is triggered. For more information on links, see Creating Links Between Symbols (on page 410).
See Setting an Action (on page 440) for instructions on how to set an Action. To complete the Set Link
Properties action properties box, complete these steps:
1. If you want the line to become transparent, place a check in the box beside Transparent. If the line
becomes transparent, its color, style and width become irrelevant, as they are invisible.
2. To change the color of the line, place a check in the Color box.
To select a new color for the line, click the color square beside the Color check box. A palette opens.
When you click on the color you desire on the palette, that color is selected and the palette closes.
3. To change the style and weight of the line, place a check in the Line box.
From the Style menu, click on the style (solid, dash, dot and so forth). The style options available only
affect the lines that have a width of 0 point (1 pixel).
From the Width menu, click on the weight of line you want to see. Use the scroll bar at the right of the
menu to scroll up and down to review the entire list.
When you are satisfied with your choices, click OK to return to the Object Properties - Rules screen.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’ Action

The Set Symbol Properties action can only be set for a Magellan CCS Navigator symbol. When triggered,
this action changes the highlighted state of a symbol. For information on creating Navigator symbols,
see Adding a Resource Icon Symbol (on page 406).
To set symbol action properties, complete these steps:

1. Click the arrow in the Highlighted box and select one of these three options:
 If you do not want the symbol’s label to change, select Don’t Change.
 If you want the symbol’s label to appear highlighted, select True.
 If you do not want the symbol’s label to appear highlighted, select False.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’ Action

A Set Text Properties action can only be set for text objects. When triggered, the Set Text Properties
action can change the color of text, or change the text’s content (what it says). For information on
adding text to a Navigator page, see Adding a Text Object (on page 394).
To complete the Set Text Properties action properties box, complete these steps:
1. Select Color, if the color of the text is to change, and then select a color from the list.
2. Select Custom Value to preset the text that appears.
3. Select Event/Custom Properties to associate the text with a set event, custom property (CP), or
global property (GP). From the Event/Custom Properties list, select the event that will define the
changed text. This creates dynamic text that changes in response to events or changes to custom
properties.
4. Click OK to close the Set Text Properties action property box.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Action

The Set ActiveX Properties action can only be set for ActiveX controls. For information on creating an
ActiveX control, please refer to Adding Controls (on page 412).
In the Action Property dialog box, the Name column indicates the name of the ActiveX property, and
the Type column indicates the OLE type of the property.
To set Set ActiveX Properties action properties, complete these steps:
1. Select the check boxes for the values that you want to change.
By selecting a check box, you enable the Value for that property. Only properties that have been
checked will be changed.
You can specify the value to assign to the property in the Value list. You can type in a value, or
extract it from either an event property (indicated by the prefix ‘[EP]’), a global property (indicated
by the prefix ‘[GP]’), or a custom property (indicated by the prefix ‘[CP]’).
When an ActiveX control has more than eight properties, a scroll-bar appears on the right side of the
dialog box so you can select the remaining properties.
2. Click OK to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Properties for a "Set Page Refresh Option" Action

The Set Page Refresh Option action can only be assigned to a page.
From the Refresh Control menu, choose On or Off.
This option determines whether or not the page will be updated automatically.
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen Mode’ Action

This action activates or deactivates full-screen mode.
From the Full Screen Mode menu, choose On or Off.
Under Tool Options, select whether you want the following regions of the screen to change their state
when this action is triggered.
• Graphical Navigation toolbar (at the top of the screen)
• Graphical Navigation status bar (at the bottom of the screen)
• Navigation pane (defaults to the upper left of the screen)
• Diagnostics (defaults to the lower portion of the screen)
For each of these options, you can choose the following options:
• Don’t Change - leaves the particular screen component in its current state on top or below the
Graphical Navigation page
• Show - activates the screen element if it is hidden, or leaves it on the screen if it is already there
• Hide - deactivates the screen element if it was on the screen, or leaves it off if it was not there
previously
Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s Action

An Invoke ActiveX Method action can only be sent from an ActiveX control. For information on creating
an ActiveX control, please refer to Adding Controls (on page 412).
If the ActiveX method that you select accepts parameters, click Action Properties to open the Action
Property dialog and configure that action.
This dialog is very similar to the SetActiveXProperty dialog, except that the check boxes are not
available as all the items are automatically enabled.
See Setting ActiveX Properties (on page 419) for more information.
Working with Macros

actions.
A macro is a group of actions that can be executed at a specified event. You can use a macro over and
over on different events throughout Magellan CCS Navigator.
If a series of actions are set up to initiate at one event, that series of actions will be sent in the order
they appear in the macro list. Depending on timing of the various other equipment, all actions may or
may not appear to happen simultaneously.
Creating a Macro
Macros can only be created in Build mode.
2. Click the Macros tab.
Macros and descriptions are listed.

3. Click New. Another dialog box appears.
4. Type a name and description of the macro in the fields provided at the top of this dialog box.
5. Click New Action.
A new field appears in the Action and Description lists below. Make a selection from a drop-down
menu in the Action field. If there are other rules in the list, a new rule is always added at the bottom
of the list. When the list grows longer than fits inside the visible frame, a scroll bar appears so you
can move up and down the list.
6. Click Action Properties. The dialog box it opens offers options specific to that action.
Once you have set the action properties and clicked OK to close the Action Properties dialog box,
the Description field is automatically filled in with a definition of the action to be performed.
7. You can now create more actions following steps 5 and 6.
8. When you are done creating rules, click OK to save it. Otherwise, click Cancel to delete the macro.
To use a macro, see Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action (on page 444).
Modifying a Macro
Once a macro has an action in it, that macro can be modified.
3. Select a macro by clicking on it in the Macro/Description field.
4. Click Modify or double click on the macro in the Macros list, and then make your modifications.
5. Click OK to save the changes to your macro, or Cancel to delete them.
To delete an action from the macro list:

1. Click the action you would like to delete. If you click in the Description field for the action, the field
becomes outlined. If you click the Action field, a down arrow at the right of the field appears.
2. Click Delete Action. When a rule is deleted, the next rule below it becomes selected.
To move an action in its order in the macro list:

1. Select the action.
2. Click Move Up or Move Down to switch the rule’s position with the rule above or below it.
Deleting a Macro
Macros that are in use can not be deleted until the rules that use them are deleted.
Once a macro has an action in it, that macro can be deleted.

3. Select a macro by clicking on it in the Macro/Description field.
4. Click Remove. A message asking if you are sure appears. If you click Yes, the macro is deleted
forever and irretrievably from your system. If you click No, the macro will stay.
Chapter 21
Router Rule Creation

Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create or edit rules.
Rules are not specific to routers; for a general overview of the standard rules that can be applied to any
Magellan CCS Navigator system, please see Defining Rules (on page 429).
A rule consists of two separate parts: an event and an action. In a defined rule, an event triggers an
action. Some events have conditions, and all rules have preferences that need to be defined. Rules are
not necessarily router-specific, but an event or an action can be router-specific, or both can be. This
section describes the event and action settings that apply specifically to routers.
Setting Router-Specific Events

rules.
When you are creating a rule, you must set an event before you can set an action. You can, of course,
set all sorts of actions on a router-related page. See Defining Rules (on page 429) for more information.
To create a rule, right click on an object and select Properties > Rules.
The following events that can only be set for routers.
Table 91: Router-Related Conditional Events

Event Description Reference
On Crosspoint Status When the crosspoint status meets Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events
conditions defined in the Event (on page 460)
Conditions box
On Lock/Protect Status When you want to determine whether Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’
a destination is locked, protected or Events (on page 462)
released (not locked or protected)
On Salvo Status When a salvo’s status is changed Using ‘On Salvo Status’ Events (on
page 463)
On Restrict Status Event When a crosspoint’s status is Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events (on
restricted/unrestricted page 465)
On Signal Presence Status When a specific input or output signal Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’
presence status changes Events (on page 466)
One default event (as outlined in Setting an Event (on page 434)) that can be router-specific. That Event
is described in Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Action (on page 450). Its Destination
(prefixed with Dst), Source (prefixed with Src), or Salvo Value (prefixed with [Sal]) can be defined.
Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events

On Crosspoint Status events are automatically set for router sources when you create a router page
using the Multi Display or Source Preview wizards.
A crosspoint is the physical connection between a router input and a router output. You can execute a
crosspoint (make it active) in two ways: Take Crosspoint or Take Selected.
When you take crosspoint, you must define which source input will connect to which destination output.
However, when you take selected, you must perform two actions before executing the take crosspoint:
you must first execute a Select Source action and then execute a Select Destination action. If you
maintain this preset state within the router, the router waits for the user to click an object that triggers
a Take Selected action.
A router output may only have one crosspoint active at any given time.
When a crosspoint is active, the input and output pair associated with the crosspoint are connected, and
the signal present at the designated input is sent to the designated output.
If you set an action to occur "On Crosspoint Status," the action will occur when the crosspoint status
meets the conditions defined in the Event Condition box.

• Graphical Navigation Page Creation (on page 372)
• CCS Device Control (on page 282)
• Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656)
• Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition (on page 435)
Setting Conditions for ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events

To set an On Crosspoint Status event, you must set the crosspoint conditions that need to be met. If the
source, destination, etc. are all set as defined on the On Crosspoint Status dialog box, then an event is
triggered. To set the crosspoint conditions, complete these steps:
1. Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. This dialog box appears:
2. Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a configured router from the list.
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
3. Click the arrow in the left Destination box, and select one of these three conditions, if there are
custom conditions that apply:
Table 92: Destination Condition Options

Option Function
Equals Destination is the same as that designated
Not Equals Destination is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the value
4. Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select the name of the destination for which that
custom condition applies.
The Destination list may have additional entries for custom properties. These entries are prefixed by
"[CP]." When Magellan CCS Navigator receives a crosspoint status event, it tests to see if the status
of the destination is equal to the current value of any custom property called "Destination." This
gives you the flexibility to create the sample router control page like that described in Introduction
to Routing Components (on page 656).
5. Click the arrow in the left Source box, and select one of these three conditions, if there are custom
conditions that apply:
Table 93: Source Condition Options

Option Function
Equals Source is the same as that designated
Not Equals Source is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the value
6. Click the arrow in the right Source box, and select the name of the source for which that custom
condition applies.
Options include inputs and Breakaway. The Source list may have additional entries for custom
properties. These entries are prefixed by "[CP]."
When Magellan CCS Navigator receives a crosspoint status event, it tests to see whether the status
source is equal to the current value of any custom property called "Source." This gives you the
flexibility to create the sample router control page like that described in Introduction to Routing
Components (on page 656).
7. If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. Set the options—Equals, Not
Equals, or Any Value—from the first drop-down list beside each level. Then, from the second drop-
down list beside each level, select the input or Disconnect.
If this will not be a breakaway take, then clear the Breakaway check box.
8. Click OK when you have finished setting the crosspoint conditions.
Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’ Events

Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the destination until it is unlocked. The router
protect feature also prevents inadvertent changes to the destination, but it differs from a lock in one
respect: with the protect feature enabled, the person who enabled the protect feature can change the
destination at will, but other users cannot change the destination until the protect is removed.
The On Lock/Protect Status event is triggered when the lock or protect status of the chosen destination
is altered.
If you set a Lock/Protect Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the conditions,
1. Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting Lock Protect Status box.
2. Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a router from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the router. See
Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656).
3. Click the arrow in the left Destination box, and select one of these options:

Option Function
Status Released The specified destination is neither locked nor protected.
Locked? The specified destination is unprotected.
Protected? The specified destination is protected.
4. Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select a destination from the list of available
destinations for that router.
5. Click OK when you have finished setting event conditions.
See Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition (on page 435).
Using ‘On Salvo Status’ Events

The salvo status feature triggers an action when a salvo’s status (lock, protect, active or inactive)
changes.
If you set an On Salvo Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the conditions,
1. Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Salvo Status box.
2. Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a router from the list of configured routers.
If the router does not appear in the device ID list, then you must first configure the router. See
3. From the Salvo menu, choose your desired salvo.
4. Click the Status box, and select the option that will trigger an action:

Option Function
Active The selected salvo has been taken
Inactive The selected salvo does not match the preset
Protected One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are protected
Locked One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are locked
Status released One or more of the selected salvo’s destinations are unlocked or
unprotected
5. Click the arrow in the right Destination box, and select a destination from the list of available
destinations for that router.
Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events

The On Restrict Status feature triggers an action when a crosspoint status becomes restricted or
unrestricted.
If you plan to set a Restrict Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the conditions,
1. Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Restrict Status box.
2. Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a device from the list of configured routers.
3. Click the arrow in the Source box, and select a source from the list of available sources for that
router.
4. Click the arrow in the Destination box, and select a destination from the list of available destinations
for that router.
5. Click the arrow in the Restrict Level box, and select one specific level, or select Any Level, and an
action can be triggered on any level restriction in the crosspoint.
6. Click the arrow in the left Restricted State box, and select one of these options:

Option Function
Restricted The specified crosspoint cannot be taken.
Unrestricted The specified crosspoint is unprotected.
Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’ Events

The ‘On Signal Presence status’ event triggers an action when the signal presence status (normally if a
router source loses or regains signal) changes.
If you plan to set a Signal Presence Status event, you must also set the conditions for it. To set the
conditions, complete these steps:
1. Click Event Condition on the Rules toolbar and complete the resulting On Signal Presence Status
box.
2. Click the arrow in the Device ID box and select a device from the list of configured routers.
3. From the Signal Status menu, choose either Present, Not Present, or Either.
4. In the Source or Destination Selection area, click the radio button for either Source Signal or
Destination Signal. From the menu beside the option you have chosen, select the value (custom
property, input, or output).
5. In the Signal Level section of the screen, select any level from the drop-down menu.
Setting Router-Specific Actions

rules.
An action must be set after you have set an event in the Rules dialog box. For more information on
setting up rules, please see Defining Rules (on page 429).
Router-Specific Actions
Clear Selected Salvo Clears the current salvo selection Setting Properties for a ‘Clear
Selected Salvo’ Action (on page 482)
Clear Selected Clears the current router selection Setting Properties for a ‘Clear
Selected’ Action (on page 470)
Execute Salvo Sets up and immediately takes a router Setting Properties for a ‘Execute
salvo Salvo’ Action (on page 481)
Execute Selected Salvo Performs a router salvo Setting Properties for a ‘Execute
Selected Salvo’ Action (on page 480)
Lock Selected Destination Locks the selected router destination Setting Properties for a ‘Lock
Selected Destination’ Action (on
page 475)
Protect Selected Protects the selected router Setting Properties for a ‘Protect
Destination destination Selected Destination’ Action (on
page 474)
Query Destination Status Queries the status of the router Setting Properties for a ‘Query
destination Destination Status’ Action (on page
471)
Query Signal Presence Queries the signal presence status Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal
Status Presence Status’ Action (on page
471)
Restrict Crosspoint Sets up and prevents a particular Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict
source and destination from being Crosspoint’ Action (on page 477)
taken
Restrict Selected Prevents a selected source and Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict
Crosspoint destination from being taken Selected Crosspoint’ Action (on page
478)
Select Destination Presets the desired destination Setting Properties for a ‘Select
in preparation for a Take command Destination’ Action (on page 469)
Select Salvo Presets the desired salvo in preparation Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’
for Execute Selected Salvo command Action (on page 479)

Select Source Presets the desired source in Setting Properties for a ‘Select
preparation for a Take command Source’ Action (on page 470)
Set Crosspoint Match Type Sets the matching algorithm type used Setting Properties for a `Set
by the On Crosspoint Status event Crosspoint Match Type' Action (on
page 473)
Swap Destinations Swaps the crosspoints of two specified Setting Properties For a "Swap
destinations Destinations" Action (on page 476)
Take Crosspoint Sets up and immediately takes a router Setting Properties for a ‘Take
crosspoint Crosspoint’ Action (on page 471)
Take Selected Takes the selected router source and Setting Properties for a ‘Take
destination Selected’ Action (on page 472)
Some actions are meant to follow other actions. For example, you must select one or more router
destinations before you can set an action to Lock Selected, Protect Selected, or Take Selected.
Do not list rules for both an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an action to
invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action) sequentially on the Rules tab if they
have the same event trigger. Magellan CCS Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it
can implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab,
Magellan CCS Navigator actually processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur
after a different event.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Destination’ Action

Multiple destinations can be simultaneously selected, and selecting a destination does not automatically
clear a previously selected destination.
For information on creating a rule, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page (on
page 430).
Use the Select Destination action to choose a router destination (output). To set the Select Destination
action properties, complete these steps:
1. Click the arrow by the Device ID box and select the target router.
2. In the Destination box, click the arrow and select a destination.
3. In the State Select box, click the arrow and select one of the three options:
Table 97: State Select Options

Option Function
On Always selects the destination
Off Always unselects the destination
Option Function
Toggle Always toggles the destination
If the destination is selected, it becomes unselected; or, conversely, if
the destination is unselected, it becomes selected.
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Source’ Action

page 430).
Use the Select Source action to select the source (input) for a router. To set Select Source action
properties, complete these steps:
2. In the Source box, click the arrow and select a source.
Options include inputs and Disconnect.
3. In the State Select box, click the arrow and select one of the three options:
Table 98: State Select Options

Option Function
On Always selects the source
Off Always unselects the source
Toggle Always toggles the source
If the source is selected, it becomes unselected; or, conversely, if the source is
unselected, it becomes selected.
4. If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. For each level, select the source for
that level. You can disconnect the source (Disconnect), leave the source alone (--No Change--), or
select a level name, custom property or global property to use for that level.
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ Action

have the same event trigger. Magellan CCS Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can
implement a command action. If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab,
page 430).
To set Clear Selected action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Destination Status’ Action

page 430).
This status query action could become the trigger for an "On Crosspoint Status" event. Then you may
want to set button properties for additional actions.
To set Query Destination Status action properties, complete these steps:

2. In the Destination box, click the arrow and select the destination to query.
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal Presence Status’ Action

page 430).
This action queries for signal presence status, using either a logical source or a logical destination. This
status query action could become the trigger for an "On Signal Presence Status" event.
To set Query Signal Presence Status action properties, complete these steps:
If the target router does not appear in the Device ID list, then you must first configure the router.
2. In the Source or Destination Selection area, click the radio button for either Source Signal or
Destination Signal. From the menu beside the option you have chosen, select the logical source or
destination.
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ Action

page 430).
A Take Crosspoint action requires that the source and destination be defined before you trigger the
action. The source and destination that are taken are independent of any prior actions that involved
setting source or destination.
An action to take a crosspoint is independent of this series of three actions:

1. Select source.
2. Select destination.
3. Take selected (source and destination).
For example, when you can perform this series of actions, Destination 1 and Source 1 will remain the
selected items:
4. Select Destination 1.
5. Select Source 1.
6. Take crosspoint of Destination 2 and Source 2.
To set Take Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:
8. In the Destination box, click the arrow and select a destination.
9. In the Source box, click the arrow and select a source.
The State Select box is unavailable.
10. If this will be a breakaway take, check the Breakaway check box. For each level, select the source for
that level. You can disconnect the source (Disconnect), leave the source alone (--No Change--), or
select a level name, custom property or global property to use for that level.
Setting Properties for a ‘Take Selected’ Action

page 430).
A Take Selected action differs from a Take Crosspoint action in that you are required to perform a Set
Source action before you can Take Selected.
When you take selected, you must perform two actions before executing the take: First you must
execute a Set Source action and then you must execute a Set Destination action. If you maintain this
preset state within the router, the router waits for you to click an object that triggers a Take Selection
action.
An action to take selected requires this series of three actions:

1. Select source.
2. Select destination.
3. Take selected (source and destination).
To set Take Selected action properties, complete these steps:
Setting Properties for a `Set Crosspoint Match Type' Action

By default, the 'On Crosspoint Status' event uses the 'Full Match' type when extracting the logical source
information from the event.
The logical source information from the 'On Crosspoint Status' event is assembled based on the input
values provided by the event. As you might have inputs on the crosspoint event that do not correspond
to your logical source configuration, the event matching algorithm is not able to determine which logical
source corresponds to the input values in the 'On Crosspoint Status' event, assigning blank values to
both Source ID and Source Name event parameters. This operation changes the matching algorithm that
is used by the On Crosspoint Status event when reporting logical source information.
page 430).
To set Set Crosspoint Match Type action properties, complete these steps:
1. Click Select... by the Device ID box and select the target router.
2. In the Match Type box, click the arrow and select one of the four match type options:
Table 99: Match Type Options for Set Crosspoint Match Type Action
Match Type Criteria
Full Match Crosspoint status must match all levels configured
Highest Level Crosspoint status must match the highest level configured
Lowest Level Crosspoint status must match the lowest level configured
[Level Name] Crosspoint status must match on the level specified
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect Selected Destination’ Action

You must have selected a destination before you can protect it. See Setting Properties for a ‘Select
Destination’ Action (on page 469).
have the same event trigger.
Magellan CCS Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can implement a command
action. If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Magellan CCS Navigator
actually processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
page 430).
With the protect feature enabled, the person who enabled the protect feature can change the
destination at will, but other users cannot change the destination until the protect is removed.
To set Protect Destination action properties, complete these steps:

2. Click the arrow in the Protected Selected Destination box and select one of the following three
options:
Table 100: Protect Selected Destination Options

Option Function
Protect Protects the selected destination
Unlock Unlocks the selected destination.
Toggle Toggles from the state from protected to unprotected or from unprotected to
protected.
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock Selected Destination’ Action

You must have selected a destination before you can lock it. See Setting Properties for a ‘Select
Destination’ Action (on page 469).
have the same event trigger.
Magellan CCS Navigator needs to process a status action fully before it can implement a command
action. If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Magellan CCS Navigator
actually processes them simultaneously. Instead, set one of the actions to occur after a different event.
page 430).
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the destination until it is unlocked.
A lock action toggles the current lock state. This means that the action unlocks the lock if the destination
is currently locked, but locks the destination if the destination is currently unlocked.
A locked destination can only be unlocked by the Magellan CCS Navigator user who applied the lock.
To set Lock Destination action properties, complete these steps:
See Introduction to Routing Components (on page 656) .
2. Click the arrow in the Lock Selected Destination box and select one of the following three options:
Table 101: Lock Selected Destination Options

Option Function
Lock Locks the selected destination
Unlock Unlocks the selected destination.
Toggle Toggles from the state from locked to unlocked or from unlocked to locked.
Setting Properties For a "Swap Destinations" Action

This action swaps the crosspoints of two specified destinations.
page 430).
To set Swap Destinations action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
2. From the Destination 1 drop-down menu, choose a destination.
3. From the Destination 2 drop-down menu, choose a different destination.
4. Use the Available Levels and Selected Levels fields to determine which levels will be swapped. At
least one level must be selected.
To add a level from the Available Levels to the Selected Levels, select a level in the left-hand field
and click the > button to move it to the Selected Level list. You can select multiple levels in the
available section by holding down the shift key, clicking on the first desired level and clicking on the
last desired level. This selects all levels in the range between the first chosen and last chosen level,
inclusive. You can select individual levels by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on levels one at
a time. If you click the >> button, all levels in the available level list are moved to the Selected level
list.
Click < to return the level to the Available Levels list and remove it from the Preferred Levels list, or
click << to remove all levels from the Preferred Levels list and place them all back in the Available
Levels list
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Crosspoint’ Action

page 430).
A restrict action is like a lock, but instead of being tied to a whole destination, a restrict ties itself to a
specific crosspoint. You could, for example, restrict Dest 1 to Src 1, so no one would be able to take to
that crosspoint, making a take to Dest 1 to Scr 1 impossible.
This action creates a specific restriction action.
To set Restrict Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:

2. Click the arrow in the Source box and select one of the source inputs.
3. Click the arrow in the Destination box and select one of the destinations.
4. Click the arrow in the Restricted State box and select one of the following three options:
Table 102: Restrict Crosspoint Options

Option Function
Restrict Restricts the selected crosspoint
Unrestrict Unrestricts the selected crosspoint
Toggle Toggles from the state from restricted to unrestricted or from unrestricted to
restricted
5. Use the Available Levels and Selected Levels fields to determine which levels will be restricted. At
least one level must be selected.
To add a level from the Available Levels to the Selected Levels, select a level in the left-hand field
and click the > button to move it to the Selected Level list. You can select multiple levels in the
available section by holding down the shift key, clicking on the first desired level and clicking on the
last desired level. This selects all levels in the range between the first chosen and last chosen level,
inclusive. You can select individual levels by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on levels one at
a time. If you click the >> button, all levels in the available level list are moved to the Selected Level
list.
Click < to return the level to the Available Levels list and remove it from the Preferred Levels list, or
click << to remove all levels from the Preferred Levels list and place them all back in the Available
Levels list
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Selected Crosspoint’ Action

page 430).
A restrict action is like a lock, but instead of being tied to a whole destination, a restrict ties itself to a
specific crosspoint. You could, for example, restrict Dest 1 to Src 1, so no one would be able to take to
that crosspoint, making a take to Dest 1 to Scr 1 impossible.
This action works in co-ordination with a Select Source and Select Destination action. When you set a
Restrict Selected Crosspoint, the source and destination that you set with the previous actions cannot
be connected (you cannot do a take between them).
To set Restrict Crosspoint action properties, complete these steps:

2. Click the arrow in the Restricted State box and select one of the following three options:
Table 103: Restrict Selected Crosspoint Options

Option Function
Restrict Restricts the selected crosspoint
Unrestrict Unrestricts the selected crosspoint
Option Function
Toggle Toggles from the state from restricted to unrestricted or from unrestricted to
restricted
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’ Action

page 430).
This action presents a salvo for an action to be taken on that selected salvo. Salvos are pre-configured
before you begin working on Magellan CCS Navigator pages. If the router is not properly configured (this
includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be displayed.
To set Select Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
2. From the Salvo drop-down menu, choose your desired salvo.
3. From the State Select drop-down menu, choose the Salvo’s state. Options are On and Off.
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Selected Salvo’ Action

page 430).
This Action requires you to have set a Select Salvo action. See Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’
Action (on page 479) for more information.
If you have set a Select Salvo action, you can set an Execute Selected Salvo action to perform the
operation on that salvo. You can either take that salvo, disconnect it, lock it, or protect it.
This operation works on all selected salvos, if you have selected more than one. Salvos are pre-
configured before you begin working on Magellan CCS Navigator pages. If the router is not properly
configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be displayed.
To set Execute Selected Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
For lock and protect salvo actions, you can set the option to lock always, unlock always, or toggle the
current state.
2. From the Salvo Action drop-down menu, choose your action.
Salvo Action Effect
Take Salvo Attempt to establish all crosspoints
Disconnect Salvo Set all the defined destinations to disconnect
Lock Salvo Lock all the defined destinations
Protect Salvo Protect all defined destinations
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Salvo’ Action

page 430).
Similarly to the Take Crosspoint and Take Selected crosspoint actions, the Execute Salvo executes the
salvo right away. You can either take that salvo, disconnect it, lock it, or protect it. Salvos are pre-
configured before you begin working on Magellan CCS Navigator pages. If the router is not properly
configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow notice will be displayed.
To set Execute Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
2. From the Salvo drop-down menu, choose your desired salvo.
3. From the State Select drop-down menu, choose the Salvo’s state. Options are On and Off.
4. From the Salvo Action drop-down menu, choose your action.
Salvo Action Effect
Take Salvo Attempt to establish all crosspoints
Disconnect Salvo Set all the defined destinations to disconnect
Lock Salvo Lock all the defined destinations
Protect Salvo Protect all defined destinations
Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected Salvo’ Action

This operation clears all the previously selected salvos that have been selected using the Select Salvo
action. Salvos are pre-configured before you begin working on Magellan CCS Navigator pages. If the
router is not properly configured (this includes the router not having a salvo defined for it), a yellow
notice will be displayed.
page 430).
To set Clear Selected Salvo action properties for a Router, complete these steps:
If the target router does not appear in the device ID list, you must first configure the router. See
Chapter 22
SNMP Plug-in
Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create rules. You must be in Build mode.
SNMP is a communication protocol like TCP/IP, FTP and HTTP. The SNMP plug-in is an optional
component of Magellan CCS Navigator.
Using the SNMP plug-in, you can monitor SNMP traps and variable changes, just like you can monitor
alarms via other forms of control in CCS Magellan CCS Navigator. You can use these events as triggers
for other actions. And, you can trigger events by changing SNMP variables. An SNMP action does not
have to follow an SNMP event.
For information on general rule creation, see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page
(on page 430).

Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’ Events ......... 483
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events ...................................... 484
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action ................. 486
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action ................. 486
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action ................................. 487
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Update’

Events
If you set an action to occur On SNMP Variable Value Update, the action will occur when the SNMP
variable value reaches the conditions defined in the Condition box, or more simply put, when the
variable value changes.
To set an On SNMP Variable Value Update event, you must set the SNMP variable value conditions by
completing the following steps:
1. Follow the instructions in Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page (on page 430),
stopping with step 5, after choosing On SNMP Variable Value Update as your event.
2. Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. The Condition dialog box appears.
3. Click Select... and choose the SNMP device you want to monitor.
All OID strings should be prefaced with a ".".
4. Beside Variable Object ID, choose Value or Property from the drop-down menu on the left, and to
complete the field on the right, do one of the following:
 If the Variable Object ID is a Value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to
compare against.
 If the Variable Object ID is a Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
5. Click the arrow in the first Variable Value box, and select one of the three conditions:
Option Function
Equals The specified variable value is the same as that designated
Not Equals The specified variable value is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the variable value
6. Click the arrow in the second Variable Value box, and choose Value or Property.
 If you choose Value, enter the value of the SNMP variable that you want to compare against.
Although Magellan CCS Navigator correctly displays SNMP values on rendered pages using
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the "value" specified in this third box must be the
enumeration index (interger value) associated with the item.
 If you choose Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
7. In the third Variable Value box, enter the defined custom properties. If it is a value, you can type the
SNMP variable that you want to set. If it is a Property, choose from a pre-defined selection in the
drop-down list.
8. (Optional) Place a check beside Variable Polling Enabled.
When selected, the value of the SNMP variable is polled according to the polling interval set for the
device in the Device Properties. If you do not select the check box, this event will occur for any
response from an SNMP Set Variable or SNMP Get Variable value action. By default this check box is
unselected. See Setting SNMP Navigation Properties (on page 135).
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events

If you set an action to occur On SNMP Trap, the action will occur when the SNMP trap is triggered. To
configure an On SNMP Trap event, you must set the SNMP trap conditions by completing the following
steps:
stopping with step 5, after choosing On SNMP Trap as your event.
2. Click Condition on the Rules toolbar. The SNMP Trap Event Condition box opens.
Figure 45: On SNMP Trap Event Condition Dialog
3. In the Device ID field, select <Existing SNMP Server> to enable the Select button.
4. Click Select to select the device you want to monitor the SNMP traps.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID of a
device you want to monitor.
You can create a condition that monitors a certain SNMP device by its type, for instance. Selecting
Any Value will make the application to catch any trap generated by the device.
5. In the first combo box of the Trap Type field, click the arrow to select one of the three conditions:
Option Function
Equals The specified trap type is the same as that designated
Not Equals The specified trap type is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the trap type
6. Select the trap type using the second combo box of the Trap Type field.
Trap Type Definition
Cold Start The agent is booting.
Warm Start The agent is rebooting.
Link Down An interface has gone down.
Link Up An interface has come up.
Authentication Failure An invalid community (password) was received in a message.
EGP Neighbor Loss An EGP peer has gone down.
Trap Type Definition

Enterprise Specific An enterprise specific trap has happened. Look in the enterprise code
for information on the trap.
7. Click the New button to create an entry in the Variable table.
8. To enter data in the new field in the Variable OID column, type the OID that you want to compare
against the list of variables that comes within the trap pdu (variable binding list).
9. In the Comparison column, define the type of comparison you want to perform. Options in this
column are Equals, Not Equals, and Any Value.
10. In the Value column, define the expected value (if you didn’t choose Any Value in the Comparison
column).
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the "value" specified in this box must be the enumeration
index (interger value) associated with the item.
11. Repeat steps 6 - 9 to associate other variables with the event.
12. When you have finished adding variables, click OK to close the Condition dialog box.
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable Value’ Action

To set an SNMP Get Variable Value action, complete these steps:
stopping with step 7, after choosing SNMP Get Variable Value as your action.
The Action Properties Dialog—SNMP Get Variable Value box opens.
4. Click Select to choose the target SNMP device.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID of the
target device.
Variable Value and Variable Type are always unavailable on this screen.
 If the object is a value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to control.
 If the object is a property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
6. Click OK when you have finished setting the action property.
Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable Value’ Action

To set an SNMP Set Variable Value action, complete these steps:
stopping with step 7, after choosing SNMP Set Variable Value as your action.

The Action Properties Dialog—SNMP Set Variable Value box opens.
4. Click Select to choose the target SNMP device.
You can also select either a Global Property or Custom Property that contains the device ID of the
target device.
 If the object is a value, enter the object ID of the SNMP variable that you want to control.
 If the object is a property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
6. Click the arrow in the Variable Value condition box, and select one of the three conditions:
Option Function
Equals The specified variable value is the same as that designated
Not Equals The specified variable value is not the same as that designated
Any Value Ignore the variable value
7. In the Variable Value menu, choose Value or Property.
 If you choose Value, enter the value of the SNMP variable that you want to set.
enumeration names defined in the MIB, the "value" specified in this third box must be the
enumeration index (interger value) associated with the item.
 If you choose Property, choose the property from the drop-down menu.
8. From the Variable Type box, select a supported SNMP data type for the SNMP variable to control
from the drop-down list.
9. Click OK when you have finished setting this action property.
Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action

This action selects a table for placement on a Graphical Navigation page.
To complete the SNMP Get Table action, follow these steps:
1. Under Device ID, choose a device.

Device IDs that have been chosen before will appear in the menu; if the device you need is not
there, click Select to choose from a table.
2. Beside Variable object ID, choose Value, and then click MIB to select the table to get.
Tables are indicated by this icon:

The Variable Value and Variable Type rows are always unavailable for this action.
3. Click OK.
Chapter 23
SuiteView Plug-in
Navigator objects and pages. Only an Administrator user can create rules and pages.
SuiteView Control is an optional component of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To control a SuiteView multisource display processor from a Magellan CCS Navigator panel, you need to
set rules for conditional events and actions. The SuiteView-specific rules are listed in Setting Rules to
Perform SuiteView Actions (on page 489). If you are unfamiliar with how, when and why to make rules
in Magellan CCS Navigator, see Defining Rules (on page 429).
Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions

You must be in Build mode to define rules for Magellan CCS Navigator objects and pages. SuiteView
rules occur in response to events and conditional events and trigger pre-defined actions.
The following table lists the Magellan CCS Navigator actions that are specific to SuiteView.
SuiteView-Specific Actions for Rule Creation
Action Description Reference
Send String to COM Port Sends a command string to a specified Setting Properties for a ‘Send String
serial port to COM Port’ Action (on page 491)
Load SuiteView Preset Loads a SuiteView preset Setting Properties for ‘Load
SuiteView Preset’ Action (on page
490)
Set FullScreen On Sets the SuiteView device screen to Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen
full screen On’ Action (on page 489)
Set FullScreen Off Returns the SuiteView device screen Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen
to window-size Off’ Action (on page 490)
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen On’ Action

Attempts to apply the Set Fullscreen On action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Set Fullscreen On action makes a channel input PiP in a SuiteView device open in full-screen size on
an output monitor. To configure Set Fullscreen On action properties, complete these steps:
1. Follow the instructions in see Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Object or Page (on page
430), stopping at step 7, after selecting Set Fullscreen On as your action.
The Action Properties Dialog—Set Fullscreen On box opens.
3. Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device to which you want to
send a command.
If the device you want is not listed, or you need to change device communication preferences and
connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See Setting Communication
4. Click the arrow in the Video Input field, and then type an input channel from the list. (There are only
16 video inputs available to choose from.)
This is the input channel on which the Set Fullscreen On action will be implemented.
Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen Off’ Action

Attempts to apply the Set Fullscreen Off action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Set Fullscreen Off action returns SuiteView devices to the layout positions they held prior to full-
screen mode. To configure Set Fullscreen Off action properties, complete these steps:
430), stopping at step 7 after selecting Set Fullscreen Off as your action.
The Action Properties Dialog—Set Fullscreen Off box opens.
3. Click the arrow in the Device Name field, and then select a SuiteView device from the list to which
you want to send a command.
connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See Communication Options
and SNMP Configuration (on page 83).
4. Click the arrow in the Input Channel field, and then type an input channel from the list.
This is the input channel on which the Set Fullscreen Off action will be implemented.
Setting Properties for ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action

Attempts to apply the Load SuiteView Preset action to non-SuiteView devices will not work.
The Load SuiteView Preset action loads a pre-configured layout to a SuiteView system. To configure
Load SuiteView Preset action properties, complete these steps:
430), stopping at step 7, after selecting Load SuiteView Preset as your action.
The Action Properties box opens.
connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See Communication Options
and SNMP Configuration (on page 83).
4. Click the arrow in the Preset Name field, and then select a preset from the list.
Setting Properties for a ‘Send String to COM Port’ Action

Command strings sent to a specific device must make use of commands that device can understand. See
your device manual for a list of available commands.
See Defining Rules (on page 429) for instructions on how to set an Action.
The Send String to COM Port command sends a command string to a device.To configure Send String to
COM Port action properties, complete these steps:
430), stopping at step 7, after selecting Send String to COM Port as your action.
The Action Properties dialog box opens.
connection information, you will need to create a serial configuration. See Setting Communication
String data can only be in English. If you are using an alternate operational language, your keyboard
will be automatically switched to English for data entry for strings. If you switch the keyboard and
enter text in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
4. In the String field, enter a command string acceptable to that device.
Command strings sent to a specific device must make use of commands that device can understand.
See your device manual for a list of available commands.
5. Click OK to send the command string and to close the Action Properties box.
Setting Communication Options

If you are connected serially to NEO SuiteView via RS-232, and you intend to create a Magellan CCS
Navigator page using the Load SuiteView Preset method (see Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load
SuiteView Preset’ Action (on page 493) for details), then you will need to make the following
communication settings:
1. In Build mode, open the Options menu and click Communication.
The Communication Options dialog box opens.
2. Click the Serial Settings tab, and then select the SuiteView device from the Device Name list.
If the SuiteView device is not listed, you will need to first add it by following these steps:
a. Click Add.
The Add Device dialog box opens.
b. Type a name in the Name field, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
c. Select the new device name from the Device Name list.
3. Select the appropriate COM port from the Port list, and then make the following selections from
these Connection Preferences lists:
 Bits per second: 57600
 Data bits: 8
 Parity: None
 Stop bits: 1
 Flow control: None
4. Click Apply, and then click OK to close the dialog box.
Creating a Preset
To create a preset, you must be in Control mode.
1. Right click an NSV-OUT card in the Navigation pane a Control dialog box.
2. From the shortcut menu that appears, select Presets > Save the current CCS settings to capture all
CCS, SuiteView, and NEO SuiteView settings currently applied to this module.
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page

On a customized Navigator page, you can create buttons that will load various presets that have been
designed and saved. Building a custom NEO SuiteView Navigator page provides flexibility for recalling a
layout from a customized page instead of using the standard CCS interface.
You can control Magellan CCS Navigator from a custom Navigator page by two different methods: using
either a Load SuiteView Preset action or a Load Preset action.
Load SuiteView Preset method has the following characteristics:

• Control though serial RS-232 (see Setting Communication Options (on page 491) to configure)
• Loads a NEO SuiteView preset layout only, and no other parameters
See Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action (on page 493).
Load Preset method has the following characteristics:

• Control through Ethernet IP/TCP
• Loads all the parameters included in the preset, including the NEO SuiteView preview layout
parameter
See Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action (on page 494).
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action

Ensure a serial connection via RS-232 cable is established, and that the communication settings have
been made (see Setting Communication Options (on page 491)).
The Load SuiteView Preset action loads just the NEO SuiteView Navigator page preset layout. To use the
Load SuiteView Preset action, follow these steps:
1. With a Graphical Navigation page open in Build mode, right-click and select Create, and from the
shortcut menu, select an object/element (for example, Button), and place it on the page.
2. Right-click on the object/element, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Object Properties dialog box opens.
4. Set the event (for example, On Mouse Click) from the Event list.
5. Click Condition (the button, not the column heading) to set the event condition (typically set to
Always).
For more information on event conditions, see Defining Conditions (on page 435).
The action Load SuiteView Preset is different from the action Load Preset. See Creating a Navigator
Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action (on page 494) for more information.
6. Open the Action list, and then select Load SuiteView Preset.
7. Enter an event description, following these steps:
a. Click Action Properties.
The Action Property—Load SuiteView Preset dialog box appears.
b. Select a device name from the corresponding list.
If there are no presets available, see Creating a Preset (on page 492).
c. From the Preset Name list, select a preset layout name that can be recalled/loaded.
d. Click OK.
8. Close the Object Properties dialog box, and then save the newly created page.
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Preset’ Action

If there are no presets available, see Creating a Preset (on page 492).
The Load Preset action loads all the CCS settings that have been saved under a preset name, not just the
NEO SuiteView Navigator page preset layout. Controlling NEO SuiteView using this method requires an
active Ethernet connection.
If you have assigned the Load Preset action to an object/element’s event, then the Action Properties
dialog box where you enter descriptive device and preset information will be different than that shown
in Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load SuiteView Preset’ Action (on page 493). Follow these steps
when assigning a Load Preset action to an event:
1. With a Graphical Navigation page open in Build mode, right-click and select Create, and from the
shortcut menu, select an object/element (for example, Button), and place it on the page.
2. Right-click on the object/element, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Set an event (for example, On Mouse Click) from the Event list.
5. Click Condition to set the event condition (typically set to Always).
For more information on event conditions, see Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action (on page
446).
6. From the Action list, select Load Preset. Click Action Properties.
7. The Action Property—Load Preset dialog box opens.
8. Click Select... to open the Device Selection dialog box, and then select a device from the list.
Note the listed Device Location to ensure you are selecting the correct device.
The selected device ID now appears in the corresponding field within the Action Property dialog
box.
10. From the Preset Name list, select a preset name and then click OK.
11. Close the Object Properties dialog box, and then save the newly created page.
Recalling a Preset Page

If you have not closed the Navigator page you just created in the previous steps, it will open directly
once you enter Control mode.
You will get different results depending on the action assigned in the Object Properties dialog box.
However, if you closed the newly created Navigator page after saving it, or if you want to open a
different page, you can recall it by clicking File > Open in the main menu and then browsing for the
desired page.
Navigator pages have a .nav file extension.
Chapter 24
Using Graphical Navigation Pages

A Navigation page is a document containing graphics that represent a network environment.
Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode for discovery, configuration, and page construction and
editing; however, Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Control mode for monitoring and control activities.
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create pages, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV,
NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to monitor and control devices.
In Control mode, the finished drawing becomes a Navigation page, *.nav, which you can use
for monitoring and control of your network environment. On a page, you can click buttons, symbols,
links and other objects, open shortcut menus and define actions to associate with objects. See Defining
Rules (on page 429).
Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page

Only an Administrator user can alter Graphical Navigation pages. When changes are made to the
Graphical Navigation page on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server (with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-
SNMP license), all users on connected Magellan CCS Navigator Clients (NAVIGATOR-CLI license) receive
notification that a network resource has been updated. When they reload (by clicking Reload from the
toolbar, or by selecting View > Reload from the main menu), the Graphical Navigation page is updated.
Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode

This page is composed of eight symbols (the frame and its six modules), seven links (the arrows), and
one text object ("QA 6800+ Frame").
When you activate a Magellan CCS Navigator page by changing to Control mode, the page shows alarms
on symbols (including CCS and SNMP device icons) and their linked parent symbols.
Figure 46: Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Page with a Frame With Six Modules Linked to it in Build
Mode
Any alarms on the devices show as flashing highlights: yellow for a warning alarm, and red
for a critical alarm. The child devices relay the alarm to their parent device - in this case, the frame.
Figure 47: Same Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Page, Control Mode
Moving between Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

To move between Magellan CCS Navigator pages, you must do one of the following:
• Click an object that loads another Magellan CCS Navigator page.
• Click the Back, Forward, or Home tool on the Graphical Navigation toolbar.
• Click one of the navigation commands on the shortcut menu.

When you right-click a Graphical Navigation page or object in any operational mode, a shortcut menu
appears.
When you right-click a Magellan CCS Navigator object when Magellan CCS Navigator is control mode,
these commands are available from the shortcut menu:
Table 104: Graphical Magellan CCS Navigator Shortcut Menu, Control Mode
Command Function
Control Opens the Control dialog box for the selected object
Configuration Opens the Configuration dialog box for the selected object
Thumbnail Opens the thumbnail dialog box for the selected object (if available)
Stream Opens the streaming dialog box for the selected object (if available)
Actions> Displays a submenu for all actions defined on an object. Selecting an action will
execute it
Back Moves to the previous page
Forward Moves back to the page from which you have just returned
Home Load the first page in the hierarchy
Zoom > Displays the Zoom submenu: Fit in Window, Actual Size, Zoom In, Zoom Out, Zoom
Window, and Zoom Previous
Pan Moves a page within the Graphical Navigation area
Refresh Redraws the page
Reload Gets the Graphical Navigation page from the server
All fields are read-only in Control mode
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar

An optional toolbar appears on top of the Graphical Navigation area when Magellan CCS Navigator is in
Control mode. To show this toolbar, select the check box in the View Options section of the Graphical
Navigation Options box. See View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages (on page 383).
The table below lists the tools on the Graphical Navigation toolbar and their functions.
Table 105: Tools on the Graphical Navigation Toolbar in Control Mode

Tool Function Reference
Back Loads the previous Magellan CCS Navigator page
Forward Reloads a Magellan CCS Navigator page you recently loaded

when you clicked Back
Zoom Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in the Graphical Using Zoom Tools (on page
Navigation page. 377)
Tool Function Reference

Pan Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to move the Panning in a Graphical
page. Navigation Page (on page 378)
Click the button again to deactivate.
Home Reloads the first visited Magellan CCS Navigator page
Custom Properties Window

When you are in Control mode, you can use the Custom Properties viewer. If the Custom Properties
window is closed, open it by choosing Tools > Custom Properties from the main menu.
By default, the Custom Properties window appears in the left portion of the screen, below the
Navigation pane if that is open. You can click on it and drag it and drop it so that it floats over the other
items in the screen, or you can dock it to the top, bottom, left or right of the screen.
Figure 48: Custom Properties Panel
Column Function
Name A user-assigned title (limited in size?) of the property
Runtime Value The current valueof the property
Initial Value The value that was assigned to the property when it was created
Scope Whether the value is global or page-based, and if page-based, the page that the
value is used on
Description Displays whatever is entered into the Description field of the property
Custom properties variables store and share data between Magellan CCS Navigator rules and pages in
control mode. Global custom properties are accessible across the entire application. Local custom
properties only affect a particular instance of a given page. The Custom Properties window always
shows the global properties. To show the custom properties for a page, open the page in Magellan CCS
Navigator, and then click Refresh in the top right corner of the Custom Properties window.
Click Refresh at any time to update the list of custom properties and their values.
If more than one instance of the same page is opened, all instances are displayed in the same order as
the pages were open. For best results, do not open more than one instance of the same page with this
tool.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix E
Appendix E
Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting

The hints and tips in this chapter relate specifically to Graphical Navigation tools, pages and panels.
• Build Mode Problems (on page 503)
• Control Mode Problems (on page 505)
For general troubleshooting problems, refer to Troubleshooting (on page 319).
Build Mode Problems

Graphical Navigation Build mode problems may happen in systems that have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key.
Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images

Magellan CCS Navigator displays a button image only if the first image (Unselect/Unhighlighted state
field) is defined on the Button tab of the Object Properties box.
If the image properties have not been defined for the state set by the Set Button Properties action, the
button image will not display.
See Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Action (on page 449) for more information.
Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular

If you create a custom non-rectangular shape for a button bitmap—such as a circle, ellipse, or star—that
you plan to use on a Magellan CCS Navigator page, then you must use a pixel-editing program like
PhotoShop or PaintShop Pro to create a colored mask for the shape so that just the shape itself shows. If
you do not create a mask for the shape, the entire rectangle occupied by the bitmap will appear.
Set the RGB color of the mask to 255, 0, 216. Magellan CCS Navigator is configured to show this color as
transparent, so your custom shape will show through when you insert the bitmap on the Magellan CCS
Navigator page. You can also customize the color that you want to show as transparent in the Create
Button area of the Button Themes section of the Button Properties dialog box. See Setting the
Properties of a Button (on page 388).
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified

This problem can afflict *.bmp, *.jpg, and so on, when used as a background for a Magellan CCS
Navigator page.
A copy of the background image is stored inside the .nav page. Changing the original file will have no
effect on the page that is displayed. In addition, once Magellan CCS Navigator has loaded the
background into memory, it will continue to use the image in memory. In order to update the image,
follow these steps:
1. Open the page in Build mode.
2. Clear the background image, so no image is selected.
3. Save the page.
4. Exit Magellan CCS Navigator.
5. Restart Magellan CCS Navigator and log in.
6. Open the page in Build mode.
7. Set the background image.
In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly

The placement on the modules (where they go) by the wizard is directly related to their slot number,
which is part of the device ID. This number indicates where the module appears on the frame. If you are
adding this information manually (not thought the discovery process), you have to change this number
as well. To do that, follow these steps:
1. Select the node on the tree.
2. Right-click on the node and select the Properties... menu entry.
4. Change the last field of the device ID.
Problems Using AutoCAD Drawings as Backgrounds on Graphical Navigation

pages
Before you can use an AutoCAD image as a background in Magellan CCS Navigator, it must be converted
to a JPG image, or you will lose all zoom detail on the image.
The bigger your settings (paper size), the bigger the image, resolution, and file size will be.
1. Open your image in AutoCAD
2. Select the Plot... command found in the File menu.
3. In the Plot Configuration area, select PublishToWeb JPG.pc3 as the name of the plotter (Plot Device
Tab)
4. Click in the Properties... button (to open the Plotter Configurator Editor)
5. In the Device and Document Settings tab, select Custom Paper Sizes and click Add... to add a page
that is the same size as your drawing. (Follow the instructions in the wizard.)
6. Click the OK button to close the Plotter Configurator Editor.
7. In the Plot to file area, type in the name of the file you want to generate. This plotter will create a
JPG image.
8. Select Plot Settings tab and in the Paper size and paper units area, select the custom paper size that
you have added before using the Paper size combo box.
9. Click in the OK button.
Now, follow the instructions for importing your image as a background in Magellan CCS Navigator, as
found in Setting an Image as a Page Background (on page 385).
Control Mode Problems

Graphical Navigation Control mode problems may happen in systems that have a NAVIGATOR-SRV,
NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license key.
You must have a Navigator Page Customization license to create pages and use pages to monitor and
control devices.
If you are having problems with the Graphical Navigation page, please refer to the following topics:
• Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Display Button State Images (on page 503)
• Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Rectangular (on page 503)
• Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Modified (on page 503)
• In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Frame Correctly (on page 504)
• CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Magellan CCS Navigator Executes a Rule (on page 505)
• Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages (on page 505)
• Alarms "Bubble Up" Incorrectly (on page 506)
• Cannot Find Magellan CCS Navigator Pages (on page 506)
• Alarms Fail to Appear on a Magellan CCS Navigator Page (on page 506)
CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Magellan CCS Navigator Executes a Rule
If you execute a rule which has a recursive element in it, your CPU usage will go to 100%, and Magellan
CCS Navigator will not respond to further commands.
Essentially, a recursive element creates a loop that goes back to the start of the rule and causes it to
trigger again. To avoid this situation, when creating a rule, ensure that an On Update type of event is not
followed by a Set Property type of action for the same element.
A similar situation can occur with one rule triggering another rule that in turn triggers the first rule. For
example, never define a rule that loads page B whenever loading page A, and then define another rule
that loads page A whenever loading page B.
Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages

The On Custom Property event may not update global properties that are updated in different sessions.
If you create a global custom property and use it on different pages, and have that property update
triggered by an On Load Page event, the global property will not update, because the "Load Page" event
for the first page came before the page’s session actually started, and so the original condition for the
custom property is used.
Alarms "Bubble Up" Incorrectly

When you define a "Load Page action" for an object, you create a link between that object and the page.
Any alarm that occurs on an object on the linked page will "bubble up" to the parent object, causing the
parent object to flash an alarm.
This flexible approach allows you to monitor the status of your pages hierarchy by only defining "Load
Page" actions. However, if you create a button on a child page that loads the parent page back again (so
that it behaves like a "Back" button on a Web browser), you run the risk of making Magellan CCS
Navigator report an alarm on a parent object when the alarm is actually on a child object.
To avoid this, do not create new "Back" and "Forward" buttons, as they are already provided in
Magellan CCS Navigator. To display the Magellan CCS Navigator Back and Forward buttons, follow these
steps:
1. Right-click on a page (but not on an object), and then select Options.
2. Check the Show Graphical Navigation toolbar field.
The Navigation toolbar appears, including the Back and Forward navigation buttons.
Cannot Find Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

The first time you save a page, you have the opportunity to save to a folder location other than the
default Pages. This is a one-time opportunity to select a save-as destination. After this time, the page
will automatically save to the previously selected destination.
Magellan CCS Navigator pages are saved on the NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP licensed PC that
created them. Pages can be found at Program Files > Harris > Magellan CCS Navigator > Users > Admin
> Pages (assuming the CCS Magellan CCS Navigator application was installed in the default directory).
Alarms Fail to Appear on a Magellan CCS Navigator Page

• Did you set the background color of a page as red, yellow, or green?
The background color of a Magellan CCS Navigator page can mask or camouflage a flashing alarm
color.
Since CCS applications use red, yellow, and green for alarm monitoring, you should avoid using these
three colors when defining the background color of your Magellan CCS Navigator pages. See Setting
a Color Fill as a Page Background (on page 384).
• Is there a node in the Network folder of the Navigation pane that represents the device you want to
monitor?
You must have discovered and manually configured the target device in the Navigation pane. If you
have not discovered and configured the device for which you expect to see an alarm, you must
complete these tasks before an alarm will appear either in the Navigation pane or a Magellan CCS
Navigator page. See CCS Device Discovery (on page 99) and CCS Device Configuration (on page 153).
• Have you set the device ID of the symbols for which you expect to see alarms?
To monitor a device whose icon appears in the Navigation pane, the device ID of the companion
symbol on the Magellan CCS Navigator page should have the identical device ID. The easiest way to
ensure that a Magellan CCS Navigator symbol inherits the correct device ID is to create the symbol
by dragging and dropping the configured resource representing the device from the Navigation
pane into the Magellan CCS Navigator page.
• Did you define a Load Page action for the Magellan CCS Navigator object?
When you define a Load Page action for an object, you create a link between that object and the
page it loads. Any alarms that occur on any object on the linked page also will "bubble up" to the
parent object, causing the parent object to flash an alarm.
User's Guide Volume 3: IconMaster Software Control Panel
Volume 3: IconMaster Software

Control Panel
In this section:
Preface ................................................................................................... 509
Introduction to ISCP ............................................................................... 511
Installation and Logging On ................................................................... 514
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration........................................................... 519
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels ............................................................ 529
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ................................. 558
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
IconMaster Software Control Panel User Manual is a companion guide to CCS Navigator: Advanced
Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using the Magellan CCS Navigator software. For information on
the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to the CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical
Navigation Application user manual, which is included as a PDF as part of your installation package.
Audience
and/or operation of the IconMaster Software Control Panel software.
Revision History
A Navigator 4.3 and higher with ICONM-SCP license key August 2008
B Navigator 4.4.1 and higher with ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key January 2009
C Navigator 4.6 and higher with ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key November 2009
D Navigator 4.6 and higher with ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key June 2010
E Navigator 4.7 and higher with ICONM-SCP or ICONM-LITE license key January 2011
Writing Conventions

Italics Indicates email addresses, names of books and publications, and first instances
of new terms and specialized words that need emphasis


> Indicates the direction of navigation through a hierarchy of menus and windows


Application IconMasterNav, CCS Pilot, and CCS CoPilot
Obtaining the User Manuals

The documentation for your product is included in your installation package as an Adobe Acrobat PDF
file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an electronic document integrated into the software. While
Chapter 25
Introduction to ISCP
Two versions of the IconMaster Software Control Panel are available.
Figure 49: ISCP (left) and ISCP-Lite (right)
• The ISCP (ISCP) replicates the functionality of the IconMaster Hardware Control Panel and can be used
to control and monitor the IconMaster switcher hardware.
• ISCP-LITE contains the functionality for parametric control of the IconMaster, but does not have the
source control, channel management, transition, or keyer controls of ISCP. The ISCP-LITE is not
designed for stand-alone operation, and must be physically and logically paired with an IconMaster
Hardware Remote Control Panel.
ISCP and ISCP-LITE are both standalone plug-ins for Magellan CCS Navigator. If you have one of these
plug-ins on your system, you cannot have any other Magellan CCS Navigator plug-ins included on the
install at the same time. With an ISCP or ISCP-LITE plug-in, Magellan CCS Navigator cannot control or
monitor other hardware.
ISCP and ISCP-LITE are configured by an administrator user in Build mode, and are operated in Control
mode.
ISCP is not the same as IconMasterNav. You cannot run IconMasterNav and ISCP on the same PC.
IconMasterNav is compatible with version 2.2 of the IconMaster switcher. ISCP is compatible with
IconMaster 3.0 and above. ISCP-LITE replaces IconmasterNav as of Iconmaster 3.0.
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP)

The ISCP was designed for use with a touch-screen monitor. Here is a typical ISCP interface:
The functionality for the ISCP matches the functionality of the hardware control panel, with the
following modifications:
• The ISCP will update the name of a bus when it changes its function; for example, when you switch
the Aux bus
• Button labelling on the ISCP is dynamic, meaning that button names update themselves when, for
example, the inputs to those buttons are changed
For operational instructions of redundant functionality, see your IconMaster Master Control Switcher
Functional Operation and Configuration Manual.
This document describes the unique functions and implementations on the IconMaster Software Control
Panel, including the following:
• Configurable buttons
• Setup etc
• Dynamic parameter control (which is similar to the IconMasterNav tools)
• ISCP support
If you have purchased the standalone version of IconMaster Software Control Panel, you will have only
received the IconMaster Software Control Panel User Manual. The full Magellan CCS Navigator manual
is available as part of the Magellan CCS Navigator installation package.
The IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) is not a fully-featured version of Magellan CCS Navigator.
To use some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator manual, you must purchase separate
Magellan CCS Navigator licenses after the 30-day trial period.
ISCP-LITE
The ISCP-LITE is designed for use with a touch-screen monitor. The image below shows a typical ISCP-
LITE interface.
ISCP-LITE is designed for use directly with an IconMaster hardware remote control panel (RCP). ISCP-LITE
complements the operation of the hardware RCP, and is not designed for stand-alone operation.
Chapter 26
Installation and Logging On

IconMaster Software Control Panel is installed as part of Magellan CCS Navigator. Before installing your
ISCP software, take the time to ensure you have the necessary hardware and software. See Required
Hardware, Operating System and Software (on page 514).
Basic installation instructions are provided in the section Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel
(on page 515). For an in-depth treatment of installation possibilities, see Software Installation (on page
24).
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it will start with a 30-day trial license of all
features of Magellan CCS Navigator. To add your permanent IconMaster Software Control Panel license,
see Activating a License (on page 517).
Required Hardware, Operating System and Software

When configuring the IconMaster Software Control Panel, you will need to meet the Magellan CCS
Navigator Server hardware and software requirements.
The other hardware, operating system and software minimum system requirements for ISCP are the
same as those for Magellan CCS Navigator Server. For a complete list of requirements, see Software
Installation (on page 24).
Hardware Requirements
Install the ISCP software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware requirements:
System Requirements for ISCP and ISCP-LITE
Processor Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz

System Memory 16 GB DRAM or better
Network Connection 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connection
HDD Drive 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive
• ISCP: 1280 × 1024 (19-inch touch-screen recommended)
Display
• ISCP-LITE: 1024 × 768 (15-inch touch-screen recommended)
For best results, do not run ISCP or ISCP-LITE on a system that is running or hosting other applications or
servers.
Software Requirements
The following software is required for Magellan CCS Navigator to complete its install.
• Adobe® Acrobat® Reader 4.0 minimum; 8.0 preferred
• Microsoft Windows Installer 3.1
• Microsoft XML parser 3.0
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 7.0
• Windows XP Service Pack 3
If you are running Windows XP Service Pack 2, you must update to SP3 before installing Magellan
CCS Navigator.
• Microsoft .Net 2.0
• SQL Server Express 2005 (SP2) (Magellan CCS Navigator Server installations only)
• Microsoft Messaging Queue
• RouterMapp er (Magellan CCS Navigator Server installations only)
During your install, if the following software is not found, an installer for the missing program may start.
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel

To install the Magellan CCS Navigator and IconMaster Software Control Panel, complete these steps:
1. Close all other applications running on the PC and unzip the installation package.
Select Software Applications > CCS Navigator > Navigator x.x Setup.exe.
If you do not have all the required software that is needed to run Magellan CCS Navigator, the
installation may abort. All the required software is included in the installation package. Once the
required software is installed, start your Magellan CCS Navigator installation again.
Removing ISCP Software

Only an Administrator user can properly and entirely remove the IconMaster Software Control
Panel software.
For information on removing the ISCP software, please refer to your Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced
Graphical Navigation Application User Guide.
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode

For the first login after an installation or reinstallation of Magellan CCS Navigator, the User Name box
will show the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the User Name box will show the name
of the person who last logged on.
Logging On

By default, a new Magellan CCS Navigator installation has no password. However, if you are
upgrading from Magellan CCS Navigator 1.0, the default password is Leitch.
Or click Start, point and click on Programs > Magellan CCS Navigator [VersionNo.]. VersionNo.
represents the Magellan CCS Navigator software version number.
 If you are logging on as a User, enter your assigned user name. (You do not need to re-enter
For more information on administrative and log-in permissions, see Logging In and Account
Administration (on page 41).
Administrator
Support
4. Click Log On.

Magellan CCS Navigator Client installations have Control mode only.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two operational modes, as described in Chapter Four of your accompanying
Magellan CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application User Manual (available as a PDF on
your installation DVD). Panel creation requires Magellan CCS Navigator to be in Build mode, and
operating the panels requires Control mode.
To set Magellan CCS Navigator’s mode, from the main menu, point to File > Operational Mode, and
then click on either Build or Control.
Logging On

Administrator
Support
4. Click Log On.

Magellan CCS Navigator Client installations have Control mode only.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two operational modes, as described in Setting the Operational Mode (on
page 57). Panel creation requires Magellan CCS Navigator to be in Build mode, and operating the panels
requires Control mode.
Activating a License
When you run a new installation, by default all licenses will be active with a 30-day trial period. You
must contact Customer Service in order to activate your ICONM-SCP or ICONM-SCP-LT license after that
time.
To control modules other than IconMaster, you must have other licenses. See Navigator Licenses (on
To active a license, you must be logged onto Windows as an administrator.
To activate a license, follow these steps:

A dialog box opens:
2. Provide the serial number from the License dialog box to your sales representative.

3. Enter the provided key in the License Key field.
After a restart of Magellan CCS Navigator, your license will be recognized.
Chapter 27
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration

The following topics are described in this section:
Configuring ISCP ..................................................................................... 519
Configuring ISCP-LITE ............................................................................. 526
Configuring ISCP
Only an Administrator user can create IconMaster Software Control Panel pages.
ISCP configuration is a Build mode operation that involves creating graphical (or "soft") control panels
for master control frames.
Before you can configure your ISCP, you will use the Master Control Plug-in tool to enter an IP address
for each Opus connected to the system. See Defining ISCP Master Control Channels (on page 520).
Once your channels are defined, using the wizard, you can create a master control panel, which provides
switching and audio monitoring information for the selected channel and a series of dynamic menus for
operating some commonly used areas of your Opus master control switcher. See Creating an ISCP Panel
(on page 522).
Figure 50: Portions of an ISCP That are User-Configurable
Defining ISCP Master Control Channels

Before controlling IconMaster devices using the IconMaster Software Control Panel, Magellan CCS
Navigator needs to know each channel’s name and IP address.This procedure can be done with the
MKEs already configured, or the MKEs can be configured separately. However, you do need to know the
IP addresses of the MKE modules. You must be in Build mode to create channels.
1. With ISCP in build mode, click Options > Plug-ins in the main menu.
The Plug-ins dialog box opens.
2. Click Master Control in the Configure Plug-ins list and then click Configure...
The IconMaster Control Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Click Add.
The Add Channel dialog box opens.
4. Beside Channel Name, type a descriptive name.

5. Enter the IconMaster MKE-3901 Module’s IP address.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box, and then OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
You can now create master control soft panels. See Creating an ISCP Panel (on page 522).
Creating an ISCP Panel

After completing the steps in Defining ISCP Master Control Channels (on page 520), while still in Build
mode, you can use a wizard to create new IconMaster Software Control Panels.
Only an Administrator user can create ISCP pages.
To create an IconMaster soft control panel, follow these steps:

1. With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, select File > New....
2. Click the Master Control tab.
The box now shows the format options for the new Master Control panel and includes a preview of
the selected layout option.
3. Click IconMaster Software Control Panel, and then click OK.

4. In the first page of the P age Wizard, first choose one of the following options:
 ISCP Single Device Control—allows you to select up to eight panels to control.
 ISCP Device Group Control—Allows you to select one or more groups of panels to control. Panel
groups are created in the IconMaster Configuration Utility (ICU) and saved in an XML file. If ICU
and Magellan CCS Navigator are not installed on the same computer, you must transfer the XML
file to the computer on which ISCP is installed.
5. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the wizard.
6. Click Finish. The panel is created.
After you switch to Control mode, you can use the IconMaster Software Control Panel.
Using the ISCP Wizard

The following terms are used in the IconMaster Software Control panel wizard.
Terms Used in IconMaster Software Control Panel Wizard
Term Function
> Adds highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New items
always appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
< Removes highlighted items from the Selected field.
Up Moves highlighted items up one position in the Selected field.
Down Moves highlighted items down one position in the Selected field.
Next >> Moves on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item must appear
in the Selected field for this option to be available.
<< Back Returns to the previous page in the wizard.
Close Exits the wizard without creating a panel.
Finish Selects the defaults on all the following pages, closes the wizard and creates a
panel. At least one item must appear in the Selected field for this option to be
available.
Available channels All channels that have been made visible to Magellan CCS Navigator (see Defining
ISCP Master Control Channels (on page 520))
Selected channels You can select up to eight MKEs (channels) for the ISCP to control.
On the created panel, the buttons will appear in the order, from top to bottom ,
that they appear on this ilst.
Group Groups allow you to control more than eight MKE devices at one time. Available
groups are included in an XML file that is created in IconMaster Configuration
Utility (ICU).
Term Function
Profile A profile consists of the IP address, profile name, UMD name, and multiviewer
name. Multiviewer profiles are created using the IconMaster Configuration Utility.
When you switch channels on the ISCP, the multiviewer will load the profile(s)
selected on this screen. You can associate up to three multiviewer profiles with
each IconMaster channel.
If you do not assign a profile to a particular channel, when you switch to that
channel using the ISCP, the multiviewer will retain the profile that is already
loaded. Profiles can be added, removed or changed after the ISCP panel has been
created.
You must type the exact name of the profile. Profile names are case-sensitive.
Button assignment Assigns functions to the user-configurable buttons on the ISCP. See Configuring
ISCP (on page 519) for the location of the user-configurable buttons.
Current Assignment Displays the function of the specified button.
Once a function is assigned to a button, it cannot be assigned again to a different
button.
Page name Defines the name for your IconMaster Software control panel. Once an ISCP is
defined, that you cannot rename it or delete it, so give each ISCP layout a
meaningful name.
GPO 1-13, Ext-1 GPO Triggers the specified GPO.
1 - 24, Ext-2 GPO 1 - GPOs are assigned using the IconMaster configuration utility software.
24 (General Purpose
Output Control)
Quick Select 1-8 Recalls the previously stored combination of function attributes.
FTB Causes the video program outputs to immediately fade to black.
(fade to black)
Silent Causes the audio program outputs to immediately fade to silence.
Fast Reset Resets PST or PGM source audio gains, audio over gains, keyer settings, individual
AES gains, individual audio cluster gains, and mono channel gains.
Play/Stop/Cue/ Provides standard machine control functionality.
Mark/Rewind/ Fast
Forward
FX/FXI When FX is selected, if an automation system controls the switcher, it can activate
and deactivate all effects. When FXI is selected, an automation system cannot
deactivate effects that are assigned from an RCP or an ISCP, though the
automation system can control all other functions of the switcher. Effects triggered
from an RCP or ISCP must be deactivated (removed) by an RCP or ISCP.
Adjusting a Configuration
Once created, you can make the following changes to an ISCP (changes must be done in Build mode):
• Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments (on page 525)
• Reconfiguring Channels and Changing Multiviewer Profile Assignments (on page 525)
Changing User-Configurable Button Assignments

To revise the function of a user-configurable button, while in Build mode, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the button that you want to change on the ISCP page, and choose Component Wizard
from the shortcut menu.
The Component Wizard for that button opens.
2. Choose an item from the drop-down menu.

3. Click Finish.
The text on the selected button is updated.

You have to open the Component Wizard for each button you want to change.
Reconfiguring Channels and Changing Multiviewer Profile Assignments

Use the Component Wizard to add or subtract channels from an open ISCP in Build mode, or change the
multiviewer profile that loads when you select a channel.
1. Right-click on a channel and choose Component Wizard from the shortcut menu.
The Component Wizard appears.
For a list of concepts and terminology used in the wizard, see Using the ISCP Wizard (on page 523).
3. Click Finish to close the Component Wizard.
The column of channel buttons updates to reflect the changes you have made.
Configuring ISCP-LITE
Only an Administrator user can create IconMaster Software Control Panel pages.
ISCP-LITE configuration is a Build mode operation that involves creating graphical (or "soft") control
panels for master control frames.
Before you can configure your ISCP-LITE, you will use the Master Control Plug-in tool to enter an IP
address for each Opus Hardware Control Panel connected to the system. See Defining ISCP-LITE Master
Control Panels (on page 526).
Once your panels are defined, using the wizard, you can create an ISCP-LITE page, which provides audio
monitoring information for the selected panel and a series of dynamic menus for operating some
commonly used areas of your Hardware Control Panel. See Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel (on page 527).
Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels

Before creating an ISCP-LITE Panel, Magellan CCS Navigator needs to know the associated Hardware
Control Panel’s name and IP address. You must be in Build mode to select panels.
1. With ISCP-LITE in build mode, click Options > Plug-ins in the main menu.
The Plug-ins dialog box opens. (See Defining ISCP Master Control Channels (on page 520).)
2. Click Master Control in the Configure Plug-ins list and then click Configure...
The IconMaster Control Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Click Add.
The Add Panel dialog box opens.
4. Beside Panel Name, type a descriptive name.

5. Enter the Hardware Control Panel’s IP address.
6. Click OK to close the dialog box, and then OK to close the Plug-ins dialog box.
You can now create ISCP-LITE panels. See Creating an ISCP Panel (on page 522).
Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel

Only an Administrator user can create ISCP-LITE pages.
To create an ISCP-LITE panel, follow these steps:

2. Click the Master Control tab.
The box now shows the format options for the new Master Control panel and includes a preview of
the selected layout option.
3. Click Lite-IconMaster Software Control Panel, and then click OK.

4. Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the wizard.
For a list of concepts and terminology used in the wizard, see Using the ISCP Wizard (on page 523).
5. Click Finish.
The panel is created.
After you switch to Control mode, you can use the ISCP-LITE Panel.
You can modify the button assignments for an ISCP-LITE panel after it has been created. See Changing
User-Configurable Button Assignments (on page 525) for more information.
Chapter 28
Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels

Once an ISCP or ISCP-LITE has been created, when you switch to Control mode, you can start controlling
and/or monitoring devices. See Setting the Operational Mode (on page 517).
The ISCP-LITE only works in conjunction with a paired IconMaster Hardware Control Panel to monitor
and control audio and provide dynamic parameter control.
The functionality of the ISCP is largely the same as that of the hardware control panel. The figures in
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel (on page 529) compare the locations of the buttons on
both panels. If you have multiple IconMaster hardware and software control panels, and use them to
control and monitor the same IconMaster hardware, changes you make on one panel are reflected on
the others.
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel

If you have just created an IconMaster panel in Build mode (see ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration (on
page 519)) and you switch to Con trol mode, the panel will open.
If you have previously used ISCP or ISCP-LITE and left a panel open when you closed Magellan CCS
Navigator, by default the panel will open when you relaunch the software.
To open a panel if you have previously closed the panel, follow these steps:
1. From the main menu, choose File > Open.
2. Browse to the location of your panel file.
The main panel and all its dynamic menus are stored together in a single folder. If you open a
dynamic menu, it will not connect to the pre-configured channels (IconMaster master control
switchers) and the buttons will have no effect.
3. Click Open.
Magellan CCS Navigator will by default automatically load an ISCP or ISCP-LITE if it is defined, and will
automatically go to full screen mode.
ISCP pages are designed to be displayed on a 19" 1280 × 1024 screen in full screen mode. ISCP-LITE
pages are designed to be displayed on a 15" 1024 × 768 screen in full screen mode. Both ISCP and ISCP-
LITE are intended to be used with a touch-screen monitor.
From the main menu, select View > Full Screen (or press F11 on your keyboard) to switch to full screen
mode.
To exit full screen mode, click the Exit FullScreen Mode button that appears on the interface, or press
the F11 key on your keyboard.
Figure 51: IconMaster Hardware Control Panel
Figure 52: IconMaster Software Control Panel
Lock Panel (ISCP Only)

When the panel is locked, clicking any button has no effect, until the panel is unlocked.
Hold the button down for two seconds to lock the panel. A countdown appears on the button as you
approach the target duration.
When a panel is locked, the Lock button will flash. Pressing any button for any length of time will have
no effect.
To unlock the panel, hold down the Lock button down for a quarter of a second. A countdown appears
briefly on the button.
Choosing Devices to Control

In the top left corner of the panel is a System label. Depending on how your panel is configured, it can
display Groups or Channels here.
To configure ISCP to control both channels and groups at the same time, create a group for each
individual channel you want to control, and assign a single channel to that group.
Figure 53: Channel Button
Figure 54: Group Button
A logo in the top left corner indicates when a button controls a group.
Selecting an IconMaster Channel to Control (ISCP Only)

Each channel represents a different IconMaster system. There can be up to eight, as configured using
the wizard. See Creating an ISCP Panel (on page 522) for more information.
Click a Channel Select button to choose a different channel (IconMaster system). The active channel’s
button is red. All subsequent actions you make on the ISCP panel will apply to that channel and all
orange-lit secondary channels, until you select a different IconMaster system by clicking another
Channel Select button.
Configuring Primary and Secondary Channels (ISCP Only)

When you configure a primary channel and then program secondary channels to that primary channel,
every change you make on the primary channel is replicated on the secondary channel until the
relationship is changed.
When selecting IconMaster channels as primary and secondary channels, they must all be the full
version of IconMaster, or all be IconMaster Lite. Do not mix IconMaster and IconMaster Lite channels
when configuring primary and secondary channels.
1. To select a channel as a primary channel, press it.
The channel’s button turns red.
2. Press the primary channel again.

Its label updates to say Primary.
3. Press once on each channel you want to follow the primary channel (secondary channels).
Each secondary channel button turns orange.
Pressing an orange button (already selected as a secondary channel) deselects it as a secondary
channel.
When a secondary channel has been selected, the Sync Now button lights, also orange. You can
press Sync Now to sync the secondary channels to the first channel. If you press Sync Now and then
select more secondary channels, but do not press Sync Now again, not all secondary channels will
be synced to the primary channel.
4. Press the Primary channel once.
The channels all return to their normal labelling. The primary channel retains its red label, and the
secondary channels retain their orange labels.
The Sync Now button ceases to be lit.
To remove a secondary channel from the group, press the primary channel, then press the secondary
channel(s) you want to remove, and then press the primary channel again to set the change.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press an orange (secondary) channel, it
becomes the primary channel.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press a white channel, all
primary/secondary channels are disconnected, and the one you pressed becomes the primary channel.
If you are not in primary/secondary selection mode and you press the red (primary) channel, you are put
into primary/secondary selection mode.
If you are in primary/secondary selection mode and you press the red (primary) channel, you are taken
out of primary/secondary selection mode.
Selecting a Multiviewer Profile (ISCP Only)

In the Master Control wizard, you have the opportunity to assign up to three multiviewer profiles with
each IconMaster channel (see Creating an ISCP Panel (on page 522)). These profiles are available on the
contextual control buttons to the right of the eight user-assignable buttons.
To load a profile, press one of the Profile buttons.
When you select a channel on the IconMaster switcher, the first multiviewer profile associatd with that
channel is automatically loaded. If no profiles are associated with a channel, the multiviewer will
continue to display the currently-loaded profile.
Selecting Groups for Control (ISCP Only)

Groups are configured within IconMaster Configuration Utility, and can contain up to 35 channels.
Click a Group Select button. The active group’s button is red. All subsequent actions you make on the
ISCP panel will apply to that group.
When an ISCP is configured to control groups of devices, an extra button appears second from the right
on the Dynamic Menu bar:
Figure 55: Channel Group Button
To further configure which device is the primary device within the group, and which devices follow that
device, see Channel Group (on page 556).
Dynamic Menu Selector Buttons

The eight Dynamic Menu Selector buttons (see Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel (on page
529) for the location of these buttons) on the ISCP provide access to parameter controls.
When you press one of these buttons, the region to the left of these buttons updates to reflect the
options that are available under that particular tool. For information on each of these dynamic menus,
see the following topics:
• External Keyers (on page 543)
• Internal Keyers (on page 545)
• Selecting an Effect (on page 547)
• Quick Selects (on page 549)
• Audio Control (on page 550)
• Audio Monitor Output (on page 554)
• Audio Profile Assign (on page 555)
Tracking
In order to allow the Dynamic Menu Selector buttons to follow the actions that are used on other parts
of the switcher -- the external keyer buttons, etc., the IconMaster Software Control Panel has a tracking
feature.
If one of the dynamic Menu Selector buttons is selected (lit), then the dynamic page that is selected will
be continuously displayed. Tracking can be considered to not be in effect.
If none of the dynamic Menu Selector buttons is selected, then the dynamic page section of the ISCP will
follow the operational state of the system. In this case, tracking is in effect.
Thus, if an internal keyer button is pressed, the dynamic page will display the internal keyers dynamic
page. If the FX button is pressed, the effects dynamic page will appear. If an assignable source is
pressed, the source assignment page will load.
For tracking to be active, no Dynamic Menu Selector buttons can be lit.
Clock and Timer

Both the ISCP and the ISCP-Lite have clock and timer functionality. The IconMaster MKE hardware
routinely provides clock and timer information. Clock and timer are configured in the IconMaster
Configuration Utility. See your IconMaster hardware documentation for more information.
On both interfaces, clock and timer data in the lower right quadrant of the screen.
The clock appears on top, and displays the current time.
The timer appears below the clock. The timer is an up-counting timer, and normally tracks the time since
the last transition, or from when Start was pressed.
Machine Control
You can configure ISCP or ISCP-LITE’s user-configurable buttons to display various machine control
options. See Creating an ISCP Panel (on page 522) and Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel (on page 527).
The devices these buttons control is determined by the IconMaster Configuration Utility. See your
IconMaster hardware documentation for more information.
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP Only)

At the center of the main control panel, there are 3 primary buses: Auxiliary (Aux), Preset (PST), and
Program (PGM). These buses are used to monitor or select inputs and outputs. The buttons show the
name of the source currently assigned to each of the inputs. A shift key becomes available on both the
PGM and PST buses when you have configured the IconMaster to operate in the 22 input mode. (The
Auxiliary bus controls 12 inputs, whether the system is in 12 or 22 input mode.)
Aux Bus
The Aux bus is typically used to switch external effect backgrounds, external key/fills, and external audio
routers.
You can assign input sources to the Aux buses using the ICU Auxiliary Bus Configuration dialog box. See
your IconMaster Installation and Configuration manual for instructions.
The Aux bus holds up to 12 different input sources. Each of the 12 Aux buses can be considered to be a
12×6 router, which allows a single aux button press to switch up to 6 simultaneous inputs to 6
destinations on multiple router levels. With 12 aux buses and 12 buttons per bus, each button can
address up to 6 independent router levels. In addition, the Aux bus allows you to perform such tasks as
• Manage effects backgrounds (effects background input)
• Monitor other sources such as VTRs and servers
• Control a secondary router connected to the primary router
• Manage video or (video with embedded audio) external backgrounds
• Manage audio through an audio router
• Manage additional key fields
Aux Bus Dynamic Controls

When you press Auxiliary Bus Select under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic menu
appears:
Aux bus selections that are made on a hardware panel will affect the data that appears on this page.
This dynamic menu routes Sources to Destinations, as on the Auxiliary bus of the Opus master control
switcher. Initially it displays the last selected Destination and the Source that is currently taken to that
Destination.
To route a source to a destination, follow these steps:

1. Press one of the Destinatio n buttons (Aux 1 to Aux 12).
A Source button lights up to update to indicate the source that is currently routed to that
destination (if any).
2. Press one of the Source buttons (Src 1 to Src 12) to route a different Source to the selected
Destination.
Only one Source and one Destination at a time can be selected.
Sources and Destinations are defined using IconMaster Configuration Utility software. See the section
"Auxiliary Bus Configuration Dialog Box" in your IconMaster Master Control Switcher Configuration
Utility Software Reference Manual for more information.
Selecting Aux Bus Source Selections

Use the Aux button to assign control of any preconfigured Auxiliary buses. You can configure up to 12
different buses, with 12 selections on each bus. For best results, unused buses are recommended to be
disabled.
To use an Aux bus, select the Aux bus you want.

You can configure this control through the ICU Aux Bus dialog box. See your IconMaster Installation and
Configuration Manual for instructions.
Preset (PST) Bus and Program (PGM) Bus (ISCP Only)

The PST bus is typically used to select a video and/or audio input that will be placed on-air during the
next transition. It displays what will go on air. Its sources are connected to the IconMaster through a
router. When you perform a transition, the content that was displayed on the PST bus goes on air, and
the content that was on the PGM bus goes to the PST bus.
The PST bus can be set to use 12 inputs (in 12 input mode) or 22 sources (in 22 input mode, the last
source select pushbutton on the PGM and PST buses acts as a shift between two banks of 11 inputs, 1-
11 and 12-22). These sources are assigned through the ICU.
The PGM bus displays what is currently on-air. Its sources are connected to the IconMaster through a
router. It is typically used as an on-air bus for output signals of video and audio. When you perform a
transition, the content that was displayed on the PST bus goes on air, and the content that was on the
PGM bus goes to the PST bus.
Selecting PST or PGM Bus Source Selections (ISCP Only)

Inputs are assigned to the PGM and PST bus buttons (through the ICU) as a static input or as a dynamic
input.
The process for selecting a new input source is the same for each of the primary buses: on the selected
bus, press the button that corresponds to the input. The button tally will illuminate to confirm the
selection.
You can configure this control through the ICU Primary Inputs dialog box. See your IconMaster
Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
Selecting 22 Input Mode (ISCP Only)

IconMaster supports up to 22 directly accessible sources in a function called "22 input mode." In 22
input mode, the last button in the PGM bus bank acts as a shift button. which allows you to shift from
one bank of 12 inputs to two banks of 11 inputs: 1-11 and 12-22. Pressing the Shift button toggles
thebutton labels, so you know which source is currently selected. One source is always selected on the
PST and PGM buses.
If a source is showing on the PST or PGM bus, and the Shift button is pressed to change banks, buttons 1
through 11 will not be illuminated. If you see just the Shift button pressed, simply press it again to toggle
to the other bank. A source button will now be seen illuminated.
You can set up this function through the ICU System Configuration dialog box. See your IconMaster
Program Bus "Hot" Punch Operation (ISCP Only)

Selections on the PGM bus automatically perform a PGM bus cut (or "hot" punch) operation; that is, if
you press a PGM bus source button, the selected source goes immediately on air. The PST bus is used in
this operation, but will return to its original source after the action is performed, and the Preset output
of the switcher momentarily shows the selection of the PGM input. Operationally, no feedback is shown
to the end user and the action taken is transparent to the operator.
This function is not the same as the Transition Hot Key in the Transition Control cluster.
Changing Input Sources (Dynamic Inputs)

You can change router input sources through a procedure called "dynamic inputs." Use the Dynamic
input functionality to change the router selection for an IconMaster source button. This feature is works
in both 12- or 22-input mode.
This function is enabled through the ICU Primary Inputs dialog box. See your IconMaster Installation and
Each IconMaster source is set up to be either static or dynamic.

• A static source is not changeable at the control panel; it can only be changed through the ICU. This
selection is appropriate for sources that will always be needed.
• A dynamic source has its initial router source defined in ICU, but can be changed at any time at the
control panel. If the selected PST is the same as the current on air PGM source, PST dynamic selection
is blocked.
An IconMaster control panel can have any mix of static and dynamic inputs.
When you select a source on the PST bus or press Source Select under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the
following dynamic menu appears:
Settings made on this page are only valid and usable if IconMaster is configured to run with Router
Database Mode enabled.
Each button in the Dynamic Routing section of the screen displays a source name, as defined by
RouterMapper when you created the routing panel.
Each IconMaster source is set up to be either static or dynamic.

• A static source is not changeable at the control panel; it can only be changed through the ICU. This
selection is appropriate for sources that will always be needed.
• A dynamic source has its initial router source defined in ICU, but when it is not on air, it can be
changed at any time at the control panel.
An IconMaster control panel can have any mix of static and dynamic inputs.
Changing a Dynamic Input Source

1. Press an Input button.
The Current field indicates the Source currently taken to that input.
2. Press the Up and Down buttons beside Category to scroll through the list of available categories.
The currently selected category is green.
3. Press the Up and Down buttons beside Index to scroll through the list of available indexes that are
in that category.
4. Press Assign to set the currently selected source to the selected Input.
The Current field updates to the selected.
Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only)

Taking a selection on- or off-air is part of the transition process. Depending on the selection’s transition
type (background, key, or audio-over), press the appropriate transition control button. This will set up a
transition from the PST to the PGM bus. Then, press Take to take the selection on-air.
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only)

You can perform four types of transitions: background transitions, key transitions, audio-over
transitions, and effects transitions.
On the IconMaster, transitions are performed through the Transition Functions button cluster and the
Transition Control buttons cluster. Using the IconMaster configuration utility software, you can choose
from a list of available functions to redefine these buttons. In this way, you can customize the operation
of the panel for optimum ease of use.
Configurable Transition Functions (ISCP Only)

The Transition Functions cluster controls the selection of transition type and rate that will occur upon
activation of the next transition.
Figure 56: Configurable Transition Functions
Configurable Transition Functions
Function Button
Stop IconMaster’s response to
Hold
automation commands
Select transition rates
Slow
Med
Fast
Function Button
Cut
Set up breakaways
Audio
Video
Selects an Effects transition FX
The Effects page of the Dynamic menus displays the
preconfigured effects. See Selecting an Effect (on page
547).
Select transition types Cut-Fade
Cuts the program off air, and then
fades the preset up
Fade-Cut,
Fades the transition down, and
then, when the program is off air,
cuts the preset up
V-Fade
Fades the program down, and
then, when the program is off air,
fades the preset up
Cross-Fade
Fades the program down and at
the same time fades the preset up
To perform a transition:
1. Select the content.
You select content sources through the BKGD button and a PST bus source and, optionally through
one or more of the key buttons or audio over buttons.
2. Determine whether the transition will be a background transition, effect transition, key transition, or
audio-over transition, alone or in combination.
3. Select a transition type.
4. Select a transition rate.
5. Select the elements that will be included in the transition.
One background and eight keyer enable buttons are used to enable which source(s) will be included
in the next transition. Pressing these buttons will toggle the button on and off. Any source that is
illuminated will be included in the next transition. Sources that are not illuminated will not be
included in the next transition.
6. Trigger the transition.
This is most simply done by pressing the Take button, but you can also press the Preroll button.
Enabling a Key Transition (ISCP Only)

A key makes it possible to cut a "hole" in the program input and replace it with a separate key fill of the
same size.
• Keys 1 and 2 are "external" keys; that is, they allow you to key in the video from an external device,
such as an external graphics system or character generator, onto the PGM video.
• Keys 3 through 6 are "internal" keys; that is, they allow you to control the IconMaster’s internal
IconLogo generator.
Internal keyers show their logo name and number. External keyers show the name that has been
programmed in ICU. The top of the button displays the following states:
• Red: The keyer is on-air.
• Orange: The keyer is not synced to external keyers.
• Green: The keyer is available, but not on-air.
• Off: The internal or external keyer is not available.
Figure 57: Keyer Button With Indicator
The key source and attributes can be set using the Dynamic Menus, and transitioning the keys is
accomplished using the Transition Controls.
You can configure this control through the ICU Keyer dialog box. See your IconMaster Installation and
Taking a Key On Air

1. Press a Key button. It illuminates, indicating that a keyer transition (from the Preset bus to the
Program bus) will occur when Take is selected.
2. If necessary, adjust the keyer parameters using the Dynamic menus.
3. Press Take. Once the transition is taken, the input source display indicator illuminates red (to
indicate that the keyer is on-air) and the key button remains illuminated. This means that the keyer
selection will once again be included in the next set of transitions.
Keeping a Key On Air
If a key is on-air (its indicator is red), press the Key button until the indicator is off. The key transition will
be disabled for the next transition, and the key will remain on-air.
Taking a Key Off Air
The keyer’s indicator will be red, to display that the keyer is currently on air.
1. Press the Key button until the button tally is illuminated.
2. Press Take.
The indicator turns green and the key button remains illuminated.
3. To keep the key off air, press the Key button to turn off its tally light.
Using the Transition "Trans HotKey"

The TRANSITION HOTKEY is located just above the TAKE pushbutton in the Transition Control cluster.
Press the TRANS HOTKEY button. It illuminates, indicating that HOTKEY mode is enabled. This feature
provides quick access to turn keyers on and off, without selecting the transition enable buttons and
using the TAKE process.
Unlike the Hardware Control Panel, on the ISCP the TRANS HOTKEY is a toggle. Each time you press it, it
changes on if it was off, or off if it was on. When you press one of the keyers to transition it, the TRANS
HOTKEY will remain in whatever state it was in. If the TRANS HOTKEY is lit and you press some other
button on the ISCP, such as a source selection, the TRANS HOTKEY will be automatically turned off.
Pressing a keyer button while the TRANS HOTKEY button is enabled will immediately transition the
keyer on or off air. It will not change the keyer enable state, just the on-air status. The keyer transition
type and speed follows whatever transition type and speed are currently selected.
Enabling a Background (Preset to Program) Transition (ISCP Only)

Background transitions are controlled through the BKGD button. The BKGD button operates like a
toggle button, and allows you to enable or disable a selected background transition.
Taking a Background On Air

1. Press the BKGD button. The button tally illuminates, indicating that a background transition from
the PST bus to the PGM bus will occur when you select Take or Preroll.
2. Ensure the correct PST source is selected. This source will be shown on the Preset output.
3. Press the Take button to cause the next transition to start immediately; or, press the Preroll button
to cause the next transition to preroll the appropriate play machine.
Disabling a Background Transition
Press the BKGD button until the button tally light is off. The background transition will be disabled for
the next transition. As a result, the Program background source is also displayed on the Preset output.
Effects are not available when the BKGD button is off.
Taking a Background On Air

1. Press the BKGD button. The button tally illuminates, indicating that a background transition from
the PST bus to the PGM bus will occur when you select Take or Preroll.
2. Ensure the correct PST source is selected. This source will be shown on the Preset output.
3. Press the Take button to cause the next transition to start immediately; or, press the Preroll button
to cause the next transition to preroll the appropriate play machine.
Disabling a Background Transition

Press the BKGD button until the button tally light is off. The background transition will be disabled for
the next transition. As a result, the Program background source is also displayed on the Preset output.
Effects are not available when the BKGD button is off.
Enabling an Audio-Over Transition (ISCP Only)

An audio-over allows you to reduce the level of the audio on the program channel and mix a separate
audio channel on top.
An indicator is located at the top of each audio-over button. The display can be programmed using the
ICU to indicate the source ID, and it illuminates red when the audio-over is on-air.
The audio-over source and attributes can be set using the Dynamic menus, and transitioning the audio-
over is accomplished using the Transition Control Cluster.
You can configure these controls through the ICU Audio Over Matrix dialog box. See your IconMaster
If you have the optional IconMaster audio control panel, it can be used to adjust the audio over mix
ratio. See Audio Control (on page 550) for more information.
Taking an Audio-Over On Air

1. Press an A/O button. It illuminates, indicating that an audio-over transition (from the Preset bus to
the Program bus) will occur when Take is selected.
2. Press Take. Once the transition is taken, the A/O button’s indicator illuminates red (to show that the
audio-over transition is on-air). This means that the keyer selection will once again be included in
the next set of transitions.
If an audio over is in progress, and the SIL (fade to silence) function is used, IconMaster audio will turn
off, and the Audio Over tally will no longer be red. it will return to an active (red) state when the SIL
function is exited.
Keeping an Audio-Over On Air
If an audio-over is on air and the A/O button’s indicator is red, press the A/O button until the indicator
is off. The audio over transition will be disabled for the next transition, and the key will remain on-air.
Taking an Audio-Over Off Air
The A/O indicator will be red, indicating that the audio-over transition is currently on air.
1. Press the A/O button until the indicator is illuminated.
2. Press Take.
The indicator will turn green.
3. To keep the key off air, press the A/O button to turn off its tally light.
External Keyers
To activate the External Keyers control, do one of the following:
• Press External Keyers under Dynamic Menu Selectors
• Press External Keyer (1 or 2) in the dynamic menu
The following appears:
This screen allows you to select each of the two external keyers on the selected IconMaster master
control switcher and adjust the parameters associated with that key. These settings can also be adjusted
using the keyer Control menu in the upper level menu list of the Control Cluster. See "Navigating the
Keyer Control" in your IconMaster Master Control Switcher Installation and Operation Manual for more
information.
1. Press Ext Key 1 or Ext Key 2. The relevant sections of the dynamic menu update with data retrieved
from the IconMaster channel (the status and values of that key on the channel).
2. Adjust the processing parameters of the selected key by pressing the up/down arrow buttons.
Processing Parameters for Keys 1 and 2
Parameter Function Range
Gain Applies gain to the key signal after application of the clip/offset value 0 - 16
Transparency Adjusts the amount of transparency of the resulting keyed signal 0 (off) - 100% (on)
Clip Subtracts the clip or offset value from the key signal input 0 - 896
Hue (Only available when Modified Matte Fill is selected) Adjusts the 0 - 359
phase of the chrominance of the signal

Saturation (Only available when Modified Matte Fill is selected) Adjusts the 0 - 100%
chrominance of the signal
Luminance (Only available when Modified Matte Fill is selected) Adjusts the 0 - 100%
brightness of the signal
3. The following buttons are active:
Key Types
Button Effect
Self Key Forces the luminance channel of the fill input signal to generate the key instead of using
an external key input signal to cut it
External Key Causes an external fill input signal to be inserted in to the shape cut by the key input signal
Additive Key Inserts the fill without processing (the fill must have a black background)
Key Modifiers
Button Effect
Matte Fill Causes the key effect in which the inserted fill input signal is created by a local matte (a
solid color signal that may be adjusted for chrominance, hue, and luminance) generator
External Fill Causes an external fill input signal to be inserted into the shape cut by the key input
signal
Polarity Inverse Inverts the polarity of the key
Use these buttons to build a key. As you select or deselect buttons here, the data is sent to the
IconMaster Key.
When the configured key is triggered on the channel, the new data sent from ISCP will be used.
4. When the changes to your key are complete, press Take to put it on air.
Internal Keyers
This screen allows you to select each of the logo keyers on the selected IconMaster master control
switcher and adjust the parameters associated with that key. These settings can also be adjusted using
the keyer Control menu in the upper level menu list of the Control Cluster. See "Navigating the Keyer
Control" in your IconMaster Master Control Switcher Installation and Operation Manual for more
information.
To Configure an Internal Keyer, follow these steps:

1. To activate the Internal Keyers control, do one of the following:
 Press Internal Keyers under Dynamic Menu Selectors, and then click on the Logo keyer button
that corresponds to the logo you want to modify.
If you load the current on-air logo, you run the risk of changing that logo while it is on air.
 Press one of the four Internal Keyers in the transitions cluster.
The following dynamic menu appears:
2. Under Keyer Settings, adjust the Gain, Clip and Transparency fields by pressing the up/down arrow
buttons.
The Up and Down buttons control the control that is active. To adjust the Transparency, for
example, you must first press the TRANSP button.
Processing Parameters for Keys 3, 4, 5, and 6
Gain Applies gain to the key signal after application of the clip/offset 0-8
value
Transparency Adjusts the amount of transparency of the resulting keyed signal 0 (off) - 100% (on)
Clip Subtracts the clip or offset value from the key signal input 0 - 896
3. Under Logo Select, press Up and Down buttons to the right of the logo list to scroll through the list
of available logos.
4. Press the Load Logo button.
The logo that is highlighted in red is sent to the keyer.
The name of the logo in that keyer appears in the Current Logo field.
5. Press the arrow buttons in the Logo Position section of the screen to move the logo. The Horizontal
Pixels and Vertical Lines fields update to indicate the position
0, 0 represents the top left corner of the screen.
Selecting an Effect
In an IconMaster environment, effects are created through the IconMaster configuration software
utility, or ICU. Before you can use any of these effects, they must be uploaded to the IconMaster
frame.See your IconMaster Installation and Configuration Manual for instructions.
You may or may not have access to the ICU software. If you do not, you must ask your system
administrator to perform these operations for you.
You can select an effect through the FX button or through the Effects dynamic menu. For the effect to
be performed, the Background transition must be selected.
In a two-channel effect, IconMaster can be configured for Preview operation or PST squeeze. In the
Preview mode, the Preset output will always show the upcoming segment of the selected effect. In the
PST mode, the second channel squeezes back the PST bus output and offers a fully independent two-
channel squeeze effort. Preview is not allowed in this operational mode.
1. Press the FX button.
The effect name will be displayed in the Selected Effect section of the Effects Dynamic menu. The
Effects Dynamic menu only appears if it is context locked using the Dynamic Menu selector button
for Effects, or if context lock is off, in which case the ISCP will automatically go to the Effects
Dynamic menu.
2. Continue pressing the FX button to scroll through the pre-configured effects until you have selected
the effect you need.
If there is no squeeze background (that is, the Squeeze Bkgd input on the MKE-3901 is not
connected), one of these conditions will apply:
 NONSYNC will be displayed in the control cluster display next to the effect name (HRCP panel
only).
 The squeeze background is untimed due to the wrong video standard on the input.
If Channel "B" is the background source for an effect, a "flash" may result, because you are trying to use
the "B" channel as both the background and a squeeze source at the same time. You should only use
this type of operation in a single channel environment while using the Squeeze Background "C."
The screen updates to display the names of the effects that are currently loaded on the IconMaster
(updated every time you press the Effects button). If there is not an effect associated with any particular
button, that button will be greyed out.
The effect that is currently active on the channel (the effect that will be used in the next transition) is lit
orange.
To make an effect the active effect on the channel, press one of the Pre-Select buttons (Effect 1 to
Effect 16) to choose a specific effect.
Enabling an effect does not trigger that effect; it makes that effect the active effect for the next
transition triggered by the IconMaster channel.
Effects are all pre-configured in the Config Utility software. See the "Effects Dialog Box" section of your
IconMaster Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Software Reference Guide for complete
instructions on creating effects.
Quick Selects
When you press Quick Selects under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic menu appears:
A Quick Select is a macro that can contain the following:

• PGM or PST sources
• Auxiliary bus configurations
• Keyer (1 - 6)
• Audio Overs, including ratio
• Parametric values for each keyer
• External keys, both on and off-air
• Background state
• Transition rate and type
• FX and F button state
The data from these items is stored as it was on the IconMaster master control switcher at the time it
was stored. Recalling a Quick Select overwrites the information in those regions of the IconMaster
master control switcher with the stored data.
There are eight Quick Select Store buttons, and eight corresponding Recall buttons.
To create a Quick Select, press one of the Store buttons, and then click Enable. The IconMaster’s
settings are saved to that bank in their current state. The corresponding Recall button lights briefly to
indicate that it has saved information.
To send a previously created Quick Select’s settings to the channel, press a Recall button.
For more information on IconMaster Quick Selects, see the IconMaster Master Control Switcher
Installation and Operation Manual section "Navigating the Quick Selects Control".
Audio Monitoring
The upper right portion of the screen provides tools to monitor the audio for the selected Channel
(IconMaster system).
ISCP displays 32 audio channels, showing the Preset audio meters on the left, and Program audio meters
on the right. Each channel has a cumulative gain indicator, which displays the cumulative effect of
Cluster, AES, and Mono gain adjustments on that channel.
Visual indicators provide feedback to show which channels are being modified, when one of the Audio
Controls Dynamic menus is displayed. The indicators at the bottom of the display are backlit in green.
Audio Control
When you press Audio Control under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the dynamic menu that appears has
three buttons at the top. The selected button will determine the controls available on the rest of the
dynamic menus. These three buttons are:
• Audio LEVELS (on page 551)
• Audio Pair Processing (on page 552)

• Audio Mono Proc (on page 553)
Audio LEVELS
A cluster is an arbitrary grouping of audio channels. A cluster could be composed of audio from different
channels. For information on creating audio clusters, see "Audio Clusters Dialog Box" in your IconMaster
Master Control Switcher Configuration Utility Software Reference Guide.
When you press Audio LEVELS under Audio Controls, the following dynamic menu appears:
Audio output gain is adjustable for the Preset and Program buses only. You can only control the Preset if
the BKGD control is active.
Clusters and AES can be named using ICU. The name of the cluster or AES is displayed on the control
selectors.
To adjust the audio output gain on a specific cluster, AES group, Mono group, Audio Over or Logo Audio,
follow these steps:
1. Press the button for the cluster, AES group, Mono group, Audio Over or Logo Audio.
This brings up the controls for that object.
2. Select a Program or Preset cluster to adjust.
In the Program and/or Pr eset sections of the screen, the buttons update to indicate the audio
channels associated with that bus.
The Gain field below each button updates to reflect the actual gain of that cluster, which it retrieves
from the IconMaster master control switcher.
3. Select a button within the Program or Preset group.
4. Use the Up and Down buttons to adjust the gain.
Your changes take effect immediately.
Audio Pair Processing

When you press Audio Pair Proc under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic menu appears:
To map audio functions for the Preset and the two Audio-Over sources, and to control AES channel
groupings, follow these steps:
1. Press Preset, Audio Over 1, or Audio Over 2.
The labels on the AES pairs update to indicate the pairs that are currently mapped for that source.
2. Press one of the eight AES PAIR buttons.
3. Press the Channel Mapping option to assign to that AES pair.
The options are outlined in the following table:
Table 106: Channel Mapping Options

Button Function
NORM Left channel input goes to left output, and right input goes to right output
Button Function
L to LR Left channel input goes to both left and right channel outputs
R to LR The right channel input goes to both left and right channels’ outputs
Chan Swap Swaps the left and right channels within the selected pair so the left input goes to the right
output and right input goes to left output
Chan Sum Adds the left and right channels within the selected AES input and divides the total by two,
maintaining a relative signal gain; then, it copies the result to both channels within the AES
pair, turning the stereo input pair into a mono output
These same mapping options are available in the IconMaster master control switcher’s Control Cluster
Audio menu. For more information, see "Navigating the Audio Control" in your IconMaster Master
Control Switcher Installation and Operation Manual.
Audio Mono Proc

When you press Mono Control under Audio Control, the following dynamic menu appears:
Mono control fun ctions are available for the Preset and the two Audio-Over sources, To configure the
processing for a mono channel, follow these steps:
1. Press Preset, Audio Over 1, or Audio Over 2.

The channels mapped for that source appear on the 16 buttons below the Mono Channels heading.
When Audio Over 1 or Audio Over 2 is selected, the Phase and Mute buttons are not available.
2. Press Up and Down to adjust the gain for the currently selected channel.
You can either press the button repeatedly, or hold the button down and then release it when a
specific number is reached.
3. Press a Channel button, and to configure that channel, do one of the following:
 Press Phase Rev to invert the polarity of the selected audio channel.
 Press Mute to turn off the audio of the selected audio channel.
Audio Monitor Output

When you press Audio Monitor Output under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic menu
appears:
Press the channel of the audio to monitor. Press the Up and Down arrows to change the percentage of
monitor outputs on the MKE-3901.
PST and PGM A through D indicate the audio pair that are being monitored.
Audio Profile Assign

When you press Audio Profile Assign under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic menu
appears:
To complete this screen:

1. Choose the source to assign a profile from the 22 Source buttons.
The Current field updates to indicate the profile currently assigned to that source.
2. From the Audio Profile Select field, use the up and down buttons to view the list of available
profiles.
3. When the highlight bar is on the profile you want, click Assign.
Each source has a default profile, assigned in the IconMaster Configuration Utility. To revert the audio
profile to the default, click Reset to Default.
Channel Group
When you press Channel Group under Dynamic Menu Selectors, the following dynamic menu appears:
The top portion of the menu has a button for each channel in the group.
One button on this panel is red. That is the primary device to be controlled. This button has two states:
one where it displays the name of the device, and the other where it displays [primary]. When the
master device’s button displays [primary],
• Click any orange device button to remove it from the controlled group.
• Click any grey device button to add control of that device.
When the master device’s button displays the device’s name, click any other device to make that device
the primary device.
Other buttons on this menu are:
Button Function
Select All Selects all devices for control by the master device
Clear All Deselects all devices except the master device.
Sync NOW Synchronizes all slaved devices so they display the same data onscreen as the master
device
Button Function
Centrio Profile Displays the profiles that are configured to display with the master device
Software User License and Warranty

Agreement
Carefully read all of the terms and conditions of this license agreement before using CCS Navigator, CCS
Pilot, or CCS CoPilot. By using this software, you indicate your complete and unconditional acceptance of
these terms and conditions.
This document constitutes a legal agreement between you and Imagine Communications concerning the
use of CCS Navigator. This agreement constitutes the complete agreement between you and Imagine
Communications.
License
Communications.

repairs, or alterations made by the customer or another party or if the Imagine Communications serial
number has been removed or defaced.
performance.
communication.
User's Guide Volume 4: NexioNAV
Volume 4: NexioNAV
In this section:
Preface ................................................................................................... 561
Introduction to NexioNAV...................................................................... 563
Installation ............................................................................................. 565
NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX License Key..................... 569
NEXIO Control and Monitoring .............................................................. 584
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
CCS Navigator User Manual: Volume 4: NAVIGATOR-NX Startup Guide is a companion guide to CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using the NAVIGATOR-NX license key. For information on the
basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator
Device Control (on page 17).
Audience
and/or operation of CCS Navigator and the NAVIGATOR-NX license key.
Revision History
A NEXIONav March 2008
B Navigator 4.3 August 2008
C Navigator 4.6 November 2009
D Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011
Writing Conventions

Bold Indicates a dialog box, property sheet, field, button, check box, list box, combo



CCS Software A generic term for any CCS software applications
Application

The documentation for your product is included in your installation package as an Adobe Acrobat PDF
file. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an electronic document integrated into the software. While
Chapter 29
Introduction to NexioNAV
The NAVIGATOR-NX license allows you to monitor the health and operational parameters of NEXIO
systems across a LAN or WAN. Working in conjunction with agents on the NEXIO™ server platform, you
can monitor system notifications, make setting adjustments, and control basic server configuration from
a remote PC.
The figure below presents some of the components available in a NEXIO system:
Figure 58: NEXIO Components
Using the NAVIGATOR-NX license, you can configure a set of pages containing alert-threshold levels that
help to diagnose equipment problems before they become on-air failures. Communication with the
Server network is based on SNMP protocol, allowing you to monitor SNMP traps. (Servers should be
running SNMP Agent 2.9.1 or greater.) Information on system setup parameters, RAID storage errors,
power supply status, fan status, and system temperature can be accessed, monitored, or controlled
from remote locations.
Before you can configure Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-NX license, log in and set the
operational mode. (See Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode (on page 568).)
In Build mode, connect to devices using either of the following methods:

• Use the NEXIO Wizard to enter the IP addresses for each Magellan CCS Navigator Server connected to
the system.
• Use the Discovery tool to discover NEXIO servers along with data enclosure devices.
Within Magellan CCS Navigator, each individual Server is also referred to as a Node. (See Creating NEXIO
Systems Using the Wizard (on page 572).)
In a server system, many nodes support different redundant paths. Many of the servers have two
network interfaces, co-existing on different sub-nets. The same idea applies to server gateways, such as
MGXs. You can have gateways with six different network interfaces all being monitored independently
in Magellan CCS Navigator. In order to be monitored, nodes need to exist in the graphical navigation
tree.
The NAVIGATOR-NX license replaces NEXIO Pilot as the monitoring tool of server systems. Note however
that this version does not implement all functionality delivered by NEXIO Pilot at this point.
The NEXIO Wizard creates all nodes after creating the Navigator pages (under the Network folder) every
time a user runs it. Pages can contain different components, including servers, newsroom solutions,
media Gateways, and data storage.
Features
The following are some of the features of the NAVIGATOR-NX license key:
• Display and handle different types of server notifications
• Email handling for server notifications (traps)
• Create all NEXIO pages using the NEXIO Wizard in Magellan CCS Navigator
• Create all NEXIO nodes in the navigation tree using the NEXIO Wizard in Magellan CCS Navigator
• Load NEXIO MIB files during application start-up
• Discover NEXIO devices, and create their Control pages
• Enable/disable NEXIO Server license option
This document will get you started with the NAVIGATOR-NX license key.
Topics covered include:

• Installing Magellan CCS Navigator (see Installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software (on page 566)).
• Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX license (see Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License (on page 567)).
• Removing Magellan CCS Navigator software (see Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software (on
page 567)).
If you have purchased just the NAVIGATOR-NX license, you will have only received the NAVIGATOR-NX
Startup Guide. The full Magellan CCS Navigator manual is available from our website.
Magellan CCS Navigator with a NAVIGATOR-NX license is not a fully-featured version of Magellan CCS
Navigator. To use some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator manual, you must purchase
separate Magellan CCS Navigator licenses.
Chapter 30
Installation
Before installing your Magellan CCS Navigator software, ensure you have the necessary hardware and
software. SeeRequired Hardware, Operating System and Software (on page 565).
Basic installation instructions are provided in the section Installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software (on
page 566). For an in-depth treatment of installation possibilities, see Software Installation (on page 24).
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it will start with a 30-day trial license of all
features of Magellan CCS Navigator. To add your permanent NAVIGATOR-NX license, see Activating a
NAVIGATOR-NX License (on page 567).

NAVIGATOR-NX was designed to work with a 15-inch or greater touch screen, but if you use it with a
mouse, any size monitor is acceptable.
When communicating with a Farad G2 server, you need SNMP Agent version 7.0.0.8 or newer. Brocade
switches require SNMP Agent v1 in order to be monitored for traps.
The other hardware, operating system and software minimum system requirements for NAVIGATOR-NX
are the same as those for Magellan CCS Navigator. For a complete list of requirements, see Software
Installation (on page 24).
Install the Magellan CCS Navigator software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements::
Table 107: PC Requirements for NAVIGATOR-NX

Processor Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz

System Memory 16 GB DRAM or better
Network Connection 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connection
HDD Drive 160 GB Hard Disk Drive
Available Disk Space 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive
• Video graphic module with 256MB DDR3 SDRAM supporting up to a
Display minimum 1920x1080 resolutions
• LCD Monitor supporting up to 1920x1080 resolution
For best results, do not run Magellan CCS Navigator on systems that are running or hosting other
applications or servers.
This system is based on SNMP protocol. The performance depends on the Network traffic. Servers
should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1 or greater. Farad G2 servers require SNMP Agent 7.0.0.8 or newer.
Brocade switches require SNMP Agent v1 in order to be monitored for traps.
Installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software

To install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these steps:
1. Close all other applications running on the PC and download the appropriate installation package
from our website.
2. Double-click on the file name Navigator x.x Setup.exe.
installation may abort. All the required software is included in the Third-Party folder of the unzipped
installation file. Once the required software is installed, start your Magellan CCS Navigator installation
again.
All functionality is packaged within the Magellan CCS Navigator application, and a set of specific
"wizards" creates the graphical interface to control and monitor NEXIO systems. The page configuration
is done via a wizard.
All data is maintained when either re-installing the application (same version) or upgrading to a higher
version. In both cases, the data is backed up.
Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License

The NAVIGATOR-NX license must be enabled in order to create pages using NEXIO Wizard.
must contact Customer Service in order to activate your NAVIGATOR-NX license after that time. To
activate a NAVIGATOR-NX license, you must be logged onto Windows as an administrator.
To activate a license, follow these steps:

A window opens:
2. Provide the serial number from the License Dialog window to your sales representative.
Your NEXIO Server license should be recognized immediately. A restart of Magellan CCS Navigator or the
PC is not required.
Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software

For information on removing the Magellan CCS Navigator software and the NAVIGATOR-NX license, see
Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software (on page 34).
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode

For the first time after an installation or reinstallation of Magellan CCS Navigator, the User Name will
show the name Administrator. At subsequent logins, the User Name box will show the name of the
person who last logged on.
Logging On

 If you are logging on as an Administrator user, type Administrator.
4. Click Log On.
Magellan CCS Navigator has two operational modes, as described in Logging In and Account
Administration (on page 41). Page creation requires Magellan CCS Navigator to be in Build Mode and the
monitoring of the servers requires Control Mode.
Build mode functionality is described in NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX License Key (on
page 569). Control mode functionality is described in NEXIO Control and Monitoring (see "NEXIO
Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX License Key" on page 569).
Chapter 31
NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX

License Key
You must be in Build mode to configure Magellan CCS Navigator to control and monitor NEXIO Servers.
then click on Build. Configuration tools include a NEXIO Server Wizard where you will enter the IP
addresses for each Server connected to the system.
Only an Administrator user on a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create NEXIO pages.
Discovering NEXIO Servers

Magellan CCS Navigator can discover NEXIO servers as SNMP devices by providing their IPs or their
subnet. The Discovery tool detects existing NEXIO server types (including Data storages). See Using
Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers (on page 569).
When you save the results of the Discovery, these NEXIO servers are added to the Navigation tree as
regular SNMP devices. See Graphical Navigational Tree (on page 580).
Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers

When you run a discovery targeting the IP addresses of NEXIO devices, Magellan CCS Navigator detects
the various server types based on their video functionality. When you save the results of the discovery,
Magellan CCS Navigator automatically groups multiple IP addresses under one server name.
1. If the Discovery pane is closed, open it by selecting Tools > Discovery from the main menu.
When docked, the Discovery pane defaults to the bottom left of the Magellan CCS Navigator screen.
2. Click Options... on the Discovery pane button bar to open the Discovery Options box.
3. On the Hosts tab, select the Enable scanning of IP addresses check box, if it is not already selected.
Do not select Enable scanning of MAC addresses when discovering a NEXIO system.
4. Click Add....
The Add Hosts dialog box appears.
5. Under Select Products for Discovery, select SNMP.
Unselect any other products that may be selected.
 Select Add a Host IP and then add the IP address of a NEXIO device.
 Select Add a range of host IPs to add a group of IP addresses from a specific subnet for your
NEXIO devices, for example
172.10.20.1 to 255
172.10.30.1 to 255
7. Click Apply after adding each IP address or range of IP addresses.
This adds the IP addresses to the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options window.
8. Set your Discovery Save options. (See Setting Discovery Save Options (on page 106) for more
information.)
The Discovery tool pings all IP addresses you have defined, and then logs the IP addresses and
device IDs for all responding devices in the Discovery pane’s Status box.
The button bar in the Discovery pane includes a Stop button. To halt the discovery, click Stop. If you
do not click Stop, the discovery will stop automatically when it finishes searching the SNMP
Network.
In Control mode, you can open Control pages for NEXIO devices by double-clicking in the Discovery
folder. The pages required for monitoring the operational parameters of discovered servers are
automatically created. You do not need to run the NEXIO wizard to control and monitor discovered
NEXIO devices.
Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard

Magellan CCS Navigator’s NEXIO wizard creates a set of NEXIO monitoring/controlling pages for a
redundant or non-redundant NEXIO system. It creates nodes and their associated pages needed to
monitor the health and operational parameters of the NEXIO systems across a LAN or WAN. Magellan
CCS Navigator creates specific folders for NEXIO device types (such as Transmission servers), and saves
discovered servers according to their types within their corresponding folders.
You can use the Nexio wizard to manually create NEXIO server devices in the graphical navigation tree
and their associated pages based on their functionality, their motherboard type, and their network
connection setup. You can also input your NEXIO IPs, their types, and their network dependencies.
Before creating NEXIO monitoring pages, you need to ensure that you have the NEXIO Server license in
Magellan CCS Navigator. NEXIO Wizard is enabled only for those users that have a NAVIGATOR-NX
license.
Close all Graphical Navigation pages before starting the wizard.
To create a new NEXIO system site configuration, verify that you are in Build mode (from the main menu
select File > Operational Mode > Build) and then follow these steps:
1. In the File menu, select New....
The Magellan CCS Navigator New Page Wizard opens.

2. Click the Server tab and select Nexio Wizard.
The box now shows the format options for the Server site configuration and includes a preview of
the suggested home page.
3. Click NEXIO Wizard and then click OK.
4. Complete each screen, following the instructions in one of the following sections:
 Adding a Pre-Defined Server (on page 576)
 Adding Previously Undefined Servers and Switches (on page 577)
 Adding Storage Solutions by Polling (on page 579)
Click Next to proceed to the following screen.
5. When you have completed the last screen of the wizard, click Finish.
Messages will appear on the screen, and pages will appear as each screen of the Graphical
Navigation panel is created.
The Nexio wizard creates a system "home" page, various group pages (for groups where there is
more than one item), server detail pages illustrating redundant environments for HDX and Velocity
servers in MIOH setups, and connects these to control pages for all Nexio server types integrated
with Magellan CCS Navigator. To navigate these pages, see Navigating Away From the NEXIO Home
Page (on page 587).
Different pages may appear when you have created a NEXIO system using the wizard. Not all the
pages will appear in every system. If, for example, you have a single transmission server, and no
other devices, then the only page that will appear is a control page for the transmission server. If
you have many transmission servers, but only one news server, then the System "home" page will
appear, and the Transmission servers group and detail pages, in addition to the Transmission control
pages. But when you click on the news server icon on the System "home" page, the news server
control page will open.
Items that do not have a control page attached are created for status monitoring only.
6. Once the Wizard has completed creating the pages, select Control Mode to verify proper operation.
7. A dialog box appears prompting you to save pages. Click OK.
Completing the First Page of the NEXIONav Wizard

The following options are available in the first page of the NEXIONav wizard.
Table 108: NEXIONav System Components
Item Contents
NEXIO Wizard requires a NEXIO System Name to be selected; once

Name
that has been entered, the configuration can be customized to
represent your specific equipment. The naming convention should
match the existing site configuration wherever possible.
Item Contents
Select If servers have already been defined or discovered, click Select to

open a browsing window. Select a server, and then click OK. All the IP
addresses belonging to that server are added to the wizard.
Pre-defined servers can be
• Discovered (see Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers (on page
569))
• Added from the Catalog folder (see Creating NEXIO Systems Using
the Wizard (on page 572))
• Created on a previous use of the Nexio wizard (only from the Add
Groups dialog boxes in the Nexio wizard)
Components of the System

Transmission Servers • NX3601HDI
• NX3601HDX
• NX3600HDI
• NX3600HDX
• NXVolt (NX1410HDX)
Newsroom Solution Velocity servers include the following:
• NX3000VNXES
• NX3000VESX
Specialty Servers • NX2101LRS
• ICM (Ingest Control Manager)
• MOS GATEWAY
• MOS Playlist Manager
• Mirror Manager
• Instant Online
• Content Manager
• NEXIO Remote
• CIFS Server
MGX Servers • NX1000MGX Media Gateway server
• NX1010MIOH Media I/O Host
Storage Solutions n/a
Farad Storage Solutions • Farad1
• Farad G2
Ethernet Switches • Extreme Summit 200 series
• Extreme Black Diamond series
• Brocade switches
Item Contents
Fiber Switches • Qlogic SAN 5000 series.

Modifies the SNMP settings for all devices in the in the NEXIO System
SNMP settings
you are creating.
To activate the button, select the Apply these settings for all devices
in the NEXIOSystem checkbox.
You may change individual settings later. See Configuring SNMP
Settings (on page 575)
Configuring SNMP Settings

You can configure SNMP settings as part of the first step of the NEXIO Wizard. These settings propagate
to all the devices within the NEXIO system, and are accessible once the system is set up by right-clicking
a specific NEXIO device, choosing Properties, and then selecting the SNMP tab. These settings should be
aligned according to your network and SNMP agent configuration.
1. Select the SNMP Settings button and change the settings as appropriate.
2. Place a check beside SNMP enabled. This confirms that the server is in fact an SNMP device, and can
be status monitored.
3. Select the SNMP version, either SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c.
4. If you want to monitor the status of the device, check Status Polling.
Even when Status Polling is disabled, the device is still queried for status when starting Magellan
CCS Navigator, when switching to Control mode, and with every Refresh or RefreshAll command.
5. Enter the name of the Read Community, if different from the default of public.
6. Enter the name of the Write Community, if different from the default of private.
7. Enter the SNMP Port for the device.
The default port is 161. The port can number can range from 0 to 65535.
8. Enter the Timeout period, in seconds.
The allowable timeout period can range from 1 to 1000 seconds.
9. Enter the Number of Retries to be allowed.

The default number of retries is 1. The number of retries can range from 1 to 1000.
10. Enter the Polling Interval, in seconds.
The default polling interval is 30 seconds. The interval can range from 1 to 65535 seconds.
11. Click OK.
Adding Items in the Nexio Wizard

Items can be added in the pages of the Nexio wizard using the following methods:
• Adding a Pre-Defined Server (on page 576)
• Adding Previously Undefined Servers and Switches (on page 577)
• Adding Storage Solutions by Polling (on page 579)
Adding a Pre-Defined Server

Pre-defined servers can be
• discovered (see Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers (on page 569))
• added from the Catalog folder of the Navigation pane
• created on a previous use of the Nexio wizard (only from the Add Groups dialog boxes in the Nexio
wizard)
1. If servers have already been defined or discovered, click Select to open a browsing window.
2. Select a server, and then click OK.
All the IP addresses belonging to that server are added to the wizard.
Adding Previously Undefined Servers and Switches

If a server has not been discovered or added using the Navigation pane’s Catalog folder, you can still add
it using the Nexio wizard.
1. To a row to the list of servers, click the New button .
2. To complete the row, do one of the following:

 To complete the row with pre-saved data, select an existing server from the graphical navigation
tree by clicking in the '...' button beside the server name.
 To populate the row with new data, first enter the name of the server in the name Field, and
then enter the IP address(es) of the server you just created by clicking the "..." button.
You would normally enter more than one IP if you have redundant, backup IP addresses. NEXIO
Velocity news servers and NEXIO Transmission servers can have two IP addresses listed, and MGX
servers can have up to six.
For MGX servers only, on the Server Information screen, for each row there is a second option,
Connect to IP.
3. Click in the Connect to IP field to choose the IP address of the server that corresponds to the site
layout network connection.
 Highlight the Platform Type box to view the drop down menu, and then select the server type.
 This option is only available/required on Transmission servers, Newsroom solutions, and MGX
servers.
You can create as many rows as are required to describe the devices on your network.
To delete an existing server, select the row that contains the server and click the 'X' button.
4. When all servers have been entered, click Next to move to the next screen of the wizard, or Finish if
it is the last screen of the wizard.
Adding Storage Solutions by Polling

This option is only available for data enclosures and Farad cores. You must complete the screen for MGX
and Transmission servers correctly for polling to work.
1. If you want the wizard Poll command to retrieve the Enclosure Serial numbers from NEXIO
Transmission servers, check Include Transmission Servers when polling.
If this option is unchecked, the polling will address only MGX servers from the current system setup.
2. On the data enclosures screen, press Poll.
The NEXIO Wizard will automatically poll the data enclosures via MGX servers for the Serial Numbers
and enter the value on the page.
Farad storages are defined by serial number of their cores, their IP addresses, and the first logical
unit number (LUN).
3. If the NEXIO Wizard is unable to detect the Data Enclosures, enter the value manually by clicking
New and typing the serial number of each enclosure.
4. When all storage solutions have been entered, click Next to move to the next screen of the wizard,
or Finish if it is the last screen of the wizard.
Graphical Navigational Tree

In a server system, many nodes support different redundant paths. For instance, many of the servers
have two network interfaces, co-existing on different sub-nets. The same idea applies to server
gateways, such as MGXs. In this case however, you can have gateways with six different network
interfaces. All of this needs to be monitored independently in Magellan CCS Navigator. In order to be
monitored, nodes need to exist in the graphical navigation tree.
Magellan CCS Navigator’s discovery tool creates nodes in the Discovery folder (see Using Device
Discovery on NEXIO Servers (on page 569)). The NEXIO wizard creates all nodes after creating the
Magellan CCS Navigator pages (under the Network folder) every time you run it. Below is a
representation of the sub-tree created by the wizard, containing different components (Servers,
newsroom solutions, data storage, etc.).
Adding NEXIO MIB Files

All NEXIO MIB files are distributed within Magellan CCS Navigator. After installation, these MIBs are
loaded by default in the internal MIB parser to properly translate traps. Or they may be downloaded
directly from your website.
To access the SNMP Options dialog box, follow these steps:

1. In build mode, right-click on any SNMP device, and then select Properties from the menu that
appears.
2. Click on the SNMP tab.
3. Click MIB, and then click Load MIB.
The SNMP Options dialog box displays all the MIB files that have been loaded into Magellan CCS
Navigator. When you install Magellan CCS Navigator, all the MIBs you need to control and monitor
NEXIO devices are already loaded.
To load a MIB, follow these steps:

1. Copy the corresponding MIB files to the MIB subdirectory:
C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Harris\CCS\Files\mib
2. Click SNMP on the Options menu to open the SNMP Options dialog box.
3. Click Add and then select the MIB files you want to open.
The new MIB files will show under the MIB Files to Load list with a check mark. To temporarily
disable the loading of a MIB file, clear the check mark beside its name.
4. If an error occurs when the MIB files are loaded, an alert box will show. Click OK to acknowledge the
caused the error or add any missing MIB files. See SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear (on page 338) for
more information.
Servers should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1.
Customizing Your Server Pages

You can modify or update your NEXIO system pages when the actual NEXIO setup has changed. This can
include adding items, removing items, or changing IP addresses.
Before creating or reopening a Nexio Server page in the wizard, close all open Graphical Navigation
pages.
1. With Magellan CCS Navigator in Build mode, choose File > New from the main menu.
2. In the New Page wizard, select the Server tab, and then double-click on the Nexio Wizard icon.
The first page of the New Page wizard opens.
3. Under What is the name of the Nexio System? click Select, choose a previously defined NEXIO
system, and then click OK.
Back on the first page of the New Page wizard, the already defined components are checked.
4. Check any components you want to add to the system, or check the option to change SNMP
settings.
Unchecking items will not remove their pages from the system. If you need to remove pages from
the system, use the Delete function. See Deleting a Navigator Page (on page 376) for more
information.
5. Click Next to progress through the pages of the wizard.
Depending on the options you checked under Components, there may be as few as one or as many
as seven more pages in the wizard. Some pages may already be populated with data. You can edit
this data to update server information. You must complete the pages that are devoid of data. For
information on modifying and/or completing pages, see Adding Storage Solutions by Polling (on
page 579).
6. On the last page of the wizard, click Finish.
Using the settings you have defined, Magellan CCS Navigator creates new pages and modifies existing
pages.
Chapter 32
NEXIO Control and Monitoring

The graphic below shows how Magellan CCS Navigator typically appears in Control mode.
Figure 59: Magellan CCS Navigator Interface in Control Mode
With a NAVIGATOR-NX license, after discovering NEXIO devices, when you switch Magellan CCS
Navigator to Control mode, you can immediately monitor and control those devices using control pages.
See Opening Nexio Control Pages from the Navigation Pane (on page 586).
After using the Nexio Wizard in Build mode, when you switch to Control mode, you can use Graphical
Navigation pages to control and monitor your NEXIO devices. See Opening Nexio System Pages Using
the Open Menu (on page 585).
If you have just created NEXIO pages using the Nexio wizard in Build mode, (see Creating NEXIO Systems
Using the Wizard (on page 572)) and you switch to Control mode, the pages will open.
Opening NEXIO Pages

When operating with a NAVIGATOR-NX license key, ensure that a single setup or control is opened at a
time (no multiple pages opened). This will ensure that the operations are done in the intended server.
In Magellan CCS Navigator, you can monitor and control as many NEXIO Systems as you like. Every time
a NEXIO system is created, the wizard creates a Home Page for the system. You can load the last home
page (for the latest NEXIO System) by clicking Home. (See Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar (on
page 587) if the Home button is not available.)
Opening Nexio System Pages Using the Open Menu

If you close all pages, you can open an existing Graphical Navigation page by following these steps:
1. Click the Open File icon on the toolbar, or click File on the menu bar and then select Open.
The Open dialog box appears.
2. In the Page Description column, look for items that share the name of the NEXIO system.
3. From those items, choose the item with the name NEXIO System followed by a string of numbers in
the Page Name column.
4. Click Open.
The Open dialog box contains all pages created for all Magellan CCS Navigator.
Opening Nexio Control Pages from the Navigation Pane

To open a Control page, click on a device’s reference IP address in the Navigation pane. You must be in
Control mode to open Control pages.
Figure 60: NEXIO Server Components in Navigation Pane
Navigating Within NEXIO Pages

When you use the NEXIO wizard, you create customized Magellan CCS Navigator interfaces to control
and monitor servers. (See Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard (on page 572).)
The Graphical Interface displays the current NEXIO page. To navigate away from the NEXIO home page,
click on an item. You can navigate back towards the home page in the following ways:
• Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar (on page 587)
• Using Graphical Navigation Context Menus (on page 587)
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar

A toolbar appears on top of the Graphical Navigation window when Magellan CCS Navigator is in Control
mode. To show this toolbar, select the check box in the View Options section of the Graphical
Navigation Options box. The table below lists the tools on the Graphical Navigation toolbar and their
functions:
Tool Function
Back Loads the previous Navigator page
Forward Reloads a Navigator page you recently loaded when you clicked Back
Zoom Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in the Graphical Navigation window
Pan Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to move the page. Click the button again to
deactivate
Home Reloads the Home page
Using Graphical Navigation Context Menus

When you right-click on the background of a Graphical Navigation window while in Control mode, a
context menu opens. The table below lists the tools on the Graphical Navigation context menu and their
functions:
Tool Function
Back Loads the previous Navigator page
Forward Reloads a Navigator page you recently loaded when you clicked Back
Home Reloads the Home page
Zoom Allows you to magnify or shrink your view in the Graphical Navigation window
Pan Turns the cursor into a hand; click and drag to move the page. Click the button again to
deactivate
Refresh Redraws the page
Reload Gets the Graphical Navigation page from the server
All fields are read-only in Control mode
Navigating Away From the NEXIO Home Page

Each time you use the Nexio wizard, you create a new series of connected pages so that you can
navigate between all the defined devices to view pages and alarms to control and monitor. Every NEXIO
System you create starts with its own Home Page. Icons on the home page represent the main
components of the system.
If there is only one device in the NEXIO system, then that device’s page will be the home page.
Each icon on the diagram represents all the items of that type. When you click on a storage icon, you
load a page where you can choose a specific device in that group. From any other page within the NEXIO
group of pages, you can go back to the Home page by clicking in the Home button.
If there is an alarm on any item in the group, the icon representing that group displays a flashing red
outline.
A redundant NEXIO system may appear as below.
Figure 61: Home Page
The above graphic shows all the possible components for a NEXIO system. If you have not included a
device type when building the system using the wizard, that device type will not appear on the
NexioNAV home page.
An administrator user can customize the home page. See Customizing Your Server Pages (on page 583).
When you click on the Transmission Server icon, if there is more than one of that type of server, a Group
Server page appears.
Figure 62: Group (Server/Velocity/MGXs) Page
The Group page groups all servers of a type. The icon representing a server displays a flashing red
outline when there is an alarm on that server.
Click a specific server to load a Detailed Server page.
The Detailed Server page does not appear when a server has just one IP address (as in a non-redundant
system).
Figure 63: Detailed (Server/Velocity/MGXs) Page
The Detailed page shows the detailed configuration of the servers (or Velocities, MGXs, etc.). When a
server is in an alarm state, the icon representing that server displays a flashing red outline.
Click a device to see specific data for a specific device. Data is available for the following types of
Devices:
• Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers (on page 591)
• Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers (on page 596)
Using Control Dialog Boxes for Devices

You can reach a Control dialog box for a device by selecting that device in a Detailed Server page in a
nexio system in the Graphical Navigation pane, or by clicking on the device in the Navigation pane. The
following NEXIO devices have Control dialog boxes:
• Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers (on page 591)
• Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers (on page 596)
Controlling and Monitoring Transmission Servers

The IP address of the server being monitored appears in the top center of the page (i.e.
IP:172.10.20.12). If the IP address shows <Unknown>, no server was selected. Return to the detailed
page or the Home page and select a server to monitor/control.
Figure 64: Transmission Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box (NX1410HDX Server Shown)
Figure 65: Transmission Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box (NX3601HDX Server Shown)
The Setup section of the screen displays the current server settings, which can be reconfigured as
described below:
Table 109: Setup Options

Section Option Settings
Voltages
Depending on the specific Current Displays the current status for that item.
model of server, voltages Alarm Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the
listed may vary. voltage dips below this value, an alarm is generated.
Alarm High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the
voltage exceeds this value, an alarm is generated.
System Drive (Percentage Low Limit Enter the threshold for the low limit.
of low drive space used) High Limit Enter the threshold for the high limit.
Fans
Depending on the specific Current Displays the current speed of the fan.
model of server, fans listed Low Limit Enter the low speed threshold for the CPU Fan. If the
may vary. CPU Fan speed dips below this value, an alarm is
generated.

CPU Usage %
Percentage of CPU use over 5 minutes.
Memory Usage %
Percentage of memory use over 5 minutes.
Logical Drive Setup
• DISK READ Critical Threshold Sets the high and low threshold alerts.
• DISK WRITE If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the
• TOTAL LIPS Warning Threshold to 5%, you will get a warning
Warning Threshold alert when the drive capacity reaches 5% remaining
• Drive 1
and a critical alert when the drive capacity reaches
• Drive 2 2% remaining.
Status (Does Not Appear for All Server Models)
• SD Channels Indicates how many channels of each type are

• HD Channels available.
Proxy Channels
• Genlock Resolution Indicates where genlock data comes from, and

Genlock quality.
Genlock Source
• PL Realtime Version
PL Realtime State
Displays Ethernet data, including speed and data
Network Table
port.
In the Status and Motherboard sections of the screen, you can review version data and other un-
configurable information.
Configuring Magellan CCS Navigator as an Agent to Send Traps to a Receiver

Magellan CCS Navigator can set NEXIO server trap destination IPs. The server can send traps to up to five
Trap IP addresses for monitoring purposes.
Figure 66: Configuring to Send Traps to a Receiver
To add a trap address:

1. Enter the digit that will indicate the trap (1 for the first address, 2 for the second address, and so on)
in the Add trap IP Address field.
2. Following the digit that indicates the trap address number, enter a space, and then enter the IP
address of the address where you would like traps sent.
If you are adding more than one IP address for a single index, separate them by a space. You can add
up to six IP addresses per trap IP address.
3. Press ENTER on your keyboard, and then click Refresh.
The Trap IP Addresses field updates to display the addresses that traps are sent to. Each trap is
separated by | spacer bars.
If a trap address already exists and you need to add one or more IP addresses to that trap address, you
must re-enter the entire string of IP addresses.
To delete a trap address:

1. In the Delete String # field, enter the digit that indicates the IP address you want to delete.
2. Press ENTER on your keyboard, and then click Refresh.
The Trap IP Addresses field updates to remove the selected IP address.
Control Options
The Control Options section of the screen offers the ability to restart/reboot/stop SNMP services, NXOS,
and LLM. It also offers the ability to configure SNMP managers to receive traps.
Servers should be running SNMP Agent 2.9.1.
Table 110: Server Control Options

Menu Item Availability Description
Restart SNMP All Restarts the SNMP agent. This button may be used
when you add IP addresses or update the firmware
version on the server.
Start NXOS+LLM Transmission servers only Starts the NXOS and LLM (server systems only) on the
selected system.
Start LLM All Starts the LLM (low-level module) application on the
selected system.
Stop NXOS+LLM Transmission servers only Stops the NXOS and LLM (server systems only) on the
selected system.
Refresh All Triggers a poll to refresh data from the server.
Reboot All Shuts down and restarts the selected system.
Controlling and Monitoring News Servers

Figure 67: News Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box
described below:

Voltages
• VCORE A Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
• VCORE B dips below this value, an alarm is generated.
• +3.3V
• +5V
High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
• +12V exceeds this value, an alarm is generated.
• VBAT
System Drive Low Limit Enter the threshold for the low limit.

(Percentage of low drive High Limit Enter the threshold for the high limit.
space used)
Temperatures
• CPU1 Temp Alarm Limit Enter the high threshold for the Temperature. If the
• CPU2 Temp Temperature exceeds this value, an alarm is generated.
• SYSTEMTemp1 Alarm Hysteresis Enter the difference between the value where the alarm
turns ON from turning OFF and the value where it turns
OFF from turning ON.
Fans
CPU Usage %
Memory Usage %
Logical Drive Setup
• DISK READ Critical Threshold

Sets the high and low threshold alerts.
• DISK WRITE
• TOTAL LIPS If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
Warning Threshold Threshold to 5%, you will get a warning alert when the
• CHANNEL 1 DRIFT
drive capacity reaches 5% remaining and a critical alert
• CHANNEL 2 DRIFT when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
For information about sending traps to a receiver, see Configuring Magellan CCS Navigator as an Agent
to Send Traps to a Receiver (on page 593).
For information about the control buttons at the bottom of the control page, see Control Options (on
page 594).
Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers

From the Home page, click on the MGX server to view the following screen.
This screen only appears when there is more than one MGX server. When there is one MGX server and
you click on it, the MGX Monitor Control dialog box opens.
Figure 68: MGX Servers Page
You can click on each of the connections below the icon for a server to monitor and control the
redundant IPs for that connection. An MGX server can have up to six redundant connections.
Click an MGX to view the following page.
IP:172.10.20.32). (If the IP address shows <Unknown>, no server was selected. Return to the detailed
page or the Home page and select a server to monitor/control.)
Figure 69: MGX Servers Monitor Control Dialog Box (NX100MGX Server is Shown)

Voltages
Depending on the Current Displays the current temperature
specific model of server, Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
voltages listed may vary. dips below this value, an alarm is generated
High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
exceeds this value, an alarm is generated
• CPU TEMP Current Displays the current temperature
• SYSTEM High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
exceeds this value, an alarm is generated
Fans
Depending on the Current Displays the current temperature

specific model of server, Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the CPU Fan. If the CPU Fan
fans listed may vary. speed dips below this value, an alarm is generated
Logical Drive Setup
• DISK READ Critical Threshold Sets the high and low threshold alerts.
• DISK WRITE If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
• TOTAL LIPS Threshold to 5%, you will get a warning alert when the
Warning Threshold drive capacity reaches 5% remaining and a critical alert
• DRIVE 1
when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
• DRIVE 2
The Network Table (if present) details information about the Ethernet connection, including its speed
and port data.
page 594).
Controlling and Monitoring Speciality Servers

Figure 70: Transmission Server Monitor Control Dialog Box
described below:
Table 113: Transmission Server Monitor Control Setup Options

Voltages
• CPU Volts Current Displays the current status for that item
• +3.3Volts
• +12 Volts Alarm Low Limit Enter the low threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
• +5 Volts dips below this value, an alarm is generated
• VBAT
• CPU temp Alarm High Limit Enter the high threshold for the voltage. If the voltage
• System exceeds this value, an alarm is generated
System Drive Low Limit Enter the threshold for the low limit.

(Percentage of low drive High Limit Enter the threshold for the high limit.
space used)
Fans
• Fan 1 Current Displays the current speed of the fan.

• Fan 2
• Fan 3 Low Limit Enter the low speed threshold for the CPU Fan. If the
• Fan 4 CPU Fan speed dips below this value, an alarm is
• Fan 5 generated
CPU Usage %
Memory Usage %
Logical Drive Setup
• DISK READ Critical Threshold

Sets the high and low threshold alerts.
• DISK WRITE
• TOTAL LIPS If you set the critical threshold to 2% and the Warning
Warning Threshold Threshold to 5%, you will get a warning alert when the
• Drive 1
drive capacity reaches 5% remaining and a critical alert
• Drive 2 when the drive capacity reaches 2% remaining.
page 594).
Controlling and Monitoring Farad Storage Devices

When you click on a Farad Storage device within a Navigator page, a page for Farad Cores opens.
Depending on the number of enclosures, the page displays a different number of Cores. The image
below displays a Farad storage system with two cores, but your system may have one or more.
Figure 71: Farad Core Storage Control Dialog Box
When you click thebutton to the right of an IP address in this page, you open the HTTP-based StorView
application. This application can be run in either Build or Control mode. For a complete description of
the StorView tools, see your Farad documentation.
When a Farad core has an alarm, the LUN storage graphic on this page displays a red or yellow alarm
border. To find the source of the alarm, use the StorView tools.
Viewing Data Storage Devices

Click Storage in the NEXIO Servers home page to view the Data Storage page as shown below.
Figure 72: MGX—Storage Page
The Storage page displays a graphical representation of each of the drive enclosures connected to the
system. Each drive enclosure may multiple drives. You can click on individual drives within the enclosure
to see them highlighted in the Navigation pane. A highlighted drive indicates a warning (yellow) or a
critical (red) condition.
If you are in the Monitor tab in the Diagnostic window, you can view the alarms for all of the Storage
drives monitored by MGX or transmission servers in the system.
If you are in the Selected tab in the Diagnostic window, you can view the alarms for the highlighted
Storage drive that you have selected.
Monitoring Network Status
Figure 73: Navigation Pane
The Navigation Pane has the following columns:

• Navigation Tree: Indicates the type of server and monitors the various server gateways and network
interfaces.
• Alarm: Indicates which node has an alarm. A red icon indicates a critical alarm and a yellow icon
indicates a warning. Note that for any type of alarm, a notification is sent. Orange color represents an
acknowledged alarm.
• Status: Indicates the status of the node- either active or inactive.
• Monitor: This column is only used in router configurations. It is not applicable in SNMP.
• Filter: Select this checkbox if you don’t want an alarm sent. The alarm will still be recorded and
viewable in the Diagnostic window (Logged tab only), but will not be sent/emailed.
Monitoring Alarm Conditions

In Control mode, the Diagnostics tool monitors the network for unusual events and operating
conditions. The Diagnostics tool reports alarms when variations occur. (Refer to Network Event
Diagnostics (on page 263) for more information on the Diagnostics tool.)
Figure 74: Diagnostic Window
The trap monitoring functionality required by the Magellan CCS Navigator application is built using the
Magellan CCS Navigator SNMP trap monitoring capabilities.
Below is a list of notifications that are monitored by Magellan CCS Navigator:
Table 114: NEXIO Notifications

System(s) Failure Type
Storage If the available space on the video/audio storage systems for data falls
below a pre-configured level as specified by the customer
NXA1000MGX A failed media Gateway server (notification of failover to secondary
gateway server)
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX A failed connection of a media client (HDX) to a media Gateway server
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX A failed connection of a media client (Velocity and Mac Pro-CIFS) to a
for VelocityNX and CIFS media Gateway server
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX A broken logical disk\-—LLM Alerts
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX, Power supply failure (specific to chassis, not to the power supply)
ICM, NMG
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX, SATA/System drive failure

ICM, NMG
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX LLM failure
NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX Read/write/FC errors
System(s) Failure Type

NX3600, NX3601, NXA1000MGX LIP events— Logged
VelocityESX Power supply failure (specific to chassis, not to the power supply)
VelocityESX SATA/System drive failure
VelocityESX LLM failure
VelocityESX Read/write/FC errors
VelocityESX LIP events—Logged
System Drives A system drive failure on any system component that is critical to
normal system production (exception: ICM—Ingest Control Manager)
All Loss of network connection on critical system components- Pilot
Manager will periodically poll key system components and report
loss/failure of response from a platform. This will be implemented for
Server I/O frames (NX3600HDX and NX4000TXS), VelocityESX
platforms, NEXIO ICM, MOS and Media Gateway Servers, network and
fibre channel switches, and media disk arrays.
All that use FC Loss of Fibre Channel connectivity on any component
1644 Power supply failure
SBOD Failed storage array drive
SBOD Failed storage array controller
SBOD Failed storage array power supply
RAID Intrinsic mirroring RAID Tool—Provides notification via NEXIO Pilot in
the event any critical errors are detected (e.g., reporting disparities on
both the primary and mirrored RAID)
Handling Server Notifications

The NAVIGATOR-NX license provides the ability to handle server notifications. More specifically:
• A trap (warning or critical) state generated from the servers is logged onto the Diagnostic window and
the Navigation tree displays a red or yellow icon.
• An email message is sent to various recipients (if configured).
• The trap notification is displayed in the Diagnostic window (Selected tab) when selecting the device
on the Navigation tree or in the Navigator page that has the device.
• Right-clicking in the log entry (trap) in the Diagnostic window brings a short-cut menu (see the image
below).
• Selecting the 'Local Acknowledge' option locally acknowledges the selected trap. Selecting 'Ignore'
removes the trap from the 'Selected' device.
• In the case of acknowledgement, an email is sent to report that the alarm has been acknowledged.
• The Diagnostic window (log entry) and Navigator page with the device on it is highlighted in 'orange'
color (color that indicates "acknowledged"). If there is another critical notification for the device, the
color remains red (highest alarm level). While the alarm condition exists, no further emails are sent.
• If an operator does not acknowledge the alarm, the log entry in the Diagnostic window and the
Navigator page stays highlighted at the original "warning" (yellow) or "critical" (red).
• Upon the alarm condition being cleared (level 0), the clearing trap is logged (Log tab), the highlight on
the original trap log entry and GUI page is removed, and an email is sent announcing the alarm as
being cleared. No operator action is necessary with Magellan CCS Navigator.
No further traps are logged nor emails sent until the condition occurs again.
Figure 75: Acknowledgement Menu
If the application is shut-down and the trap condition that was once acknowledged is received again, a
new email is sent. Clearing of traps from 3rd party devices is directly related to the vendor
implementation. Some vendors will send a "clear" trap level; others will stop sending the trap after the
condition is cleared. Magellan CCS Navigator can automatically clear the alarm once the trap notification
stops coming.
Email Handling for Notifications

When email notification is configured, Magellan CCS Navigator sends emails in the following
circumstances:
• When the condition starts
• When the condition is acknowledged
• When the condition is cleared
No email is sent when alarms are ignored. In failure conditions where multiple traps are created (like an
MGX failure), multiple traps are logged and a email is sent for each trap.
Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms

The network must have an enabled e-mail messaging service for the E-mail Forwarding Service to work.
If the network does not have e-mail support, then no e-mails will reach their destinations.
To set the options on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab of the Diagnostics Options box, complete these
steps:
2. Select the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
You can enable or disable the e-mail notification, add or remove e-mail recipients, and set the
severity levels for the generation of alarms on the E-mail Forwarding Service tab.
3. Select the E-mail Forwarding Service check box to enable the CCS application to send e-mail
notifications of resource errors.
4. In the Send an E-mail for section, select the check box beside each error type for which you want
to receive e-mail notification. Clear the check box beside each error type for which you do not want
e-mail notification.
The five error types are Critical, Warning, Information, Acknowledged, and Error Level Change.
5. In the E-mail Send Options section, click the arrow and select the method in which you want to send
the e-mail.
Choose from MAPI (your Outlook mail profile settings) or SMTP (configured server).
Depending on the e-mail sending method chosen in step 5, either the MAPI Mail Properties or
SMTP Properties dialog box opens.
7. To configure the settings in the MAPI Mail Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a. Click the arrow from the Profile Name box, and then select a profile name from the list.
b. If the required name is not in the list, click Add to add a new profile name to the list.
The Add Profile Name box opens.
c. Type a sender profile name in the Add Profile Name box, and then click OK.
8. To configure the settings in the SMTP Properties dialog box, follow these steps:
a. Specify the SMTP server name, port number, and reply e-mail addresses in the corresponding
fields.
b. If your SMTP server requires authentication in order to send external e-mail, complete the
Authentication section of this dialog box.
9. In the E-mail Addresses of Recipients section, click Add... to show the Add Recipient box.
10. Type the e-mail address of a proposed error notification recipient in the box, and then click OK.
This closes the Add Recipient box and lists the new e-mail recipient in the E-mail Addresses of
Recipients box.
11. Repeat steps 6 and 7 to enter the e-mail addresses of other proposed recipients of notification e-
mails.
Options box.
User's Guide Volume 5: NAVIGATOR-INT
Volume 5: NAVIGATOR-INT
In this section
Preface ................................................................................................... 611
Introduction to InterfaceNAV ................................................................ 613
Installation and Logging On ................................................................... 616
Configuration Using NAVIGATOR-INT .................................................... 619
Using Customized Pages ........................................................................ 643
Software User License and Warranty Agreement ................................. 647
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
Magellan CCS Navigator User Manual is a companion guide to CCS Navigator: Advanced Graphical
Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to get started using tools that go with the Magellan CCS Navigator license. For
information on the basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to Interface Overview (on
page 57).
Audience
This manual is written for engineers, technicians, and operators responsible for configuring and using
the Magellan CCS Navigator license tools.
Revision History
A Navigator 4.4 and higher with Magellan CCS Navigator November 2008
license key
Writing Conventions
Conventions





The documentation for your product is included in your installation package. The CCS Navigator Online
Help is an electronic document integrated into the software. While working in the application, you can
open the Online Help and print out individual topics.
Chapter 33
Introduction to InterfaceNAV
When your Magellan CCS Navigator installation includes a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP
license, in Build mode you can create pages and panels that open control dialog boxes for various
products. Then, in Control mode, you can open those pages and control devices, view feedback
parameters, and receive alarms.
When you combine a NAVIGATOR-INT license with either a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP

license, you can place individual parameters and alarms from various devices to create customized
pages. These pages can display just the parameters that your facility uses, or contain just the parameters
that a specific operator or group of operators can access. You can put alarms beside the controls that
correct them, place feedback parameters beside the controls that they provide feedback for, and
combine controls and feedback for different devices on the same page.
In order to operate pages that have been created using these tools, only a NAVIGATOR-CLI license is
required. For more information on acquiring and adding licenses to your Magellan CCS Navigator
installation, see Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License (on page 617).
Figure 76: Workspace With Parametric Controls in Build mode
The NAVIGATOR-INT Startup Guide will get you started with the tools to create customized pages. Topics
covered include:
• Installing Magellan CCS Navigator and adding the NAVIGATOR-INT license (see Activating a
NAVIGATOR-INT License (on page 617) )
• Configuring devices to provide parameter and alarm favorites (see Configuring Favorites (on page
623))
• Building pages that contain individual parameters and alarms from Imagine Communications or third-
party devices (see Creating Customized Pages (on page 633))
• Operating pages (see Using Customized Pages (on page 643))
If you have purchased NAVIGATOR-INT as an add-on license, you receive only the NAVIGATOR-INT User
Manual. The full Magellan CCS Navigator manual is available from our website as a PDF.
A NAVIGATOR-INT license alone will not provide all the features of Magellan CCS Navigator. To use
some features described in the Magellan CCS Navigator manual, you must purchase separate Magellan
CCS Navigator licenses after the 30-day trial period. See Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License (on page
Chapter 34
Installation and Logging On

Before installing any software, take the time to ensure you have the necessary hardware and
prerequisite software. See Required Hardware, Operating System and Software (on page 616).
When you install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, it starts with a 30-day trial license of all features
of Magellan CCS Navigator, including NAVIGATOR-INT. Basic installation instructions are provided in the
section Installing Magellan CCS Navigator (see "Installing InterfaceNAV" on page 617). For more
information, see Software Installation (on page 24).
When the trial period runs out, you must purchase both a NAVIGATOR-INT and either a NAVIGATOR-SRV
license or a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license. To add your permanent Magellan CCS Navigator and other
licenses, see Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License (on page 617).

To create pages and panels using NAVIGATOR-INT, you will need to meet the NAVIGATOR-SRV hardware
and third-party software requirements. To operate pages and panels that include elements created
using NAVIGATOR-INT, only the NAVIGATOR-CLI system requirements need to be met.
For a complete list of requirements, see Software Installation (on page 24).
Install the NAVIGATOR-INT software on a PC that meets or exceeds the following hardware
requirements:
Minimum Supported System Requirements for Magellan CCS Navigator Clients and Servers
Client Server
3 GHz Pentium IV Intel Core i5 3.20 GHz
Processor
processor
8 GB DRAM 16 GB DRAM or better
System Memory
(16 GB recommended)
100-BaseT 10/100/1000 Gigabit Ethernet Connection
Network Connection
HDD Drive 20 GB 160 GB Hard Disk Drive

Available Disk Space 1 GB 5 GB
Optical Drive DVD-ROM Drive DVD-ROM Drive

Super VGA supporting • Video graphic module with 256MB DDR3 SDRAM
Display 1152 × 864 (19-inch supporting up to a minimum 1920x1080 resolutions
recommended) • LCD Monitor supporting up to 1920x1080 resolution
Do not run Magellan CCS Navigator on a system that is running or hosting other (non-Magellan CCS
Navigator) applications or servers. If NAVIGATOR-SRV is installed remotely, systems running
NAVIGATOR-CLI should connect to the NAVIGATOR-SRV system through VPN, which offers a layer of
protection.
Installing InterfaceNAV
1. Close all other applications running on the PC and insert the Documentation and download the
appropriate installation file.
2. Double-click Navigator x.x Setup.exe.
installation may quit. All the required software is included in the Third-Party folder. Once the required
software is installed, start your Magellan CCS Navigator installation again.
Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License

The NAVIGATOR-INT license requires a NAVIGATOR-SRV license or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to
operate, and can work on a system that also has a NAVIGATOR-NX license. The NAVIGATOR-INT license
cannot be installed on the same system as an ISCP license.
The NAVIGATOR-INT license is required to layout and build graphical navigation pages that contain
individual controls and feedback objects from various devices. Only a NAVIGATOR-CLI license is required
to operate and monitor these pages.
NAVIGATOR-INT cannot be installed in the same system as Pilot or CoPilot.
must contact Customer Service in order to activate your NAVIGATOR-INT license after that time.
To use the features of a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you must also have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-
SNMP license. Contact your Sales representative.
When a NAVIGATOR-INT license is added to a system that already contains a NAVIGATOR-SRV or

NAVIGATOR-SNMP license, the Parameters option in the Tools menu becomes available when Magellan
CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
To activate a NAVIGATOR-INT license, you must be logged onto Magellan CCS Navigator as an
administrator.
A dialog box opens:
2. Provide the serial number from the License dialog box to your Sales representative.
 By phone. Contact your Sales representative.
Form. The form includes information about where the form should be sent. Acrobat Reader is
required.
You should restart Magellan CCS Navigator for the license changes to take effect.
Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software

For information on removing the Magellan CCS Navigator software, see Removing the Magellan CCS
Navigator Software (on page 34).
Chapter 35
Configuration Using NAVIGATOR-INT

Configuration using NAVIGATOR-INT tools involves creating pages and panels that include parameters
and alarms from SNMP and CCS-P devices. All configuration is done in Magellan CCS Navigator’s Build
mode.
Only an Administrator user on a system equipped with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-SNMP license
can create Magellan CCS Navigator pages.
You can add parameters and alarms from any Imagine Communications or third-party device (depending
on the licenses you have installed) but first that device must be made available to Magellan CCS
Navigator.
• If devices are available, you can discover them. See Discovering Devices (on page 619) and Configuring
Favorites for an SNMP Device (on page 631).
• If devices are not available, because they are being retasked from another purpose or are on a
different network, you can create these devices as off-line devices and then connect later when the
devices are available. See Creating Off-Line Devices (on page 622).
If you will be working a great deal with a particular device or device type, you can create favorites for
that device. You can then copy and paste favorites from one device to another like device. This is
particularly useful with products like the X75 that have a large number of parameters and alarms. You
are not required to select favorites. If you do not select favorites for a device, you will always have the
full range of parameters and alarms to choose from for that device.
To add parameters and alarms to pages and panels, you drag and drop them from the Parameters pane.
For a complete description of how to create pages and panels, see Graphical Navigation Page Creation
(on page 372).
Selecting Devices
Before you can create custom pages with control and monitor options, you need to define the devices
that will be controlled and monitored. The most direct method of defining these devices is by
discovering them. After discovery, the devices appear in the Navigation pane. When you click on a
device that is connected and online, the Parameters pane displays the alarms and parameters for that
device. See Discovering Devices (on page 619).
If the device is off-line or not available (perhaps because it is in a mobile truck), you can create that
device off-line. See Creating Off-Line Devices (on page 622).
Discovering Devices
You can discover both Imagine Communications and third-party devices. You must be in Build mode to
discover devices. Normally, you need to connect to devices that are on the same Ethernet subnet, or
connect directly using a cross-over cable. For more information on connecting and discovering devices,
see CCS Device Discovery (on page 99).
1. Click Options on the Discovery pane.
The Discovery Options dialog box appears.
2. On the Hosts tab, select Enable scanning of IP addresses.

3. Click Add.
The Add Host dialog box appears.
4. Under Add a Host IP, enter the IP address of a device that is available for discovery.
Under Select Products for Discovery, select the types of devices to discover at that IP address.
5. Click OK to confirm the IP address.
The Add Host process can be repeated more than once, so you can discover multiple IP addresses in
one discovery session.
6. On the Hosts tab of the Discovery Options dialog box, make sure checks appear beside the IP
addresses of devices you want to discover.
7. Click OK.
8. Click Start on the Discovery pane’s button bar.
The Discovery tool will ping all IP addresses on the network, and then log the IP addresses and
device IDs for all responding devices in the Status box of the Discovery pane.
If you do not click Stop, the discovery stops automatically when it finishes searching the Network.
9. Click Save to transfer the discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
If your device is CCS-P compliant, and that is how you will be controlling and monitoring it, you can now
create pages. See Creating Customized Pages (on page 633). If the device will be controlled and
monitored using SNMP, see Adding MIBs for SNMP Devices (on page 621).
Adding MIBs for SNMP Devices

After discovering an SNMP device using Magellan CCS Navigator, you need to add the MIBs for that
device.
To use SNMP with Magellan CCS Navigator, you must have a NAVIGATOR-SNMP license key.
1. Save the MIBs for your device in the MIB directory.
The data folder can be found by clicking Start > Programs > Navigator > Navigator Data Folder >
Open Files > Mib.
2. In the Navigation pane, right-click on the device and select Properties.
3. On the SNMP tab, click MIB.
The SNMP MIB Browser dialog box opens.
4. Browse to the node on the tree that corresponds to the selected device.
5. If the MIB for your device does not appear, click Load MIB, and in the SNMP Options dialog box,
select the MIB you want to associate with this device.
If the MIB does not appear in the SNMP Options dialog box, click Add. In the Open dialog box,
choose MIBs and then click OK.
6. Click OK to close the SNMP Options dialog box.
Creating Off-Line Devices

If the devices for which you want to create pages and panels are not available, you can add elements
from those devices by creating those devices as off-line devices. The specific devices must be added to
the Network or Discovery folder of the Navigation pane.
1. While Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode, browse to the unavailable device in the Catalog
folder of the Navigation pane.
2. Right-click the specific device, and then choose Copy from the shortcut menu.
3. Right-click in the Network folder, and then choose Paste from the shortcut menu.
You must add the Device ID information for these devices when the off-line devices are available. See
Updating Device IDs From Off-Line Devices Using Information From On-Line Devices (on page 623) and
Configuring Favorites (on page 623) for more information.
Updating Device IDs From Off-Line Devices Using Information From On-Line Devices
If you add elements to a page that are from an off-line device, you must update the Device ID
information for that device using the on-line device (after discovering it) in order to render the page or
panel fully functional in Control mode.
1. Discover the device that you want to monitor/control (if it has not been discovered already), and
then save the results of your discovery.
Follow the steps outlined in Discovering Devices (on page 619).
2. Right-click on the device, and then choose Properties from the context menu.
3. On the Device tab of the Properties dialog box, click Copy.
4. Right-click on the identical device that has been copied from the Catalog folder, and then choose
Properties from the context menu.
5. On the Device tab, click Paste.
Parameters on an off-line device may not perfectly match those on the actual device. The device catalog
information stored in Magellan CCS Navigator may be older or newer than that stored on the actual
device. If the parameter lists do not match, some assigned parameters may not be available in the
favorites list.
For best results, compare your panels to the actual device before using them.
If you have the IP address of a device without one in the Navigation pane, you can update it. See Editing
an IP Address (on page 126).
Configuring Favorites
Some devices have hundreds of parameters and alarms. Whether a device is CCS-P or SNMP-enabled,
use the Favorites feature to limit the options in the Parameters panel. Device favorites are the elements
that you expect to control and monitor most frequently.
For information on configuring favorites for a control panel, see Configuring Favorites for a Device (on
page 254). You can copy and paste favorites from the Parameters panel to with control panels by using
the right-click menu in the Navigation pane.
Selecting Device Favorites

When you select a device in the Navigation pane, the Parameters panel updates to display the favorite
parameters (on the Parameters tab) and alarms (on the Alarms tab) for that device. If favorites for a
device are not configured, then the two tabs will display all the parameters and alarms for that device.
To configure favorites for a device:

1. Click Favorites in the top right corner of the Parameters panel.
The Favorites dialog box opens. This dialog box has two tabs: Parameters and Alarms.
2. Select each element that you would like to appear in the device’s Favorites list. By default, no
parameters or alarms are selected.
3. (Optional) Change the name by which a selected parameter appears by clicking in its field in the
Alias column. Use the Delete key to remove the default or old alias and type your new parameter
name.
You can search by an alarm alias in alarm log databases.
keyboard is automatically switched to English for data entry in this field. If you switch the keyboard
back to data entry in an alternate language, data corruption could occur.
The Parameters panel updates to display just the parameters and alarms that have been selected.
To sort the favorites, click on a column header.
For advanced configuration of favorites for SNMP devices only, see Configuring Favorites for an SNMP
Device (on page 631).
Refreshing Parameters
When you click on a device in the Navigation pane, Magellan CCS Navigator polls that device and
displays the parameters and alarms (if available) in the Parameters pane. Normally this data stays
cached in the memory until you close Magellan CCS Navigator.
If you change the device in some way, perhaps by installing new firmware or updating the license key
options on the device, click Refresh on the Parameters pane to read the list of parameters from the
device, irrespective of the version in the database, or the data that Magellan CCS Navigator has cached.
This new data remains cached in memory until the application is shut down, or until Refresh is clicked
again. If the refresh button is clicked for a different device instance that is of the same product ID, the
parameters are retrieved from that specific device. When Magellan CCS Navigator closes, the cached
data is not saved, even if different (provided that the version is the same as the one in the Database).
Copying Favorites Between Devices

Favorites for a device.
You can copy the favorites list from one device to another identical unit (for example, from one X75 to
another).
To copy and paste control panel display favorites for a device, follow these steps:
1. Right-click a device and select Copy Favorites.
2. Right-click on the second identical device and select Paste Favorites.
The parameter/alarm selection created previously will be replicated in the second device.
If the device you have chosen to paste favorites to is unsuitable -- for example, the devices are not
identical -- the Paste Favorites option will not be available.
SNMP Trap Configuration

SNMP traps are notification events issued by a managed device to the network management station (i.e.
Magellan CCS Navigator) when a significant event (not necessarily an outage, a fault, or a security
violation) occurs. A SNMP trap contains information about the event, which might be complex in nature,
combining many different bits of data into a single message.
A NAVIGATOR-SNMP license provides tools to interpret SNMP traps, so they can be treated, for
example, like alarm triggers and alarm clears. Within Magellan CCS Navigator, you can group traps into a
single trap group. Multiple trap groups can be used to represent a single device, or you can have one
group per device.
1. From the main menu, choose Tools > SNMP > Traps.
The SNMP Trap Configuration dialog box appears.
2. Click the New button to add a row to the Groups table.

New rows are added at the bottom of the list.
To delete a row, click the Delete button. The selected row will be deleted, and all associated data in
the Trap Definitions field will be removed as well.
3. Under Group Name, enter a descriptive name for the specific device for which you are defining
traps.
The Group Type is automatically filled in as "Enterprise."
4. Under Trap Definitions, click Add.
The Trap Definition dialog box opens.
5. Beside Trap Name, do either of the following:

 Type a name for the customized trap.
 Click MIB.
In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to a trap. Click OK and the name of this trap (alarm)
will fill in the Trap Name field. (If you choose an invalid object, an error message will appear.)
One or more rows will appear in the Trap Object IDs table.
6. If another trap should be associated with this trap, click Associate with existing trap and then
choose that trap from the drop-down menu.
This option could be used, for example, to associate the trap that creates an alarm and the trap that
clears the alarm. In the Parameters pane, one trap with two states would appear.
If you click Ignore Trap it will be ignored completely, except if there are rules that use that trap.
7. Click Add to add new rows to the Trap Object IDs table, or Delete to remove rows.
With a row selected, click MIB to open an SNMP MIB Browser, and then browse to a condition that
generates a trap. Click OK, and then click the variable or parameter, and its Object ID (OID) will fill
the selected row.
8. If you need to define rules to go with your traps, see Creating New Trap Rules (on page 628). If rules
already exist in the table, you can modify them using the following tools:
 Copy a rule by selecting it and then clicking Copy. An exact duplicate of the rule appears in the
List of Trap Rules table.
 If a rule already exists, modify it by selecting it and then clicking Modify. The dialog box that
opens is described in Creating New Trap Rules (on page 628).
 Delete a rule by selecting it and then clicking Delete.
9. Click OK to close the Trap Definition dialog box, and then OK to close the SNMP Trap Configuration
dialog box.
Creating New Trap Rules

1. Under Trap Rules on the Trap Definition dialog box, click Add.
The Trap Rule Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Enter a name for the rule. This name identifies the rule in subsequent dialog boxes.
3. If another rule should be associated with this rule, click Associate with existing rule and then
choose that rule from the drop-down box.
This option could be used, for example, to associate an alarm and the alarm that clears it. It would
mean that in the Parameters pane, only one instance of the trap would appear, and it would have
two states.
4. Under Rule Conditions, click New to add a new row.
To delete a row from this table, click Delete.
5. In the Variable field, select an object ID.
The drop-down box lists all the object IDs that are part of the trap definition.
6. If the device is not unique—not the only one that would use the associated MIB—enter its value in
the Instance ID field.
7. To complete the Value field, do either of the following:
 Enter a value.
 Click Value Expression, and then complete the Bitrate Expression Builder screen that appears.
See Creating a Value Expression (on page 629).
 Click MIB, and then choose a value from the MIB Browser that appears.
8. Under Rule Actions, click New, and then select an Action Name from the drop-down box that
appears in the new row.
9. To complete the Description field, do either of the following:
 Enter substrings and/or SNMP variable values.
 Click Description Expression, and then complete the Alarm Description Builder dialog box that
appears. See Building an Alarm Description (on page 630).
10. On the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box, enter a Trigger time (measured in milliseconds).
11. Click OK to close the Trap Rule Configuration dialog box.
Creating a Value Expression

Value expressions help specify a specific condition, where your SNMP device may combine many bits of
data into a single trap.
Figure 77: Bitwise Expression Builder Dialog Box
1. From the Bit box, choose a Bit that pertains to the rule you are defining.
2. Beside Value, enter the value that must be met, and then click Add.
The Expression field (read-only) updates.
3. Repeat as many times as required to define the value specific to the alarm or parameter from the
string.
You can remove the selected row by clicking Remove.
4. Click OK.
Building an Alarm Description

An alarm description provides information to help operators correct the alarm condition. Before using
the Alarm Description Builder, you need to know what data that the alarm sends to Magellan CCS
Navigator when it is triggered. You can retrieve this data by triggering the alarm.
Figure 78: Action Description Builder Dialog Box
The trap normally consists of a description, including a header and variables. The expression builder
operates in a linear fashion, starting at the beginning of the description and making changes in sequence
as it progresses towards the end of the description. So, the order in which you present your expression
is very important.
If, for example, you use a rule to remove the third word of the description, you cannot subsequently
remove the first word. If there is a later instance of the same word, you will remove that instead.
Otherwise, your instruction will be ignored.
1. Choose an option from the Conversion Rule field.
Options include the following:
Keep text up to a specific Keeps the text, starting from the previous action, up to and including the
string specified attribute
Add specific string Adds text at the spot where the previous action took place

Add remaining text Keeps all text until the next specified rule, or until the end of the alarm
expression if no other rule follows this rule
Remove text up to a Deletes the text between the previous action and the specified attribute (but
specific string not including the specified attribute)
Remove specific string Searches forward and removes the next instance of the specified attribute
2. Enter text or a variable in the Attributes field.

If no variable value or string token is specified, the entire string is displayed.
3. Under Description Entries, click Add.
The addition to your alarm description appears in the Expression String field.
4. Repeat steps 1–3 to add to your expression, keeping in mind that the change will always take place
at a point later in the description than the change you just made.
5. Click OK.
Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device

If you have configured traps using the SNMP Traps tool as described in SNMP Trap Configuration (on
page 626), the configured traps appear in the Alarms tab of the Parameters pane when the device
associated with them (the object with the same object ID) is selected in the Navigation pane’s Network
or Discovery folder.
For SNMP devices only, the Favorites dialog box has a MIB button. This button allows you to add
multiple Object ID (OID) root nodes to the favorites for this device. The Parameters pane will display all
Object IDs (OIDs) listed under these root SNMP nodes (in case the SNMP-managed device provides
access to other OIDs implemented in different branches of the SNMP MIB).
1. In the Parameters panel, click Favorites, and then click Configure.
2. Click MIB.
If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB that
contains this definition before proceeding. See Adding Missing MIBs (on page 632).
3. In the SNMP MIB Browser dialog box, browse to the specific Object (parameter) or Trap (alarm).
SNMP devices from third-party manufacturers appear according to their own hierarchy. See the
documentation for that SNMP-enabled device for more information.
4. Click OK.
The ID is added to the table in the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box.
5. Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box contains all the OIDs that you
would select as favorites for that SNMP device.
6. Click OK to close the SNMP Device Configuration dialog box, and then OK to close the Favorites
dialog box.
New variables appear in the Parameters tab of the Parameters pane, and new traps appear in the
Alarms tab of the Parameters pane.
Adding Missing MIBs

If the Object ID you want to include is not listed in the MIB tree, you need to add the MIB that contains
this definition.
1. In the Parameters panel, click Favorites > Configure > MIB > Load Mib.
The SNMP Options dialog box opens.
2. For each SNMP-enabled device you want to control, click Add, and then browse to the location of
the MIB file for that device.
3. Select each MIB file, and then click Open.
4. Ensure that checks appear beside the MIBs that you have just added to the MIB Files to Load list.
5. Click OK.
Creating Customized Pages

After discovering CCS-P and SNMP devices, you can create new pages.
The Navigator New Page Wizard opens, and shows the format options for the new page, including a
preview of the selected layout option.
2. On the General tab, click Blank Page, and then click OK.
3. Drag items from the Parameters panel and drop them on the Graphical Navigation page.
To select a range of parameters, hold down the SHIFT button on your keyboard while clicking the first
and last parameters or alarms in the range.
To select multiple parameters or alarms that are not in a sequence, hold down the CTRL button on your
keyboard while clicking each parameter or alarm you want to select.
Any device (including devices icons, parameters, and alarms) that is used on a page has to exist on the
navigation tree for the page to work properly.
Each parameter on a page consists of two elements: the parameter’s label, and its control. In Build
mode, you can modify these elements. See Editing the Elements of a Parameter or Alarm (on page 634).
Each alarm on a page consists of two elements: the alarm’s label, and a status indicator.
Editing the Elements of a Parameter or Alarm

When a parameter or alarm is added to a Graphical Navigation page, it consists of two elements, the
control and its label. Both of these elements can be edited.
To edit a label, follow these steps:

1. Right-click on the label and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Choose the Text tab, and then make any changes.
See Graphical Navigation Page Creation (on page 372) for more information.
To edit a control, follow these steps:

1. Right-click on the control and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
2. Choose the Rules tab, and then edit the rules assigned to the control element of the parameter or
alarm.
This is described in Editing the Rules on a Control (on page 635).
When you drag and drop a parameter or alarm onto a page, it is automatically assigned rules that make
that parameter or alarm work to its default configuration. In some circumstances, you may want to
modify the rules assigned to a parameter, for example to limit the available range for a slider when
certain operators are controlling a device.
Actions and events that are specific to Magellan CCS Navigator parameters and alarms include the
following:
Events Specific to Parameters and Alarms
Event Function Reference
On Device Change Triggers an action when the state of the Editing an On Device Change Event
specified CCS device changes (on page 637)
On Graphical Triggers an action when the state of the Editing an On Graphical Object
Object State specified device (which can be either a CCS-P State Change Event (on page 638)
Change device or an SNMP device) changes
Actions for Parameters and Alarms
Action Function Reference
Get Device Value Select a device and parameters to retrieve Editing a Get Device Values Action
(on page 639)
Set Parameter Select a device and a parameter to set, and the Editing a Set Device Values Action
Value value to set it to (on page 640)
Editing the Rules on a Control

To edit the rules assigned to a control, which can apply to a parameter, alarm, or SNMP trap on a
Graphical Navigation page, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on the control in a Graphical Navigation page, and then choose Properties from the
shortcut menu.
2. Select the Rules tab.
Figure 79: Default Rules For a Parameter Control
For all controls, this tab will already contain several rules.
3. Make your changes to the rules.
Changes include the following:
 Adding new events and actions
 Editing events and actions by clicking the Condition and Action Properties buttons and filling out
the dialog boxes they open
 Deleting entire rules
See Defining Rules (on page 429).
4. Close the Object Properties dialog box by clicking the X in the top right corner.
If you switch from Magellan CCS Navigator to another program (perhaps to check incoming email) and
then return, if there are no errors on the Object Properties dialog box and it is not pinned to the desktop
(the icon in the top left corner of the dialog box), the dialog box closes, saving your changes.
You will not be able to close the Object Properties dialog box until all rules are complete. This includes
Condition and Action properties. Delete any rows that you do not want to add events and actions to.
Editing an On Device Change Event

This event is triggered when the status of a parameter or alarm for a device changes. This event is only
available for CCS-P devices. You can open this dialog box by clicking the Condition button when On
Device Change is the selected event in the Rules tab of the Properties dialog box.
Figure 80: On Device Change Dialog Box
By default, the Device ID will be the module the parameter or alarm is for.
1. Click Select to browse for a different module in an interface similar to the Navigation pane.
2. Select an option from the Event Type box.
Depending on the Event Type you select, the Parameter box has the following options:
Table 115: Actions for On Device Change Events

Event Type Engine Properties Parameter Options
Alarm Acknowledge [EP] Device ID The Parameter box updates to list all
Change [EP] Alarm ID the available alarm options
[EP] Alarm Acknowledge Value
Alarm Enable Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Enable Value
Alarm Level Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Level Value
Alarm Priority Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Priority Value
Alarm Trigger Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Alarm ID
[EP] Alarm Trigger Value
Event Type Engine Properties Parameter Options

Parameter Enumeration [EP] Device ID The Parameter box updates to list all
Values Change [EP] Parameter ID the available parameter options
[EP] Parameter Enumeration Value
[EP] Parameter Display Value
Parameter Precision [EP] Device ID
Change [EP] Parameter ID
[EP] Parameter Precision Value
Parameter Range Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter ID
[EP] Parameter Min Value
[EP] Parameter Max Value
Parameter State Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter ID
EP] Parameter Enabled State
Parameter Stringlist [EP] Device ID
Change [EP] Parameter ID
[EP] Parameter String Value
Parameter Units Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter ID
[EP] Parameter Units Value
Parameter Value Change [EP] Device ID
[EP] Parameter ID
[EP] Parameter Value
3. Choose a parameter or alarm from the Parameter box.
4. Beside Value, choose Equals, Not Equals, or Any Value.
5. For Equals or Not Equals, from the next box to the right, choose Value or Property.
 If you choose Value, then enter a value.
 If you choose Property, then choose a property from the drop-down box to the right of the
Property field.
Editing an On Graphical Object State Change Event

There are no event conditions for an On Graphical Object State Change event.
Editing a Set Graphical Object State Action

You can use this action to set additional object enable/disable states (other than User access rights) and
device network status, which by default are provided by the "On Graphical Object State Change" event.
1. Beside User Mandated Object State, choose a state for your graphical object.
Options include <No change>, Enabled, Disabled, and Read Only.
2. Beside Parameter/Alarm Access, choose from <No change>, No Access, Read/Write, and Read
Only.
The Get Object State option takes into account a device’s access rights and status. The device is defined
on the Object tab of the Object Properties dialog box.
Editing a Get Device Values Action

This action retrieves the current status of a parameter or alarm for a device.
By default, the Device ID is the module that the parameter or alarm is for.
2. From the Action Type box, select an option:
Depending on the option you choose, the contents of the Parameter box will contain different
items, as described below.
Table 116: Action Type Options for the Get Device Values Action
Action Type Parameter Options
Get Alarm Values The Parameter box lists all the device’s alarm options
Get Parameter Values The Parameter box lists all the device’s parameter options
3. Choose an option from the Parameter box.
The Value fields will not update.
4. Click OK to close the Action Property Dialog - Get Device Values dialog box.
Editing a Set Device Values Action

This action changes the value of a parameter or alarm on a device.
By default, the Device ID is the module that the parameter or alarm is for.
2. Choose the effect you want to cause from the Action Type box.
Depending on the Action Type you select, the Parameter box has the following options:
Action Type Parameter Options
Set Alarm Acknowledge The Parameter box lists all the device’s alarm options
Set Alarm Clear
Set Alarm Enable
Set Alarm Priority
Set Alarm Trigger
Adjust Parameter Value The Parameter box lists all the device’s parameter options
Set Parameter Value
3. Choose a parameter or alarm from the Parameter box.

4. In the Value box, choose Value or Property.
 If you chose Value, enter the value in the unlabeled field to the right of the box.
 If you chose Property, select an item from the drop-down box to the right of the Value box.
6. Click OK to close the Action Property Dialog - Set Device Value dialog box.
Custom Control Views

When you double-click on a device in the Navigation pane in Control mode, by default Magellan CCS
Navigator opens a Control dialog box. To configure Magellan CCS Navigator to open a Navigator page
instead, follow these steps:
1. Right-click on a device, and then select Properties from the context menu that appears.
3. From the Control dialog box drop-down box, choose Custom.

4. Click Browse.
5. Click a row in the Select Page table, and then click Open.
The Navigation Properties dialog box updates to indicate the name of the page that opens when you
click on this device in Control mode, in the Navigation pane, and on icons associated with this device in
Chapter 36
Using Customized Pages

To use pages and panels that include Imagine Communications or third-party parameters and alarms
created using NAVIGATOR-INT tools, only a NAVIGATOR-CLI license is required. Before attempting to
view SNMP objects and traps, ensure that the device is configured to send traps to the Magellan CCS
Navigator PC. See Setting SNMP Options (on page 86) for more information.

Displaying Customized Pages ................................................................. 643
Parameter Controls ................................................................................ 645
Displaying Customized Pages

If you have just created a page or panel in Build mode (see Creating Customized Pages (on page 633))
and you switch to Control mode, the panel opens.
If you have used Magellan CCS Navigator previously and left a panel open when you closed Magellan
CCS Navigator, by default the panel will open when you restart the software.
To open a panel if you have previously closed the panel:

1. From the main menu, choose File > Open.
2. Browse to the location of your panel file.
3. Click Open.
Your panel opens.
Figure 81: Page or Panel in Full Screen Mode
From the main menu, select View > Full Screen to switch to full screen mode.
To exit full screen mode, click Exit FullScreen Mode.
In Build mode, you can configure whether Magellan CCS Navigator opens a Control dialog box or a
Navigation page when you click on a specific device in Control mode. To force Magellan CCS Navigator to
open the non-default option when in Control mode, you must return to Build mode and change it there.
See Custom Control Views (on page 641).
Parameter Controls
Both CCS-P parameters and SNMP variables can appear on pages created by Magellan CCS Navigator
with a NAVIGATOR-INT license key.
Figure 82: Parameters on a Navigator Page in Control Mode
Available controls fall into the following categories:

• Sliders - Drag the slider to increase or decrease its value. The value on the device is changed when you
release the control.
• Menus - Click the drop-down menu to open a list of options.
• Buttons - Added to a panel by the person who created it, buttons can have a wide variety of functions.
They can lead to other pages and controls for other devices, or other aspects of the same device.
Unavailable controls will be dimmed. Parameters can be unavailable for a variety of reasons.
• You may not have control access rights to a device. To view your access rights to a device:
a. Right-click on the device in the Navigation pane.
b. Choose Properties, and then click on the Device tab.
If you have control privileges for the device, Access Rights will show Enabled.
• The device may be off-line. Devices can be off-line because they are powered down, or because the
network connection is not available.
• The device may be undergoing a state change. If firmware is being uploaded to the device, or if it is in
the process of restarting, wait three to four minutes and then access the device again.
• The IP address of the device may have been changed. If you have access to Build mode, you can
attempt to rediscover the device.
Any device (including devices icons, parameters, and alarms) that is used on a page has to exist on the
navigation tree for the page to work properly.
Feedback parameters provide information about the state of the device that is being controlled and
monitored.
Imagine Communications and third-party alarm indicators indicate whether the alarm is triggered or
cleared. If the device that is connected to the alarm is not online or available to send alarms, this can be
an alarm in itself.
Figure 83: Alarms on a Navigator Page
Software User License and Warranty

Agreement
License
Communications.

repairs, or alterations made by the customer or another party or if the Imagine Communications serial
number has been removed or defaced.
performance.
communication.
NET SNMP License

Various copyrights apply to this package, listed in various separate parts below. Please make sure that
you read all the parts.
---- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright notice: (BSD like) -----
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California
All Rights Reserved
Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that
both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the
name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity
pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission.
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD
TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO
EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL,
INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS
ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
---- Part 2: Networks Associates Technology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc
• Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written
permission.
---- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd.
• The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior written permission.
THEORY OF LIABILITY,WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
---- Part 4: Sun Microsystems, Inc. copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright © 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All
rights reserved.
Use is subject to license terms below.

This distribution may include materials developed by third parties.
Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun
Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries.
• Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
---- Part 5: Sparta, Inc copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2003-2008, Sparta, Inc
• Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
---- Part 6: Cisco/BUPTNIC copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network
Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications.
• Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of
their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission.
---- Part 7: Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG copyright notice (BSD) -----
Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003
oss@fabasoft.com
Author: Bernhard Penz
• The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names
may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
User's Guide Volume 6: Routing Components
Volume 6: Routing Components

In this section:
Preface ................................................................................................... 654
Introduction to Routing Components .................................................... 656
Discovering Routing Devices .................................................................. 660
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems ........................................... 664
Router Page and Panel Construction ..................................................... 695
Logical Database Setup .......................................................................... 729
Physical Device Setup............................................................................. 847
Configuring Platinum Frames................................................................. 848
Configuring Panacea Frames.................................................................. 917
Configuring Integrator Frames............................................................... 961
Configuring Legacy Frames .................................................................... 990
Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways..................................................... 992
Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) Panels ........................... 1011
Configuring RCPp Panels ..................................................................... 1044
Configuring the Web Router Application............................................. 1087
Configuring IP3 ..................................................................................... 1099
Configuring PVX ................................................................................... 1115
Basic Routing System Control .............................................................. 1117
Grid and Bus Panel Operation.............................................................. 1123
Matrix Panel Operation........................................................................ 1134
Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation ............................. 1142
Matrix Partitioning ............................................................................... 1145
Configuring Control Panel Buttons ...................................................... 1153
Troubleshooting and FAQ .................................................................... 1183
Function Mapping: Routermapper to Navigator ................................. 1187
Preface
Manual Information
Purpose
CCS Navigator User Manual: Volume 6: Routing Configuration Guide is a companion guide to CCS
Navigator: Advanced Graphical Navigation Application.
This manual outlines how to use Navigator’s routing configuration capability. For information on the
basic tools and interface of CCS Navigator, please refer to Interface Overview (on page 57).
Audience
and/or operation of routers, router control panels, web routing, and Edge protocol gateways.
Revision History
A CCS Navigator 4.5 May 2009
B CCS Navigator 4.6 November 2009
C CCS Navigator 4.6.1 May 2010
D CCS Navigator 4.7.1 July 2011
E CCS Navigator 4.8 April 2012
F CCS Navigator 4.9 July 2012

The documentation for your product is available as an Adobe Acrobat PDF file downloadable from our
website. The CCS Navigator Online Help is an electronic document integrated into the software. While
Writing Conventions
Term or
Description
Convention
Bold Indicates dialog boxes, property sheets, fields, buttons, check boxes, list boxes, combo
boxes, menus, submenus, windows, lists, and selection names
Italics Indicates E-mail addresses, the names of books or publications, and the first instances
CAPS Indicates a specific key on the keyboard, such as ENTER, TAB, CTRL, ALT, or DELETE
Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or something you
type into a field
hyperlink Indicates a jump to another location within the electronic document or elsewhere

Contacting Us
If you have questions about this or other Imagine Communications products, contact us for technical
support and product information.
Technical Support
We are committed to providing round-the-clock, 24-hour service to our customers around the world.
Visit our website for information on how to contact the Customer Service team in your geographical
region.
Product Information
If you would like the latest product information or documentation, contact your dealer or our Sales
Department; or, visit our website for more information.
Chapter 37
Introduction to Routing Components

Developing a Magellan CCS Navigator routing system is a multi-step process that requires you to do the
following:
• Discover the devices
Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP addresses of
devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. See Discovering Routing Devices
(on page 660); information on how the Discovery process operates is covered in CCS Device
Discovery (on page 99).
• Create a routing system
See Creating a Routing System (on page 665).
• Set up the logical database
A logical database can be described as the overall "picture" of the entire routing system. A database
includes one or more levels, as well as a number of logical sources and logical destinations. See
Logical Database Setup (on page 729).
• Set up the physical devices (routers, control panels, Edge, web routers)
Imagine Communications router frames and control hardware can be added to the database by
discovering devices or by polling the control network for installed devices. See Physical Device Setup
(on page 847).
• Control the devices
See Basic Routing System Control (on page 1117).
The chapters in this book are laid out in this same basic order. Each process step is introduced by a
section marker that briefly describes the functions of that process step. The chapters that follow each
section marker provide detailed information on how to fulfill each function.
Experienced RouterMapper users will find virtually all of the same functions and features remapped
within Magellan CCS Navigator. See Function Mapping: Routermapper to Navigator (on page 1187).
Router Node Functionality

This table describes what actions will take place when you are in Build or Control mode when setting up
your routing system.
NAVIGATION
BUILD MODE CONTROL MODE
WINDOW
Can create routing systems
Poll whole system (right click > Poll)

Download whole system (right click >
Download)
Set communcation (right click >
Properties)
Double-click launches Navigator

Double click launches Database Editor
Category Index control
In Control Mode double clicking will

Created by default when creating a new
launch the appropriate Routing Control
configuration
(Matrix/MB/SB) with default options (all
(In Build mode they do nothing)
sources and destinations assigned)
Double clicking on Salvo folder launches Double clicking on Salvo folder launches
Salvo Editor to create Salvo Editor to view
Will show status – Active/Inactive

Selects the salvo in Salvo Editor Can right-click > Execute to take salvo
Double clicking on actual device Nodes

will launch the configuration of that
device
Double clicking on actual module’s

nodes will launch their configuration
window (if available) Double clicking will launch the CCSP
control or other control (like P-HSCQ if
available)
Double clicking on actual device nodes

will launch the configuration of that
device
Double clicking will launch the Wizard to Double clicking will launch the custom
configure this software panel routing panel created
Double clicking launches routing Double clicking launches DRFM to

configuration tool to configure tielines control tielines
Figure 84: Quick Reference Chart: Routing System Node Functionality
Routing Operations Tools

The following operation tools are available for router databases. The tools you have available differ,
depending on the stage of routing system development. Unavailable tools are greyed out and not
selectable.
Router Shortcut Menus

Shortcut menus contain a list of options relevant to a selected object, a current dialog box, or a current
operational mode. For routing operations, shortcut menu selections are available by selecting an object,
and then right-clicking the mouse.
Selections for routing operations only are shown below. See Using the Graphical Navigation Context
Menus (on page 499) for information about other selections.
Some options may be unavailable in the context imposed by the active operational mode, or the
selected item.
Routing Operations Shortcut Menu Selections
Command Functions
Configuration This selection launches the routing configuration utility tool for the selected object. See
the pertinent configuration and editing chapters for specific objects (Platinum, Panacea,
Integrator, control panels, Edge) for more information.
Poll This selection is used to query the control system for any programmable devices that may
be present. Polling obtains information about the current configuration of each physical
device, and compares it to the information found in the database to determine if the
database information matches the actual configuration.See Polling Devices (on page 688)
Download This selection is used to download information about a physical device so that a new
configuration can take effect. See Downloading Device Definitions (on page 693) for more
information.
Reload This selection is used to refresh the contents of the routing system from the database.
Rediscover This selection is used to rediscover a device or routing system that had been discovered
previously.
Backup This selection is used to make copies of data; these additional copies may be used to
restore the original if a data loss event occurs. See Creating a Router Database Backup (on
Restore This selection is used to return data from a backup to a designated location. See Restoring
a Router Database (on page 687) for more information.
Command Functions
Create > This selection is used to show the Create submenu. Submenu selections allow you to add
and configure selected parts of a routing system, such as router frames, hardware and
software and panels, Edge frames, salvos, and tie lines. See Physical Device Setup (on
page 847).
Rename This selection is used to change the name of the selected control system.
Chapter 38
Discovering Routing Devices

Discovery is the process by which Magellan CCS Navigator finds and connects to the IP addresses of
devices so that you can access the devices remotely from the PC. You will initially use the Discovery tool
to find the devices on your network. Later, you may want to run a full or partial discovery when you
make changes to your network.
The information in this section is based in the supposition that you have a working knowledge of
Magellan CCS Navigator and have used its other capabilities, so the discussion concentrates only on
those processes that are specific to routing components. If you are not familiar with the Discovery
process, please refer to CCS Device Discovery (on page 99) before you continue the Discovery process.
Setting Router Discovery Options

To set the discovery options, complete these steps:
2. Select and complete the Hosts tab. See Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery (on page
660).
3. Select and complete the Save tab. See Setting Discovery Save Options (on page 663).
4. Click OK to save the discovery options.
Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery

1. Set Magellan CCS Navigator to Build mode: From the main menu, select File > Operational Mode >
Build. If your status bar is open, a yellow Build indicator appears in the bottom right corner of the
Magellan CCS Navigator screen.
2. Click Options on the Discovery Window.
The Hosts tab of the Discovery Options box opens.
3. Check the Start Options selections as appropriate, and then do one or both of the following:
 To add the default IP addresses, click Add Default and ensure that the check box to the left of IP
address 192.168.100.250 and/or 192.168.100.251 is enabled. You will typically use the default
device IP addresses—192.168.100.251 for control panels and 192.168.100.250 for all other
devices—to configure a newly purchased device connected to the PC on the same Ethernet hub
or through an Ethernet crossover cable.
If you are unsure of the IPs of your devices or have not set them up, enable the scanning of MAC
addresses for a quicker discovery.
 To add other IP addresses, click Add, and then, in the Add Host dialog box that opens, add the IP
address of a device available for discovery.
4. Under Select Products for Discovery, click the check boxes that correspond to your preferences. By
default the first item is checked.
 The X75, NEO...Platinum... selection includes CCS-enabled devices. Use this selection to
discover a Platinum router.
 The Routing Devices selection includes X-Y enabled devices such as Panacea, Integrator, Edge,
ABA and programmable panels, and so forth
5. If you select the first check box, its Options button is enabled. (If you do not select this check box,
proceed to step 6.) To change the communication settings, click Options.
The Communication Settings dialog box opens. Choose one of the following settings:
Option Function
Broadcast (default) Communicates with devices that are on the same subnet as the CCS
application
Point-to-Point Communicates with devices that are on a different subnet and cannot be
discovered using the Broadcast option
Authentication Not currently implemented
Click OK to save the selection and return to the Add Host box.
6. If you select the second check box, its Options button is enabled. (you do not select this check box,
proceed to step 7.) To change the router settings, click Options.
The Router Discovery Settings box opens. Choose one of the following settings:
Option Function
Full Discovery Discovers all routing devices, including such legacy frames as XPlus and
XPRESS
Express Discover only later-model devices such as Panacea or Integrator. This
selection takes less time to process, but will not include your complete
routing system if it contains legacy devices.
7. If you select the third check box, its Options button is enabled. (you do not select this check box,
proceed to step 8.) To change the SNMP information settings, click Options.
The SNMP Information box opens. Choose one of the following settings:
Option Function
Read Community Enter the name here if it differs from the displayed default value
Port Enter a number from 0 to 65535; the default port is 161
Timeout Desired time period (in seconds) before a discovery gives up on finding
the SNMP device; the time period can range from 1 to 1000 seconds
Retries Number of times to try to discover devices if the initial attempt fails; the
number of retries if the discovery fails can range from 1 to 1000
8. If you selected the fourth check box, click the Options button to the right of the check box. (you do
not select this check box, proceed to step 9.) To change the HTTP port values, click Options.
The HTTP Port(s) box opens. Verify the port number in the corresponding text box, or change it if
desired.
9. If desired, select the last two items, and then click OK to close the Add Host dialog box.
Setting Discovery Save Options

1. Click on the Save tab to review the options about how the results of your discovery will be placed in
the Navigation Window pane’s Discovery folder. You can
 Replace or append the previous contents of the Discovery folder
 Define the naming conventions for discovered devices
For more detailed information about this function, see Setting Discovery Save Options (on page
106).
2. Click OK to close the Discovery Options window.
Running a Discovery for a Router

1. Click Start on the Discovery Window button bar.
IDs for all responding devices in the Status box of the Discovery Window.
2. When the discovery is complete, click Save on the Discovery Window button bar to transfer the
discovery results to the Discovery folder in the Navigation Window pane.
For more detailed information about this function, see Running a Discovery (on page 108).
Figure 85: Routing System Saved in the Discovery Window
You are now ready to set up a routing system. Proceed to the section Creating and Maintaining Routing
Systems (on page 664).
Chapter 39
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems

A Routing System is a set of interconnected devices that direct signals from a set of sources to a set of
destinations. When a routing system is organized into a configuration, it can be controlled through a
routing view.
Navigator Server links directly to routing configuration utility, where you can define logical routing views
containing sources, destinations, and switching levels. You can also import configurations from existing
RouterMapper databases.
A router database is shared among all users within the system. Adding a new router configuration makes
this configuration available to all users. Replacing or deleting a configuration affects all users who are
currently making use of that configuration (for example, using it in Navigator pages). Be careful when
replacing or deleting a router configuration.
• See Creating a Routing System (on page 665) for information about creating a routing system via
discovery or manually.
• See Router Page and Panel Construction (on page 695) for information about creating router pages
and software panel definitions.
• See Routing System Maintenance (on page 680) for information about operational functions available
for database maintenance.
Chapter 40
Creating a Routing System

To connect a router with Magellan CCS Navigator, the PC must be connected to a serial port or a
network port in the routing system. This can be done using a CCS Router Gateway or by connecting
directly to the Ethernet port of the router.
To create a routing system, you can discover the router using Magellan CCS Navigator’s discovery tools
or you can create a system manually, configuring the matrix and partition settings. If you create the
system manually, all the cards will be missing.
A router database is shared among all users within the system. Adding a new router configuration makes
this configuration available to all users. Replacing or deleting a configuration affects all users who are
currently making use of that configuration (for example, using it in Magellan CCS Navigator pages). Be
careful when replacing or deleting a router configuration.
Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can create a routing system.
Using the Routers Folder of a Navigation Pane

The Routers folder of the Navigation pane contains nodes and folders for configuration, control, and
monitoring of your entire routing environment. The Routers folder and the folder components are
shown in the figure and table below.
Table 117: Components of a Routers Folder

Folder Function
Control Views Contains a Routing View icon; may contain more than one Routing View if you had a
previous version of Magellan CCS Navigator and created multiple routing views within
a routing system
Routers Contains one icon for each device used within a routing system, including router
frames, control panels and gateways
Control panels Can contain the following:
• Software Control Panels folder with links for matrix panel, multi bus panel, and so
on
• Edge Devices folder that contains Edge protocol gateways
• Control Panels folder containing hardware routing panels
Salvos Lists available salvos, if a routing system has salvos defined
Creating a Routing System via Discovery

1. Make sure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
2. Discover your devices as described in the Discovering Routing Devices (on page 660) section.
The new routing group selection appears under the Discovery folder in the Navigation pane.
3. Select the new routing group selection name, and then drag-and-drop it onto the Router folders.
The Create Routing System shortcut menu opens.
4. In the Routing System Name field, enter a name for the routing system, and then click OK.
The new routing system appears under the Routers folder in the Navigation pane. (This may take a
few seconds.)
5. Expand the Discovery folder selection, and then select the routing group that was just discovered.
6. Drag-and-drop the routing group frame selection into the new routing system folder.
When an alert box asks you to confirm the process, click Yes.
The discovered routing group is copied into the new routing system folder.
7. Collapse the Discovery folder (this avoids possible confusion between the different folder
selections).
8. Expand the Routers folder and newly-created routing system folder to display a series of subfolders.
Expand the subfolder titled Routers to see the routing group selection.
9. Right-click on the routing group selection name, and then click Poll.
Magellan CCS Navigator queries all downloadable devices connected to the control system to
determine which devices exist, and whether the configuration of each is up-to-date with respect to
the database.
If desired, you can manually add individual components to the routing system. See Manually Adding
Components to a Routing System (on page 668) for more information.
10. When the Poll is complete, expand the Control views folder, and then double-click the new routing
system name.
A series of tabs with logical database configuration information become available. You may accept
the configuration information as it appears, or you can change the configuration as desired. See the
Logical Database Setup (on page 729) section for more information about configuring the logical
database.
11. Double-click the newly-polled routing group selection.
A series of tabs with hardware configuration information pertinent to the router type become available.
You may accept the configuration information as it appears, or you can change the configuration as
desired. See the Physical Device Setup (on page 847) section for more information about configuring the
different device types.
Creating a New Routing System

1. Make sure that Magellan CCS Navigator is in Build mode.
2. Right click on Routers in the Navigation pane, and then select Create > Routing System from the
context menu.
The New Routing System Configuration dialog box opens.
3. In the Name field, enter a name for the routing system.

This is the name that will appear in the Navigation window.
4. Under Create Options, choose one of the following:
 Start from a blank configuration - This selection allows you to designate a new routing system,
and then populate it manually or with a system poll.
 Use an existing RouterMapper DA4 file or a routing system backup file - This selection allows
you to use an existing RouterMapper database (*.DA4) or a routing system backup file (*.XML)
to create a routing system.
Click the browse button to open a window, where you can choose the file to load.
 Use a configuration from a remote routing server - enter the IP and login information for the
device which has had the routing system backed up to it
5. (Blank system option only) You may place a check beside Perform System Poll to preform a poll of a
specific port or IP when creating the system.
In the Connection field, choose Serial or TCP/IP.
 If you select Serial, enter the comm port and baud rate.
 If you select TCP/IP, enter an IP address.
6. Click OK.
7. Expand the Control views folder, and then double-click the new routing system name.
A series of tabs with logical database configuration information become available. You can set up
the configuration as desired. See the Logical Database Setup (on page 729) section for more
information about configuring the logical database.
8. You can manually add devices to your new router system as described in Manually Adding
Components to a Routing System (on page 668).
Manually Adding Components to a Routing System

1. Right click on the name of the newly-created routing system in the Navigation pane, and then select
Create >.
A shortcut menu opens.
Figure 86: Create Shortcut Menu Selections
Adding a Router Frame

1. Choose Router Frame... from the context menu.
The Select Router Type dialog box opens.
2. Choose one of the following selections:
 For a Platinum router, click the Platinum icon, and then follow the configuration steps provided
in Configuring Platinum Frames (on page 848).
 For a Panacea router, click the Panacea icon, and then follow the configuration steps provided in
Configuring Panacea Frames (on page 917).
 For a combiner system, click the Combiner System icon, and then follow the configuration steps
provided in Adding Combiner Systems (on page 979).
 For an Integrator router, click the Integrator icon, and then follow the configuration steps
provided in Configuring Integrator Frames (on page 961).
 For any of the remaining router selections, click the corresponding icon, and then follow the
configuration steps provided in Configuring Legacy Frames (on page 990).
Adding an Edge Frame

1. Choose Edge Frame... from the context menu.
The Add Edge dialog box opens.
2. Follow the configuration steps provided in Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways (on page 992).
Adding a Hardware Routing Panel

1. Choose Hardware Routing Panel... from the context menu.
2. The Add Panels dialog box opens.
 For an Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) panel, follow the configuration steps provided in
Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA) Panels (on page 1011).
The RCP-ABA (1RU) is available in these models: the XY, the SB, and the AFV/MB models. The
RCP-ABA (2RU) is available in these models: the XY, the SB, and the MB models. These panels
differ in appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration procedures.
 For a programmable panel, follow the configuration steps provided in Configuring RCPp Panels
(on page 1044).
Programmable panels (1RU) are available in these models: 4×1, 4×4, 8×1, 8×8, 16×1, 16×1 LCD (RCP-
IDe), 16×4, 16×8, 16×16, 32×1, 32×8, and 32×8CQp. These panels differ in appearance and functionality,
but use similar configuration procedures.
Configuration information for RCP-16PB, RCP-48PB, RCP-96PB, RCP-32PB-OLED, RCP-16LCD, RCP-32LCD,

RCP-24LCD-OLED is provided in their respective installation and operation manuals.
Programmable panels (2RU) are available in these models: 16×16 LCD (RCP-IDe), 32×1 LCD (RCP-IDe),
32×4, 32×32, 32×32 LCD (RCP-IDe), 64×1, 64×1 LCD (RCP-IDe). These panels differ in appearance and
functionality, but use similar configuration procedures.
Configuration information for RCP-48LCD-OLED, RCP-64LCD, RCP-64PB-OLED is provided in their

respective installation and operation manuals.
Adding a Software Routing Panel

1. Choose Software Routing Panel... from the context menu.
2. A shortcut menu opens.
 For a classic matrix software panel, choose the Matrix Classic... selection, and then follow the
configuration steps provided in Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels (on page
709).
 To monitor and control the status of an entire router system from a single screen, choose the
Matrix Panel... selection, and then follow the configuration steps provided in Creating Grid,
Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels (on page 709).
 To select any number of destinations and then assign a source; choose the Multi-Bus Panel...
selection, and then follow the configuration steps provided in Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi
Bus and Matrix Panels (on page 709).
 To assign a source to a single pre-determined destination, choose the Single-Bus Panel...
selection, and then follow the configuration steps provided in Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi
Adding a Routing Salvo

1. Choose Routing Salvo.... from the context menu.
The Salvo Editor dialog box opens as shown in Creating a Salvo (on page 671).
2. Follow the configuration steps provided in Working With Salvos (on page 671).
Adding a Routing Tie-Line

1. Choose Routing Tie-Lines.... from the context menu.
The TieLine Configuration dialog box opens.
2. Follow the configuration steps provided in Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800).
Editing Components of a Routing System

Only an Administrator user of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can edit components of a Routing
System. Magellan CCS Navigator must be in Build mode.
To edit components of a routing system that has already been created, click on an item in the Navigation
pane:
• If you are an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, click on a Routing View node.
The logical configuration opens. Go to the appropriate section of this volume, and then follow the
steps outlined to make any changes. See the Logical Database Setup (on page 729) section for more
• Click on a Software control panel view. The corresponding configuration window opens. Go to the
appropriate section of this volume, and then follow the steps outlined to make any changes. See
Router Page and Panel Construction (on page 695).
The default panels cannot be configured.
• Click on a router frame icon or module. The corresponding configuration window opens. Go to the
appropriate section of this volume, and then follow the steps outlined to make any changes. See the
Physical Device Setup (on page 847) section for more information about configuring the different
device types.
• Click on a Salvo folder to trigger the Salvo Editor.

The Salvo Editor shows the list of available salvos, and if you click on a specific salvo, the Salvo
Editor opens for that salvo (see Working With Salvos (on page 671)). Administrator and General
users can create and edit salvos.
• Click on the Tieline node to will open the tieline configuration window. (See Managing Enhanced
Tielines (on page 800) for more information.)
Working With Salvos

All salvos associated with a router appear in that router’s Salvos folder.
Figure 87: Routers Section of the Navigation Pane
You can create and edit salvos using Magellan CCS Navigator’s Salvo Editor. Salvos that have been
created in the RouterMapper can be imported into Magellan CCS Navigator for use on Routing panels.
• Creating a Salvo (on page 671)
• Editing Salvos (on page 674)
The Salvo Editor is available in both Build and Control mode, though some features are not available in
Build mode.
Creating a Salvo
Salvos can be created by Administrator and General users of Magellan CCS Navigator Servers.
To add a salvo, follow these steps:

1. Right click on Router Systems > Salvo in the Navigation pane and select Create > Routing Salvo....
from the context menu.
The Salvo Editor opens.
2. Click New.
The Rename Salvo dialog box opens.
3. Type a new name.

4. (Optional) Place a check beside Enhanced Salvo.
An enhanced salvo can execute on locked or protected sources and destinations, based on the
unlock option you choose:
 No Force Unlock—The salvo will override protected sources and destinations only.
 Force Unlock current user destinations—The salvo will override sources and destinations locked
by the same user that executes the salvo.
 Force Unlock all users’ locked destinations—The salvo will override sources and destinations
locked by any user.
Enhanced salvos must be published to the applicable device before they can be executed. Device
firmware must be Platinum 4.3, Panacea 4.1, and Magellan 1.3 or higher to execute an enhanced
salvo. Devices with firmware older than the specified will ignore enhanced salvos.
To determine whether a salvo is normal or enhanced, click SalvoIndex Info. The dialog box that
opens also lists the unique index number assigned to each salvo.
5. Click OK to save the name and close the window.
Your salvo appears in the list at the left of the screen.
The following list describes the various buttons surrounding the list of salvos in the Salvo Editor
window:
Salvo Menu Buttons
Button Function
Rename Opens a window to change the currently selected salvo’s display title
Save Saves changes to the currently selected salvo
Undo Removes the last-made change to the currently selected salvo
Delete Removes the currently selected salvo from the list
New Adds a new salvo to the list
Save All Saves the state of all salvos in the list
Undo All Reverts all salvos back to their saved status
Delete All Removes all salvos from the list
Responder Defines the router for enhanced salvos; select the router from the drop-down menu
You can now use the salvo editing tools to create your salvo.
6. When you are done creating salvos, click Publish to Devices.
A dialog box opens:
7. From the upper portion of the screen, choose the devices you want to send the salvos and all other
logical information to, and then click Start Transfer.
Salvos and other logical information, including the names.txt files, is sent to applicable devices in the
routing system.
Publish is an Ethernet-only operation. Most legacy devices do not support the Publish feature in
Magellan CCS Navigator. Other devices may require a software upgrade. Platinum frames require PT-RES
version V4.1 or higher, and Panacea frames with enhanced resource cards require V4.0 or higher in
order to properly support the publish feature. Magellan control panels support publish with any version.
Editing Salvos
To edit a salvo, follow these steps:
1. Use one of the following methods to select the salvo you want to edit:
 Double click on the Salvo folder in the Navigation pane to open a list a of all salvos. On this list
you can select a salvo and click OK to open it in the Salvo Edit dialog box.
 Double click on a salvo in the Salvo folder to open that salvo in the Salvo Edit dialog box.
2. Create crosspoints on the grid by clicking at intersections between Inputs and Destinations.
The Level Legend in the top right corner of the screen contains one colored entry for each level in
the routing system. As you click on the grid to create crosspoints, all buttons that are colored are
created on the grid. To add breakaway takes, click on the level you want to add. (To add more than
one level at a time, hold the shift button down to activate multiple levels on the level legend). Then
click on the grid.
Navigating the grid:
 Click Grid Size to open a dialog to adjust the grid size of the crosspoint matrix
 Move the sliders on the top and right edges of the grid
You can also use the Quick Select buttons, which appear across the top of the Salvo Edit screen:
Table 118: Salvo Quick Select Buttons

Button Function
Clear All Removes all crosspoints for the currently
Diagonal Creates a default set of crosspoints, connecting In 1 to Dst 1, In 2 to Dst 2, and so forth
Rev Diagonal Creates a default set of crosspoints, connecting In 1 to Dst 64, In 2 to Dst 63, and so forth
Capture Creates a salvo from a snapshot of the routing system (available in Control mode only)
Merge Opens a window where you can choose another salvo (one of the other salvos that
appears in the Salvo Editor window) to combine with the currently selected salvo
Execute Executes the actual salvo as it appears (available in Control mode only)
Click on Destination column header buttons to select them. Hold <Shift> or <Ctrl> on your keyboard to
select multiple destinations at the same time. Right click on a Destination column header. There is one
option: Clear column. This removes any crosspoints assigned to that destination.
To create a disconnect on any destination, click below that destination in the Discnct row.
To create a breakaway disconnect, first select the level(s) in the top left corner that you would like to
disconnect, and then click below the destination in the Discnct row.
Right click an input row marker to see three options:
Table 119: Input Right Click Options

Option Function
Clear row Removes all crosspoints from that input
Set all Assigns all levels of all destinations to that input
Set all selected destinations Assigns all levels of all selected (Destinations with blue column
markers) destinations to that input
If you modify a salvo, it needs to be published to routing devices again.
Displaying the Router Configuration

To display the Configuration window for a router view, right click on it in the Navigation pane, and then
choose Configuration from the context menu.
The Configuration window has multiple tabs. Information about these tabs can be found in the following
sections:
• Using the Sources Tab (on page 675)
• Using the Destinations Tab (on page 675)
• Using the Levels Tab (on page 676)
• Using the Categories Tab (on page 676)
• Using the Grouping Tab (on page 677)
• Using the Tielines Tab (on page 678)
Using the Sources Tab

A logical router source is a grouping of router input and level pairs. A source contains many input-level
pairs.
At the Sources tab, you can add, edit, or remove sources; assign or change source names; associate
selected icons with sources; add new levels without having to leave the Sources tab; and assign level
inputs to logical sources.
Each column on the Sources tab has its own unique function, as described in Configuring Sources (on
page 758). That section also contains detailed information about configuring sources.
Using the Destinations Tab

At the Destinations tab, you can add, edit, or remove sources; assign or change destination names;
associate selected icons with destinations; add new levels without having to leave the Destinations tab;
and assign level outputs to logical sources.
Each column on the Destinations tab has its own unique function, as described in Configuring
Destinations (on page 771). In addition, that section contains detailed information about configuring
destinations.
Using the Levels Tab

A level is a way of grouping inputs and outputs together.
At the Levels tab, you can add, edit, or remove levels; assign or change level names; associate selected
icons with levels; enable or disable any level (usually levels 0-15) allowed in the system, regardless of
whether there is a router on that level; specify a logical router size; modify level colors, and designate
the number of actual hardware inputs and outputs configured for a level.
Each column on the Levels tab has its own unique function, as described in Configuring Levels (on page
781), which also contains information about configuring router levels.
Using the Categories Tab

A category is a point to which a source signal is routed. Navigator simplifies the creation of categories
by automatically creating an appropriate category name when a Source or Destination name is entered
in a database. In most cases, the assigned category name does not require editing. However, for more
complex databases, a powerful interface for managing and editing categories is included on the
Categories tab.
At the Categories tab, you can add, edit, or delete categories; assign or change category names; view
sources and destinations affected by a particular category; add, edit, or delete indexes; change index
names; and view sources and destinations affected by a particular index.
Each column on the Categories tab has its own unique function, as described in Configuring Categories
and Indexes (on page 788). That section also contains information about configuring router categories
and indexes.
Using the Grouping Tab

Grouping allows multiple sources and/or destinations to be grouped together to act as categories and
indexes.
At the Grouping tab, you can add, edit, or remove grouping sources, destinations, and salvos.
Each column on the Grouping tab has its own unique function, as described in Configuring Grouping (on
page 796), in addition to detailed information about configuring groups.
Using the Tielines Tab

A tieline is a logical connection between one or more sources or destinations, which links two
components. Tielines allow the sources/destinations from one frame (the upstream connection) to be
available to another frame or frames (the downstream connection[s]).
Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800) shows an illustration of upstream and downstream
connections.
Tielines help you expand the size of your system, make resources available to several users at the same
time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
At the Tielines tab you can add, edit, or remove tielines; monitor tielines; and perform advanced tieline
procedures.
Each column on the Tielines tab has its own unique function, as described in Tielines Tab Components
(on page 801). That section also contains detailed information about configuring tielines.
Chapter 41
Routing System Maintenance

Once a routing system is created and configured, there are a number of operational functions used for
database maintenance. Using different plug-ins and shortcut menu options, you can view router
configurations, set preferences, backup and restore routing system databases, and update router
databases.
Using the Advanced Router Control Plug-in

Within Magellan CCS Navigator, Administrator users of a Magellan CCS Navigator Server can use the
Advanced Router Control plug-in to set preferences and active or deactivate router configurations. The
plug-in also has tools for setting router engine options.
For more information, see the following:

• Setting Preferences (on page 680)
• Using the Imagine Communications Router Service (on page 684)
• Creating a Router Database Backup (on page 686)
• Restoring a Router Database (on page 687)
Setting Preferences
This function allows you to set selections that display certain kinds of helpful information when you edit
router databases or panel settings.
1. From the Navigation pane, select Options > Plug-ins....
The Plug-ins dialog box opens. This window displays all plug-ins installed on your system.
2. Select the Advanced Router Control plug-in entry from the list on the left side of the screen, and
then click Configure.
The Router Configuration dialog box opens.
3. In the Editing Options box, click Preferences.
The Editor Preferences dialog box opens. The table below this figure provides a list of the dialog box
selections and their descriptions.
Figure 88: Editor Preferences Dialog Box
Editor Preferences Selection Descriptions

Selection Description
Hints: Router Database Allows display of warnings whenever a user reassigns logical source or
Editing destination definitions
Hints: Copy Panels Allows display of hints on how to copy a panel's button definitions from one
panel to another panel
Hints: Override Configured Allows display of warnings when you copy Integrator’s Detected Matrix
Matrix database over to a Programmed Matrix database
Hints: Unknown Status Allows display of warnings whenever you download a configuration: a device
Devices with an unknown status
Hints: Panacea And Edge Allows display of warnings when you remove a frame’s configuration files
after a download or an upload, or reset a frame after a download
Hints: User Download Allows display of messages about selecting different options for
Options downloading devices (see Downloading Device Definitions (on page 693) for
more information about this topic)
Allows display of three download options:
• Download selected devices
Normal • Download changed devices
• Download all devices
See the first figure below for an example of this selection preference
Allows display of appropriate download options based on available devices
in a database (it "filters" the device option to allow you to either download
Advance
panels or other devices separately)
See the second figures below for an example of this selection preference
Turn on Long Name Allows the downloading of long names added from the Database Editor
Download Sources and Destinations configuration functions
Hints: Panel Definition Allows display of warnings when you delete a panel's button definition and
Editing when you redefine a panel's button definition
Legacy Frame • Keeps and shows all found legacy frames (VIA, XPlus, XPRESS, MixBox, and
so forth) when a system poll is completed
• Removes all legacy frames from the database when a system poll is
completed
• Asks which of the above operations to perform after a system poll is
completed
Logical Database Allows display of messages when logical database changes require updates
Synchronization1 to the Platinum, Panacea, and Edge products that support logical names
synchronization
1 Logical names synchronization allows dynamically updatable name support within a router control system. The feature provides
a means by which all devices using the same source and destination names can receive notifications when the name has
changed. As a result, the user does not have to download the device database information for the name synchronization to take
place.
Figure 89: Normal Download Display
Figure 90: Advance Download Display
Activating and Deactivating Router Configurations

Only an Administrator user at a Navigator Server in Build mode can do this procedure.
By default, all configurations are activated. When a router system is active, Navigator will be able to
control and monitor it. When a routing system is deactivated, although the configuration might be
available in the system, Navigator cannot control or monitor it.
To activate or deactivate a routing system, follow these steps:

1. From the Navigation pane, select Options > Plug-ins....
The Plug-ins dialog box opens. This window displays all plug-ins installed on your system.
The Advanced Router Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Click on the Router Database tab if it is not the active tab.
Each configuration has the following right-click options:
Table 120: Router Configuration Database Options

Setting Options Notes
Activation • Activate If you go to the router in control mode, by default
• Deactivate (default) it will say "inactive". This avoids excessive XY
crosspoint status queries for larger devices.
Activate at Startup • Yes
• No
Toggle Broadcast Status Disabled by default.
Query
Figure 91: Router Configuration—Activate or Deactivate
Using the Imagine Communications Router Service

You may occasionally get a message displaying "Server Busy". This occurs if the Router Service, which is
acting as a server in this context, is busy performing a task when you attempt to perform another task
on the Router Service. In this case, wait a moment and then click Retry to perform the action that
triggered the message.
The Imagine Communications Router Service, also known as the router engine, provides control and
monitoring of Imagine Communications and other supported routing devices. It combines routing
devices into routing configurations that can be represented by routing views though mapping of inputs
and outputs to logical sources and destinations.
When you install Magellan CCS Navigator in your system, the Router Service is installed as well. The
Router Service is activated when Magellan CCS Navigator is started up, and de-activated when Magellan
CCS Navigator is closed.
You can change the way the Router Service communicates by setting Router Engine options. See Setting
Router Engine Options (on page 684).
Setting Router Engine Options

The router engine is available in Build mode only, on Magellan CCS Navigator Servers. To set router
engine options, follow these steps:
1. From the Navigation pane, select Options > Plug-ins... The Plug-ins dialog box opens. This window
displays all plug-ins installed on your system.
The Advanced Router Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Click on the Router Engine tab if it is not the active tab.
Figure 92: Advanced Router Configuration - Engine Options
Table 121: Router Configuration Engine Options

Option Result
Enable Logging Turns on logging of all routing events to a file
Log File The file name used for logging of routing events
Device Polling Period The interval at which the router engine checks for devices within active
(seconds) configurations. Configurations are activated when they are saved in the
Navigation window and you switch to Control mode
Module Polling Period The interval at which the router engine checks for modules within active
(seconds) configurations. Configurations are activated when they are saved in the
Navigation window and you switch to Control mode
Device/Module The amount of time a device or module can be missed within an active
Timeout (seconds) configuration before a notification is sent from the router engine indicating
an inactive device or module
Generate Alarms on When selected, prevents notification of alarms
Critical Status
Option Result
Warn use of Serial When selected, a warning will pop up when you load Magellan CCS Navigator
Connection Routers if the default router configuration uses a serial connection. When the default
router configuration uses a serial connection, COM 1 will not be available for
other uses.
4. When you are satisfied with your selections, click OK to close the Advanced Router Configuration
screen.
Deleting a Routing Configuration

Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can delete a routing
configuration.
A router database is shared among all users within the system, and not per user. Adding a new router
configuration will make this configuration available to all users. Replacing or deleting a configuration will
affect all users who are currently making use of this particular configuration (for example, using it in
Magellan CCS Navigator pages). Therefore, be careful when replacing or deleting existing router
configurations within the system.
1. To delete a routing configuration, right click on the item you want to delete in the Navigation pane.
2. Select Delete from the menu that appears.
This will remove the routing configuration from the Magellan CCS Navigator router database. Any pages
or graphical router control panels based on the configuration will be inoperable.
Creating a Router Database Backup

This operation backs up a single router database. It is not a substitute for the Magellan CCS Navigator
backup operation, which backs up all Magellan CCS Navigator data, including router system
configurations, Navigator pages, graphical images, and discovered devices.
Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can backup a database.
Follow these steps:
1. In the Navigation panel, right-click on the name of the routing system you want to backup.
2. Choose the Backup selection from the menu list.
3. The Backup Routing System dialog box opens.
Figure 93: Backup Routing System Dialog Box
4. Select one of the following:

 Choose To a ZIP file with embedded XML to back up a routing system database to a ZIP file in
XML format.
If necessary, click the ... box to the right of the File text box, and then navigate to the location to
where you want to backup the routing system file.
 Select To a remote router server to backup the routing system to a remote server.
 Enter the IP address of the remote router server.
 Select a remote router server from the list of available routing devices in the drop-down list box.
After selecting the router device, enter the FTP user name and password for the remote server
(default user name is leitch; default password is leitchadmin).
6. Click OK to launch the backup procedure.
When saving a database, the connection to the router will be interrupted, and then automatically
reconnected once saving is complete.
Restoring a Router Database

This operation restores a single router database. It does not replicate the functionality of the Magellan
CCS Navigator restore operation, which restores all Magellan CCS Navigator data, including router
system configurations, Navigator pages, graphical images, and discovered devices.
Only an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server in Build mode can restore a router
database using a previous backup. Note that this operation will overwrite the existing database So, you
might want to backup (save) the current database before restoring a new one, to prevent information
from being lost.
1. In the Navigation panel, right-click on the name of the routing system you want to backup.
2. Choose the Restore selection from the menu list.
3. The Restore Routing System dialog box opens.
Figure 94: Restore Routing System Dialog Box
4. Select one of the following:

 Choose From a ZIP file with embedded XML to restore a routing system (in XML format) from a
ZIP file.
If necessary, click the ... box to the right of the File text box, and then navigate to the location
from where you want to restore the routing system file.
 Select From a remote router server to restore a database from a remote server.
Do one of the following:
 Enter the IP address of the remote router server.
 Select a remote router server from the list of available routing devices from the drop-down list
box. After selecting the router device, enter the FTP user name and password for the remote
server (default user name is leitch; default password is leitchadmin).
5. Click OK launch the restore procedure.
Polling Devices
Polling may be used to add control panels and/or Platinum, Panacea, and Integrator series frames to the
database. Polling may also be used to determine whether the configuration of the physical devices is up-
to-date with respect to the database configuration. When polling is initiated, Magellan CCS Navigator
compares a version stamp stored within the device with a version stamp stored in the editor database. If
the versions do not match, the physical device must be updated with the current database information.
Device information must be downloaded again, as explained in Downloading Device Definitions (on page
693).
To initiate a poll, follow these steps:

1. Highlight the device entry that requires polling. Use standard Windows selection techniques to
select multiple devices.
2. Right-click the mouse button to access the Poll function.
3. Select Selected Devices(s) or Entire Router System.
Magellan CCS Navigator queries all downloadable devices connected to the control system to
determine which devices exist, and whether the configuration of each is up-to-date with respect to
the database.
 If new devices are found, the device list at the Navigation pane is updated. The first table in
Polling Status Indicators (on page 689) shows a listing of the polling status designators.
Specialized dialog boxes can help you pinpoint and correct polling problems in a Combiner
system. See Combiner System Polling Problems (on page 690) for explanations and examples.
 If errors are found during the polling process, Magellan CCS Navigator lists the errors at the
main window. The second table in Polling Status Indicators (on page 689) shows a listing of
possible problem conditions and their corrective actions.
4. After the Poll is successfully completed, the device definitions must be downloaded to the physical
device before the new configuration can take effect. See Downloading Device Definitions (on page
693) for information on how to perform this process.
Polling Status Indicators
Table 122: Polling Status Indicators

Status Indicator Description
Configuration Errors Device has one or more errors in configuration setup
Device Type Mismatch Device’s configuration does not correlate to its device type
External Thread Failed Integrator frame in a Combiner system has invalid thread(s) connections
Flash Not Installed Integrator frame’s logic card does not have flash memory
Hardware Changed Integrator frame’s read-only data has been updated based on latest device’s
hardware setup
Multiple Devices Two or more same type devices have the same ID
Needs Download Device’s configuration and/or thread connections (only in Integrator frame)
are mismatched, or device configuration has been modified
New New device is added to the database
Not Found Device is not found
OK Device is found with matching configuration. If device is an Integrator
frame, it has valid Thread connection(s)
Out of Memory Integrator frame does not have enough memory to store configuration data
Partial Found Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that are missing
System Errors Combiner system has one or more Integrator frame(s) that have one or
more of the following errors:
• Configuration errors
• Device type mismatch
• Flash not installed
• Hardware change
• Multiple devices
• Out of memory
Status Indicator Description

Thread Failed Unable to retrieve Integrator frame’s thread connection(s)
Unknown Magellan CCS Navigator does not recognize the device type or needs to do a
system poll to update its database (every time a database is loaded, all
devices’ status is reset to "Unknown")
Possible Polling Problems
Table 123: Polling Problems and Corrective Actions

Failure Condition Cause Corrective Action
Device did not The device is defined in the database, but Verify that a device with the
respond could not be found on the network. specified ID is in the control system;
verify the physical device’s DIP
switch settings
Device style The type setting in the database did not Edit the Device Style setting
mismatch match the type of the physical device found Check device IDs
at the specified ID.
Multiple devices at Two or more physical devices of the same Change one of the devices to a
same ID style were found sharing the same ID. different ID
Multiple styles with Two or more physical devices of different Change the ID settings (all devices
same ID styles were found sharing the same ID. sharing an ID must be the same style)
Combiner System Polling Problems

Specialized dialog boxes help you pinpoint and correct polling problems in a Combiner system. These
dialog boxes will pop up after you have performed a system poll. (See Polling Devices (on page 688) for
more information about performing a system poll).
1. If there are problems in your Combiner system, Magellan CCS Navigator displays a Combiner System
Error Report.
Figure 95: Combiner System Error Report Dialog Box
The Combiner System Issues box shows all of the hardware included as part of the Combiner
system. Frames with associated errors are marked with a red "X" superimposed over the frame icon.
2. Click any of the frames with errors associated.
A Device Description dialog box opens, which displays frame-specific information such as Frame ID,
Level, Matrix, and so on. In the System Error Description box, Magellan CCS Navigator lists all
Combiner system errors.
Figure 96: Error Report for Specific Frame
3. Highlight any of the error descriptions, and then click Detail... to display the Error Description dialog
box.
Figure 97: Error Description Dialog Box
4. The Error Description dialog box describes the system issue or error, and provides information on
how to correct the error.The table below lists Combiner system polling failure conditions and their
associated corrective actions.
5. After reviewing the error description, click OK to return to the Combiner System Error Report dialog
box, and then click OK to return to the Navigation pane.
6. Perform all recommended corrective actions, and then perform another poll to make sure that all
Combiner system errors have been corrected.
The following table provides a list of Combiner system polling failure conditions and their associated
corrective actions.
Table 124: Combiner System Polling Problems and Corrective Actions

Combiner system has One or more frame members Contact Customer Service representative to get a
old firmware have old firmware version; firmware upgrade
system’s Dynamic Routing
Fabric database is incomplete
Same frame One or more frame members Option 1: Configure a new system, and then
configured in are configured to be part of download devices to update this system’s invalid
multiple combiner another Combiner system frames
system Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with OK status)
turned ON, power down the rest of the frames that
are part of this Combiner system (make sure the
control cable is directly connected to the frame
which is turned on.
Repoll the Combiner system
If the polled system has a valid configuration,

power up the rest of the frames and download this
valid configuration to those frames (a default
Combiner system will be rebuilt after the system
poll)
Special configuration to the system will be lost,

since one or more frames were powered down
during the poll

Frame is no longer One or more frame members
Option 1: Configure a new system, and then
part of a combiner are no longer part of this
download devices to update this system’s invalid
system Combiner system
frames
Option 2:
Leaving one valid frame (that is, with OK status)
turned ON, power down the rest of the frames that
are part of this Combiner system.
Make sure the control cable is directly connected

to the frame which is turned on
Repoll the Combiner system
If the polled system has a valid configuration,

power up the rest of the frames and download this
valid configuration to those frames (a default
Combiner system will be rebuilt after the system
poll)
Special configuration to the system will be lost,

since one or more frames were powered down
during a poll
One or more frames One or more frame members • Check the control cable and make sure that the
are missing are missing frames are powered ON
• Delete this Combiner system from the database
• Perform another system poll (if the hardware is
unavailable, add the necessary hardware before
you repoll the system.)
Combiner system One or more frame members’ Configure a new system, and then download
matrix size is not configuration does not fit with devices to update this system’s invalid frames
matched this Combiner system
Downloading Device Definitions

After device definitions have been created and edited, they must be downloaded to the physical device
before the new configuration can take effect.
To download a device, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the device entry that requires downloading. Multiple devices may be selected using
standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
devices).
2. Right-click the mouse button to access the Download function.
 If the download process is completed without errors, a summary dialog box opens. This dialog
box lists the number of devices that were successfully downloaded. The Device List is updated to
reflect the current status of the devices (the devices will be marked "OK").
 If errors are encountered during the download process, a Download Failures dialog box opens.
This dialog box lists the error(s) encountered for each device. After all errors are corrected,
download the devices again. (The table lists corrective actions.)
Download Problems and Corrective Actions
Device did not The device is defined in the database, Verify that a device having the specified ID is
respond but could not be found on the in the control system and is in Program
network. Mode (devices that have been downloaded
must remain in Program Mode after the
download is complete); verify the physical
device’s DIP switch settings
Device style The Device Style setting in the Edit the Device Style setting.
mismatch database did not match the style of
the physical device found at the
specified ID.
Multiple styles with Two or more physical devices of Change the ID settings (all devices sharing an
same ID different styles were found sharing ID must be the same style).
the same ID.
Panel brand User tried to download an Imagine Download the appropriate panel brand (see
mismatch Communications panel configuration Changing a Panel Brand (on page 1058) for
to a Leitch panel, or a Leitch panel more information).
configuration to an Imagine
Communications panel (a Download
error dialog box will appear and
"Configuration Errors" will appear in
the Navigation pane status row)
Chapter 42
Router Page and Panel Construction

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create pages and use pages to monitor and control devices.
Only Administrator users can create pages.
Before creating a router panel, you need to create and configure one or more routers. See Creating and
Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) for information.
Navigator provides nine types of panels to aid you in your routing work. For an overview of the different
types of panels, see Choosing a Router Panel (on page 695).
If the control panels created by the wizard do not meet your needs, you can also create a router control
panel by starting from a blank page. See Manually Creating a Router Control Page (on page 723). You can
add rules that include events and actions.
You can also place a router Control dialog box (Matrix Classic, Matrix Panel, Multi-Bus Panel, Multi-Bus
Panel with Salvo, Single-Bus Panel, or Single-Bus Panel with Monitor) on a Navigator page. See Router
Components on a Navigator Page (on page 719).
Choosing a Router Panel

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV license to create pages, and a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-CLI
license to use pages to monitor and control devices. Only an Administrator user can create or edit
panels, or grant other users access to panels
The NAVIGATOR-SRV license includes a Routing Panel Wizard for creating nine different types of routing
panel, depending on the type of work you will be doing. All panels are graphical interfaces that can have
optional features such as signal presence, crosspoint restriction, lock/protect and preset (if your router
supports these features).
The panels that can be created with the Routing Panel Configuration wizard are as follows:
• Multi display panel
• Source preview panel
• Grid panel
• Matrix and matrix classic panels
• Multi-bus and multi-bus with salvo panels
• Single-bus panel and single-bus panel with monitor
Multi Display Panel

The Multi Display panel can display up to sixteen source (input) buttons and sixteen destination (output)
buttons for a router, providing an operator the ability to connect any source to any destination on the
panel or one source to various destinations. Destinations can be locked or protected. Breakaway and
AFV take modes are managed via rules.
Sources appear in the top half of the screen, and destinations appear below them. Across the bottom of
the screen are Take, Clear, Lock and Protect buttons. These buttons are available as options when the
screen is built.
Figure 98: Sample Router Multi Display
To configure this type of panel, from the main menu, choose File > New, click the Routers tab, and then
double click Multi Display. The Page Wizard is launched. See Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview
Router Page (on page 704) for information on how to complete this process.
Source Preview Panel

The Source Preview panel can display up to sixteen source (input) buttons and four destination (output)
buttons for a router, so an operator can connect any source to any destination on the panel.
Destinations can be locked or protected. Breakaway and AFV take modes are managed via rules.
The Source Preview panel also provides a destination display for a fifth destination. To use the
Destination monitor, you must install a video card that is compatible with Microsoft DirectX 8.1 or later.
See Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool (on page 29) for more information.
Sources appear in the top half of the screen, and destinations appear below them.Take, Clear, Lock and
Protect buttons are optional.
Figure 99: Sample Router Source Preview
double click Source Preview. The Page Wizard is launched. See Creating a Multi Display or Source
Preview Router Page (on page 704) for information on how to complete this process.
Grid Panel
Grid panels let you make a quick routing switch on one Destination at a time.
Figure 100: Sample Grid Panel
When operating a Grid panel, you select a destination, and then you right click and choose an Input
either in the space below the Destination to switch all selected Inputs to that destination, or in the space
below the destination adjacent to the level you want to switch.
A Grid panel can have up to eight visible levels, and up to 16 visible destinations. The total number of
levels and destinations are defined by your routing system control view.
Lock, Protect, Swap, and Disconnect buttons are optional.
For information about how to operate a grid panel, please see Grid and Bus Panel Operation (on page
1123).
double click the Grid Panel icon. The Routing Panel Configuration wizard is launched. See Creating Grid,
Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels (on page 709) for information on how to complete this process.
Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels

With a Matrix or Matrix Classic panel, you can monitor and control the status of an entire router system
from a single screen. A Matrix panel can display a complete router, by making use of basic Windows
scroll bars. Using the Wizard, you can determine the order that destinations and sources are displayed
in, so the more commonly used items appear in the top right, or so items that are used together are
clustered together.
Crosspoints are displayed in a matrix format with intersecting source and destination lines. Sources and
destinations are connected by clicking at the desired crosspoint.
In a Matrix panel, the sources are displayed as a row of buttons along the side and destinations are
displayed as a row of buttons across the top of the matrix panel. Each control button may include the
source or destination name and icon. These are optional settings.
Figure 101: Matrix Panel
In a Matrix Classic panel, sources appear horizontally across the top and destinations appear vertically
down the right side. Sources and destinations are connected by double-clicking at the desired
crosspoint. The Matrix Classic panel has been designed for people who are accustomed to the
RouterWorks panel. Each control button may include the source or destination name and icon. These
are optional settings.
Figure 102: Matrix Classic Panel
Crosspoints in the router are monitored via colored markers at the intersections of the source and
destination lines. The markers are displayed as pie-shaped wedges that correspond to the colors of the
Level buttons. If, for example, a video level button is colored blue, a blue marker at the intersection of a
source and destination line indicates that the source is connected on the video level. If more than one
colored marker is present at an intersection, the source is connected on each of the levels displayed. If a
source is selected on ALL levels in the system, the crosspoint marker will appear as a multi-colored
circle, consisting of all colors of the active levels.
Lock and Protect buttons restrict user access to the destination to prevent inadvertent changes to
destination changes. The Take button assigns the selected source to the destination. The Preset button
queues crosspoints until an action such as take is pressed. If your page contains a Clear button, you can
remove a selection without performing an action such as Take. If it has a Restrict button, you can
prevent a source and destination from being connected. If there is a Swap button, you can switch the
sources of two destinations.
Salvos appear across the bottom of the Matrix panel. You can monitor and execute salvos using an
active salvo display.
For more information about how to operate a matrix panel, please see Matrix Panel Operation (on page
1134).
See Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels (on page 709) for information on using the
Routing Panel Configuration wizard to create a matrix panel.
Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels

With the Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo panels, you can monitor and control any number of router
destinations from one panel. Multiple sources and destinations are simultaneously displayed on the on-
screen panel. If you chose a Multi-Bus with Salvo panel, Salvos appear simultaneously as well.
Destinations appear at the top of the Multi-Bus panel. The destination section includes a status display
that lists the sources connected on each level to the selected destination. Destinations are selected by
clicking on the desired Destination button. Levels which are highlighted on the right side of the screen
are the levels that will be switched.
Sources appear below destinations on a Multi-Bus panel. The Sources section includes a button for each
source. Sources may be connected to selected destinations to perform either AFV or breakaway takes.
Changes made on other control panels in the system will also be reflected on the Multi-Bus panel.
Figure 103: Multi-Bus Panel Page
In the case of Multi-Bus with Salvo panels, below the sources are salvo buttons. You can monitor and
execute salvos using an active salvo display. A salvo is active when all crosspoints of the salvo are in
effect. The page will display both salvos and enhanced salvos.
Figure 104: Multi-Bus With Salvo Page
Lock and Protect buttons provide user access to the destination to prevent inadvertent changes to
destination changes. The Take button assigns the selected source to the destination. The Preset button
queues crosspoints until an action such as take is pressed. If you add a Clear button to your page, you
can remove a selection without performing an action such as Take. If your page contains a Restrict
button, click it to prevent a source and destination from being connected. And if your page contains a
Swap button, you can switch the sources of two destinations.
For more information about how to operate a multi-bus panel, please see Grid and Bus Panel Operation
(on page 1123).
Routing Panel Configuration wizard to create a multi-bus panel.
Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor

The Single-Bus panel provides control over one destination at a time, with any number of sources. It is
divided into two main sections, with the destination status at the top and the sources at the bottom.
Figure 105: Single-Bus Panel
A Single-Bus Panel with Monitor contains a preview monitor.
Figure 106: Sample Single-Bus Panel with Monitor
The destination section includes a status display that lists the sources connected on each level to the
destination. Levels which are highlighted on the right side of the screen are the levels that will be
switched.
Sources may be connected to the destination on some or all levels. Source status on each individual
level is clearly indicated on the on-screen panel. Logical source connections may be easily changed from
the on-screen control panel. Changes made on other control panels in the system will also be reflected
on the single-bus panel whenever the affected destination is selected.
Use Lock and Protect buttons to prevent inadvertent changes to destinations, and the Take button to
assign the selected source to the destination. The Preset button queues crosspoints until an action such
as Take is pressed. The optional Clear button removes a selection without performing an action such as
Take. The optional Restrict button prevents a source and destination from being connected. And the
optional Swap button switches the sources of two destinations.
For information about how to operate a single-bus panel, please see Grid and Bus Panel Operation (on
page 1123).
Routing Panel Configuration wizard to create a single-bus panel.
Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page

Multi Display or a Source Preview pages perform simple router actions.
These panels are described in the following sections:

• Multi Display Panel (on page 695)
• Source Preview Panel (on page 696)
You can use a wizard to make either panel, and the steps are as follows:
1. Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Multi Display Page (on page 705)
2. Selecting Sources (on page 706)
3. Selecting Destinations (on page 707)
For information on operating panels, please see Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation (on
page 1142).
Before you can create a router panel, the router must be configured. See Physical Device Setup (on page
Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Multi Display Page

1. From the main menu, choose File > New, click the Routers tab, and then double click either Multi
Display or Source Preview.
The Page Wizard opens.
Figure 107: Page Wizard Dialog Box - Step 1 of 3
Click Select..., and then choose the router you want to use. Routers must be configured before you
can create a panel. If there is no router configured, a yellow warning message will appear. For more
information, see Physical Device Setup (on page 847).
2. Under Page Options, choose which buttons you want to appear on your page. Options include Take,
Clear, Lock, and Protect. You can have any or all of them.
3. (Source Preview Panel only) Check Include Signal Monitor Object, if you want to include a Signal
Monitor object for confidence monitoring of video signal. From the drop-down menu, you can then
choose the output (destination) from your router that is connected to the video card in your PC. See
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool (on page 29).
4. Click Next >> to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Selecting Sources
On this page, you can choose the source inputs for your router panel and determine the button theme
for source inputs. The list on the upper left of the screen displays the sources configured on the selected
router. The list on the right displays the sources that will appear on the panel.
1. From the Available Sources list, click on the items you want to have available on the Navigator page.
If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you selected is un-selected. To
select multiple items in a range, hold the shift key down and click on the first item you want to
select and then, while still holding the shift key down, click on the last item you want to select. All
items between those two items are selected. To select multiple individual items, hold the Control
key down while you click on items.
Click the right arrow to add selected items to the Selected Sources list. You may have up to eight
items in the Selected Sources list.
2. Use the other arrows to determine the order of items in the Selected Sources list.
 To remove items from the list, select them and click the left arrow.
 To move an item up in the list, select it and click the up arrow.
 To move an item down in the list, select it and click the down arrow.
The position items hold in the Selected Sources list determines where they will appear in relation to
each other when the page is completed.
3. From the Selected Theme drop-down menu, choose a button theme for the Selected Sources. The
selected button appears in the Preview section of the screen.
4. From the Match logical source on: box, click the arrow and select one of the four match type
options:
Table 125: Match Type Options for Logical Sources

Match Type Criteria
Full Match Logical source must match all levels configured
Highest Level Logical source must match the highest level configured
Lowest Level Logical source must match the lowest level configured
[Level Name] Logical source must match on the level specified
5. Click Next >> to move on to the next page of the wizard.
Selecting Destinations
If you are creating a Source Preview panel, the Available Destinations list will not include the destination
you assigned as the Destination to Monitor. See Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Multi
Display Page (on page 705).
On this page, you can choose the destinations for your router panel and determine the button theme for
destinations. The list on the upper left of the screen displays the destinations configured on the selected
router. The list on the right displays the destinations that will appear on the panel.
1. From the Available Destinations list, click on the items you want to have available on the Navigator
page. If you click a single item, and then click another item, the first item you selected is un-
selected. To select multiple items in a range, hold the shift key down and click on the first item you
want to select and then, while still holding the shift key down, click on the last item you want to
select. To move an item down in the list, select it and click the down arrow.
The position items hold in the Selected Destinations list determines where they will appear in
relation to each other when the page is completed. You can always move the buttons later if you are
not happy with their configuration on the page the Wizard creates.
You are limited to four destinations with a Source Preview dialog box.
2. From the Selected Theme drop-down menu, choose a button theme for the Selected Destinations.
The selected button appears in the Preview section of the screen.
Some panels cannot be viewed in Build mode. Switch to Control mode to view your finished panel.
3. Click Finish to close the dialog box and start the building process for the panel. A progress bar
appears on screen. The build process may take a few moments to complete.
Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels

Grid, bus and matrix panels are graphical router control panels that include such features as preset,
take, lock, protect, level status, breakaway, multiple select and salvo execution. These panels provide
traditional router control interfaces.
These panels are described in the following sections:

• Grid Panel (on page 698)
• Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor (on page 703)
• Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels (on page 701)
• Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels (on page 698)
You can use a wizard to make these panels. The steps are as follows:
1. Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard (on page 709)
2. Selecting Levels (on page 711)
3. Selecting Destinations (on page 712)
4. Selecting Sources (on page 713)
5. Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties (on page 714)
For information on operating panels, please see the following:

• Matrix Panel Operation (on page 1134)
• Grid and Bus Panel Operation (on page 1123)
Before you can create a router panel, the router must be configured. See Physical Device Setup (on page
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard

To configure a grid type of panel, from the main menu, choose File > New, click the Routers tab, and
then double-click the Grid Panel icon. The Routing Panel Configuration wizard is launched.
The routing portion of a panel configuration is created from a routing view using the Routing Panel
Configuration wizard. To start the wizard, follow these steps:
Create >.
2. Choose the Software Routing Panel > selection.
3. Choose the selection for the type of panel you want to create (matrix classic, matrix, multi-bus, or
single-bus).
The Component Wizard dialog box opens. The title of the step will vary, depending on the type of
panel you selected from the shortcut menu. Otherwise, except where noted, the steps are identical
for each panel type.
Figure 110: Routing Panel Configuration Wizard Dialog Box
4. In the Name text box, enter a descriptive name for your software panel. The name can be up to 60
characters long.
5. From the Address drop-down list box, select a unique identification (ID) number for the panel
address. Selections range between 0 and 127.
This panel address is the ID the routers "see" when you lock or protect a destination.
6. Select a routing configuration format for the panel from the drop-down list box. If only one
configuration format exists, this selection is greyed out.
7. Select a routing view for the panel, and then click Next >> to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Selecting Levels
Figure 111: Setting Levels
The choices you make on the Levels dialog box determine the number and order of router levels when
using this panel. If you place the most frequently used levels early in the list, they will be most easily
accessible.
Items can either appear in the Available field or in the Selected field, but not in both. The order of items
in the Selected list is the order they will appear on the control panel. By default, all items appear in the
Selected column in logical database order.
To move an item between the Selected and Available fields, first click on it to highlight it. If you click a
single item, and then click another item, the first item you clicked on is un-highlighted. Multiple levels
may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys
while selecting the levels)
With items highlighted, you can perform the following functions:

Type partial text in the Filter field to limit the contents of the Available column to only the items that
start with the characters you have entered.
• Click > to add highlighted items from the Available field to the Selected field. New sources always
appear at the bottom of the Selected list.
• Click >> to move all visible sources from the Available field to the Selected field. If you have applied
filtering to the Available field, only those items that are visible will be moved.
• Click < to remove highlighted items from the Selected field.
• Click << to remove all items from the Selected field.
• Click the A-Z button to place all items in alphanumeric order.
• Click the Z-A button to place all items in reverse alphanumeric order.
If you want to select a different level to be statused, select the new status level from the drop-down list
box.
To leave this screen, you have these options:

• Click Next >> to move on to the next step of the new panel wizard. At least one item must appear in
• Click << Back to return to the previous page in the wizard.
• Click Cancel to exit the wizard without creating a panel.
When you have completed this page, click Next >> to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Selecting Destinations
Figure 112: Selecting Destinations
The Destinations dialog box opens after you have defined the levels in the Configuration wizard.
The choices you make on the Destinations dialog box determine the number and order of router
destinations when using this panel. If you place the most frequently used destinations early in the list,
they will be most easily accessible.
When you create a single bus routing panel, you can choose only a single destination.
The tools for filling out the Destinations dialog box are the same as those on the Levels dialog box. See
Selecting Levels (on page 711) for more information.
If you are creating a single-bus routing panel, you have a modified version of the Destinations dialog
box. In a single-bus routing panel you only have one pre-defined destination, so you can only select one
destination on this screen.
When you click the > button to add a highlighted item from the Available field to the Selected field, the
new destination will replace any destination already in the Selected list.
When you have completed this page, click Next >> to continue to the next step of the wizard. You must
have at least one destination in the Selected Destinations field in order to proceed.
Selecting Sources
Figure 113: Selecting Sources
The Sources dialog box opens after you have defined the destinations in the Configuration wizard.
The choices you make on the Sources dialog box determine the number and order of router sources
when using this panel. If you place the most frequently used sources early in the list, they will be most
easily accessible.
The tools for filling out the Sources dialog box are the same as those on the Levels dialog box. See
Selecting Levels (on page 711) for more information.
When you have completed this page, click Next >> to continue to the next step of the wizard.
Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties
Figure 114: Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties
Routing Operations
Selecting the Routing Options button launches a dialog box that allows you to tell your control panel
what control and monitoring operations are allowed to operate on your routing system. When the
Routing Options button is clicked, the Router Operations dialog box opens.
Figure 115: Routing Operations Selections
This tabbed dialog box contains selections for options for routing and protection. Routing options are as
follows:
Table 126: Routing Options

Option Effect
Do you want to perform multiple If Yes is selected, you can take multiple sources to their
crosspoint take requests at once? destinations all at the same time.
Option Effect
Do you want to automatically take the This option is not available for panels that can perform
crosspoint when selecting the multiple simultaneous crosspoints. When Yes is selected, a
destination and the source? Take button appears on the panel. Otherwise, takes are
executed upon selection of a destination and a source.
Do you want to perform breakaway When Yes is selected, you can cut to a different source on only
take requests? selected levels. Otherwise, all takes will be on all levels.
Do you want to perform source When Yes is selected, a menu item is enabled so you can
disconnect take? disconnect all destinations that are currently connected to a
specific source.
Do you want the panel to automatically When Yes is selected, after a breakaway take, all levels are
reset the level selection to follow reset to switch together.
mode?
Do you want to perform destination When Yes is selected, you are able to set actions to swap the
swap? (not available for Single-Bus crosspoints of two specified destinations.
panels)
Do you want the panel to display tally When Yes is selected, the panel displays whether all/specified
status? (Bus panels only) inputs and outputs (such as locks) match a single source for a
destination.
Do you want to enable diagnostics? When Yes is selected, various panel switching combinations
are activated and router monitoring is enabled
Click the appropriate radio button for the desired routing options, and then select the Protection tab.
The routing options for protecting are all available as rule actions when you set them.
Figure 116: Routing Protection Selections
Table 127: Router Protection Option

Option Effect
Do you want to perform destination and If Yes is selected, destinations and salvos can be set so they
salvo lock/unlock operations? cannot be used.
Do you want to perform destination and If Yes is selected, destinations and salvos can be set so other
salvo protect/unprotect operations? users cannot use them, but the user who set the protect can,
no matter what panel he is at.
Do you want the panel to override lock If Yes is selected, the panel can override lock and protect
and protect operations? operations, but other access points cannot.
Do you want to perform crosspoint If Yes is selected, restrictions can be set so a specific source
restriction? and a specific destination cannot be connected.
Click the appropriate radio button for the desired protection options, and then click OK to return to the
Router Operations dialog box.
Display Properties
Selecting the Appearance Options button launches a dialog box that allows you to tell your control
panel how to display your routing system. When the Appearance Options button is clicked, the Display
Environments dialog box opens.
Figure 117: Display Environments Selections
The display environment is set using the same interface for Grid, Single-Bus, Multi-Bus, Multi-Bus with
Salvo, Matrix and Matrix Classic panels. These settings are all optional. If you choose nothing, Navigator
will use the default settings to produce your panel.
1. In the Transparent Background Style section of the screen, select Yes or No. Transparency mainly
affects the buttons on your screen.
2. Under Items, from the drop-down menu, choose List Control Items.
 Click the Font button to choose a font, color, style, and size for your buttons.
 Click the Color button to choose a color for your buttons. You will not be able to see the color if
you have chosen a transparent background style.
 Click the Show drop-down menu to choose which items to display on the buttons. You can show
Image and text, Image only, or Text only.
 Click the Size drop-down menu to choose a button size. Options are Large and Small.
If you have chosen Image and Text from the Show menu, you can set your text alignment. From the
Text Alignment drop-down menu, choose At the bottom, On the left, On the right, or Same space
as image. Text alignment is only relevant when Image and Text is chosen under the Show menu,
because it determines where the text appears in relation to each button’s image.
3. Under Items, from the drop-down menu, choose List Control Title. Click the Font button to choose a
font, style, color, and size for the titles on your panel. The Color, Show, Size and Text Alignment
buttons are unavailable for the list control title.
4. In the Panel background section of the dialog box, click the Browse button to look at pre-created
background images, or choose one of your own (BMP format). If an image is larger than the screen,
it is cropped to fit. If it is smaller, it is tiled.
5. In the Control position section of the screen, enter numbers in the Horizontal and Vertical fields to
adjust the positioning of the buttons from the top left corner of the screen. Your offset is indicated
on the preview to the right of the dialog box, as well.
6. Click OK to return to the Router Operations dialog box, and then click Finish to accept all changes.
Router Components on a Navigator Page

You can also place a router control panel (Matrix Classic, Matrix Panel, Multi-Bus Panel, Multi-Bus Panel
with Salvo, Single-Bus Panel, and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor) on an existing Routing Components
page. See the following topics:
• Adding a Router Component to an Existing Navigator Page (on page 719)
• Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page (on page 719)
Adding a Router Component to an Existing Navigator Page

To add a router component to a Navigator page, place Navigator in Build mode and follow these
instructions:
1. In the Create Object toolbar, click Control....
2. Select the router component you want to create. The corresponding router wizard will appear.
3. Follow the instructions for the router type you want to create, at Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi
The control can be resized after it has been inserted.
4. Click Finish. The cursor will change to a drawing tool. Drag a rectangle by holding down the mouse
button while you move the mouse on the page.
The router component appears in the box.
Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page

A router control panel that has been created and inserted into the Navigator page can be edited, so you
do not have to recreate it from scratch just to make a minor change. There may be occasions where a
Bus or Matrix panel almost meets your requirements, and you want to make minor modifications to it.
To edit a software routing panel, double click on the software routing panel in the Navigation pane in
Build mode.
To edit a router control component of a Navigator page, place Navigator in Build mode and follow these
instructions:
1. Right click on the router control component while in Build mode.
2. Select Component Wizard... from the menu that appears. This opens the wizard that created the
object. The wizard will contain the values used to create the component.
3. Progress through the wizard until you find the screen where your change should be made. Make
your changes.
4. Click Finish (available on all screens if you are editing a panel). Navigator will recreate your panel,
replacing the previous version.
Alternatively, you can create the router panel type of your choice using the Navigator New Panel Wizard
and choose the XML file of a panel you would like to replicate under Panel Configuration File,
Using Panel Information

Panel Information is available for Matrix, Matrix Classic, Single-Bus, Single-Bus with Monitor, Multi-Bus
and Multi-Bus with Salvo panels. To open panel info, in Control mode, right click in the background, not
on a button. Select Panel Info... from the menu.
The data presented is for informational purposes. You cannot change it here.
Figure 118: Panel Info Dialog Box
Table 128: Panel Information

Panel Information Item Source
Panel Name The name you assigned on page 1 of the panel wizard
Address A unique identifier assigned to the panel on page 1 of the panel wizard
Configuration / ID The router configuration file you set on page 1 of the panel wizard
Routing View / ID The view you chose from the router configuration file on page 1 of the
panel wizard
Levels Number of levels this router panel supports (as defined in the router
configuration file)
Destinations Number of destinations this router panel supports (as defined in the
router configuration file)
Sources Number of sources this router panel supports (as defined in the router
configuration file)
Salvos Number of salvos this router panel supports (as defined in the router
configuration file)
Panel File Name Name of this panel’s XML file
Panel File Location Drive location of this panel’s XML file
Running Diagnostics
The Diagnostics capability must be enabled at the Routing Operations dialog box. See Routing
Operations (on page 715) for more information.
Diagnostics operation is available for standard single-bus, multi-bus and matrix panels; it cannot be used
with custom panels. To open Diagnostics, in Control mode, right click in the background, not on a
button. Select Diagnostics... from the menu.
The Diagnostics dialog box opens.
Figure 119: Diagnostics Dialog Box
This dialog box contains selections for the types of diagnostic operations desired. The effects of the
different selections in this dialog box are provided below.
Table 129: Diagnostics Selections

Selection Effect
All to All For all destinations in range, goes through all sources and switch them to
those destinations (for example,. destinations 57 to 64 to source 59, then to
source 60, then to source 61, and so forth, through the rest of the range)
Each Crosspoint Goes source to destination and then advances one, one switch at a time
(for example, source 59 to destination 57, source 60 to destination 58,
source 61 to destination 59, and so forth)
Selection Effect
Each Destination, Random Iterates through destinations, and then switches to a random source in the
Source range (for example destination 57 to source 64, destination 58 to source 60,
destination 59 to source 63, and so forth)
Random Crosspoint Takes a random source and a random destination from within the range,
and then does a switch
Range:Sources Selects the range of sources to be affected
Range:Destinations Selects the range of destinations to be affected
Switch Mode:Preset When doing multiple switches, executes the switches simultaneously
Switch Mode:Crosspoint When doing multiple switches, executes each crosspoint one by one
Delay between Operations Sets the time delay between each switch (in milliseconds)
Viewing the Activity of a Router

To view the status of a router in real time, in Control mode, right click in the background, not on a
button. Select View Router Activity... from the menu.
The Router Activity dialog box opens. Status and time information about the currently selected router
streams into the text box.
Figure 120: Router Activity Dialog Box
• Click Save to send the streamed contents output to a TXT file.

• Click Pause to stop the streamed contents output. (When the output is paused, the Pause button label
changes to Resume.)
Click Resume to restart the output contents stream.
• Click Clear to clear the display box. (This does not stop the output contents stream; it only clears the
currently displayed information.)
• Click Close to close the dialog box.
Manually Creating a Router Control Page

There may be occasions when you want to create your own buttons and controls for a simple router
control panel.
To manually set up a router control page, you will need a configured router in the resource tree of the
Navigation pane. You must be logged on as an Administrator user with a NAVIGATOR-SRV or
NAVIGATOR-SNMP license to create or edit router control pages.
Figure 121: Sample Router Control Page
Router Pages generally consist of four types of buttons:

• Destination - When you click a Destination button, Opus 1, Opus 2, Opus 3, or Opus 4, the actions
created for the page select that destination, deselect all other destination buttons, and change the
selected source button to indicate the current source for the selected destination.
The names of the sources and destinations are for illustration purposes only. These names are
dependent on name assignments made in the current router configuration.
• Source - When you click on a Source button, the actions created for the page select that source in
preparation for a Take command. Navigator visually shows which button is preset.
• Take - When clicked, the actions created for the page take the selected Source to the selected
Destination, and the buttons are accordingly updated.
• Clear - When clicked, an action created for the Clear button clears the selected preset.
Summary: Manually Creating a Router Control Page

To manually create a router control page, complete these steps:
1. Set custom properties for the page. See Creating the Custom Page Properties (on page 724).
2. Create the first input button, and then set object properties for it. See Creating the First Input
Button (on page 724).
3. Create clones of the input button. See Creating Input Button Clones (on page 725)
4. Differentiate the input button clones. See Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Input Buttons (on page 726).
5. Create the first output button, and then set object properties for it. See Creating the First Output
Button (on page 726).
6. Create clones of the output button. See Creating Output Button Clones (on page 727).
7. Differentiate the input button clones. See Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Output Buttons (on page 727).
8. Create a Take button. See Creating a Take Button (on page 727).
9. Create a Clear button. See Creating a Clear Button (on page 728).
10. Test the page in Control mode.
Creating the Custom Page Properties

You must create two custom page properties for the router control page.
1. First, add a custom page property named Destination, and leave the initial values blank.
2. Then, add a custom page properties named Source, and leave the initial values blank.
Creating Rules to Select a Destination when a Page Loads

To automatically select a specific router destination when a page is loaded, then add the following rules
to the page:
Table 130: Rules for Selecting a Destination on a Load Page Event

Event
Event Action
Conditions
On Load Page (Always) Set Custom Property: Destination - Router Value (desired destination)
On Load Page (Always) Select Destination (to desired destination)
Creating the First Input Button

To create the first input button for the router control page, complete these steps:
1. Create a button for the input.
To create multiple buttons, create one button, completely configure it, and then copy and paste the
button several times. Then fine-tune the configuration for each button.
2. On the Button tab of the button Object Properties box:
a. Set the Caption to the name of the input—for example, "Bars."
b. Select the Toggle button check box.
3. In the Themes section, choose a theme for the four button states.
4. Select the Adjust Button Size check box.
5. Select the Rules tab, and then add the rules as described in the table below.
Rules 1-3 make the buttons behave like radio buttons. When you click on one button, the other
buttons become deselected.
Rule 4 tells Navigator to select the specified source in preparation for a take command.
Rule 5 causes the button to react to the Clear button being clicked.
Table 131: Rules to Set for Buttons

No. Event Event Conditions Action Action Properties
1 On Custom Property: Source EQUALS Set Button Highlighted: Don't Change
Property Change Router Value [Src] In 1 Properties Selected: True
2 On Custom Property: Source Set Button Highlighted: Don't Change
Property Change NOT EQUAL Router Value Properties Selected: False
[Src] In 1
3 On Mouse Click (Always) Set Custom Property: Source
Property Router Value: [Src] In 1
4 On Mouse Click (Always) Select Source Router Source In 1
5 On Custom Property "Source" EQUALS Set Button Highlighted: False
Property Change Custom Value "xxx" Properties Selected: False
6 On Crosspoint Destination EQUALS [cp] Set Button Highlighted: True
Status Destination Source EQUALS Properties Selected: False
In 1
7 On Crosspoint Destination EQUALS [cp] Set Button Highlighted: False
Status Destination Source Properties Selected: Don’t Change
NOT EQUAL In 1
Rules 6-7 causes the button to react to router crosspoint status events in a radio button style—only
one button can be active at a time.
The Event Condition uses the [CP] Destination as the destination, so that the buttons will not change
if a different output changes. For example, if you have clicked Destination 1 and another user
changes Destination 2, you do not want your source buttons to change.
6. Close the Object Properties box, and save the page.
Creating Input Button Clones

To create clones of the first input button, complete these steps:
1. Select the button and copy it.
2. Paste the button several times, until you have enough input buttons.
3. Move the buttons where you want them on the page.
4. Save the page.
Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Input Buttons

For each button, you must also set the device ID to the correct settings for the indicated CCS device.
To differentiate the identical input buttons, complete these steps:

1. Open a Button Object Properties page, and then click the push-pin icon in the top left corner of the
Object Properties box.
2. For each button that you want to differentiate:
a. Type the name of a different input in the Caption box.
b. For each On Custom Property Change and On Crosspoint Status rule, change the Event
Condition from "[Src] In 1" to the name of the source that the button represents.
c. In each On Mouse Click rule, change the Action Properties from "In 1" to the source that the
button represents.
3. Save the page.
Creating the First Output Button

To create the first output button, complete these steps:
1. Create a button to represent the first output, and then open its Object Properties page.
2. Select the Button tab.
3. In the Caption box, type in the name of the output.
4. Select the Adjust Button Size check box.
5. Select the Toggle button check box.
6. Select a theme for the button states.
7. Select the Rules tab, and then add the rules as described in the table below.
A Clear Selected action must precede a Select Destination action.
8. Save the page.
Rules for the First Output Button
Event
No. Event Action Action Properties Effect
Conditions
1 On Mouse (Always) Clear Selected Clears any selected
Click destinations and sources, since
multiple destinations can be
simultaneously active. On this
page, we only want one
destination to be active at a
time.
2 On Mouse (Always) Select Destination: Out 1 Tells Navigator to select this
Click Destination State Select: ON destination.
Event
No. Event Action Action Properties Effect
Conditions
3 On Mouse (Always) Set Custom Property: Source Clears the source buttons’
Click Property states, since Rule 1 has cleared
any selected sources.
4 On Mouse (Always) Set Custom Property: Makes the buttons behave like
Click Property Destination radio buttons.
Router Value:
[Dst] Out 1
5 On Custom Property: Set Button Selected: True Makes the buttons behave like
Property Destination Properties Highlighted: radio buttons.
Change EQUALS Don’t Change
Router Value
[Dst] Out 1
6 On Custom Property: Set Button Selected: False Makes the buttons behave like
Property Destination Properties Highlighted: radio buttons.
Change NOT EQUALS Don’t Change
Router Value
[Dst] Out 1
Creating Output Button Clones

To create clones of the first output button, complete these steps:
1. Select the output button and copy it.
2. Paste the output button several times, until you have enough output buttons.
3. Move the output buttons where you want them on the page.
4. Save the page.
Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Output Buttons

To differentiate the identical output buttons, complete these steps:
1. Open a button Object Properties page, and then click the push-pin icon in the top left corner of the
Object Properties box to keep it open.
2. For each of the "On Mouse Click" events, change the Action Properties "Out 1" to the destination
that the button represents.
3. For each of the "On Custom Property Change" events, change the Event Conditions "Out 1" to the
destination that the button represents.
4. Save the page.
Creating a Take Button

Create a button with the caption "Take."
1. Create one rule for it.
Table 132: Take Button Rule
Event Event Conditions Action Action Properties
On Mouse Click (Always) Take Selected

2. Save the page.
Creating a Clear Button

For each button, you must also set the device ID to the correct settings for the indicated CCS device.
1. Create a button with the caption "Clear."
2. Create these three rules for the Clear button.
Table 133: Clear Button Rules
Event Event Conditions Action Action Properties
On Mouse Click (Always) Clear Selected

On Mouse Click (Always) Set Custom Property Property: Destination
Custom Value: xxx
On Mouse Click (Always) Set Custom Property Property: Source
Custom Value: xxx
3. Save the page.
4. Change to Control mode to test the router control page.
Chapter 43
Logical Database Setup

A logical database can be described as the overall "picture" of the entire routing system. A database
includes one or more levels, as well as a number of logical sources and logical destinations. Editing the
database might include the following elements:
• Adding, editing, or deleting logical sources and destinations
• Assigning unique names, colors or icons to the levels, logical sources and destinations
• Adding, editing, and deleting tielines
• Enabling or disabling statusing
• Editing status names
• Assigning new or additional icons for use in the database and for display in other database-related
applications
See Using Database Editor Wizards (on page 832) for information about adding device configuration
information to your database quickly and easily.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the database setup only. For
information on how to configure physical devices, see Physical Device Setup (on page 847).
Information on defining each property is included in the sections listed:

Using the Logical Database Editor Tool ................................................. 730
Configuring Sources ............................................................................... 758
Configuring Destinations........................................................................ 771
Configuring Levels .................................................................................. 781
Configuring Categories and Indexes ...................................................... 788
Configuring Grouping ............................................................................. 796
Managing Enhanced Tielines ................................................................. 800
Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Products .................... 820
Using Database Editor Wizards .............................................................. 832
Chapter 44
Using the Logical Database Editor Tool

The Logical Database Editor is an easy-to-use Microsoft® Windows based tool for configuring your
routing products. Using the Database Editor, you may create a database that describes a routing system
(that is, available levels, sources, and destinations). That database may be downloaded to a control
panel and/or router frame, through Magellan CCS Navigator. Currently the Database Editor is only
accessible when Magellan CCS Navigator is installed on your PC.
To access the Logical Database Editor, do one of the following:

• If you are an Administrator user at a Magellan CCS Navigator Server, click on a Routing View node.
The logical configuration opens. Go to the appropriate section of this volume, and then follow the
steps outlined to make any changes. See the Logical Database Setup (on page 729) section for more
• Click on a Software control panel view. The corresponding configuration window opens. Go to the
appropriate section of this volume, and then follow the steps outlined to make any changes. See
Router Page and Panel Construction (on page 695).
Working with Common Controls

The Database Editor tabs use certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to all
Database Editor elements. See the following topics:
• Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar (on page 737) has information and explanations of
icons and the Icon toolbar.
• Using Shortcut Menus (on page 750) describes how to use shortcut menus.
• Manipulating Columns has information and explanations of hiding, unhiding, and sorting columns.
• Navigating Through Selections (on page 754) describes various navigation techniques.
Auto Validation
When you make any change to a source, destination, category, index, group, or tieline, or click Resync to
update the logical database and then you save the database, a router panel auto-validation occurs in the
background.
When auto validation occurs and you subsequently download or publish changes to the panels, panel
buttons that were assigned to removed items become unassigned in the interface.
After auto validation, some panels may need to be edited to add in new items or to recreate removed
items in the panel.
The Logical Database Editor Dialog Box

The Logical Database Editor dialog box is a tabbed dialog that includes all functions necessary for
configuring a logical database. When this dialog box is accessed the Sources tab is automatically
selected.
Figure 122: Logical Database Editor Dialog Box
Sources Tab
See Configuring Sources (on page 758) for a detailed explanation of the tab’s components.
Destinations Tab
At the Destinations tab, you can add, edit, or remove destinations; assign or change destination names;
and assign level inputs to logical destinations.
See Configuring Destinations (on page 771) for a detailed explanation of the tab’s components.
Levels Tab
icons with levels; add new levels; specify a logical router size; modify level colors, and designate the
number of actual hardware inputs and outputs configured for a level.
See Configuring Levels (on page 781) for a detailed explanation of the tab’s components.
Categories Tab
names; and view sources and destinations affected by a particular index.
See Configuring Categories and Indexes (on page 788) for a detailed explanation of the tab’s
components.
Grouping Tab
At the Grouping tab, you can set up groups for sources, destinations, and salvos.
See Grouping Tab Components (on page 796) for a detailed explanation of the tab’s components.
Tielines Tab
At the Tielines tab you can add, edit, or remove tielines, as well as set advanced tieline configuration
options. The Tielines tab is activated when the Show Tielines Column button is pressed (see Identifying
Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar (on page 737)).
Some of the icons in the Database Editor Toolbar have different functions when they are accessed from
the Tielines tab.
See Tielines Tab Components (on page 801) for a detailed explanation of the tab’s components.
Using Graphical Tools

Database editing is done via using the tools found on either the Icon toolbar at the top of the Logical
Database Editor dialog box, or via a series of shortcut menus that can be accessed via right-clicking the
mouse button (see Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar (on page 737)).
Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar

The Database Editor includes graphical icons for commonly-needed configuration tasks. These icons are
shown in the toolbar at the top of the Logical Database Editor pane.
Toolbar icon selections are explained below. If you do not remember the function of a particular icon,
you can hover the screen cursor over the icon for a moment until the icon function appears onscreen. In
addition, each menu icon appears by its counterpart command whenever you access a shortcut menu.
Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions

(• = Where Accessible)
Used With
Icon Function
Destinations
Categories/
Sources
Indexes
Tielines
Levels
Save • • • • •
Saves the current configuration
Publish Logical Names to Devices • • • • •
Provides the capability to distribute salvos and the information in the
names.txt file to all devices in a routing system (see Publishing Logical
Files to Devices (on page 748) for more information)
Print • • • •
Prints the currently selected tab
Cut • • •
Removes a selected item, but saves it in memory so that it can be
accessed (this function is particularly useful when using information
from external programs such as Microsoft Excel or another Windows
application)
Copy • • • •
Copies a selected item and saves the copy in memory so that it can
be accessed (this function is particularly useful when using
information from external programs such as Microsoft Excel or
another Windows application)
Paste • • • •
Places the item stored in memory into a specified location (this
function is particularly useful when using information from external
programs such as Microsoft Excel or another Windows application)
Undo • • •
Cancels a previously performed task; for example, accidentally
deleting a source (when a user moves away from a tab, the Undo
selections for that tab are cleared from memory)
Redo • • •
Repeats a previously performed task that was cancelled (when a user
moves away from a tab, the Redo selections for that tab are cleared
from memory)
Add • • •
Adds a new source or destination to the end of an existing list
Insert; Add Multiple Tielines • • • •
At the Sources and Destinations tabs, adds a new source or
destination to a specified location in an existing list
At the Tielines tab, allows the addition and setup of more than one
tieline at the same time (see Adding Tielines (on page 803) for more
information)
Configure Device Types Wizard • •
Allows a user to configure predefined types for inserting sources and
destinations
Delete • • • •
Removes selected item from the existing database; item can be
accessed via the Undo and Redo functions (when a user moves away
from a tab, the Undo and Redo selections for that tab are cleared
from memory, so the deleted item can no longer be accessed)
Add New Level • • •
Adds a new level to an existing database
Sort • •
Allows database elements to be sorted in ascending (A...Z; 1, 2, 3...)
or descending (Z...A; ...3, 2, 1) order
Refresh Threads (Tieline tab only) •
See Adding Tielines (on page 803) for more information
Download Tielines (Tieline tab only) •

Poll Tielines (Tieline tab only) •

Change Partition Details (Tieline tab only) •

Find/Replace • •
Locates specific information within a selected tab; also allows
searches for specified information that can be replaced with other
information
Hide Selected Column • •
Removes a selected source or destination column from view but does
not cut or delete the selected column (you must use the Show
Tielines Column icon to hide visible tieline columns)
Hide Status Names • •
Removes a selected source or destination column from view but does
not cut or delete the selected column
Show/Hide Tielines Column • •
When in Show mode, displays the tielines associated with sources
and destination; displays the Tielines tab
When in Hide mode, removes a selected source or destination tieline
column from view but does not cut or delete the selected column;
hides the Tielines tab
Show All Columns • •
Returns all hidden source and destination columns to view (you must
use the Show Tielines Column icon to reveal hidden tieline columns)
Filtering Options • •
Allows mono and tieline sources and tieline destinations to be hidden
Resync List • •
Resynchronizes the selected source or destination logical IDs to
match the physical row order from 1 to x (where x represents the
highest source or destination number in the database)
Edit Images • • • • •
Launches the Icon Management utility (see Using the Image
Management Utility (on page 741) for more information)
Export • • • • •
Allows database names to be exported for protocols that use names
(rather than numeric indices) in commands to identify router levels,
sources, and destinations
Database names can be exported in TXT format or into a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet format
(see Exporting Database Names (on page 744) for more information)
Import • • •
Allows database names to be imported from a file or from a device
(seeImporting Files for Database Editor (on page 746) for more
information)
Status Names Drop-Down Box • •
Provides Status names, physical view1 , or matrix view2 capability for
Sources and Destinations
Options • • • • •
Allows customizing of certain functions to include warning messages,
additional informational messages, and number adjustment (see
Using the Options Dialog (on page 749) for more information)
Help • • • • •
Allows access to on-line and context-sensitive help information
1 Lists level inputs by frame name:slot number:port
2 Lists level inputs or outputs by frame name:matrix name:matrix index
Using the Image Management Utility

Selecting the Edit Images icon opens the Image Management dialog box.
When you open the Image Management dialog box for the first time, the display box is empty. To
populate the display box, click Defaults.
Figure 123: Image Management Dialog Box
You can add and delete unique image icons assigned to sources and destinations via the this dialog box.
These icons are displayed in the Icon boxes on the Sources and Destinations tabs, and on control panels.
You can add new icons, remove icons, or restore the default icons that come with Magellan CCS
Navigator.
The Image Management dialog display box provides a thumbnail view of each one of the icons currently
available for use in a database.
Adding Icons
The Add button brings up a dialog that allows you to extract a single icon from any icon file or
executable file (*.ico, *.dll, or *.exe). You can use the dialog to select a file to extract the icon from, and
then to select the icon you want from within the file.
This option allows you to choose one icon at a time. To select multiple icons, use the Add Multiple
option.
To add a single custom icon, follow these steps:

1. Select the Edit Images icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
The Image Management dialog box opens.
2. Click Add.
The Change Icon dialog box opens.
Figure 124: Change Icon Dialog Box
The file name and path for Microsoft® Windows standard icons are highlighted in the File Name box
and thumbnail views of all of these standard icons are displayed in the Current Icon box.
 If the icon you want is displayed
a. Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to add, and then click OK.
The selected icon’s thumbnail appears in the Image Management display box.
b. Click OK to accept the changes.
 If the icon you want is not displayed
a. Click Browse....
A browse box opens.
b. Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the file you want to display.
c. Highlight the name of the file you want, and then click Open.
A thumbnail view of the icon file you selected appears in the Change Icon browse box.
d. Click OK.
The selected icon’s thumbnail appears in the Image Management display box.
e. Click OK to accept the changes.
To add multiple custom icons, follow these steps:

2. Click Add Multiple.
The Select Icons to Add dialog box opens.
Figure 125: Select Icons to Add Dialog Box
3. Use Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the files you want to add.
4. Highlight the names of the files you want, and then click Open. Multiple files may be selected using
standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys) to select multiple
files.
The selected icons’ thumbnails appear in the in the Image Management display box.
Restoring Default Icons

When restoring the default icon list, Magellan CCS Navigator deletes any icons that you added to the
original list.
2. Click Defaults.
An information message appears.
3. Click Yes.
The default icon list appears in the Image Management display box.
4. Click OK to accept the changes.
Removing Icons
2. Click on the thumbnail for the icon you want to remove.
3. Click Delete.
The selected icon is removed from the Image Management display box.
To remove all icons, click Delete All.
Any icons listed in the Image Management display box are removed.
Exporting Database Names

The Export function allows database names to be exported for protocols that use names (rather than
numeric indices) in commands to identify router levels, sources, and destinations.
Selecting the Export icon opens a selection box. The selections available are for exporting database
names into a text file format (*.TXT) or a Microsoft Excel 2007 macro-enabled file format (*.XLSM). This
spreadsheet is available for offline editing if desired.
Exporting into a Text File Format

1. Click the Export icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
2. A selection box opens.
3. Select Export Database Names.
The Save Names Export dialog box opens.
Figure 126: Save Names Export Dialog Box
4. In the File name box, enter a name for the file you want to export.
Make sure that Logical Configuration files (*.txt) is selected in the Save as type box.
5. Click Save, or, to save the file in a different location than the default, click the Save in drop-down list
box, and then navigate to the desired file location.
The file is saved in the selected location.
6. If desired, open the exported text file.
The text file is set up with comma-delimited field entries for import into a different format desired.
Exporting into a Spreadsheet File Format
The Export function creates spreadsheet files that can be edited directly in Microsoft Excel 2007. In
other Excel versions, the original spreadsheet appears as read-only; it must be saved under another
name to perform editing tasks.
1. Click the Export icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
3. Select Export to Microsoft Excel.
The Excel Export dialog box opens.
Figure 127: Excel Export Dialog Box
4. In the File name box, enter a name for the file you want to export.
Make sure that Microsoft Excel Macro-Enabled Files (*.xlsm) is selected in the Save as type box.
5. Click Save, or to save the file in a different location than the default, click the Save in drop-down list
box, and then navigate to the desired file location.
The file is saved in the selected location.
6. If desired, open the exported spreadsheet for editing.
The spreadsheet layout has a similar "look and feel" as the Database Editor layout. Different tabs are
set up for sources, destinations, levels, categories, device types, and tielines (if used).
When opening an exported spreadsheet in Excel, make sure to select the Enable Macros function.
7. Edit the spreadsheet entries in Excel, and then save the file. The changed file can be uploaded into
Database Editor via the Import function.
You may also save this spreadsheet under different names, and then edit them as appropriate. These
other spreadsheets can be uploaded into Database Editor via the Import function.
Importing Files for Database Editor

The Import function allows database information to be uploaded from Excel spreadsheets or from other
devices. This information can then be used by Database Editor for configuration purposes.
Importing from a File

1. Click the Import icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
3. Select Import from File.

The Import dialog box opens.
Figure 128: Import Dialog Box
Importing text files to or from a device does not include tieline or wizard type information.
 To import a text file, set the Files of type drop-down box to Logical Configuration Files.
 To import a spreadsheet file, set the Files of type drop-down box to Microsoft Excel Macro-
Enabled Files (*.xlsm).
4. If the file is located in a subdirectory different from the one that is open, navigate to the file’s
location.
5. Highlight the appropriate file name, and then click Open.
A warning message opens.
6. Click Yes to continue.
The file is imported into Database Editor.
Importing from Another Device

1. Click the Import icon from the Navigator Icon toolbar.
3. Select Import from Device.
The IP Address dialog box (below) opens.
Figure 129: IP Address Dialog Box
4. Enter the IP address of the device to import from, and then click OK.
The file is imported into Database Editor.
Publishing Logical Files to Devices

To facilitate easier distribution of logical information, Database Editor allows you to distribute salvos and
other database information in the names.txt file to all of the devices in the routing system.
Publish is an Ethernet-only operation. Most legacy devices do not support the Publish feature in
Magellan CCS Navigator. Other devices may require a software upgrade. Platinum frames require PT-
RES version V4.1 or higher, and Panacea frames with enhanced resource cards require V4.0 or higher in
order to properly support the publish feature. Magellan control panels support publish with any version.
To publish salvos and names.txt files to a routing system’s devices, follow these steps:
1. Click the Apply Logical Names To Devices icon on the Database Editor toolbar.
The Publishing To Devices... dialog box opens.
All existing device list components are preselected; however, you can uncheck any selection that
you do not want to publish to.
2. Click the Start Transfer button at the bottom left corner of the dialog box.
The file transfer begins. As the file transfer takes place, information messages are displayed in the
Overall Status text box.
3. After each device has the names.txt transferred to it, Database Editor sends an X-Y command to the
system to let the devices know to refresh their names.txt files. Once that command is sent, the
transfer is complete.
If some devices fail to transfer or the command fails to send, the Retry button is displayed. Clicking the
Retry button enables Database Editor to repeat the process for the failed devices.
Using the Options Dialog

Selecting the Options icon opens the Options dialog box. This dialog box provides the means by which
you can allow certain functions (such as warnings, informational messages, and logical device number
adjustments) to appear onscreen as you perform various configuration tasks.
You can enable or disable the options for each tab separately; in addition, you can enable or disable
different adjustments for the type of task being performed. For example, to allow Database Editor to
automatically adjust existing source numbers when a new device is added, the check box for Source
Page > Insert > Adjust Source Number must be selected.
Figure 130: Options Dialog Box
To use the advanced insertion and deletion functions, the Show Dialog selection must be enabled. If it is
not enabled, the Insert Options dialog box does not appear.
Using Shortcut Menus

The Database Editor includes shortcut menus that list selections for some commonly-needed
configuration tasks used with Sources, Destinations, and Levels. (Shortcut menus are not available for
Categories.) Whenever you access a shortcut menu, the selection display will show the appropriate icon
to the left of its counterpart selection, and the associated keyboard command appears to the right of its
counterpart selection.
If a menu option is not available it is disabled.
Most of the shortcut menu functions are described in Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar
(on page 737); however, the Icon toolbar does not include icons for the Select All, Go To, Fill Series, and
Fill Selection menu items. These selections are defined in the table below.
Figure 131: Shortcut Menu Selections
Table 134: Menu-Specific Selections and Functions

Icon Function
Select All
Selects all of the lines/cell locations within a Sources, Destinations, or Levels tab
Go to
Moves immediately to the line location that corresponds to the number designated in the
Go to text box
Fill Series
Copies the contents (incrementing by one for each cell) of the first selected cell into one or
more contiguous cells below the selected cell; most useful with cells that contain numerals
or both text and numerals
Fill
Copies the exact contents of the first selected cell into one or more contiguous cells below
the selected cell
Manipulating Display Elements

Each tabbed dialog has certain display elements that can be manipulated within Navigator. You can hide
or display selected columns, fill one or more cells with exact or similar information, and sort columns in
ascending or descending order.
Hiding a Column
These methods do not hide tieline columns. To hide a tieline column, click the Show Tielines Column
icon in the Icon toolbar.
There are two methods to hide (not delete) a column so that you can no longer see it while you are
working:
• Method 1: Select the column you want to hide, and then click the Hide Selected Column icon from
the Logical Database Editor toolbar.
• Method 2:
a. Right-click the name (at the top of the dialog box) of the level column you want to hide.
b. Select Hide Column.
The chosen column will be hidden from view.
Figure 132: Hiding a Column
Unhiding a Column
To "unhide" a previously hidden column (so that you can see it while you are working), click the Show
All Columns icon on the Icon toolbar.
The Show All Columns icon does not unhide tieline columns. To unhide a tieline column, click the Show
Tielines Column icon on the Icon toolbar.
Filtering Columns
The column filter option allows mono sources, tieline sources, and tieline destinations to be hidden from
view without hiding the rest of the column’s entries.
To set the desired filtering options,

1. Click the Filtering Options icon on the Icon toolbar.
The Filtering Options dialog box opens.
Figure 133: Filtering Options Dialog Box
2. Click the check box to the right of the desired Filtering Options selection.
3. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the main Database Editor window.
Selected sources and/or destination types are hidden from view, while all other sources and
destinations are still displayed.
Sorting a Column
Columns can be sorted in be sorted in ascending (A...Z; 1, 2, 3...) or descending (Z...A; ...3, 2, 1) order.
• Method 1: Highlight the column you want to sort, and then click the Sort icon on the Icon toolbar.
• Method 2:
a. Highlight the column you want to sort, and then right-click the mouse.
b. Select Sort Column.
c. If the column is sorted in the wrong order (ascending instead of descending, or vice versa),
repeat steps a and b.
The column will be sorted in ascending or descending order according to the column chosen for the sort.
Figure 134: Sorting Columns
Sorting Multiple Columns

Multiple columns can be sorted in the Sources and Destinations tabs.
1. Highlight the column you want to use for the primary sort.
2. Double-click the column title to sort the column’s contents in the desired order (ascending or
descending).
3. Highlight the column you want to use for the secondary sort.
4. Hold down the <Ctrl> key, and then double-click the column title to sort the column’s contents in
the desired order (ascending or descending).
Filling a Column
If you have information that you want to copy from one cell to one or more other cells in a column (or in
multiple columns), you can use the Fill or Fill Series command from the shortcut menu. (No icon exists
for the Fill or Fill Series command.)
• Use the Fill command to copy the exact contents of the first selected cell into one or more selected
cells.
• Use the Fill Series command to numerically increment the contents (incrementing by one for each
cell) of the first selected cell into one or more contiguous cells below the selected cell.
Figure 135: Fill and Fill Series Results
The Fill Series will truncate entries if they have more characters than allowed in a column. For example,
if a Source Name is called "CameraSource 999" and the Fill Series function is used to enter information
into selected cells, a user would expect "CameraSource 1000" to be the next cell value. Because the
Name column only allows up to 16 characters (and "CameraSource 999" has 16 letters), the 0 will be cut
off, thereby making the entry "CameraSource 100."
Navigating Through Selections

In addition to the traditional Windows navigation techniques (such as using the Page Up and Page Down
keys), Navigator has several specialized navigation techniques that allow you to move quickly and easily
up and down a selected tab. These navigation techniques include the Find and Go to commands.
Finding Text
Use the Find command to locate specific information within the selected tab. You can use any
combination of text and/or numbers.
There are three different methods to select the Find capability:

• Method 1: Click the Find icon on the Icon toolbar.
• Method 2: Right-click the mouse, and then select Find from the shortcut menu list.
• Method 3: Use the <Ctrl> F keyboard command.
The Find/Replace dialog box opens.
Figure 136: Finding Information
Enter the search parameters (that is, text and/or number combinations) in the appropriate list box, and
then click Find Next. You may refine your search by selecting the appropriate check boxes and drop-
down list selections.
When your search is complete, click Close to return to the originally selected tab.
Replacing Text
Use the Find command to locate and change specific information within the selected tab. You can use
any combination of text and/or numbers.
There are three different methods to select the replace capability:

• Method 1: Click the Find icon on the Icon toolbar.
• Method 2: Right-click the mouse, and then select Find from the shortcut menu list.
• Method 3: Use the <Ctrl> F keyboard command.
The Find/Replace dialog box opens.
Figure 137: Replacing Information
1. Enter the search parameters (that is, text and/or number combinations) in the appropriate list box.
2. Enter the replacement parameters in the Replace with list box. You may refine your search by
selecting the appropriate check boxes and drop-down list selections.
3. Choose one of the following:
 Click Replace to change only one instance of the change parameters.
 Click Replace All to change all instances of the change parameters.
The Replace/Replace All functions will truncate entries if they have more characters than allowed in
a column.
4. When your replacement is complete, click Close to return to the originally selected tab.
Moving to a Specific Line Location

To move to a specific line location within the originally selected tab, right-click the mouse, and then
enter the desired line number in the Go to selection box in the shortcut menu. (No icon exists on the
Icon toolbar for the Go to command.)
Figure 138: Go To Command
Error Feedback
The Database Editor indicates database errors via a variety of color-coding, embedded messages, and
error messages.
Color Codes
DB Editor color codes give you a general idea of the severity of a database error. These colors appear in
the cell body where the error appears.Color codes are as follows:
• Red: The error must be fixed before the database can be saved.
• Yellow: The error on that cell data is not severe enough to keep the database from being saved, but
should be checked to make sure that it is correct.
Embedded Messages
During a Database Editor session, special information messages will appear to inform you of issues
within a database. These messages may indicate errors or provide you with useful information
Figure 139: Error Message
Before Database Editor completes a save, it will send out a summary of the existing errors within the
database. Click on the error message within the summary dialog to be transferred to the error location.
Figure 140: Error Summary List
Chapter 45
Configuring Sources
Figure 141: Sources Tab
Each column on the Sources tab has its own unique function, as follows.
• Source Number: The Source Number is a non-editable ordering (or index) of available logical
sources. Control panels bring in sources in the Source Number order.
• Name: When a database is first created, each logical source is assigned a generic name such as "In
1," "In 2," and so forth. Each logical source can be renamed with a uniquely identifying name. This
name appears on RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on printed key caps for push button
control panels.
The capability for enabling 16-character names is set in the Options dialog box. The Database Editor
truncates entries if they have more characters than allowed.
A source name can contain any 8 or 16 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning and
Editing Names (on page 761) for more information.
• Long Name: The Long Name further clarifies the source by allowing a longer, more descriptive
name.
A long name can contain any 30 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning and Editing Names
The Long Name field supports Unicode input.
• Alias: The Alias column is used for any additional clarifying name for a source.
An alias can contain any 30 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning and Editing Names (on
• Image: A unique icon can be assigned to each logical source. The icon appears on RouterWorks
control panels. The Image column contains a drop-down list of currently available icons to you can use
to represent a particular source. (Icons are not used on ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.) See
Assigning Images to Sources (on page 761) for more information.
• Description: The Description field is used to include information that the user may find useful for
further identifying a source. For example, you may want to include a source’s location or the kind of
input device it is.
Description information can contain any 1003 alphabetic or numeric characters.
• Tielines: The Tielines field is used to expand the size of a system, make resources available to several
users at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
The Tielines field does not appear unless you have enabled the Show Tielines Column setting from
the Database Editor toolbar. See Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar (on page 737).
See Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800) for detailed information about setting up tielines.
• Grouping: The Grouping field is used to display the names of any group in which a source is included.
See Configuring Grouping (on page 796) for detailed information about setting up grouping.
• Level: Each Level column consists of two subcolumns: the Index column and the Name column.
 The Index column displays the level input index, to address the physical connection in a matrix.
 The Name column displays what known as the Status name; that is, the name that identifies
which sources are connected on each level.
See Statusing and Status Names (on page 761) for more information.
The Sources tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to all Database
Editor elements. See Working with Common Controls (on page 730) for detailed information about
these techniques.
Adding Logical Sources

Method 1: Click the Add icon at the Logical Database Editor toolbar. This works on a line-by-line basis
and useful for adding one source at a time.
The new source appears at the bottom of the Sources list.
Method 2:
a. Highlight the entire row where you want to add sources, and then click the Insert icon at the
Logical Database Editor toolbar.
b. Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.

The Insert Options dialog box opens.
The Insert Options dialog box does not appear unless you have selected the appropriate Show
Dialog check boxes at the Options dialog box. See Using the Options Dialog (on page 749).
c. Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new sources appear at the location you selected.
This method is useful for entering multiple rows via the Insert Options dialog box. The selection of this
method for adding a logical source is more fully explained in Using the Insertion Wizard (on page 842).
Method 3:
a. Highlight the entire row where you want to add sources, and then right-click the mouse.
b. Select Insert Sources.
c. Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
d. Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new sources appear at the location you selected.
This method is useful for entering multiple rows via the Insert Options dialog box. The selection of this
method for adding a logical source is more fully explained in Using the Insertion Wizard (on page 842).
Method 4:
a. Highlight the entire row where you want to add sources, and then right-click the mouse.
b. Select Insert from Device Type.
The Insertion Wizard opens.
c. Follow the procedures outlined in Using the Insertion Wizard (on page 842).
Removing Logical Sources

Method 1: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then click the Delete icon.
Method 2: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then right-click the mouse.
Click Delete Sources.
Method 3: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then press the Delete key.
The source is removed from the Sources list.
Renumbering Sources
After sources are added or deleted, the remaining sources do not automatically renumber themselves.
For automatic renumbering to take place, you must select the appropriate Show Dialog check box at the
Options dialog box. See Using the Options Dialog (on page 749) for more information on this function.
Assigning Images to Sources

See Using the Image Management Utility (on page 741) for information about adding images to a
routing configuration database.
1. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Image box of the desired Source selection.
A drop-down list containing icons for a number of common audio and video devices appears.
2. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of icons.
3. Click the desired icon to associate with the Source selection.
See Importing Files for Database Editor (on page 746) for information on how to import sources from a
database or from another device.
See Exporting Database Names (on page 744) for information on how to export sources to a database or
a text file.
Assigning and Editing Names

You can perform the following naming actions:
• Statusing and Status Names (on page 761)
• Assigning Source or Status Names (on page 763)
• Adjusting Source Numbers (on page 764)
• Renaming Status Names and Related Sources (on page 765)
Statusing and Status Names

RCP-ABA control panels include four windows that can be used to display the current status of the
router (that is, which sources and destinations are connected on each level). The name assigned to the
source or destination is displayed in the window, and a status LED is lit to indicate that the panel is
operating in statusing mode.
Figure 142: Magellan CCS Navigator Status Name Indicators
Figure 143: RCP-ABA Statusing
If a level input is assigned to more than one logical source on a level, how does the panel know which
Status Name to display in the status window? For example, consider a router database that includes two
logical sources named "Test 1" and "Test 2." When Test 1 is selected, you want BARS to be connected on
the video level, and SILENCE on the audio level. When Test 2 is selected, you want BARS to be connected
on the video level, and TONE on the audio level. The logical source-to-level input mapping would look
like below.
Figure 144: Status Name Mapping Example
But if both logical sources in our example share the BARS input, how would the ABA panel know which
Status Name to display on the video level? Should it display "Test 1" or "Test 2?" To solve this problem,
the ABA panels display Status Names in the status windows instead of the Source Names. In our
example, the status windows would look like below.
Figure 145: RCP-ABA Status Name Usage
Assigning Source or Status Names

Status names display the current status of a router and appear in the Source displays of a control panel.
The source name you assign here also appears in the Assigned Sources box of the Categories tab (or, if
no category is generated, in the Unassigned Sources box). This name is also used to generate new
categories and indexes. For more information, see Creating and Managing Categories (on page 790).
When a Source name is entered in the database, Magellan CCS Navigator uses the name to
automatically create a category and index. Magellan CCS Navigator finds the last space in the Source
name, and then uses all characters to the left of that space as the category (the space is included in the
category name). All characters to the right of the space becomes the index. For example, if a logical
source is named "VTR 1," Magellan CCS Navigator creates a category named "VTR." Similarly, if a logical
destination is named "SAT 1," a category named "SAT" is created.
If the Source name does NOT include a space, the entire name is used to create the category name. For
example, if "VTR1" is typed WITHOUT a space, the category "VTR1" is created. This may limit the
number of sources that can be accessed from the panel. Use spaces appropriately when naming sources.
If any character after the space is not a valid index character (valid characters are any combination of
numbers, 0-9), the entire name is used to create the category name. For example, if "VTR 10B" is typed,
a category named "VTR 10B" is created (not a category "VTR" and an index "10B").
Keep in mind how the choice of a source name impacts category indexing. (Category indexing is the
primary method of selecting sources and destinations on an ABA panel.) Database Editor automatically
generates categories and indexes when source names are assigned, so it is important to understand the
category indexing process before a source name is selected. See Configuring Categories and Indexes (on
The process for assigning source names and status names is identical.
1. Highlight the text in the Name and/or Long Name box(es).
2. Over-type the text with the new name.
If you want to make sure that the source name is associated with both a category and an index, make
sure to include an index number with the name (for example, Test 1 or Test1).
Database Editor uses this information to create a new category and index when the Generate Missing
Categories and Indexes function is run.
Certain characters are "illegal" when assigning or editing source or status names. These characters are
the ~,\, and all non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters). These characters may
corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the database.
Adjusting Source Numbers

By default, when source are added or deleted, the remaining source numbers do not automatically
readjust. To allow automatic number readjustment, enable the Adjust Source Number selection for the
Sources Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 146: Adjust Source Number Selection Enabled
Renaming Status Names and Related Sources

To allow automatic parallel renaming of status names or related sources when an initial source is
renamed, enable the Renaming selections for the Sources Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 147: Renaming Selections Enabled
When you select "Renaming Related Sources On Name Change," Magellan CCS Navigator looks for
sources (like mono sources) related to the source you are renaming and automatically updates those
names.
Working with Levels from the Sources Tab

You can perform the following actions on levels in the Sources tab:
• Assigning Level Inputs and Physical Inputs (on page 765)
• Adding Levels
• Removing Levels
• Hiding and Unhiding Levels
• Adjusting Level Inputs (on page 767)
Assigning Level Inputs and Physical Inputs

The Sources tab includes one Level Input column for each level. A logical source can be disabled on one
level and enabled on others. For example, if your source is named "CAMERA," you probably want to
disable all audio levels for that source. Likewise, an audio deck source only requires that audio levels be
enabled.
1. If necessary, add a new level as described.
2. Click the Level Input number.
A drop-down list box arrow appears.

3. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and then select the desired physical source.
Alternatively, type the desired Level Input number in the box.)
Figure 148: Assigning Level inputs
You can add levels from the Sources tab by clicking the Add New Level icon in the Logical Database
Editor toolbar. The new level is added to the logical database. The number that appears in the Levels list
for each source is the level (or physical) input. This newly-added level is accessible for updates or
changes via the Levels tab.
You cannot remove a level from the Sources tab. You must switch to the Levels tab to remove a level.
See Manipulating Display Elements (on page 751) for information on how to hide and unhide Levels
columns.
Adjusting Level Inputs

By default, when sources are added or deleted, the level input index and level input names do not
automatically readjust. To allow automatic level input selection readjustment, enable the Level Input
selections for the Sources Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 149: Level Input Selections Enabled
Mapping Logical Sources to Level Inputs

A logical source need not include connections on all levels in the system. It is possible to define video-
only or audio-only logical sources. Unused level inputs can then be used to create separate logical
sources. In the example below, the system includes several cameras (video-only inputs). The unused
audio inputs is used to create separate logical sources for audio-only devices. Because the audio-only
devices are defined as separate logical sources, they are independent of the cameras and can be
selected without having to perform a breakaway operation.
Figure 150: Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Sources
If a logical source involves multiple levels, the input numbers used by the device need not be the same
on all levels. For example, a VTR may connect to input 5 on the video level, input 13 on the audio level
and input 3 on the time code level. Once the logical source has been defined, the fact that different
inputs are used on different levels is completely hidden from the user. All appropriate inputs are
selected when the logical source is selected. This feature allows the various levels to be of different sizes
and allows them to be wired independently of each other.
Figure 151: "Wild-Mapping" of Sources
Sharing Level Inputs

A level input may be assigned to more than one logical source on a level. A common application of this
feature is a system configuration in which a user wishes to associate the same audio signal to multiple
video-only sources. For example, when broadcasting an auto race, you might wish to associate the
announcer’s audio with all cameras. Whenever any camera source is connected to a video and audio
destination, the announcer’s audio is also selected on the audio level. By allowing multiple camera
logical inputs to share the same audio signal, level inputs are saved.
Figure 152: Shared Sources
Chapter 46
Configuring Destinations
Figure 153: Destinations Tab
At the Destinations tab, you can add, edit, or remove destinations; assign or change destination names;
and assign level inputs to logical destinations.
Each column on the Destinations tab has its own unique function, as follows
• Destination Number: The Destination Number is a non-editable ordering (or index) of available
logical destinations. Control panels bring in destinations in the Destination Number order.
• Name: When a database is first created, each logical destinations is assigned a generic name such as
"In 1," "In 2," and so forth. Each logical destination can be renamed with a uniquely identifying
name. This name appears on RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on printed key caps for push
button control panels.
A destination name can contain any 8 or 161 2 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning and
Editing Names (on page 774) for more information.
The capability for enabling 16-character names is set in the Options dialog box as described in Using
the Options Dialog (on page 749). Database Editor truncates entries if they have more characters
than allowed.
• Long Name: The Long Name further clarifies the destination by allowing a longer, more descriptive
name.
A long name can contain any 30 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning and Editing Names
The Long Name field supports Unicode input.
• Alias: The Alias column is used for any additional clarifying name for a destination.
An alias can contain any 30 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning Destination or Status
Names (on page 774) for more information.
• Image: A unique icon can be assigned to each logical destination. The icon appears on RouterWorks
control panels. The Image column contains a drop-down list of currently available icons to you can
use to represent a particular destination. (Icons are not used on ABA or pushbutton hardware
panels.) See Assigning Images to Destinations (on page 773) for more information.
• Description: The Description field is used to include information that the user may find useful for
further identifying a destination. For example, you may want to include a destination’s location or
the kind of input device it is.
Description information can contain any 2563 alphabetic or numeric characters.
• Tielines: The Tielines field is used to expand the size of a system, make resources available to
several users at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
The Tielines field does not appear unless you have enabled the Show Tielines Column setting from
the Database Editor toolbar. See Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar (on page 737).
See Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800) for detailed information about setting up tielines.
• Grouping: The Grouping field is used to display the names of any group in which a destination is
included.
See Configuring Grouping (on page 796) for detailed information about setting up grouping.
• Level: Each Level column consists of two subcolumns: the Index column and the Name column.
 The Index column displays the level output index, to address the physical connection in a matrix.
 The Name column displays what known as the Status name; that is, the name that identifies
which sources are connected on each level.
See Assigning and Editing Names (on page 774) for more information.
The Destinations tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to all
Database Editor elements. See Working with Common Controls (on page 730) for detailed information
about these techniques.
Adding Logical Destinations

Method 1: Click the Add icon at the Logical Database Editor toolbar. (This works on a line-by-line basis
and useful for adding one destination at a time.)
The new destination appears at the bottom of the Destinations list.
Method 2: This method is particularly useful for entering multiple rows via the Insert Options dialog box.
The selection of this method for adding a logical destination is more fully explained in Using the
Insertion Wizard (on page 842).
Highlight the entire row where you want to add destinations, and then click the Insert icon at the
Logical Database Editor toolbar.
a. Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
The Insert Options dialog box opens. See Using the Options Dialog (on page 749).
b. Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new destinations appear at the location you selected.
Method 3:This method is also useful for entering multiple rows via the Insert Options dialog box. The
selection of this method for adding a logical destination is more fully explained in Using the Insertion
Wizard (on page 842).
a. Highlight the entire row where you want to add destinations, and then right-click the mouse.
b. Select Insert Destinations.
c. Select Insert Before or Insert After Selected Rows.
The Insert Options dialog box does not appear unless you have selected the appropriate Show
Dialog check boxes at the Options window. See Using the Options Dialog (on page 749).
d. Select the desired options, and then click OK.
The new destinations appear at the location you selected.
Method 4:
a. Highlight the entire row where you want to add destinations, and then right-click the mouse.
b. Select Insert from Device Type.
The Insertion Wizard opens.
c. Follow the procedures outlined in Using the Insertion Wizard (on page 842).
Removing Logical Destinations

• Method 1: Highlight the destination you want to remove, and then click the Delete icon.
• Method 2: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then right-click the mouse.
Click Delete Destinations.
• Method 3: Highlight the source you want to remove, and then press the Delete key.
The source is removed from the Destinations list.
Assigning Images to Destinations

See Using the Image Management Utility (on page 741) for information about adding images to a
routing configuration database.
1. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Image box of the desired Destination selection.
3. Click the desired icon to associate with the Destination selection.
See Importing Files for Database Editor (on page 746) for information on how to import destinations
from a database or from another device.
See Exporting Database Names (on page 744) for information on how to export destinations to a
database or a text file.
Assigning and Editing Names

You can perform the following naming actions:
• Assigning Destination or Status Names (on page 774)
• Adjusting Destination Numbers (on page 775)
• Renaming Status Names and Related Destinations (on page 776)
Statusing and status names are not currently used in Database Editor destinations. They will be included
in future releases.
Assigning Destination or Status Names

Status names display the current status of a router and appear in the Destination displays of a control
panel.
The destination name you assign here also appears in the Assigned Destinations box of the Categories
tab (or, if no category is generated, in the Unassigned Destinations box). For more information, see
Creating and Managing Categories (on page 790).
When a Destination name is entered in the database, Navigator uses the name to automatically create a
category and index. Navigator finds the last space in the Destination name, and then uses all characters
to the left of that space as the category (the space is included in the category name). All characters to
the right of the space becomes the index. For example, if a logical source is named "VTR 1," Navigator
creates a category named "VTR." Similarly, if a logical destination is named "SAT 1," a category named
"SAT" is created.
If the Destination name does NOT include a space, the entire name is used to create the category name.
For example, if "VTR1" is typed WITHOUT a space, the category "VTR1" is created. This may limit the
number of destinations that can be accessed from the panel. Use spaces appropriately when naming
destinations. If any character after the space is not a valid index character (valid characters are any
combination of numbers, 0-9), the entire name is used to create the category name. For example, if
"VTR 10B" is typed, a category named "VTR 10B" is created (not a category "VTR" and an index "10B").
Keep in mind how the choice of a destination name impacts category indexing. (Category indexing is the
primary method of selecting destinations and destinations on an ABA panel.) Database Editor
automatically generates categories and indexes when destination names are assigned, so it is important
to understand the category indexing process before a destination name is selected. See Configuring
Categories and Indexes (on page 788) for a detailed explanation of category indexing.
The process for assigning destination names and status names is identical.
1. Highlight the text in the Name and/or Long Name box(es).
If you want to make sure that the destination name is associated with both a category and an index,
make sure to include an index number with the name (for example, Dest 1 or Dest1).
Database Editor uses this information to create a new category and index when the Generate Missing
Categories and Indexes function is run.
Certain characters are "illegal" when assigning or editing destination and status names. These characters
are the ~,\, and all non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters). These characters may
corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the database.
Adjusting Destination Numbers

By default, when destination are added or deleted, the remaining destination numbers do not
automatically readjust. To allow automatic number readjustment, enable the Adjust Destination
Number selection for the Destinations Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 154: Adjust Destination Number Selection Enabled
Renaming Status Names and Related Destinations

To allow automatic parallel renaming of status names when an initial destination is renamed, enable the
Renaming selection for the Destinations Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 155: Renaming Selection Enabled
Working with Levels from the Destinations Tab

You can perform the following actions on levels in the Destinations tab:
• Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs (on page 776)
• Adding Levels
• Removing Levels
• Hiding and Unhiding Levels
• Adjusting Level Outputs (on page 778)
Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs

To understand how level outputs, physical outputs and logical destinations work together within a
router, consider the following scenario:
An operator wishes to connect VTR 1 to a destination. He selects the logical source VTR 1 on the control
panel. The control panel requests a switch on level input one. The router interprets the request as a
switch on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3. When VTR 1 is pressed on the control panel, the router performs
the RGB switch on physical inputs 1, 2, and 3.
The Destinations tab window displays one Level Output column for each level. A logical destination can
be disabled on one level and enabled on others. For example, if your destination is named "MONITOR,"
you probably want to disable all audio levels for that destination. A line in the Level Output box indicates
that the destination is disabled on that level.
1. If necessary, add a new level as described.
2. Click the level output number.
A drop-down list box arrow appears.
3. Click the arrow to display a list of valid choices, and select the desired physical destination.
(Alternatively, type the desired level output number in the box.)
Figure 156: Assigning a Level Output
You can add levels from the Destinations tab by clicking the Add New Level icon in the Logical Database
Editor toolbar. The new level is added to the logical database. The number that appears in the Levels list
for each source is the level (or physical) input. This newly-added level is accessible for updates or
changes via the Levels tab.
You cannot remove a level from the Destinations tab. You must switch to the Levels tab to remove a
level.
See Manipulating Display Elements (on page 751) for information on how to hide and unhide Levels
columns.
Adjusting Level Outputs

By default, when destinations are added or deleted, the level output index and level output names do
not automatically readjust. To allow automatic level output selection readjustment, enable the Level
Output selections for the Destinations Page in the Options dialog box.
Figure 157: Level Output Selections Enabled
Mapping of Level Outputs

A logical destination need not include connections on all levels in the system. It is possible to define
video-only or audio-only logical destinations. Unused outputs can then be used to create separate
logical destinations. In the example below, the system includes a pair of router outputs that feed a Still
Store (video-only). The unused audio outputs is used to create separate logical destinations for audio-
only devices such as audio monitoring speakers. Because the audio monitoring speakers are defined as
separate logical destinations, they are independent of the Still Stores and can be selected without
having to perform a breakaway operation. The use of video-only and audio-only destinations helps
maximize use of router outputs.
Figure 158: Mapping of Logical-to-Physical Destination
If a logical destination involves multiple levels, the output numbers used by the device need not be the
same on all levels. For example, a VTR may connect to output 5 on the video level, output 13 on the
audio level and output 3 on the time code level. Once the logical destination has been defined, the fact
that different outputs are used on different levels is completely hidden from the user. All appropriate
outputs are selected when the logical destination is selected. This feature allows the various levels to be
of different sizes and allows them to be wired independently of each other.
Figure 159: "Wild-Mapping" of Logical Destinations
Chapter 47
Configuring Levels
Figure 160: Navigator Levels Tab
In Navigator, a level is a way of grouping inputs and outputs together.
icons with levels; enable or disable any level (usually 0-15) allowed in the system, regardless of whether
there is a router on that level; specify a logical router size; modify level colors, and designate the
Number of actual hardware inputs and outputs configured for a level.
Each column on the Levels tab has its own unique function, as follows
• Logical Router Size: The logical router size, represented in the Sources and Destinations drop-down
list boxes, is defined as the number of inputs and outputs seen by the system and the operator. See
Specifying Logical Router Size (on page 782) for more information.
• Level Number: The Level Number is an editable ordering (or index) of available logical levels. Control
panels bring in levels in the Level number order. See Assigning or Changing Level Numbers (on page
• Name: When a database is first created, each logical level is assigned a generic name such as "Level
0," "Level 1," and so forth. Each logical level can be renamed with a uniquely identifying name. A
level name can contain any 8 alphabetic or numeric characters. See Assigning or Changing Level
Names (on page 784) for more information.
• Color: A unique color can be assigned to each logical level. The level is represented by the selected
color on all control panels based on this database. See Modifying Level Colors (on page 785) for
more information.
• Image: A unique icon can be assigned to each logical level. The icon appears in RouterWorks and on
control panels. The Image column contains a drop-down list of currently available icons to you can
use to represent a particular level. (Icons are not used on ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.) See
Assigning Icons to Levels (on page 786) for more information.
• Inputs: This column displays the number of actual hardware inputs you have configured for this level
in this database. The number of inputs you have is constrained by the specified logical router size.
See Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and Outputs (on page 786) for more information.
• Outputs: This column displays the number of actual hardware outputs you have configured for this
level in this database. The number of outputs you have is constrained by the specified logical router
size. See Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and Outputs (on page 786) for more information.
The Levels tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to all Database
Editor elements. See Working with Common Controls (on page 730) for detailed information about
these techniques.
Specifying Logical Router Size

The logical router size is defined as the number of inputs and outputs seen by the system and the
operator. The values for the logical router size set the maximum values allowed in the Inputs and
Outputs fields for each level. See Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and Outputs (on page 786) for
more information about setting values for the inputs and outputs.
To specify the logical size of the router:

1. Click the Up or Down arrows in the Logical System Size spin boxes or type the appropriate number
in each box.
2. After the change has been made, the Apply and Cancel buttons appear to the right of the selection.
 Click Apply to accept the changes.
 Click Cancel to discard the changes.
Figure 161: Specifying Logical Router Size
Adding Levels
Logical Levels can be added by one of two methods:
• Method 1: At the Logical Database Editor window, click the Add New Level icon.
You can use the Add New Level icon selection to add a Level from the Sources and the Destinations
tabs.
• Method 2: Right-click anywhere on the spreadsheet.
Click Add New Level.
The new level is added to the end of the Levels list.
Removing Levels
Logical Levels can be removed by one of three methods:
• Method 1: Highlight the level you want to remove, and then click the Delete icon.
• Method 2: Highlight the level you want to remove, and then right-click the mouse.
Click Delete Levels.
• Method 3: Highlight the level you want to remove, and then press the Delete key.
The level is removed from the Levels list.
Assigning or Changing Level Numbers

Levels are how a routing system organizes and segregates data. A router database can include up to 16
independent router Levels. Levels are numbered from 0 to 15. These level numbers correspond to the
level number(s) that each physical router frame occupies in the routing system.
Note: IP3 routers can have up to 64 levels, numbered 0 to 63. To configure extra IP3 levels, see Selecting
Connection Types (on page 836).
You can assign or change level numbers as follows:
To assign or change a level number, follow these steps:

1. Click the drop-down list box arrow next to the Level Number.
A list of valid choices for level numbers appears.
2. Select the desired level number. The newly selected level number appears in the Level Number list
box.
Figure 162: Changing Level Numbers
Importing, Exporting, and Sorting Levels

See Importing Files for Database Editor (on page 746) for information on how to import levels from a
database or from another device.
See Exporting Database Names (on page 744) for information on how to export levels to a database or a
text file.
See Manipulating Display Elements (on page 751) for information and explanations of hiding, unhiding,
and sorting columns.
This function is not dynamic; that is, it does not automatically sort the Levels list as you add or subtract
Levels.
Assigning or Changing Level Names

When the database is first created, each logical level is assigned a generic name such as "Level 0," "Level
1," and so forth. Each logical level can be renamed to uniquely identify it. This is the name that appears
on RouterWorks and ABA control panels, and on printed key caps for push button control panels.
A Level Name can contain any 8 characters; however, the name cannot contain "~," "\," "...," and non-
printable characters.
To assign or change the Level Name, follow these steps:

1. Highlight the existing text in the Name box.
3. Make any other changes (as described in this section).
Figure 163: Changing Level Names
Modifying Level Colors

Navigator includes different color palettes from which a unique color can be selected to represent each
level. The level is represented by the selected color on all control panels based on this database.
To select a color, follow these steps:

1. Click the color box for the appropriate level.
The preset color palette appears. You can select from three different tabs:
 The Palette tab includes a standard RGB color palette from which a unique color can be selected
to represent each level
 The Web tab includes colors commonly used on websites.
 The System tab includes colors commonly used on systems.
Figure 164: Level Color Tabs
2. Click the desired color.
3. Click OK.
The selected color appears in all buttons and LEDs associated with this level.
Assigning Icons to Levels

A unique icon can be assigned to each logical level. This icon appears on RouterWorks control panels.
Icons are not used on ABA or pushbutton hardware panels.
To assign an icon, follow these steps:

1. Click the drop-down arrow next to the Image box of the desired Levels selection.
3. Click the desired icon.
Figure 165: Assigning an Icon
Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and Outputs

The actual inputs/outputs are the number of actual hardware inputs/outputs you have configured for
this level in this database. The number of inputs and outputs you have are constrained by the specified
logical router size. See Specifying Logical Router Size (on page 782).
To set the actual number of inputs, do one of the following:

• Click the up or down arrow next to the Inputs box of the desired Levels selection until the Level input
number you want appears.
• Type the desired Level Input number in the box.
To set the actual number of outputs, do one of the following:

• Click the up or down arrow next to the Outputs box of the desired Levels selection until the Level
output number you want appears.
• Type the desired Level Output number in the box.
Adding Level Descriptions

In the Levels Description field, you may add a 100-character description of each level in the database.
Any combination of alphabetic characters, numerals, and special characters can be used.
To enter descriptive information, double-click on the Description field of the desired Levels selection.
Chapter 48
Configuring Categories and Indexes
Figure 166: Categories Tab
In Navigator, a category is a point to which a source signal is routed. Navigator simplifies the creation of
categories by automatically creating an appropriate category name when a Source or Destination name
is entered in a database. In most cases, the assigned category name does not require editing. However,
for more complex databases, a powerful interface for managing and editing categories is included on the
Categories tab.
names; view sources and destinations affected by a particular index.
Each column on the Categories tab has its own unique function, as follows:
• Categories and Indexes: The Categories list box shows the names of currently-assigned categories for
the database you are currently using. Each category may have one or more index names associated
with it, as displayed in the Indexes list box. When combined, the category and index govern which
sources and/or destinations are assigned.
• Selection buttons: The Selection buttons under their respective list boxes allow you to create and
manage categories and indexes.
• Assigned Sources and Assigned Destinations: These list boxes display the sources and/or destinations
that are assigned to each category and index combination. The assignments may vary, depending the
category and index number selected. For example, the assigned sources for a category named "SAT"
and an index named "5" may be completely different from the sources assigned to category "SAT" and
index "3."
• Unassigned Sources and Unassigned Destinations: These list boxes display the sources and/or
destinations that are not currently assigned to a particular category and index combination.
The Categories tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to all
Defining Category Indexing

Category indexing is the primary method of selecting sources and destinations on an RCP-ABA panel.
With category indexing, both a category (for example, VTR, CAM, MIC, and so forth) and an index (for
example, 21, 2, 36, and so forth) are required to identify a device. The first click of a button selects the
category; the second click selects the index.
Figure 167: Selecting Sources and Destinations via Category Indexing

(ABA Panels Only)
This method of category indexing allows many sources to be accessed from a single panel without the
need for hundreds of selection buttons. A Broadcast Center, for example, could contain twenty
monitors, each of which could be accessed using the one button labeled "MON" followed by the
appropriate index number. Similarly, each of twenty cameras could be selected using only one button
labeled "CAM" followed by the appropriate index number. Up to 16 categories can be used with a 1RU
ABA panel (48 categories on a 2RU panel). For that reason, the use of generic category names is
generally recommended to minimize the number of categories required.
Grouping is a specialized type of category-indexing used with32×32 and 64×1 RCP-IDe panels. See
Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only) (on page 1067) for information
and instructions on how to set up source and destination groups.
Creating and Managing Categories

You can perform the following actions on categories:
• Adding a New Category (on page 790)
• Assigning Sources or Destinations to a Category (on page 790)
• Associating an Index Name to a Category (on page 790)
• Generating Category Names (on page 791)
• Changing a Category Name (on page 791)
• Viewing Sources and Destinations Affected by a Category (on page 792)
• Deleting a Category (on page 792)
Adding a New Category

1. Click New Category.
The New Category list box opens.
2. Enter a category name in the list box, and then click OK.
The new category name appears (in alphabetical order) in the Categories box.
Only 16 categories can be used with a 1RU ABA panel (48 categories on a 2RU panel). For that reason,
we recommend the use of generic category names (for example, MON, CAM, Edit, SAT, and so forth) to
minimize the number of categories required.
Assigning Sources or Destinations to a Category

Sources and destinations are assigned to categories at the Sources or Destinations tabs. To assign a
source or category, follow these steps
1. At the appropriate tab, assign the desired name to a source or destination, as described in the
following sections:
 See Assigning Source or Status Names (on page 763) for more information about assigning
source names.
 See Assigning Destination or Status Names (on page 774) for more information about assigning
destinations name.
2. Switch to the Categories tab, and then click Generate Missing Categories and Indexes.
Depending on how the source or destination is named, the new category appears in the Categories
list box. (The new category may also appear as a blank or single-letter entry.).
3. Highlight the category name.
The assigned sources or destinations appears in the Assigned Sources or Assigned Destinations list
boxes, as appropriate.
4. If necessary, change the Category name as described in Changing a Category Name (on page 791).
Associating an Index Name to a Category

Index names are assigned to categories at the Sources or Destinations tabs. To associate an index name
with a category, follow these steps
appropriate sections.
When assigning the name, make sure to include an index number with the category name (for
example, Test 1 or Test1).
The new category appears in the Categories list box.
3. Highlight the category name, and then select the corresponding index number.
The assigned sources or destinations appears in the Assigned Sources or Assigned Destinations list
boxes, as appropriate.
Generating Category Names

To generate categories for all logical sources and destinations according to the rules described in
Assigning and Editing Names (on page 761), click Generate Missing Categories and Indexes. All new
categories appear in the list box, but may be displayed as blank or as a single-letter entry. You can
change the blank "name" to whatever you wish, as described in Changing a Category Name (on page
791).
To quickly create a category name, double-click an unassigned Source or Destination. The Database
Editor creates new categories or indexes necessary to assign to that Source or Destination.
Figure 168: Blank Category Name with Assigned Source
Changing a Category Name

When renaming groups and categories, it is important to follow the complete procedure. If all steps are
not performed, you can lose the button mapping on your Magellan control panels.
1. Save and publish the current database to all routers and Magellan control panels so all devices are
using the latest database with the same group and category names.
2. Double-click the name in the Category list box to produce the Edit box.
3. Overtype the existing text with the new name.
4. When all your renaming activities are done, save and publish again.
By default, categories are automatically generated if sources or destinations are added. To allow
automatic category creation, enable the Generate New Categories selection for the Categories Page in
the Options dialog box.
Figure 169: Generating New Categories Selection
Viewing Sources and Destinations Affected by a Category

To view a list of the sources affected by a particular category, click the category name shown in the
Categories list box. The Assigned Sources list box displays all the logical sources associated with that
category. Any unassigned sources are shown in the Unassigned Sources list box at the bottom of the
Categories dialog box.
To view a list of the destinations affected by a particular category, click the category name. The Assigned
Destinations list box displays all the logical destinations associated with that category. Any unassigned
destinations are shown in the Unassigned Destinations list box at the bottom of the Categories dialog
box.
Deleting a Category
1. Click the category name in the category list box.
Select multiple categories by holding down either <Shift> or <Ctrl> while clicking on the names.
2. When all desired categories are selected, click Delete Categories.
The selected categories are removed from the Categories list.
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All Categories.
All of the listed categories are removed from the Categories list.
To delete all categories that are not assigned to logical sources or destinations, click Delete Unused
Categories.
The unused categories are removed from the Categories list.

When a category is deleted, any sources or destinations assigned to it are moved to the Unassigned
Source or Unassigned Destination list box. When the corresponding index is deleted, any sources or
destinations assigned to it remain assigned to the category.
See Importing Files for Database Editor (on page 746) for information on how to import categories from
a database or from another device.
See Exporting Database Names (on page 744) for information on how to export categories to a database
or a text file.
Creating and Managing Indexes

You can perform the following actions on indexes:
• Adding a New Index (on page 793)
• Working with Index Names (on page 793)
• Assigning Sources or Destinations to an Index (on page 794)
• Viewing Sources and Destinations Affected by an Index (on page 794)
• Deleting an Index (on page 794)
Adding a New Index

The total number of characters on a selection key (Category and Index combined) cannot exceed 8
characters.
1. Click New Index.
The new Index list box opens.
2. Enter an index name in the list box, and then click OK.
The new index name appears (in alphanumeric order) in the Index box.
Working with Index Names

To change an index name, click the name in the Index list box, and then overtype the existing text with
the new name.
See Associating an Index Name to a Category (on page 790) for information on this function.
To generate indexes for all logical sources and destinations according to the rules described in Assigning
and Editing Names (on page 761), click Generate Missing Categories and Indexes.
Assigning Sources or Destinations to an Index

Sources and destinations are assigned to categories at the Source or Destination tabs. To assign a source
or category, follow these steps
following sections.
When assigning a name, make sure to include an index number with the category name (for
example, Test 1 or Test1).
 See Assigning Source or Status Names (on page 763) for more information about assigning
source names.
 See Assigning Destination or Status Names (on page 774) for more information about assigning
destinations name.
The new category appears in the Categories list box.
3. Highlight the category name, and then select the corresponding index number.
The assigned sources or destinations appear in the Assigned Sources or Assigned Destinations list boxes,
as appropriate.
Viewing Sources and Destinations Affected by an Index

To view a list of the sources affected by a particular index, click the index name shown in the Indexes list
box. The Assigned Sources list box displays all the logical sources associated with that Index. Any
unassigned sources are shown in the Unassigned Sources list box at the bottom of the Categories dialog
box.
To view a list of the destinations affected by a particular index, click the index name. The Assigned
Destinations list box displays all the logical destinations associated with that index. Any unassigned
destinations are shown in the Unassigned Destinations list box at the bottom of the Categories dialog
box.
Deleting an Index
1. Click the index name in the indexes list box. Multiple indexes can be selected by holding down either
the <Shift> or the <Ctrl> key while clicking on the names.
2. When all desired indexes are selected, click Delete Index.
All selected indexes are removed from the Indexes list.
To completely clear the index list, click Delete All.
All of the listed indexes are removed from the Indexes list.
To delete all indexes that are not assigned to logical sources or destinations, click Delete Unused
Indexes.
The unassigned indexes are removed from the Indexes list.

When an index is deleted, any sources or destinations assigned to it remain assigned to the
corresponding category. When that category is deleted, any sources or destinations assigned to it are
moved to the Unassigned Source or Unassigned Destination list box. Unassigned sources and
destinations are not accessible in Category/Index control operations.
Chapter 49
Configuring Grouping
Grouping allows multiple sources, destinations, and/or salvos to be grouped together to act as
categories and indexes. See Defining Category Indexing (on page 789) for a more in-depth explanation of
categories and indexes. When grouping is enabled, you can set up grouping sources, destinations, and
salvos.
The grouping function for sources, destinations, and salvos is set via the Grouping tab (below). The
grouping function for RCP-IDe control panels is set by enabling Group mode at the Address, Style tab.
See Setting Up Grouping Functions (see "Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels
Only)" on page 1067).
Grouping Tab Components
Figure 170: Grouping Tab
Each column on the Grouping tab has its own unique function, as follows:
• On the left side of the dialog box is the Grouping Tree box. It displays a list all of the currently
available groups and the items currently assigned to each group. (The default group contains your
categories that have assigned items and the items that are under it. The default group always
appears, but you can change the default group name to something more useful.)
System groups appear grey in the Grouping Tree box. Custom groups are black.
• The Which Logical Items should be visible drop-down list box filters the display to show all items,
sources only, destinations only, or salvos only.
You can hide the contents of a group by clicking the "-" indicator to the left of the group name. The
group assignments disappear but the group name still appears in the Grouping Tree box and a "+"
indicator is displayed. Click the "+" indicator to expand the group assignment list.
Hide Empty Nodes: Hides any item in the Grouping Tree that contains no items.
Hide System Nodes: Hides the auto-generated (grey) nodes.
Exclude System Groups when Publish: Publishes only user-created group information to router
devices.
• The buttons to the right of the Grouping Tree list box allow you to perform group administration
functions.
 New Group: Click to create a new custom group under the current selected Group Node. You
can then drag items from the Logical Items list to create groups, for example, for control panel
configuration.
 Delete: Use the Delete button to delete a source group, or to delete an individual source from a
group.
 Rename Group: Use the Rename Group button to change the name of an existing group.
 Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a group (or an individual selection within a group)
up the assignment list.
 Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a group (or an individual selection within a
group) down the assignment list.
You may also drag-and-drop groups and selections to anywhere within the assignment list.
Assignment list placement affects the order in which source group buttons are displayed on the
control panel.
 Reset to Default: Restore the original name and assignments to a group based on the original
source category definitions, deleting any user-created groups.
• On the right side of the dialog box is the Logical Items box. It displays all of the items available for
assignment to a group.
• The Logical Items Available drop-down list box filters the display to show all available items, available
sources only, available destinations only, available or salvos only.
• Use the Assign Selected button at the bottom of the Logical Items box to assign one or more items to
a selected group. You may also assign items to more than one group.
The Grouping tab uses certain navigational and display manipulation techniques common to all
Creating and Managing Groups

Group creation and management involves adding new groups, deleting existing groups, renaming
groups, or resetting existing groups to their default settings.

• Adding a New Group (on page 798)
• Assigning Items to a Group (on page 798)
• Renaming a Group (on page 798)

• Deleting Groups (on page 799)
Adding a New Group

1. Select the grouping filter type from the Which Logical Items should be visible drop-down list box.
You can select sources, destinations, or salvos only; or all items (sources, destinations, and salvos).
2. Highlight the ROOT directory name1 , and then click the New Group button to the right of the
Grouping Tree list box.
A group entry with the title New Node appears.
3. Enter a name for the group being added, and then press the Enter key.
4. If desired, move the new group within the assignment list by one of these methods:
 Highlight the group name, and then click the Move Up button to move the group up one level at
a time.
 Highlight the group name, and then click the Move Down button to move the group down one
level at a time.
 Highlight the group name, and then drag the selection to the desired location in the assignment
list.
5. From the Logical Items box, select the entries to assign to the new group, and then click Assign
Selected, or drag the entries from the Logical Items box and drop them into the Grouping Tree box.
(Use standard Windows selection techniques to select and deselect multiple entries.)
The selected entries are assigned to the new group.
6. Click OK to save the selection.
The new group assignments are displayed in the appropriate cells in the Grouping column of the
Sources and/or Destinations tab.
Assigning Items to a Group

1. In the Grouping Tree box, select the name of the group to which the item will be assigned.
2. In the Logical Items box, select the entry to be assigned to the group. (Use standard Windows
selection techniques to select and deselect multiple entries.)
3. Click the Assigned Selected button to add the entries to the selected group, or drag the entries from
the Logical Items box and drop them into the Grouping Tree box.
An individual item may be assigned to multiple groups.
Renaming a Group
When renaming groups and categories, it is important to follow the complete procedure. If all steps are
not performed, you can lose the button mapping on your Magellan control panels.
1. Save and publish the current database to all routers and Magellan control panels so all devices are
using the latest database with the same group and category names.
2. Highlight the appropriate group name in the Grouping Tree box.
3. Click Rename Group, and then type a new name for the group.
4. Press the Enter key to accept the change.
5. When all your renaming activities are done, save and publish again.
Deleting Groups
To delete a group, highlight the appropriate group name in the Grouping Tree box, and then click the
Delete button. The selection is removed from the Grouping Tree box.
To delete entries from a group, highlight the appropriate assignment in the Grouping Tree box, and then
click the Delete button. The assigned entry is removed from the Grouping Tree box.
Deleting an assigned entry from a group does not delete the entry from the Logical Items box.
Chapter 50
Managing Enhanced Tielines

An enhanced tieline is a logical connection between one or more sources or destinations, which links
two components. Tielines allow the sources/destinations from one frame (the upstream connection) to
be available to another frame or frames (the downstream connection[s]). The graphic below shows an
illustration of upstream and downstream connections.
Tielines help you expand the size of your system, make resources available to several users at the same
time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
Figure 171: "Upstream" and "Downstream" Frames
Tielines also support path finding with processing devices in a path, as well as loopback tielines to go
from a downstream frame back to an upstream frame.
Tielines Tab Components
To activate the Tilelines function, click the Show Tielines icon in the toolbar.
Figure 172: Tielines Tab
At the Tielines tab you can add, edit, or remove tielines; monitor tielines; and perform advanced tieline
procedures.
Each column on the Tielines tab has its own unique function, as follows:
• Tieline: Displays the upstream-to-downstream path of each thread in a tieline system.
A synopsis of the selected tieline system appears directly below the Tieline column header. This
synopsis displays the name of the upstream frame, the name of the downstream frame, and the
total number of tielines in the system.
• Output: Displays the starting destination that is set for a particular tieline and relates to the upstream
frame. You cannot edit this column selection here; this information is entered in the Tielines column
on the Destinations tab or at the Starting Destination drop-down list box on the Add Tielines dialog
box.
• Output Level: Displays the output level that is set for a particular upstream tieline. You may edit this
column selection here; when setting up multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is
entered in the Add Tielines dialog box.
• Physical Output: Displays the actual physical router location for a particular upstream tieline. You
cannot edit this column selection; the information is read-only.
• Input: Displays the starting source that is set for a particular tieline and relates to the downstream
frame. You cannot edit this column selection here; this information is entered in the Tielines column
on the Sources tab or at the Starting Source drop-down list box on the Add Tielines dialog box.
• Input Level: Displays the input level that is set for a particular downstream tieline. You may edit this
column selection here; when setting up multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is
entered in the Add Tielines dialog box.
• Physical Input: Displays the actual physical router location for a particular downstream tieline. You
cannot edit this column selection; the information is read-only.
• Weight: Displays the priority set for a particular tieline’s processing. The highest weight/priority is 1.
You may edit this column selection here; when setting up multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this
information is entered in the Add Tielines dialog box.
• Reserved Destination: Displays the destination the tieline is reserved for.
• Comment: Displays any information added by a user or administration. You may edit this column
selection here; when setting up multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the
Add Tielines dialog box.
Tieline-Specific Toolbar Components

The Tielines tab has its own icon toolbar, with functions that are related to tieline processing.
Tieline Icon Toolbar Selections and Functions
Icon Function
Save
Saves the current tielines configuration
Print
Prints the currently selected tab
Copy
Copies a selected item and saves the copy in memory so that it can be
accessed
Paste
Places the item stored in memory into a specified location
Add Multiple Tielines

Allows the addition and setup of more than one tieline at the same time
Delete
Removes selected item from the existing database
Refresh Threads
Recreates tielines based on source-to-destination connections
Download Tielines
Downloads changes to the appropriate database(s) after changes are made
to tieline configuration
Poll Tielines
Polls an existing database to determine current tieline configuration
Change Partition Details

• Displays currently existing tieline system partitions
• Allows changes to park source, frame and switch timeouts, and signal
delay
• Allows options for unused tielines (park, disconnect, or last status)
• Enables destination groups functions
Export
Allows database names to be exported for protocols that use names rather
than numeric indices in commands to identify router levels, sources, and
destinations (see Exporting Database Names (on page 744) for information
on how to use this function)
Edit Images
Launches the Icon Management utility (see Using the Image Management
Utility (on page 741) for information on how to use this utility)
Options
Allows customizing of certain functions to include warning messages,
additional informational messages, and number adjustment (see Using the
Options Dialog (on page 749) for information on how to use this dialog)
Help
Allows access to on-line and context-sensitive help information
Adding Tielines
The number of tielines you may add is limited by the number of outputs available on the downstream
device.
• You may divide all of your upstream outputs equally between your downstream frames.
• You may send some of your upstream outputs to a single downstream frame.
• You may divide some of your upstream outputs between your downstream frames, with one
downstream frame receiving more tielines than the other downstream frame.
Here are some possible ways in which you can add tielines:
Figure 173: Tieline Distribution Examples
To add tielines to a routing system, follow these steps:

1. Create a routing system and its corresponding logical database.
Keep in mind the following requirements:
 The tieline routing system must contain at least one Platinum or IP3 router or Magellan system
controller to serve as the tieline controller.
 On hardware with matrices that have tielines between each other, configure the hardware
offset and on the same level
 Choose the Platinum frame or Magellan controller to be the tieline controller
 For proper tieline status, activate the following settings on the tieline controller frame:
• Protocols tab: Select the LRCProtocol setting.
• Server tab: Select the LRC TCP Server setting; set Max Clients to the desired number of
tielines.
See Changing Protocol Settings (on page 885) for more information.
2. Select the tielines routing system, and then switch to Database Editor mode.
3. If necessary, rename your upstream and downstream sources/destinations to names that are
meaningful to you.
If desired, switch to physical view, and then make sure that the desired upstream and downstream
sources are coming from the appropriate upstream or downstream frame slots. In this example, the
upstream frame is labeled TomsPlatinum and the downstream frame is labeled Downstream.
Figure 174: Checking Upstream and Downstream
4. Activate the tieline function.

The Tielines column opens on the Database Editor Sources and Destinations tabs, and the Tielines
tab is added.
5. Select one of the following addition methods: Add tielines at the Sources tab, Destinations tab, or
Tielines tab.
Adding Tielines at the Sources or Destinations Tab

1. Select the Sources or Destinations tab.
2. At the first downstream destination, select the Tielines drop-down list box, and then scroll down to
the upstream source to associate with this destination.
You can use the Fill and Fill Series shortcut menu selections to add other items to the Tielines
column.
3. The tieline assignment information appears in the Tielines column on both the Sources and
Destinations tabs. The same assignment appears on the Tieline tab, displayed by row with complete
description information included.
Adding Tielines at the Tielines Tab

1. Select the Tielines tab.
2. Click the Add Multiple Tielines icon.
The Add Tielines dialog box opens.
Figure 175: Add Tielines Dialog Box
3. Set up selections as follows.

 Selections made in the From box relate to the upstream frame.
• Starting Destination: Select the initial upstream destination.
• Level: Choose the upstream level if it is different from the original level set for the frame.
Tielines must be on the same level.
 Selections made in the To box relate to the downstream frame.
• Starting Source: Select the initial downstream source.
• Level: Choose the downstream level if it is different from the original level set for the frame.
 Selections made in the Tieline Options relate to the tielines themselves.
• Select Weight to set the default priority. For example, if you want all of the tielines to have
equal priority, set the Weight to 1, and then set the Quantity to Insert to the total number
of tielines to the assigned to the routing system. If you want individual tielines to have
different priorities, set the weight selection to the desired priority, and then set the
Quantity to Insert for the number of tielines to be assigned this priority level. The highest
priority is 1.
For example, a tieline with a weight of 3 has a higher priority than a tieline with a weight of
10.
• (Optional) Add a Reserved Destination.
• Add any Comments about the tieline options.
 The Quantity to Insert selection is for the number of tielines to add to the routing system for
this weight.
4. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Tielines tab.
5. Save the changes, and then select the Download Tielines icon from the Navigator toolbar.
Controlling and Monitoring Tielines

Tieline control features include taking a basic tieline switch and statusing of tielines. Tieline control can
be performed from any routing panel, both software and hardware, that have access to the upstream
sources and downstream destinations. See Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel (on page 1135) for an
example.
Monitoring features include tieline status, use count, tracing a thread, tracing a destination, and
troubleshoot/preview switch functionality.
Monitoring Tielines
Most tieline monitoring features are accessed through the TLCMonitorShell.exe file, which is located
external to Navigator. To access this file, follow these steps:
1. Open a new browser window outside of Navigator, and then navigate to the file’s location at
C:/Program Files/Harris/CCSCommon/bin.
2. Click on the TLCMonitorShell.exe file name.
The Choose Configuration dialog box opens.
Figure 176: Choose Configuration Dialog Box
3. Select the appropriate configuration from the Configuration Name drop-down box, and then click
Launch Tieline Monitor.
The Tieline Monitoring dialog box opens. This dialog box is for informational and troubleshooting
purposes only; you cannot change the tieline setup here.
Figure 177: Tieline Monitoring Dialog Box
At the top of the dialog box, Navigator displays the number of tielines and the IP address of the tieline
controller (upstream). The different columns display specific information about each tieline.
The information displayed in the first four columns is unique to the Tieline Monitoring dialog box:
• Current Source: The Current Source column the current source that is passing through the given
tieline; if blank, the tieline is available.
• Input Name: The Input Name column displays the source number and name for the selected tieline
thread.
• Use Count: The Use Count column displays the number of downstream destinations that are using
this thread.
• Tieline Status: The Tieline Status column displays the current operating status of the thread.
The information displayed in the remaining columns is the same as the information that appears on the
Tieline tab. See Tielines Tab Components (on page 801) for descriptions.
• Tieline
• Output
• Output Level
• Physical Output
• Input
• Input Level
• Physical Input
• Weight
• Reserved Tieline
• Comment
Several advanced monitoring functions are available for specific threads listed on this dialog box: tracing
threads, tracing destinations, troubleshooting, and previewing. To access these advanced functions,
highlight a thread and then right-click.
Figure 178: Advanced Monitoring Shortcut Menu
Trace Thread
The purpose of the Trace Thread function is to get more information abouta current thread as well as a
way to manually free the thread. Selecting this function opens the Thread Trace information box for the
currently selected tieline.
Figure 179: Thread Trace Information Box
This box displays the thread’s tieline destination, tieline source, current source, and which destinations
use this thread.
If desired, you can click Free Thread to remove the thread’s assignments without deleting the thread.
This Free Thread operation disconnects all those destinations using the thread and park them. It is best
to notify users of those destinations before freeing the thread.
Troubleshoot Switch
Selecting this function opens the Troubleshooting Switch information box with an Attempt Take button
displayed.
Figure 180: Attempt Take Selection
This box allows you to select the crosspoint on which you want to perform a take. It will either perform
the take or it will notify you of problems or issues with the attempted take process.
1. Select the desired Source, Destination, and Level selections from the drop-down list boxes.
2. Click Attempt Take.
The results of the troubleshooting review are displayed in the Switch Status box.
 If the take is successful, the Status Switch box displays the message Take Succeeded.
 If the take is not successful, the Switch Status box displays the message Found all paths to be
full; Click analyze to find available paths.
i. Click Analyze.
The Crosspoint Override dialog box opens.
Crosspoint Override Dialog Box

The paths displayed in this dialog box are the ones that have the least impact on the crosspoint.
Keep in mind that selecting one of these paths disconnects the shown destinations affected.
ii. Scroll through the Paths Available list until you reach the desired selection.
iii. Click Use Selected Path.
The new tieline thread information is displayed in the Tieline Monitoring tab.
Preview Switch
Selecting this function opens the Troubleshooting Switch dialog box with a Preview button displayed.
The Preview switch has the same functionality as Troubleshoot switch except, when querying the
possible crosspoint, it will not take the switch if the path is free. When querying the possible crosspoint,
Troubleshoot switch will take the switch.
Figure 181: Preview Switch Selection
This box allows you to select the crosspoint on which you want to perform a take. It will notify you
whether a take should be successful (it does not try to perform the take), or notify you of possible
problems or issues with the attempted take process.
1. Select the desired Source, Destination, and Level selections from the drop-down list boxes.
2. Click Preview Switch.
The results of the preview are displayed in the Switch Status box.
 If the take is successful, the Status Switch box displays the message Take Should Succeed.
Click Close, and then perform the take on the panel matrix.
 If the take is not successful, the Switch Status box displays the message Found all paths to be
full; Click analyze to find available paths.
i. Click Analyze.
The Crosspoint Override dialog box opens. (See Troubleshoot Switch (on page 810).)
The paths displayed in this dialog box are the ones that have the least impact on the crosspoint.
Keep in mind that selection of one of these paths may disconnect a different crosspoint.
ii. Scroll through the Paths Available list until you reach the desired selection.
iii. Click Use Selected Path.
The new tieline thread information is displayed in the Tieline Monitoring tab.
Trace Destinations
Selecting this function opens the Trace Destinations information box.
The purpose of trace destination is to see what paths a given destination is using without having to go
trace specific threads. This could be useful if the destination is not receiving the signal properly and you
do not know what path the signal is taking to get there.
Figure 182: Trace Destinations Dialog Box
This dialog box displays the thread’s available destination and level selections.
1. Select the desired Destination and Level selections from the drop-down list boxes.
2. Click Trace.
The results of the trace are displayed in the Destination Status box. These results list all the internal
sources and destinations that the given signal is flowing through (if that destination is using tielines).
Enable Thread
The purpose of the Enable Thread function is to re-enable threads that might have been disabled
previously.
Selecting this function allows you to enable threads for use in the current tieline system.
1. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select one or more threads that you want enabled.
2. Right click, and then select the Enable Thread option.
A message opens to ask if you want to enable all selected threads for use.
3. Click Yes to enable the selected threads.
The status for the thread changes to "OK."
Disable Thread
The Disable Thread function allows you to take tielines out of use in the system without having to
reconfigure tielines in the system This is useful if, for example, there is a bad cable or a transmit line has
gone temporarily bad. After the line is repaired, the tieline should be activated again using the Enable
Thread function.
Selecting this function allows you to disable threads used in the current tieline system.
1. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select one or more threads that you want disabled.
2. Right click, and then select the Disable Thread option.
A message opens to ask if you want to disable all selected threads for use.
3. Click Yes to disable the selected threads.
The status for the thread changes to "Disabled."
Keep in mind that, when a thread is disabled, the tieline system does not interrupt or change the
crosspoints on a panel matrix. When the operator tries to take a crosspoint switch, the tielines system
will use the next available thread for the crosspoint switch instead of trying to use the disabled thread.
Advanced Functions
You can perform the following advanced functions:
• Weight (on page 814)
• Park (on page 815)
• Disconnect (on page 816)
• Handling Tieline Options when Tielines are Unused (on page 816)
• Destination Groups (on page 816)
Weight
The tieline weight is its priority set for a particular tieline’s processing. This allows you to set a numeric
priority for which path a tieline should take. The lowest weight/highest priority is 1; the tieline system
will always take the lowest weighted path possible.
For example, you might want a signal to take the path that uses point to point fiber rather then the path
that goes through a satellite uplink. In such a case you would assign a lower weight/higher priority to the
point to point fiber path and a higher weight/lower priority to the satellite uplink path. You might assign
a weight of 5 to the fiber path and a weight of 10 to the satellite uplink. Since 5 is a lower weight than
10, the signal is routed to the fiber path before the satellite path.
You may add or edit the weight in the Weight column selection at the Tielines tab; when setting up
multiple tielines at the Tielines tab, this information is entered in the Add Tielines dialog box.
Setting Weight at the Tielines Tab

1. Select the Tielines tab, and then click inside the Weight list box for the appropriate tieline.
A blinking cursor appears in the list box.
 Type in the desired weight for the selected tieline.

 Click the Up and Down arrows to the right of the box until the desired weight appears.
Remember that Up indicates higher weights/lower priorities, while Down indicates lower
weights/higher priorities.
Setting Weight at the Add Tielines Dialog Box

1. Select the Tielines tab, and then click the Add Multiple Tielines icon.
The Add Tielines dialog box opens. (See Adding Tielines at the Tielines Tab (on page 805).)
2. In the Tieline Options box, click inside Weight list box.
 For all tielines to have equal priority, set the Weight to 1, and then set the Quantity to Insert to
the total number of tielines to the assigned to the routing system.
 For individual tielines to have different priorities, set the weight selection to the desired priority,
and then set the Quantity to Insert for the number of tielines to be assigned this priority level.
Park
This function is used to send a destination to a known good output and free the tieline it was using.
For example, DST 25 is using a tieline. You want to free it without disconnecting it, but do not know a
good local source available for switching. In such a case you can switch DST 25 to park.
To use this you must do the following:

• Create a global park source, which is mapped to "P" on the tieline level.
• Specify what the good input is for a given matrix.
To create a global park source, follow these steps:

1. Add a new source at the Sources tab.
2. Name this source something identifieable as the global park.
3. Assign it to level index P on all tieline levels.
4. Switch to the Tieline tab.
5. Click the Change Partition Details icon in the Tieline toolbar.
The Configure Tieline Partitions box opens.
Figure 183: Configure Tieline Partitions Dialog Box

6. Specify the "good" input for the appropriate matrix by entering the input number in the Park Source
column.
7. From the When Tieline Destinations are Unused drop-down list box, select Park. (See Handling
Tieline Options when Tielines are Unused (on page 816) for more information about this selection.)
8. Click Close to accept the change and return to the Tielines tab.
9. Save all changes, and then click the Download Tielines icon in the Tieline toolbar to download the
new configuration.
Disconnect
This function is used to send a destination to a disconnect output without deleting the actual tieline, and
freeing the actual tieline.
For example, DST 25 is using a tieline, but you want to disconnect it. In such a case you can switch DST
25 to disconnect.
To use this you must do the following:

• Create a global disconnect source, which is mapped to "X" on the tieline level.
• Specify what the good input is for a given matrix.
To create a global disconnect source, follow these steps:

1. Create a new source at the Sources tab.
2. Map the source to X on the levels you want.
3. Save, and add this source to panels you want to be able to disconnect from.
4. Download the panels and switch a given source to disconnect.
Handling Tieline Options when Tielines are Unused

The purpose of this selection is to decide what you want as status when your internal tieline
destinations are not in use. You can make one of the following selections:
• Park: Use this selection to send the tileines to a good local source so a signal goes through.
• Disconnect: Use this selection to make tieline destinations identifieable that they are free from a
panel.
• Last status: Use this selection to leave the tielines at the status they were.
Destination Groups
If you need to allocate a certain amount of paths between one frame to another frame for a specific set
of destinations, you can set up destination groups to accomplish the task.
For example, if DST 43 cannot go off air and if it requests a tieline source, it must have tielines available.
You can create a group for with that destination and allocate a tieline to that group so that the tieline is
pre-allocated for that destination.
Adding Destination Groups

The Configure Tieline Partitions box opens. (See Park (on page 815).)
2. Click Configure Destination Groups....

The Destination Groups dialog box opens.
Figure 184: Destination Groups Dialog Box
3. Click Add Group.

The Add Destination Group box opens.
Figure 185: Add Destination Group Box
4. Enter the desired group name in the Destination Group Name box, and then click OK.
There is an 8-character limit on group names.
The Destination Groups dialog box opens, and the name of the newly-added group is highlighted.
5. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the names of the destinations to add to the
group from the Available Destinations group assignments list.
6. When the selections are complete, click Assign.
The available destination names are transferred to the Assigned Destinations group assignments
list.
If any of the transferred destinations are incorrect or unwanted, highlight the destination name in
the Assigned Destinations group assignments list, and then click Unassign.
The unassigned destination name is moved back to the Available Destinations group assignments
list.
7. Click Close to accept the changes and return to the Configure Tieline Partitions dialog box.
Assigning Destination Groups

1. At the Configure Tieline Partitions box, click Assign Destination Groups....
The Destinations Group Allocations dialog box opens. (See below.) The Frame Connections box
displays the names of the available frame connections.
Figure 186: Destinations Group Allocations Dialog Box
2. Highlight the name of the frame that receives the group allocations. The available destination group
names are displayed in the Destination Groups Allocations box.
3. In the destination group’s Thread Allocation column, do one of the following:
 Type in the desired number of threads to allocate to the highlighted frame.
 Click the Up and Down arrows to the right of the box until the desired allocation number
appears.
5. Save all changes, and then click the Download Tielines icon in the Tieline toolbar to download the
new configuration.
Editing Destination Groups

You cannot rename an existing destination group. You cannot copy the contents of an existing
destination group to a new destination group; you must use the Add Group process as described in
Adding Destination Groups (on page 816).
The Destination Groups dialog box opens. (See Adding Destination Groups (on page 816).)
3. Highlight the name of the group you want to edit.
 To add destinations to the group assignments list, use standard Windows selection techniques
to select the names of the destinations from the Available Destinations group assignments list.
When the selections are complete, click Assign.
The selected destination names are transferred to the Assigned Destinations group assignments
list.
 If any of the assigned destinations are incorrect or unwanted, use standard Windows selection
techniques to select the names of the destinations from the Assigned Destinations group
assignments list.
When the selections are complete, click Unassign.
The selected destination names are transferred to the Available Destinations group assignments
list.
Removing Destination Groups

The Destination Groups dialog box opens. (See Adding Destination Groups (on page 816).)
3. Highlight the name of the group you want to remove, and then click Remove Groups.
The selected group is deleted from the Destination Groups list.
Chapter 51
Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Products

When designing a new system, use the information found in Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800)
for tieline setup.
Dynamic Routing Thread Management Overview

A dynamic routing thread (DRT) is a physical or logical connection between two or more frames that
allows the sources from one frame (the upstream frame) to be available to another frame or frames (the
downstream frame[s]). The figure below shows an illustration of upstream and downstream
connections.
Upstream
Frame 1
“Upstream” to Frame 2 DRT makes Frame 1
and Frame 3 sources available to
Frame 2
DRT makes Frame 1

Frame 2 and Frame 2 sources
“Upstream” to Frame 3 available to Frame 3
“Downstream” to Frame 1
Downstream
Frame 3
“Downstream” to Frame 1
and Frame 2
Figure 187: "Upstream" and "Downstream" Frames
Dynamic routing thread s help you expand the size of your system, make resources available to several
users at the same time, or to restrict remote user access to available sources.
The dynamic routing thread creation and management process consists of the following items:
• Adding dynamic routing threads
• Editing dynamic routing thread s when necessary
• Editing remote access lists when necessary
• Deleting dynamic routing thread s when necessary
• Optimizing dynamic routing thread s and creating a dynamic routing thread database file (this
function is performed automatically)
• Downloading dynamic routing thread information to frames
Before configuring dynamic routing threads, you need to create a routing system and set up a logical
database. See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) and Logical Database Setup (on
Figure 188:
Adding Dynamic Routing Threads

You cannot edit or delete dynamic routing threads in a combiner system; however, you can edit
dynamic routing thread remote accessible sources in a combiner system.
The number of dynamic routing threads you may add is limited by the number of outputs available on
the downstream device.
• You may divide all of your upstream outputs equally between your downstream frames.
• You may send some of your upstream outputs to a single downstream frame.
• You may divide some of your upstream outputs between your downstream frames, with one
downstream frame receiving more dynamic routing threads than the other downstream frame.
Here are some examples of different ways in which you can add dynamic routing threads.
Figure 189: Dynamic Routing Thread Distribution Examples
To add dynamic routing threads, follow these steps:

1. Create a routing system and configure the router frames.
Create >.
3. Choose Routing Tie-Lines... from the context menu.
The TieLine Configuration dialog box appears.
Figure 190: Tie Line Configuration Dialog Box
4. Click Add.
The Add Dynamic Routing Threads dialog box opens.
Figure 191: Add Dynamic Routing Threads Dialog Box
5. Make the selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows.

Upstream
 Frame ID: Choose the upstream frame.
 Level: Choose the upstream level.
 Starting Level Output: Choose the first upstream source.
Downstream
 Frame ID: Choose the downstream frame.

 Level: Navigator automatically fills in the level for you.
 Starting Level Input: Choose the first downstream destination.
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
 How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of dynamic routing thread connections
you want to add.
6. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the TieLine Configuration dialog box.
Dynamic routing threads are created based on information entered in the Add Dynamic Routing
Threads dialog box and appear in the list control of the Dynamic Routing Threads tab.
All dynamic routing thread entries are highlighted when they first appear in the TieLine
Configuration dialog box. To deselect them, click the left or right mouse button.
The level outputs and level inputs are numbered sequentially, based on your beginning selection
and the number of dynamic routing thread connections you add.
Editing Dynamic Routing Threads

You may edit dynamic routing thread entries from the Dynamic Routing Threads tab on the TieLine
Navigator does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Edit function on a connection within a
combiner system.
1. Double-click the dynamic routing thread connection you want to edit (or highlight the dynamic
routing thread connection, and then click Edit).
The Edit Dynamic Routing Thread dialog box opens and all currently-selected options fills the drop-
down boxes.
Figure 192: Editing Dynamic Routing Threads
2. Make any editing changes in the drop-down list boxes as necessary. You do not have to re-enter
items that do not change.
Upstream
 Frame ID: Upstream frame
 Level: Upstream level
 Starting Level Output: First upstream source
Downstream
 Frame ID: Downstream frame
 Level: Downstream level
 Starting Level Input: First downstream destination
Add Dynamic Routing Threads
 How many dynamic routing threads?: Enter the number of dynamic routing thread connections
you want to add.
Dynamic routing threads must be on the same level. This version of Navigator does not support
dynamic routing threads that span levels.
3. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Tie Line Configuration dialog box.
Editing Remote Access Lists

Navigator allows you to limit one or more downstream frame’s access to upstream sources through the
use of the remote access list editing function.
The example below shows how remote access lists can be used to restrict frame 3 from accessing frame
1’s sources, while still allowing frame 2 to access all of frame 1’s sources and frame 3 to access frame 2’s
sources.
Figure 193: Limiting Remote Access Example
To edit remote access lists, follow these steps:

1. Choose Create > Routing Tie-Lines... from the context menu.
The Tieline Configuration dialog box opens and all existing dynamic routing thread connections are
displayed.
2. Highlight the connection you want to edit, and then click Access List.
The Edit Remote Access List dialog box opens.
Figure 194: Edit Remote Access List Dialog Box
This dialog lists all dynamic routing thread connections for the upstream frame and for the downstream
frame to which it is physically connected.
• By default, each connection appears twice: once in the Inputs Frame section, and once in the Inputs
Accessible section.
• The source(s) you want the others to access is selected from the Inputs Frame list.
• The Thread Request Wait Time is the time required (in seconds) for waiting on a thread connection
before timing out.
The function buttons located between the two lists are used to select the specific configuration.
Remote Access List Button Functions
Function Button Description
Assign Assigns a source from the Inputs Frame list to the Inputs
Accessible remote access list
Delete Deletes an assigned source from the Inputs Accessible remote
access list
Assign All Assigns all sources from the Inputs Frame list to the Inputs
Accessible remote access list
Delete All Deletes all assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible remote
access list
Assigning a Specific Source to the Remote Access List

To assign a specific source to the remote access list, follow these steps:
1. At the Select Accessible Inputs drop-down list, select the frame ID for the dynamic routing thread to
which the downstream frame is physically connected.
2. Click Delete All to clear the assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
3. Highlight the specific source that you want to assign to the remote access list.
4. Click Assign.
The source name appears in the Inputs Accessible list.
Assigning All Sources to the Remote Access List

To assign all sources to the remote access list, follow these steps:
2. Click Assign All to add the assigned sources to the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
Deleting a Specific Source from the Remote Access List

To delete a specific source from the remote access list, follow these steps:
2. Highlight the specific source that you want to delete from the remote access list.
3. Click Delete.
The source name is removed from the Inputs Accessible list.
Deleting All Sources from the Remote Access List

To delete all sources from the remote access list, follow these steps:
2. Click Delete All to clear the assigned sources from the Inputs Accessible remote access list.
Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads

Navigator does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Delete function on a connection within
a combiner system.
Deleting One Dynamic routing Thread Entry

To delete one dynamic routing thread entry, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the entry to be deleted, and then click Delete.
2. This message appears:
Figure 195: Deleting One Connection
3. Click Yes.
The selected dynamic routing thread connection is removed from the list.
Deleting Routing Thread Entries

To delete all dynamic routing thread entries or several entries adjacent to one another, follow these
steps:
1. Highlight the first entry to be deleted.
2. Hold down the <Shift> key on the keyboard, and then select the last entry to be deleted.
All entries between the first chosen and the last chosen are highlighted.
3. Click Delete.
This message appears:
Figure 196: Deleting All Dynamic Routing Thread Connections
4. Click Yes.
All connections are removed from the list.
Deleting Several Non-Adjacent Dynamic Routing Thread Entries

To delete several dynamic routing thread entries not adjacent to one another, follow these steps:
1. Highlight the first entry to be deleted.
2. Hold down the <Ctrl> key on the keyboard, and then select the next entry to be deleted. Only the
chosen entries are highlighted.
3. Click Delete.
This message appears:
Figure 197: Deleting Several Non-Adjacent Dynamic Routing Thread Connections
4. Click Yes.
All highlighted connections are removed from the list.
Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads

Navigator automatically performs dynamic routing thread optimization for you after you have
performed an Add, Delete, Edit, or Inputs Access function. When you click Done to return to the main
window, Navigator creates and optimizes a dynamic routing thread connection database, then
generates a dynamic routing fabric database file (*.DRF) in the database subdirectory.
This database file is used for the Dynamic Routing Fabric Monitoring software application. Contact your
dealer or our Sales Department for a copy of this application.
Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread Information

After dynamic routing threads have been created and edited, they must be downloaded to the physical
device before the new configuration can take effect.
Remember! Download any device in the Device List that does not display an "OK" status.
1. Highlight the device entry.
2. Click Download. Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques
(hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
3. The About to Download dialog box opens.
 Choose the Selected Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread information for
the highlighted device only.
 Choose the Changed Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread information for
devices that have information that changed since the last download.
 Choose the All Device radio button to download dynamic routing thread information for all
devices in the database.
4. Click OK.
The Downloading Devices box appears.

• If the download process is completed without errors, a summary dialog box opens. This dialog box
lists the number of devices that were successfully downloaded. The Device List is updated to reflect
the current status of the devices (the devices are marked "OK").
• If there are errors during the download process, a Download Failures dialog box opens. This dialog
box lists the error or errors encountered for each device. After all errors are corrected, download
the devices again.
Chapter 52
Using Database Editor Wizards

The Database Editor contains two separate wizards for creating and defining device types: the Device
Type Wizard and the Insertion Wizard.
• The Device Type Wizard allows you to add device configuration information to your database quickly
and easily. Using a series of templates and menus, you can add, update, and configure a customized
device setup. You can access the Device Type Wizard by clicking the Wizards icon on the Navigator
Icon toolbar.
• The Insertion Wizard allows you to insert sources and destinations based on device type definitions as
created in the Device Type wizard. You can launch the Insertion Wizard by accessing the shortcut
menu, highlighting the Insert selection, and then choosing Insert from Device Type.
Using the Device Type Wizard

The Device Type Wizard allows you to add device configuration information to your database quickly
and easily. Use the Device Type Wizard templates and menus to add, update, and configure a
customized device setup.
Figure 198: Device Type Wizard Dialog Box
Each selection type on the dialog box has its own unique function, as follows:
• Edit Existing Device Type: This selection box lists currently available device types. These available
device types can be modified or deleted as desired. In addition, device type configurations may be
imported or exported as XML files. See Editing and Managing Device Types (on page 841) for more
information.
• Create New Device Type from Existing Type: This selection box lists currently available device types
developed for your specific situation. These available device types must be created via a template, but
can be modified as desired.
• Create New Device Type From A Template: This selection box lists customizable device type
configurations set up as templates. You cannot create new templates; however, you can create a new
device type based on an existing template. See Creating a New Device Type (on page 834) for more
information.
• Create New Custom Device Type: This selection box allows you to create an "empty" device type
(that is, a device type with no connection types associated with it). See Creating a New Device Type
• Device Details: The Device Details information box displays the characteristics of a selected device
type or device type template. This information allows you to determine if this particular device type is
the one you need or is easily modifiable for your specific situation. You cannot modify this
information.
Other dialog boxes are also associated with the Device Type wizard. These dialog boxes are illustrated
and presented in the sections that follow.
Creating a New Device Type

Before you create a new device type: If your sources and/or destinations will overlap, we recommend
that you delete all of the device types in the matrix display.
1. If necessary, delete the device types appearing in the matrix display:
a. Highlight first line of the matrix, and then right-click the mouse.
a. Click the Select All option.
All lines locations on the matrix are highlighted.
b. Press the Delete key. (Alternatively, right-click again, and then select the Delete option; or click
the Delete icon from the toolbar.)
The Remove Options shortcut menu opens.
c. Clear the Advanced Options check box.
All line locations are removed from the matrix.
2. Click the Wizard icon on the Database Editor toolbar to launch the Device Type Wizard.
The Select Device Type dialog box opens (see Using the Device Type Wizard (on page 833)).
3. Available device type selection options are shown below.
Create Device Type Selections
Item Description
Create New Device Type From A Template Copies an existing template to setup create a new device
Create New Custom Device Type Sets up a device type specific to a particular routing
configuration environment
Selecting a Create Device Type Option

• Creating a New Device Type from a Template (on page 835)
• Creating a New Custom Device Type (on page 835)
Creating a New Device Type from a Template

Pressing the Cancel button at any time will cause RouterMapper to cancel all of the selection
information made up to that point, and then close the Device Type Wizard without saving changes. You
cannot undo the cancellation.
1. Select the Create New Device Type From A Template radio button.
The device type template selections are highlighted.
2. Scroll through the template list to the configuration you want.
To determine the characteristics of each template, select the template name in the list box. The
characteristics of the selected template appear in the Device Details information box.
The name of the selected template appears in a text box below the template selection list. You can
change the name of the selection to one that better describes your configuration setup. You may
leave the default name; however, if you select this template at another time, Navigator will require
you to change the selection name.
3. Select the desired template configuration, and then click Next.
The Select Connection Types dialog box opens.
4. Proceed to Selecting Connection Types (on page 836).
Creating a New Custom Device Type

Click the Create New Custom Device Type radio button, and then enter a name for the new device type
in the Custom Type Name text box.
1. Click Next.
2. Proceed to Selecting Connection Types (on page 836).
Selecting Connection Types
Figure 199: Select Connection Types Dialog Box
The display box at the left side of the dialog box shows the currently-selected connections types. If
desired, you can rename the connection types by clicking on the existing name, and then overwriting the
selection. (There is a 21-character limit on names.)
The name information displayed on a NUCLEUS panel will mirror exactly the names that appear in the
text box.
The button selections on the right side of the dialog box are defined below.
Table 135: Add Connection Type Options

Button Selection Description
Add Connection Type From Template Adds connection types that are defined by a pre-existing template.
Add From Existing Connection Types Add connection types that were created from an existing device
configuration type.
Delete Remove a highlighted connection type from the display box.
Enable additional levels

Most routers have 16 levels (0-15). For IP3 routers only, check this
box to enable 64-level rounting (Levels 0-63).
1. To add a connection type, click one of the Add Connection Type buttons.
The Add Connection Type shortcut menu opens.
Figure 200: Add Connection Type Shortcut Menu
The drop-down list box provides the names of the connection types available for a particular device
type.
Connection Type Menu Selections
HD Embedded Adds a connection for PT-MXDX modules that include
high-definition embedded audio signals
Analog Audio Adds a connection for devices that include analog audio
signals
AES Audio Adds a connection for devices that include AES audio
signals
HD Video Adds a connection for devices that include high-
definition video signals
SD Video Adds a connection for devices that include standard-
definition video signals
Analog Video Adds a connection for devices that include analog video
signals
Optical Adds a connection for devices that include fiber optical
signals
Mono Audio Adds a connection for devices that include mono audio
signals
SD Embedded Adds a connection for modules that include standard-
definition embedded audio signals
2. Highlight the name of the desired connection type, and then click OK.
The selected connection type appears in the display box.
3. When all desired connection types are selected, click Next.
The Level Selection dialog box opens.

Depending on the device and connection types you selected, the Level Selection dialog box may not
open. In that case, proceed to Configuring Connection Types (on page 839).
Selecting Levels
Figure 201: Level Selection Dialog Box
1. Select the device type starting level from the Please Select a starting level for the device type drop-
down list box.
2. If desired, enable the Be able to Breakaway Audio from Video check box, and then choose the
appropriate audio breakaway mapping radio button
Use the Mono Breakaway selection to set up TDM applications where you want to breakaway mono
audio channels. Use the Stereo Breakaway option to set up stereo audio channels in TDM
applications where you want to breakaway channels or always move them together.
3. After all Level selections are made, click Next.
The Configure Connection Type dialog box opens.
Configuring Connection Types
Figure 202: Configure Connection Type Dialog Box
1. Select the connection type (that is, corresponding level) for each device type you selected. You can
rename components of the connection type by highlighting the component name and then pressing
F2 to open an Edit function.
2. Set up the connection types according to one of the scenarios defined below.
Figure 203: Configuration Examples
Table 136: Configuration Examples

1 The "parent" component is assigned a level; that same level assignment ripples through to the
"child" components.
2 The "parent" component is left blank and the "child" components are also left blank.
3 The "child" components have different levels assigned to them; the "parent" component cannot
have a level assigned to it, so the "parent" component is left blank.
3. After the connection types are configured, click Next.
The Device Type Details dialog box opens.
Selecting Device Type Details
Figure 204: Device Type Details Dialog Box
If you know that special level inputs need to be assigned (for example, BARS=20) you can make the
assignment here. These assignments are used when you insert Sources.
Click Finish when your selections are complete.
Editing and Managing Device Types

• Editing Device Types (on page 841)
• Deleting Device Types (on page 842)
• Managing Device Types (on page 842)
Editing Device Types

1. Click the Edit Existing Device Type radio button, and then select the desired device type from the
display box.
The name of the existing device type appears in a text box below the existing device type selection
list. You can change the name of the selection to one that better describes your configuration setup.
2. Click Next.
3. Edit the device type according to the instructions provided for the different selections available
through the Device Type wizard.
 Editing connection type selections: Selecting Connection Types (on page 836)
 Editing connection type configurations: Configuring Connection Types (on page 839)
 Editing device type details: Selecting Device Type Details (on page 841)
Deleting Device Types

display box.
2. Click Delete Device Type.
An information message opens.
Click OK to continue.
4. The selected device is deleted from the Existing Device Type list.
Managing Device Types

display box.
2. Click Manage Device Type.
The Device Type Manager dialog box opens.
Figure 205: Device Type Manager Dialog Box
The buttons to the right of the Existing Device types list allow you to perform administration
functions.
 Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a device up the assignment list.
 Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a device down the assignment list.
 Import:
 Export
3. When all device management tasks are complete, click OK to accept the changes.
Using the Insertion Wizard

The Insertion Wizard allows you to insert sources and destinations based on device type definitions
created in the Device Type wizard.
Each selection type on the Insertion Wizard dialog box has its own unique function, as follows:
Figure 206: Insertion Wizard Dialog Box
• The Device Type drop-down list box provides the names of any device types created via the Device
Type wizard.
• The Details information box displays the characteristics of a selected device type or device type
template. This information allows you to determine if this particular device type is the one you need.
Other dialog boxes are also associated with the Insertion Wizard. These dialog boxes are illustrated and
presented in the sections that follow.
Inserting Sources and Destinations

1. Highlight the entire row where you want to add the new source or destination entries, and then
right-click the mouse.
2. Select Insert from Device Type.
The Select Device Type dialog box opens.
Figure 207: Select Device Type Dialog Box
3. From the Device Type drop-down list box, select the appropriate device type to use for the
insertion, and then click Next.
The Basic Options dialog box opens.
Figure 208: Basic Options Dialog Box
An item’s name consists of a prefix, an index or quantity number, and an optional suffix, but cannot
exceed eight alphanumeric characters. This information appears in the device’s Source or
Destination tab Name and Long Name columns.
4. In the Name Options text box, enter a prefix that identifies the device.
5. Select the initial index number from the Starting Index Number spin box.
6. If desired, in the Name Suffix text box, enter a suffix that identifies the device more specifically (for
example, VTR-1-B).
7. In the Description text box, add a description of the device and/or device family. This information
appears in a device’s Sources or Destination tab Description column.
8. If more than one item should be inserted, select the total number from the Quantity to Insert spin
box.
If the Quantity to Insert is larger than one, the number in the Name Preview box will change to
match the higher quantity. On the Source or Destination tab, however, the names and numbers will
correspond appropriately to the number of the inserted item in the list location.
9. After the basic option entries are completed, click Next.
The Advanced Options dialog box opens.
Figure 209: Advanced Options Dialog Box
The Advanced Options dialog box allows you to assign certain advanced options for your sources
and destinations. It is especially useful for setting up mono switching or stereo pair switching so you
can address them on our control devices.
10. Select an initial video level number from the Starting Level Index Number spin box within the Video
Location box.
11. Select an initial audio level number from the Starting Level Index Number spin box within the Audio
Location box.
12. Enable (retain check mark) or disable (remove check mark) the Enable check box for each
connection type selection.
If a level is disabled, that level will not be assigned when the items are inserted.
13. If you want to create mono sources, click the Create Logical Sources for Audio Breakaway Switching
check box. (This only applies to inserting device types with audio on the Sources tab.) A Mono
source allows you to do special audio swaps from a control panel.
14. Click Finish when your selections are complete.
The selections added via the Insertion Wizard appear on the Sources or Destinations tab.
Figure 210: Insertion Wizard Selections on Destinations Tab
Chapter 53
Physical Device Setup

Navigator supports downloading and managing Platinum, Integrator, and Panacea series frames. Legacy
frames (that is, XPlus, Hedco, Mixbox, NEO, VIA, and XPRESS) are not configurable via Navigator, but
they should be added to the database so that Navigator can have a complete "view" of the control
system and can operate properly. Imagine Communications router frames and control hardware can be
added to the database by discovering devices or by polling the control network for installed devices.
Configuration information for advanced programmable control panels is located in the panel’s specific
installation and operation manual.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the frame definitions only. For
information on how to configure the database, see Logical Database Setup (on page 729).
Chapter 54
Configuring Platinum Frames

Configuring a Platinum frame is a multi-step process that requires you to complete several steps.
The procedures are similar for adding or editing a frame. Some editing processes, however, are not
performed until after a Platinum frame is added to the routing matrix. Differences in adding/editing
procedures are noted. Information about dialog boxes accessible only in Edit mode are in Editing the
Router Matrix (on page 895).
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the Platinum frame definition only.
Before configuring a router frame, you need to create a routing system and set up a logical database.
See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) and Logical Database Setup (on page 729).

Selecting the Frame Size ........................................................................ 848
Setting Up a Matrix ................................................................................ 849
Partitioning the Matrix........................................................................... 863
Selecting Matrix Monitoring .................................................................. 872
Selecting Controls .................................................................................. 875
Setting up SNMP (Optional) ................................................................... 879
Updating License Keys and Logical Settings........................................... 883
Changing Protocol Settings .................................................................... 885
Editing the Router Matrix ...................................................................... 895
Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations .................................. 913
Selecting the Frame Size

1. Create a routing system as described in Creating a Routing System (on page 665).
2. Expand the Routers subdirectory under the newly-created routing system in the Navigation pane,
and then double-click on the Platinum router selection.
The routing configuration utility launches, and then the Select Router Type dialog box opens.
3. Select the frame type.
A blue box appears around the selected frame type.
4. Click OK.
The Platinum Frame Size dialog box opens.
5. Select the Platinum frame size you want.
A blue box appears around the selected type.
6. Click Next.
The Platinum Configured Matrices dialog box opens.

Setting Up a Matrix
Configured Matrices -- Add Mode Configured Matrices -- Edit Mode
Figure 211: Platinum Configured Matrix Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to add a new matrix, or delete or configure an existing matrix for a Platinum
frame. The Output column and the Input column are set up with separate list box controls. You can use
standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple modules on each, or both, lists.
You may "quick-add" one or more matrices, which are automatically assigns inputs, outputs, and
formats. You also may add new matrices one at a time, and select specific numbers of inputs and
outputs, and select a specific format.
• "Quick-Adding" a New Matrix (on page 849)
• Manually Adding a New Matrix (on page 850)
"Quick-Adding" a New Matrix

This function is not available in Edit mode.
1. Move the cursor display somewhere within the matrix list control area, and then right-click the
mouse. A selection box opens.
Figure 212: Add Matrices Selection Box
2. Select Add Multiple Matrices.

The Add Multiple Matrices dialog box opens.
Figure 213: Add Multiple Matrices Dialog Box
3. Fill in these fields via their associated drop-down list boxes:

a. # of Matrices: Choose the total number of matrices you want in addition to the one that already
appears in the matrix description area. Navigator evenly divides the remaining modules into the
requested matrices.
b. Starting Level: Choose the Level number that corresponds to the level number the physical
router frame occupies in the routing system.
c. If you want all matrices to have the same Level, click the check box.
4. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box.
The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. The matrix’s module information is
color-coded as shown below.
Matrix Information Color Codes
Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the selected matrix.
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because they are
assigned to another matrix.
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be assigned to any matrix.
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to (or unassigned
from) the selected matrix.
5. Click Next.
The Monitoring Matrices dialog box opens. Proceed to Selecting Matrix Monitoring (on page 872) to
continue.
Manually Adding a New Matrix

This function is not available in Edit mode.
1. At the Configured Matrix dialog box, click Add. (Alternatively, move the cursor display somewhere
within the matrix list control area, and then right-click the mouse. A small selection box opens.
Select Add Matrix.)
The Add WB Matrix dialog box opens.
Figure 214: Add WB Matrix Dialog Box
Depending on the matrix type you choose, the appearance and selections for this dialog box changes.
• Adding Wideband Matrices (on page 851)
• Adding TDM Matrices (on page 853)
• Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices (on page 856)
Adding Wideband Matrices

1. At the Add WB Matrix dialog box in Manually Adding a New Matrix (on page 850), choose WB from
the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
2. In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular Platinum matrix.
3. Choose a matrix format from the Format drop-down list box.
4. In the Level box, enter a number that corresponds to the first level number the physical router
matrix occupies in the routing system.
5. Choose the appropriate number of inputs from the # of Physical INs drop-down list box. (You cannot
type information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in the # of
Physical INs selection as well. if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, please do
not change the # IN Slots selection.
6. In the Input Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which input numbering
starts for the specified component in the logical database.
7. Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs drop-down list box. (You
cannot type in the information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in the # of
Physical OUTs selection as well. if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, please
do not change the # OUT Slots selection.
8. In the Output Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which output numbering
The Audio Type drop-down list box is only available for TDM matrix types.
9. If you want to automatically set up a monitoring matrix, click the Create And Link To A Monitor
Matrix check box. (Select this option only if your Platinum modules include a dual output module
such as the PT-HSR-DOB, PT-SR-DOB, or PT-ENC-DOB.)
Select this option only if you want Navigator to automatically create a monitoring matrix for you. In
addition, Navigator automatically updates the matrix to reflect any other changes that you make. If
you prefer to set up and update a monitoring matrix manually, do not choose this option. You can
manually set up a monitoring matrix at the Monitoring Matrices dialog box. (See Selecting Matrix
Monitoring (on page 872) for more information.)
10. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your I/O modules.
 Click the Auto radio button if you want Navigator to automatically assign slots for the I/O
modules. If you select this option, you cannot change the Input Card Type, Starting IN Slot, or #
In Slots list boxes.
 Click the Manual radio button if you want to assign starting slots for the I/O modules yourself.
(If you select slot assignments that are incompatible with other settings, Navigator warns you
with appropriate error messages.)
PM- series modules operate in 5RU and 9RU frames only. PT- series modules operate in 9RU,
15RU, and 28RU frames.
a. Select the correct item from the Input Card Type list box.
Some input modules (for example, PT-HS-IB+) have options available; if so, the Input Plugins
dialog box displays a list of available options. For more information about the options available,
please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
b. Select the starting slot for your input modules from the Starting IN Slot drop-down list box.
c. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots drop-down list box.
Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical inputs you have for the number of
modules you selected. Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs
required; if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this
entry.
d. Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type drop-down list box.
Some output modules (for example, PT-HS-OB+) have options available; if so, the Output
Plugins dialog box displays a list of available options. For more information about the options
available, please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
e. Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT Slot drop-down list box.
f. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT Slots drop-down list box.
Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical outputs you have for the number of
modules you selected.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required; if you do not want to
change the number of physical outputs, please do not change this entry.
The new matrix information appears in the description boxes. Matrix information is color-coded as
described in "Quick-Adding" a New Matrix (on page 849).
Navigator displays the crosspoint locations associated with your matrix information. Make sure you have
crosspoint modules installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur correctly. Go to
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints (on page 862).
Adding TDM Matrices

1. At the Add WB Matrix dialog box in Manually Adding a New Matrix (on page 850), choose time
division multiplex (TDM) from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
The Add TDM Matrix dialog box opens.
Figure 215: Add TDM Matrix Dialog Box
2. In the Name field, enter a name that identifies this particular TDM matrix.
4. In the Level box, enter a number that corresponds to the first level number the physical router
matrix occupies in the routing system.
type information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in the # of
Physical INs selection as well. If you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, please do
not change the # IN Slots selection.
6. In the Input Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which input numbering
7. Choose the appropriate number of outputs from the # of Physical OUTs drop-down list box. (You
If you make changes to the # OUT Slots selection, any changes you make are reflected in the # of
Physical OUTs selection as well. if you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, please
do not change the # OUT Slots selection.
8. In the Output Offset box, enter a number that corresponds to the point at which output numbering
9. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slot assignments for your I/O modules.
a. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type list box.
c. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # IN Slots drop-down list box.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do not want
to change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
d. Select the desired type of output module from the Output Card Type drop-down list box.
Some output modules (for example, PT-HS-OB+) have options available; if so, the Output
Plugins dialog box displays a list of available options. For more information about the options
available, please refer to the Platinum Installation and Operation Manual.
e. Select the starting slot for your output modules from the Starting OUT Slot drop-down list box.
f. Indicate the number of modules of this type you need in the # OUT Slots drop-down list box.
Navigator automatically calculates the number of physical outputs you have for the number of
Changing this selection may change the number of physical outputs required; if you do not want to
change the number of physical outputs, please do not change this entry.
10. The Options box allows you to set up audio types for AES or analog format selections. Since you
selected "TDM" as your matrix type, the Audio Type drop-down list box is enabled.
a. Choose one of these audio types:
• Select Mono to route individual audio channels. With this selection you can set 1-16
independent mono audio channels per device (via a drop-down list box).
• Select Stereo to always route a stereo pair (two channels) of audio together. With this
selection you can set 1-8 stereo pairs1 per device (via a drop-down list box).
b. When you select the first check box (Breakaway audio from video), Navigator looks for the first
available level in the current database, and then puts the selected audio on that level. The next
check box becomes available for selection. If you disable this check box, the other audio type
options are no longer available for selection.
c. When you select the second check box (Breakaway individual audio channels [mono]/stereo
pairs [stereo]), Navigator sets each partition to a different level so that the audio can be broken
away. On stereo audio types only, the next check box becomes available for selection.
d. When you select the third check box (Breakaway individual audio channels), Navigator allows
you to breakaway the left and right stereo audio channels.
The tables below show examples of different selections, and the results of those selections.
12. Navigator displays the crosspoint locations associated with your matrix information. Make sure you
have crosspoint modules installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur correctly.
Proceed to Enabling Redundant Crosspoints (on page 862).
AES or Analog Stereo Audio Types
Selection
Breakaway
No. Stereo Breakaway Breakaway
Audio from Result
Pairs Stereo Pairs Channels
Video
2 No No No Two stereo partitions with same level
as video
2 Yes No No Two stereo partitions set to the same
level but on a different level from the
video to allow audio to be broken
away from the video
2 Yes Yes No Two stereo partitions, each set to a
different level to allow the audio to
be broken away from the video
and/or from the other audio pair
2 Yes Yes Yes Four audio partitions that allow for
the audio to be broken away from the
video and/or from any of the sub
channels of audio in either stereo pair
AES or Analog Mono Audio Types
Selection
No. Mono Breakaway Audio Breakaway
Result
Channels from Video Stereo Pairs
2 No No Two mono partitions with same level as video
2 Yes No Two mono partitions set to the same level but on a
different level from the video to allow audio to be
broken away from the video
2 Yes Yes Two audio partitions that allow for the audio to be
broken away from the video and/or from any of
the sub channels of audio in either partition
Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices

This section explains how to add HView SX Hybrid device information to a Platinum router database. You
can also create destinations that represent actual PIPs or use existing destinations and have the PIPs
follow them. See Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations (on page 913) for more information.
Select Add Matrix.)
2. Choose Multiview from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
The Add HView SX Matrices dialog box opens.
Figure 216: AddHView SX Matrices Dialog Box
3. Under Multiviewer Type, choose HView Sx Hybrid.

type in the information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots field, any changes you make are reflected in the # of Physical
INs field as well. If you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, do not change the # IN
Slots field.
6. Choose the appropriate number of modules from the # HView SX Modules drop-down list box. (You
7. Select the starting slot for your HView SX modules from the Starting HView SX Slot drop-down list
box.
8. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slots assignments for your I/O modules.
a. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type drop-down list box.
c. Select the number of modules of this type you need from the # IN Slots drop-down list box.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do not want to
change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
Two different types of multiviewer selections have been added: one for the underlying video matrix
and one for PIPs (this is the virtual matrix).
Figure 217: HView SX Hybrid Entries
Highlight HView SX Hybrid PiPs, and then click Advanced....The Matrix Partition dialog box opens.
Navigator by default assigns an output offset equal to the size of the frame. The example below
shows a matrix with 128 outputs as well as an output offset of 128.
Figure 218: PIPs Matrix Outputs and Output Offset

There are other setup options available with PIPs. See Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual
Destinations (on page 913) for more information.
Navigator also displays the crosspoint locations associated with your matrix information. Crosspoint
modules must be installed in these locations for crosspoint switching to occur correctly. Proceed to
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints (on page 862).
Configuring HView SX Hybrid Audio

1. In the configuration table, select HView SX Hybrid.
2. Right click on the audio inputs, and select Assign to HView SX Hybrid V.
3. To configure the level and output offsets (if required, and if a TDM matrix is present), highlight
HView SX Hybrid V, and then click Advanced.
The Matrix Partition dialog box appears. By default the output offset is equal to the size of the
frame.
4. Make any necessary changes to this screen, and then click OK.
5. Highlight the same slots, right-click, and then select Change Format.
The Select I/O Card Type dialog box opens.
Figure 219: Changing Audio Input Format
6. Under Format, select the correct audio format, and then click OK.
This creates an HView SX A audio matrix.
7. Highlight the slots that contain audio input modules, and then right-click and select Assign to HView
PRO V.
Configuring a HView SX Pro Matrix

Before discovering an HView SX Pro device, Navigator must be configured to communicate using LRC.
Navigator will not communicate with HView SX Pro without LRC turned on in the router configuration.
See Enabling Connections Group Box (on page 891) for more information.
When a HView SX Pro multiviewer is installed in a 28 RU frame, or when the Platinum frame only has
one crosspoint in the zone where the HView SX Pro is installed, it is configured as a WideBand matrix.
When installed in a 5-, 9-, or 15-RU Platinum frame and configured in a WB matrix, HView SX Pro-16
actually has 8 discrete inputs, HView SX Pro-32 has 16 discrete inputs, and HView SX Pro-64 has 32
discrete inputs. See Adding Wideband Matrices (on page 851). An audio matrix can also be added. See
Adding TDM Matrices (on page 853).
You cannot configure HView SX Pro modules in a Multiviewer matrix in a 128 RU Platinum frame.
When configured in a Multiviewer matrix in a 5-, 9-, or 15-RU frame, HView SX Pro-16 has 16 discrete
inputs, HView SX Pro-32 has 32 discrete inputs, and HView SX Pro-64 has 64 discrete inputs. To
configure redundancy, follow these steps:
Select Add Matrix.)

2. Choose Multiview from the Matrix Type drop-down list box.
The Add HView SX Matrices dialog box opens.
Figure 220: AddHView SX Matrices Dialog Box
3. Under Multiviewer Type, choose HView SX PRO 16, HView SX PRO 32, or HView SX 64.
type in the information into this field.)
If you make changes to the # IN Slots field, any changes you make are reflected in the # of Physical
INs field as well. If you do not want to change the number of physical inputs, do not change the # IN
Slots field.
6. Choose the appropriate number of modules from the # HView SX Modules drop-down list box. (You
7. Select the starting slot for your HView SX modules from the Starting HView SX Slot drop-down list
box.
8. The I/O Card & Slots box allows you to choose slots assignments for your I/O modules.
a. Select the desired type of input module from the Input Card Type drop-down list box.
c. Select the number of modules of this type you need from the # IN Slots drop-down list box.
Changing this selection may change the number of physical inputs required; if you do not want to
change the number of physical inputs, please do not change this entry.
When HView SX Pro is configured as a WB matrix and supports audio, a TDM (HView SX PRO A) matrix is
also created. This matrix has a maximum of eight partitions, each with eight outputs. Other output cards
can ban be assigned to this matrix, and those other cards can have a maximum of 16 partitions.
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints

The Enable Redundant Crosspoint function is available with 128×128 and 256×256 frames only.
Before enabling redundant crosspoints, set the crosspoint switching mode. (This option requires an
additional crosspoint card.)
To enable redundant crosspoints, at the Configured Matrices dialog box right-click the mouse button,
and then choose Redundant Switch Mode from the shortcut menu. The default setting is None.
Figure 221: Redundant Switch Mode Shortcut Menu
• Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module.
• Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module. Existing
crosspoints are not switched, but remain on their original crosspoint module.
Changing Sync Settings

1. Right-click the mouse button, and then choose Assign Syncs from the shortcut menu.
Default values are Sync 1, Sync 2, Sync 3, and Sync 4. You can change these default values at the
Control Settings tab. See Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and References (on page 878) for instructions
on changing sync names and settings.
Figure 222: Assign Syncs Shortcut Menu
2. Select the sync you want to assign to the selected slots. (All cards assigned with the same sync
number have the same sync characteristics.)
Changing Initial Source Mode Settings

You may also set this function at the Monitor Matrix tab. See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 863) for
more information.
If you want to change the initial source mode settings, follow these steps:
1. In the Configuration box, highlight the configuration you want to set.
2. Right-click the mouse, and then choose Set On-Download Initial Source Mode from the shortcut
menu.
 Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect outputs after download.
 Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the matrix areas after download.
 Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected to the first input in the
matrix.
Partitioning the Matrix

1. Highlight the matrix you want to partition, and then click Advanced....
The Matrix Partition dialog box opens.
At the top left of the dialog box pertinent matrix information appears. You can change the name, the
input partition display color, starting level, and input and output offsets.
Figure 223: Matrix Partition Dialog Box
At the top right of the dialog box is the Matrix Size information box. This display is for informational
purposes only; you cannot change the matrix size here.
At the middle right of the dialog box is the Partition Type drop-down list box. Select from different
partition type components as described under Selecting Matrix Partitioning Types (on page 864).
Under the matrix information display are the Physical Input View and Physical Output View tabs. The
information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of how your selected input and
output partitions look, based on the partition type components you selected.
Selecting Matrix Partitioning Types

Select the matrix partitioning type from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then configure it as
described in one of the following sections:
• No Partitioning (on page 865)
• RGB/Stereo Partitioning (on page 865)
• Contiguous Partitioning (on page 866)
• Wild Partitioning (on page 866)
• Shared Inputs (on page 868)

• Mono Breakaway (on page 868)
• Stereo Breakaway (on page 869)
No Partitioning
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type. To choose this option, select None from
the Partition Type drop-down list box. You only have one partition with this option, so the # of
Partitions box is greyed out.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component within the None partition
type.
1. Move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button.
2. Select Physical Map Order from the shortcut menu.
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870)).
3. Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input or output, and then select a
new physical location number from the drop-down list box.
4. Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assigns the original number from
the chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input View and Physical Output View
tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of your selected input
and output partitions. Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
RGB/Stereo Partitioning
See RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) (on page 1146) for information about additional advanced
functions associated with this partition type.
To choose this option, select RGB/Stereo from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then select
the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component within the partition type.
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens. See Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870).
4. Navigator assigns the new number to your chosen component, and assigns the original number from
your chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
5. Under the matrix partition information display are the Physical Input View and Physical Output
View tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of how the
selected input and output partitions look, based on the partition type components you selected.
Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output partitioning.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a different partition
(component). The steps for completing this function are the same for both inputs and outputs.
1. Highlight the component that contains the inputs you want to reassign.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs in the Physical Input View that you
want to assign to a different component.
3. Right-click the mouse button, and then choose Unassign from <component name> from the
shortcut menu. Selections appear light grey.
4. Highlight the component to which you want to assign the inputs.
5. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the inputs you just unassigned.
6. Right-click the mouse button, and then select Assign to <component name> from the shortcut
menu.
Selections receive that component’s color assignment.
Contiguous Partitioning
See Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1147) for information about additional
advanced functions associated with this partition type.
To choose this option, select Contiguous from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then select
The initial appearance of the matrix (as illustrated in the Physical I/O View box) shows boxes equal in
shape and size; the number of boxes match the number of partitions selected. You can change the I/O
number per partition:
1. Click on the component box you want to expand or reduce.
A blue border with small "handles" on it appears around the component box.
 Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number of inputs in the selected
component. The selected component box grows larger and the contingent component grows
smaller. (Pull slowly to see a display message showing how many inputs and how many outputs
the component contains.)
 Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number of outputs in the selected
component. The selected component box grows larger and the contingent component grows
smaller.
 Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs and outputs in the selected
component. The selected component box grows larger and both contingent components grow
smaller.
Wild Partitioning
See Wild Partitioning (on page 1148) for information about additional advanced functions associated
with this partition type.
To choose this option, select Wild from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then select the
number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component within the Wild partition
type.
1. Move the mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button.
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens. See Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870).
4. Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assign the original number from
tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of how the selected
input and output partitions look, based on the partition type components selected. Choose the
appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output partitioning.
The default view for Wild partitioning is that the inputs and outputs for each component are continuous
(for example., inputs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6...32) and contiguous to one another (where the inputs from one
component end the inputs from the next component begin; for example, component 1 input 1...32;
component 2 input 1,2,3,...; and so forth). You can change that view to RGB, so that inputs 1, 2, and 3
from each component fall in a row; then inputs 4, 5, and 6; and so forth. The steps for completing this
function are the same for both inputs and outputs.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing order:

1. Move the mouse into the Physical Input View space.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then button, and then select one of the following from the
shortcut menu:
 Click Make RGB Inputs to make the Physical Input View space appear in RGB order. (The
Physical Output View space remains in contiguous order.)
 Click Make RGB All to make the both the Physical Input View space and the Physical Output
View space appear in RGB order.
To switch from Contiguous viewing order to RGB viewing order:

1. Move the mouse into the Physical Input View space.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select one of the following from the shortcut menu:
 Click Make Contiguous Inputs to make the Physical Input View space appear in contiguous
order. (The Physical Output View space remains in RGB order.)
 Click Make Contiguous All to make the both the Physical Input View space and the Physical
Output View space appear in contiguous order.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a different component. The steps
for completing this function are the same for both inputs and outputs.
3. Right-click the mouse button, and then select Unassign from <component name> from the shortcut
menu. Selections appear light grey.
menu. Selections receive that component’s color assignment.
Shared Inputs
See Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1149) for information about additional advanced
functions associated with this partition type.
To choose this option, select Shared Inputs from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then select
The initial appearance of the matrix as illustrated in the Physical I/O View box shows boxes equal in
shape and size; the number of boxes match the number of partitions selected. You can change the I/O
number per partition:
1. Click on the matrix box you want to expand or reduce.
A blue border with small "handles" on it appears around the matrix box.
 Drag the handles to the left and right to change the number of inputs in the selected matrix. The
selected matrix box grows larger or smaller but contingent matrixes stay the same size. Pull
slowly to see a display message showing how many inputs and how many outputs the matrix
contains.
 Drag the handles to the top or bottom to change the number of outputs in the selected matrix.
The selected matrix box grows larger and the contingent matrix grows smaller.
 Drag the handles diagonally to change the number of inputs and outputs in the selected matrix.
The selected matrix box grows larger and the contingent matrix grows smaller.
Mono Breakaway
See Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1151) for information about additional
To choose this option, select Mono Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then
select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
1. Select the Physical Input View tab.
The initial setup of the matrix is that all inputs are shared. You can change the input number per
partition:
4. The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870)).
Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assigns the original number from
your chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs to a different partition (component).
7. Select the Physical Output View tab.
10. The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870)).
Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assigns the original number from
In some cases you may want to assign particular outputs to a different partition (component).
Stereo Breakaway
See Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1152) for information about additional
To choose this option, select Stereo Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then
select the number of partitions from the # of Partitions drop-down list box.
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens (see Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870)).
Navigator assigns the new number to the chosen component, and assigns the original number from your
chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to a different partition
menu.
In some cases you may want to assign particular inputs and outputs to more than one partition
1. Highlight the first component to which you want to assign the inputs.
want to assign to the first component.
4. Highlight the next component to which you want to assign the inputs.
want to assign to the next component.
menu.
Assigning Physical Map Order

Under the matrix information display are the Physical Input View and Physical Output View tabs. The
information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of how your selected input and
output partitions look, based on the partition type components you selected.
1. Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output partitioning.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component. Click somewhere
within the read-only area of the matrix partition list for the matrix you want to change.
(Alternatively, move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse button. A
shortcut menu opens. Select Physical Map Order.)
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens.
Figure 224: Physical Map Order Dialog Box
The Physical Map Order dialog box displays the physical I/O location of a particular component. At
this dialog box, you can change the input or output assignment of any physical component.
To change I/O assignments, click the physical location number for the appropriate component input
or output, and then select a new physical location number from the drop-down list box. Navigator
assigns the new number to your chosen component, and assign the original number from your
chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally assigned. For
example, if you want to change the assignment of Component Input 9 from 179 to 187 (which is
currently assigned to Component Input 17), Navigator assigns 187 to Component Input 9 and 179 to
Component Input 17.
2. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices dialog box, and then click Next.
The Monitoring Matrices dialog box opens.
Selecting Matrix Monitoring

Matrix monitoring is available if you have optional monitoring modules as part of your system.
Figure 225: Platinum Monitor Dialog Box
Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and outputs as a set of inputs on a
separate matrix (which is called the monitor matrix). It allows you to monitor what comes out of a
particular output. If you have a monitoring module installed in your Platinum router, you can set up
monitoring information here. You can monitor input signals, output signals, or both input and output
signals. You can set up a matrix monitoring configuration in one of two ways: via the Quick-Physical I/O
selection list, or by manually inputting the information desired. (If you prefer to set up a monitoring
matrix that is automatically created and updated, do not choose this option. See Manually Adding a New
Matrix (on page 850) for information on having Navigator create a monitoring matrix automatically.)
"Quick-Adding" a Monitoring Matrix

Click Add to assign a default monitoring matrix to the list box.
1. In the Quick-Physical I/O Selection List box, highlight the name of the matrix to assign to the
monitoring configuration list.
2. Click the appropriate radio button to select input or output monitoring, or both.
3. Click Assign.
The selected matrix appears in the Monitoring Matrix Configuration list box.
 To remove the matrix, click Delete.
 To edit matrix information, highlight the name of the matrix assigned to the monitoring
configuration list, and then click Advanced.
The Monitor Matrix dialog box opens. (See Manually Creating a Monitoring Matrix (on page 873) for
more instructions on completing this dialog box.)
4. Click Next.
The Control Settings dialog box opens.
Manually Creating a Monitoring Matrix

Click Add to assign a default monitoring matrix to the list box.
1. At the matrix list control area, highlight the desired input and/or output module slots to include in
the selected monitor matrix.
2. Right-click the mouse, and then select Assign to Monitor Matrix.
3. Click Advanced.
The Monitor Matrix dialog box opens.
Figure 226: Monitor Matrix Dialog Box
4. In the Properties box, make the following selections:

 Select the desired level on which this matrix operates from the drop-down list box.
 If you want input monitoring offset, set the desired input offset number.
 If you want output monitoring offset, set the desired output offset number.
 Select a display color.
If you have already set this selection, as described Changing Initial Source Mode Settings (on page
863), you do not have to set it again.
5. In the On-Download Initial Source box, select one of the following options:
 Select Best Guess to allow the frame to either keep or disconnect outputs after download.
 Select Disconnect to allow the frame to disconnect outputs in the matrix areas after download.
 Select First Source to specify all outputs of the matrix to be connected to the first input in the
matrix.
If you have added more than one matrix, and some of the same modules are assigned to both
matrixes, an asterisk appears to the left of the name. The asterisk means that this particular matrix
provides virtual output monitoring. See the Platinum Frame and Modules Manual Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual for more information on real and virtual output monitoring.
Figure 227: Virtual Monitoring Indicators
6. Click Next.
The Control Settings dialog box opens.
Selecting Controls
Figure 228: Platinum Control Settings Dialog Box
This dialog box allows you to set up frame identifiers needed for file transfer protocol (FTP) functions,
Ethernet network functions, I/O sync and reference settings, SNMP settings, protocol and license key
settings, TDM starting slot offset, and allowing database name synchronization.
Setting up Platinum Frame Identification

1. In the Platinum Frame Identification box, select the frame ID (the frame’s physical address) from
the drop-down list box.
2. In the Frame Name box, enter the frame’s descriptive name.
Setting up Platinum FTP Functions

1. In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings....
The Communication Settings dialog box opens. If necessary, select the FTP Login tab.
Figure 229: FTP Login Tab
2. In the Username box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The actual username is set up or
changed via Navigator.)
3. In the Password box, enter the user name used for FTP transfers. (The actual password is set up or
changed via Navigator.)
4. In the Confirm box, re-enter the password you just entered.
Setting Up Platinum Network Settings

1. In the Platinum Communications Settings box, click Settings....
The Communication Settings dialog box opens.
IMPORTANT: The ENET 1 and ENET 2 tabs control the Ethernet ports on your Platinum router. The
configuration steps you follow differ, depending on whether you use one or both ports.
The ENET 1 and the ENET 2 tabs’ network properties are divided into two sections: the Current
(read-only) section, which is displayed on the left side of the figures below; and the Programmed
(editable) settings section, which is displayed on the right side of the figures below.
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The MAC address is set up via Navigator or card-
edge controls.
Programmed settings include
 Frame IP address (this is necessary for transferring or upgrading files via an FTP site; the actual
frame IP address is set up via Navigator or card-edge controls.)
 Gateway address
 Subnet Mask address
Figure 230: ENET 1 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results
Figure 231: ENET 2 Tab Showing Current and Programmed Selection Results
To set up communication for Navigator to transfer configuration files to the Platinum frame (this is not
assigning an IP address to the frame):
a. Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.
a. Select the ENET 1 tab.
b. Fill in the Frame IP address.
c. Click OK to accept the changes.
To assign IP settings to the Platinum frame's ENET 1 and/or ENET 2 ports:
d. Fill in the FTP Login information as appropriate for your network.

e. Select the ENET 1 tab.
You cannot change the MAC address at this tab. The MAC address is set up via Navigator or
card-edge controls.
f. Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask address.
(The ENET 2 port is disabled by default; make changes only if you are using a second Ethernet
port on a Platinum router.)
g. Select the ENET 2 tab.
h. Select the Check to modify network settings for this port check box.
i. Fill in the Frame IP address, Gateway address, and Subnet Mask address.
j. Click Download to accept the changes and send the changes to the router. A series of
informational messages appear that show the progress of the download.
CAUTION
If the IP address you changed from is already set up in the Comm Settings menu, this download
changes the selection at the Navigator Comm Settings menu. If the IP Address you changed
from is not already set up, this download does not add the selection to the list.
Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and References

The I/O Type drop-down list box opens when the you select Standard radio button. The Sync Pulse
Delay box opens when you select the Advanced radio button.
1. If you want to configure the sync settings, in the Platinum I/O Sync and References box, click
Sync....
The Configure I/O Sync Settings dialog box opens.
Figure 232: Configure I/O Sync Settings Dialog Box (Standard Setting Selected)
You can configure separate settings for up to four separate sync ports. For each port, choose the
following settings:
2. Choose the desired sync (1 through 4) from the drop-down list box.
3. Enter a name by which to identify a particular sync port.
4. Choose Auto, Standard, or Advanced mode.
 In Auto mode the switch point is determined by the detected sync type only, based on SMPTE
RP-168 specifications.
 Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing reference. Select which one you
want from the I/O Type drop-down list box.
 Advanced mode provides the option to enter a sync pulse (take) delay in microseconds. Enter
the delay time you want in the Sync Pulse Delay box.
5. Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box.
Setting up SNMP (Optional)

If you plan to use Simple Network Management Protocol with your Platinum router, you must select the
appropriate SNMP settings and, if desired, set up advanced settings for updating license key and map
names information.
Note: To set up the SNMP Agent for your Platinum routing system, you must purchase separate license
support. The Platinum SNMP Agent is not supported for use with systems configured with TDM and MX /
DX cards.
See the Simple Network Management Protocol for Platinum, Panacea, and Edge Products Installation
and Configuration Manual for information on SNMP licensing, activating the SNMP Agent, and using
SNMP to control a Platinum router.
To enable this function, click SNMP... in the Platinum Protocol and License Settings box. See Selecting
Controls (on page 875).
The SNMP Agent Options window opens. The SNMP Agent Options window is a dialog box that allows
you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings.
Figure 233: SNMP Agent Options Window
Three separate group boxes are displayed on this window, and are described in the following sections:
• Trap Destination IP Addresses (on page 880)
• SNMP Agent (on page 882)
• System (on page 883)
Trap Destination IP Addresses

The Trap Destinations IP Addresses group box allows you to add, modify, or delete SNMP Trap
Destinations.
To add or modify an SNMP Trap destination:

1. Click Add... (or, to modify a destination, click Modify....).
The Add (or Edit) Trap Destination dialog box opens.
Figure 234: Edit Trap Destination Dialog Box
2. Change selections as described below.

Trap Destinations Selections
Item Function
IP Address IP address desired for the SNMP Trap destination
Port (Can be from 1 to 65535) Network port desired for the SNMP
Trap destination
Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get" operation
has to match this setting in the MIB browser in order to read
information from device)
Version SNMP version desired for the SNMP Trap
Timeout Desired time period (in seconds) before an SNMP Trap is sent to
a manager if the initial attempt failed
Retry Number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager if the
initial attempt failed
To delete an SNMP Trap destination:

1. At the SNMP Agent Options window list control, select the IP address for the SNMP trap destination
you want to delete. Use standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple devices.
2. Click Delete.
The IP address(es) are removed from the list.
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. You will be prompted to confirm the deletion.
SNMP Agent
This table shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed in the SNMP Agent group box.
SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Window
Item Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The network port used by
the SNMP agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get"
operation has to match this setting in the MIB
browser in order to read information from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology,
a "Set" operation has to match this setting in a MIB
browser in order to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps are sent if the
read or write community does not match between
the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address shortcut menu (see
below)
The Managers Address shortcut menu allows you to specify the addresses of the managers whose
requests will be processed by the SNMP Agent.
Figure 235: Manager Address Shortcut Menu
To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to complete the function.
To modify a manager address:

a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify. The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.
d. Click OK to complete the function.
To delete a manager address:

a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Use standard Windows selection techniques to select
multiple addresses.
b. Click Remove.
The IP address(es) are removed from the list.
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. You will be prompted to confirm the
deletion.
c. Click OK to accept the changes.
System
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the Navigation window.
This is user-defined information that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when
it is retrieved by a MIB browser. The fields and function descriptions for the items listed in the System
box are below.
System Fields of SNMP Options Window
Field Explanation
Description Device description; default is "Leitch Agent"
Location Device physical location
Contact Device contact person
Name Device name
Updating License Keys and Logical Settings

To set up license keys and Map Names information settings for your Platinum router, click Advanced....
The Advanced Settings window opens.
The Advanced Settings window is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view the configuration file
names that are used to store frame’s configuration information; and displays information and settings
for Map Names and license options.
Map Names Tab

The Map Names Tab dialog box allows you to update a frame’s source and destination "Names
Mapping" file based on the current logical routing configuration utility database.
Figure 236: Map Names Tab
The Map Names tab allows you to make the following settings:
• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer the Map Names file to the
frame.
Map Names File Transfer Selections
Selection Function
XY File Transfer Export a file by X-Y transfer based on the routing
system’s serial or TCP/IP communication setting
FTP Export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol (you
will be asked to log in before the file transfer is
initiate.)
• From the Select File group box, you can choose how you want the Map Names file to be generated.
Map Names File Generation Functions
Selection Function
Auto Generate Generate a new file based on the current logical
database
Use Existing File Generate a Map Names file based on an existing file
• When you click the Update button, the frame reboots after the file has been transmitted. A frame
must be rebooted for the frame to use the new transfer file.
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses for up to two separate Platinum
resource modules (PT-RES-1 and PT-RES-2).
Figure 237: License Tab
The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

• From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer the license key to the
frame.
License Key Transfer Functions
Selection Function
XY File Transfer Export a file by X-Y transfer (based on serial or TCP/IP communication
setting)
FTP Export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol (you will be asked to log
in before the file transfer is initiated)
• In the License Key box(es), enter the appropriate license activation code(s) you received from your
Customer Service representative.
must be rebooted before the SNMP license is recognized.
Changing Protocol Settings

To enable this function, click Protocols... at the Platinum Control Settings dialog box as described in
Selecting Controls (on page 875).
The Change Protocol Settings dialog box opens. This multi-tabbed dialog box allows you to perform the
following tasks:
• Enabling and Disabling Signal Presence Messages (on page 886)
• Enabling Message Filtering by Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs And Outputs (on page 887)
• Enable Message Filtering by Server Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs and Outputs (on page 890)
• Enabling Serial or X-Y Ports on the Platinum Communications Back Panel (on page 894)
Enabling and Disabling Signal Presence Messages

To enable this function, select the Protocols tab at the Change Protocol Settings dialog box. When you
have finished filling out the selections as described, do one of the following:
• Select the Connections tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
• Click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Figure 238: Protocols Tab
This tab shows you the available protocols that your Platinum frame currently supports. You cannot
disable any of these protocols; however, this tab allows you to enable and disable signal presence
settings for the X-Y pass through protocol.
• When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is selected, Navigator allows input signal
presence messages to be sent.
When the Allow Input Signal Presence Messages check box is not selected, Navigator filters out
input signal presence messages.
• When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is selected, Navigator allows output
signal presence messages to be sent.
When the Allow Output Signal Presence Messages check box is not selected, Navigator filters out
output signal presence messages.
For a detailed discussion of the X-Y pass-through protocol, see the Imagine Communications Routing
Switchers Serial Protocol Reference Operation and Reference Manual.
Enabling Message Filtering by Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs And

Outputs
To enable this function, select the Connections tab at the Change Protocol Settings dialog box. When
you have finished filling out the selections as described, do one of the following:
• Select the Servers tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
Figure 239: Connections Tab
This tab allows you to make the appropriate selections to enable filtering out messages based on
specific connections, devices, and level inputs/outputs.
Enabling Connections Group Box

The Enable Connections group box displays all current connections available on your Platinum frame. By
default, a Platinum frame always has the following connections; default connections show an asterisk at
the end of the connection name.
You can enable or disable any of the default connections. You cannot edit or delete default connections.
Any user-added (non-default) connections can be edited or deleted.
• XYSer1 uses X-Y pass through and X-Y terminal protocols on serial port 1 on the Platinum
communications back panel.
• XYSer2 uses X-Y pass through & X-Y Terminal protocols on serial port 2 on the Platinum
communications back panel.
• XYCoax1 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 1 on the Platinum communications back panel.
• XYCoax2 uses X-Y pass through protocol on XY port 2 on the Platinum communications back panel.
To enable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the connection name is
checked.
To disable a default connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the connection name is
unchecked.
To add a connection, follow these steps:

1. Click Add under the Enable Connections group box.
The Add New Client Connection dialog box opens.
Figure 240: Add New Client Connection Dialog Box
2. Enter a connection name in the Name box, and then click OK.
The Connections tab opens and the Connections Property Settings box is enabled.
At the Connection Property Settings box, you must specify a server IP and port number because the
Network Client selection uses the Ethernet port. See Connection Property Settings Group Box (on
3. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings
group box.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows you to specify the level
inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per each connection.
1. Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list.
2. If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down list box.
3. Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs list. Any status messages
for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow Inputs list box are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list using standard Windows selection
techniques. Move inputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for all detected inputs are
allowed for the selected connection.
4. Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow Outputs list. Any status
messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the Allow Outputs list box are filtered out from
this connection.
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs list using standard Windows selection
techniques. Move outputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages for all detected outputs
are allowed for the selected connection.
5. If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the summary of all the assigned level
inputs and outputs.
The Input & Output Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs displayed.
6. When finished, click OK.
The Connections tab opens.
7. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box

The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to make selections to filter
out status messages by devices.
1. Select the desired connection from the Enable Connections list.
A list of devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message
Posting list box.
2. To allow status message postings for a specific devices:
 Enter the device ID number in the Device ID edit box.
 Click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a panel, frame, or Edge, the device’s
name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the Allow Status Message
Postings of All Detected Devices From This Connection check box to allow the frame to post all
status messages for all detected devices associated with the selected connection.
3. To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:
 Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting list
box. Multiple device IDs may be selected from the list using standard Windows selection
techniques.
 Click Delete to remove the selected device IDs from the list.
4. To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.
5. Make the appropriate selections for the Connection Property Settings group box.
Connection Property Settings Group Box

If you selected Network Client as a connection type, you must specify a server IP and port number in
this group box. You can also specify whether or not you want to let the frame automatically reconnect if
a server connection fails or is lost.
Click the Allow Status Message Postings of All Detected Devices from This Connection… check box to
allow the frame to post status messages for all detected devices for the selected connection. If the
check box is unchecked, the frame uses the assigned device IDs to determine which devices are allow
status message posting.
Enable Message Filtering by Server Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs and
Outputs
To enable this function, select the Servers tab at the Change Protocol Settings dialog box. When you
have finished filling out the selections as described, do one of the following:
• Select the Ports tab to continue the changing protocol settings process.
Figure 241: Servers Tab
This tab allows you to filter out messages based on specific server connections, devices, and level
inputs/outputs. This tab functionality is very similar to the Connections tab; however, server
connections are for other devices (panels, frames, Edge, window application, and so forth) to connect to
Platinum frame through the Ethernet ports.
Enabling Connections Group Box

The Enable Connections group box displays all current server connections available on your Platinum
frame. By default, a Platinum frame always has the following connections; default connections show an
asterisk at the end of the connection name.
 XYNetSrv uses X-Y pass through protocol.
 XYTelnet uses X-Y terminal and X-Y pass through protocols.
 XYAdmin uses X-Y pass through protocol.
 XYStream uses X-Y pass through protocol.
 LRC uses LRC protocol.
To enable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the connection name is
checked.
To disable a default server connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the connection name is
unchecked.
To add a server connection, follow these steps:

1. Click Add under the Enable Connections group box.
The Add New Server Connection dialog box opens.
Figure 242: Add New Server Connection Dialog Box
2. Enter a server name in the Name box.

3. From the Type drop-down list box, select a protocol type for the server connection.
 Select LRC TCP Server to use LRC protocol on a network server.
 Select Network Client to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network client.
 Select Network Server to use X-Y pass through protocol on a network server.
 Select Telnet Server to use X-Y terminal and X-Y pass through protocols on a Telnet server.
4. Click OK to return to the Servers tab.
The Connections Property Settings box is enabled. (At the Connection Property Settings box, you
must specify a listening port number and the maximum number of clients allowed. See Connection
Property Settings Group Box (on page 892) for more information.
5. Make the appropriate selections for the Connection Property Settings group box.
Connection Property Settings Group Box

Each server connection requires that you specify a unique listening port (that other devices and/or
applications must know to connect to a this particular server from the frame); and a maximum number
of other devices and/or applications that the frame allows to connect to this server at a time.
1. In the Listening Port box, enter the port number of the listening port.
2. In the Max Clients box, enter the maximum number of other devices and/or applications allowed to
connect to this server at one time.
3. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings
group box.
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings Group Box
The Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Postings group box allows you to specify the level
inputs and/or outputs for status message filtering per each server.
1. Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list.
2. If necessary, select the input level to be modified from the Level drop-down list box.
3. Move the desired inputs from the Available Inputs list to the Allow Inputs list. Any status messages
for the inputs that are not assigned to the Allow Inputs list box are filtered out from this connection.
Multiple inputs may be selected from the Available Inputs list using standard Windows selection
techniques. Move inputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Inputs list box has no input specified, the status messages for all detected inputs are
allowed for the selected connection.
4. Move the desired outputs from the Available Outputs list to the Allow Outputs list. Any status
messages for the outputs that are not assigned to the Allow Outputs list box are filtered out from
this connection.
Multiple outputs may be selected from the Available Outputs list using standard Windows selection
techniques. Move outputs between lists via the >, <, >>, and >> buttons.
If the Allow Outputs list box has no output specified, the status messages for all detected outputs
are allowed for the selected connection.
5. If desired, click View Allowable Inputs & Outputs… to view the summary of all the assigned level
inputs and outputs.
The Input & Output Ranges box opens, with the selected Levels, inputs, and outputs displayed.
6. When finished, click OK.
The Server tab opens.
7. Make the appropriate selections for the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box.
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Group Box

The Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting group box allows you to make selections to filter
out status messages by devices.
1. Select the desired server connection from the Enable Connections list.
A list of devices attached to that connection appears in the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message
Posting list box.
2. To allow status message postings for a specific devices, enter the device ID number in the device ID
edit box, and then click Add. Note that, for any device IDs already assigned to a panel, frame, or
Edge, the device’s name is shown next to the assigned ID.
If the Device IDs list box does not have a device ID assigned, check the Allow Status Message
Postings of All Detected Devices From This Connection check box to allow the frame to post all
status messages for all detected devices associated with the selected connection.
3. To disable status message postings for a specific listed device:
 Select the appropriate device IDs from the Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting list
box. Multiple device IDs may be selected from the list using standard Windows selection
techniques.
 Click Delete.
The selected device IDs are removed from the list.
4. To disable status message postings from all listed devices, click Delete All.
All device IDs are removed from the list.
Enabling Serial or X-Y Ports on the Platinum Communications Back Panel

To enable this function, select the Ports tab at the Change Protocol Settings dialog box.
Figure 243: Ports Tab
The currently enabled serial and Ethernet ports are displayed in the Enable Ports box. The port
selections that you cannot enable or disable are greyed out.
• To enable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the port name is checked.
• To disable a port connection, make sure the selection box to the left of the port name is unchecked.
Enabling TDM Starting Slot Offset

The TDM starting slot offset selection allows you to specify the starting slot for Platinum TDM matrices
in 15RU and 28RU frames. It is especially useful when you use an ATDM32-X28 or ATDM16-X15
crosspoint module.
The TDM starting slot offset is a number that indicates where the contiguous TDM modules are placed in
the frame.
• For a 15RU frame, slot numbers range from 1 to 17.
• For a 28RU frame, slot numbers range from 1to 33.
At the TDM Starting Slot drop-down list box, select the number that corresponds with the slot where a
TDM matrix is located.
Completing the Control Settings Entries

When finished with all of your control setting selections, click OK to return to the Control Settings dialog
box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Editing the Router Matrix

The Edit Platinum Frame dialog box includes all functions necessary for changing a router frame
configuration. Any of the tabs (Configured Matrices, Monitoring Matrices, Detected Matrices,
Firmware, or Control Settings) can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
Configured Matrices Tab
At the Configured Matrices tab, you can add a new matrix, or delete or configure an existing matrix for a
Platinum frame. Matrix information (name, inputs, outputs, format, partition) is displayed in the matrix
list control area. Corresponding input and output modules are displayed on the right side of the dialog
box. The Output column and the Input column are set up with separate list box controls. The matrix’s
module information is coded as described below.
Matrix Information Color Codes

Color Code Description
Blue Designates I/O slots (physical I/Os) assigned to the selected matrix
Dark grey Designates I/O slots that are not selectable because they are assigned to another
matrix
Light grey Designates I/O slots that are available to be assigned to any matrix
Green Designates I/O slots highlighted to be assigned to (or unassigned from) the selected
matrix
There are two icons that show module information, as shown below. Navigator may display both icons
for a particular slot.
Matrix Informational Icons
Icon Description
Indicates that a module has been detected in this slot; you can identify its
parameters via the Detected Matrices Tab
Indicates that the module detected in this slot is different from what the slot was
configured to be
If you have several editing functions to perform, you may want to do them all at once via the Advanced
function (see below).
• To select items from the Input or Output column, use standard Windows selection techniques to
select multiple modules on each, or both, lists. The selected items appear green until you deselect
them. Unselecting removes the green color information from the slot, but does not remove the slot
from the assigned matrix.
• To deselect items from the Input or Output column, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the
mouse, and then select Unselect from the shortcut menu. Unselecting removes the green color
information from the slot, but does not remove the slot from the assigned matrix.
• To deselect multiple items at once, right-click the mouse, and then select Unselect All from the
shortcut menu. Unselecting removes the green color information from the slot, but does not remove
the slot from the assigned matrix.
Input modules can be assigned to more than one matrix at a time. Output modules cannot be assigned
to more than one matrix.
• To assign a module to a different matrix , highlight the matrix you want to assign a module to,
highlight the available slot (displayed as light grey), right click the mouse, and then select Assign to
<matrix name>. The assigned slot displays green color information until you unselect it.
For HView SX Pro matrix:
 Select four contiguous available output slots to add a HView SX Pro64.
 Select two output slots to add a HView SX Pro32.
 Select one slot to add a HView SX Pro16.
 In other cases, multiple HView SX Pro16s will be added.
• To remove a module from a matrix , highlight the slot you want to remove from the matrix, right
click the mouse, and then select Unassign from <matrix name>. The removed slot displays green
color information until you unselect it.
• To change the matrix name , click the name box of the appropriate matrix, and then type in a new
name. (You may also click the right mouse button to copy the existing name, paste in a new name, or
delete the name completely.)
• To change the matrix format , click the format box of the appropriate matrix, and then select a new
format type. Alternatively, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and then select
Change Format from the shortcut menu. Choose the new format from the display list.
• To change the sort order of the listed matrixes , click the title of the column by which you want to
sort. Click the title box once to sort in ascending order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again to sort in
descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
• To add a new matrix , click Add.
The Add Matrix dialog box opens. See Manually Adding a New Matrix (on page 850) for information
on how to complete this dialog.
• To delete an individual matrix , highlight the appropriate matrix, and then click Delete.
• To delete all listed matrixes, click Delete All.
• To add a virtual matrix to an underlying multiviewer video matrix, highlight the video matrix, right
click the mouse, and then select Add HView SX Hybrid PIPs. The HView SX Hybrid PIPs selection is
added to the Configured Matrices list.
• To perform multiple edit functions click Advanced....
The Matrix Partitioning tab opens. See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 863) for a description of this
tab. At this tab you can change these selections:
 Matrix name
 Matrix format
 Matrix sort order
 Color for matrix partitioning display
 Level
 Input offset
 Output offset
 Partition type
 Number of partitions
 Physical map order
• To assign dual outputs, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and then select Dual
Output from the shortcut menu. Select this option only if your Platinum modules include a dual
output module such as the PT-HSR-DOB, PT-SR-DOB, or PT-ENC-DOB.
• To enable redundant crosspoints, right-click the mouse button, and then choose Redundant Switch
Mode from the shortcut menu.
This function is available with 256×256 frames only.
 Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module.
 Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module. Existing
• To set the crosspoint switching mode, right-click the mouse button, and then choose Redundant
Switch Mode from the shortcut menu.
 Click Switch Next to switch all new crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module. Existing
 Click Switch All to switch all current crosspoints to the new, active crosspoint module.
• To assign sync settings, highlight the appropriate slot, right-click the mouse, and then select Assign
Sync from the shortcut menu. Choose the new sync setting from the display list.
You can change the default sync setting values at the Control Settings tab. See Setting Up Platinum
I/O Sync and References (on page 878) for instructions on how to change the sync names and
settings.
To change module formats

a. Highlight the appropriate matrix.
b. Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows selection methods, select
several modules at the same time), and then select Change Format....
The Select I/O Card Type dialog box opens.
Figure 244: Select I/O Card Type Dialog Box
c. Select the format you want for the module(s). The card type automatically changes to match the
format you selected.
d. If the card type includes options, click the check box next to the plugin.
To change module parameter settings

a. Right-click on the appropriate module (or, using standard Windows selection methods, select
several modules of the same format), and then select Parameter Settings....
The Configure Module Parameters dialog box opens.
The parameters listed in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box are user-controllable.
These parameters vary, depending on which type of module has been selected. See the
Platinum Routing Switchers Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration, and Operation
Manual for a list of each module’s parameters, description, and user range.
The Configure Module Parameters dialog box displays the same type of information as the
Module Parameters List component of the Detected Matrices tab (see Detected Matrices Tab
(on page 902)). If you change parameter information in the Configure Module Parameters dialog
box, the values you select become the default values after a device download is performed.
b. Double click the parameter instance you want to change, or double click the appropriate
parameter name to change all instances to the same value.
c. Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or a text box opens.
• In a drop-down list box, select the setting that you want.
• In a text box, enter the value you want.
To clear module parameter settings

b. Right click the parameter instance you want to clear.
OR
Right click the appropriate parameter name to clear all its parameter instances at the same
time.
c. Click Clear.
Selected parameter instance values are cleared.
To clear all module parameter settings

b. Click Clear All.
All parameter instances values are cleared.
Enabling Matrix Partitioning

1. Double-click the name of the frame you want to partition.
The Configured Matrices dialog box opens.
2. Click Advanced....
The Matrix Partition dialog box opens as shown in Changing Initial Source Mode Settings (on page
863).
3. At the top left of the window is pertinent matrix information. You can change the name, the input
partition display color, starting level, and input and output offsets.
 To change the sort order of the listed matrixes, click the title of the column by which you want
to sort. Click the title box once to sort in ascending order (A-Z or 0-512); click the title box again
to sort in descending order (Z-A or 512-0).
 To change the matrix name, click the name box of the appropriate matrix, and then type in a
new name. (You may also click the right mouse button to copy the existing name, paste in a new
name, or delete the name completely.)
 To change the input matrix partition display color, click the color box of the appropriate matrix,
and then choose the color you want.
 To change the starting level of a matrix, click the drop-down list box under the Levels column.
(You cannot type in the information into this field.)
 To change the input offset number, type in the desired offset number into the field under the
Input Offset column.
 To change the output offset number, type in the desired offset number into the field under the
Output Offset column.
 To change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component, click somewhere
within the read-only area of the matrix partition list for the component you want to change.
(Alternatively, move your mouse to the Physical View area, and then right-click the mouse
button. A shortcut menu opens. Select Physical Map Order.) The Physical Map Order dialog box
opens (see Assigning Physical Map Order (on page 870)).
Click the physical location number for the appropriate component input or output, and then select a
new physical location number from the drop-down list box. Navigator assigns the new number to
your chosen component, and assigns the original number from your chosen component to the
component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
4. At the top right of the Matrix Partition window is the Matrix Size information box (see Changing
Initial Source Mode Settings (on page 863)). This display is for informational purposes only; you
cannot change the matrix size here.
5. At the middle right of the dialog box is the Partition Type drop-down list box. Select the matrix
partitioning type from the Partition Type drop-down list box, and then configure it as described:
None
Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type.

• No Partitioning (on page 865)
• No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1145)
RGB/Stereo Partitioning
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of equal size. You can
connect the RGB outputs from a component device to the first three physical inputs on the
router, and the RGB outputs of a second component device to physical inputs four, five and six
(each group of three inputs appears to the control system as a single input, and are switched
simultaneously).
• RGB/Stereo Partitioning (on page 865)
• RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced)
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations;
Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the
appropriate components (this option differs from Shared Inputs in that input blocks cannot
overlap).
• Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1147)
Wild Partitioning
Choose this option if you want to allow any input or output to be assigned to any component.
Shared Inputs
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations.
Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the matrix to the
appropriate components (this option differs from Contiguous in that input blocks can overlap).
• See the following topics:
• Shared Inputs (on page 868)
• Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1149)
Mono Breakaway
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of equal size (that is, RGB)
and allow any input or output to be assigned to any component, or to more than one
component at the same time. This option is useful when setting up TDM applications where you
want to breakaway mono audio channels.
• See the following topics:
• Mono Breakaway (on page 868)
• Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1151)
Stereo Breakaway
Choose this option if you want to divide a matrix into components of equal size (that is, RGB)
and allow any input, channel, or output to be assigned to any component, or to more than one
component at the same time. This option is useful when setting up stereo audio channels4 in
TDM applications where you want to breakaway channels or always move them together.
• Stereo Breakaway (on page 869)
• Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) (on page 1152)
Each AES signal consists of two audio channels. For example, in stereo pairs, “left” is one
channel and “right” is one channel.
6. When all of your selections are complete, click OK to return to the Configured Matrices tab, and
then click OK to accept the changes.
Detected Matrices Tab
Figure 245: Detected Matrices Tab
When a system poll is initiated, Navigator queries all devices attached to the system to determine the
configuration of each. The properties of the detected frame are displayed on the Detected Matrices tab.
This information is read-only (it cannot be edited).
If the first output card in a matrix has failed, or if the wrong card has been placed into the frame, the
frame’s control card cannot determine a valid matrix. In this case, the graphic of the frame shown on the
Detected Matrices tab is empty. However, the frame still reports exactly which cards it has found in
each slot. This information can be viewed on the Detected Cards tab, and can assist in troubleshooting
the system.
To view the details of a particular matrix, click View Detail.
The Matrix Partition tab opens. Matrix information cannot be changed.
To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the matrix you are configuring, click
Copy to Configured Matrix.
You can view some hardware details at the Detected Matrices tab: module parameters, frame settings,
and the hardware snapshot file.
To determine the parameters for a particular module:

1. Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module. The Module Parameters list box
opens.
Figure 246: Module Parameters List Box for Modules
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable. These parameters vary,
depending on which type of module has been selected. Selections that are greyed out are read-only and
cannot be changed. See the Platinum Routing Switchers Frames and Modules Installation, Configuration,
and Operation Manual for a list of each module’s parameters, description, and user range.
The Module Parameters List displays the same type of information as the Configure Module Parameters
dialog box. See Configured Matrices Tab (on page 895). If you change parameter information in the
Configure Module Parameters dialog box, the values you select becomes the default values after a
device download is performed.
To change a specific parameter instance for a particular module:

1. The Module Parameters List displays the same type of information as the Configure Module
Parameters dialog box.
If you change parameter information in the Configure Module Parameters dialog box, the values you
select becomes the default values after a device download is performed.Position the screen cursor
above the module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module.
The Module Parameters list box opens.
3. Highlight the specific parameter instance you want to change, right-click the mouse button, and
then click Set....
4. Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or an editable text box is
displayed. Make the desired changes, and then click Set.
5. Click OK to return to the Module Parameters list box.
The change to the parameter instance is displayed.
To return to the default setting, highlight the specific parameter instance you want to change, right-
click the mouse button, and then click Refresh.
To change a specific parameter for a particular module:

1. Position the screen cursor above the module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View <type> Module.
3. Highlight the specific parameter you want to change, right-click the mouse button, and then click
Set....
4. Depending on the type of parameter selected, either a drop-down list box or an editable text box is
displayed.
5. Make the desired changes, and then click Set.
6. Click OK to return to the Module Parameters list box.
The same change for all instances in the selected parameter is displayed.
To return to the default setting, highlight the specific parameter you want to change, right-click the
mouse button, and then click Refresh.
To determine the settings for the frame in which a particular module is located:
1. Position the screen cursor above the resource module entry (PT-RES) in the Control Components
section
2. Right-click the mouse button, and then select View Frame Settings.
Figure 247: Module Parameters List Box for Frames
The parameters listed in the Module Parameters list box are user-controllable. Selections that are
greyed out are read-only and cannot be changed. The table below lists frame parameters, description,
and user range.
Application Parameters Available
(* denotes default setting; [RO] = Read-only parameter)
Parameter Description User Range

Frame Type [RO] Programmed frame size • PM-FR-5
• PM-FR-9
• PT-FR-15
• PT-FR-28
Detected Frame Type [RO] Actual, physical frame size • PM-FR-5
• PM-FR-9
• PT-FR-15
• PT-FR-28
Frame Id Number assigned to frame to allow it to • 0 - 127
participate in the control system
Frame Name Alphanumeric string used to allow user- • 23 characters
friendly naming of the Platinum frame; it
shows in the hardware list
CPU Id [RO] PT-RES serial number; allows licensing for • 12 characters
optional features such as SNMP
Sync Mode1 Specifies sync settings for sync ports • Auto
• (see Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and • Standard
Sync Mode4 References (on page 878) for descriptions • Advanced
of these sync mode settings)
Sync Reference1 Only used if sync mode is "Standard" • None*
• (see Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and • 1280×720/50P Line 7
Sync Reference4 References (on page 878) for a description • 1280×720/60P Line 7
of this sync mode setting)
• 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/24P Line 7
• 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
• 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/25P Line 7
• 1920×1080/30P Line 7
• 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/50I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
• Analog 525/60 Line 10
• Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
Detected Reference1 [RO] Sync reference that is automatically • None*
• detected by PT-RES (this is the sync • 1280×720/50P Line 7
Detected Reference4 [RO] reference used when Sync Mode • 1280×720/60P Line 7
parameter is set to Auto)

Four concurrent available sync references • 1280×720/60P/1.001 Line 7
are allowed • 1920×1080/24P Line 7
If an external sync reference is removed • 1920×1080/24P/1.001 Line 7
from the frame, the Sync Presence
• 1920×1080/24PsF Line 7
parameter indicates that it is not present;
however, the Detected Reference • 1920×1080/24PsF/1.001 Line 7
parameter continues to show the previous • 1920×1080/25P Line 7
detected reference to prevent interruption • 1920×1080/30P Line 7
in switching operations • 1920×1080/30P/1.001 Line 7
• 1920×1080/50I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I Line 7
• 1920×1080/60I/1.001 Line 7
• Analog 525/60/1.001 Line 10
Redundancy Mode Instructs PT-RES to automatically switch • Manual
crosspoints from a crosspoint module to its • Auto
redundant crosspoint module when the
active one is removed
This feature is not available for frames that
do not have redundant crosspoint
modules; when set to Manual, you must
switch each crosspoint to the redundant
card by setting it to Active by using the
crosspoint active parameter
Redundant Switch Mode Instructs PT-RES to switch all currently • Switch All
active crosspoints to the redundant
crosspoint module when the active one is
removed
External Temperature [RO] Specifies external operating temperature –128° to 120°C
in degrees Celsius
General Alarm1 [RO] Alarm relay on PT-RES • No Alarm
• • Alarm
General Alarm3 [RO]
Alarm Enable1 Enables/disables General Alarm parameter • Enable
• • Disable
Alarm Enable3
Active Crosspoint1 For frames that support redundant • On
• crosspoints, this parameter allows you to • Off
Active Crosspoint8 set the currently active crosspoint module
If Redundant Switch Mode is set to Switch
All" all active crosspoints switches through

the set crosspoint module and the
corresponding, previous active crosspoint
module becomes inactive
For all frames the value of this parameter
indicates whether the crosspoint module
installed is active (present and allowing
switched)
Sync Enable1 Allows you to select which sync references • On
• can trigger crosspoint switches • Off
Sync Enable4
Sync Presence1 Indicates which sync reference is presently • On
• detected by PT-RES • Off
Sync Presence4 If an external sync reference is removed
from the frame, the Sync Presence
parameter indicates that it is not present;
however, the Detected Reference
parameter continues to show the previous
detected reference to prevent interruption
in switching operations
Active TDM Crosspoint1 Allows you to set the currently active TDM • On
Active TDM Crosspoint2 module • Off
Active Sync Module1 Allows you to set the currently active sync • On
• module • Off
Active Sync Module2
Internal Network1 Used with HView SX Hybrid , sets the • 192.168.101.000*
• network address for internal Ethernet for
Internal Network4 each bank of HView SX Hybrid modules
do not have HView SX Hybrid modules
installed
Double Density Mode Used when a HView SX Hybrid double • 7+1
density submodule is installed on a • 8+1
Platinum IB+ module
• None*
do not have HView SX Hybrid modules
installed
Temperature Threshold Indicates the temperature threshold for all 60°C* (-127° to +127°C)
the temperature sensors in/on a Platinum
frame
When a change in any external or internal
temperature sensor readings rises to the
same value or greater than the

temperature threshold value, the frame
generates an alarm on the PT-Alarm
module
When a change in any external or internal
temperature sensor value results in all
temperature values drop to less than the
temperature threshold, the alarm indicator
is cleared
To view a "snapshot" of system settings:

1. Position the screen cursor above any module in the Output or Input list box.
2. Right-click the mouse button., and then select View Hardware Snapshot File.
A "snapshot" (non-editable) version of the frame's settings opens. You can use this image as a
diagnostics tool, to make sure that the frame configuration setup file corresponds with your desired
frame setup.
Figure 248: Hardware Snapshot File
Monitoring Matrices Tab
Figure 249: Monitoring Matrices Tab
Matrix monitoring is a Platinum feature that treats the matrix inputs and outputs as a set of inputs on a
separate matrix (which is called the monitor matrix). It allows you to monitor what comes out of a
particular output. If you have a monitoring module installed in your Platinum router, you can set up
monitoring information here. You can monitor input signals, output signals, or both input and output
signals. You can set up a matrix monitoring configuration in one of two ways: via the Quick-Physical I/O
selection list, or by manually inputting the information desired.
The procedures for filling in the Monitoring Matrices tab are the same as for selecting matrix
monitoring when adding a Platinum router. See Selecting Matrix Monitoring (on page 872) for details.
If you prefer to set up a monitoring matrix that is automatically created and updated, do not choose this
option. See Manually Creating a Monitoring Matrix (on page 873) for information on creating a
monitoring matrix automatically.
Firmware Tab
Figure 250: Firmware Tab
The Firmware tab allows you to quickly update to the most current Platinum firmware versions for
detected, selected modules; or for all detected, installed modules.
To update the firmware for a Platinum module, follow these steps.

1. Download the firmware upgrade to the PC where the update procedure is performed.
You can check for firmware upgrades on our website. Download the upgrade to
<drive>\Leitch\RtrWrks\bin32\Firmware, as this is the location where the system first looks for
firmware upgrade files.
2. Perform a Poll on the selected frame to obtain the latest detected modules and firmware versions.
3. Double-click the name of the frame that contains the modules you want to upgrade. If necessary,
switch to the Firmware tab.
4. From the selected matrix list, click the modules you want to upgrade. Multiple modules may be
selected using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to
select multiple modules).
A quick way to determine the installed firmware version is to "hover" the mouse over the module
icon to the right of the module name.
5. Right-click the mouse to bring up the shortcut menu, and then click Assign.
The selected module names appear in the firmware upgrade list. Note that in the firmware upgrade
list, the slot location and name of the module appears, as well as the installed firmware version of
that module and the version number for any known upgrades.
If you downloaded your firmware upgrade file to a directory different from the recommended one:
 Right-click on the appropriate module in the firmware list.
 Click Change Firmware from the shortcut menu.

 Use standard Windows navigation techniques to move to the location of the firmware upgrade
file you want to use.
6. In the firmware list, click the module you want to upgrade, and then click Upgrade.
OR
Click Upgrade All to upgrade all of the modules at once.
7. The Firmware Upgrade message box opens, which displays the steps in the upgrade process as they
occur.
Figure 251: Firmware Upgrade Message Window
If you need to stop the upgrade procedure, click Cancel. The window displays a message that says
"Aborting firmware upgrade...Please wait."
8. When the process is complete, click the Close (X) box in the upper right corner of the Firmware
Upgrade message window.
Control Settings Tab
Figure 252: Control Settings Tab
This dialog box allows you to set up identifiers needed for file transfer protocol (FTP) functions, Ethernet
network properties, I/O sync and reference settings, , and protocol and license key settings.
The procedures for filling in the Control Settings tab are the same as for selecting controls when adding
a Platinum router. See Selecting Controls (on page 875) for details.
Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations

This section explains how to set up virtual destinations through Navigator for use with your HView SX
Hybrid in conjunction with other remote control devices. It does not explain how to set up PIPs on your
HView SX Hybrid device. See the HView SX Hybrid Multiviewer Installation, Configuration, and
Operation Guide for more information about using the HView SX Hybrid on-screen application. See the
pertinent control device manual for information about using the control device to display HView SX
Hybrid outputs.
Navigator allows you to create destinations that represent actual PIPs or use existing destinations and
have the PIPs follow them. To do this you must first set up the HView SX Hybrid for your Platinum router
database, as described in Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices (on page 856).
Creating Destinations Representing Actual PIPs

1. Set up the HView SX Hybrid for your Platinum router database(see Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices
(on page 856)).
2. At the Navigation pane, click Sources.
The Logical Sources tab appears. Select Matrix View from the Status Names drop-down box.
3. Make sure the HView SX Hybrid video matrix (HView SX Hybrid V) and the virtual matrix (HView SX
Hybrid PIPs) are mapped to the same sources, as shown below.
Figure 253: Verifying HView SX Hybrid Source Mapping
4. Select the Destinations tab, and then scroll down to the PIP names. They start at the same point as
their corresponding destination offset (see below).
Figure 254: HView SX Hybrid Logical Destinations Mapping
5. Edit the PIP destinations as follows:

 Assign a different name (This is the name that appears on ABA and IDe control panels, and on
printed key caps for push button control panels.) : see Assigning Destination or Status Names
(on page 774)
 Assign an icon to a PIP: see Assigning Images to Destinations (on page 773)
 Delete a destination: Removing Logical Destinations (on page 773)

6. If necessary, check that the appropriate destination names appear (or are assigned) to the desired
control device.
Setting Up PIPs to Follow Destinations

1. If necessary, set up the HView SX Hybrid for your Platinum router database, as described in Adding
HView SX Hybrid Matrices (on page 856).
2. At the Navigation pane, double-click on the name of the appropriate routing system entry.
The Configuration dialog box opens. Select the Levels tab.
3. In the Logical System Size Destinations spin box, change the number of destinations to whatever
(smaller) number of destinations you want the PIPs to follow.
Figure 255: Changing Level Destinations
4. At the Navigation pane, double-click on the name of the appropriate Platinum entry.
The Configured Matrices dialog box opens. (The Configuration dialog box remains open in the
background.)
5. Highlight the HView SX Hybrid PIPs entry, and then click Advanced.
The Matrix Partition dialog box opens.
Figure 256: Changing the PIP Offset Entry
6. Change the Output Offset entry to 0.

7. Click OK.
An information message appears. Click OK again to save the changes.
8. At the Configuration dialog box, select the Destinations tab.
Figure 257: PIPs Follow Destinations Display
Destinations are now mapped to the desired matrix and to the HView SX Hybrid PIP matrix. From now
on, when you switch a destination, you not only switch the output destination but also the source
displayed on the HView SX Hybrid PIP. This also changes the PIP 1 parameter available on a Navigator
NUCLEUS device.
Chapter 55
Configuring Panacea Frames

Configuring a Panacea frame is a multi-step process. The procedures are similar for adding or editing a
frame. Some editing processes, however, are not performed until after a frame is added to the routing
matrix. Differences in adding/editing procedures are noted. Information about dialog boxes accessible
only in Edit mode starts in Editing a Frame’s Configuration (on page 936).
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the Panacea frame definition only.

Selecting a Frame ................................................................................... 917
Configuring the Routing Matrix ............................................................. 918
Configuring the Control Card ................................................................. 925
Editing a Frame’s Configuration............................................................. 936
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings .............................................. 949
Panacea Web Panels Tab ....................................................................... 959
Panacea Web Users Tab......................................................................... 960
Selecting a Frame
and then double-click on the Panacea router selection.
3. Select the frame type Panacea.
4. Click OK.
The Select Frame Size dialog box opens.
5. Select either a Standard1 or an Enhanced control style and a frame size (options are 1RU and 2RU).
6. Click Next.
The Router Frame dialog box opens.
Figure 258: Router Frame Dialog Box
Configuring the Routing Matrix

The following steps are involved in configuring a routing matrix:
• Selecting a Matrix Type (on page 918)
• Configuring the Matrix Type (on page 920)
• Changing Frame Properties (on page 921)
• Partitioning the Matrix (on page 921)
Selecting a Matrix Type

1. Select the matrix type from the Matrix Type drop-down list box. (The Max Matrix Size options
changes as the Matrix Type is changed.)
2. Click on the desired matrix size.
3. (Optional) If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box under
Module Options. The following table lists matrix types with programmable I/O submodules.
Table 137: Matrix Types and Supported I/O Submodules

Matrix Type Submodule Supported
AES EBU (all matrix sizes) Quiet switch
High Definition: HD clean switch
16×2, 32×2 only (HSC) Clean-quiet switch
16×8, 32×8 only (HSCQ) Clean switch with bypass
16×8 only Reclocker
All sizes
SDI SD clean switch
16×2, 32×2 only (SC) Clean-quiet switch
16×8, 32×8 only (SCQ) Clean switch with bypass
16×8 only Reclocker
All sizes
4. Click Add.
The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right side of the dialog box. For router matrices
with reclocking, clean-quiet switch, or relay bypass, an annotation (RC, CQ, CS, or CQB) appears in
the top left corner of the matrix frame setting.
Continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You cannot select matrix sizes bigger than the
space remaining in the frame.
To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An outline appears around the
matrix to indicate that it is selected. The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type. Click Delete.
The Hardware button appears only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced resource module.
5. (RES-H or enhanced modules only) Click HARDWARE… to change the I/O hardware module default
settings of a selected matrix in the empty frame.
The I/O Hardware Module dialog box opens. (See I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box (on page 945)
for more information about this dialog box).
6. After you finish defining the matrices, click Next.
Configuring the Matrix Type
Frame
Matrix 1 settings
Matrix 2
Figure 259: Panacea Configured Matrices Dialog Box
At the Configured Matrices dialog box, you can change the properties for each matrix individually (as
matrix properties), or for both at the same time (as frame properties). Frame control style and frame
size properties are displayed, but cannot be edited on this dialog box. To change either the matrix type
or matrix size, click on Back to return to the Frame Size Selection dialog box.
1. Click on the matrix settings display area for the matrix you want to change (shown as Matrix 1 and
Matrix 2 above).
2. Fill in the following fields:
 Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must match the DIP switches
on the frame.
(This item may not appear on some Panacea Configured Matrices dialog boxes.)
 Matrix to be defined (a matrix is selected for definition if it is outlined)
 Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices with the same level
number switch together. The matrices in a frame can have different level numbers.
 First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines the point at which
destination numbering starts for this matrix.
 First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point at which source
numbering starts for this matrix.
 Signal Type: select a signal type for this matrix format as desired
 Matrix Name: define a new matrix name as desired
 Matrix Color: define a new matrix color as desired
 Signal Type describes how the matrix is used in the system, and is for informational purposes
only. Changing the signal type does not affect system operation
 Matrix Name and Color identify the matrix by name instead of by ID number. These settings are
for informational purposes only; changing them does not affect system operation.
Changing Frame Properties

Click on the right side of the empty frame (shown in Configuring the Matrix Type (on page 920) as
"Frame Settings").
The Frame Properties dialog box opens.
Figure 260: Frame Properties Dialog Box

 Level on which this frame operates
 First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines the point at which
destination numbering starts for this frame
 First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point at which source
numbering starts for this frame
 Frame ID (the frame's physical address); select the frame ID from the drop-down list box
 Frame Name (default name is "Panacea [Frame ID]"); define the new frame name as desired

1. If the matrix needs to be partitioned3 , click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller switching units. See Matrix
Partitioning (on page 1145) for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.
The Matrix Properties group changes, as shown below.
Figure 261: Enable Matrix Partitioning
2. Click Edit Components or (in Edit mode) select the Partitioning tab to edit the individual
components of the matrix.
3. Select the matrix partitioning type from the drop-down list box.
RGB Stereo Components Matrix Partitioning

1. Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
The Partitioning dialog box opens, as shown below.
Figure 262: Matrix Partitioning Type showing RGB/Stereo Partitioning
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the dialog box changes to reflect the
number of components selected. The component size is automatically designated, and cannot be
changed directly.
3. Click the component in the block diagram at the left of the dialog box to select it for editing. The
component is outlined when it is selected. All changes made in the component properties group is
applied to the component selected.
4. Set the first destination, first source, and level number for each component.
5. You may assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.
 Type a unique name into the Name edit box.
 Select a color for the component by clicking Color.
6. Proceed to Finishing Matrix Partitioning (on page 924).
Contiguous Components Matrix Partitioning

1. Select Contiguous from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
The Partitioning dialog box opens as shown below.
Figure 263: Matrix Partitioning Type, Contiguous Partitioning
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the fields in the dialog box changes to
reflect the number of components selected.
3. Select a component for editing by clicking on the component in the block diagram at the left of the
dialog box. A colored outline appears around the component to indicate that it is selected. In the
example above, component number one is selected. Note the nodes (the squares) along the sides of
the box outline. You can change the size of the component by dragging these nodes into a new
position.
4. Select the level number from the drop-down list box to specify the level on which this component
operates.
5. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First Destination is
like the Destination Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals.) The First
Destination setting determines the point where destination numbering starts for this component.
6. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First Source is like the
Source Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals.) The First Source setting
determines the point where source numbering starts for this component.
 Type the new name into the Name edit box.
 Select the color by clicking Color.
Wild Partitioning
1. Select Wild from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
Figure 264: Matrix Partitioning Type, Wild Partitioning
2. Select a component for editing by clicking on the component name in the list box at the left of the
dialog box. The component name is highlighted to indicate that it is selected. Specify the level on
which this component operates by selecting the level number from the drop-down list box.
3. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box. The First Destination
setting determines the point at which destination numbering starts for this component.
4. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. The First Source setting
determines the point at which source numbering starts for this component.
 Select the color by clicking on the Color.
6. Change the physical assignments to match the actual configuration of the matrix.
Finishing Matrix Partitioning

Make one of the following selections:
• If your Panacea frame has a standard resource card installed, click Finish.
The Panacea frame is added to the device list at the Navigator pane.
The Protocols, SNMP..., and Advanced... buttons appear only if your Panacea router contains an
enhanced resource module.
• If your Panacea frame has an enhanced resource card installed, click Next.
The Control Card dialog box opens.
Configuring the Control Card
Figure 265: Panacea Control Card Dialog Box
Figure 266: Edit Frame Dialog Box, Control Card(s) Tab
The Panacea Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s) that are installed in the
frame. This information is read-only (except for the network programmed section) and is presented as
an aid in troubleshooting a system. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows information for the control card on the left, and the control card's network and
configuration files setup on the right. If the control card is installed, the details for the active card is
shown on the Control Card tab.
Card Settings
• The mode of the active control card can be DIP Switch, Simple Partitioning, or Advanced Partitioning.
This mode is set via the DIP switches on the front of the control card. (See the Panacea Series Frame
and Modules Configuration Installation and Configuration Manual for DIP switch settings.) The frame
must be in Program mode to operate with a downloaded configuration.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version controls display the versions of the software installed on the
active control card.
• The DIP switch controls show the current positions of the control card's DIP switches.
 DIP Switch, "Top" is the top switch of the three DIP switches on the front of the control.
 DIP Switch, "Center" is the DIP switch in the middle.
 DIP Switch, "Bottom" is the last switch of the control card.
 A "0" indicates that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A "1" indicates that a switch is in
the (or ON) position.
The control card's network properties are divided into two sections: the Current (read-only) and the
programmed (editable) settings. Programmed settings include
• IP address
• Gateway address
• Subnet Mask address
• MAC address
Only IP, Gateway, and Subnet Mask addresses are configurable by clicking on the Programmed radio
button.
1. Fill in the network settings as desired.
2. Make one of the following selections:
 Click Protocols to access the Edit Protocols dialog box (see Editing Protocols (on page 926) for
more information).
 Click SNMP... to access the SNMP Agent Options dialog box (see Setting up the SNMP Agent (on
page 929) for more information).
 Click Advanced... to access advanced Control Card options (see Advanced Control Card (on page
933) for more information).
Editing Protocols
The Edit Protocols dialog box allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s serial and
Ethernet ports, and set the automated database name synchronization function.
Editing Serial Protocols

The Serial Protocol tab allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s serial ports. You can
change some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1. At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.
Figure 267: Serial Protocols Tab Selected
2. Highlight the target port/protocol selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
The Options dialog box opens and the option values for the selection are displayed.
3. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change.
A shortcut menu opens (see below).
Figure 268: Changing Serial Protocol Option’s Value
4. Select the new value, and then click somewhere outside the drop-down list box.
The new selection appears in the Value column.
5. Click OK to return to the Serial Protocols tab, and then click OK to return to the Control Card(s) tab.
6. At the Control Card(s) tab click OK to accept the changes.
Editing Ethernet Protocols

The Ethernet Protocol tab allows you to view the protocol settings for the Panacea’s Ethernet ports. You
can change some of the option values for a selected protocol.
1. At the Edit Protocols dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.
Figure 269: Ethernet Protocols Tab Selected
2. Highlight the target port/protocol selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
Figure 270: Changing Ethernet Protocol Option’s Value
3. Select the new value.

4. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box.
5. Click OK to return to the Ethernet Protocols tab; and then click OK again to return to the Control
Card(s) tab.
6. At the Control Card(s) tab click OK to accept the changes.
Setting up the SNMP Agent

1. If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP... on the Control Card(s) tab.
The SNMP Agent Options dialog box opens. This dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP
Agent settings.
 SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box (on page 929)
 Trap Destination IP Addresses (on page 930)
 SNMP Agent (on page 882)
 System (on page 883)
2. When all SNMP Agent selections are complete, click OK to accept all changes.
SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

The SNMP Agent Options dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three
separate group boxes are displayed on this dialog box:
• System (on page 883)
Figure 271: SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

Destinations.

1. Click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click Modify....).
2. Change selections as described below.

Trap Destinations Selections
Item Function
IP Address IP address desired for the SNMP Trap destination
Port (Can be from 1 to 65535) Network port desired for the SNMP
Trap destination
Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get" operation
has to match this setting in the MIB browser in order to read
information from device)
Version SNMP version desired for the SNMP Trap
Timeout Desired time period (in seconds) before an SNMP Trap is sent to
a manager if the initial attempt failed
Retry Number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager if the
initial attempt failed
To delete an SNMP Trap Destination

1. At the SNMP Agent Options list control, select the IP address for the SNMP Trap Destination you
want to delete. Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows selection techniques
(hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
2. Click Delete.
The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. A system prompt confirms the deletion.
SNMP Agent
Here are items and function descriptions for the SNMP Agent group box.
SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Dialog Box
Items Function
Port Number (Can be from 1 to 65535) The network port used by the
SNMP agent
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get"
operation has to match this setting in the MIB browser in
order to read information from device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a
"Set" operation has to match this setting in a MIB
browser in order to write information to that device)
Enable Authentication When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read
Traps or write community does not match between the SNMP
agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address shortcut menu (see below)
requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.
To add a manager address

1. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
2. Click Add.
To modify a manager address

1. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
2. Click Modify.
The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
3. Modify the manager address as desired.
To delete a manager address

1. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be selected using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple addresses).
2. Click Remove.
The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All. A system prompt confirms the deletion.
3. Click OK to accept the change.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. This is
user-defined information that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when it is
retrieved by a MIB browser. The following fields and function descriptions pertain to the System box.
System Fields of SNMP Options Dialog Box
Field Explanation
Name Device name
Advanced Control Card

The Advanced Control Card is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to view the configuration file names
that are used to store frame’s configuration information; and displays information and settings for
virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options. See the following topics:
 Config Files Tab (on page 934)
 Virtual XY Tab (on page 934)
 Time Server Tab (on page 934)
 Map Names Tab (on page 935)
When all advanced selections are complete, click OK to accept all changes.
Config Files Tab

The Config Files tab shows you the locations of configuration files in the frame.
Virtual XY Tab
The Virtual XY tab allows you to set virtual X-Y and Telnet ports.
You can make the following settings:

• Maximum number of open Telnet connections (maximum allowable connections is 12)
• Telnet socket port ID
• Maximum number of open virtual XY connections (maximum allowable connections is 20)
• Virtual XY socket port ID
Time Server Tab

This capability is only available for enhanced resource cards with Panacea Web support installed.
The Time Server tab allows you to change the frame’s time server settings for the web support.
The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
• Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)
• Maximum wait time for server connection
• Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to update a frame's source and destination "Names Mapping" file based
on the current logical database.
You can make the following settings:

frame.
 With XY File Transfer you can export a file by X-Y transfer (based on Navigator’s serial or TCP/IP
communication setting).
 With FTP you can export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (Log in before the file
transfer is initiated.)
 With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the current logical database.
 With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an existing file.
• When you select Reboot After Update, the frame reboots after the file has been transmitted. A frame
License Tab
At the License Tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses. You must activate the SNMP Agent
firmware if you ordered it separately from your original product purchase. If you ordered the SNMP
Agent firmware at the same time as your original product purchase, it is factory-installed and you do not
need to activate it.
Before you activate the SNMP feature, make sure you have obtained an appropriate license activation
code. Provide the Customer Service representative with the serial number of your product.
When you select the License tab, Navigator attempts to retrieve the serial number for the 32×32 or 64×1
RCP-IDe control panel. If the serial number is found, it is displayed in the Serial Number box. If the serial
number is not found, "Unknown" is displayed in the Serial Number box.
The License tab allows you to make the following settings:

frame.
• In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation code you received from your
Customer Service representative (see note).
• Select the Reboot after Update check box to reboot the frame immediately after the Update button is
clicked.
When you click Update, the frame reboots after the file has been transmitted. A frame must be
rebooted before the SNMP license is recognized.
If you do not select Reboot after Update, the file is transmitted but the frame is not automatically
rebooted.
Editing a Frame’s Configuration

The Edit Frame dialog box includes all functions necessary for changing a router frame configuration.
Any of the following tabs can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
• Router Frame Tab (on page 937)
• Configured Matrices Tab (on page 938)

• Partitioning Tab (on page 943)
• Detected Matrices Tab (on page 943)
• Detected Cards Tab (on page 944)
• Configuring the Control Card (on page 925)
The Web Panels and Web Users tabs appear only if your Panacea router contains an enhanced resource
card and you have purchased the optional Panacea Web license. See Configuring the Web Router
Application (on page 1087) for more information.
Router Frame Tab
Figure 273: Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected
The type and size of the matrices in a frame can be changed, increased, or deleted from the Router
Frame tab. In addition, installed submodules can be indicated and edited.
Editing a Frame Matrix

1. Select the new matrix type from the drop-down list box. Valid options are listed below. (Max Matrix
Size options change as the Matrix Type is changes.)
 AES EBU
 Analog mono audio
 Analog video
 SDI
 High Definition (HD)
 Stereo audio
2. Change the size of each matrix in the frame by clicking on the desired matrix size, and then clicking
Add.
To increase the size of a matrix, you may have to delete one or more matrices, as you cannot select
matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
By default, the "Stuffed As" size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some cases, however,
you may override the default in order to save slots for future use. For example, when adding a 64×64
matrix, two slots would be left empty by stuffing the matrix as a 32×32.
Deleting a Frame Matrix

1. Click the matrix in the frame.
An outline appears around the matrix when it is selected.
2. Click Delete.
Indicate an Installed Submodule

1. If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box in the Module
Options. The matrix types with programmable I/O submodule are listed in Selecting a Matrix Type
(on page 918).
2. Click Hardware… to change the I/O hardware module default settings of a selected matrix in the
empty frame.
The I/O Hardware Module tab opens. See I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box (on page 945) for more
information about this selection.
The Frame ID, Level, First Source, First Destination and Signal Type can be changed from the Configured
Matrices tab. In addition, matrix partitioning can be set up through the Configured Matrices tab.
Editing the Matrix Configuration

Select a configuration from these drop-down list box(es).
• Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must match the DIP switches on
the frame.
This item may not appear on some Panacea Configured Matrices windows.
• Level number is the logical address at which the matrix resides. Matrices with the same level
number switch together. The matrices in a frame can have different level numbers.
• First Destination is the same as Destination Offset; this setting determines the point at which
destination numbering starts for this matrix.
• First Source is the same as Source Offset; this setting determines the point at which source
numbering starts for this matrix.
• Signal Type describes how the matrix are used in the system, and is for informational purposes only.
Changing the signal type does not affect system operation
• Matrix Name and Color identify the matrix by name instead of by ID number. These settings are for
informational purposes only; changing them does not affect system operation.
Changing the Frame Settings

You cannot edit a Panacea frame’s level, starting destination, and starting source at this window. These
settings are automatically updated on every poll of the control system. See Polling Devices (on page 688)
1. Click the Frame Settings component of the 1|2RU Frame illustration on the Configured Matrices tab
(see below).
The information on the right side of the tab changes to reflect the frame properties for that
particular frame.
Figure 274: Panacea Configured Matrices Tab with Frame Properties Displayed
2. Select a new configuration from these drop down list box(es).

 Frame ID is the physical address of the router frame. This setting must match the DIP switches
on the frame.
 Frame Name appears for informational purposes only. Changing the frame name does not affect
system operation.

1. Double-click the name of the frame you want to partition.
The Edit Frame dialog box opens.
2. If it is not already chosen, select the Configured Matrices tab.
3. Click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
The Matrix Properties group changes, as shown in Partitioning the Matrix (on page 921).
4. To edit the individual components of the matrix, click Edit Components, or select the Partitioning
tab.
The Partitioning dialog box opens, as shown in RGB Stereo Partitioning (on page 940).
See Matrix Partitioning (on page 1145) for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.
RGB Stereo Partitioning

1. Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop down list box.
Figure 275: Partitioning Tab, RGB Partitioning Selected
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. The dialog box changes to reflect the number of
components selected. Component size is automatically designated and cannot be changed directly.
component is be outlined when it is selected. All changes made in the component properties group
are applied to the component selected.
5. Assign a unique name and color to each component if desired.
Figure 276: Partitioning Tab, Contiguous Partitioning Selected
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. The fields in the dialog box change to reflect the
number of components selected.
position.
operates.
setting determines the point where destination numbering starts for this component.
Wild Partitioning
dialog box.
The component name is highlighted to indicate that it is selected.

3. Specify the level on which this component operates by selecting the level number from the drop-
down list box.
Figure 277: Partitioning Tab, Wild Partitioning Selected

Partitioning Tab
Figure 278: Partitioning Tab
The Partitioning tab only opens when you select the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box on the
Configured Matrices tab. The procedures for filling in this tab are the same as for enabling matrix
partitioning. See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 921) for details.
"Detected Matrices" refers to the system configuration that a frame uses if it is in DIP Switch mode. If
the frame is in Program mode, it attempts to use the configuration reported in the Configured Matrices
tab.
To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the matrix you are configuring, click Copy
to Configured Matrix.
Detected Cards Tab
Figure 280: Detected Cards Tab
The Detected Cards tab contains information on all modules found in the frame during a system poll.
This information is read-only. The tab shows a graphic of the frame filled with the cards reported by the
frame. Each card can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse. Detailed properties are shown on the
right side of the dialog box.
The same elevators and back panels are used for different cards. For example, a video output back panel
can be used with an analog video output card or an SDI output card. Also, the same elevator is used for
analog video, SDI, and AES-EBU matrices. Detailed information about which combinations are valid is not
presented here. Please refer questions to a Customer Service representative.
The router properties displayed include

• Type of I/O card (for example, analog video)
• Type of back panel interface
 Coaxial
 Balanced
 Balanced with 600Ω
• FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be useful to Customer Service when
diagnosing a problem)
• Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the selected slot (this
information varies for each card type and is not detailed here; however, it may be useful to
Customer Service)
I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box

The I/O Hardware Module dialog box is displayed only if the Panacea has an enhanced resource card
installed.
The I/O Hardware Module is a tabbed dialog box that allows you to change hardware for a selected
Panacea matrix. All of the tabs (Destinations, Sources, Alarm, and General) can be selected by clicking
on the appropriate tab. Information on using those tabs can be found in Destinations Tab (on page 945).
You can "travel" to the I/O Hardware Module dialog box via the Edit Frame > Router Frame path. At the
Router Frame dialog box, click Hardware... to reach the I/O Hardware Module dialog box.
You can change the input/output hardware for a Panacea matrix via the I/O Hardware Module tab
dialog box display (see Destinations Tab (on page 945)).
Destinations Tab
Figure 281: I/O Hardware Module Destinations Tab
The Destinations tab allows you to change the reclocker and slew rate settings for a particular
destination.
The Reclocker Settings list box on the left side of the tab shows all destinations’ reclocker settings
available in the matrix.
Changing the Reclocker Setting of a Destination

To change the reclocker setting of a destination, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired destination.
2. Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
To change the reclocker setting of more than one destination at one time, follow these steps:
3. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired destinations.
4. Select the reclocker type from the Re-clocker drop-down list box.
The Slew Rate Settings list box on the right side of the tab shows all destinations’ slew rates available in
the matrix.
Changing the Slew Rate of Destinations

To change the slew rate of a destination, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired destination.
2. Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list box.
To change the slew rate of more than one destination at the same time, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired destinations.
2. Choose either SD or HD rate from the Slew Rate drop-down list box.
Sources Tab
Figure 282: I/O Hardware Module Sources Tab
The Sources tab displays the EQ bypass settings for a matrix. You can turn the EQ settings on or off at
this tab.
The EQ By-Pass Settings list box shows all sources’ EQ bypass settings available in the matrix.
Changing a Source's EQ By-Pass

To turn a source's EQ By-Pass on or off, follow these steps:
1. Select the desired source.
2. Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list box.
To turn the EQ By-Pass of more than one source on or off at the same time, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired sources.
2. Choose either ON or OFF from the EQ By-Pass drop-down list box.
Alarm Tab
Figure 283: I/O Hardware Module Alarm Tab
The Alarm tab allows you to enable or disable any I/O alarms that the frame supports.
Click on the I/O Module drop-down list box to select an I/O module for which you want to display the
extended alarm names.
The main list box shows all available extended alarms in the matrix.
To enable or disable an alarm type, follow these steps:

1. Select the desired alarm.
2. Click either Enable or Disable.
To enable/disable more than one alarm type, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired alarms.
2. Click either Enable or Disable.
General Tab
Figure 284: Panacea I/O Hardware Module General Tab
The Synchronous Timing Mode, Source to be Used as a Restore Source after a Frame Reset, and Module
Options can be changed from the General tab. Fill in the desired information as described below.
To change the synchronized timing mode, click on either the Auto, Standard, or Advance radio buttons.
 In Auto mode, the switch point is determined by the detected sync type only based on SMPTE
RP-168 specifications.
 The Standard mode provides the option to pick a standard timing reference.
 The Advance mode provides the option to enter a Take delay in milliseconds.
To change the source to be used as a Restore Source after a frame reset, select an option from the Misc.
drop-down list box.
If you have a configurable I/O submodule installed, select the proper check box in the Module Options
area. The matrix types with programmable I/O submodule are listed in Selecting a Matrix Type (on page
918).
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings

The clean switch option is available on Panacea serial digital video routing switchers. The quiet switch
option is available on Panacea AES digital audio routing switchers. Both clean switch and quiet switch
options are available on Panacea P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers.
Parametric settings are used to change clean switch and quiet switch support settings.
You can only configure the parametric settings for a Panacea frame with matrices that are configured
with clean and/or quiet switch support. The matrix types with programmable I/O submodule are listed
in Selecting a Matrix Type (on page 918).
To select the parametric settings option, follow these steps:

1. At the Navigation pane, highlight the name of the Panacea router that you want to modify.
2. Click the right mouse button to display a drop-down menu.
3. Scroll down to the Parametric Settings... option, and then click <Enter>.
4. The Parametric Settings tab opens.
Parametric Settings Tab

The Parametric Settings tabbed dialog box allows you to change the parametric settings for a selected
Panacea matrix. The tab choices of this dialog box differ, based on the matrix type you choose. See
Selecting a Matrix Type (on page 918). for information on matrix types and supported I/O submodules.
• Clean Switch tab information appears as follows:
 Clean Switch Tab (on page 949)
 Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) (on page 952)
• Information on the Quiet Switch tab appears in Quiet Switch Tab (on page 951).
• Information on the Transitions tab for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers appears in Transition
Tab (see "Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)" on page 953).
• Information on increased control over individual audio channels appears in Audio Gain (on page
957).
Any of the tabs (Clean Switch, Quiet Switch, or Transition) can be selected by clicking on the
appropriate tab at the Parameter Settings dialog box.
Clean Switch Tab

Clean Switch Tab with Relay Bypass
Clean Switch Tab without Relay Bypass
Figure 285: Clean Switch Tab
For information for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers, see Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ
Modules) (on page 952).
You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean switch submodule at this tab.
• The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
• The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
• The Bypass Router check box allows you to enable the relay bypass capability. (This selection is only
available if you configured the router matrix as clean switch with bypass. See Selecting a Matrix Type
(on page 918) for a list of matrix sizes that support relay bypass.)
To include or remove the clean switching support of a source, follow these steps:
2. To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click either Enable or Disable.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at one time:
 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired sources.
 Click either Enable or Disable.
3. Click on the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4. Click the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and horizontal timing, and the status of
the source’s autotiming.
5. To enable or disable relay bypass, do one of the following:
 To disable Panacea A/V processing (that is, enable relay bypass), select the Bypass Router
checkbox.
A Bypass Change message appears. Click Yes to enable the relay bypass function.
 To enable Panacea A/V processing (that is, disable relay bypass), select the Bypass Router
checkbox.
A Bypass Change message appears. Click Yes to disable the relay bypass function.
The Querying Status box displays the current source query/set operation.
Quiet Switch Tab
Figure 286: Quiet Switch Tab
Corresponding information for P-SCQ and P-HSCQ routing switchers appears in Clean Switch Tab (see
"Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)" on page 952).
You can include or remove support for a Panacea’s quiet switch submodule at this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
The Quiet Switch Destination list box shows all available destinations in the matrix.
Changing the Quiet Switching Support of a Destination

To include or remove the quiet switching support of a destination, follow these steps:
1. Click on the check box to the left of the destination name of a desired destination (the "check" mark
toggles back and forth).
2. Move the slide bar from left to right to increase the fade duration/time (in milliseconds).
A module must have valid reference frequency to set a correct fade time. The following frequencies
are valid:
 32 kHz
 44.1 kHz
 48 kHz
3. Click on the Set button to invoke the changes.
4. Click on the Refresh button to get the current destination’s quiet switch support and quiet switch
fade duration.
The Querying Status box displays the current destination query/set operation.
Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
Figure 287: Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
You can include or remove autotiming support for a Panacea’s clean switch submodule at this tab.
The Matrix ID drop-down list box shows where the I/O module is located.
The scroll-down list box shows all available sources in the matrix.
2. To include or remove the autotiming for a source, click on either Enable or Disable.
OR
To include or remove the autotiming of more than one source at one time:
 Press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired sources.
 Click either Enable or Disable.
3. Click the Auto Timing button to invoke the changes.
4. Click the Refresh button to get the current source’s vertical and horizontal timing, and the status of
the source’s auto timing.
The Status box displays the current source query/set operation.
Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
Figure 288: Transition Tab
You can set up or change audio and video transition selections for a Panacea clean switch/quiet switch
at this tab.
1. At the Matrix ID drop-down list box select either 0 or 1:
 Select 0 for a 1RU setup
 Select 0 for the top frame in a 2RU setup
 Select 1 for the bottom frame in a 2RU setup
2. At the Output combo box in the Reclocker Settings group box, make these choices:
a. In the first drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
• Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
• Select PGM 2 if the matrix’s physical output is 5.
A matrix’s physical output corresponds to its location on the back of the frame.
3. In the Reclocker drop-down list box, select the actual duration frequency you want.
SD Format Actual Duration Frequency Valid Settings
Reference Standard Standard
ANY • Auto mode
• Delay Auto mode
NTSC • 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
PAL • 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
HD Format Actual Duration Frequency Valid Settings

Reference Standard Standard
ANY • Auto mode
• Delay Auto mode
NTSC • 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (59.9 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
PAL • 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• Delay 270 Mb/s (50.0 Hz)
• 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080ip – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-59.9 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 59.9 Hz)
720p-59.9 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 59.9 Hz)
1080i-50.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 50.0 Hz)
1080i-60.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (1080i – 60.0 Hz)
720p-60.0 Hz • 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)
• Delay 1.485 Gb/s (720p – 60.0 Hz)
4. At the Video Transition group box, make these choices:
a. In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of transition to use:
Video Transition Types
Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next source
Cut Cuts from current source immediately into next
source (can be either "hard" or "soft")
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black and cuts into
next source
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source and fades-
from-black to next source
b. For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following (you cannot do both):
• In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during which you want the transition to
occur. The number of corresponding seconds is adjusted automatically.
• Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the number of seconds for the transition
to occur. The number of corresponding frames is adjusted accordingly.
c. If you want audio processing, click the Enable Audio Processing check box.
d. If you want audio-follow-video, click in the Audio Follow check box. This allows an audio signal
associated with any given video signal to be recorded, switched, or mixed with that video signal.
If you make this section, skip to step 6.
5. If you do not want audio-follow-video, at the Audio Transition group box, make these choices:
a. In the Transition Type drop-down list box, select the type of transition you want to use:
Audio Transition Types
Selection Function
Cross Fade Dissolves from current source to next source
Cut Fade Cuts from current source and fades to next source
Fade Cut Fades from current source to black and cuts into next source
Cut Cuts from current source immediately into next source (can be
either "hard" or "soft")
V Fade Fades-to-black from current source and fades-from-black to
next source
b. For the transition duration speed, choose one of the following (you cannot do both):
• In the Frames box, type in the number of frames during which you want the transition to
occur. The number of corresponding seconds is adjusted automatically.
• Move the Transition Duration slider bar to indicate the number of seconds for the transition
to occur. The number of corresponding frames is adjusted accordingly.
Audio transition settings is disabled if all PGM 1 and PGM 2 channels have audio processing set
to OFF (that is, the audio processing check box not selected). See Audio Processing Settings (on
6. Make one of the following selections:
 Click Advanced to access advanced audio processing settings. The Advanced button takes you to
these audio processing settings tabs: Audio Gain, Audio Effect, and Audio Source. See Audio
Processing Settings (on page 955) for more detailed information on using the advanced Audio
Gain, Audio Effect, and Audio Source tabs for more precise audio processing settings.
 Click Restore Defaults to set all transition settings back to the factory defaults.
 Click Set to send the changes you made in the Transition tab to the frame.
 Click Refresh to reset the tab entries to their current setting from the frame.
7. Click OK to leave the Parametric Settings dialog box.
Audio Processing Settings

The audio processing settings allow you to have increased control over individual audio channels. These
settings provide you with selections beyond the basic audio transition types provided in the Transition
tab. To access the advanced settings, click Advanced on the Transition tab.
Audio Effects
Figure 289: Audio Effects Tab
The Audio Effects tab allows you change the embedded audio for a given video signal on the designated
output.
To control the audio effects, follow these steps:

1. In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
 Select PGM 1 if the matrix’s physical output is 1.
2. Select the radio button next to the group you want to control. (Always make sure that the Audio
Processing check box is selected.) Each group contains four separate channels.
3. At the Channel 1 & 2 drop-down list box, select the type of channel signal effect you want. (The
table below lists effects and their corresponding results.)
Channel Signal Effects
Channel Signal Result
Copy Left to Right Copies signal from left channel to right channel
Copy Right to Left Copies signal from right channel to left channel
Mute Channel No audio signal
None Allows audio group to pass through both channel pairs
without audio effects; any transitions, levels, and/or
sources takes effect (embedding and de-embedding
takes place)
Channel Signal Result

Swap Left and Right Switches signal from left channel to right channel
4. At the Channel 3 & 4 drop-down list box, select the type of channel signal effect you want.
If you do not want to include the audio group in the output’s audio processing, deselect (uncheck)
the Audio Group Present In Output check box.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each group that you want to adjust.
6. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Effects tab to the frame, or click Refresh to
reset the tab entries to the default settings from the frame.
7. Click OK to leave the Audio Processing Settings dialog box.
Audio Gain
Figure 290: Audio Gain Tab
The Audio Gain tab allows you more precise control of the strength of the audio signal. To control the
audio gain, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select either PGM 1 or PGM 2:
3. For each channel in the group that you want to adjust, move the corresponding slider bar up and
down. You can adjust the slider bar between 6 dbV (the maximum voltage expressed in decibels you
can choose) and -INF (negative infinity, or no audio output). Any negative number (that is, a number
less than 0) should be preceded by a minus sign.
A group consists of four audio channels, as defined in SMPTE 272M and SMPTE 299M.
OR
If you know the exact amount by which you want to increase or decrease the gain, enter the number
into the box at the bottom of the slider bar.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 and for each group that you want to adjust.
5. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Gain tab to the frame, or click Refresh to reset
the tab entries to the default settings from the frame.
Audio Source
Figure 291: Audio Source Tab
The Audio Source tab allows you to map input signals of the audio channels to a video signal. To set the
audio source(s) for a video signal, follow these steps:
1. In the Output drop-down list box select PGM 1 (if the matrix’s physical output is 1) or PGM 2 (if the
matrix’s physical output is 5):
3. From the Channel 1 drop-down list box, select the audio channel for the video source you selected
at the Transitions tab. This maps the input signals of audio channels on a video signal to the audio
channels of the output.
4. Repeat step 3 for each channel and/or group that you want to adjust.
5. Click Set to send the changes you made in the Audio Source tab to the frame, or click Refresh to
reset the tab entries to the default settings from the frame.
Panacea Web Panels Tab
Figure 292: Web Panels Tab for Panacea Web Configurations
For information about adding and editing a Panacea web configuration, see Adding Web Router
Application Devices (on page 1087).
Panacea Web Users Tab
Figure 293: Web Users Tab for Panacea Web Configurations
For information about adding users for a Panacea web configuration, see Setting Up Web Users (on page
1095).
Chapter 56
Configuring Integrator Frames

Configuring an Integrator frame is a multi-step process. The procedures are similar for adding or editing
a frame. Some editing processes, however, are not performed until after a frame is added to the routing
matrix. Differences in adding/editing procedures are noted. Information about dialog boxes accessible
only in Edit mode on Editing the Router Matrix (on page 984).
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the Integrator frame definition only.
See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) and Logical Database Setup (on page 729)

Selecting a Frame ................................................................................... 961
Configuring the Routing Matrix ............................................................. 962
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring ................................................ 974
Adding Combiner Systems ..................................................................... 979
Editing a Frame’s Configuration............................................................. 983
Editing the Router Matrix ...................................................................... 984
Selecting a Frame
and then double-click on the Integrator router selection.
3. Select the frame type Integrator Series.
4. Click OK.
The Select Frame Size dialog box opens.
5. Select an Integrator frame size. Options are 4RU, 6RU, 8RU, and Gold types.
A blue box appears around the selected type.
6. Click Next.
The Router Frame dialog box opens.
Figure 294: Select Router Frame Matrix Size Dialog Box
Configuring the Routing Matrix

The following actions are available:
• Selecting a Matrix Type (on page 962)
• Configuring Regular Matrix Types (on page 963)
• Configuring Data Router Matrix Types (on page 964)
• Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types (on page 968)
• Partitioning the Matrix (on page 971)
Selecting a Matrix Type

Select the Matrix Type from the drop-down list box. Options are
• SDI
• Analog video
• Analog stereo audio
• Analog mono audio
• AES EBU
• High Definition (HD)
• Data router (the data router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is different from other types of matrix
format editing [see Configuring Data Router Matrix Types (on page 964) for instructions on adding
data router frames])
For more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing
Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.
• Integrator Gold multirate digital (the multirate digital router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is
different from other types of matrix format editing [see Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types
(on page 968) for instructions on adding Integrator Gold frames])
Configuring Regular Matrix Types

1. After selecting the matrix type, click the desired matrix size. (The Max Matrix Size options changes
as the Matrix Type is changed.)
2. (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed, select the proper check box.
See Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring (on page 974) for more information on how to set up the
output monitoring function.
3. Click Add.
The matrix is displayed in the empty frame on the right-hand side of the dialog box.
Continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You cannot select matrix sizes bigger than the
space remaining in the frame.
(To remove a matrix from the frame, click the matrix in the frame. An outline appears around the
matrix to indicate that it is selected. [The color of the matrix indicates the Matrix Type.] Click
Delete.)
By default, the Stuffed As size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some cases, however,
you may wish to override the default in order to save slots for future use. To override the default,
select the desired Matrix and Stuffed As sizes, and then click Add.
In the example shown below, "128×64" matrix size was selected as the matrix size, and "32×48" was
selected as the Stuffed As size.
Figure 295: Frame Matrix Size with Empty Slots (128×64 Max Matrix Size, 32×48 Stuffed As Size)

5. The Configured Matrices dialog box opens.
The Configured Matrices dialog boxes for the data router and the multirate digital router are
different from other types of matrix format editing. See Configuring Data Router Matrix Types (on
page 964) for more information on the data router. See Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types
(on page 968) for more information on the multirate digital router.
Matrix type and matrix size properties are displayed, but cannot be edited on this screen. To change
either the matrix type or matrix size, click Back to return to the previous screen.
Figure 296: Configured Matrices Dialog Box

 Frame ID (the frame’s physical address): select the frame ID from the drop-down list box
 Frame Name (default name is "Integrator [Frame ID]"): define the new frame name as desired
 Level on which this matrix operates
 First Destination for this matrix (the First Destination is like the Destination Offset in previous
Imagine Communications product manuals)
The First Destination setting determines the point at which destination numbering starts for this
matrix.
 First Source for this matrix (the First Source is like the Source Offset described in other Imagine
Communications product manuals)
The First Source setting determines the point at which source numbering starts for this matrix.
7. If the matrix should be partitioned, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box, and then click
Next. (See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 971) for more information on this process.)
8. Click Finish to accept the changes.
Configuring Data Router Matrix Types

1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in steps 1 - 6 in Configuring Regular Matrix
Types (on page 963).
2. At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box, select Data router from the Matrix Type drop-
down list box.
3. Click the desired matrix size.

4. Click Add.
You may continue adding matrices until the frame is filled. You cannot select matrix sizes bigger than
the space remaining in the frame.
Delete.)
By default, the Stuffed As size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some cases, however,
you may wish to override the default in order to save slots for future use.
The data router's Configured Matrices dialog box is somewhat different from other types of matrix
format editing. There are two different items on this dialog box: a Data Router Type list box and an
Edit Ports button in the Signal Type field. (Other matrix format editing shows a list box of signal
formats instead.)
For more information about data router hardware, see the Integrator™ Series Data Routing Switcher
Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.
Figure 297: Data Router Configured Matrices Dialog Box

matrix.
 The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.
7. Select the desired data router type from the drop-down list box. Data router types are as follows:
 Dest to Controller — Point to point connection; all previous connections using the new source
and destination are disconnected when a new switch is made.
When two "RS422 Auto" ports are connected to each other, the port used as a source in the
switch command is configured to connect to a device (tributary); therefore, the port itself is a
controller. The Destination is configured to be connected to a controller; therefore, the port
itself is a device (tributary). When ports configured as "RS422 Auto" are connected to ports that
are either "RS422 Controller" or "RS422 Device," they take the opposite configuration
(controller/device) from the port to which they are being connected. "RS232 Auto" ports are
always configured as DTE when used as a destination and DCE when used as a source.
 Dest to Device — Point to point connection; all previous connections using the new source and
destination are disconnected when a new switch is made.
switch command is configured to connect to a controller; therefore, the port itself is a device.
The Destination is configured to be connected to a device (tributary); therefore, the port itself is
a controller. When ports configured as "RS422 Auto" are connected to ports that are either
"RS422 Controller" or "RS422 Device," they take the opposite configuration (controller/device)
from the port to which they are being connected. "RS232 Auto" signal types are always
configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE when used as a source.
 Gang Dest to Controller — Ganged operation; multiple destinations may be connected to a
source.
For a more detailed explanation of point to point and ganged operations, see the Integrator™
Series Data Routing Switcher Matrix Module Set Configuration and Operation Manual.
The "return path" connection (transmit to the source, receive from the destination) is
disconnected from previous destinations and connected to the current destination when making
a connection to a source that already has a connection. Destinations may be switched away
from a source. If the destination switched away (or disconnected) is the "reverse path" then the
first physical destination connected to that source is chosen as the new "reverse path."
Disconnecting the reverse path (that is, the destination associated with a source that has
multiple destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the reverse path when a source only has
one connection is allowed.
switch command is configured to connect to a device (tributary); therefore, the port itself is a
controller. The Destination is configured to be connected to a controller; therefore, the port
itself is a device (tributary). When configured as "RS422 Auto" are connected to ports that are
either "RS422 Controller" or "RS422 Device," then they take the opposite configuration
(controller/device). "RS232 Auto" are always configured as DTE when used as a destination and
DCE when used as a source.
 Gang Dest to Device — Ganged operation; multiple destinations may be connected to a source.
The "return path" connection (transmit to the source, receive from the destination) is
disconnected from previous destinations and connected to the current destination when making
a connection to a source that already has a connection. Destinations may be switched away
from a source. If the destination switched away (or disconnected) is the "reverse path" then the
first physical destination connected to that source is chosen as the new "reverse path."
Disconnecting the reverse path (that is, the destination associated with a source that has
multiple destinations) is not allowed. Disconnecting the reverse path when the source only has
one connection is allowed.
switch command is configured to connect to a controller; therefore, the port itself is a device.
The Destination is configured to be connected to a device (tributary); therefore, the port itself is
a controller. When configured as "RS422 Auto" are connected to ports that are either "RS422
Controller" or "RS422 Device," then they take the opposite configuration (controller/device).
"RS232 Auto" are always configured as DCE when used as a destination and DTE when used as a
source.
8. Click Edit Ports.
The Edit Ports Signal Type dialog box opens.
Figure 298: Edit Port Signal Types Dialog Box
9. Select the desired port.

10. Choose a signal type from the Signal Type drop down list box. (To change more than one port’s
signal type, press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired ports.) Signal
types are as follows:
 Data RS232 Auto — This port signal type must only be used for a port on a RS-232 card. This
port switches between DTE and DCE, based on Source/Destination context.
• This port is set to DTE when the Data Router Type is set to "Dest to Controller" and the port
is used as a Destination.
• This port is set to DCE when the Data Router Type is set to "Dest to Controller" and the port
is used as a Source.
RS-232 ports do not automatically take the opposite sense of the other port in a switch.
 Data RS232 DCE — This port is always configured as DCE regardless of its use as a Source or as a
Destination in a crosspoint Take command. It communicates with a DTE port through a 1:1 cable
or a DCE port through a null modem cable.
 Data RS232 DTE — This port is always configured as DTE regardless of its use as a Source or as a
Destination in a crosspoint Take command. It communicates with a DCE port through a 1:1 cable
or a DTE port through a null modem cable.
 Data RS422 Auto — This port chooses its port configuration based on its use as a source or
destination in a switch command depending on the Data Router Type setting. If the Data Router
Type is set to "Dest to Controller," the port is configured as a tributary if used as a destination so
that it may be connected to a controller, provided that the source is not "RS422 Controller" or
"RS422 Device." Otherwise, it take the opposite sense: If the source is "RS422 Controller," the
port is configured as a controller so that it may be connected to a device. If the source is "RS422
Device," the port is configured as a device so that it may be connected to a controller.
 Data RS422 Controller — This port is always configured as a device so that it may be connected
to a controller with a 1:1 cable.
 Data RS422 Device — This port is always configured as a controller so that it may be connected
to a device with a 1:1 cable.
Next. (See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 971) for more information on this process.)
12. Click OK to accept the changes and return to the Configured Matrices dialog box.
13. At the Configured Matrices dialog box, click OK to accept the changes.
Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types

1. At the Select Frame Size dialog box, select the frame type Integrator Gold.
2. Click the desired matrix size.
3. (Optional) If you have an output monitoring submodule installed, select the proper check box. (See
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring (on page 974) for more information on how to set up the
output monitoring function.)
4. Click Add.
Delete.)
5. Click Next.
The Configured Matrices dialog box appears.
Figure 299: Integrator Gold Configured Matrices Dialog Box
The Integrator Gold multirate digital router’s Configured Matrices dialog box is somewhat different
from other types of matrix format editing. Note that the I/O Signals field in the dialog box shows an
Edit button. (Other matrix format editing dialog boxes shows a list box of signal formats).
matrix.
 The Matrix Name list box shows the data router matrix name.
7. Click Edit.
The Edit Component Signal Type dialog box opens. You can modify only the level output reclocker
and level input EQ fields.
Figure 300: Integrator Gold Edit Component Signal Types Dialog Box
 The Frame static box shows the Integrator Gold frame name.
 The Component static box shows the Integrator Gold component name.
 The Level static box shows the Integrator Gold component level.
 The Destination Settings list view box shows all available level outputs for the component. The
list view also provides the level output reclocker setting that each level output uses.
 The Source Settings list view box shows all available level inputs for the component. The list
view also provides the level input EQ setting that each level input uses.
8. Modify the level output reclocker as follows:
a. Highlight the desired level output.
b. Choose a signal type from the Reclocker Setting drop-down list box. (To change more than one
level output reclocker, press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired
level outputs.) Reclocker settings are shown below.
Reclocker Settings
Reclocker Setting Description
143 Mb/s Reclocker only locks to 143 Mb/s signal

Reclocker Setting Description
1.485 Gb/s Reclocker only locks to 1.485 Gb/s signal

Auto pass ASI Reclocker locks to any of 143, 270, 360, 540 Mb/s or 1.485 Gb/s
(177 Mb/s is not allowed as harmonics of ASI signals may falsely
trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
Auto pass 177 Reclocker locks to any of 143, 177, 270, 360, 540 Mb/s or 1.485
Gb/s (ASI should not be used as harmonics of ASI signals may
falsely trigger the reclocker at 177 Mb/s)
By-pass SDI slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output slew rate is hard
coded to the slower SDI slew rate
By-pass HD slew Reclocker is bypassed (no reclocking); output slew rate is hard
coded to the faster HD slew rate
c. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices tab.
9. Modify the level input EQ as follows:
a. Highlight the desired level input.
b. Choose a signal type from the EQ Setting drop-down list box. (To change more than one level
input EQ, press and hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys while selecting desired level inputs.)
c. Click OK to return to the Configured Matrices tab.
Next. (See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 971) for more information on matrix partitioning.)

Matrix partitioning involves the following actions:
• Enabling Matrix Partitioning (on page 971)
• RGB Stereo Partitioning (on page 972)

1. If the matrix needs to be partitioned, click the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box.
2. Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller switching units. See Matrix
Partitioning (on page 1145) for descriptions of the matrix partitioning types.
The Matrix Properties group changes, as shown below.
Figure 301: Enable Matrix Partitioning
3. Click Edit Components or (in Edit mode) select the Partitioning tab to edit the individual
components of the matrix.
RGB Stereo Partitioning

1. Select RGB/Stereo from the Matrix Partitioning Type drop-down list box.
Figure 302: Matrix Partitioning Type showing RGB/Stereo Partitioning
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the dialog box changes to reflect the
number of components selected. The component size is automatically designated, and cannot be
changed directly.
component is outlined when it is selected. All changes made in the component properties group is
applied to the component selected.
Figure 303: Matrix Partitioning Type, Contiguous Partitioning
2. Select the number of components for this matrix. Note that the fields in the dialog box changes to
reflect the number of components selected.
position.
operates.
5. Select the First Destination for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First Destination is
like the Destination Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals.) The First
Destination setting determines the point where destination numbering starts for this component.
6. Select the First Source for this component from the drop-down list box. (The First Source is like the
Source Offset in previous Imagine Communications product manuals.) The First Source setting
Wild Partitioning
Figure 304: Matrix Partitioning Type, Wild Partitioning
dialog box. The component name is highlighted to indicate that it is selected. Specify the level on
which this component operates by selecting the level number from the drop-down list box.
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring

An optional output monitoring submodule may be installed on audio and/or video output modules in an
Integrator frame. Output monitoring is a feature that treats the matrix destinations as a set of sources
on a separate matrix (called the output monitoring matrix). It allows you to monitor what comes out of a
particular destination. For example, a 64×32 matrix with SDI format that has output monitoring, would
have another matrix of 32×1 with SDI format.
To set up the output monitoring function, follow these steps:

1. Add the Integrator frame to your system, as described in steps 1 through 6 in Configuring Regular
Matrix Types (on page 963).
2. At the Select Router Frame Matrix Size dialog box
 Highlight the desired matrix size.
 Choose the check box for output monitoring, and then click Add. (Note the "OM" that has
appeared in the upper left corner of the added matrix. This "OM" may appear at another
location on the matrix, depending on which spigot the signal is being driven to.)
Figure 305: Output Monitoring Function Selected
3. Click Next.
4. Continue with steps 4 through 7 under Configuring Regular Matrix Types (on page 963).
The Integrator frame is added to the device list at the Navigation pane. Notice that the router level
definition indicates one additional destination.
5. Double-click the Integrator with the output submodule attached.
6. At the Edit Frame dialog box, select the Output Monitoring tab.
Figure 306: Output Monitoring Tab

7. Set the Level, Destination, and First Source parameters. Like any other matrix, an output monitoring
matrix can be configured (such as assigning level control, starting destination, and sources).
 Level: level on which this matrix operates
 Destination: destination number for this matrix (the point at which destination numbering
starts for this matrix)
If you choose to have the output monitoring matrix on the same level as the matrix on which
the destinations are monitored, you must assign a different destination number (for the output
monitoring destination) that does not conflict with the destinations that are monitored. See the
first figure below for an example of the output monitoring matrix on the same level as the
monitoring matrix. See the second figure below for an example of the output monitoring matrix
on a different level from the monitoring matrix.
 First Source: first source for this matrix (the First Source is analogous to the Source Offset in
previous Imagine Communications product manuals)
The first source number must be the same as the first destination number of the destinations
that are monitored.
8. Click OK.
The Integrator frame is updated at the Navigation pane.
Figure 307: Output Monitoring Matrix — Same Level
Figure 308: Output Monitoring Matrix — Different Level
Defining Destinations as Sources for Output Monitoring

On some occasions, you may need to define a particular destination as a source for output monitoring.
(This may happen when you are not using a control panel.)
1. Follow steps 1 through 8 under Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring (on page 974).
2. At the Navigation pane, double-click the routing system name to launch the Database Editor.
The Configuration dialog box opens.
3. Select the Levels tab, and then make sure that the logical router size can accommodate both levels.
(In the example shown below, the logical router size is set for 64 sources and 33 destinations.)
Figure 309: Checking Logical Router Size
4. Click the Sources tab.

5. Scroll to the first available logical source entry to be assigned to a destination (the "first source"
entry from step 7 of Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring (on page 974)).
6. Set up names that match the destination names entered into the logical destination database.
When assigning or editing source names, keep in mind that these characters are "illegal": the "~"
character, the "\" character, and all non-printable ASCII characters (<Alt> and <Ctrl> characters).
These characters may corrupt the database, so they cannot be stored in the database.
7. Delete all sources that precede your newly-named source(s) on the output monitoring level only.
8. Starting at your first newly named source, redefine the levels ("1," "2," and so forth).
9. Right-click in the Levels field, and then select Clear Invalid Assignments.
10. Select the Destinations tab.
11. Right-click in the Levels field, and then select Clear Invalid Assignments.
12. Delete all logical assignments for the output monitoring level.
13. Scroll down to the location of the destination you want to function as the output monitor (usually
the last name in the list).
14. Set up an easily-remembered name for the new output monitor.
15. Enter the same output monitor destination number you set at the Output Monitoring tab for the
output monitoring level.
16. Close the Configuration dialog box.
The figure below illustrates a matrix panel display that shows the output monitoring function.
Figure 310: Output Monitoring Function as Displayed in a Matrix Panel Display
Adding Combiner Systems

You cannot edit or delete dynamic routing threads in a combiner system; however, you can edit dynamic
routing thread remote accessible sources in a combiner system.
The combiner option allows you to join several Integrator frames to provide a routing system with more
than 128 inputs. Setting up systems in this way allows you to have a system with up to 512 inputs × 512
outputs.
Internal connections for the combiner systems are managed through the Dynamic Routing Fabric. See
Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800) for more information about dynamic routing threads.
Restrictions
Several restrictions exist in a potential combiner system:
1. You cannot partition any part of the combiner system.

2. All frames within the combiner system must be a single format. (You cannot have an analog video
frame and an SDI frame in one combiner system, for example.)
3. A 6RU frame size is the smallest "building block" for your potential combiner system.
Setting Up a Combiner System

Choose what size system you need; that is, how many inputs and how many outputs. (Maximum
combiner system size is 512×512.)
You may find it helpful to plan out your combiner system on paper. It is easier for you to add and edit
your choices if you have a system setup already defined. See Adding Combiner System Components (on
page 980) for examples of the types of information you need to set up your system.
Adding Combiner System Components

3. Select the frame type Combiner System.
4. Click OK.
The Edit Combiner System dialog box opens. (This dialog box looks slightly different, depending on
whether or not you are configuring a combiner system for an Integrator Gold. The second figure
blow shows a picture of the Edit Combiner System dialog box for an Integrator Gold. The first figure
below shows a picture of the Edit Combiner System dialog box for all other Integrators.)
Figure 311: Combiner Choices (Except Integrator Gold)
Figure 312: Combiner Choices for Integrator Gold
5. Make your selections from the drop-down list boxes as follows (see above for the location of these
selections):
 Name — what you want this combiner system to be named
 Level on which this combiner system operates
 Matrix format — select the signal format that the frame routes (all frames within the combiner
system must be a single format)
 Signal type — select the specific signal type within the format (analog audio, mono audio,
stereo audio, and AES formats use the same signal type for input and output signals)
 Output signal6 — output signal type for Integrator Gold format
 Input signal1 — input signal EQ setting for Integrator Gold format
 Size — number of sources and number of destinations
 Source and destination offsets
 Combiner system input and output thread offsets — these offsets must be above the Source
and Destination Offsets’ values
 Dual Output
 Output Monitoring — allows you to set up a router feature that treats the matrix destinations
as a set of sources on a separate matrix
 Starting frame ID — the physical address of the first frame in the combiner system. At any time
you may click View Picture to see a block diagram and other frame details.
6. When the configuration is complete, click OK.
Navigator adds frames to the device tree and automatically adds a set of dynamic routing threads
for the combiner system.
7. Physically set up the frames as they are specified in the database (set frame IDs and wire the
system).
Navigator does not allow you to use the dynamic routing thread Edit function on a connection
within a combiner system.
8. Poll the entire system to verify that all frames are operating and detected correctly.
9. Download the new configuration to the frames.
10. Make sure that the combiner system crosspoints operate correctly.
Editing a Frame’s Configuration

The Edit Frame dialog box includes all functions necessary for changing a router frame configuration.
Any of the tabs [Router Frame, Configured Matrices, Partitioning, Detected Matrices, Detected Cards or
Control Card(s)] can be selected by clicking on the appropriate tab.
Router Frame Tab

Router Frame Tab for All Integrator Frames Router Frame Tab for Integrator Gold
Except Integrator Gold
Figure 313: Edit Frame Window, Router Frame Tab Selected
The type and size of the matrices in a frame can be changed, increased, or deleted from the Edit Router
Frame tab. In addition, installed submodules can be indicated and edited.
Editing a Frame Matrix

1. Select the new matrix type from the drop-down list box. Valid options are listed below. (Max Matrix
Size options change as the Matrix Type is changes.)
 AES EBU
Analog mono audio

Analog stereo audio
Analog video
High Definition (HD)
Stereo audio
SDI
Data router
Integrator Gold multirate digital (This option appears on the dialog box for Integrator Gold only.
Its Configured Matrices dialog box is different from other types of matrix format editing. See
Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types (on page 968) for more information.)
2. Change the size of each matrix in the frame by clicking on the desired matrix size, and then clicking
Add.
To increase the size of a matrix, you may have to delete one or more matrices, as you cannot select
matrix sizes bigger than the space remaining in the frame.
By default, the "Stuffed As" size is the same as the selected Max Matrix Size. In some cases, however,
you may wish to override the default in order to save slots for future use. For example, when adding a
64×64 matrix, two slots would be left empty by stuffing the matrix as a 32×32.
Deleting a Frame Matrix

1. Click the matrix in the frame.
An outline appears around the matrix when it is selected.
2. Click Delete.
Editing the Router Matrix

Router matrix editing involves the following tabs:
• Configured Matrices Tab (on page 938)
• Partitioning Tab (on page 986)
• Detected Matrices Tab (on page 943)
• Detected Cards Tab (on page 987)
• Control Card(s) Tab (on page 989)

The Frame ID, Level, First Source, First Destination and Signal Type can be changed from the Configured
Matrices tab. In addition, matrix partitioning can be set up through the Configured Matrices tab. The
appearance of this tab varies, depending on the type of Integrator router is selected.
Regular Integrator Routers
Figure 314: Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab Selected (Integrator Routers Except Data
Router and Integrator Gold)
The procedures for filling in this Configured Matrices tab are the same as for configuring a matrix for a
regular Integrator router. See Configuring Regular Matrix Types (on page 963) for details.
Integrator Data Routers
Figure 315: Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab Selected (Integrator Data Router Only)
The procedures for filling in this Configured Matrices tab are the same as for configuring a matrix for an
Integrator data router. See Configuring Data Router Matrix Types (on page 964) for details.
Integrator Gold Routers
Figure 316: Edit Frame Window, Configured Matrices Tab Selected (Integrator Gold Router Only)
The procedures for filling in this Configured Matrices tab are the same as for configuring a matrix for an
Integrator Gold router. See Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types (on page 968) for details.
Partitioning Tab
Figure 317: Partitioning Tab
The Partitioning tab only appears when you select the Enable Matrix Partitioning check box on the
Configured Matrices tab. The procedures for filling in this tab are the same as for enabling matrix
partitioning. See Partitioning the Matrix (on page 971) for details.
"Detected Matrices" refers to the system configuration that a frame uses if it is in DIP Switch mode. If
the frame is in Program mode, it attempts to use the configuration reported in the Configured Matrices
tab.
To copy the properties listed on the Detected Matrices tab to the matrix you are configuring, click Copy
to Configured Matrix.
Detected Cards Tab
Figure 319: Detected Cards Tab (Except Integrator Gold)
Figure 320: Detected Cards Tab (Integrator Gold Only)
The Detected Cards tab will contain information on all modules found in the frame during a system poll.
This information is read-only. The tab will show a graphic of the Integrator frame filled with the cards
reported by the frame. Each card can be selected by clicking on it with the mouse. The detailed
properties of the selected card will be shown on the right side of the dialog box.
The same elevators and back panels are used for different cards. For example, a video output back panel
can be used with an analog video output card or an SDI output card. Also, the same elevator is used for
analog video, SDI, and AES-EBU matrices. Detailed information about which combinations are valid is not
presented here. Please refer questions to a Customer Service representative.
The router properties displayed include

• Type of card (for example, analog video)
• Whether the card is an input or an output card
• Type of elevator to which the card is connected (all cards of the same matrix should report the same
elevator type; if not, the card that is not reporting is probably inoperable)
• Type of back panel attached to the card (this should match the card type)
• FPGA version installed on the card (this information may be useful to Customer Service when
diagnosing a problem)
• Whether the optional output monitoring card is installed in the selected slot.
• Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the selected slot (this
information varies for each card type and will not be detailed here; it may, however, be useful to
Customer Service)
Controls that present information about the daughter cards installed in the selected slot. (This
information varies for each card type and will not be detailed here; however, it may be useful to
Customer Service.)
Control Card(s) Tab
Figure 321: Control Card(s) Tab
The Control Card(s) tab displays information about the control card(s) that are installed in the frame.
This information is presented as an aid in troubleshooting a system. The information is updated on every
Poll of the control system.
The Control Card tab window shows information for the bottom control card (CPU A) on the left, and
the top control card (CPU B) on the right. If both control cards are installed, the Present indicator will be
"Yes" for both. However, only one of the two control cards is active at one time. Only the details for the
active card will be shown on the Control Card(s) tab.
The mode of the active control card will be either DIP switch or Program. This mode is set via the DIP
switches on the front of the control card. See the frame manual for DIP switch settings. However, note
that the frame must be in Program mode to operate with a downloaded configuration. The firmware
version and FPGA version controls will display the versions of the software installed on the active control
card.
The DIP switch controls will show the current positions of the control card’s DIP switches.
 DIP Switch, Left is the leftmost of the two DIP switches on the front of the control.
 DIP Switch, "Right" is the switch on the right front of the control card. A "0" indicates that a
switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A "1" indicates that a switch is in the ON position.
 DIP Switch, "Internal" indicates the settings of the DIP switch located on the center of the card
(this switch is only visible when the card is removed from the frame).
Chapter 57
Configuring Legacy Frames

Legacy frames (for example, XPlus, Hedco, Mixbox, NEO, VIA, and XPRESS) are not configurable via
Navigator; however, they should be added to the database so that Navigator will have a complete
"view" of the control system and will operate properly.
Please keep in mind that these configuration procedures are for the legacy frame definitions only.
Adding Other (Legacy) Imagine Communications Frames

Follow these steps:
3. Select the Frame type.
A blue box will appear around the selection
4. Click Next.
The Edit Frame dialog box opens.
Figure 322: Edit Frame Window (Non-Integrator Frames)
5. Make selections from these drop-down list boxes:

 Number of Matrices for this frame
 Matrix properties:
• Select Matrix allows a specified matrix to be displayed on the dialog
• Matrix Type
• Matrix Size, which is the matrix dimension of the selected matrix
• Sources (generic frames only), which is the number of sources for the selected matrix
• Destinations (Via and XPlus only), which is the number of destinations for the selected
matrix
• Level on which this matrix will operate
• First Source for this matrix (same as Source Offset in other Imagine Communications
product manuals); determines the point where source numbering for this matrix starts
• First Destination for this matrix (same as Destination Offset in other Imagine
Communications product manuals); determines the point where destination numbering for
this matrix starts
• Is Matrix Partitioned (VIA with SDI format and XPlus only) allows this matrix to partition into
multiple components
 Number of Components for this matrix to partition into
 Components (generic frames only):
• Select Component allows the specified component to be displayed on the dialog
• Component Size displays the matrix dimensions of the specified component
• Component Level on which this component will operate
• Source Offset (VIA and XPlus only) determines the point at which source numbering will
start for the specified component
• Destination Offset(Via and XPlus only) determines the point at which destination numbering
will start for the specified component
Chapter 58
Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways

The Edge protocol gateway provides external physical connectivity to any Imagine Communications
routing system, regardless of the type(s) of Imagine Communications routing switcher involved. Use of
standard TCP/IP communications allows the unit to provide connectivity over most standard LAN, MAN,
WAN, or Internet connections. The Edge translates between our protocol and the protocols used by
other manufacturers or equipment. It can be used to integrate otherwise incompatible devices in a
system, and it may be used to expand a system beyond the normal limitations imposed by hardware or
system design. Edge serial port and Ethernet connection protocol assignments are configurable in
Navigator.
Before configuring an Edge, you need to create a routing system and set up a logical database. See
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) and Logical Database Setup (on page 729) for
more information.
Adding Edge Configurations

and then double-click on the Edge selection.
3. The Add Edge dialog box opens.
Figure 323: Add Edge Serial Protocols Tab
The Add Edge tabbed dialog box allows you to set protocol assignments and option values for the
newly-added Edge. Information on using those tabs can be found in the rest of this section.
Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and Options

Navigator allows you to set the protocol settings for the Edge’s serial ports. You can switch from X-Y
protocol to the "foreign" protocol resident on your Edge. In addition, you can change some of the option
values for a selected protocol.
1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Serial Protocols tab.
2. Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
Figure 324: Serial Protocol Options Dialog Box, Non Pro-Bel Configurations
Figure 325: Serial Protocol Options Dialog Box, Pro-Bel Configurations

Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial interface
are displayed. On GVG-7000 configurations only, an assigned value for Map Type is displayed. On
Pro-Bel configurations only, a Mappings button is also displayed. (See Setting Mapping Values for
Pro-Bel Configurations (on page 995) for more information on setting the mapping values for a Pro-
Bel configuration.) The Edge provides bidirectional translation of the following router control
protocols:
 Imagine Communications pass-thru protocol
 GVG SMS-7000 protocol (product of Thompson Grass Valley, headquartered in Paris, France)
 Jupiter ASCII protocol (product of Thompson Grass Valley, headquartered in Paris, France)
 Jupiter ESswitch protocol (product of Thompson Grass Valley, headquartered in Paris, France)
 NVISION protocol (product of NVISION Inc., Headquartered in Grass Valley, California)
 NV 9000 protocol (product of NVISION Inc., Headquartered in Grass Valley, California)
 PESA P1 protocol (PESA CPU Link No. 1 (P1) protocol is a product of QuStream Corporation,
headquartered in Toronto, Canada
 Pro-Bel SW-P-02 protocol (product of Pro-Bel Ltd., headquartered in Reading, Berkshire, UK)
 Pro-Bel SW-P-08 protocol (product of Pro-Bel Ltd., headquartered in Reading, Berkshire, UK)
 Stagetec protocol (product of Salzbrenner Stagetec Mediagroup, headquartered in Buttenheim,
Germany)
 Utah Scientific RCP-1 protocol (product of Utah Scientific, headquartered in Salt Lake City, Utah)
3. From the Protocol drop-down list, select the protocol you want to switch to. Supported serial
protocols include
 Leitch terminal X-Y
 GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
 Jupiter ESswitch server and client
 Jupiter ASCII server and client
 NVISION server and client
 NV9000 server and client
 NVision P0025 server and client
 PESA P1 server and client
 Pro-Bel SW-P-02 server and SW-P-02 client
 Pro-Bel SW-P-08 server and SW-P-08 client
 Stagetec server and client
 Utah RCP-1 server and client
4. The assigned values for the selected protocol appears. While all relevant protocol option values are
displayed, some values may not be configurable. These values are displayed for informational
purposes only; you cannot change them through Navigator. To change a value:
a. Highlight the value only of the option you want to change.
A drop-down menu appears.
Figure 326: Changing a Protocol Option’s Value
b. Select the new value.

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box.
d. Click OK to return to the Edge Serial Protocol dialog box.
Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel Configurations

Navigator allows you to set mapping values for Pro-Bel SW-P-02 and SW-P-08 configurations. To set the
mapping values, follow these steps:
1. At the Serial Protocol Options dialog box, select the desired Pro-Bel protocol from the Protocol
drop-down list box.
A Mappings... button appears on the Options display (see Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments
and Options (on page 993)).
2. Click Mappings....
The ProBel Inputs and Outputs dialog box opens.
Figure 327: Pro-Bel Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box
The ability to set levels is only available for the SW-P-08 protocol. When the SW-P-02 protocol is
selected, the Pro-Bel Level drop-down list box is greyed out.
3. Set up input and output information as follows:
Selecting Inputs
 From the Input Range’s Probel Level drop-down list box, select the level at which you want the
Pro-Bel router to start for the inputs specified for mapping.
A database can include up to 16 independent router levels, numbered from 0 to 15. These level
numbers correspond to the level number(s) that each physical router frame occupies in the
routing system. (For more information about levels, see Configuring Levels (on page 781).)
 In the Input Range entry box (to the left of the Add button), enter the Pro-Bel router inputs you
want to map. You can enter single inputs (for example, 1), a range of inputs (for example, 2-5),
or a combination of both (for example, 1,2-5). Separate entries with a comma, but without blank
spaces.
 Click Add.
The input numbers appear in the Input Range display box.
Selecting Outputs
 From the Output Range’s Probel Level drop-down list box, select the outputs’ level1. at which
you want the Pro-Bel router to start for the outputs specified for mapping.
 In the Output Range entry box (to the left of the Add button), enter the Pro-Bel router outputs
you want to map. You can enter single outputs (for example, 1), a range of outputs (for example,
2-5), or a combination of both (for example, 1,2-5). Separate entries with a comma, but without
blank spaces.
 Click Add.
The output numbers appear in the Output Range display box.
4. Click Next.
The Mapped Matrices dialog box opens. In the lower left corner the Unassigned Probel Inputs and
Outputs notice appears.
Figure 328: Pro-Bel Mapped Matrices Dialog Box
5. Click Add.
The Add Matrix dialog box opens.
Figure 329: Pro-Bel Add Matrix Dialog Box
a. Enter a name for the new Pro-Bel matrix.

b. If desired, click Color..., and then select a new color for the matrix.
c. From the Level drop-down list box, select the level at which you want this matrix to start.
d. Enter the desired matrix size. This matrix size can include all or some of the inputs and outputs
to be mapped.
You can manipulate this matrix size to match the number of Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, or you
can change it so that some inputs and outputs remain unassigned, so as to add them to different
matrix(es).
e. Enter the desired starting number for input and output offsets.
f. Select the desired format from the drop-down list box.
g. If you want to change the Pro-Bel input or output mapping assignments, click the number for
the appropriate component input or output, and then select a new input/output number from
the drop-down list box.
h. Click OK to return to the Mapped Matrices dialog box.
If you have assigned all of your Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, the Unassigned Probel Inputs and
Outputs notice are no longer displayed.
If you have not assigned all of your Pro-Bel inputs and outputs, the Unassigned Probel inputs and
Outputs notice indicates the number of unassigned items remain.
 Click View to see which inputs and/or outputs are unassigned.
 Click Clear to remove the unassigned list from the dialog box.
 Click Add to add the unassigned items to a new matrix.
 You may also add the unassigned items to an existing matrix: Highlight the desired matrix, click
Edit, and then change the matrix size to accommodate the number of I/Os you want to add.
Click OK to return to the Mapped Matrices dialog box.
6. If desired, click Probel View to view a "snapshot" of the Pro-Bel to Imagine Communications
mapping. It shows you which Pro-Bel I/Os are mapped to which Imagine Communications I/Os,
assigned levels, and assigned matrix names.
Figure 330: Pro-Bel to Imagine Communications Mapping
Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values

Navigator allows you to change the protocol settings for either (or both) of an Edge’s client and server
Ethernet connection. You cannot switch between protocols, but you can change some option values.
Figure 331: Edge Ethernet Protocols Tabs
1. At the Add Edge dialog box, select the Ethernet Protocols tab. The assigned values for the default
server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.
Supported protocols include
 GVG 7000 server and GVG 7000 client
 NVision server and NVision client
 NVision 9000 server and NVision 9000 client
 Leitch virtual X-Y server and Leitch virtual X-Y client
 Leitch Telnet X-Y server
2. Highlight the target Edge selection, and then click Edit.
The Options dialog box opens. The option values for the client or server selection are displayed.
Figure 332: Ethernet Protocols Options Dialog Box
To change a value, take these steps:

A drop-down menu appears.
d. Click OK to return to the Edge Ethernet Protocols tab.
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab
Figure 333: Edge Detected Cards Tab
The Detected Cards tab displays back panel information for the Edge. (This information is read-only.)
The tab shows the card type, back panel type, and version.
Setting Network Information for Edge
Figure 334: Edge Control Cards Tab
The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in the Edge device. The
information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and network and configuration
files setup on the right.
System Information
• The Name field displays the Edge device name.
• The ID list box displays the Edge device ID.
• The Firmware Version and FPGA Version fields displays the versions of the software installed on the
active control card.
• The DIP switch fields shows the current positions of the control card's DIP switches. A "0" indicates
that a switch is in the down (or OFF) position. A "1" indicates that a switch is in the (or ON) position.
 DIP Switch, Top displays information about the top switch of the three DIP switches on the front
of the control.
 DIP Switch, Middle displays information about the middle switch of the three DIP switches on
the front of the control.
 DIP Switch, Bottom displays information about the bottom switch of the three DIP switches on
the front of the control.
Network Information
The Control Card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and Programmed settings.
• Current settings are the IP, gateway, subnet mask, and MAC address settings that are currently being
used for the Edge. When you select the Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they
are read-only.
• Programmed settings are the IP, gateway, and subnet mask address settings that you want used with
the Edge. When you select the Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the Edge.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the Edge is attached.
 Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to which the Edge belongs.
SNMP
If you want to set up an SNMP Agent, click SNMP....
The SNMP Agent Options dialog box (see SNMP Agent Options (on page 1004)) appears. The SNMP
Agent Options dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings. See the following topics:
• SNMP Agent Options (on page 1004)
• Systems (on page 1007)
Advanced Control Options

If you want to set up advanced control options, click Advanced….
The Advance Settings dialog box (SNMP Agent Options (on page 1004)) opens. The Advance Settings
dialog box allows you to view the configuration file names that are used to store frame’s configuration
information; and displays information and settings for virtual XY, time server, and Map Names options.
• Time Server Tab (on page 1007)
• Map Names Tab (on page 1008)
SNMP Agent Options

The SNMP Agent Options dialog box allows you to set up all desired SNMP Agent settings. Three
separate group boxes are displayed on this dialog box. See the following topics:
• Systems (on page 1007)
Figure 335: SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box

Destinations.

1. To add a destination, click Add... (or, to modify an destination, click Modify...).
2. Change the IP address displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap destination.
3. Change the network port number displayed to the one desired for the SNMP Trap destination. The
port number can be from 1 to 65535.
4. From the Community drop-down list box, select the community name.
5. From the Version drop-down list box, select the SNMP version that you would like to use for the
SNMP Trap.
6. Set the Timeout option to the desired time period (in seconds) before an SNMP Trap is sent to a
manager if the initial attempt failed.
7. Set the Retry to the number of times to resend an SNMP Trap to a manager if the initial attempt
failed.
To delete an SNMP Trap destination:

1. At the SNMP Agent Options dialog box list control, select the IP address for the SNMP Trap
Destination you want to delete. Multiple devices may be selected using standard Windows selection
techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple devices).
2. Click Delete. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the category list, click Delete All. A system prompt confirms the deletion.
SNMP Agent
This table shows the items and function descriptions for the items listed in the SNMP Agent group box.
SNMP Agent Items of SNMP Options Dialog Box

Items Function
Read Community SNMP read community string (in SNMP terms, a "Get" operation has to
match this setting in the MIB browser in order to read information from
device)
Write Community SNMP write community string (in SNMP terminology, a "Set" operation
has to match this setting in a MIB browser in order to write information
to that device)
Enable Authentication Traps When checked, authentication traps are sent if the read or write
community does not match between the SNMP agent and MIB browser
Permitted Managers Opens the Manager Address shortcut menu (see below)
requests are processed by the SNMP Agent.
Figure 337: Manager Address Dialog Box
To add a manager address:

a. Enter the IP address in the text box to the left of the Add button.
b. Click Add.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
To modify a manager address:

a. Highlight the manager address that you want to modify.
b. Click Modify.
The Permitted Manager Destinations dialog box opens.
c. Modify the manager address as desired.

d. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
To delete a manager address:

a. Highlight the address you want to remove. Multiple addresses may be selected using standard
Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select multiple
addresses).
b. Click Remove. The IP address(es) is removed from the list.
OR
To completely clear the address list, click Remove All; a screen prompt confirms the deletion.
c. Click OK to return to the SNMP Agent Options dialog box.
Systems
The System group box fields describe the device that is currently selected in the Navigation pane. This is
user-defined information that, once provided by an administrator, is available on the device when it is
retrieved by a MIB browser. The fields and function descriptions for the items listed in the System box
are as follows:
System Fields of SNMP Options Dialog Box
Field Explanation
Name Device name
Advance Settings Dialog Box

The Advance Settings dialog box allows you to view the configuration file names that are used to store
frame’s configuration information; and displays information and settings for time server and Map
Names options.
Time Server Tab

This capability is only available for enhanced resource cards with Edge Web support installed.
The Time Server tab allows you to change the frame's time server settings for the web support.
Figure 338: Time Server Tab
The Time Server tab allows you to make the following settings:
• Time server IP address (default server is 192.101.21.1)
• Maximum wait time for server connection
• Time zone based on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)
Map Names Tab

The Map Names tab allows you to update a frame's source and destination "Names Mapping" file based
on the current logical database.
Figure 339: Map Names Tab
You can make the following selections:

frame.
 With Auto Generate you can generate a new file that is based on the current logical database.
 With Use Existing File you can generate a Map Names file based on an existing file.
• When you select Reboot After Update, the frame reboots after the file has been transmitted. A frame
License Tab
At the License tab, you can activate SNMP Agent firmware licenses.
You must activate the SNMP Agent firmware if you ordered it separately from your original product
purchase. If you ordered the SNMP Agent firmware at the same time as your original product purchase,
it is factory-installed and you do not need to activate it. Before you activate the SNMP feature, make
sure you have obtained an appropriate license activation code. Provide the Customer Service
representative with the serial number of your product. See the product manual for instructions.
frame.
 Use XY File Transfer to export a file by X-Y transfer (based on Navigator’s serial or TCP/IP
 Use FTP to export a file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (Log in before the file transfer is
initiated.)
• In the License Key box, enter the appropriate license activation code you received from Customer
Service (see note).
must be rebooted before the SNMP license is recognized.
Edge Web Router Application

The optional web router application uses standard web browsers to perform certain control panel
functions for Panacea routers and Edge protocol gateways that have an enhanced resource module
installed. The enabling software is purchased as a separate flash module; to become operable, it
requires the presence of an enhanced resource module.
The web router application flash module is available for retrofit into non-web enabled Panacea or Edge
frames. Web-enabled frames have the flash module already installed.
For more information about the optional web router application, see Configuring the Web Router
Application (on page 1087).
Chapter 59
Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA)

Panels
Alphanumeric breakaway panels are available in one rack-unit (1RU) and two rack-unit (2RU)
configurations. The descriptions for the different panels are as follows.
RCP-ABA 1RU Models

The RCP-ABA (1RU) is available in three models: the XY, the SB, and the AFV/MB models. These panels
differ in appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration procedures.
• The ABA(1)-XY models provide X-Y operation and source selection with 4 levels of breakaway. (The
ABA1EXYp contains an Ethernet connector for use with CCS Gateway products or with network-ready
routers). The panel includes five display windows (one destination, four sources) with associated
select keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys, and 16 user-definable destination/source select keys.
• ABA1EXYp X-Y bus control panels simultaneously provide control and status of 4 destinations. A
specific destination is assigned to each display when the panel is initially configured. Both sources and
destinations are selected on the front of the control panel, while the destination and sources may be
monitored in the display screens. Sources may be switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV
switching), or independently (breakaway switching).
• The ABA(1)-SB models provide control of a single destination with 4 levels of breakaway. (The
ABA1ESBp contains an Ethernet connector for use with CCS Gateway products or with network-ready
routers). The panel includes one destination display window, four source display windows with
associated select keys, four user-definable auxiliary keys, and 16 user-definable source select keys.
• ABA1ESBp single bus control panels control and display the status of 1 router destination. The
controlled destination is assigned to the control panel when it is initially configured and cannot be
changed from the front of the control panel. The displays on the panel show the sources connected to
the destination on each of 4 levels. Sources may be switched on all 4 levels simultaneously (AFV
switching), or they may be switched independently (breakaway switching).
• The ABA-AFV and ABA(1)-MB models provide audio-follow-video (no breakaway) source selection on
4 destinations. (ABA1EMBp contains an Ethernet connector for use with CCS Gateway products or
with network-ready routers.) A specific destination is assigned to each of the 4 display windows when
the panel is initially configured. These destinations cannot be changed from the front of the control
panel. The source connected to each destination is displayed in the control windows.
• ABA1EMBp multibus control panels simultaneously provide control and status of 4 destinations. A
specific destination is assigned to each display when the panel is initially configured. This destination
cannot be changed from the front of the control panel. The source connected to each destination is
displayed in the control display, and can be changed using the procedures outlined in the following
sections. Sources will be switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV switching).
RCP-ABA 2RU Models

The RCP-ABA (2RU) provides X-Y operation and source selection on eight independent levels. The RCP-
ABA (2RU) is available in three models: the XY, the SB, and the MB models. These panels differ in
appearance and functionality, but use similar configuration procedures. These models include an
Ethernet connector for use with CCS Protocol products or with network-ready routers. Configuration
information in this chapter applies to all 2RU models, except where noted.
• The ABA2EXYp X-Y bus control panels include 5 display windows (1 destination, 4 sources) with
associated select keys, 4 user-definable auxiliary keys, 48 user-definable push button
source/destination select keys, and a scroll knob. Sources and destinations are selected from the front
of the panel using push button keys or a scroll knob.
• The ABA2ESBp single bus control panels control and display the status of one router destination. The
controlled destination is assigned to the control panel when it is initially configured and cannot be
changed from the front of the control panel. The displays on the panel show the sources connected to
the destination on each of four levels. Sources may be switched on all four levels simultaneously (AFV
switching), or they may be switched independently (breakaway switching).
• The ABA2EMBp multibus control panels simultaneously provide control and status of four
destinations. A specific destination is assigned to each display when the panel is initially configured.
This destination cannot be changed from the front of the control panel. The source connected to each
destination is displayed in the control display, and can be changed using the procedures outlined in
the following sections. Sources will be switched on all levels simultaneously (AFV switching).
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Before configuring an ABA panel, you need to create a routing system and set up a logical database. See
Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) and Logical Database Setup (on page 729) for
more information.
and then double-click on the panel selection.
3. The Edit Panel dialog box opens.
Figure 341: Edit Panel Dialog Box
When an ABA panel is added, it is created with a panel definition. This definition may be the default
definition (if the panel was added before the database was edited) or it may be a unique definition
based on your particular database (if the panel was added after the database was created).
If the ABA panel is added after the database edit, it is configured to access the complete set of sources
and destinations included in the database. All necessary category index keys are assigned, and the panel
is completely functional without further definition. In many cases, it is not necessary to proceed further
with the panel editing process. If, however, you want to change anything in the definition (move the
selection keys, limit access to a specific set of sources or destinations, change the auxiliary key functions,
and so forth), you can find the information necessary in this chapter.
If the panel carries the default definition, the category/index keys, source selection keys, sources
available, destinations available and levels affected have to be manually edited. As an alternative, the
panel can be deleted from the database and then added back to the database using the Poll method. All
necessary categories are assigned at that time.

• Assigning a Category Key (on page 1034)
• Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key (on page 1020)
• Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol (on page 1037)
• Clearing Selection Key Assignments (on page 1023)
• Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel (on page 1016)
• Moving a Selection Key (on page 1014)
• Configuring the Auxiliary Keys (on page 1024)
• Setting the Levels Affected (on page 1025)
Edit Button Function Dialog Box

The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to user-definable selection keys on the
ABA and RCPp control panels. (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)
Figure 342: Edit Button Function Dialog Box
The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used to select the function of
the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to define the specific parameters of the button.
The appearance of the Properties group depend on the type of button selected in the drop-down list
box. The functions available in the drop-down list depend on the type of panel being edited. Configuring
Control Panel Buttons (on page 1153) shows a list of button functions available for ABA panels.
Moving a Selection Key

To rearrange the order of the selection keys on an ABA panel, click the Assignments tab at the Edit
Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to that shown below opens (the actual appearance depends on the style of the ABA
panel being edited).
The "drag and drop" operation does not move an index definition. To move the index definition to a new
key, you must reassign the key definition. For more information about this function, see Editing Details
of a Panel Definition (on page 1024).
1. Position the cursor over the selection key to be moved.
2. Click and hold the left mouse button.
3. Drag the selection key to its new position.
4. Release the mouse button.
The selection key appears in its new position.
To move a selection key:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the new position.
3. Drop it.
Figure 343: Moving a Selection Key
Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel

When a panel is created, it has access to the complete set of sources and destinations in the database
(assuming the panel was created after the database was edited). It is possible, however, to limit panel
access to a specific set of sources and destinations. To change the panel access list, click the
Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. (The actual appearance depends on the style of the panel
being edited.)
Figure 344: Edit Panel Dialog Box, Assignments Tab
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Panel

Navigator allows you to assign the type of view order you want to see on the Assignments tab list boxes
and on a particular panel. You may sort in either alphabetical or logical order.
Figure 345: Assigning View Order for 1RU ABA Panels
Figure 346: Assigning View Order for 2RU ABA Panels
• When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in alphabetical order, the
Assignments tab displays these lists in numeric-alphabetic order (see above).
When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical order, the Assignments tab
displays these lists in the order in which you first assigned the sources and destinations (see above).
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in alphabetical order, Navigator "instructs" the panel to
display Source Selection and Destination Selection information in numeric-alphabetic order (see
above).
• When the Panel Sort Order is set to sort in logical order, Navigator "instructs" the panel to display
Source Selection and Destination Selection information in the order in which you first assigned the
sources and destinations (see above).
You must perform a download before this sort takes effect. See Downloading Device Definitions (on
Denying Access to Specific Sources or Destinations

The simplest way to deny panel access to one or two sources or destinations is to remove them from the
access list by dragging them from the This Panel list to the Global Database list (you can also remove a
source or destination using the Delete button). Deleting a source or destination from the access list only
removes it from this panel’s definition. It does not remove it from the database or from other panels
based on this database.
To remove a source or destination from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source or destination name in the This Panel list box on the Assignments tab.
2. Drag the source or destination from the This Panel list box and drop it in the Global Database box
(or click Delete).
The source or destination is removed from the panel list.
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of Sources and Destinations

To create a very limited set of sources and destinations to which the panel have access, follow these
steps:
1. Remove all source and destination assignments from the panel access list using Delete All.
All sources and destinations are removed from the panel list.
2. Add the desired sources and destinations to the panel access list by dragging and dropping them in
the This Panel box (or by using the Assign button).
To remove all sources and destinations, click Delete All.
All sources and destinations are removed from the panel list.
To add a source or destination to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click a source or destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag or double-click the source or destination from the Global Database box; drop it in the This
Panel box (or click Assign).
When viewing the Assignments dialog box on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may
not contain text descriptions. See below for the VGA equivalents.
3. The source or destination are added to the panel list.
Figure 347: Appearance of Buttons on VGA Displays

Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a Selection Key

On ABA panels, you can select sources and destinations via Category/Index or Favorite Key selection
techniques. With Favorite Key selection, source or destination selection requires only one key press.
One of the user-definable selection keys is configured to select a specific source or destination for rapid
access. For example, a selection key could be defined as MON2. When pressed, the key would select
Monitor 2.
Figure 348: Selecting a Source via Favorite Key on an ABA 1RU Panel
Figure 349: Selecting a Source via Favorite Key on an ABA 2RU Panel
Assigning a Favorite Source to a Selection Key

To assign a Favorite Source to a selection key, follow these steps:
1. Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to that shown in Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel (on
page 1016) opens.
2. Select the source name from the panel list in the Source group.
3. Drag the source name to the selection key. The selection key changes to reflect the new assignment.
A favorite source can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit Button Function dialog box1 .
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)
To assign a favorite source:

1. Select the source from the panel list.
2. Drag it to the selection key.
3. Drop it in place.
Figure 350: Assigning a Favorite Source
Assigning a Favorite Destination to a Selection Key

To assign a Favorite Destination to a selection key, follow these steps:
Click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box. A dialog box similar to that shown in Limiting the
Sources and Destinations Available to a Panel (on page 1016) opens.
1. Select the destination name from the panel list in the Destinations group. The selected destination
is highlighted.
2. Drag the destination name to the selection key. The selection key changes to reflect the new
assignment.
A favorite destination can also be assigned to a selection key via the Edit Button Function dialog box.
(Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)
To assign a favorite destination:

1. Select the destination from the panel list.
Figure 351: Assigning a Favorite Destination
Clearing Selection Key Assignments

A default index assignment cannot be removed by dragging the key to the trash can. You must manually
assign the key index to "None." See Assigning a Category Key (on page 1034) for more information on
this function.
To clear a selection key assignment, drag the selection key to the trash can. The identifying information
in the selection key disappears, indicating that it is unassigned.
To clear a single selection:

1. Select the key.
2. Drag it to the trash can.
3. Drop it.
To clear all selections:

1. Press Clear All.
Figure 352: Clearing a Selection Key Assignment
To clear all selection key assignments, click Clear All. The identifying information in the selection keys
disappears to indicate that they are unassigned.
Editing Details of a Panel Definition

If a panel is added before the database is edited, it is created with a default definition. Only two
categories are assigned ("In" and "Dest"). At this point, you can either create a panel definition "from
scratch," or delete the panel from the panel list and add it again using the Poll method. Adding a panel
after the database is edited causes Navigator to automatically create a panel definition that matches the
database.
You may also need to perform more than just the basic editing functions described earlier in this
chapter. This section contains information on performing more complex editing functions.
To create a panel definition "from scratch," or to create a more complex panel definition , double-click
the panel name at the Navigation pane.
The Edit Panel dialog box (Edit Button Function Dialog Box (on page 1014)) opens. The actual
appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

You may also access the Edit Button Function dialog box from the Window + Paging tab or the
Assignments tab. To change any button’s function while on these tabs, right-click the button.
All ABA panels include certain user-definable auxiliary keys.
When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys are given default assignments (ENABLE, BACK [if an SB
panel, the default assignment is LOCK], TAKE, and CLEAR).
To change any of the key assignments:

1. Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to the one shown in Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog (on page 1012) opens. The
actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited. The user-
definable auxiliary keys are circled in blue on the dialog and the arrows point to the buttons used to
define the auxiliary keys.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
3. The Edit Button Function dialog box opens, as shown in Edit Button Function Dialog Box (on page
1014). You can find a detailed description of this dialog (as well as instructions for creating various
types of buttons) in Configuring Control Panel Buttons (on page 1153).
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors

When redefining the auxiliary keys, remember that you must have a Take key for the panel to download
and operate properly.
If Navigator notes selection key definition errors that do not allow the panel to be successfully
downloaded, a Warning group appears on the Auxiliary Keys tab. To view the error message(s), click
View Errors. The Panel Errors dialog box opens, as shown below.
Figure 353: Panel Errors Dialog Box
Setting the Levels Affected

Each source selection window on an ABA panel represents a different level and displays the source
connected to the current destination on that level. For example, a panel may be configured to control
the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2 and Timecode levels. One window is configured to display the source
connected to the current destination on the Video level; the second window displays the source
connected to the destination on the Audio 1 level; the third window displays the source connected to
the current destination on the Audio 2 level; and the fourth window displays the source connected to
the destination on the Timecode level.
An ABA-SB panel may be configured to control the Video, Audio 1, Audio 2, and Timecode levels. One
window is configured to display the source connected to the destination on the Video level; the second
window displays the source connected to the destination on the Audio 1 level; the third window displays
the source connected to the destination on the Audio 2 level; and the fourth window displays the source
connected to the destination on the Timecode level.
On an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, each of the four source selection windows represents a different
destination and displays the source connected to that destination on each level or group of levels.
Selecting a Level Associated with a Selection Window

Click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
1. A dialog box similar to below opens. (The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the style
of the panel being edited.)
Figure 354: Setting the Levels Affected
When you move the mouse cursor over the graphic in the dialog, notice that the cursor changes as it
encounters "hot spots" on the graphic. When the cursor changes to a pointing index finger, it indicates
that the button can be configured from this dialog. If you pause momentarily over a button, a text
description of the button’s current assignment appears.
To configure a Source Selection window, click the window. The configuration options in the Edit
Window x group changes to reflect the current assignments. On the Edit Panel dialog, the Source
Selection window reflects the current assignments.
The Controlled Levels check boxes are used to select the levels that are controlled by the source
selection keys for this window. Only those levels that have been enabled in the database are displayed.
The Status Level group contains a Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box, and a Level drop-down list
box (the drop-down list box is enabled only if the check box is not checked).
 If the Follow Lowest Controlled Level box is checked, the Source Select window statuses the
lowest level checked in the Controlled Levels group.
 If you want to select a different level to be statused, disable the Follow Lowest Controlled Level
check box, and then select the level from the drop-down list box.
Configuring the Source Selection Window

To configure the Source Selection window, follow these steps:
1. Click the Source Selection window.
A blue outline appears around the selected window and the Edit Window x group changes to reflect
the current settings for that window.
2. Enable the level(s) that are to be controlled by the source selection keys associated with this
window: Click the check box next to the Level Name. (A level is enabled if the check box is checked.)
 If the Source Selection window is to display the status of the lowest controlled level, check the
Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box.
The level drop-down list box is disabled.
 If the Source Selection window is to display the status of a level other than the lowest level,
uncheck the Follow Lowest Controlled Level check box, and then select the desired level from
the drop-down list.
3. Click Done to return to the Edit Panel dialog box.
Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages

To display and control more levels than would normally be available on a panel, multiple pages can be
created, each with a different definition. To create an additional page, create a Page key as outlined in
Creating a Page Key (see "Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only)" on page 1166). Each page must
have its own Page key. Any of the auxiliary keys or the selection keys can be used. Right-click the button,
and then define the key via the Edit Button Function dialog; or double-click the button, and then select
the Make Page Button option.
Determining Destinations Accessible to the Panel

Certain panels allow control of different numbers of destinations and associate functions. ABA-XY and
2RU ABA panels allow control of one destination; ABA(1)-SB panels allow control of one destination
selection window with four levels of breakaway; and ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB allows control of four
destinations.
Determining Destinations Accessible to XY Models

ABA-XY or 2RU panel includes one destination selection window.
This window and its associated selection keys allow a user to select the destination being controlled and
statused. A panel can be configured to have access to all destinations in the router database, or to only a
limited subset of the destinations.
To define the set of destinations available to a panel, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog
box. The following dialog box opens.
Figure 355: Defining a Set of Destinations Available to a Panel
Destinations are assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of the dialog. The Global Database
list box displays all destinations available in the database. The This Panel list box displays the
destinations currently assigned to the panel. Assigning destinations to a panel is a simple matter of
transferring the destinations from the Global Database box to the This Panel box.
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box, and then drop it in
the This Panel box, as shown below.
To add a Destination:
1. Select the destination from the Global Database list.
2. Drag it to the panel list.
Figure 356: Adding a Destination by Dragging and Dropping
When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not contain text descriptions. See
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of Sources and Destinations (on page 1019) for the VGA equivalents.
You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete buttons located between
the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or double-click a destination from the Global Database
box.
To give the panel access to all destinations in the database, click Assign All in the Destinations group. All
destinations are listed in the This Panel list box.
Adding a Destination to the Panel

To add a destination to the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign).
The destination is added to the panel list.
Removing a Destination from the Panel

To remove a destination from the panel, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the destination to the trash can (or click Delete).
The destination is removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, click Delete All. All destinations are removed from the panel list.
Determining Destinations Accessible to SB Models

The ABA(1)-SB allows control of one destination with four levels of breakaway. To select the destination
available to this panel, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
Figure 357: Edit Panel Dialog Box, Assignments Tab
The destination is assigned at the Destinations group on the left side of the dialog. The Global Database
list box displays all destinations available in the database. The This Panel list box displays the destination
currently assigned to the panel. To assign a destination to a panel, transfer the destination from the
Global Database box to the This Panel box, as shown in Removing a Destination from the Panel (on page
1029).
To add a destination to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box to the This Panel box,
as shown in Removing a Destination from the Panel (on page 1029).
You may add destinations to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete buttons located between
the Global Database box and the This Panel box, or double-click a destination from the Global Database
box.
To assign the destination, follow these steps:

1. Click the destination name in the Global Database list box.
2. Drag the destination to the This Panel list box (or click Assign).
The destination appears in the panel list.
Determining Destinations Accessible to AFV/MB Models

The ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB allows control of four destinations. Each is assigned to one of the four status
display windows on the panel. The source connected to the destination is displayed in the window.
To select the destinations available to this panel, click the Windows + Paging tab at the Edit Panel dialog
box. The destinations are assigned via the Controlled Destinations drop-down list box.
Figure 358: Edit Panel Dialog Box, Windows + Paging Tab
To assign the destinations on an ABA-AFV or ABA(1)-MB panel, follow these steps:

1. Click the status display window that is to be assigned to the destination.
2. Select the destination that is to be associated with this window by clicking on the arrow located to
the right of the drop-down list box. Scroll through the list of choices, and select the destination.
3. Enable the level(s) on that this destination should switch.
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel

The source select windows and their associated selection keys allow a user to select the source
connected to the current destination. A panel can be configured to have access to all sources in the
router database, or to only a limited subset of the sources.
To define the set of sources available to a panel, click the Assignments tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to below opens. (The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of
the panel being edited.)
Figure 359: Defining the Set of Sources Available to a Panel
Sources are assigned via the Sources group on the right side of the dialog box. The Global Database list
box displays all sources available in the database. The This Panel list box displays the sources currently
assigned to this panel. To assign sources to a panel, transfer the sources from the Global Database box
to the This Panel box.
You may sort the Assignments tab list boxes in alphabetical order (numeric, then A-Z) or logical order
(the order in which you assigned the sources and destinations).
Assigning Sources to a Panel

To add a source to the panel access list, drag it from the Global Database box and drop it in the This
Panel box, as shown in the second figure below.
When viewed on a VGA monitor, the Assign and Delete buttons may not contain text descriptions. See
Allowing Access to a Limited Set of Sources and Destinations (on page 1019) for the VGA equivalents.
You may add sources to the panel access list using the Assign and Delete buttons located between the
Global Database box and the This Panel box, or double-click a source from the Global Database box.
To give the panel access to all sources in the database, click Assign All in the Sources group. All sources
are listed in the panel list.
To add a source to the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the Global Database list box.
To assign a Source to a panel:

1. Select the Source from the Global Database list.
Figure 360: Adding a Source to a 1RU ABA Panel by Dragging and Dropping
To assign a source to a panel:

1. Select the source from the Global Database list.
Figure 361: Adding a Source to a 2RU ABA Panel by Dragging and Dropping
2. Drag (or double-click) the source to the This Panel list box (or click Assign). The source is added to
the panel list.
To remove a source from the panel access list, follow these steps:
1. Click the source name in the This Panel list box.
2. Drag the source to the trash can (or click Delete). The source is removed from the panel list.
To clear the panel access list, click Delete All. All sources are removed from the panel list.
Assigning a Category Key

On the ABA panels, sources and destinations can be selected via selecting either Category/Index or
Favorite Key category keys.
With category indexing, both a category (for example, VTR, CAM, and so forth) and an index (for
example, 21, 36, and so forth) are required to identify a device. The first press of a button selects the
category; the second and subsequent presses select the index. For example, to select AUX9, a user
would press the AUX button (the category), followed by the number 9 key (the index 9).
Figure 362: Selecting a Source via Category Indexing
To assign a category to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the Assignments tab.
2. A dialog box similar to that shown below opens.
Figure 363: Assigning a Category to a Selection Key
The Categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments dialog. The buttons at the
top of the dialog box correspond to the Selection keys on the ABA panels.
3. Select the category name from the Categories list box. The selected category is highlighted.
4. Drag the category name to the selection key, as shown above.
The selection key changes to reflect the new assignment.

Double-click a category in the Categories list box to assign the selected category to the first available
key.
To assign a category and an index to a selection key, follow these steps:

1. Click the selection key.
The Edit Button Function dialog box opens. (Category should be already selected in the Button
Function list box.)
2. From the Select Category list box, select the desired category name.
3. From the Select Index list box, select the index number.
4. Click Done to return to the Assignments tab.
Figure 364: Assigning a Category and an Index to a Selection Key
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors

If sources or destinations on the Assignments tab are highlighted in red (or if the Summary text
indicates that one or more sources/destinations are "inaccessible"), there is a potential problem with
the selection key assignments. Those sources and/or destinations that are in error (highlighted red) are
available from the control panel using the current selection key assignments. Here is an example of such
a problem and its possible resolution.
Assigning the “VTR”

category to a Selection
Key would remove problem by
providing access to
the VTR1, VTR2, ...
sources and destinations
Destinations and Sources that
cannot be addressed based on the
current selection key assignments
are highlighted in red
Summary Indicator appears

to notify user that there are
inaccessible destinations
or sources
Changing a Panel Definition

Panel definitions involve the following actions:
• Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol (on page 1037)
• Changing Protocols (on page 1039)
Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Protocol

The capability of editing Ethernet information is available for RCP-ABAe control panels only.
Click the Name, ID, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to produce the dialog box shown below. The
list boxes on the Name, ID, Style tab displays the current Panel Name, Panel ID and Panel Style settings.
The Version box displays the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the panel must
have been polled previously for the Version information to be correct).
Changes made to a panel’s definition do not take effect until the definition has been downloaded to the
physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking Download on the Edit Panel dialog box. To print
new key caps, click Print Key Caps.
Figure 365: Changing the Panel Name, ID, or Style
To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text box. Up to 15 characters
can be used. Typically, the Panel Name indicates where the panel is located (for example., Edit B, Master
Control, and so forth)
To change the panel ID, follow these steps:

1. Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices.
3. Select the new panel ID.
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed in the database, it must also be
changed on the physical panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to the
manual that was supplied with the panel).
To change the panel style, follow these steps:

3. Select the new panel style.
CAUTION
A panel style change initializes the current configuration to the default setting. All previous
modifications are lost.
To change a panel brand, follow these steps:

• If a "Harris" logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Harris radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris radio button.
• If a "Leitch" logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Leitch radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch radio button.
Changing Protocols
On RCP-ABAe panels, Navigator allows you to set some of the option values for a selected protocol. You
can also download IP addresses for a selected panel.
Setting Serial Port Option Values

1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
2. The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Serial Protocols tab.
Figure 366: Edit Protocols Dialog Box, Serial Protocols Tab
3. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
4. Assigned values for the default protocol’s baud rate, parity, data bits, stop bits, and serial interface
are displayed.
While all relevant protocol option values are displayed, some values may not be configurable. These
values are displayed for informational purposes only; you cannot change them through Navigator.
To change a value, follow these steps:
A drop-down menu opens (see below).
Figure 367: Changing Serial Protocol Option Values

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection appears in the Value
column.
d. Click OK to accept the changes and return to Edit Protocols dialog box.
5. Click OK to return to the Name ID, Styles tab, and then click OK again to accept the changes.
Setting Ethernet Port Option Values

1. At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.
The assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are
displayed.
Figure 368: Edit Protocols Dialog Box, Ethernet Protocols Tab
2. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit (or double-click the item selection).
The Options dialog box opens (see below).
The option values for the client or server selection are displayed.
Figure 369: Changing Ethernet Protocol Option Values
To change a value, follow these steps:
• If a drop-down menu opens, select the new value.
• If a drop-down list does not open, overwrite the existing value with the new value.
b. Click somewhere outside the Value column.
The new selection appears within the Value column.
c. Click OK to accept the changes and return to Edit Protocols dialog box, and then click OK again
to return to the Name ID, Styles tab.
Setting Network Information

At the Name, ID, Style tab, click Protocol... in the Ethernet Information box.
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Control Card tab.
Figure 370: Edit Protocols Dialog Box, Control Card Tab
The Control Card tab displays information about the resource module installed in the control panel. The
information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows system information for the control card on the left, and network and configuration
files setup on the right.
System Information
The Name field displays the control panel device name.
Network Information
used for the control panel. When you select the Current radio button, these settings are displayed,
but they are read-only.
the control panel. When you select the Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the control panel.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the control panel is attached.
 Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to which the control panel
belongs.
For changed network properties to be enabled, you must click Download IP Info.
A series of informational messages that inform you of the status of the download appear onscreen.
When all changes are complete, click OK to return to the Name, ID, Style tab, and then click OK again to
accept the changes.
System Information
• The Name field displays the control panel device name.
Network Information
used for the control panel. When you select the Current radio button, these settings are displayed,
but they are read-only.
the control panel. When you select the Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the control panel.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the control panel is attached.
 Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to which the control panel
belongs.
For changed network properties to be enabled, you must click Download IP Info.
A series of informational messages that inform you of the status of the download appear onscreen.
When all changes are complete, click OK to return to the Name, ID, Style tab, and then click OK again to
accept the changes.
Chapter 60
Configuring RCPp Panels

The RCPp series programmable panels are available in several different styles, and are customizable for
almost any system design. Panels are available in one- or two-rack units.
Models
1RU programmable panels are available in these configurations: 4×1, 4×4, 8×1, 8×8, 16×1, 16×1 LCD
(RCP-IDe only), 16×4, 16×8, 16×16, 32×1, 32×8, and 32×8CQp.
2RU programmable panels are available in these configurations: 16×16 LCD (RCP-IDe only), 32×1 LCD
(RCP-IDe only), 32×4, 32×32, 32×32 LCD (RCP-IDe only), 64×1, and 64×1 LCD (RCP-IDe only).
Configuration information for these control panels can be found in their respective installation and
operation manuals:
RCP-16PBRCP-16LCD
RCP-48PBRCP-32LCD
RCP-96PBRCP-64LCD
RCP-32PB-OLEDRCP-24LCD-OLED
RCP-64PB-OLEDRCP-48LCD-OLED
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog

Before configuring a programmable panel, you need to create a routing system and set up a logical
database. See Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems (on page 664) and Logical Database Setup (on
and then double-click on the panel selection.
The Edit Panel dialog box opens.
Figure 371: Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog Box
The LCD Display tab appears for RCP-ID control panels only.
• Use the Auxiliary Keys tab to configure the user-definable auxiliary keys.
• Use the Destinations tab to define the destinations available.
• Use the Sources tab to define the sources available.
• Use the Levels tab to define the levels affected.
• Use the Address, Style tab to change the panel name, ID, or panel style.
• Use the LCD Display tab to set up and edit LCD displays on RCP-IDe control panels.
Edit Button Function Dialog Box

Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the lock/protect feature.
The Edit Button Function dialog box is used to assign functions to user-definable selection keys on the
ABA and RCPp control panels. (Right-click the selection key to access the dialog.)
The Edit Button Function dialog box includes a drop-down list box that is used to select the function of
the selection key, and a Properties group that is used to define the specific parameters of the button.
The appearance of the Properties group depends on the type of button selected in the drop-down list
box. The functions available in the drop-down list depends on the type of panel being edited.
See Configuring Control Panel Buttons (on page 1153) for more detailed information about the
selections available with this dialog box and a list of button functions available for RCPp panels.
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys

All RCPp panels include two user-definable auxiliary keys. When a new panel is added, the auxiliary keys
are given default assignments (Enable and Lock). To change either assignment:
1. Select the Auxiliary Keys tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to the one shown in Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog (on page 1044) opens. The
actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the style of the panel being edited.
2. Click the button associated with the key you want to configure.
The Edit Button Function dialog box (see Edit Button Function Dialog Box (on page 1045)) opens. The
functions available in the drop-down list depend on the type of panel being edited. See Configuring
Control Panel Buttons (on page 1153) for more detailed information about the selections available with
this dialog box.
Defining the Destinations

To assign a destination select key, click the Destinations tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to the one in Destination Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32x8 CQ-X Panels
(on page 1047) (or Destination Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X Panels (on page 1048) for 32×8 CQ-X)
opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box depends on the configuration of the RCPp panel.
Destination Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32x8 CQ-X Panels
Destinations are assigned at the Logical Destinations group. The list box lists all destinations available in
the database. The button icon shows the key currently assigned to each destination.
Figure 373: Destinations Tab
Destination Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X Panels
Figure 374: Destinations Tab for 32×8 CQ-X Panel Only
The Destination Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default destination buttons defined as follows:
 Button 1: Cut
 Button 2: Crossfade
 Button 3: Cut fade
 Button 4: Fast
 Button 5: Timing alarm
 Button 6: V fade
 Button 7: Fade cut
 Button 8: Slow
See Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) (on page 953) for descriptions of transition types.
Assigning Selection Keys

To assign a destination to a selection key, drag the destination from the Logical Destinations group and
drop it on the desired key, as shown below.
To assign a Destination key:

1. Select the Destination from the panel list.
Figure 375: Assigning a Destination
You may also create a destination select key by using the Edit Button Function dialog box. See Creating a
Destination Select Key (on page 1156) for more information.

To delete a destination select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown below. The key is "greyed" to
indicate that it is unassigned.
To clear a selection key:

1. Select the key.
3. Drop it.
Figure 376: Clearing a Selection Key Assignment
Defining the Sources

To assign a source select key, click the Sources tab at the Edit Panel dialog box.
A dialog box similar to one of the ones shown below opens. The actual appearance of the dialog box
depends upon the configuration of the RCPp panel.
Figure 377: Sources Tab
Figure 378: Sources Tab for 32×8 CQ-S
Figure 379: Sources Tab for 32×8 CQ-X
Source Tab Assignments for all Panels Except 32x8 CQ-S and 32x8 CQ-X Panels
Sources are assigned at the Logical Sources group. The list box lists all sources available in the database.
The button icon shows the key currently assigned to each source.
Source Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-S Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-S panel has the default source buttons defined as follows:
 Buttons 1 to 16: Source Alarm buttons (Src1 to Src16)
 Button 26: Cut
 Button 27: Crossfade
 Button 28: V fade
 Button 29: Cut fade
 Button 30: Fade cut
 Button 31: Slow
 Button 32: Fast
See Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) (on page 953) for descriptions of transition types.
Source Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X Panels

The Source Tab of the 32×8 CQ-X panel has the default source buttons defined as follows:
• Button 1 to 16: Cross-point buttons (PGM1 for Src1 to Src16)
• Button 17 to 32: Cross-point buttons (PGM2 for Src1 to Src16)
Assigning Selection Keys

To assign a source to a selection key, drag the source from the Logical Sources group and drop it on the
desired key, as shown below.
To assign a Source key:

1. Select the Source from the Logical Sources list.
Figure 380: Assigning a Source by Dragging and Dropping
You may also create a source select key by using the Edit Button Function dialog box. See Creating a
Source Select Key (on page 1155) for more information.

To delete a source select key, drag it to the trash can, as shown below. The key is "greyed" to indicate
that it is unassigned.
To clear a selection key:

1. Select the key.
3. Drop it.
Figure 381: Clearing a Source Selection Key Assignment
Configuring the Levels Affected

The Levels tab specifies what levels are affected when sources are selected from the panel. If all levels
are enabled on the Levels tab, pressing a source select button on the panel affects all levels defined for
that source.
The levels setting can also be used to limit selection of sources to specific levels on the panel. For
example, a panel could be created with only the video level enabled. In this case, even if audio/video
sources were selected, only the video level would be switched.
To assign the levels for the panel, enable the levels by checking the appropriate check boxes. If a box is
checked, the level is enabled for this panel.
Figure 382: Assigning Levels for a Panel
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style

The first figure below shows this tab as it appears for a Harris- or Leitch-branded control panel. For all
other styles, Panel Brand selection is greyed out.
The second figure shows this tab as it appears for a Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panel.
For other panels, the "Associate with Frame" drop-down list box does not appear.
The third figure shows this tab as it appears for an IDe control panel. For other panels, the "Add or
Remove Pages," "Page Tools," "Ethernet Information," and "Grouping Mode" functions do not appear.
When Grouping Mode is enabled, four new tabs appear that allow the setup of Source and Destination
grouping. See Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only) (on page 1067) for
more information.
Click the Address, Style tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this tab.
Figure 383: Address, Style Tab
Figure 384: Address, Style Tab for Clean/Quiet Switch
Figure 385: Address, Style Tab for IDe Panels with Grouping Mode Enabled
• The list box on the Address, Style dialog box displays the current Panel Name.
• The two combo boxes display the Panel ID and Panel Style settings.
• The Panel Brand box displays the "branding" of the control panel.
• The Version box displays the hardware and software versions reported by the panel (the panel must
have been polled previously for the Version information to be correct).
• (For clean/quiet switch panels only) The Associate with Frame combo box displays the controlling and
monitoring Panacea P-SCQ or P-HSCQ frame associated with a corresponding Panacea clean
switch/quiet switch control panel.
• (For 32×32 and 64×1 IDe panels with a grouping license enabled) The Grouping Mode box displays the
Enable Grouping mode check box. Grouping mode is used for setting up Source and Destination
grouping functions, selecting options for groups, and previewing grouping settings.
Changing a Panel Name

To change the panel name, enter a descriptive name in the Panel Name text box. The descriptive name
may contain up to 15 characters. Typically, the Panel Name would indicate where the panel is located
(for example, Edit B, Master Control, and so forth).
Changing a Panel ID
3. Select the new panel ID.
The panel ID is the control panel’s physical address. If the ID is changed in the database, it must also be
changed on the physical panel (for information on changing the ID on the physical panel, refer to the
manual that was supplied with the panel).
Changing a Panel Style

Click the arrow located to the right of the drop-down list box.
2. Select the new panel style.
CAUTION
A panel style change initializes the current configuration to the default setting. All previous
modifications are lost.
Changing a Panel Brand

To change the panel brand, select the appropriate Panel Brand radio button.
• If a "Harris" logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Harris radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel after April 2007, select the Harris radio button.
• If a "Leitch" logo appears on the front of the control panel, select the Leitch radio button.
• If you purchased the control panel before April 2007, select the Leitch radio button.
CAUTION
If you set up alarms for your Harris-branded control panel, changing to a Leitch-branded
panel triggers a warning message:
If you click Yes, Navigator removes all alarm, source alarm, destination alarm, and parameter
buttons from the panel.
(For Panacea clean switch/quiet switch control panels only) To change the associated Panacea frame,
follow these steps:
3. Select the new frame to associate with the parametric buttons on this panel.
Enabling Changes to a Panel’s Definition

Changes made to a panel’s definition do not take effect until the definition has been downloaded to the
physical panel. Download the new settings by clicking Download on the Edit Panel dialog box (or refer to
Downloading Device Definitions (on page 693)). To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.
Setting Up Button Pages

Standard RCP-IDe control panels do not support button paging.
RCP-IDe LCD control panels support button paging, which allows you to select alternate button
definitions, or "pages," for the same control panel.This allows panels with a limited number or buttons
to provide a virtual panel of much greater size. You can add up to 20 pages to RCP-IDe LCD control
panels; page 1 is always the original, or default, setup.
Figure 386: Example of 16×1 Panel with Four Button Pages
In the example shown above, a 16×1 panel has been configured with 4 pages of buttons. To access the
additional pages, the operator presses the function buttons that have been reconfigured as "Page
Up/Page Down" keys. Pressing the "Page Up" key selects lower-numbered pages, while the "Page Down"
key selects higher numbered pages. When the highest- (or lowest-) numbered pages have been reached,
the selection "wraps" to the lowest- (or highest-) numbered page.
The paging information section appears on the Address, Style tab.
Figure 387: Paging Information
1. In the Number Pages spin box, enter the total number of pages (including the default first page) you
want to set up. For example, enter "4" in the Number Pages box if you want 3 pages in addition to
the default page.
When a panel has pages, each page requires a Page Up and a Page Down button. If you do not want
to use the auxiliary keys for these functions, you need to set up the Page Up/Down activity via the
Function Button function. See Configuring Control Panel Buttons (on page 1153) for more
information.
2. If you want the existing auxiliary keys to be reassigned to act as paging (page up and page down)
keys, click the Auxiliary Up/Down check box.
3. Click Apply.
4. Select the Destinations tab. In the lower right corner there is drop-down list box that allows you to
select whatever page you want to configure.
5. Define the Destinations for the appropriate pages. (See Defining the Destinations (on page 1047) for
instructions on how to define destinations.)
You can copy page definition information from one page to another. See step 8 for more
information.
6. Select the Sources tab. In the lower right corner there is a drop-down list box that allows you to
select whatever page you want to configure.
7. Define the Sources for the appropriate pages. (See Defining the Sources (on page 1050) for
instructions on how to define sources.)
You can copy page source information from one page to another. See step 8 for more information.
8. Select the Address, Style tab again. To copy information from one page to another:
a. Select the page you want to copy from (highlight the page number in the From box).
b. Select the page you want to copy to (highlight the page number in the To box).
c. Choose one of the following options:
• Click Sources to copy the source setup from one page to another. For an exact copy,
uncheck the Increment Sources check box; otherwise, Navigator automatically assigns the
other active sources in increasing numerical order.
• Click Destinations to copy the destination setup from one page to another. For an exact
copy, uncheck the Increment Dests check box; otherwise, Navigator automatically assigns
the other active destinations in increasing numerical order.
• Click Functions to copy the button function setup from one page to another.
• Click LCDs to copy the LCD button setup from one page to another.
• Click From Page Smart Apply to copy source, destination, function, and LCD setups from one
page to all of the other pages.
9. Enter the control panel IP address, gateway address, and subnet mask (address used to identify the
subnetwork to which the control panel belongs).
Monitoring Device Addresses

RCP-IDe panels allow you to monitor any specific serial devices or IP addresses to make sure the
associated device is still active. You can also enable an alarm condition to notify you when the
associated device is inactive (both auxiliary buttons blink simultaneously to indicate the "inactive" alarm
condition).
Serial Protocols
1. Click the Address, Style tab, and then click Protocols....
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens.
2. Select the Serial Protocols tab.
The assigned values for the selected serial port are displayed.
Figure 388: Edit Protocols – Serial Protocols Dialog Box
3. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit.
The Options dialog box opens (see below). The assigned options for the selected serial port are
displayed.
Figure 389: Serial Protocols Options Dialog Box
You can change some of the option’s values at this dialog box. To change a value:
Figure 390: Serial Protocols Options Dialog Box

c. Click somewhere outside the drop-down list box. The new selection appears in the Value
column.
d. Click OK to return to the Serial Protocols tab.
Ethernet Protocols
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens. If necessary, select the Ethernet Protocols tab.
2. The assigned values for the default server and client protocols for the selected Ethernet port are
displayed.
Figure 391: Edit Protocols – Ethernet Protocols Dialog Box
3. Highlight the target selection, and then click Edit.

The Options dialog box opens (see below). The assigned values for the default server and client
protocols for the selected Ethernet port are displayed.
Figure 392: Ethernet Protocols Options Dialog Box
You can change some of the option’s values at this dialog box. To change a value:
Figure 393: Changing a Protocol Option’s Value

d. Click OK to return to the Ethernet Protocols tab.
Setting Network Information

The Control Cards tab displays information about the control card installed in the RCP-IDe LCD control
panel. The information is updated on every Poll of the control system.
The dialog box shows the control card's network setup on the right.
The control card’s network properties are divided into two sections: Current and Programmed settings.
Figure 394: Current Settings
used for the panel. When you select the Current radio button, these settings are displayed, but they
are read-only.
Figure 395: Programmed Settings
the RCP-IDe. When you select the Programmed radio button, you can edit these settings.
 IP Address: Enter an IP address for the RCP-IDe.
 Gateway: Enter the address for the gateway to which the RCP-IDe is attached.
 Subnet Mask: Enter the address used to identify the subnetwork to which the RCP-IDe belongs.
Activating a Group License (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1 Panels Only)

At the License Tab, you can activate the grouping licenses. You must activate the firmware if you
ordered it separately from your original product purchase. If you ordered the grouping license at the
same time as your original product purchase, it is factory-installed and you do not need to activate it.
Before you activate the Grouping license, make sure you have obtained an appropriate license activation
code. Provide the Customer Service representative with the serial number of your product.
The Edit Protocols dialog box opens.
2. Select the License tab.
Navigator attempts to retrieve the serial number for the 32×32 or 64×1 RCP-IDe control panel. If the
serial number is found, it is displayed in the Serial Number box. If the serial number is not found,
"Unknown" is displayed in the Serial Number box.
3. From the Export Communication group box, you can select how to transfer the license key to the
frame.
 Select XY File Transfer to export the file by X-Y transfer (based on Navigator’s serial or TCP/IP
 Select FTP to export the file by traditional File Transfer Protocol. (Log in before the file transfer
is initiated.)
4. In the License Key field, enter the appropriate license activation code you received from your
Customer Service representative (see note).
5. Select the Reboot after Update check box to reboot the frame immediately after the Update button
is clicked.
When you click Update, the frame reboots after the file is transmitted. A frame must be rebooted
before the Grouping license is recognized.
If you do not select Reboot after Update, the file is transmitted but the frame is not automatically
rebooted.
Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 and 64x1

Panels Only)
Grouping is a form of category indexing that allows multiple sources and/or destinations to be grouped
together to act as categories and indexes. (See Defining Category Indexing (on page 789) for a more in-
depth explanation of categories and indexes.) When grouping is enabled, a series of tabs appear to allow
you to select grouping sources, destinations, and options; and provide a preview of how the final
grouping LCD display will appear as a result of your choices.
1. Select the Address, Style tab, and then click the Enable Grouping Mode check box.
When Grouping Mode is enabled, an information message appears to remind you of firmware and
licensing requirements.
A series of new tabs appear: Source Grouping, Destination Grouping, Grouping Options, and Grouping
Preview.
Figure 397: Grouping Selection Tabs Enabled
Creating groups involves adding and naming a group (both source and destination), assigning sources or
destinations to a group, and selecting miscellaneous options to assign to each group. The way groups
are named has no bearing on what items can be put under a group. However, if you want the grouping
to follow your already existing category functions, you can use the Reset to Default button to help you
there.
Setting Up Source Groups

To access the Source Grouping function, enable Grouping Mode (if necessary) at the Address, Style tab,
and then select the Source Grouping tab.
Figure 398: Source Grouping Tab
On the left side of the dialog box is the Source Grouping box. It displays a list all of the currently
available source groups and the sources currently assigned to each group. (The default group [Src]
contains your categories that have sources and the sources that are under it. The default group always
appears, but you can change the default group name to something more useful.)
group assignments disappear but the group name still appears in the Source Grouping box and a "+"
The buttons to the right of the Source Grouping list allow you to perform group administration
functions.
• New Group: Use the New Group button to create a new source group under the current selected
Group Node.
• Delete: Use the Delete button to delete a source group, or to delete an individual source from a
group.
• Rename Group: Use the Rename Group button to change the name of an existing group.
• Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a group (or an individual source within a group) up the
assignment list.
• Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a group (or an individual source within a group)
down the assignment list.
Assignment list placement affects the order in which source group buttons are displayed on the
control panel.
• Reset to Default: Use the Reset to Default button to restore the original name and assignments to a
group based on the original source category definitions.
On the right side of the dialog box is the Available Sources box. It displays all of the sources available for
assignment to a group.
Use the Assign Selected Source(s) button at the bottom of the Available Sources box to assign one or
more sources to a selected group. You may also assign a source to more than one group.
You can view the Grouping Preview tab at any time during the process to see the results of any
selections you make. See Previewing Grouping Setups (on page 1076) for more information.
Adding a Group
1. Highlight the ROOT directory name, and then click the New Group button on the Source Grouping
tab.
A group entry with the title New Group appears.
2. Enter a name for the group being added, and then press the Enter key.
3. If desired, move the new group up the assignment list, highlight the group name, and then click the
Move Up button.
The Move Up button moves the group up one level at a time.
4. Assign sources to the new group.
5. When finished, do one of the following:
 Set up Destination groups as described starting on Setting Up Destination Groups (on page
1072).
 Click OK to save the selection.
You can nest new groups within other groups. To nest a group within another group, highlight the
appropriate group name, and then click the New Group button.
Assigning Sources to a Group

1. In the Source Grouping box, select the name of the group to which the sources will be assigned.
2. In the Available Sources box, select the source entry to be assigned to the group. Use standard
Windows selection techniques to select multiple sources.
To deselect an entry, click on it a second time. Use standard Windows selection techniques to
deselect multiple entries.
3. Click the Assigned Selected Source(s) button to add the sources to the selected group.
An individual source may be assigned to multiple groups.
Renaming a Group
Highlight the appropriate group name in the Source Grouping box.
1. Click the Rename Group button, and then enter a new name for the group.
2. Press the Enter key to accept the change.
Deleting a Group
To delete a group, highlight the appropriate group name in the Source Grouping box, and then click the
Delete button.
The selection is removed from the Source Grouping box.
Deleting Sources from a Group

To delete source entries from a group, highlight the appropriate source assignment in the Source
Grouping box, and then click the Delete button.
The source assignment is removed from the Source Grouping box.

Deleting a source assignment from a group does not delete the source from the Available Sources box.
Setting Up Destination Groups

When you have set up all of the desired source groups, select the Destinations Grouping tab.
On the left side of the dialog box is the Destination Grouping box. It displays a list all of the currently
available destination groups and the destinations currently assigned to each group. (The default group
[Dst] contains your categories that have destinations and the destinations that are under it. The default
group always appears, but you can change the default group name to something more useful.)
group assignments disappear but the group name still appears in the destination Grouping box and a "+"
The buttons to the right of the Destination Grouping list allow you to perform group administration
functions.
• New Group: Use the New Group button to create a new destination group.
• Delete: Use the Delete button to delete a destination group, or to delete an individual destination
from a group.
• Rename Group: Use the Rename Group button to change the name of an existing group.
• Move Up: Use the Move Up button to move a group (or an individual destination within a group) up
the assignment list.
• Move Down: Use the Move Down button to move a group (or an individual destination within a
group) down the assignment list.
Assignment list placement affects the order in which destination buttons are displayed on the
control panel.
• Reset to Default: Use the Reset to Default button to restore the original name and assignments to a
group based on the original destination category definition.
On the right side of the dialog box is the Available Destinations box. It displays all of the destinations
available for assignment to a group.
Use the Assign Selected Destination(s) button at the bottom of the Available Destinations box to assign
one or more destinations to a selected group. You may also assign a destination to more than one
group.
You can view the Grouping Preview tab at any time during the process to see the results of any
selections you make. See Previewing Grouping Setups (on page 1076) for more information.
Adding a Group
1. Highlight the ROOT directory name5 , and then click the New Group button on the Destination
Grouping tab.
A group entry with the title New Group appears.
2. Enter a name for the group being added, and then press Enter.
3. If desired, move the new group up the assignment list, highlight the group name, and then click the
Move Up button.
The Move Up button moves the group up one level at a time.
4. Assign sources to the new group.
5. When finished, do one of the following:
 Set up group options as described starting on Setting Up Group Options (on page 1074).
 Click OK to save the selection.
Assigning Destinations to a Group

1. In the Destination Grouping box, select the name of the group to which the destinations will be
assigned.
2. In the Available Destinations box, select the destination entry to be assigned to the group. Use
standard Windows selection techniques to select multiple destinations.
To deselect an entry, click on it a second time. Use standard Windows selection techniques to
deselect multiple entries.
3. Click the Assigned Selected Destination(s) button to add the destination to the selected group.
An individual destination may be assigned to multiple groups.
Renaming a Group
1. Highlight the appropriate group name in the Destination Grouping box.
2. Click the Rename Group button, and then enter a new name for the group.
3. Press Enter to accept the change.
Deleting a Group
To delete a group, highlight the appropriate group name in the Destination Grouping box, and then click
the Delete button.
The selection is removed from the Destination Grouping box.
Deleting Destinations from a Group

To delete destination entries from a group, highlight the appropriate destination assignment in the
Destination Grouping box, and then click the Delete button.
The destination assignment is removed from the Destination Grouping box.

Deleting a destination assignment from a group does not delete the destination from the Available
Destinations box.
Setting Up Group Options

When you have chosen all destinations to group, select the Grouping Options tab.
Figure 399: Grouping Options Tab
By default, the miscellaneous options for control panel button displays are selected. These buttons
function like favorite destinations for easy accessibility and notification.
• The Enable Panel for Multi Bus Operation option allows the operation of a control panel that
simultaneously provides control and status of selected destinations. (See Previewing Grouping Setups
(on page 1076) for an example.)
Select the check box to the left of this option to enable the option. When this option is enabled, the
Available Destinations and Selection Destination boxes become active.
 Available Destinations are those destinations that are available for selection and display. In
Grouping mode, you can watch a maximum of 13 destinations at a time.
 Selected Destinations are those destinations that already have been selected for display.
Use the < and > buttons to move destination selections between the Available and Selected boxes.
Use standard Windows selection techniques to move multiple destinations.
• The Enable Level Breakaway Button on Panel option allows the display of the level breakaway button
option on the control panel. (See Previewing Grouping Setups (on page 1076) for an example.) This
option display appears in both Source Select Mode and Destination Selection Mode on the Grouping
Preview tab. These level breakaway buttons show the current status for the selected destination on
their level, and allow you to easily perform breakaway operations.
Select the check box to the left of this option to enable the option.
• The Enable Take Button on Grouping Panel option allows the display of the Take button on the
control panel. (See Previewing Grouping Setups (on page 1076) for an example.) This option display
appears in both Source Select Mode and Destination Selection Mode on the Grouping Preview tab. If
the Take button is enabled, the panel functions like a preview panel and forces the user to press the
Take button to execute a crosspoint. When this option is disabled, the user selecting a source button
will execute a crosspoint.
• The Auto-Boot into Panel Grouping Mode option enables a control panel to automatically enter
Panel Grouping Mode whenever the panel is powered up. If this option is enabled, the user cannot
enter Grouping mode on their panel, and then go back to regular operation mode. If this option is
disabled, the user must press a special Grouping mode button to enter this mode.
When finished, click OK to save the selection.
Previewing Grouping Setups

The Grouping Preview tab provides a quick view of how the control panel will appear with the selected
setup information from the Source Grouping, Destination Grouping, and Grouping Options tabs. It
shows a different display based on the chosen preview mode and any check boxes enabled at the
Grouping Options tab. See below for examples of appearance.
Figure 400: Grouping Preview Tab
Figure 401: Grouping Preview Tab in Source Select Mode
Figure 402: Grouping Preview Tab in Destination Select Mode
Editing LCD Button Displays (RCP-IDe Panels Only)

Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog box to bring up this tab. A series of tabbed dialog boxes
allow you to add or edit text, add or change button icon displays, and change active or inactive button
display brightness.
The default button setup is

• Text displayed
• Default Font
• Icon not displayed
• Color display green
• Color intensity brightest
Figure 403: Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab
Setting Up Button Text

Navigator allows you to customize your LCD buttons with different text information. You can format the
text in terms of font type, font size, and font features (bold, italics, underline), as well as align text
within a button. You can display text in conjunction with, or instead of, icon display information.
This function does not have an Undo feature. To return to the original settings you must select Cancel.
Adding Text
The Button Definition box to the right of the Text tab shows how the selected button was originally
configured. This option is provided as a quick reference, so that you do not have to refer back to another
tab to see its original configuration.
1. Click an LCD button to which you want to add text.
2. The Show Text check box is selected, so that you can display the default or new text as well as an
image. (If you want display an image as well as text, you also have to set up the image via the Icon
tab. See Setting Up Button Images (on page 1081) for more information.)
If you want to display an image only, uncheck this box.
3. Click OB to provide an opaque background between the text and any image displayed. The button
stays depressed when this feature is on.
4. To use the default text entries, leave the Use Default Text box checked. Navigator displays the text
assigned via the logical source or logical destination setup. See Assigning and Editing Names (on
page 761) for information on how to name logical sources. See Assigning and Editing Names (on
page 774) for information on how to name logical destinations.
5. To insert customized text
a. Uncheck the Use Default Text box.

b. Enter any combination of up to eight letters and/or numbers in the Line 1 box. If desired, enter
any combination of up to eight letters and/or numbers in the Line 2 box.
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each LCD button to which you want to add text.
7. Set up the text characteristics for each LCD button.
Setting Up Text Characteristics for Individual Buttons

1. Click an LCD button that you want to configure.
2. Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (that is, Bold, Italic, Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you cannot modify its text size or other
features.
3. Click Center Text to align the button text in the center of the button. The button stays depressed
when this feature is on.
The Align Text feature is especially useful when you want to align text within an image.
You can also manually align text within a button (for example, you can move the text below a button
image). The arrow keys to the right of the Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to move text within a
button. You can move the text up, down, right, or left. If you would rather align text manually, make
sure the Center Text button is off, and then use the arrow keys to manipulate text locations.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for each LCD button you want to configure.
5. When you have completed your configurations, select from among these options:
 Configure button images (see Setting Up Button Images (on page 1081))
 Configure inactive and active button colors (see Setting Up Button Colors (on page 1082))
 Download configuration information (see Finishing (on page 1084))
Setting Up Text Characteristics for Multiple Buttons

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or <Ctrl> keys to select
multiple devices), select the other buttons that you want to configure.
3. Choose the desired font type, font size, and font features (that is, Bold, Italic, Underline).
Please note that, if you use our recommended default font, you cannot modify the text type, size, or
other features.
4. Click Center Text to align the button text in the center of the button. The button stays depressed
when this feature is on.
The Align Text feature is especially useful when you want to align text within an image.
You can also manually align text within multiple several buttons at once (for example, you can move
the text below a button image). The arrow keys to the right of the Line 1/Line 2 boxes allow you to
move text within a button. You can move the text up, down, right, or left. If you would rather align
text manually, make sure the Center Text button is off, and then use the arrow keys to manipulate
text locations.
Setting Up Button Images

Navigator allows you to customize your LCD buttons with different images, or icons. You can display
icons in conjunction with, or instead of, text display information. You can use the default icons, or you
can add customized icons.
Setting Up Images for Individual Buttons

1. If necessary, click on the Icon tab.
Figure 404: LCD Icons Tab
The Button Definition box to the right of the Icon tab how the selected button was originally
configured. This option is provided as a quick reference, so that you do not have to refer back to
another tab to see its original configuration.
2. Click an LCD button to which you want to add an image.
3. Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
4. To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box checked.
5. To insert a different icon
a. Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b. Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
6. The icon appears in the center of the LCD button. Move the Icon Size slider to the left to decrease
icon size, and to the right to increase icon size. The increased/decreased (in percentage of original
size) size appears in the Icon Size box.
7. If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show Text check box).
8. If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to the left of the drop-down list box
allows you to move an image up, down, left, or right within a button.
9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 for each LCD button to which you want to add an image.
 Configure button text (see Setting Up Button Text (on page 1079))
Setting Up Identical Images for Multiple Buttons

Navigator allows you to simultaneously customize several LCD buttons with the same image and image
characteristics.
1. Click the first LCD button that you want to set up.
multiple devices), select the other buttons that you want to set up.
3. Click the Show Icon check box to display an image on a button.
4. To use the default icon entries, leave the Use Default Icon box checked.
5. To insert a different icon
a. Uncheck the Use Default Icon box.
b. Click the icon you want from the drop-down icon list box.
6. The icon appears in the center of the LCD button. Move the Icon Size slider to the left to decrease
icon size, and to the right to increase icon size. The increased/decreased (in percentage of original
size) size appears in the Icon Size box.
7. If desired, turn off the image text (at the Text tab, unclick the Show Text check box).
8. If necessary, align the image within the button. The arrow keys to the left of the drop-down list box
allows you to move an image up, down, left, or right within a button.
Setting Up Button Colors

Navigator allows you to customize your LCD buttons with different shades of three colors: green, red, or
amber. You can assign one color to all of the LCD buttons, or assign different colors to individual
buttons. In addition, you can adjust the color intensity for active and inactive display.
Setting Up Colors for Individual Buttons

1. Click the first LCD button that you want to configure.
2. If necessary, click on the Color tab.
Figure 405: LCD Display Color Tab
3. (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box. An example of how buttons look
with a new color assignment appears in the Inactive Preview box.
4. (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from the drop-down list box. Intensity
settings range from 1 (darkest) to 15 (brightest).
5. (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the drop-down list box. Intensity
6. Click the next LCD button that you want to configure, and select its colors, as explained in steps 3
through 6.
Setting Up Colors for Multiple Buttons

1. If necessary, click on the Color tab.
2. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the other buttons that you want to configure.
3. (If desired) Select the color you want from the drop-down list box. An example of how buttons look
with a new color assignment appears in the Inactive Preview box.
4. (If desired) Select a different inactive color intensity setting from the drop-down list box. Intensity
5. (If desired) Select a different active color intensity setting from the drop-down list box. Intensity
6. If you want the selected color and intensities to be assigned to all of the LCD buttons on the panel,
click Apply to All. (The selected color and intensities are assigned to all of the LCD buttons on the
panel, not just the selected buttons.)
Finishing
1. Click Download to download all device configuration information (for example, changes to sources
and destinations), as well as the LCD display characteristics, to the RCP-IDe panel.
OR
Click Update LCD Display to download the LCD display characteristics only to the RCP-IDe panel
Controlling Backlight Intensity

In most cases, you do not need to adjust the contrast on your control panel buttons. As your RCP-ID
control panel ages, however, the degree of difference between the lightest and darkest areas on a a
button may fade. In such a case, you should adjust the Contrast.
CAUTION
Adjusting the backlight intensity too often causes the LCDs to burn out prematurely.
Click the LCD Display tab at the Edit Panel dialog to bring up this tab.
Figure 406: Edit Panel Dialog Box, LCD Display Tab
Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys

1. Click on the auxiliary key for which you want to change the intensity.
The Text, Icon, and Color tabs display disappear and the Brightness box opens.
2. Click on the drop-down arrow for the button state (active or inactive) you want to change. A series
of color gradation samples opens.
Figure 407: Adjusting Color Intensity for Auxiliary Keys
3. Click the color intensity you want. That color appears in the button state brightness display box.
Changing Intensity for Panel Keys

1. Click on the Panel button on the lower left side of the LCD Display tab.
The Text, Icon, and Color tabs display disappear and the Panel LCD Contrast box opens.
Figure 408: LCD Contrast
2. In the Panel LCD Contrast box, move the Brightness slider.

 Move the slider to the left for greater backlight intensity.
 Move the slider to the right for less backlight intensity.
 Click Restore Default to restore the panel’s original backlight intensity.
Chapter 61
Configuring the Web Router Application

The optional web router application uses standard web browsers to perform certain control panel
functions for Panacea routers and Edge protocol gateways that have an enhanced resource module
installed. The enabling software is purchased as a separate flash module; to become operable, it
requires the presence of an enhanced resource module.
The web router application flash module is available for retrofit into non-web enabled Panacea or Edge
frames. Web-enabled frames have the flash module already installed.
Only P-RES-H (version 3.16 or higher) modules with licensed web protocols support the web router
application download properly.
Adding Web Router Application Devices

If you have a Panacea or Edge device already set up in a database, you do not need to re-add it. You can
access the Web Panels and Web Users tabs via the device’s Edit function.
To successfully use the web router application, an Ethernet connection is required between a Panacea
or Edge device and a PC running Navigator. The web router application does not operate via a serial
connection. Before you can configure web panels or add web users, you must add either a Panacea
router or an Edge protocol gateway device.
• For information about adding a Panacea router configuration, see Configuring Panacea Frames (on
page 917).
• For information about adding an Edge configuration, see Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways (on
page 992).
Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users

After you save any additions or changes to web panel or user information, you must perform a
download. When a download is performed, a file containing the user information is downloaded, along
with the other PWeb files, to the web-enabled frame. This file overwrites the file that is already resident
on the frame. If you do not want to overwrite existing information, poll the appropriate web-enabled
device BEFORE making any additions or changes. When you poll a web-enabled device, Navigator
merges the information from the frame with corresponding information (if any) currently listed in
Navigator. One of these scenarios takes place:
• If a user exists on the frame and in the Navigator list, the poll updates user information in Navigator
with the values from the frame.
• If a user exists on the frame but does not exist in the Navigator list, the user information is added to
Navigator. An asterisk in front of the user name signifies the user information is from the frame.
• If a user is deleted from the frame but is still listed in Navigator, that user is deleted from Navigator.
Configuring Web Panels

The web router application allows you to set up virtual (or "web") panels that have the same
characteristics as equivalent Imagine Communications hardware panels (see Configuring the Web
Router Application (on page 1087) for a list of panel styles). These web panels can be customized to
allow the system administrator to control the types of functions available to individual web users. For
example, the system administrator can assign different access rights, accessible levels, destination
offsets, destinations, and sources, to two different users of the same panel.
Figure 409: Web Panels Tab for Panacea Products
Figure 410: Web Panels Tab for Edge Products
Make sure you review the information provided in Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users (on
page 1087) before you perform any of these functions.
At the Web Panels tab, you can add different web panel styles, delete existing panels, select a default
panel, and change the configuration of an existing panel. You can add these panel styles:
• Pushbutton panels (a pushbutton panel is similar to a programmable panel)
 16×1
 16×4
 16×8
 16×16
 32×1
 32×4
 32×8
 32×16
 32×32
• Alphanumeric breakaway panels
 Index
Adding Pushbutton Panels

1. Choose one of the following:
 If you are adding web panels for Edge Web, add an Edge, and then select the Web Panels tab.
 If you are adding web panels for Panacea Web, double-click the appropriate Panacea frame at
the Navigation pane, and then select the Web Panels tab.
2. At the Web Panels tab, click Add.
The Panel Styles drop-down list box opens.
Figure 411: Panel Styles Drop-Down List Box
3. Select the panel style you want from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The Push Panel Configuration tab opens. If necessary, select the Destinations tab.
Figure 412: Pushbutton Panel Configuration Destinations Tab
4. Enter a unique name in the Configuration Name box. (This name also appears in the Configuration
Name box on the Web Panels tab). Using unique configuration names, you can set up multiple
panels of the same style (for example, several 16×1 or index panels), but with different
configurations, panel IDs, and/or assigned users.
5. Enter a unique panel ID number for this web panel configuration. This panel ID is used to identify
the panel type and specialized configuration you assign; you also use this panel ID to assign
specialized panel configurations to specific users (see Adding Users (on page 1096)).
6. Assign the logical destination(s) to the desired button(s). You can drag and drop a destination from
the Logical Destinations list to any of the buttons to make an assignment.
To remove a logical destination assignment, drag and drop the selected button to the Delete bin.
After you download the panel configuration, the destinations assigned to the DEST buttons can be
viewed on the appropriate push panel configurations in the web router application.
7. When destination assignments are complete, select the Sources tab.
Figure 413: Pushbutton Panel Configuration Sources Tab
8. Assign the logical source(s) to the desired Source Select Key button(s). You can drag and drop a
source from the Logical Sources list to any buttons to make an assignment.
To remove a logical source assignment, drag and drop the selected button to the Delete bin.
After you download the panel configuration, the destinations assigned to the Source Select Key
buttons can be viewed on the appropriate push panel configurations in the web router application.
9. When all source assignments are complete, select the Levels tab.
Figure 414: Push Panel Configuration Levels Tab
10. Enable the levels by checking the appropriate check boxes. If a box is checked, the level is enabled
for this panel. (To disable a level, click the check box; the check mark disappears and the level is
disabled.)
11. When all level assignments are complete, click OK to return the Web Panels tab.
12. Click OK to accept all changes.
13. Click the Save icon (or press <Ctrl> S) to save the changes to the database.
14. Click Download to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device firmware.
Adding Index Panels

1. Click Add.
The Panel Styles drop-down list box opens.
2. Select the Index panel style from the drop-down list, and then click OK.
The Index Panel Configuration tab opens. If necessary, select the Assignments tab.
Figure 415: Index Panel Configuration Assignments Tab
3. Enter a unique name in the Configuration Name box. (This name also appears in the Configuration
Name box on the Web Panels tab). Using unique configuration names, you can set up multiple
panels of the same style (for example, several 16×1 or index panels), but with different
configurations and/or assigned users.
4. Enter a unique panel ID number for this web panel configuration. This panel ID is used to identify
the panel type and specialized configuration you assign; you also use this panel ID to assign
specialized panel configurations to specific users (see Adding Users (on page 1096)).
5. The top row of Index buttons on the dialog box correspond to the top two rows of selection keys on
a virtual index panel appearing in the web router application. The bottom row of Index buttons on
the dialog box correspond to the bottom two rows of selection keys on a virtual index panel
appearing in the web router application. After you download the panel configuration, the category
designators assigned to the Index buttons appear on the index panel selection keys of the web
router application.
At the Assignments tab you can assign the logical sources and destinations for the panel to control,
and what categories/indices are displayed on the web virtual panel’s buttons.
 When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in alphabetical order, the
Assignments tab displays these lists in numeric-alphabetic order.
 When the Global Database and This Panel list boxes are sorted in logical order, the
Assignments tab displays these lists in the order in which you first assigned the sources and
destinations.
multiple devices), select the desired destinations from the Global Database list box in the
Destinations group, and then click Assign.
The selected destination assignments appear in the This Panel list box.
7. Using standard Windows selection techniques, select the desired sources from the Global Database
list box in the Sources group, and then click Assign.
The selected source assignments appear in the This Panel list box.
8. The Categories group is located on the far right side of the Assignments dialog box. The Global
Database list includes all of the categories set up for the selected panel type. Select the category
name from the Categories list box, and then drag the category name to the selection key.
The selection key changes to reflect the new assignment.
9. When all assignments are complete, click the Windows & Pages tab. To display and control more
levels than would normally be available on a panel, multiple pages can be created, each with a
different definition. You can assign up to four windows to a page; and each window can have a
different assigned level.
Figure 416: Index Panel Configuration Windows & Pages Tab
After you download the panel configuration

 Window assignments are associated with the desired pages.
 Window and page assignments appear on the index panel selection window buttons of the web
router application.
To add a page and corresponding windows:
a. Click Add to create a blank page.
b. Select the newly-added page, and then, from the drop-down list box to the right of the Windows
list, assign levels to the page’s windows.
c. Click Apply Changes to apply the changes to the selected page.
To delete a page and corresponding windows, select the page you want to delete (or, use standard
Windows selection techniques) and click Delete.
The selected page(s) and associated window assignments are removed.

10. When all windows and pages assignments are complete, click OK to return to the Web Panels tab.
Setting Up Web Users
Figure 417: Web Users Tab for Panacea Configurations
Figure 418: Web Users Tab for Edge Configurations
Make sure you review the information provided in Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users (on
page 1087) before you perform any of these functions.
At the Web Users tab, you can

• Add users
• Edit existing user information
• Delete users
• Assign specific panel configurations to available users
Adding Users
1. If necessary, navigate to the Web Users tab, and then click Add.
The Add PWeb User dialog box opens.
Figure 419: Add PWeb User Dialog Box

 Username: Add the desired user name here. The name should be no more than 20
alphanumeric characters and should not include special characters, spaces, or non-printing
characters.
Special characters include the following:
/ \ // \\ , ~ . ! ? { } [ ] | % # @ * & ^ ` = + < > ; : $ ( )
 Password: Add the desired password for the assigned user name here. The password should be
no more than 20 alphanumeric characters and should not include spaces or non-printing
characters. Passwords can include special characters so as to make the password more secure.
 Confirm: Re-enter the same information as you entered it in the Password field.
 Idle Timeout: Assign the number of minutes to wait before an assigned user is logged out when
no screen activity is going on. Numeric values range from 0 (disable timeout) to 43200 minutes
(30 days). The default value is 60 minutes.
 User Group: Assign the appropriate group access for the assigned user. User groups may also
allow limited administration rights as set up by the system administrator. A user can belong to
the Admin (group 1), User (group 2), or one of 256 user-definable groups.
For users that also function as system administrators, assign Group 1.
 Panel ID: Enter the panel ID for the specific panel configuration that you want to assign to this
particular user. (Panel IDs and their corresponding configurations are set up at the Panel
Configuration tab. For pushbutton panels, see Adding Pushbutton Panels (on page 1089). For
index panels, see Adding Index Panels (on page 1092).)
To enable this selection, click the check box next to "Use a specific Panel ID for this user."
3. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the Web Users dialog box.
The name you added appears in the Available Users box.
4. Select the user name you just added, and then select the desired configurations from the
appropriate Assigned Configurations drop-down list boxes.
7. Click Download to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device firmware. After you
download the information, the users are able to access their assigned configurations via the Web
Router application.
The download directs Navigator to overwrite any user information that is already resident on the frame.
See Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or Users (on page 1087) for instructions on what to do if
you want to avoid overwriting existing information.
Assigning Configurations
1. If you haven’t already done so, set up the web panel configurations via the Web Panels tab (or add
the configurations via the Web Router application).
2. If you have not already done so, add the user’s name to the Available Users list (or add the user’s
name via the Web Router application).
3. At the Web Users tab, select the appropriate user name, and then select the desired configuration
from the appropriate Assigned Configurations drop-down list boxes.
6. Click Download to send the changes to the appropriate web-enabled device firmware. After you
download the information, the users are able to access their assigned configurations via the Web
Router application.
Editing User Information

1. At the Web Users tab, highlight the user name for which you wish to change information, and then
click Edit.
The Edit PWeb User dialog box opens.
The Username field is greyed out, which indicates that you cannot change the user name.
1. Change one or more of the remaining fields as described in Adding Users (on page 1096). If you
change a user’s password, you need to make the same change in the Confirm field as well.
2. Click OK to accept all changes and return to the Web Users dialog box.
4. Click Download to send the changes to the database and to the appropriate web-enabled device
firmware.
Deleting Users
1. Select the user’s name from the Available Users list, and then click Delete. The selected user is
removed from the list.
you want to avoid overwriting existing information
Chapter 62
Configuring IP3
The IP3 controller is initially configured with Magellan CCS Navigator prior to routing control using their
silverlight web tools.
An IP3 routing system can route across its own levels, but can also interoperate with other systems that
use Levels to accept routing requests and to describe what was routed (status).
Status names and their grouping into Device Types, are tightly linked with attributes associated with the
components of each source/destination in the Attribute-Based Routing Execution (ABRE) engine inside
IP3. It is also tied into reporting of status back into legacy protocols (such as XY).
An IP3 router can be left at the default of 16 levels, or it can be configured with 64 levels. See Selecting
Connection Types (on page 836) for details. Levels should be named appropriately, and organized in the
Device Types wizard to create device types for use in the IP3 database tools.
The IP3 Flat Matrix Editor is a tool used for defining the IP3 routing system logical database. As the
name suggests, the matrix created here is flat, with the ability to route across levels freely. It can be
launched only from Navigator.
Navigator’s Database Editor (or DB Editor) is a tool which, among other functionality, creates Device
Types. Device types can be created in Navigator even if the router offline. Device types have to be
consistent across an entire routing system.
With IP3 routing system configuration, it is MANDATORY to use Device Types as the basis for each
logical source and destination. Defining them well and with consistent nomenclature is critical because
the attributes of the sources and destinations that drive the routing behavior come from the definition
of the Device Type.
The IP3Controller can not be configured or controlled if the Navigator computer has Windows 7
Operating system and User Access Control (UAS) is set to high or medium. From the Start menu,
choose Control Panel > User Accounts > Change User Account Control Settings and set the slider to
Low.
IP3 Controller Initial Configuration

The Controller runs on a separate device provided by Imagine Communications. The controller can also
be connected to by going to the controller device, launching a browser, and accessing http://127.0.0.1.
Here, you can discover IP3 routing system frames and elements such as frame devices, IP3 modules, and
crosspoints. You can detect the type of card/module in a slot and then determine available
channels/ports. You can configure elements such as the IP address and Gateway on discovered devices.
You can see this information in Navigator.
Preparing to Connect an IP3 Controller to a CCS Network

Prior to configuring IP3 in Navigator, you should configure IP addresses and network settings for the
Ethernet ports. You should add at least one frame to your IP3 routing system and label the frames.
To configure the IP3, connect directly to it using a keyboard and mouse.

1. From the console of the IP3 Controller, launch a Web Browser and connect to the IP3 Controller at
127.0.0.1 (the universal IP address for "this computer").
If you are prompted to add frames, click No.
2. Click Configure System > Manage IP3 Controller Settings > Network & Redundancy > Network
Settings.
A dialog box similar to the following appears.
Figure 420: Addresses and Network Parameters for All Ethernet Ports on IP3 Controller
ENET1—ENET4 communicate with devices separate from the IP3 system, and ENET5 and ENET6
connect with PX-RES devices within IP3 frames. Navigator normally communicates on ENET1. All six
Ethernet connections must be enabled and have IP addresses assigned, even if they are not in use.
For best results, assign unused ports to an unused subnet on your network and leave them
physically unconnected.
3. To edit a row, click on a port on the left.
The panel at the right updates with that port’s information.
4. Edit the information in the right pane.
5. When all ports have been defined, click Set, and then Close and System Configuration.
6. Click Hardware Foundry and then Add Devices to add your IP3 frame.
The following dialog box opens:
Figure 421: Add Devices to an IP3 System
7. Enter the IP address of the PX-RES (its default is 192.168.100.250), and provide a name in the Label
field.
The name you assign here will appear in every signal sent through this routing frame. For best
results, the name should be short and specific.
8. Click OK.
It can take up to 90 seconds for the IP3 Controller to pull in all of the details of the frame and display
them for the first time.Once complete, you will see your frame and other details on the main page.
9. Select the row containing the frame.
If the power supply and fan indicators appear on the right in color, then you have successfully added
the frame.
10. Click Go to Device to check that all of the modules appear as expected within the frame.
This is described in depth in your IP3 controller manual. You are now ready to connect Navigator to the
IP3 controller and continue its configuration.
Connecting Navigator to an IP3 Controller

1. While in Build mode, right click on the Routers folder in the Navigation pane and select Create >
Routing System.
2. The Create Routing System dialog box opens.
Figure 422: Add Host Dialog Box
3. Enter a name for the routing system and check Perform System Poll.
4. Enter the IP address of the IP3 controller and click OK.
Navigator polls the address provided, and when complete, adds a series of items to the Routers folder in
the Navigation pane.
Figure 423: Routing Components System Discovery
DBEditor IP3 Configuration

After you have completed the Polling process (see Connecting Navigator to an IP3 Controller (on page
1101)) or otherwise added your IP3 routing system to the Navigator Routers folder, you are ready to
configure IP3 in DBEditor. Follow these steps:
1. Double click the System Name (IP3) under Control Views in the Navigation pane’s Routers folder.
The DBEditor dialog box opens.
Figure 424: DBEditor After Initial Discovery of an IP3 Frame
The DBEditor is initially filled with default sources and destinations. IP3 database entries are created
in the IP3 database editor, so you can delete these ones.
a. Click the Sources tab and then click in the top left corner of the grid to select all rows, and click
Delete on your keyboard.
a. Click the Destinations tab and then click in the top left corner of the grid to select all rows, and
click Delete on your keyboard.
b. Click the Levels tab.
2. On the Sources or Destinations tab of the DBEditor for an IP3 controller, click IP3 Matrix.
Figure 425: IP3 Matrix Destinations Tab with IP3 Matrix Button
The IP3 Matrix Settings dialog box opens.
Figure 426: IP3 Matrix Settings Dialog Box
On this screen, you can change the number of sources and destinations, and the source and
destination offset.
3. Click Wizard and set up the required device type(s) based on your modules.
Figure 427: Device Type Wizard
See Using Database Editor Wizards (on page 832) for more information.
4. Select Create a New Custom Device Type, provide a relevant name, and click Next.
5. In the Connection Types dialog, select your connection type.
By default, routers are configured with 16 levels. To configure an IP3 router to have 64 levels, place
a check beside Enable Additional Levels.
Click Next.
6. In the Level Selection dialog, ensure the starting level matches what you expect, and click Next.
7. On the Configure Connection Types dialog, double-check the mapping of the components to the
levels and then click Next.
8. Click Finish on the last dialog.
9. Save.
Don’t Publish right now. Publishing at this stage would send an empty database to the controller.
10. Close DBEditor.
IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration

The IP3 system logical configuration can only be done by launching the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor tool from
within Navigator.
1. Double-click the IP3 Routing System in the Router folder of the Navigation pane.
Figure 428: IP3 Routing Configuration
This starts the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor interface.

2. Click Add in the Sources tab and add your sources.
3. Click Add Rows.
 Add default sources
 Add Inputs corresponding to other Input Modules you may have in your system
4. On the Destinations tab, click Add.
 Add the correct number of Outputs (Destinations) for your system.
 Define the correct number of other outputs.
 Define the Multiviewer Outputs.
See your IP3 Controller documentation for details on adding and refining Sources and Destinations.
5. Click Save in order to commit these changes into the database.
6. Close the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor within Navigator by clicking the X in the corner.
7. Re-open Navigator DBEditor to synchronize and check that the synchronization has been successful.
The logical database appears configured as in the IP3 flat matrix. Sources, destinations, and matrices
are now displayed per device type, with IP3 items in green.
Figure 429: IP3 in DBEditor After Flat Matrix Configuration
8. If no other changes are needed, click Publish in the DBEditor window.
The Publish function facilitates easy distribution of logical information, and allows distribution of salvos
and other database information in the names.txt file to all of the devices in the routing system. All
existing device list components are preselected; however, you can uncheck any selection that you do
not want to publish to.
Clicking Start Transfer (bottom left corner of the dialog box) starts the file transfer process, during
which, information messages are displayed in the Overall Status text box. After each device has the
names.txt transferred to it, Navigator's Database Editor sends an X-Y command to the system to let the
devices know to refresh their names.txt files. If some devices fail to transfer or the command fails to
send, click Retry to repeat the process for the failed devices.
Propagating Audio Levels

To efficiently configure multiple levels of audio in an IP3 router, for example with MADI audio, follow
these steps:
1. In the Flat Matrix editor, check Breakaway Sources (as in the fifth row from the bottom below).
Figure 430: IP3 Flat Matrix Editor
2. Save and close the Flat Matrix Editor and open the Database Editor.
3. Open the Device Type Wizard and define the device type with a single audio channel.
Figure 431: Device Type Wizard

When creating your device type, all audio channels will be propagated across IP3 levels
automatically, as in rows 83 below.
Figure 432: IP3 Database Editor
When there is a stereo audio source, a parent source appears on one row with its name bolded and with
only the explicitly defined rows displayed as in row 87. Other audio levels appear on the following rows,
with all additional audio levels displayed, as above, rows 88 and 89.
Adding an IP3 to a Legacy Router System

Note: When using IP3 Controller Routing Systems connected to legacy router devices (such as panacea,
ABA panels, GPI panels), avoid having the IP3 HTTP interface or IP3 HTTP soft panel running on the same
PC as Navigator while performing operations on the legacy router devices (like polling or downloading);
otherwise those operations could fail.
You can add an IP3 to an existing Legacy routing system, such as a Platinum or Panacea router that
already existed in Navigator before. This creates a hybrid system. Follow these steps:
1. Configure your hardware so the routers are physically connected.
2. In Navigator, in the existing routing system, right-click on the Comm Settings and change the IP to
point to the new IP3 controller.
3. Make sure the IP3 controller was configured as a server for the existing (old) routing system.
4. To connect IP3 and Platinum, do either of the following.
 Configure IP3 controller as a client to a legacy router (Platinum/Panacea/Edge) See the

documentation for that product to find out how to do that.
or
 Configure legacy router to be a client to IP3 controller (Controller settings > XY Settings (server
IP type IP and SET)
Figure 433: Configuring an IP3 server as a Client
5. Repoll the routing system in Navigator.
The Routers folder here contains a hybrid routing system containing IP3 and a Platinum.
Figure 434: IP3 and Platinum Frame in the Same Routing System
The DBEditor dialog box opens.
7. On the Sources or Destinations tab of the DBEditor for an IP3 controller, click IP3 Matrix.
Figure 435: IP3 Matrix Destinations Tab with IP3 Matrix Button
The IP3 Matrix Settings dialog box opens.
Figure 436: IP3 Matrix Settings Dialog Box
On this screen, you can change the number of sources and destinations, and the source and
destination offset.
8. Click Wizard and complete the steps for each NEW device type you need in your IP3 logical
configuration.
See Using Database Editor Wizards (on page 832) for more information.
9. Save your changes and close the DBEditor.
10. Edit the IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration using the Flat Matrix Editor.
a. Double-click the IP3 Routing System in the Routers sub-folder.
Figure 437: Routers Sub-Folder
This starts the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor interface.

b. Click Add in the Sources tab and add your sources.
c. Click Add Rows.
d. Add default sources
e. Add Inputs corresponding to other Input Modules you may have in your system
f. On the Destinations tab, click Add
g. Add the correct number of Outputs (Destinations) for your system.
h. Define the correct number of other outputs.
i. Define the Outputs.
j. See your IP3 Controller documentation for details on adding and refining Sources and
Destinations.
k. Click Save on the Flat Matrix Editor in order to commit these changes into the database, and
then close the IP3 Flat Matrix Editor within Navigator by clicking the X in the corner.
11. Double-click the routing system under Control Views in Navigator’s Routers folder to open DBEditor
toedit the hybrid routing system configuration, which now includes the IP3 logical sources and
destinations.
Sources, destinations, and matrices are now displayed per device type, with IP3 items in green to
indicate that the only modification you can make is to change a row’s name.
Figure 438: Platinum and IP3 Routers in DBEditor after Poll
12. Save and Publish to all the routing devices and panels in the hybrid routing system.
Update and re-download legacy control panels.
Reconfiguring a Hybrid Router System With an IP3

You may want to re-create a hybrid routing system (containing IP3 and also other Imagine
Communications routing systems) that has already been configured in another Navigator session. This is
normally done when setting Navigator to run on a new computer, or when you add more hardware to
the existing routing system and have to add more logical entries.
1. In the Routers folder of the Navigation pane, right click and select Create > Routing System, and
then enter a name for the routing system and check Perform System Poll.
This name is just stored locally on the Navigator system.
2. Enter the IP address of the IP3 controller and click OK.
Navigator polls the address provided, and when complete, adds a series of items to the Routers
folder in the Navigation pane.
The Routers folder here contains the IP3 router and any other routers connected to it.
The DBEditor tool opens.

4. Import names.txt from any already configured router in this hybrid system.
This also imports offset, levels, and the matrix size of the IP3 controller.
5. Make any necessary changes on both DBEditor for legacy routers, and Flat Matrix Editor for IP3
routing systems.
6. Save and Publish (and eventually Download) to activate the modified configuration to all routing
devices in the hybrid routing system
Configuring Tielines
Tielines can be set between two IP3s, or IP3 and Platinum, or IP3 and Edge, but not Panacea. The tieline
connection needs to be defined on the same level.
Make sure the IP3 level is specified in the level tab and is configured properly (the # of sources and
destinations match the existing hardware).
After defining the tielines, you can perform the following operations:
• Deleting tielines
• Setting the tieline controller
For more information, see Managing Enhanced Tielines (on page 800).
Configuring PVX
Navigator 5.4 provides limited support for Platinum PVX.
Platinum PVX must have Version 1.1 Firmware installed.

1. Discover and Poll your Platinum PVX Standalone system.
2. Import the database.
3. Open the Control View.
There are two options only: Publish and Import from Device.
4. To populate the control view, click Import from Device and extract the database from the PVX
frame using the fixed IP address obtained from the discovery.
You cannot make changes to the database in Navigator. The import from PVX is a one way process.
Subsequent name changes in the PVX Database need to be reimported into the control view.
Polling from Navigator will gather other devices connected via XY (Ethernet) such as control panels
and EDGE Gateways.
You can publish the database to panels, panel salvos, etc.
Navigator Soft Panels and EDGE-WEB work in this configuration. To use IconMaster databases with this
configuration, but you need to export the configuration file and import in the IconMaster.
You can create Panel Salvos in Navigator, but Enhanced salvos are not supported. (Note that database
names changes and re-import will overwrite any salvos created.)
Chapter 63
Basic Routing System Control

CCS Navigator can control and monitor routing equipment, such as Platinum, Integrator, Integrator Gold,
Panacea standard, Panacea advanced, future routing products, and various traditional products,
including Via, XPlus, and so forth This also includes combiner systems (multiple Integrators combined
together to create larger routing systems).
Navigator may be used as the only controlling device on a system, or it may be used in conjunction with
traditional hardware control panels. Note that you can access multiple routing configurations with
multiple logical views on the same workstation simultaneously.
You must have a Device Control license to monitor and control devices.
There are the following Control mode tools:

• Advanced Controls (on page 1118)
• Basic Controls (on page 1118)
Connecting to Routers in Control Mode

Magellan CCS Navigator allows you to configure and control many routers on the same network.
However, this can lead to a lot of network traffic in Control mode. In order to cut down on unnecessary
network traffic, by default Navigator does not connect to the routers in Control mode unless specifically
configured to do so.
To connect to a router in control mode, you must activate the connection while in Build mode. Follow
these steps:
1. From the main menu, choose Options > Plug-ins.
2. Choose Advanced Router Control and click Configure.

3. In the Router Database tab, right click on the router you want to activate.
4. Choose Activate at Startup from the menu that appears, and then choose Yes.
5. Switch to Control mode to connect to the router.
For best results, set this option to Yes for those routing systems that are live (currently in use). Return it
to No when activating another routing system from the Navigation pane so there is only one routing
system connected at a time. This reduces XY traffic and improves the overall performance for large
routing systems.
Advanced Controls
Extensive and fully-featured routing control tools are available on the default software routing panels
that appear in the Navigation pane. In most instances, these advanced controls are the best tools to use
for router control. For more information, see the following topics:
• Grid and Bus Panel Operation (on page 1123)
• Matrix Panel Operation (on page 1134)
• Source Preview and Multi Display Page Operation (on page 1142)
Basic Controls
A very basic control can be accessed in Control mode by double-clicking on the view.
The Router Control dialog box opens.
Figure 439: Router Control Dialog Box
Control windows for routing views and NEO NSM router cards have a Router Control dialog box that
describe how to take the signals of a selected router source and direct these signals to a selected router
destination.
Categories and indexes used in the source and destination selection buttons are defined in Navigator
and are used to quickly access a source or destination in a large routing system.
Accessing the Router Control

To access the router control for a routing view, select the routing view in the navigational tree and
double-click or right-click and select Control in the menu.
Taking a Source to a Destination

To take a router source to a router destination in a Router Control window, complete these steps:
1. In the Destination Selection section of the Router Control tab, click the browse (...) button to the
right of the Destination box to show the list of available router destinations.
Figure 440: Destination Selection Section of Router Control Window
2. In the Source Selection section, click the button under the Breakaway label to toggle the label to
"Disabled."
Figure 441: Source Selection Section of Router Control Tab
3. Select a source from the sources list, and then click Take to send the take command to the router.
The selected source LEDs update to show the status name of each selected source for each level.
Doing a Breakaway Take

To do a breakaway take of router source levels to a router destination, complete these steps:
1. In the Destination Selection section, select a destination from the list.
2. In the Source Selection section, click the toggle button under the Breakaway label to change the
button label to "Enabled."
3. In the Set Individual Source section, select a source from each level that you want to be part of the
breakaway take.
4. Click Take to send the breakaway take command to the router; or click Clear to clear the settings
and reset them.
Taking a Disconnect Source

To take a disconnect source or breakaway disconnect source to a router destination, complete these
steps:
2. In the Source Selection section, click the Browse button beside Source, and from the Category
menu, choose Disconnect.
and reset them.
Taking a Disconnect Breakaway Source

To take a disconnect source or breakaway disconnect source to a router destination, complete these
steps:
2. In the Source Selection section, if the Breakaway button displays Disabled, click it so it displays
Enabled.
3. In the Set Individual Source section, select Disconnect s the source for each level that you want to
disconnect.
and reset them.
Locking and Protecting Router Destinations

You can lock or protect router destinations from the PC, so that others cannot use them without
permission.
Locking a Router Destination

When a router destination is locked, you cannot send a different source to that destination until the
person who locked the router destination unlocks it.
To lock a router destination, complete these steps:

2. In the Write Protection section, click Lock so that the label "Lock On" appears.
Figure 442: Write Protection Section
The User Name updates to show the user name, and a padlock icon appears beside the destination
name.
Figure 443: Destination Selection Section
Unlocking a Router Destination

When a router destination is locked, you cannot send a different source to the destination until the user
who locked the router destination unlocks it.
To unlock a router destination, complete these steps:

2. In the Write Protection section, click Lock so that the label "Lock Off" appears.
Protecting a Router Destination

Only the user who protected a router destination can unprotect it or send a different router source to it.
To protect a router destination, complete these steps:

2. In the Write Protection section, click Protect so that the label "Protect On" appears.
The User Name updates to show the user name, and a shield icon shows beside the destination name.
Figure 446: Destination Selection Section
Unprotecting a Router Destination

Only the user who protects a router destination can unprotect it or send a different router source to it.
To unprotect a router destination, complete these steps:

2. In the Write Protection section, Protect is a toggle control. Click Protect so that the "Protect Off"
label appears.
Platinum Control
Double-click a Platinum frame to open the Platinum-specific control window.
Double-click a component inside the Platinum frame to open a generic control window. A generic
control window allows you to adjust parameters and alarms just like a non-router CCS device.
See the Platinum Wideband Digital Multirate Routing Switchers Frame and Modules Installation,
Configuration, and Operation Manual for a complete list of parameters.
Chapter 64
Grid and Bus Panel Operation

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to monitor and control
devices.
The Grid, Single-Bus, Multi-Bus, and Multi-Bus with Salvo pages operate similarly.
For a brief description of these various panels, see the following:

• Grid Panel (on page 698)
• Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with Monitor (on page 703)
• Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels (on page 701)
For information on creating these panels, see Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels (on
page 709).
Available functions include the following:

Monitoring Signal Presence ................................................................. 1123
Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel ......................................... 1124
Crosspoint Restrictions ........................................................................ 1129
Using Presets........................................................................................ 1130
Using Salvos ......................................................................................... 1131
Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos ................................. 1131
Monitoring Signal Presence

Grid and Bus panels can monitor signal presence. This feature is only available from routing devices that
support signal presence.
If a signal has been lost, this will be indicated on the panel by a Signal Lost icon.
Figure 447: Signal Lost Icon
With a Grid panel, if you click the Signal Presence icon, you can view a Status dialog box that shows the
status of the source signals.
Figure 448: Grid Panel Status Dialog
Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel

Depending on your panel, you may be able to perform different types of takes. See the following topics:
• Takes with a Single-Bus Panel (on page 1124)
• Takes With a Multi-Bus Panel (on page 1125)
• Takes on a Grid Panel (on page 1127)
Takes with a Single-Bus Panel

A single-bus panel can take an input to a single, pre-defined destination.
Figure 449: Single-Bus Panel
Follow Take
A Follow Take takes all levels of an input to the Single-Bus panel’s one destination. To perform a Follow
Take, follow these steps:
1. Click the destination.
2. (Optional) If you have previously performed a breakaway switch, and your panel does not reset to
follow mode automatically, enable all Level buttons, by either right clicking on one of them and
choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while
clicking on each of them with a mouse. Each Level button should be lit.
3. Click the desired Source button.
4. Click the Take button. The source will be switched on all levels simultaneously.
Performing a Breakaway switch

During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want to perform breakaway take requests?
If the answer to this question was Yes, then you can make a switch on some levels, but not on others. If
the answer is No, then you will not be able to perform this operation.
To unselect all Level buttons, you can right click on a Level button and choose Unselect All from the
shortcut menu that appears.
1. Click the button for the destination you want to take to.
If the desired destination is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available destinations
using the scroll bar immediately below the Destination buttons. The destination name and icon will
appear in each Status dialog box.
2. Click the Level button(s) corresponding to the level(s) that are to be switched independently. To
select multiple buttons, hold down the Shift key on your keyboard as you click on each button with
the mouse.
Only those buttons that have been enabled should be lit.
3. Click the desired Source.
4. Click Take. The source will be switched only on the selected breakaway level(s). Sources connected
on other levels will not be affected.
After a breakaway take, one of two things can happen, depending on settings that were made during
panel creation. If your answer to the question Do you want the panel to automatically reset the level
selection to follow mode? was Yes, then all levels will automatically be selected the next time you
perform a take. If you said No, the levels that were selected for the previous take will continue to be
selected. You can continue switching using those levels, or you can manually select all the levels again to
resume normal AFV operation.
Takes With a Multi-Bus Panel

A multi-bus panel can take an input to multiple destinations. It can also have a salvo option. For
additional options when operating a Multi-Bus with Salvo panel, see Using Salvos (on page 1131).
The following types of take are available with all Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo panels:
• Performing an AFV switch (on page 1126)
• Performing a Breakaway Switch (on page 1126)

• Performing a Multiple Take (on page 1127)
Figure 450: Multi-Bus Panel
Performing an AFV switch

An AFV switch stands for Audio Follows Video. In this type of take, all levels are taken.
1. Click the desired Destination button.
appear in each status dialog box.
2. Enable all Level buttons, by either right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the
shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a
mouse. Each Level button should be lit.
Performing a Breakaway Switch

A breakaway switch only switches some inputs to the chosen destination.
the mouse.
Performing a Multiple Take

The Multiple Take feature takes several destinations on selected levels to a single source. Select as many
destinations as you like by clicking on their buttons. Hold Shift as you click and click the first and last
destinations that you would like to choose in order to select a range of destinations, or hold Ctrl as you
click non-sequential destinations.
1. Select the source you want to take to.
2. Click Take.
Those destinations are all switched to the single source.
Takes on a Grid Panel

A Grid panel has easy access to many destinations.
Figure 451: Grid Panel
Taking an AFV Switch

An AFV switch stands for Audio Follows Video. In this type of take, all levels are taken.
1. Click the button below the Destination you want to switch.
A menu opens, containing all the available inputs to that destination, and a Disconnect option.
2. Choose your desired input.
The button updates to display the input that is being taken to that destination. Your switch takes effect
immediately.
Breakaway Take
A breakaway switch only switches some inputs to the chosen destination.
the mouse.
3. Right click the Input field below the selected Destination.
4. From the shortcut menu that appears, choose the Input to switch to the Destination.
The levels that are selected on the grid below the destination fill with the input that was switched to.
Any levels that weren’t selected will not switch.
Switching a Single Level

2. Click in the cross-point between the destination and the level you want to switch.
3. From the shortcut menu that appears, choose the Input to switch to the Destination.
The level on that destination switches to that input. The grid updates accordingly.
Disconnecting a Destination
Disconnect takes are possible on Grid and Bus panels.
During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want to perform source disconnect take? If
the answer to this question was Yes, then you can disconnect the destination from the current source
without switching to another source. If the answer is No, then if you want to disconnect from the
selected source, you must select another source and click Take.
2. Select Disconnect.
Clearing a Selected Source

The Clear option is available on Bus panels only.
To clear a selected source without having to select another one, click Clear.
Swapping Destinations
When you swap destinations, you are switching the sources that are connected to two destinations, so
the source for destination A is changed to the one that was connected to destination B, and vice versa.
1. Enable the two Destination buttons you want to swap by pressing the Ctrl key on your keyboard
while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Each Destination button you want to swap should be
lit.
2. Click the Swap button.
The two destinations now have traded their source inputs.
Crosspoint Restrictions
Crosspoint restrictions are available on Bus panels only.
Restricting a Crosspoint
A restrict disallows you from selecting a particular source and a particular destination and performing a
take. This feature is only available from routing devices that support crosspoint restrictions.
2. Click the appropriate source button. The source will be reflected in the Source status dialog box, and
the LEDs for that source will light to reflect the new connection. Click the scroll bar located beneath
the source buttons to view additional sources.
3. Click the Restrict button.
Now, when any panel tries to take this particular source to this particular destination, they will not be
allowed to do so.
A destination that is restricted for any source is indicated by a Restrict icon, as is a source that is
restricted for any destination.
Figure 452: Restrict Icon
Unrestricting a Crosspoint
To remove a restriction between a particular source and destination, so you can perform takes between
them, follow this procedure:
This crosspoint is available to all users.
Using Presets
You can use a preset to set up a source to quickly take to a destination, on Bus panels only.
Creating a Preset
3. Click the Preset button.
Taking a Preset
1. Click Preset on the Multi-Bus panel.
2. Click Take.
Using Salvos
Multi-Bus with Salvo panels have an extra set of buttons for pre-defined salvos. Salvos are defined in
the configuration file in Navigator.
A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoints that, when executed (take), occur simultaneously. Salvos can
be used to store commonly used complex router setups involving multiple destinations for instant recall.
For example, a salvo could be created that would send a test signal to every monitor in an edit suite.
Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints defined by that salvo. Other crosspoint connections in
the system will not be affected.
To execute a salvo, follow these steps:

1. Click the Salvo(s) you want to execute.
2. Click Take.
The salvo executes.
An active salvo is indicated by an Active Salvo icon: .
Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos

You can lock and/or protect destinations and salvos on Grid, Single-Bus, or Multi-Bus panel that include
Lock and Protect buttons. To create a panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting Routing
Operations and Display Properties (on page 714).
You can re-open a saved panel to add or remove a Lock or Protect button. See Using Panel Information
(on page 720).
During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want the panel to override lock and protect
operations? If the answer to this question was Yes, then the panel will always be able to unlock or
unprotect the destination that has been locked or protected by a different panel ID or by a different
operator at another location. If the answer is No, then locks will never be overridden by an operator at
the panel, and protect operations that are set by users at other access points to the router will not be
overridden by the panel.
Locking a Destination or Salvo

Your panel must include a Lock button if you want to use this feature. See Selecting Routing Operations
and Display Properties (on page 714).
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing that Destination until it is unlocked. If your panel
has more than one destination, you can lock multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on
one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your
keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
Locking a salvo prevents anyone from changing the salvo until it is unlocked.
To lock or protect a destination or salvo, follow these steps:

1. On the panel, click the destination(s) or salvo(s) you want to lock.
If the object you want to lock is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available
destinations or salvos using the scroll bar.
2. Click Lock. The selected items will be locked to all users.
They will be unavailable to everyone including the user who originally enabled the protect.
A salvo or destination that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon: .

Figure 453: Lock Icon
Unlocking a Salvo or Destination

Once a destination is locked, it must be unlocked if you want to switch its source again. If your panel has
more than one destination, you can unlock multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on
one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your
keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
Once a salvo is locked, it must be unlocked to be executed again.

1. On the panel, click the destination(s) or salvo(s) you want to unlock.
2. Click Unlock. The destination or salvo will be unlocked to all users.
Protecting Destinations and Salvos

Your panel must include a Protect button if you want to use this feature. See Selecting Routing
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to a destination or salvo, but differs from a Lock in
one respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be able to change
the destination or salvo at will, but other users will not. The protected salvo or destination will show up
as a lock on their panel until the Protect is removed or overridden.
If your panel has more than one salvo or destination, you can protect multiple items at the same time by
right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift
key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
1. Click the salvo(s) or destination(s) you want to protect.
2. Click Protect.
This salvo(s) or destination(s) will be unavailable to everyone except the user who originally enabled the
protect.
A destination that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon: .
Unprotecting Destinations and Salvos

In order to make a protected destination or salvo available to other users, you must unprotect it. If your
panel has more than one salvo or destination, you can unprotect more than one at the same time by
right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift
key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a mouse.
1. Click the salvo(s) or destination(s) you want to unprotect.
2. Click Unprotect.
The destination(s) or salvo(s) will become available to everyone.
A salvo that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon.
Chapter 65
Matrix Panel Operation

You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to
monitor and control devices.
Matrix panels and Matrix Classic panels have the same basic features, the difference between them
being the position of the source and destination columns. On a Matrix panel, the destination buttons are
arrayed across the top of the panel and the source buttons are along the right side. Conversely, on a
Matrix Classic panel, source buttons are aligned across the top of the panel and destination buttons
appear along the right side.
For a brief description of Matrix panels, please see Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels (on page 698).
Figure 454: Matrix Panel
See the following topics for things you can do on a Matrix or Matrix Classic Panel:
Monitoring Signal Presence ................................................................. 1135
Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel ................................................. 1135
Locking and Protecting Destinations ................................................... 1136
Using Salvos ......................................................................................... 1139
Monitoring Signal Presence

If a signal has been lost, this will be indicated on the panel by a Signal Lost icon. This feature is only
available from routing devices that support signal presence.
Figure 455: Signal Lost Icon
Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel

The Matrix panel can perform AFV (audio follows video) and breakaway takes.
Create a Preset using the Source and Destination Buttons

1. Click the desired destination(s) from the destination buttons. You can hold down Shift to select
multiple destinations.
If a desired destination is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available options using
the scroll bar adjacent to the buttons.
2. Click the desired Source from the source buttons.
If the desired source is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available options using the
scroll bar adjacent to the buttons.
Depending on settings that were chosen during creation of the Matrix or Matrix Classic panel, the
level selection may revert to all levels, or it may contain the levels that were chosen the previous
time a preset was created. See Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties (on page 714).
3. Enable the Level buttons for the levels you want to select, by either right clicking on one of them
and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while
clicking on each of them with a mouse. Selected Levels are lit.
4. Click Preset.
A circle appears at the point where the source and destination meet on the matrix grid. The circle is
divided into as many segments as there are levels available. Portions of the circle are filled in depending
on the levels that were chosen for the crosspoint.
Create a Preset using the Matrix Grid

Depending on settings that were chosen during creation of the Matrix or Matrix Classic panel, the level
selection may revert to all levels, or it may contain the levels that were chosen the previous time a
preset was created. See Selecting Routing Operations and Display Properties (on page 714).
1. Enable the Level buttons for the levels you want to select, by either right clicking on one of them
and choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while
clicking on each of them with a mouse. Selected Levels are lit.
2. Click the intersection of the source and destination.
If the desired crosspoint is not visible on the screen, scroll through the list of available options using the
scroll bars adjacent to the source and destination buttons.
A circle appears at the point where the source and destination meet on the matrix grid. The circle is
divided into as many segments as there are levels available. Portions of the circle are filled in depending
on the levels that were chosen for the crosspoint.
Performing a Switch
1. Create as many presets as you like.
See Create a Preset using the Source and Destination Buttons (on page 1135) and Create a Preset
using the Matrix Grid (on page 1135). You can only have one preset per destination, but can have
the same source to as many times as you want.
2. Click Take.
All destinations are taken to their sources simultaneously.
Locking and Protecting Destinations

Your Matrix panel must include Lock and Protect buttons if you want to use these features. To create a
panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting Sources (on page 713).
You can re-open a saved Matrix panel to add or remove a Lock or Protect button. See Editing a Router
Control Panel on a Navigator Page (on page 719).
operations? If the answer to this question was Yes, then the Matrix panel will always be able to unlock
or unprotect the destination that has been locked or protected by a different panel ID or by a different
operator at another location. If the answer is No, then locks will never be overridden by an operator at
the Matrix panel, and protect operations that are set by users at other access points to the router will
not be overridden by the Matrix panel.
Also during panel creation the panel Id was defined. This ID is used with locks, protects, takes, and
restricts to determine the appropriate access.
Locking Destinations
Locking a destination prevents anyone from changing the Destination until it is unlocked. You may lock
multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the
mouse.
1. On the Matrix panel, click the destination(s) you want to lock.
2. Click Lock. The destination(s) will be locked to all users.
This destination(s) will be unavailable to everyone including the person who originally enabled the
protect.
A destination that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon .
Unlocking Destinations
Once a destination is locked, it must be unlocked if you want to switch its source again. You may unlock
multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from the
mouse.
1. On the Matrix panel, click the destination(s) you want to unlock.
2. Click Unlock. The Destination will be unlocked to all users.
This destination(s) will now be available to everyone.
Protecting Destinations
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to the Destination, but differs from a Lock in one
respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be able to change the
destination at will, but other users will be prevented from changing that destination until the Protect is
removed. You may protect multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and
choosing Select All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking
on each of them with a mouse.
1. Click the destination(s) you want to protect.
2. Click Protect.
This destination(s) will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally enabled the protect.
A destination that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon .
Unprotecting Destinations
In order to make a protected destination available to other users, you must unprotect it. You may
unprotect multiple destinations at the same time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select
All from the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them
with a mouse.
1. Click the destination(s) you want to unprotect.
2. Click Unprotect.
The destination(s) will become available to everyone.
Restricting a Crosspoint
A restrict disallows you from selecting a particular source and a particular destination and performing a
take.
1. Create a preset. See Create a Preset using the Source and Destination Buttons (on page 1135) and
Create a Preset using the Matrix Grid (on page 1135).
Now, when any panel tries to take this particular source to this particular destination, they will not be
allowed to do so.
A destination that is restricted is indicated by a Restrict icon. This feature is only available from routing
devices that support crosspoint restrictions .
Unrestricting a Crosspoint
To remove a restriction between a particular source and destination, so you can perform takes between
them.
1. Create a preset.
Now, this crosspoint is available to all users.
Disconnecting a Destination
During panel creation, there is an option which asks Do you want to perform source disconnect take? If
the answer to this question was Yes, then you can disconnect the destination from the current source
without switching to another source. If the answer is No, then if you want to disconnect from the
selected source, you must select another source and click Take.

2. Select Disconnect.

To clear a selected source without having to select another one, click Clear.
Swapping Destinations
When you swap destinations, you switch the sources that are connected to those two destinations, so
the source for destination A is changed to the one that was connected to destination B, and vice versa.
1. Enable the two Destination buttons you want to swap by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard
while clicking on each of them with a mouse. Each Destination button you want to swap should be
lit.
2. Click the Swap button.
The two destinations now have traded their source inputs.
Using Salvos
Matrix panels have an extra set of buttons along the bottom of the dialog box. These buttons are for
pre-defined salvos.
A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that, when executed, occur simultaneously. Salvos
can be used to s tore commonly used complex router setups involving multiple destinations for instant
recall. For example, a salvo could be created that would send a test signal to every monitor in an edit
suite. Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints defined by that salvo. Other crosspoint connections
in the system will not be affected.
Executing a Salvo
1. Click the Salvo you want to execute.
2. Click Take.
The salvo executes.
An active salvo is indicated by an Active Salvo icon .
Locking and Protecting a Salvo

Your Single-Bus panel must include Lock and Protect buttons if you want to use these features. To
create a panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting Sources (on page 713).
You can re-open a saved Single-Bus panel to add or remove a Lock or Protect button. See Editing a
Router Control Panel on a Navigator Page (on page 719).
operations? If the answer to this question was Yes, then the Matrix panel will always be able to unlock
or unprotect salvos that have been locked or protected by a different panel ID or by a different operator
at another location. If the answer is No, then locks will never be overridden by an operator at the Matrix
panel, and protect operations that are set by users at other access points to the router will not be
overridden by the Matrix panel.
Locking a Salvo
Locking a salvo prevents anyone from changing the salvo until it is unlocked.
1. On the Single-Bus panel, click the salvo.
2. Click Lock. The salvo will be locked to all users.
This salvo will be unavailable to everyone including the person who originally enabled the protect.
A salvo that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon .
Unlocking a Salvo
Once a salvo is locked, it must be locked if you want to switch its source again.
1. On the Single-Bus panel, click the salvo.
2. Click Unlock. The salvo will be unlocked to all users.
This salvo will now be available to everyone.
Protecting Salvos
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to salvos, but differs from a Lock in one respect. With
the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be able to change the salvo at will,
but other users will be prevented from changing that salvo until the Protect is removed. You may
protect multiple salvos at the same time by right clicking on one of them and choosing Select All from
the shortcut menu, or by pressing the Shift key on your keyboard while clicking on each of them with a
mouse.
1. Click the salvo.
2. Click Protect.
This salvo will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally enabled the protect.
A salvo that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon .
Unprotecting Salvos
In order to make a protected salvo available to other users, you must unprotect it.
1. Click the salvo.
2. Click Unprotect.
The salvo will become available to everyone.
Chapter 66
Source Preview and Multi Display Page

Operation
You must have a NAVIGATOR-SRV, NAVIGATOR-SNMP, or NAVIGATOR-CLI license to use pages to
monitor and control devices.
The key differences between Source Preview and Multi Display panels are that the Source Preview panel
has a Signal Monitor dialog box on it, while the Multi Display panel does not, and the Source Preview is
limited to four destinations, while the Multi Display panel can have up to sixteen. Also, the Multi Display
panel can connect one source to various destinations at the same time.
For descriptions of the panels, see:

• Source Preview Panel (on page 696)
• Multi Display Panel (on page 695)
For instructions on creating these panels, see Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview Router Page
(on page 704).
Performing Takes
The Multi-Display panel uses the master destination (highlighted in green) to determine which Source
button to highlight as the current source. The panel ignores breakaways - only takes that exactly match
the source button on all levels that the source uses will be indicated.
Example: the routing system uses a 32x32 Integrator, configured into two 16x16 levels, plus a 16x2
Panacea router for a third level. Destinations 1 and 2 will each have three levels, but Destinations 3
through 16 will have only two levels (the Integrator). If the operator uses Destination 3 as the master
destination, then all router status messages will only report back status on two levels. The third level will
not report back. The take will then be considered a breakaway, and the Source button status will not
change.
Your Source Preview or Multi Display panel must include a Take button if you want to use this feature.
To create a panel with a Take button, see Selecting Sources (on page 706).
In Build mode, you can also edit the Source Preview or Multi Display panel. Adding a Take button would
involve first creating a button. The button would also need rules applied to it, normally an On Mouse
Click event. Associated actions would include setting properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ action
1. Click the panel’s destination button (it will be labeled Destination X where X represents the number
of the destination).
The button will become highlighted.
2. Click the appropriate source button (it will be labeled Source X where X represents the number of
the source). The Source button will become highlighted.
3. Click Take. The source will be switched on all levels simultaneously.
Locking and Protecting Destinations

Your Source Preview or Multi Display panel must include Lock and Protect buttons if you want to use
these features. To create a panel with Lock and Protect buttons, see Selecting Sources (on page 706).
In Build mode, you can also edit the Source Preview or Multi Display panel. Adding a Lock or Protect
button would involve first creating a button. The button would also need rules applied to it, normally an
On Mouse Click event. Associated actions would include setting properties for a ‘Lock Selected
Destination’ action.
Locking a Destination
Your panel must include a Lock button if you want to use this feature. See Routing Operations (on page
715).
Locking a destination prevents inadvertent changes to that destination.
You can lock a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can lock multiple destinations
on the Multi Display panel.
1. On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to lock.
2. Click Lock. The destination(s) will be locked to all users.
This destination will be unavailable to everyone including the person who originally enabled the protect.
A destination that is locked is indicated by a Lock icon .
Unlocking a Destination
You can unlock a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can unlock multiple
destinations on the Multi Display panel.
Your panel must include a Lock button if you want to use this feature. See Routing Operations (on page
715).
1. On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to unlock.
2. Click Unlock. The Destination(s) will be unlocked to all users.
This destination will now be available to everyone.
Protecting Destinations
Your panel must include a Protect button if you want to use this feature. See Routing Operations (on
page 715).
The Protect feature prevents inadvertent changes to the Destination, but differs from a Lock in one
respect. With the Protect feature enabled, the user who enabled the Protect will be able to change the
destination at will, but other users will be prevented from changing that destination until the Protect is
removed.
You can protect a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can protect multiple
1. On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to protect.
2. Click Protect.
This destination will be unavailable to everyone except the person who originally enabled the protect.
A destination that is protected is indicated by a Protect icon .
Unprotecting Destinations
You can unprotect a single destination at a time on a Source Preview panel. You can unprotect multiple
Your panel must include a Protect button if you want to use this feature. See Routing Operations (on
page 715).
1. On the Source Preview or Multi Display panel, click the destination(s) you want to unprotect.
2. Click Unprotect.
The destination will become available to everyone.

Your Source Preview or Multi Display panel must include a Clear button if you want to use this feature.
To create a panel with a Clear button, see Selecting Sources (on page 706).
In Build mode, you can also edit the Source Preview or Multi Display panel. Adding a Clear button would
involve first creating a button. The button would also need rules applied to it, normally an On Mouse
Click event. Associated actions would include setting properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ action.
To clear a selected source without having to select another one, click Clear. If there is a destination
selected, it is unselected as well.
Using a Source Preview Panel

The Source Preview panel makes up for its lack of destinations with a preview monitor on the screen. In
order to use the preview monitor, you must have a DirectX-compatible video card. For more
information, see Required Hardware (on page 24).
Chapter 67
Matrix Partitioning
Matrix partitioning allows you to divide a frame’s matrices into smaller switching units called
components. This capability may be used in configurations where RGB signals are to be switched (for
example., the matrix is split into three separate components – one for red, one for green, and one for
blue), or in configurations where both component and composite signals are to be switched within the
same frame. Matrix partitioning allows each component to appear to the control system as a different
level.
Each component in a matrix has a level configuration, a first source, and a first destination. Any physical
input or output can be assigned to any component.
Instructions for selecting the different types of matrix partitioning are found in the chapters related to
the router being configured.
The following partitioning types are available:

No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) ........................................... 1145
RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) ................................................... 1146
Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) ............................. 1147
Wild Partitioning .................................................................................. 1148
Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) ............................................. 1149
Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) ....................................... 1151
Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) ...................................... 1152
No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings)

Choose this option if you do not want a different partition type. To choose this option, select None from
the Partition Type drop-down list box. Only one partition is available with this option, so the # of
Partitions box is greyed out.
You can change the inputs and outputs connected to any physical component within the None partition
type.
2. Select Physical Map Order.
The Physical Map Order dialog box opens.
Figure 456: Partitioning Tab Set to None
Navigator assigns the new number to your chosen component, and then assigns the original number
from your chosen component to the component to which the physical number was originally assigned.
tabs. The information displayed on these tabs provides a graphic representation of how your selected
input and output partitions look. Choose the appropriate tab to view either the resulting input or output
partitioning.
RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced)

Platinum Routers Panacea and Integrator Routers
Figure 457: RGB/Stereo Partitioning Tab Examples
Selecting RGB/Stereo partitioning divides a matrix into components of equal size. This configuration
allows a user to connect the RGB outputs from a component device to the first three physical inputs on
the router, and the RGB outputs of a second component device to physical inputs four, five and six. Each
group of three inputs appears to the control system as a single input, and is switched simultaneously.
When you select RGB/Stereo, Navigator automatically assigns all physical inputs and outputs of the
matrix to appropriate components. For example, if 3 components are selected, physical input 1 is
assigned to the first red, physical input 2 to the first green, physical input 3 to the first blue, physical
input 4 to the second red, physical input 5 to the second green, and so forth
Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced Settings)

Figure 458: Contiguous Partitioning Tab Examples
Selecting Contiguous Partitioning divides a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations. When
Contiguous partitioning is selected, Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and
outputs of the matrix to the appropriate components. For example, if three components are selected for
a 32×32 matrix, physical inputs 1-10 is assigned to the first component, physical inputs 11-20 to the
second component, and physical inputs 21-30 to the third component.
Wild Partitioning
Figure 459: Wild Partitioning Tab Examples
In configurations where maximum flexibility is required, matrices can be partitioned to allow wild
mapping of physical inputs and outputs. Selecting Wild Partitioning allows any input or output to be
assigned to any component.
Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings)

This partitioning option is available for Platinum routers only.
Figure 460: Shared Inputs Tab Example
Selecting shared inputs divides a matrix into blocks of sources and destinations. When Contiguous
partitioning is selected, Navigator automatically assigns blocks of physical inputs and outputs of the
matrix to the appropriate components. For example, if three components are selected for a 32×32
matrix, physical inputs 1-10 is assigned to the first component, physical inputs 11-20 to the second
component, and physical inputs 21-30 to the third component. This option differs from Contiguous
partitioning in that input blocks can overlap, whereas in Contiguous partitioning the input blocks cannot
overlap.
To enable this method, select Shared Inputs from the Partition Type drop-down list box.
Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings)

Figure 461: Mono Breakaway Partitioning
Selecting Mono Breakaway partitioning combines the features of RGB/Stereo partitioning and Wild
partitioning. With Mono Breakaway, in the default setup of the matrix all inputs are shared. Outputs are
sorted into components of equal size. Any input or output can be assigned to any component.
To enable this method, select Mono Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down list box.
Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings)

Figure 462: Stereo Breakaway Partitioning
Selecting Stereo Breakaway partitioning divides a matrix into components of equal size (that is, RGB)
and allow any input, output, or channel to be assigned to any component, or to more than one
component at the same time. This option is particularly useful for setting up audio channels in TDM
applications where you want to breakaway channels or always move them together. Each AES signal
consists of two audio channels. For example, in stereo pairs, “left” is one channel and “right” is one
channel.
To enable this method, select Stereo Breakaway from the Partition Type drop-down list box.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix F
Appendix F
Configuring Control Panel Buttons

Control Panel Button Configuration Overview
Use the Edit Button Function dialog box1 to assign functions to user-definable selection keys on the ABA
and RCPp control panels.
The Edit Button Function dialog includes a drop-down list box that is used to select the function of the
selection key, and a Properties group that is used to define the specific parameters of the button. The
appearance of the Properties group depends on the type of button selected in the drop-down list box.
The functions available in the drop-down list depends on the type of panel being edited.
To assign a button function, follow these steps:

1. If you have not done so already, set up a control panel.
2. In the Navigator pane, double-click the control panel name.
The Edit Panel dialog box opens.
3. Click on the tab (for example, Sources, Destinations, Auxiliary Keys) that contains the buttons for
which you want to assign functions.
4. Right-click on the specific button for which you want to assign a function.
The Edit Button Function dialog box appears.
5. Select the button properties from the options available in the Properties group.
6. Click Done to return to the Edit Panel window.
7. Select the function from the drop-down list box.
The Properties group on the Edit Button Function dialog box change when the selection is made.
Possible button functions are shown below.
Programmable Button Functions
Control Panels
(• = available)
RCP-16×1SBAp
RCP-12×2BAp
Button Functions Reference
RCP-ABA
RCPp
Alarm — Monitors specified hardware alarms Creating an Alarm Key (see
"Creating an Alarm Key (RCP Panels,
• • •
RCP-IDe, RCP-32x8CQp, 16x2CS, and
32x2CS Panels Only)" on page 1169)
Breakaway-Follow — Functions as either Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key
• • •
breakaway or follow button (on page 1168)
Category — Functions as additional Creating a Category/Index Key (see
category/index key "Creating a Category/Index Key
•
(ABA Series Panels Only)" on page
1158)
Chop — Allows two sources to be rapidly
Creating a Chop Key (see "Creating
switched on one destination, at a predetermined
a Chop Key (RCP-ABA and RCPp- • •
or custom rate (RCP-ABAe and RCPp-LCD panels
LCD only)" on page 1181)
only)
Command — Functions as a command key Creating a Command Select Key (on
• • • •
page 1162)
Crosspoint — Functions as a crosspoint select key Creating a Crosspoint Select Key
• •
(on page 1157)
Destination — Functions as additional destination Creating a Destination Select Key
• • •
select key (on page 1156)
Destination Alarm — Allows use of a push button
panel to select logical destination(s) for logical Creating a Destination Alarm Select
• • •
crosspoint switch(es); provides capability to Key (on page 1175)
monitor specified hardware alarms
Function Button — Functions as a function Creating a Function Key (on page
• • • •
button 1164)
Control Panels
(• = available)
RCP-16×1SBAp
RCP-12×2BAp
Button Functions Reference
RCP-ABA
RCPp
Locks — Prevents all users from changing the
destination
Creating a Lock Key (on page 1166) • • • •
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels
do not support this feature.)
None — Disabled • • • •
On-Air Swap — Exchanges sources on one Creating an On-Air Swap Key (see
destination with sources on another destination "Creating an On-Air Swap Key (RCP- •
12×2BAp only)" on page 1182)
Page — Functions as a page key Creating a Page Key (see "Creating
a Page Key (ABA Series Panels •
Only)" on page 1166)
Panel Status — Functions as a panel status key Creating a Panel Status Key (on
• •
page 1165)
Parametric — Allows selection of individual
parameters affecting inputs and outputs Creating a Parametric Key (on page
•
(currently available for P-R(L)CP-32×8CQp panels 1176)
only)
Protect — Prevents all users from changing the
destination except the user who initiated the
Creating a Protect Key (on page
Protect • • • •
1167)
(Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels
do not support this feature.)
Salvo — Functions as a salvo select key Creating a Salvo Select Key (on
• • • •
page 1159)
Source — Functions as an additional source select Creating a Source Select Key (on
• •
key page 1155)
Source Alarm Select — Allows use of a push
button panel to select logical source(s) for logical Creating a Source Alarm Select Key
• • •
crosspoint switch(es); provides capability to (on page 1174)
monitor specified hardware alarms
Creating a Source Select Key

1. Select the Source option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
The Edit Button Function dialog box opens as shown below.
Figure 464: Creating an Additional Source Select Key
2. Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the source to associate with the key.
3. Scroll through the list, and then select the desired source.
4. Click Done.
On RCPp series panels, you also have an option to select Status-Only or Joystick Override (these options
are disabled on RCP-ABA series panels).
Use a Status-Only Source Select key to create a monitoring panel that is intended to display, but not
control, the status of a router. If Status Only is checked, the button lights when the source is active, but
the router is not affected if you press the button.
Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary changes. While you hold down the button, the
source is switched. When you release the button, the router switches back to the previous source.
Creating a Destination Select Key

If this is the only change or the last change to be made to the panel, you can download the new settings
by clicking Download on the Edit Panel screen. To print new key caps, click Print Key Caps.
1. Select the Destination option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 465: Creating an Additional Destination Select Key
2. Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select the destination to associate with
the key.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired destination.
4. Click Done.
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key

A crosspoint is a connection between a specific source and a specific destination. Whenever a crosspoint
key is pressed on an ABA panel, the associated source and destination are connected.
1. Select the Crosspoint option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 466: Creating an Additional Crosspoint Select Key
2. Click the arrow located to the right of the destination box to select the crosspoint destination.
3. Scroll through the list, and then select the desired destination.
4. Click the arrow located to the right of the source box to select the crosspoint source.
5. Scroll through the list, and then select the desired source.
6. Click Done.
On RCPp series panels, you also have an option to select Status-Only or Joystick Override (these options
are disabled on RCP-ABA series panels).
Use a Status-Only Crosspoint Select key to create a monitoring panel that is intended to display the
status of a router, but not control it. If Status Only is checked, the button lights when the crosspoint is
active, but the router is not affected if you press the button.
Check the Joystick Override option to make temporary changes. While you hold down the button, the
crosspoint is switched. When you release the button, the router switches back to the previous
crosspoint.
Creating a Category/Index Key (ABA Series Panels Only)

For more detailed information on category indexing, see Creating and Managing Categories (on page
790).
1. Select the Category option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 467: Creating an Additional Category/index Key
2. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Category box to select the category to associate
with the key.
3. Scroll through the list, and then select the desired category.
4. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Index box to select the index to be associated with
the key.
5. Scroll through the list, and then select the desired index.
6. Click Done.
Creating a Salvo Select Key

A salvo is a predefined list of crosspoint operations that occur simultaneously. Salvos can be used to
store commonly used, complex router setups involving multiple destinations for instant recall with one
button press. A salvo could be created, for example, that would send a test signal to every monitor in an
Edit Suite. Executing a salvo changes only the crosspoints defined by the salvo. Other crosspoint
connections in the system are not affected.
1. Select the Salvo option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 468: Creating a Salvo Select Key
2. Click the arrow located to the right of the Select Salvo box to select the salvo to be associated with
the key.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired salvo.
4. Click Done.
In newer version control panels, the salvo button lights up (tally) whenever the crosspoints that are part
of the salvo are initiated, no matter where the crosspoint Take occurs.
If any of the salvo’s crosspoints change status, the salvo button light turns off. For more information
about control panels, see the Programmable Panel Series Configuration and Operation Manual.
Adding or Editing a Salvo

When creating a Salvo Select key, new salvos may be added and existing salvos may be edited from the
Edit Button Function dialog.
• To add a new salvo, click Add.
• To edit an existing salvo, click Edit.
The Salvo Editor window opens (see Creating a Salvo (on page 671) for an example of this window).
The Salvo Editor is an off-line matrix panel. The sources and destinations in the database are displayed
as a row of control buttons along the top and right sides of the panel (sources on the top, and
destinations on the side). Each control button includes the source or destination name and icon,
although names and icons may not be readable in full-screen view. For greater legibility, any portion of
the panel may be enlarged using the Zoom-In button.
Crosspoints on the panel are indicated via colored markers at the intersection of the source and
destination lines. The markers are displayed as pie-shaped wedges that correspond to the level colors
(for information on assigning level colors, see Modifying Level Colors (on page 785)). For example:
• If a video level is assigned the color blue, a blue marker at the intersection of a source and
destination line indicates that the source is connected to the destination on the video level.
• If more than one colored marker is present at an intersection, the source is connected on each level
displayed.
• If a source is selected on all levels in the system (AFV switching), the marker appears as a
multicolored circle, consisting of all colors of the active levels.
Selecting a Crosspoint on the Salvo Editor Screen

1. Select the level(s) on which the source should be connected by clicking on the appropriate level
buttons (the level buttons are located at the top of the window). If a button is colored, the level is
enabled and the source is connected on that level.
2. Click the intersection of the source and destination lines.
A colored marker appears.
A salvo may be defined in one of several ways. The Capture option takes a "snapshot" view of the
current state of the router and stores it as a salvo. This salvo can then be edited (crosspoints added or
deleted) as needed.
A salvo may also be created by copying an existing salvo. The copied salvo may serve as a starting point
for the definition of the new salvo. Crosspoints can be added or deleted as necessary.
A salvo may also be created "from scratch" by selecting the crosspoints (the sources and destinations)
on the off-line Salvo Editor panel.
Capturing the Existing State of the Router

1. Assign an appropriate name to the new salvo by highlighting the default name contained in the
Name Edit box and typing a new name in the box.
2. Click Capture at the Salvo Editor dialog box.
The current router crosspoint assignments are copied to the off-line Salvo Editor panel.
3. Edit the salvo displayed on the off-line panel by adding or deleting crosspoint assignments as
necessary.
4. Click Done to exit the Salvo Editor.
Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo

Click at the intersection of the source and destination lines.
The crosspoint is added to the salvo.
Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo

1. Position the cursor over the crosspoint to be deleted and click the right mouse button.
The Lock/Protect/Clear shortcut menu opens.
2. Select Clear at the Salvo Editor dialog box to delete the crosspoint.
Select Clear All at the Salvo Editor dialog box to clear all crosspoints.
Copying an Existing Salvo

1. Click Copy at the Salvo Editor dialog box.
The Copy Salvo dialog box opens.
2. In the Copy Salvo From box, select the salvo to be copied to the new salvo. The new salvo name is
already be displayed in the Copy To box.
 Click Overwrite to completely overwrite any crosspoints previously selected in the new salvo.
Any previously existing crosspoints are deleted from the new salvo.
 Click Merge to merge the two salvos. Existing crosspoints from both salvos are stored in the new
salvo. No crosspoints are deleted.
Figure 469: Copying a Salvo
Creating a Command Select Key

The Command Select key allows you to assign an arbitrary X-Y command to a panel’s key. For details on
X-Y commands, refer to your Imagine Communications Serial Protocol Reference, or contact Customer
Service.
1. Select the Command option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 470: Creating a Command Select Key
2. Select the command to be associated with the key by clicking on the arrow located to the right of
the Select Command box.
3. Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired command.
4. Click Done.
Adding Commands
1. Click Add Command.
A default name appears in the Edit Name box.
2. Type over the default name in the Edit Name box with a new name.
3. Select the type of command string you wish to use (ASCII or Hex) by clicking on the appropriate
radio button.
4. Enter the command string in the Edit Command box.
Editing Commands
1. Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Select Command
box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices, and then select the command to be edited.
3. Highlight the name and/or command string and type over with the new information.
Deleting Commands
1. Select the command by clicking on the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Select Command
box.
2. Scroll through the list of choices, and then select the command to be deleted.
3. Click Delete.
Creating a Function Key

In the RCP-IDe and RCP-12×2BAp panels, several radio button selections are "greyed" to indicate that
they are not available as an option.
1. Select the Function option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 471: Creating a Function Key
2. Select the function to be associated with the key by clicking on the appropriate radio button.
Available options are shown below.
Edit Button Function Key Options
Option Description
Take Executes any preset crosspoint assignments
Panel Enable When enabled, causes the panel to function normally; when
disabled, source polls are performed, but no crosspoint changes
are made
Shift Requires you to press the <Shift> key to fire a salvo (to prevent
inadvertent execution of salvos)
Clear All Clears all preset crosspoint assignments
Back Space Clears the last preset crosspoint assignment entered (not
available on RCP-12×2BAp)
Scroll Up Increments the source by one
Scroll Down Decrements the source by one
Window Select* Allows you to select which panel window (display) you want to
preset
Window Clear * Allows you to clear any presets from a panel window (display)
Option Description
†
Page Up Increments set-up button pages by one
Page Down† Decrements set-up button pages by one
Destination Status† Displays the status and bitmap of a particular destination
†
Source Status Displays the status and bitmap of the lowest level source
connected to a particular destination
* ABA panels only
†
RCP-IDe panels only
Creating a Panel Status Key

A Panel Status key is used to indicate whether the control panel is connected to a routing switcher.
With a Panel Status key configured, the router system is polled periodically to determine if the panel is
connected. If the key on the control panel is lit, the panel is connected to a router. If the key is not lit,
the panel is not connected to a router. Pressing a Panel Status key has no effect on the router.
1. Select the Panel Status option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 472: Creating a Panel Status Key
Polling the system uses bandwidth, so the time interval should be as long as possible to save
bandwidth for other operations such as firing salvos.
2. In the Poll Interval list box, select the time interval in seconds at which the system should be polled.
(For example, if "5" is selected, the router is polled every 5 seconds.)
3. Click Done.
Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only)

Although ABA panels have only four display windows and can status a limited number of levels at one
time, it is possible to create multiple pages, each with a different definition. For example, one page on
an ABA-XY panel might be configured to display the video, audio and time code levels separately (one in
each window); a second page could be configured to display the video in one window, the left and right
channels of audio in one window, and the time code in the third window. To create multiple pages, first
create a Page key.
You can also create Page keys by double-clicking on any selection button displayed on the control panel
bitmap on the Windows + Paging tab.
1. Select the Page option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 473: Creating a Page Key
2. Click the up or down buttons to the right of the Number of Pages box to select the number of pages
to be included on this panel.
3. Click the drop-down arrow located to the right of the Page Number box to select the page number
that is to be associated with this selection key.
4. Scroll through the list of choices and select the appropriate page number.
Creating a Lock Key

Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the Lock feature.
The Locks option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent changes to the Destination.
L\-ocking a destination prevents anyone from changing the Desti\-nation.
1. Select the Locks option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 474: Creating a Lock Key
2. Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio button (any features not applicable to
your panel is greyed out).
 Choose XY to allow a panel to lock the current selected destination.
 Choose Dual to allow a panel to lock up to two specified destinations.
Creating a Protect Key

Dual 32×1, 16×1, 8×1, 5×1, and 4×1 RCPp panels do not support the Protect feature.
The Protects option allows a Destination to be locked to prevent inadvertent changes to the
Destination. With the Protects feature enabled, whoever enabled the Protect can change the
destination at will, but other users are prevented from changing that destination until the Protect is
removed.
1. Select the Protects option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 475: Creating a Protect Key
2. Click the appropriate Properties – Destination Function radio button (any features not applicable to
a panel are greyed out).
 Choose XY to allow a panel to protect the current selected destination.
 Choose Dual to allow a panel to protect up to two specified destinations.
Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key

The Breakaway/Follow option defines a selection key to function as either a Breakaway or a Follow key.
• A Breakaway key allows the operator at a push-button panel to select only the levels assigned to the
button. For example, if a video breakaway button is pressed, and then a source is selected, the
source are connected to the current destination, but only on the video level. The audio level are
unaffected.
• A Follow key allows the operator to return the panel to AFV mode with a single key press.
1. Select the Break-away/Follow option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 476: Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key
2. Click the appropriate radio button to select either Breakaway or Follow.

3. For a breakaway button, also select the levels that are controlled by the button.
The lowest level is statused.
Creating an Alarm Key (RCP Panels, RCP-IDe, RCP-32x8CQp,

16x2CS, and 32x2CS Panels Only)
The Alarm option allows you to monitor specified hardware alarms.
1. Select the Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 477: Creating an Alarm Key
2. In the Edit Name box, type over the default name with a new name.
3. Click Configure....
The Edit Source Alarm list box opens to allow you to define an alarm definition for the new alarm
key. (See Using the Alarm Editor (on page 1170) for more information about using this function.)
4. After the Alarm Editor list box returns you to the Edit Button Function list box, click OK to accept all
changes and additions.
Using the Alarm Editor
Figure 478: Edit Source Alarm List Box
The Edit Source Alarm list box shows the alarm type(s) for an associated alarm key. That alarm key is
monitored by the pushbutton panel.
The list box also displays the following types of information about existing items:
• Device ID
• Device type
• Level
• Alarm type
• Alarm description
Adding Alarm Types

At the Edit Source Alarm list box, click Add....
The Add Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Add Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a "General"
detection style.)
• Use the "General" default detection style (see Using the General Detection Style (on page 1171)) for
all panels (except ABA panels) when you want to monitor alarms for an entire frame.
• Use the "Extended" detection style (see Using the Extended Detection Style (on page 1172)) when
you want to monitor alarms for a specific module’s behavior.
The "Extended" detection style currently works only with Panacea or Integrator Gold modules.
Using the General Detection Style
Figure 479: Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (General Detection Style Selected)
1. Leave the radio button selection at "General."

2. Click the arrow to the right of the Level drop-down list box, and then select the Level to be
associated with the alarm type.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then select the frame address to
be associated with the alarm type.
4. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box:
Table 138: Alarm Types

Alarm Type Description
0x1 Fan 1 failure
0x2 Fan 2 failure
0x4 Power supply 1 failure
0x8 Power supply 2 failure
0x100 System power supply 1 failure
Alarm Type Description

0x1000 System fan 1 failure
0x40000 XY bus 1 error
0x80000 XY bus 2 error
0x100000 No flash
0x200000 Old database
Clicking on a second alarm type does not deselect the first alarm type you chose. You must deselect
an Alarm type by clicking on its name so that it is no longer highlighted.
5. Click OK to return to the Edit Source Alarm list box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Using the Extended Detection Style
Figure 480: Add Alarm Entry Dialog Box (Extended Detection Style Selected)
1. Click the radio button selection next to "Extended."
2. Click the arrow to the right of the Level list box, and then select the Level to be associated with the
alarm type.
3. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID list box, and then select the frame address to be
4. Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type list box, and then select the frame type to be
The "Frame Type" list box currently lists only Panacea or Integrator Gold.
5. Click the arrow to the right of the Module list box, and then select the module type to be associated
with the alarm type.
Clicking on a second alarm type does not deselect the first alarm type you chose. You must deselect
6. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
Extended alarm values range from decimal number 0 to 255. The actual meaning of each alarm
value is defined differently, depending on the module type that is "stuffed" in the frame. See the
specific frame's configuration and operation manual for details.
7. Click OK to return to the Edit Source Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the Edit Button
Function dialog box.
8. At the Edit Button Function dialog box click OK to return to the Edit Panel dialog box, and then click
OK to accept the changes.
Editing Alarm Types

The Edit Alarm Entry dialog boxes look almost exactly like the Add Alarm Entry dialog boxes. Only the
dialog box title is different. Using the General Detection Style (on page 1171) and Using the Extended
Detection Style (on page 1172) show what these dialog boxes look like.
The process for editing an alarm type is similar to that for adding an alarm type.
1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that you want to edit, and then click
Edit....
The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a "General"
detection style.)
 Use the "General" default detection style for all panels (except ABA panels) when you want to
monitor alarms for an entire frame.
 Use the "Extended" detection style when you want to monitor alarms for a specific module’s
behavior.
4. (If using the "Extended" detection style only) Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type drop-
down list box, and then select the frame type to be associated with the alarm type.
5. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the Edit Source Alarm
list box.
6. At the Edit Source Alarm list box click OK to accept the changes.
Deleting Alarm Types

1. At the Edit Source Alarm list box, highlight the alarm entry that you want to delete. To select more
than one alarm types, using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift> or
<Ctrl> keys while selecting the alarm entries.)
2. Click Delete (to delete a single alarm type) or Delete All (to delete all alarm types).
A system prompt appears and asks you if you want to continue.
3. Click Yes to return to the Edit Source Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the Edit Panel
dialog box.
4. At the Edit Panel dialog box click OK to accept the changes.
Creating a Source Alarm Select Key

This option is not available for ABA panels.
The Source Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a logical source for a logical
crosspoint switch. It also provides you with the capability to monitor specified hardware alarms.
1. Select the Source Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 481: Creating a Source Alarm Select Key
2. Click the arrow located on the right of the Source box, and then select the desired source.
3. To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name box, and then click Configure....
The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a "General"
detection style.)
behavior.
Click the arrow to the right of the Frame ID drop-down list box, and then select the frame address to
(If using the "Extended" detection style only) Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type drop-
5. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box, and then click OK to return to the Edit Source Alarm
list box.
Clicking on a second alarm type does not de-select the first alarm type you chose. You must deselect
6. At the Edit Source Alarm list box click OK to accept the changes.
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key

This option is not available for ABA panels.
The Destination Alarm option allows you use a push button panel to select a logical destination for a
logical crosspoint switch. It also provides you with the capability to monitor specified hardware alarms.
1. Select the Destination Alarm option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 482: Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key
2. Click the arrow located on the right of the Destination box.

3. Scroll through the drop-down list, and then select the desired destination.
4. To enter a new name, type over the default name in the Edit Name box, and then click Configure....
5. The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box opens. (The Edit Alarm Entry dialog box defaults to a "General"
detection style.)
behavior.
(If using the "Extended" detection style only) Click the arrow to the right of the Frame Type drop-
8. Select the alarm type from the Alarm list box.
Clicking on a second alarm type does not de-select the first alarm type you chose. You must deselect
9. Click OK to return to the Edit Destination Alarm list box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Creating a Parametric Key

If a selected frame is not a Panacea clean switch/quiet switch router, the only two available options are
signal presence (source) and signal presence (destination).
The Parametric option allows you to set up individual parameters affecting inputs and outputs for
Platinum frames and Panacea frames.
1. Select the Parametric option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 483: Creating a Parametric Key
2. In the Edit Name dialog box, enter a name for the parametric key being created.
3. To access the Parametric Editing Setup main display, choose one of the following options:
 Click on Configure... in the Control combo box to create or edit a list of parametric settings
assigned to control buttons. (If the associated frame does not have clean/quiet switch routing
capabilities, the Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Adding Parametric Settings (on page
1178)) only allows you to change the Frame ID. All other selections for that frame are greyed
out.)
 Click on Blink... or Monitor... in the Monitor combo box to create or edit a list of parametric
settings assigned to monitoring/alarm or blinking/alarm buttons on a control panel.
4. The Parametric Editing Setup list box appears and the Parametric Editing Setup list box opens to
allow you to define a controlling, monitoring, or blinking setup for the new control key. (See Using
the Parametric Editing Setup Capability (on page 1177) for more information about using this
function.)
5. After the Parametric Editing Setup list box returns you to the Edit Button Function list box, click OK
to accept all changes and additions.
Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability
Figure 484: Parametric Editing Setup List Box
The parametric setup list boxes for configuring, monitoring, and blinking look almost exactly alike. Only
the dialog box title is different.
The Parametric Editing Setup list box shows the parametric settings for an associated control panel key.
That key is monitored by the pushbutton panel. If you chose Monitor... or Blinking... setups, the control
panel reports alarm conditions via a steady or a blinking light on the button. The list box also displays
the following types of information about existing items:
• Frame ID
• Parameter
• Matrix/Level
• Input/Output
• Parameter
• Condition
• Value
• Logical Operator (Blink and Monitoring options only)
Adding Parametric Settings

1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Add....
The Edit Parametric Information dialog box (below) appears.
Figure 485: Edit Parametric Information Dialog Box
2. From the Frame ID box, select the Platinum or Panacea router associated with this control panel
button.
3. From the Parameter box, select the appropriate parametric setting. Descriptions of the parameters
available for the different setups (Configure, Monitor, or Blinking) are shown in Table on page 28.
4. From the Matrix box, select the matrix ID number that corresponds to the one you selected at the
Transitions tab.
5. From the Input box, select the desired physical input. The drop-down list contains an entry for each
of the inputs currently available on the level selected. (This option may not appear for all Parametric
selections.) Panacea clean/quiet switch routers are limited to 16 inputs.
Table 139: Setup Mode Parameter List
Mode
Parameter Description
Configure Blink/Monitor
Signal presence (source) Source signal is present or not No Yes
present
Signal presence (destination) Destination signal is present or not No Yes
present
Reference type Sync reference types No Yes
Clean switch: source in time Source is locked and timed-up with No Yes
the external sync reference
Clean switch: source H timing Source is locked, but is x amount of No Yes
pixels out of time with the external
sync reference
Clean switch: source V timing Source is locked, but is x amount of No Yes
lines out of time with the external
sync reference
Mode
Clean switch: invoke auto- Send a command to the QS to Yes Yes
timing perform an autotime to determine
the timing of the sources against the
external sync reference input
Reclocker data rate Rate at which data is reclocked (see Yes Yes
Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ
Modules) (on page 953) for actual
duration frequencies)
Reclocker lock Reclocker is locked to a set data rate No Yes
Quiet switch: reference Indicates to Navigator or the RS-232 No Yes
status port that a reference is present, and
what format it is
Quiet switch: reference Indicates to Navigator or the RS-232 No Yes
frequency port which external sync reference
type is present; this is a combination
of the number of lines, interlaced or
progressive scanning (i or p), and
the frame refresh rate in Hertz (Hz);
for example, 1080i/59.94Hz, or
720p/50Hz
Video transition type Selects type of video transition from Yes Yes
current source to next source (see
Modules) (on page 953) for a list of
video transition types and their
corresponding functions)
Video transition duration Number of frames during which a Yes Yes
selected video transition type occurs
Audio transition type Selects type of audio transition from yes Yes
current source to next source (see
Modules) (on page 953) for a list of
audio transition types and their
corresponding functions)
Audio transition duration Number of frames during which a Yes Yes
selected audio transition type occurs
Auto transition Reserved for future use – –
Mode
Audio effects Changes the embedded audio for a Yes Yes
given video signal on the designated
output (see Audio Effects (on page
956) for a list of effects and their
corresponding results)
Audio gain Allows more precise control of the Yes Yes
strength of the audio signal
Audio source Allows mapping input signals of the Yes Yes
audio channels to a video signal
1. From the Output box, select the physical output location on the frame back panel. (This option may
not appear for all Parametric selections.) Panacea clean/quiet switch routers are limited to 2
outputs – PGM1 and PGM2.
2. From the Condition box, select the monitoring condition you want to associate with this control
panel button. The conditions listed vary, depending on whether you selected Configure, Blink, or
Monitor at the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.(In addition, the conditions listed may or
may not be appropriate for your selected parameter.)
 If you are in Configure mode, choose the appropriate condition.
 If you are in Monitor or Blink mode, choose the appropriate mathematical operator.
3. From the Value box, select the item value that corresponds to the Condition you chose.
4. (Monitor and Blink modes only) From the Operator box, choose the appropriate Boolean operator
that corresponds to the Condition you chose.
5. Click OK to return to the Edit Button Function dialog box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Editing Parametric Settings

1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Edit....
The Edit Parametric Information dialog box (Adding Parametric Settings (on page 1178)) appears.
2. Change the setting for the list box you want to edit. Descriptions of the list box drop-down options
are described in Adding Parametric Settings (on page 1178).
Deleting Parametric Settings

1. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, highlight the parametric setting that you want to delete. To
select more than one setting, using standard Windows selection techniques (hold down the <Shift>
or <Ctrl> keys while selecting the setting entries.)
2. Click Delete.
The setting disappears from the list box.
To delete all parametric settings, follow these steps:
4. At the Parametric Editing Setup list box, click Delete All.

The settings disappear from the list box.
5. Click Yes to return to the Edit Button Function dialog box, and then click OK to accept the changes.
Creating a Chop Key (RCP-ABA and RCPp-LCD only)

The Chop key allows two sources to be rapidly switched on one destination. A Chop alternately switches
the controlled Destination (on all applicable levels) between two Sources, in a repetitive manner.
Applications include signal timing and camera matching.
1. Select the Chop option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 486: Creating a Chop Key
2. From the Predefined Chop Rates drop-down list box, select one of the following:
 Select Fast for a switch rate of 10 frames per second.
 Select Medium for a switch rate of 20 frames per second.
 Select Slow for a switch rate of 30 frames per second.
 For a customized switch rate (that is, a rate different from 10, 20, or 30 frames per second):
• Select Custom.
• Set the switch rate you desire in the Chop Rate spin box.
Creating an On-Air Swap Key (RCP-12×2BAp only)

The Swap function allows you to take the sources on one destination and exchange them with sources
on the other destination. This function enables you to use one destination as a preview (or cue) bus and
the other as an on-air bus.
1. Select the On-Air Swap option from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Figure 487: Creating an On-Air Swap Key
2. Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination A icon box.
A drop-down list containing icons for currently defined destinations appears.
3. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for Destination A, and then click the
destination you want to swap the resources from.
4. Click the drop-down list arrow next to the Destination B icon box. A drop-down list containing icons
for currently defined destinations appears.
5. Using the scroll bar, scroll through the list of sources for Destination B, and then click the desired
destination you want to swap the resources to.
To disable this function, select None from the Edit Button Function drop-down list box.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix G
Appendix G
Troubleshooting and FAQ

Troubleshooting Router Panel Problems
Certain Router Actions Fail to Execute
If you create sequential rules for an action to query router status (a select or query action) and an action
to invoke a router command (a clear, lock, protect, or take action), you must use different types of event
triggers for the two actions.
This gives Navigator sufficient time to process the status action fully before it tries to implement the
command action.
If rules with the same event trigger list sequentially on the Rules tab, Navigator actually processes them
simultaneously.
Crosspoint Restriction Fails to Execute

Some features provided in router control panels require support by the routing devices. If the device
you are using does not support crosspoint restriction then performing a Restrict command will have no
effect. Check the device documentation provided with the routing product to determine if it supports
this feature.
Different GUIs Show Different Lock/Protect Status for the Same Destination
Your Navigator Router Control GUI may show a Protect status while a Matrix Panel page shows Lock for
the same destination. This occurs because when one user or panel protects a certain router destination,
all the other panels or users that have a different ID than this one are locked for that destination.
A Navigator Router Control GUI identifies who has applied a Protect status via their user ID, while a
Matrix Panel identifies who has applied the protect status by using the panel’s address. You can set the
panel to the same address as the user ID, following this procedure:
1. Choose Options > User Accounts from the main menu.
The Login Options dialog box opens.
2. Select your user ID from the Users list.
3. In the User Information section of the dialog box, make note of the ID number for this User ID.
4. In Build mode, right click on the Matrix panel and select Component Wizard... from the menu that
appears.
5. From the Address drop-down menu, choose the same number as the user ID you noted in step 3.
6. Click Finish to save the change to the Matrix panel.
A Matrix Panel’s address can be set when the page is created using the Router Wizard. For more
information, see Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix Panels (on page 709).
If you have RouterWorks installed, you will see the same sort of behavior. See your RouterWorks manual
for information on setting the address of a panel.
Logical Source Info From On Crosspoint Status Event is Blank

For example, the source ID and name may be blank.
In Navigator, you can extract the information from the 'On Crosspoint Status' event and use it in an
action (for instance, you might want to use the logical source name provided by the event to update a
text element in your page). The logical source information from the 'On Crosspoint Status' event is
assembled based on the input values provided by the event. As you might have inputs on the crosspoint
event that do not correspond to your logical source configuration, the event matching algorithm is not
able to determine which logical source corresponds to the input values in the 'On Crosspoint Status'
event, assigning blank values to both Source ID and Source Name event parameters.
You can change the way the event matching algorithm operates by using the 'Set Crosspoint Match
Type' action. By default, the 'On Crosspoint Status' event uses the 'Full Match' type when extracting the
logical source information from the event.
My system is still quite busy even though Navigator is closed.

The router Service, which handles all communication to routers, runs all the time and might be still
connected to a frame. Implement Task Manager (Run > taskmgr), select RouterService.exe at the
Processes tab, and then click End Process.
Can’t publish to Platinum or Magellan panel

If publishing to a Platinum or Magellan panel fails, you may need to disable the proxy server.
1. From the Start menu, select Control Panel > Internet Options.
2. Click the Connections tab, and then click Lan Settings.
3. Under Proxy server, uncheck Use a proxy server for your LAN.
4. Click OK twice to close all the open dialog boxes, and try publishing again.
Frequently Asked Questions

• Database Editor Sources and Destinations (on page 1185)
• Database Editor Advanced Functions (on page 1185)
Database Editor Sources and Destinations

Why do I not see all available levels on my Sources and Destinations tabs or why are columns
missing?
Ensure that all columns are not hidden. A hidden column can be located by missing sequential column
headers. To unhide a column, select the Show All Columns icon from the toolbar. (See Manipulating
Display Elements (on page 751) for instructions.)
When I deselect a check box for Advanced options while inserting and deleting rows, why are
my settings not retained?
In order to retain your Insert or Delete Advanced option settings, you must select these options in the
Options dialog box. This will allow your Advanced Options settings to be retained in the workspace.
What is the difference between "X" and " " for Source Indexes?
The "X" indicates that a particular source when switched will cause the selected output to disconnect
the active crosspoint. The blank space (" ") indicates that a particular source, when switched, will not
affect the current crosspoint since it is, in effect, not mapped.
Why can’t I see the physical level(s) index on the logical source or destination tabs?
By default the levels section displays the levels name you assigned to that level and not the physical
level index. To display the physical index, change the setting in the toolbar for the status name drop-
down to physical index or matrix index.
Why am I not able to see status names I have set for destinations?
Currently none of our control surfaces expose such functionality as status names for destinations.
However, in the future this new information can and will be utilized on new control surfaces.
Why doesn’t the Insert Options dialog box appear when I insert a new device type?
The Show Dialog selection in the Options dialog box is not enabled. To enable the selections, click the
Options icon, and then check the Show Dialog selections for the desired tabs and functions.
Database Editor Advanced Functions

Can I copy and paste my current input and output names from a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet
into Database Editor?
Yes, the steps below explain how to import spreadsheet data into Database Editor.
1. Open the Logical Database Editor dialog box, and then select the Levels tab.
If your current matrix size is smaller than the number of names you need to paste into the grid,
increase your logical system size sources and destinations to correspond to your system size. See
Specifying Logical Router Size (on page 782) for instructions.
2. Click Apply, and then go to the corresponding level(s) row(s) you would like to paste the names into.
Increase that level(s) size accordingly.
3. Click Save.
4. Switch to Excel, and then copy the information you want to paste into Database Editor.
Logical source or destination field length is 8 characters, so you should modify your naming
conventions to fit into the Database Editor fields prior to pasting data.
5. Switch to Database Editor, and then open the Source and or Destination tab, as appropriate.
6. Paste your spreadsheet information into the Database Editor.
When I wild-partitioned my system in Navigator, and then open it in Database Editor, my

logical sources and destination tabs look like they are missing data?
The Database Editor did not lose any data but is simply presenting it in a different way. The physical
indexing is the only portion that looks different with the new software but your system will still behave
appropriately.
How do I make my sources/destinations appear in the same order as I see when I sort by a
certain column on the Sources tab?
The source number column governs the order in which sources appear on panels. If you want to use a
different ordering, have the Sources tab sorted in the order you want; then, click the Resync List icon to
put the Source numbers in that new order. When configuring new panels they will use this order of
sources.
Magellan CCS Navigator Appendix H
Appendix H
Function Mapping: Routermapper to

Navigator
Function Mapping Overview
Experienced RouterMapper users will find virtually all of the same functions and features within
Navigator. These features have been remapped, as shown below.
Double click on
Communication Tab  Properties Options  Plug Ins…
routing node in
of a Routing System Advanced Routing
Navigation window
Control  Configure…
 Preferences
Configuration Name
Folder Naming and shortcut creation all

done by creating shortcuts and folders in
the Navigation window
Other notable feature – firmware

upgrade of P-Res-H devices done in
Control tab of P-Res-H (Panacea,
All devices show up in the Navigation Panels, Edge)
windows under the configuration they
are found or created in
Select the device(s) and select

Delete in the Navigation window
Double click on a Discovery handled by Right click under a routing system

Double click on device and select Create 
routing system in Build MAC Address Scanning
in Build mode in the You are then presented with
mode to launch the and routing devices in
Navigation window Control Panel, Router, or Edge
logical database editor Discovery window
Right click on device(s) or system Right click on device(s) or system

and select Poll in Navigation and select Download in
window Navigation window
Figure 488: Quick Reference Chart: Finding RouterMapper Features in Navigator
User's Guide Index
Adding a Route to the PC Routing Table • 158

Index Adding a Router Component to an Existing
Navigator Page • 721
‘ Adding a Router Frame • 671
Adding a Routing Salvo • 672
‘Remembering’ FTP Information • 183 Adding a Routing Tie-Line • 672
‘Remembering’ Telnet Information • 183 Adding a Routing View to a NUCLEUS
‘Unable to Open a New Control Window’ Configuration • 190
Message Appears • 342 Adding a Signal Monitor • 397
6 Adding a Software Clock to a Navigator Page •
6800+ETH Control Dialog Box Streaming Tab • 421
307 Adding a Software Routing Panel • 672
Adding a Spin Control • 419
A Adding a Standalone Program to the Tools
Accessing the Edit Panel Dialog • 1018, 1049 Menu • 73
Accessing the Router Control • 1125 Adding a Streaming Icon • 405
Activating a Group License (RCP-IDe 32x32 and Adding a Symbol from the Resource Tree • 409
64x1 Panels Only) • 1071 Adding a Symbol with the Create Objects
Activating a License • 518 Toolbar or Menu • 408
Activating a NAVIGATOR-INT License • 619 Adding a Text Object • 394
Activating a NAVIGATOR-NX License • 567 Adding a Thumbnail or Stream to a Graphical
Activating and Deactivating Router Navigation Page • 402
Configurations • 685 Adding a Timer Control • 416
Activating NUCLEUS License Keys • 188 Adding a User Account • 51
Adding Adding a User Group • 44
web router application Adding Alarm Types • 1175
devices • 1092 Adding an ActiveX Control • 414
panels • 1093 Adding an Edge Frame • 671
users • 1100 Adding an Image • 395
Adding a Clock to a Navigator Page • 422 Adding an IP3 to a Legacy Router System • 1115
Adding a Crosspoint to a Salvo • 1167 Adding Buttons • 387
Adding a Destination to the Panel • 1035 Adding CENTRIO Systems to a NUCLEUS
Adding a Gauge Control to a Navigator Page • Configuration • 189
423 Adding Combiner System Components • 986
Adding a Group • 1075, 1078 Adding Combiner Systems • 985
Adding a Hardware Routing Panel • 671 Adding Commands • 1168
Adding a Hot Button • 393 Adding Controls • 413
Adding a Hotspot • 396 Adding Destination Groups • 821
Adding a License Key for MPEG-4 Streaming in Adding Devices to a Configuration on the
QSEE6800+ • 302 Control Panel Tab • 221
Adding a MIB file for an SNMP Device • 87 Adding DPS-575 Parameters to NUCLEUS
Adding a Navigator Frame • 398 Configurations • 240
Adding a New Category • 794 Adding Dynamic Routing Threads • 826
Adding a New Group • 802 Adding Edge Configurations • 998
Adding a New Index • 797 Adding Home and Unity Buttons • 224
Adding a Player Control • 421 Adding Host IP Addresses for a Discovery • 104
Adding a Pre-Defined Server • 577 Adding HView SX Hybrid Matrices • 861
Adding a Resource Icon Symbol • 407 Adding Icons • 744
User's Guide Index
Adding Index Panels • 1097 Administering User Logs • 54

Adding Items in the Nexio Wizard • 577 Advance Settings Dialog Box • 1013
Adding Level Descriptions • 791 Advanced Control Card • 938
Adding Levels • 787 Advanced Control Options • 1010
Adding Logical Destinations • 776 Advanced Controls • 1124
Adding Logical Sources • 762 Advanced Functions • 819
Adding Menus • 218 Advanced Router Control • 71
Adding Menus above Devices on the Control Alarm Problems • 335
Panel Tab • 220 Alarm Query Fails When a Device Reboots • 336
Adding Menus Below Devices on the Control Alarm Tab • 953
Panel Tab • 222 Alarms • 507
Adding MIBs for SNMP Devices • 623 Alarms Behave Differently on Card Edge than in
Adding Missing MIBs • 634 Magellan CCS Navigator • 336
Adding New Addresses for SNMP Traps • 177 Alarms Fail to Appear on a Magellan CCS
Adding NEXIO MIB Files • 582 Navigator Page • 507
Adding Objects to a Graphical Navigation Page • Alarms Monitoring • 404
387 Alarms Not Appearing Correctly in Japanese or
Adding Off-Line Devices • 192 Chinese Language Interface • 339
Adding or Editing a Salvo • 1166 Aligning and Spacing Graphical Navigation
Adding Other (Legacy) Imagine Communications Objects • 428
Frames • 996 Allowing Access to a Limited Set of Sources and
Adding Parameters • 219 Destinations • 1025
Adding Parameters on the Control Panel Tab • AminoSTB Control • 72
222 Ascending Levels in the Controls Tab • 286
Adding Parametric Settings • 1183 Assigning • 1102
Adding Previously Undefined Servers and web router application configurations • 1102
Switches • 578 Assigning a Category Key • 1040
Adding Processing or SNMP Devices to a Assigning a Favorite Destination to a Selection
NUCLEUS Configuration • 191 Key • 1028
Adding Pushbutton Panels • 1094 Assigning a Favorite Source or Destination to a
Adding Resources to the Navigation Pane • 124 Selection Key • 1026
Adding Storage Solutions by Polling • 580 Assigning a Favorite Source to a Selection Key •
Adding TDM Matrices • 858 1027
Adding Text • 1084 Assigning a Specific Source to the Remote
Adding the Default IP Address for a Discovery • Access List • 833
104 Assigning Access Rights • 46
Adding Tielines • 808 Assigning All Sources to the Remote Access List
Adding Tielines at the Sources or Destinations • 833
Tab • 810 Assigning and Editing Names • 764, 778
Adding Tielines at the Tielines Tab • 810 Assigning Configuration Options on the Control
Adding Users • 1101 Panel Tab • 224
Adding Web Router Application Devices • 1092 Assigning Configurations • 1102
Adding Wideband Matrices • 856 Assigning Destination Groups • 823
Adjusting a Configuration • 525 Assigning Destination or Status Names • 778
Adjusting Destination Numbers • 779 Assigning Destinations to a Group • 1078
Adjusting Level Inputs • 770 Assigning Device Access Rights • 47
Adjusting Level Outputs • 782 Assigning Icons to Levels • 790
Adjusting Source Numbers • 767 Assigning Images to Destinations • 777
User's Guide Index
Assigning Images to Sources • 764 Before You Begin Setting Up Web Panels or
Assigning Items to a Group • 802 Users • 1092
Assigning Level Inputs and Physical Inputs • 768 Breakaway Take • 1134
Assigning Level Outputs and Physical Outputs • Broadcast Communication Fails • 333
780 Build Mode Options for Graphical Navigation
Assigning or Changing Level Names • 788 Pages • 381
Assigning or Changing Level Numbers • 787 Build Mode Problems • 504
Assigning Page Access Rights • 50 Building an Alarm Description • 93, 632
Assigning Parameters With NUCLEUS Built-In Tools • 63
Configuration Wizard • 217
C
Assigning Physical Map Order • 875
Assigning Preset Access Rights • 49 Can I copy and paste my current input and
Assigning Selection Keys • 1054, 1058 output names from a Microsoft Excel
Assigning Source or Status Names • 766 spreadsheet into Database Editor? • 1191
Assigning Sources or Destinations to a Category Can I Create my Own Magellan CCS Navigator
• 794 Pages? • 348
Assigning Sources or Destinations to an Index • Can I Keep the Application Always on Top? •
798 350
Assigning Sources to a Group • 1075 Can I Select Multiple Check Boxes at Once? •
Assigning Sources to a Panel • 1038 350
Assigning View Order for Assignments Tab and Can I use CCS Software to Configure my
Panel • 1023 Devices? • 347
Associating an Index Name to a Category • 794 Can I use Magellan CCS Navigator to Build a
Audience • 15, 369, 510, 562, 612, 656 Graphical Network Model? • 347
Audio Control • 551 Can Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor Network
Audio Effects • 962 Device Environments? • 349
Audio Gain • 963 Can Magellan CCS Navigator Monitor the
Audio LEVELS • 552 Overall Status of Network Devices? • 348
Audio Monitor Output • 555 Can Magellan CCS Navigator Perform Router
Audio Monitoring • 306, 551 Operations? • 349
Audio Mono Proc • 554 Can’t publish to Platinum or Magellan panel •
Audio Pair Processing • 553 1190
Audio Processing Settings • 961 Canceling the Transfer of an LCP or RCP Control
Audio Profile Assign • 556 Panel Configuration File • 258
Audio Source • 964 Cancelling the Transfer of a NEO Frame
Auto Validation • 205, 732 Configuration File • 249
Aux Bus • 535 Cannot Find Magellan CCS Navigator Pages •
Aux Bus Dynamic Controls • 536 507
Cannot Install Magellan CCS Navigator on
B Windows XP or Windows 2003 • 323
Background Does Not Update After Image File Is Capturing the Existing State of the Router •
Modified • 504 1166
Backing Up Files From a CCS Device • 169 Card Slot View Fails to Report Card Alarms •
Backup and Restore Utility • 38 337
Basic Controls • 1124 Categories Tab • 736
Basic Magellan CCS Navigator System (No CCS Device Configuration • 153
Licenses) • 22 CCS Device Control • 282
Basic Routing System Control • 1123 CCS Device Discovery • 99
User's Guide Index
Certain Router Actions Fail to Execute • 1189 Clean Switch Tab • 955
Changing a Category Name • 795 Clean Switch Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules)
Changing a Dynamic Input Source • 539 • 958
Changing a License Key • 37 Clearing a Selected Source • 1135, 1145, 1150
Changing a Panel Brand • 1063 Clearing Alarms • 271
Changing a Panel Definition • 1042 Clearing an ‘Alarm Query Failed’ Message • 293
Changing a Panel ID • 1062 Clearing Selection Key Assignments • 1029,
Changing a Panel Name • 1062 1055, 1059
Changing a Panel Style • 1063 Clearing the Configurations List from the
Changing a Password • 54 Control Panel Tab • 260
Changing a Source's EQ By-Pass • 952 Clearing the Internet Explorer Cache Closes
Changing Frame Properties • 926 Magellan CCS Navigator • 330
Changing Initial Source Mode Settings • 868 Clock and Timer • 535
Changing Input Sources (Dynamic Inputs) • 538 Color Codes • 759
Changing Intensity for Auxiliary Keys • 1090 Combiner System Polling Problems • 692
Changing Intensity for Panel Keys • 1091 Communication Options and SNMP
Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style • 1060 Configuration • 83
Changing Protocol Settings • 890 Completing the Control Settings Entries • 900
Changing Protocols • 1044 Completing the First Page of the NEXIONav
Changing Sync Settings • 868 Wizard • 574
Changing the Frame Settings • 944 Config Files Tab • 939
Changing the Network Settings of a Device • Configurable Transition Functions (ISCP Only) •
155 540
Changing the Operational Language • 61 Configuration Dialog Boxes • 68
Changing the Panel Name, ID, Style, Brand, or Configuration Problems • 330
Protocol • 1043 Configuration Using NAVIGATOR-INT • 621
Changing the PC Network Settings • 159 Configured Matrices Tab • 900, 943, 990
Changing the Quiet Switching Support of a Configuring RCPp Panels • 1049
Destination • 957 Configuring a DPS-575 for HTTP Control and
Changing the Reclocker Setting of a Destination Monitoring • 242
• 951 Configuring a HView SX Pro Matrix • 865
Changing the Slew Rate of Destinations • 952 Configuring a NUCLEUS Control Panel Using
Changing User Account Information • 53 Magellan CCS Navigator • 188
Changing User-Configurable Button Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display • 25
Assignments • 526 Configuring Alphanumeric Breakaway (ABA)
Channel Group • 557 Panels • 1017
Checking a Device’s Control Status • 291 Configuring an HTTP Server Node to Open a
Checking the Access Rights for a CCS Device • Web Browser • 317
294 Configuring Categories and Indexes • 792
Checking the Active Window Type • 284 Configuring Connection Types • 844
Checking the Connection Status of a Device • Configuring Control Panel Buttons • 1159
341 Configuring Custom Control Views • 283
Checking the Control Access Rights for a Device Configuring Data Router Matrix Types • 970
• 145 Configuring Destinations • 775
Choosing a Router Panel • 697 Configuring Edge Protocol Gateways • 998
Choosing Devices to Control • 532 Configuring Favorites • 625
Choosing the Router for a Source Preview or Configuring Favorites for a Device • 254
Multi Display Page • 707
User's Guide Index
Configuring Favorites for an SNMP Device • Contact Information • 2

194, 633 Contacting Us • 657
Configuring Grouping • 800 Contiguous Components Matrix Partitioning •
Configuring HView SX Hybrid Audio • 864 928
Configuring Integrator Frames • 967 Contiguous Partitioning • 871, 946, 979
Configuring Integrator Gold Matrix Types • 974 Contiguous Partitioning (With Advanced
Configuring IP3 • 1105 Settings) • 1154
Configuring ISCP • 520 Control Card(s) Tab • 995
Configuring ISCP-LITE • 527 Control Mode Problems • 506
Configuring Legacy Frames • 996 Control Options • 595
Configuring Levels • 785 Control Panel Button Configuration Overview •
Configuring Levels on Multiple Pages • 1033 1159
Configuring Magellan CCS Navigator as an Agent Control Problems • 339
to Send Traps to a Receiver • 594 Control Settings Tab • 918
Configuring Mouse Click Repeat • 392 Controlling an EDGE-DPS575 Gateway • 241
Configuring Multiple Devices • 114 Controlling an HTTP Device • 318
Configuring Navigator to Forward Traps and Controlling and Monitoring Farad Storage
Notifications • 97 Devices • 603
Configuring Network Settings for a CCS Device • Controlling and Monitoring MGX Servers • 597
153 Controlling and Monitoring News Servers • 596
Configuring Panacea Frames • 922 Controlling and Monitoring Speciality Servers •
Configuring Panacea Parametric Settings • 954 601
Configuring Platinum Frames • 853 Controlling and Monitoring Tielines • 812
Configuring Primary and Secondary Channels Controlling and Monitoring Transmission
(ISCP Only) • 532 Servers • 592
Configuring PVX • 1121 Controlling Backlight Intensity • 1089
Configuring Regular Matrix Types • 969 Copying a File from a CCS Device • 173
Configuring Router TRAX for NUCLEUS • 228 Copying an Existing Salvo • 1167
Configuring SNMP Control • 33 Copying an Identical Resource Icon • 128
Configuring SNMP Settings • 576 Copying and Pasting a Resource Icon • 125
Configuring Sources • 761 Copying Discovery Results • 116
Configuring the Auxiliary Keys • 1030, 1051 Copying Favorites Between Devices • 627
Configuring the Control Card • 930 Copying Favorites Between Virtual Devices •
Configuring the Levels Affected • 1059 196
Configuring the Matrix Type • 925 Copying Parameter Favorites • 256
Configuring the Routing Matrix • 923, 968 Copying Presets in the Navigation Pane • 300
Configuring the Source Selection Window • Copyright, Trademark, and Warranty
1033 Information • 351
Configuring the Web Router Application • 1092 Copyrights • 351
Configuring Tielines • 1121 Correcting a Failed Upgrade Procedure • 168
Configuring Web Panels • 1093 Correcting a Failed Upgrading Procedure • 171
Connecting Navigator to an IP3 Controller • CPU Usage Goes to 100% When Magellan CCS
1107 Navigator Executes a Rule • 506
Connecting the DPS Uploader Utility to a Create a Preset using the Matrix Grid • 1141
Specific DPS-575 • 246 Create a Preset using the Source and
Connecting to Routers in Control Mode • 1123 Destination Buttons • 1141
Connection Property Settings Group Box • 895, Creating a Breakaway/Follow Key • 1173
897 Creating a Button • 388
User's Guide Index
Creating a Category/Index Key (ABA Series Creating a Salvo • 673

Panels Only) • 1164 Creating a Salvo Select Key • 1165
Creating a CENTRIO Panel for a NUCLEUS Creating a Source Alarm Select Key • 1179
Configuration • 206 Creating a Source Select Key • 1161
Creating a Chop Key (RCP-ABA and RCPp-LCD Creating a Take Button • 729
only) • 1187 Creating a User Log • 55
Creating a Clear Button • 730 Creating a Value Expression • 92, 631
Creating a Command Select Key • 1167 Creating an Alarm Key (RCP Panels, RCP-IDe,
Creating a Configuration file for a CCS LCP or RCP-32x8CQp, 16x2CS, and 32x2CS Panels
RCP • 252 Only) • 1174
Creating a Configuration File for a NEO Frame • Creating an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration File •
247 237
Creating a Configuration Without Using a Creating an ISCP Panel • 523
Wizard • 219 Creating an ISCP-LITE Panel • 528
Creating a Crosspoint Select Key • 1163 Creating an On-Air Swap Key (RCP-12×2BAp
Creating a Destination Alarm Select Key • 1180 only) • 1188
Creating a Destination Select Key • 1162 Creating and Maintaining Routing Systems •
Creating a Frame View Page • 373 666
Creating a Function Key • 1169 Creating and Managing Categories • 794
Creating a Lock Key • 1171 Creating and Managing Groups • 801
Creating a Macro • 457 Creating and Managing Indexes • 797
Creating a Multi Display or Source Preview Creating Buttons to Load Other Magellan CCS
Router Page • 706 Navigator Pages • 393
Creating a Multi-Monitor Streaming Page • 399 Creating Clock Styles • 422
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Creating Configuration Hierarchies • 185
Preset’ Action • 496 Creating Customized Pages • 635
Creating a Navigator Page using the ‘Load Creating Destinations Representing Actual PIPs
SuiteView Preset’ Action • 495 • 918
Creating a NEO SuiteView Navigator Page • 495 Creating Grid, Single-Bus, Multi Bus and Matrix
Creating a New Custom Device Type • 840 Panels • 711
Creating a New Device in the Serial Settings Tab Creating Hierarchical Domains • 291
• 85 Creating Input Button Clones • 727
Creating a New Device Type • 839 Creating Links Between Symbols • 411
Creating a New Device Type from a Template • Creating New Trap Rules • 91, 630
840 Creating NEXIO Systems Using the Wizard • 573
Creating a New Graphical Navigation Page • 372 Creating Off-Line Devices • 624
Creating a New Routing System • 669 Creating Output Button Clones • 729
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration • 212 Creating Routing Panels for a NUCLEUS
Creating a NUCLEUS Configuration Folder • 189 Configuration • 197
Creating a Page Key (ABA Series Panels Only) • Creating Rules to Select a Destination when a
1171 Page Loads • 726
Creating a Panel Status Key • 1170 Creating the Custom Page Properties • 726
Creating a Parametric Key • 1181 Creating the First Input Button • 726
Creating a Preset • 494 Creating the First Output Button • 728
Creating a Protect Key • 1172 Creating Virtual Devices and Assigning Favorites
Creating a Router Database Backup • 688 to Virtual Devices • 192
Creating a Routing System • 667 Crosspoint Restriction Fails to Execute • 1189
Creating a Routing System via Discovery • 668 Crosspoint Restrictions • 1136
User's Guide Index
Custom Control Views • 643 Deleting a Resource Icon • 126

Custom Non-Rectangular Buttons Appear Deleting a Routing Configuration • 688
Rectangular • 504 Deleting a Specific Source from the Remote
Custom Properties Viewer • 67 Access List • 833
Custom Properties Window • 503 Deleting Alarm Types • 1179
Customizing Your Server Pages • 584 Deleting All Sources from the Remote Access
Cutting and Pasting a Resource Icon • 127 List • 833
Cutting, Copying and Pasting Graphical Deleting an Index • 798
Navigation Objects • 427 Deleting Commands • 1168
Deleting Destinations from a Group • 1079
D
Deleting Device Types • 847
Database Editor Advanced Functions • 1191 Deleting Dynamic Routing Threads • 834
Database Editor Sources and Destinations • Deleting Groups • 803
1191 Deleting Nodes from the Resource Tree • 413
DBEditor IP3 Configuration • 1109 Deleting One Dynamic routing Thread Entry •
Defining Access Options • 225 834
Defining an Event or Action Property for the Deleting Parametric Settings • 1186
First Time • 436 Deleting Presets in the Navigation Pane • 301
Defining Category Indexing • 793 Deleting Routing Thread Entries • 834
Defining Conditions • 436 Deleting Several Non-Adjacent Dynamic Routing
Defining Custom Properties for a Page • 385 Thread Entries • 835
Defining Destinations as Sources for Output Deleting Sources from a Group • 1076
Monitoring • 983 Deleting the Databases (Magellan CCS
Defining Global Properties • 378 Navigator Server Only) • 36
Defining ISCP Master Control Channels • 521 Deleting the Magellan CCS Navigator Folder •
Defining ISCP-LITE Master Control Panels • 527 35
Defining Other Configuration Options • 226 Deleting Users • 1103
Defining Rules • 430 Denying Access to Specific Sources or
Defining the Destinations • 1052 Destinations • 1025
Defining the LCD Auto-Assignment Order • 227 Destination Groups • 821
Defining the Sources • 1055 Destination Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X
Deleting Panels • 1053
web router application users • 1103 Destination Tab Assignments for all Panels
Deleting a Category • 796 Except 32x8 CQ-X Panels • 1052
Deleting a Configuration File from a Control Destinations Tab • 734, 951
Panel • 260 Detected Cards Tab • 950, 993
Deleting a Configuration File from a NUCLEUS • Detected Matrices Tab • 907, 949, 993
236 Detection of a Lost Network Connection Takes
Deleting a Configuration from an EDGE-DPS575 Too Long • 334
• 240 Determining Destinations Accessible to AFV/MB
Deleting a Crosspoint from a Salvo • 1167 Models • 1036
Deleting a Custom Property for a Page • 386 Determining Destinations Accessible to SB
Deleting a File from a CCS Device • 173 Models • 1036
Deleting a Frame Matrix • 943, 990 Determining Destinations Accessible to the
Deleting a Global Property • 379 Panel • 1033
Deleting a Group • 1076, 1079 Determining Destinations Accessible to XY
Deleting a Macro • 459 Models • 1033
Deleting a Navigator Page • 376
User's Guide Index
Determining Sources Accessible to a Panel • E

1037
Edge Web Router Application • 1016
Device Can’t Be Controlled or Has No Version
EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and
Information • 333
Control • 237
Device Control through HTTP • 317
Edit Button Function Dialog Box • 1020, 1050
Device Status Column Reports No Status or ‘Not
Editing • 1103
Ready’ • 341
Editing a Frame Matrix • 942, 990
Device Status is Not Reported for X75 or X75-
Editing a Frame’s Configuration • 942, 989
RCP Devices • 340
Editing a Get Device Values Action • 641
Devices Configured using Magellan CCS
Editing a Page • 425
Navigator • 187
Editing a Panel Configuration • 228
Devices Configured Using the Control Panel
Editing a Previously Created Device in the Serial
Interface • 188
Settings Tab • 86
Diagnostics Dialog Box Fails to List Alarms for
Editing a Router Control Panel on a Navigator
SNMP Traps • 337
Page • 721
Different GUIs Show Different Lock/Protect
Editing a Routing Panel • 205
Status for the Same Destination • 1189
Editing a Set Device Values Action • 642
Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Input Buttons • 728
Editing a Set Graphical Object State Action •
Differentiating the ‘Cloned’ Output Buttons •
641
729
Editing Alarm Types • 1178
Difficulty Configuring an NSM card • 334
Editing an EDGE-DPS575 Configuration • 240
Disable Thread • 819
Editing an IP Address • 126
Disabled Alarm Remains Listed in Diagnostics
Editing an On Device Change Event • 639
Dialog Box • 336
Editing an On Graphical Object State Change
Disabling a Background Transition • 543
Event • 640
Disconnect • 821
Editing and Managing Device Types • 846
Disconnecting a Destination • 1135, 1145
Editing Commands • 1168
Discovering Devices • 621
Editing Components of a Routing System • 672
Discovering NEXIO Servers • 570
Editing Destination Groups • 824
Discovering Routing Devices • 662
Editing Details of a Panel Definition • 1030
Discovery Fails to Find a Device • 331
Editing Device Types • 846
Discovery Pane • 66
Editing Dynamic Routing Threads • 829
Discovery Takes Too Long • 332
Editing Ethernet Protocols • 933
Display Properties • 720
Editing LCD Button Displays (RCP-IDe Panels
Displaying Customized Pages • 645
Only) • 1083
Displaying the ISCP or ISCP-LITE Control Panel •
Editing Parametric Settings • 1186
530
Editing Protocols • 931
Displaying the Router Configuration • 677
Editing Remote Access Lists • 830
Docking or Floating a Tool Dialog Box • 75
Editing Salvos • 676
Doing a Breakaway Take • 1126
Editing Serial Protocols • 931
Downloading Device Definitions • 695
Editing the Elements of a Parameter or Alarm •
Downloading Dynamic Routing Thread
636
Information • 835
Editing the Matrix Configuration • 944
Dragging and Dropping a Resource Icon • 127
Editing the Router Matrix • 900, 990
Dynamic Menu Selector Buttons • 534
Editing the Rules on a Control • 637
Dynamic Routing Thread Management
Editing User Information • 1103
Overview • 825
Editing web router application user information
• 1103
User's Guide Index
Email Handling for Notifications • 608 Finding a CCS Device from an Alarm Record •
Embedded Messages • 760 269
Enable Message Filtering by Server Finding a Device • 114
Connections, Devices, and Level Inputs and Finding Items in the Navigation Pane • 123
Outputs • 895 Finding Text • 757
Enable Thread • 818 Finding the Resource Icon for a CCS Device •
Enabling a Background (Preset to Program) 183
Transition (ISCP Only) • 543 Finishing • 1089
Enabling a Key Transition (ISCP Only) • 542 Finishing Matrix Partitioning • 929
Enabling an Audio-Over Transition (ISCP Only) • Firmware Tab • 916
544 Flow Chart of Generic Rule Creation Process •
Enabling and Disabling Signal Presence 431
Messages • 891 Folder Browser Dialogs Do Not Show Network
Enabling Changes to a Panel’s Definition • 1064 Drives in Windows 8 • 335
Enabling Connections Group Box • 892, 896 Follow Take • 1131
Enabling Matrix Partitioning • 905, 945, 977 Frame Control Dialog Box Shows Error or
Enabling Message Filtering by Connections, Warning for Slot • 342
Devices, and Level Inputs And Outputs • 892 Frames Fail to Communicate with PC after
Enabling Redundant Crosspoints • 867 Power Failure • 324
Enabling Serial or X-Y Ports on the Platinum Frequently Asked Questions • 347, 1190
Communications Back Panel • 899 FTP Fails During Device Configuration • 333
Enabling TDM Starting Slot Offset • 899 Function Mapping
Entering Network Address Information • 100 Routermapper to Navigator • 1193
Error Feedback • 759 Function Mapping Overview • 1193
Ethernet Protocols • 1068
G
Example
FR6802+ Frames • 140 General Options for the Graphical Navigation
Multiviewer System • 142 Pane • 380
Examples using the Regional Date Settings of General Tab • 954
MM/DD/YY • 420 Generating Category Names • 795
Executing a Salvo • 1145 Getting a Configuration File From a NUCLEUS •
Expediting a Software Solution • 345 234
Exporting a NUCLEUS Configuration file to XML Getting Help from Customer Service • 345
• 234 Getting Help with Configuration Hierarchies •
Exporting Database Names • 747 184
Exporting into a Spreadsheet File Format • 748 Getting Help With Magellan CCS Navigator •
Exporting into a Text File Format • 747 344
External Keyers • 544 Getting Help with the Control Tool • 293
Getting Version Information • 178
F Global Properties Do Not Work Across Pages •
Features • 565 506
File Permissions Prevent Use of Magellan CCS Glossary • 358
Navigator • 326 Graphical Navigation Dialog Boxes • 69
File Share Handling From Magellan CCS Graphical Navigation Page Creation • 372
Navigator Clients • 327 Graphical Navigation Troubleshooting • 504
Filling a Column • 756 Graphical Navigational Tree • 581
Filtering Alarms for a CCS LCP or RCP • 260 Grid and Bus Panel Operation • 1129
Filtering Columns • 754 Grid Panel • 700
User's Guide Index
Grouping Tab • 737 Integrator Data Routers • 991

Grouping Tab Components • 800 Integrator Gold Routers • 992
Interface control • 72
H
Interface Overview • 57
Handling Server Notifications • 607 Internal Keyers • 546
Handling Tieline Options when Tielines are Interpreting Alarm Colors • 267
Unused • 821 Interpreting Fields in the Alarm Lists • 267
Hardware Requirements • 566, 618 Introduction to Graphical Navigation • 371
Hiding a Column • 754 Introduction to InterfaceNAV • 614
How do I make my sources/destinations appear Introduction to ISCP • 512
in the same order as I see when I sort by a Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device
certain column on the Sources tab? • 1192 Control • 17
I Introduction to NexioNAV • 564
Introduction to Routing Components • 658
I/O Hardware Module Dialog Box • 950
IP Address Disappears from Icon Name • 334
IconMaster Software Control Panel (ISCP) • 513
IP Settings and Device ID Configuration • 112
ICONM-SCP License • 22
IP3 Controller Initial Configuration • 1105
ICONM-SCP-LITE License • 22
IP3 Routing System Logical Configuration • 1112
Identifying Icons on the Database Editor Toolbar
ISCP and ISCP-LITE Configuration • 520
• 739
ISCP-LITE • 514
If Setup Detects a Previous Installation • 32
If Setup Detects No Previous Installations • 31 L
Ignoring Alarms • 270 LCP and RCP Configuration • 252
Importing a NUCLEUS Configuration file from Levels Tab • 735
XML • 234 License • 352, 559, 649
Importing Files for Database Editor • 749 License Tab • 890, 941, 1015
Importing from a File • 749 Limitation of Liability • 353, 560, 649
Importing from Another Device • 750 Limited Software Warranty • 352, 559, 649
Importing, Exporting, and Sorting Levels • 788 Limiting the Number of Listed SNMP Traps • 88
In Frame Wizard, Modules Do Not Appear in Limiting the Sources and Destinations Available
Frame Correctly • 505 to a Panel • 1022
Indicate an Installed Submodule • 943 Listing the Configuration Files on a NUCLEUS •
Inserting Sources and Destinations • 848 236
Installation • 566 Listing the Configurations Stored on a CCS
Installation and Logging On • 515, 617 Control Panel • 259
Installation Cannot Update Users Database • Listing the Files Installed on a CCS Device • 172
321 Loading an Archived Alarm Log into the Offline
Installation Exits without Finishing • 320 Tab • 272
Installation Problems • 319 Loading Presets in the Navigation Pane • 299
Installing Files for East Asian Languages • 60 Locally acknowledging SNMP traps • 270
Installing IconMaster Software Control Panel • Lock Panel (ISCP Only) • 531
516 Locking a Destination • 1149
Installing InterfaceNAV • 619 Locking a Destination or Salvo • 1138
Installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software • Locking a Router Destination • 1126
567 Locking a Salvo • 1146
Installing Other Required Software • 26 Locking and Protecting a Salvo • 1146
Installing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software Locking and Protecting Destinations • 1142,
• 29 1149
InstallShield Errors • 319
User's Guide Index
Locking and Protecting Destinations and Salvos Manually Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator
• 1137 Software • 35
Locking and Protecting Router Destinations • Map Names Tab • 889, 940, 1014
1126 Mapping Logical Sources to Level Inputs • 771
Locking Destinations • 1142 Mapping of Level Outputs • 783
Logging Configuration Activity • 181 Master Control • 72
Logging In and Account Administration • 41 Matrix and Matrix Classic Panels • 700
Logging Off or Exiting • 43 Matrix Panel Operation • 1140
Logging On • 41, 517 Matrix Partitioning • 1152
Logging On and Setting the Operational Mode • Menus or Tools Not Available • 330
516, 568 Models • 1049
Logical Database Setup • 731 Modifying a Macro • 459
Logical Source Info From On Crosspoint Status Modifying a Previously Used Discovery • 105
Event is Blank • 1190 Modifying an Index Item in a Properties Pane •
LTITimer Control Actions • 417 223
Modifying an SNMP Trap Destination • 178
M
Modifying Group Properties • 51
Machine Control • 535 Modifying Host IP Addresses • 105
Magellan CCS Navigator Cannot Control a Modifying Level Colors • 789
Module in the Navigation Pane • 340 Module Alarm is Difficult to Identify in Control
Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Display Button Dialog Box • 336
State Images • 504 Module Firmware Needs to be Upgraded • 321
Magellan CCS Navigator Fails to Start after Monitoring Alarm Conditions • 606
Setup • 323 Monitoring Device Addresses • 1066
Magellan CCS Navigator Hangs While Monitoring Matrices Tab • 915
Discovering 6800+ Devices • 332 Monitoring Network Status • 605
Magellan CCS Navigator Has Problems Monitoring Signal Presence • 1129, 1141
Discovering a 6800+ Frame • 332 Monitoring Tielines • 812
Magellan CCS Navigator Install Fails during Monitoring Video Signals • 313
Router Database Upgrade • 320 Mono Breakaway • 873
Magellan CCS Navigator Starts up with Build Mono Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) •
Mode Only • 324 1157
Managing Device Types • 847 Moving a Graphical Navigation Object • 427
Managing Dynamic Routing Threads for Legacy Moving a Selection Key • 1020
Products • 825 Moving between Magellan CCS Navigator Pages
Managing Enhanced Tielines • 804 • 501
Managing Magellan CCS Navigator Licenses • 36 Moving to a Specific Line Location • 759
Managing Permissions • 327 Multi Display Panel • 697
Managing User Accounts • 51 Multi-Bus and Multi-Bus with Salvo Panels • 703
Managing User Groups • 44 Multicasting • 303
Manipulating Display Elements • 754 Multiviewer PIPs • 143
Manual Information • 15, 369, 510, 562, 612, My system is still quite busy even though
656 Navigator is closed. • 1190
Manually Adding a New Matrix • 855
Manually Adding Components to a Routing N
System • 670 Navigating Away From the NEXIO Home Page •
Manually Creating a Monitoring Matrix • 878 588
Manually Creating a Router Control Page • 725
User's Guide Index
Navigating Parameters Using the Generic Opening and Closing a Configuration Dialog Box
Control Dialog Box • 286 • 154
Navigating Parameters Using the Tree View • Opening and Closing Control Dialog Boxes • 282
287 Opening Nexio Control Pages from the
Navigating the Generic Control Tab • 285 Navigation Pane • 587
Navigating the Resource Tree • 122 Opening NEXIO Pages • 585
Navigating Through Selections • 757 Opening Nexio System Pages Using the Open
Navigating Within NEXIO Pages • 587 Menu • 586
Navigation Pane • 64 Optimizing Dynamic Routing Threads • 835
Navigation Tool Won’t ‘Undo’ or ‘Redo’ a Preset Order of Installation for Software and Firmware
Load • 341 • 28
Navigator Licenses • 18 Ordering Devices in a Configuration Hierarchy •
NAVIGATOR-CLI License • 21 185
NAVIGATOR-DEV License • 19 Output Module • 143
NAVIGATOR-INT License • 21
P
NAVIGATOR-NX License • 22
NAVIGATOR-RTR License • 22 Panacea Web Panels Tab • 965
NAVIGATOR-SNMP License • 21 Panacea Web Users Tab • 966
NAVIGATOR-SRV License • 19 Panels, web router application • 1093
NEO Frame Configuration • 247 Panning in a Graphical Navigation Page • 378
NET SNMP License • 353, 650 Parameter Controls • 647
Network Event Diagnostics • 263 Parameters Panel • 66
Network Information • 1009, 1048 Parametric Settings Tab • 955
Network is Overloaded With Duplicate SNMP Park • 820
Traps • 339 Partitioning Tab • 948, 992
Network View Construction • 118 Partitioning the Matrix • 868, 926, 977
NEXIO Configuration With a NAVIGATOR-NX Password Does Not Work • 326
License Key • 570 Password Has Been Lost or Forgotten • 326
NEXIO Control and Monitoring • 585 PC Running Magellan CCS Navigator Operates
No Alarms, Status, or Changes in Parameter Sluggishly • 324
Values Reported for an X75 Device • 340 PC Turned Off While ‘On Air’ • 328
No Partitioning • 870 PC Work Space Settings Need to be Returned to
No Partitioning (With Advanced Settings) • Default • 329
1152 Performing a Breakaway switch • 1131
No Video Shows in the Signal Monitor Dialog Performing a Breakaway Switch • 1132
Box • 342 Performing a Multiple Take • 1133
NUCLEUS Configuration • 187 Performing a Switch • 1142
NUCLEUS Device Firmware Upgrade Fails • 333 Performing an AFV switch • 1132
Performing Successful Transitions (ISCP Only) •
O 540
Obtaining the IP Address of a PC • 156 Performing Takes • 1148
Obtaining the User Manuals • 511, 563, 613 Performing Takes With a Grid or Bus Panel •
Obtaining User Manuals • 16, 370, 656 1130
Online Help Hangs After User Selects Performing Takes with a Matrix Panel • 1141
‘Properties’ • 328 Physical Device Setup • 852
Opening a Device Control Dialog Box from an Pinging the IP Address of a CCS Device • 108
Alarm Record • 265, 270 Platinum Control • 1128
Opening an Existing Page • 376
User's Guide Index
Playing MPEG-4 Video from the Navigation Reconfiguring Channels and Changing
Pane • 310 Multiviewer Profile Assignments • 526
Plug-ins • 71 Rediscovery • 116
Polling Devices • 690 Reducing the Size of the Magellan CCS
Polling Status Indicators • 691 Navigator Process • 325
Possible Polling Problems • 692 Refreshing a CCS Control Panel Configuration •
Preface • 15, 369, 510, 562, 612, 656 258
Preparing the PC for Installation • 29 Refreshing a Graphical Navigation Page • 500
Preparing to Connect an IP3 Controller to a CCS Refreshing Parameters • 627
Network • 1106 Refreshing the Alarm Lists • 271
Preparing your NEO SuiteView System for a Refreshing the Connection Status of a CCS
Firmware Upgrade • 165 Device • 293
Preset (PST) Bus and Program (PGM) Bus (ISCP Refreshing the NEO Frame Configuration • 250
Only) • 537 Regular Integrator Routers • 991
Preview Switch • 816 Removing a Destination from the Panel • 1035
Previewing and Printing a Page • 377 Removing a Standalone Program • 74
Previewing Grouping Setups • 1081 Removing a User Account • 53
Problems at Startup • 323 Removing a User Group • 50
Problems Using AutoCAD Drawings as Removing Components from the Windows
Backgrounds on Graphical Navigation pages • Registry • 36
505 Removing Custom Button Themes • 392
Problems With Presets in QSEE6800+ Modules • Removing Destination Groups • 824
341 Removing Forgotten Passwords from LCPs and
Product Information • 657 RCPs • 261
Program Bus • 538 Removing Host IP Addresses from the Discovery
Propagating Audio Levels • 1113 Options • 106
Property Sheets • 80 Removing Icons • 746
Protecting a Router Destination • 1127 Removing ISCP Software • 516
Protecting Destinations • 1143, 1150 Removing Levels • 787
Protecting Destinations and Salvos • 1138 Removing Logical Destinations • 777
Protecting Salvos • 1147 Removing Logical Sources • 763
Publication Information • 2 Removing Magellan CCS Navigator Software •
Publishing Logical Files to Devices • 750 568, 620
Purpose • 15, 369, 510, 562, 612, 656 Removing MIB files • 88
Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software
Q
• 34
QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Boxes • 303 Renaming a Group • 802, 1076, 1078
Quick Selects • 550 Renaming Configurations • 185
Quiet Switch Tab • 957 Renaming Status Names and Related
R Destinations • 780
Renaming Status Names and Related Sources •
RCP-ABA 1RU Models • 1017
768
RCP-ABA 2RU Models • 1018
Renumbering Sources • 764
Reading the Network Configuration from a
Reordering Columns in the Alarm List • 265
Device • 160
Replacing Text • 758
Recalling a Preset Page • 499
Required Hardware • 24
Reconfiguring a Hybrid Router System With an
Required Hardware, Operating System and
IP3 • 1120
Software • 515, 566, 617
User's Guide Index
Required Operating System and Software • 25 S

Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming • 28
Sample Resource Tree for an Engineer User •
Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool
139
• 29
Sample Resource Tree for an Operator User •
Resizing Columns • 265
139
Resizing Graphical Navigation Objects • 426
Sample Resource Tree Views • 139
Resolving Auxiliary Key Definition Errors • 1031
Saving Alarms to a File • 271
Resolving Inaccessibility Errors • 1042
Saving Graphical Navigation Pages • 375
Resource Folders • 119
Saving Presets in the Navigation Pane • 298
Resource Icons • 120
Selecting 22 Input Mode (ISCP Only) • 538
Restarting a CCS Device from the PC • 174
Selecting a Create Device Type Option • 839
Restoring a Router Database • 689
Selecting a Crosspoint on the Salvo Editor
Restoring Default Icons • 746
Screen • 1166
Restoring the Default MIB Files Setting • 88
Selecting a Frame • 922, 967
Restricting a Crosspoint • 1144
Selecting a Level Associated with a Selection
Restrictions • 985
Window • 1032
Retrieving a Configuration File from a CCS
Selecting a Matrix Type • 923, 968
Control Panel • 260
Selecting a Multiviewer Profile (ISCP Only) • 533
Returning a Configuration Dialog Box to its
Selecting a Row in an Alarm Table • 264
Default Size • 183
Selecting an Effect • 548
Reusing or Editing a Previously Set Condition •
Selecting an IconMaster Channel to Control
436
(ISCP Only) • 532
Reusing the Event Properties • 443
Selecting Aux Bus Source Selections • 537
Revision History • 15, 369, 510, 562, 612, 656
Selecting Connection Types • 841
RGB Stereo Components Matrix Partitioning •
Selecting Controls • 880
927
Selecting Destination Categories (Cat/Index
RGB Stereo Partitioning • 945, 978
mode only) • 202
RGB/Stereo Partitioning • 870
Selecting Destination Indexes (Cat/Index mode
RGB/Stereo Partitioning (Advanced) • 1153
only) • 202
Router Components on a Navigator Page • 721
Selecting Destination Statuses for your
Router Control Fails to Unlock/Unprotect
NUCLEUS Routing Panel (Multi-Bus Only) •
Destinations • 334
201
Router Frame Tab • 942, 989
Selecting Destinations • 709, 714
Router Node Functionality • 659
Selecting Destinations for your NUCLEUS
Router Page and Panel Construction • 697
Routing Panel • 200
Router Rule Creation • 460
Selecting Device Alarms for Transmission • 97
Router Shortcut Menus • 660
Selecting Device Favorites • 626
Routing Operations • 717
Selecting Device Type Details • 846
Routing Operations Tools • 660
Selecting Devices • 621
Routing System Maintenance • 682
Selecting Displays for Your CENTRIO Panel • 210
Running a Discovery • 108
Selecting Groups for Control (ISCP Only) • 533
Running a Discovery for a Router • 665
Selecting Levels • 713, 843
Running a Full Discovery • 108
Selecting Levels for your NUCLEUS Routing
Running a Partial Discovery • 110
Panel • 201, 204
Running Diagnostics • 723
Selecting Matrix Monitoring • 877
Running the NEO SuiteView Upgrade Wizard •
Selecting Matrix Partitioning Types • 869
166
Selecting PIP Attributes • 208
User's Guide Index
Selecting PST or PGM Bus Source Selections Setting Custom Page Properties • 386
(ISCP Only) • 537 Setting Destination Mode Options • 230
Selecting Routing Operations and Display Setting Device Options • 175
Properties • 716 Setting Diagnostics Options • 273
Selecting Salvos for your NUCLEUS Routing Setting Diagnostics Properties for an Alarm
Panel • 204 Message • 272
Selecting Source Categories (Cat/Index mode Setting Discovery Options • 101
only) • 204 Setting Discovery Save Options • 106, 665
Selecting Source Categories for Your CENTRIO Setting E-Mail Notification of Alarms • 277, 608
Panel • 211 Setting Ethernet Port Option Values • 1045
Selecting Source Indexes (Cat/Index mode only) Setting Ethernet Protocol Option Values • 1006
• 204 Setting General Navigation Properties for a
Selecting Source Indexes for Your CENTRIO Device • 130
Panel • 211 Setting Graphical Navigation Options • 380
Selecting Sources • 708, 715 Setting Host IP Addresses for a Discovery • 101
Selecting Sources for your NUCLEUS Routing Setting Host IP Addresses for a Router Discovery
Panel • 199 • 662
Selecting the Frame Size • 853 Setting HTTP Properties • 133
Selecting the Sources and PIPs for Your Setting Mapping Values for Pro-Bel
CENTRIO Panel • 208 Configurations • 1001
Serial Connection Error at Startup • 329 Setting Navigation Options • 147
Serial Port Conflict • 335 Setting Navigation Properties • 128
Serial Protocols • 1066 Setting Navigation Properties for an SNMP
Setting a Color Fill as a Page Background • 384 Server • 136
Setting a LTIMultiCharacter Display • 418 Setting Network Information • 1047, 1070
Setting a Rule for a Magellan CCS Navigator Setting Network Information for Edge • 1008
Object or Page • 431 Setting Options for Offline Viewing of Alarm
Setting a Streaming Object’s Properties • 405 Logs • 280
Setting ActiveX Properties • 420 Setting Parameter Favorites • 254
Setting Alarm Filtering Options • 275 Setting Preferences • 682
Setting Alarm Log Options • 278 Setting Properties for ‘Load SuiteView Preset’
Setting Alarms • 288 Action • 492
Setting an Action • 441 Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen Off’ Action
Setting an Event • 435 • 492
Setting an Image as a Page Background • 385 Setting Properties for ‘Set Fullscreen On’ Action
Setting Communication Options • 83, 493 • 491
Setting Conditions for • 437 Setting Properties for a • 455
Setting Conditions for ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Setting Properties For a • 477
Events • 461 Setting Properties for a `Set Crosspoint Match
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Trap’ Events • Type' Action • 474
486 Setting Properties for a ‘Button Blink Mode’
Setting Conditions for ‘On SNMP Variable Value Action • 450
Update’ Events • 485 Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected Salvo’
Setting Conditions for a • 437 Action • 484
Setting Conditions for an ‘On Custom Property Setting Properties for a ‘Clear Selected’ Action •
Change’ Event • 439 471
Setting Configuration Options • 182 Setting Properties for a ‘Configuration’ Action •
Setting Control Options • 294 443
User's Guide Index
Setting Properties for a ‘Control’ Action • 444 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Screen Mode’
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Salvo’ Action • Action • 456
482 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Symbol Properties’
Setting Properties for a ‘Execute Selected Salvo’ Action • 453
Action • 481 Setting Properties for a ‘Set Text Properties’
Setting Properties for a ‘Launch Application’ Action • 454
Action • 445 Setting Properties for a ‘SNMP Get Table’ Action
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Frame Page’ • 489
Action • 446 Setting Properties for a ‘Take Crosspoint’ Action
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Layout’ Action • • 473
446 Setting Properties for a ‘Take Selected’ Action •
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Page’ Action • 446 473
Setting Properties for a ‘Load Preset’ Action • Setting Properties for Alarm Filtering Actions •
447 443
Setting Properties for a ‘Lock Selected Setting Properties for an ‘Execute Macro’ Action
Destination’ Action • 476 • 445
Setting Properties for a ‘Product Info’ Action • Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Get Variable
449 Value’ Action • 488
Setting Properties for a ‘Product User Manual’ Setting Properties for an ‘SNMP Set Variable
Action • 449 Value’ Action • 488
Setting Properties for a ‘Protect Selected Setting Properties for the ActiveX Method’s
Destination’ Action • 475 Action • 456
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Destination Setting Router Discovery Options • 662
Status’ Action • 472 Setting Router Engine Options • 686
Setting Properties for a ‘Query Signal Presence Setting Router-Specific Actions • 469
Status’ Action • 472 Setting Router-Specific Events • 460
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Crosspoint’ Setting Rules to Perform SuiteView Actions •
Action • 478 491
Setting Properties for a ‘Restrict Selected Setting Serial Connection Preferences • 85
Crosspoint’ Action • 480 Setting Serial Port Option Values • 1044
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Destination’ Setting Serial Port Protocol Assignments and
Action • 470 Options • 999
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Salvo’ Action • Setting Signal Monitor Options • 315
481 Setting SNMP Navigation Properties • 135
Setting Properties for a ‘Select Source’ Action • Setting SNMP Options • 86, 175
471 Setting the Action Properties • 442
Setting Properties for a ‘Send String to COM Setting the ActiveX Properties for the LTITimer
Port’ Action • 493 Control • 418
Setting Properties for a ‘Set ActiveX Properties’ Setting the Actual Number of Inputs and
Action • 454 Outputs • 790
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Button Properties’ Setting the Amino STB Tab • 136
Action • 450 Setting the Behavior of the Diagnostics Dialog
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Custom Property’ Box • 274
Action • 451 Setting the Color of Text on a Resource Icon •
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Frame Custom 128
Property’ Action • 452 Setting the Command Tab • 132
Setting Properties for a ‘Set Link Properties’ Setting the Device Tab • 130
Action • 452
User's Guide Index
Setting the Display Order of Graphical Setting Up Text Characteristics for Individual
Navigation Objects • 427 Buttons • 1085
Setting the IP Address of a CCS Device • 154 Setting Up Text Characteristics for Multiple
Setting the IP Address of a New CCS Device • Buttons • 1085
155 Setting up the SNMP Agent • 934
Setting the IP Address of a PC • 157 Setting Up Web Users • 1100
Setting the IP Address of a PC on the Subnet of Setting Video Properties for the Signal Monitor
a CCS Device • 156 • 314
Setting the Levels Affected • 1031 Setting Weight at the Add Tielines Dialog Box •
Setting the Monitor Point Properties • 133 820
Setting the NSV-OUT Module to Fail-Safe Loader Setting Weight at the Tielines Tab • 819
Mode • 165 Shared Inputs • 873
Setting the Operational Language • 59 Shared Inputs (With Advanced Settings) • 1156
Setting the Operational Mode • 57, 518 Sharing Level Inputs • 773
Setting the Properties of a Button • 388 Shortcut Menus • 81
Setting the Properties of a Page • 384 Showing a Container Device’s Control Dialog
Setting the Properties of a Symbol • 410 Boxes • 285
Setting the SNMP Trap Color • 88 Showing and Closing a Tool Dialog Box • 75
Setting the View for Graphical Navigation Showing Product Information for a CCS Device •
Symbols • 411 146
Setting TimerIndex Actions • 416 Showing the Diagnostics Dialog Box • 263
Setting Up a Combiner System • 986 Showing the Signal Monitor Dialog Box • 312
Setting Up a Matrix • 854 Showing the User Manual for a CCS Device •
Setting Up Button Colors • 1087 184
Setting Up Button Images • 1086 Showing the User Manual for a CCS-Enabled
Setting Up Button Pages • 1064 Device • 294
Setting Up Button Text • 1084 Single-Bus Panel and Single-Bus Panel with
Setting Up Colors for Individual Buttons • 1087 Monitor • 705
Setting Up Colors for Multiple Buttons • 1088 SNMP • 1009
Setting Up Destination Groups • 1077 SNMP Agent • 887, 937, 1012
Setting Up Group Options • 1079 SNMP Agent Configuration Using Magellan CCS
Setting Up Grouping Functions (RCP-IDe 32x32 Navigator • 94
and 64x1 Panels Only) • 1072 SNMP Agent Options • 1010
Setting Up HView SX Hybrid Virtual Destinations SNMP Agent Options Dialog Box • 934
• 918 SNMP Control • 72
Setting Up Identical Images for Multiple Buttons SNMP MIB Load Errors Appear • 338
• 1087 SNMP Monitoring and Control Using Magellan
Setting Up Images for Individual Buttons • 1086 CCS Navigator • 86
Setting Up Optional Output Monitoring • 980 SNMP Plug-in • 485
Setting Up PIPs to Follow Destinations • 920 SNMP Trap Configuration • 89, 628
Setting up Platinum Frame Identification • 880 SNMP Traps Do Not Appear to be Received •
Setting up Platinum FTP Functions • 880 339
Setting Up Platinum I/O Sync and References • Software Installation • 24
883 Software Upgrade Options • 168
Setting Up Platinum Network Settings • 881 Software Upgrade Tool • 69
Setting up SNMP (Optional) • 884 Software User License and Warranty Agreement
Setting Up Source Groups • 1074 • 352, 559, 649
Sorting a Column • 755
User's Guide Index
Sorting Columns • 266 System • 888

Sorting Items in the Resource Tree • 120 System Information • 1009, 1048
Sorting Multiple Columns • 756 Systems • 938, 1013
Source Preview and Multi Display Page
T
Operation • 1148
Source Preview Panel • 698 Takes on a Grid Panel • 1134
Source Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-S Panels • Takes With a Multi-Bus Panel • 1131
1057 Takes with a Single-Bus Panel • 1130
Source Tab Assignments for 32x8 CQ-X Panels • Taking a Background On Air • 543
1057 Taking a Disconnect Breakaway Source • 1126
Source Tab Assignments for all Panels Except Taking a Disconnect Source • 1126
32x8 CQ-S and 32x8 CQ-X Panels • 1057 Taking a Source to a Destination • 1125
Sources Tab • 733, 952 Taking an AFV Switch • 1134
Specifies Device IDs for Status Message Posting Taking Selections On-Air (ISCP Only) • 540
Group Box • 894, 898 Technical Support • 657
Specifies Input & Output for Status Message Telnet Fails During Device Configuration • 331
Postings Group Box • 893, 897 Temporarily Removing Host IP Addresses • 106
Specifying Logical Router Size • 786 The Logical Database Editor Dialog Box • 733
SQL Server Re-installation Needs Authentication Tielines Tab • 738
• 322 Tielines Tab Components • 805
Standalone Tools • 73 Tieline-Specific Toolbar Components • 806
Starting a QuickTime Player From a Graphical Time Server Tab • 939, 1013
Navigation Page • 404 To add a manager address • 937
Starting a Standalone Program • 74 To add a manager address: • 1012
Starting Non-Magellan CCS Navigator To delete a manager address • 938
Applications from the Navigation Pane • 132 To delete a manager address: • 1013
Starting Software From the Navigation Pane • To delete an SNMP Trap Destination • 936
123 To modify a manager address • 938
Starting the Routing Panel Configuration Wizard To modify a manager address: • 1013
• 197, 711 Toolbars • 61
Status Bar • 70 Tools • 61
Statusing and Status Names • 764 Trace Destinations • 817
Stereo Breakaway • 874 Trace Thread • 814
Stereo Breakaway (With Advanced Settings) • Tracking • 534
1158 Trademarks • 2, 351
Stopping a Transfer Task • 164 Transferring a Configuration File to a CCS LCP or
Streaming in a Control Dialog Box • 303 RCP • 256
Streaming in a Graphical Navigation Page • 398 Transferring a Configuration File to a NEO
Streaming in Control Windows • 302 Frame • 248
SuiteView Control • 72 Transferring Configurations to Multiple Control
SuiteView Plug-in • 491 Panels • 233
Summary Transferring Files With the File Transfer Tab •
Manually Creating a Router Control Page • 170
726 Transferring MIBs to NUCLEUS • 235
Summary of Discovery Tasks • 100 Transferring NUCLEUS Configuration files • 231
Support Contact Information • 2 Transition Tab (P-SCQ and P-HSCQ Modules) •
Swapping Destinations • 1135, 1145 959
Switching a Single Level • 1135 Trap Destination IP Addresses • 885, 935, 1011
User's Guide Index
Troubleshoot Switch • 815 Using Alarm Filtering Contents • 261

Troubleshooting • 319 Using Alarm Tables • 264
Troubleshooting and FAQ • 1189 Using Control Dialog Boxes for Devices • 591
Troubleshooting Router Panel Problems • 1189 Using Customized Pages • 645
Turning Off ODBC Tracing • 325 Using Database Editor Wizards • 837
Using Device Discovery on NEXIO Servers • 570
U
Using Generic and Specific Control Dialog Boxes
Unable to get Streaming Video in Navigator • 284
Page or Device Control Dialog Box • 343 Using Graphical Navigation Context Menus •
Unblocking Magellan CCS Navigator • 328 588
Unhiding a Column • 754 Using Graphical Navigation Pages • 500
Unlocking a Destination • 1149 Using Graphical Tools • 739
Unlocking a Router Destination • 1127 Using Interface Dialog Boxes • 74
Unlocking a Salvo • 1146 Using ISCP and ISCP-LITE Panels • 530
Unlocking a Salvo or Destination • 1138 Using Menus • 81
Unlocking Destinations • 1143 Using Navigation Pages in Control Mode • 500
Unprotecting a Router Destination • 1128 Using Navigation Shortcut Menus • 144
Unprotecting Destinations • 1144, 1150 Using Navigation Shortcuts • 151
Unprotecting Destinations and Salvos • 1139 Using Older Generic Control Dialog Boxes • 289
Unprotecting Salvos • 1147 Using Panel Information • 722
Unrestricting a Crosspoint • 1144 Using Presets • 296, 1136
Updating Device IDs From Off-Line Devices Using Salvos • 1137, 1145
Using Information From On-Line Devices • Using Shortcut Menus • 752
625 Using the Add or Remove Programs Application
Updating License Keys and Logical Settings • • 34
888 Using the Advanced Router Control Plug-in •
Updating the Navigation Pane on a Client PC • 682
118 Using the Alarm Column • 149
Upgrading a NEO SuiteView Using the Wizard • Using the Alarm Editor • 1175
165 Using the Categories Tab • 678
Upgrading from Navigator 5.3 to Navigator 5.4 Using the CENTRIO Panel Configuration Wizard
64-Bit • 33 • 206
Upgrading Software • 161 Using the Configuration Dialog Box’s File
User Account Overview • 41 Transfer Tab • 169
Users, web router application • 1100 Using the Configuration Folder • 184
Using ‘On Crosspoint Status’ Events • 461 Using the Configuration List on a CCS Control
Using ‘On Lock/Protect Status’ Events • 463 Panel • 259
Using ‘On Restrict Status’ Events • 466 Using the Configuration Shortcut Menu • 182
Using ‘On Salvo Status’ Events • 464 Using the Configuration Status Bar • 154
Using ‘On Signal Presence Status’ Events • 467 Using the Configuration Status Bar and Log •
Using a Control Dialog Box to Find a Resource 249, 258
Icon • 293 Using the Control Shortcut Menu • 292
Using a Pre-made Button Theme • 390 Using the Create Tool to Add a Resource Icon •
Using a QSEE6800+ Control Dialog Box • 304 125
Using a QSEE6800+ Input Control Dialog Box • Using the Destinations Tab • 677
306 Using the Device Type Wizard • 838
Using a Source Preview Panel • 1151 Using the Diagnostics Shortcut Menus • 269
Using Alarm Filtering • 261 Using the Discovery Column • 151
User's Guide Index
Using the Discovery Column in the Tree View • V

117
Validating Routing/CENTRIO Panels After
Using the Discovery Shortcut Menu • 116
Upgrading • 335
Using the DPS-575 Control Interface • 241
Video Output Monitoring • 312
Using the DPS-575 Updater • 244
View Options for Graphical Navigation Pages •
Using the Extended Detection Style • 1177
383
Using the Filter Column • 151
Viewing an X75 Streaming Source • 310
Using the General Detection Style • 1176
Viewing Data Storage Devices • 604
Viewing Sources and Destinations Affected by a
• 428, 501
Category • 796
Using the Graphical Navigation Toolbar • 502,
Viewing Sources and Destinations Affected by
588
an Index • 798
Using the Grouping Tab • 679
Viewing the Activity of a Router • 724
Using the Image Management Utility • 743
Viewing the Communication Settings Tab • 134
Using the Imagine Communications Router
Viewing the Detected Cards Tab • 1008
Service • 686
Viewing the Preset Tab • 134
Using the Insertion Wizard • 847
Viewing the Shortcut Tab • 134
Using the ISCP Wizard • 524
Viewing the Size of the Magellan CCS
Using the Levels Tab • 678
Navigator.exe Process • 324
Using the Log Tab • 167
Viewing the User Log • 55
Using the Logical Database Editor Tool • 732
Viewing Thumbnails from FR6802+QXF Frames
Using the Modify Themes Dialog Box • 391
• 307
Using the Monitor Column • 151
Viewing User Account Information • 54
Using the Optional Columns in the Navigation
Viewing Your License Key • 37
Pane • 149
Virtual XY Tab • 939
Using the Options Dialog • 752
Volume 1
Using the Parametric Editing Setup Capability •
Device Control • 14
1183
Volume 2
Using the Primary Control Bus Cluster (ISCP
Graphical Navigation • 368
Only) • 535
Volume 3
Using the Routers Folder of a Navigation Pane •
IconMaster Software Control Panel • 509
667
Volume 4
Using the Rules Tab Toolbar • 434
NexioNAV • 561
Using the Rules Table • 434
Volume 5
Using the Signal Monitor Shortcut Menu • 313
NAVIGATOR-INT • 611
Using the Signal Monitor Tool • 312
Volume 6
Using the Software Upgrade Progress Tab • 166
Routing Components • 655
Using the Sources Tab • 677
Using the Status Column • 150 W
Using the Tielines Tab • 680 Web router applications
Using the Transition • 543 adding
Using the Uninstall Program • 35 devices • 1092
Using the Video Streaming Tab on a Control panels • 1093
Dialog Box • 309 users • 1100
Using the Window Menu • 78 assigning configurations • 1102
Using Zoom Tools • 377 deleting users • 1103
editing user information • 1103
Weight • 819
User's Guide Index
What are Magellan CCS Navigator Actions? •

348
What are the Magellan CCS Navigator Licensing
Options? • 347
What is a Magellan CCS Navigator Page? • 348
What is Graphical Navigation? • 347
What is the difference between • 1191
What is the Graphical Navigation Window? •
348
What is the Navigation Pane? • 347
When I deselect a check box for Advanced
options while inserting and deleting rows,
why are my settings not retained? • 1191
When I wild-partitioned my system in
Navigator, and then open it in Database
Editor, my logical sources and destination
tabs look like they are missing data? • 1192
Why am I not able to see status names I have
set for destinations? • 1191
Why can’t I see the physical level(s) index on
the logical source or destination tabs? • 1191
Why do I not see all available levels on my
Sources and Destinations tabs or why are
columns missing? • 1191
Why doesn’t the Insert Options dialog box
appear when I insert a new device type? •
1191
Wild Partitioning • 871, 929, 947, 980, 1155
Windows Message Queuing Requests
Installation CD • 322
Working with Common Controls • 732
Working With Configurations on a NEO Frame •
250
Working with Index Names • 797
Working with Layouts • 79
Working with Levels from the Destinations Tab
• 780
Working with Levels from the Sources Tab • 768
Working with Macros • 457
Working With Presets in a Control Dialog Box •
297
Working With Presets in the Navigation Pane •
298
Working With Salvos • 673
Writing Conventions • 15, 369, 510, 562, 612,
656
Writing Network Information to a CCS Device •
160

Magellan Ccs Navigator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Magellan Ccs Navigator

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Magellan Ccs Navigator

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User's Guide

Magellan CCS Navigator

Support Contact Information

Setting Discovery Options ................................................................................................................ 101

EDGE-DPS575 Gateway Configuration and Control ............................................................................. 237

Setting Signal Monitor Options ........................................................................................................ 315

Volume 2: Graphical Navigation......................................................................... 368

Adding a Text Object ........................................................................................................................ 394

Volume 3: IconMaster Software Control Panel .................................................. 508

Preface .................................................................................................................................................. 509

Volume 4: NexioNAV ......................................................................................... 560

Discovering NEXIO Servers ............................................................................................................... 569

Volume 5: NAVIGATOR-INT ................................................................................ 610

Volume 6: Routing Components ........................................................................ 653

Routing Operations Tools ................................................................................................................. 658

Configuring Panacea Frames ................................................................................................................ 917

Changing Panel Name, ID, or Style ................................................................................................. 1055

Using a Source Preview Panel ........................................................................................................ 1144

Index ................................................................................................................ 1188

Volume 1: Device Control

Term or Convention Description

Code Indicates variables or command-line entries, such as a DOS entry or something

Internet address Indicates a jump to a website or URL

[VersionNo.] Placeholder for a software version number

Obtaining User Manuals

Introduction to Magellan CCS Navigator Device

Figure 1: Magellan CCS Navigator Screen

Magellan CCS Navigator supports the following devices:

• CCS EDGE-DPS575 gateway

Figure 2: Sample Magellan CCS Navigator Pages

Information that is stored on a NAVIGATOR-CLI-licensed system includes:

For more information, see Introduction to NexioNAV (on page 563).

Basic Magellan CCS Navigator System (No Licenses)

Configuring a PC Monitor for Best Display

Required Operating System and Software

See the following topics for more information:

Installing Other Required Software

Software Description File Name and Location

Software Description File Name and Location

Order of Installation for Software and Firmware

Requirements for Using MPEG-4 Streaming

Requirements for Using the Signal Monitor Tool

Preparing the PC for Installation

Before installing Magellan CCS Navigator Software on a PC

Procedure-- Windows 2003

You are now ready to install Magellan CCS Navigator.

Installing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software

To install the Magellan CCS Navigator software, complete these steps:

If Setup Detects No Previous Installations

Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.

If Setup Detects a Previous Installation

Your installation is done. Magellan CCS Navigator is ready to use.

Upgrading from Navigator 5.3 to Navigator 5.4 64-Bit

Configuring SNMP Control

Removing the Magellan CCS Navigator Software

See the following topics for more information:

Using the Add or Remove Programs Application

If you remove a Magellan CCS Navigator Server that has